JP7249039B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

A conventional game machine generally includes main control means for controlling the progress of a game, and effect control means for controlling effects according to commands from the main control means.

Among such gaming machines, there is one that executes variable display of special symbols according to the determination result of determination information, executes variable performance during execution of variable display of special symbols, and outputs performance sound. There was (for example, see patent document 1).

JP 2018-043025 A

However, in the gaming machine as described in the above-mentioned patent document, there is a problem that the interest in the game may be lowered because the game machine does not take into consideration the case where the progress of the performance is stagnant.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a game.

In order to solve the above problems, the present invention provides a gaming machine comprising main control means for controlling progress of a game, and effect control means for controlling effects in accordance with commands from the main control means, wherein the main control The means includes determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player based on the determination information acquired when the acquisition condition is established, and variation for executing variable display of special symbols according to the result of the determination. and a display means, wherein the variable display means performs a cycle variation a plurality of times as the variable display of the special symbols, and then stops and displays the special symbols, and the production control means executes the variable display of the special symbols. It is possible to execute a variable production that performs a variable display of a production pattern and a variable display of a special pattern in response to, and it is possible to output a production sound during the execution of the variable production, and the production pattern is temporary in the variable production. When the stop condition is not satisfied at the predetermined timing of the stop, the temporary stop period of the production pattern, the fluctuation period of the special pattern and the output period of the production sound are extended, and the temporary stop period of the production pattern and the special When the effect sound is output to the end of the sound data during the extension of the symbol variation period , the effect sound is output from the beginning of the sound data even when the special symbol variation display is not executed. When the sound output period is extended and the cycle variation in the next special symbol variation display is started during the extension of the temporary stop period of the effect symbol and the variation period of the special symbol, the special symbol The variable display is continued, and the variable display of the next performance pattern is started from a predetermined position.

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

1 is a front view of a game machine; FIG. It is a perspective view of a portion of the front side of the gaming machine. It is a perspective view of the back side of the gaming machine. It is an exploded perspective view of a game board. It is a figure which shows an example of the block diagram of the whole game machine. It is a diagram illustrating the details of the low-probability time-saving gaming state (time-saving gaming state). It is a figure which shows an example of a big-hit determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of a special design determination table. It is a diagram showing an example of a special figure variation pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of a prior determination table. 4 is a diagram showing an example of various storage areas of a main RAM; FIG. It is a figure which shows the main process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the initial setting process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the setting change process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows RWM clear processing in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the setting confirmation process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the timer interrupt processing in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the input control process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the 1st starting opening detection switch input process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the special figure special electric control processing in a main control board. It is a diagram showing a special symbol storage determination process in the main control board. It is a figure which shows the performance display data setting process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the display information of the information display device in each game area. It is a figure which shows the main process of a production|presentation control part. It is a figure which shows the timer interrupt processing of a production|presentation control part. It is a figure which shows the command analysis process of a production|presentation control part. It is a figure which shows the icon change production|presentation determination process of a production|presentation control part. It is a figure which shows an example of an icon final display mode determination table. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a change scenario determination table; FIG. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a change pattern determination table for a pending icon, and (b) and (c) are diagrams showing an example of a change pattern determination table for the icon. It is a figure which shows the look-ahead continuous production|presentation determination process of a production|presentation control part. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a look-ahead zone effect scenario determination table; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a look-ahead effect production scenario determination table; It is a figure which shows the jackpot announcement production|presentation determination processing of an production|presentation control part. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a dialog announcement pattern determination table; (a) is a diagram showing an example of a character article notice pattern determination table, (b) is a diagram showing an example of a blackout effect pattern determination table, and (c) is a diagram showing an example of a cut-in effect pattern determination table. It is a figure and (d) is a figure which shows an example of a decided effect pattern determination table. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a fixed effect pattern determination table; FIG. It is a figure which shows the main process of an integrated control part. It is a figure which shows the accessory initial process of a lamp|ramp control part. It is a figure which shows the origin return processing of a lamp control part. It is a figure which shows the initial operation process of a lamp control part. It is a figure which shows an example of a board accessory initial motion pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of a frame accessory initial motion pattern determination table. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example when there is no return abnormality in various accessories after power-on; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where the sub-display device has a return abnormality after power is turned on; It is a figure which shows a specific example in case there exists return abnormality in the movable production|presentation apparatus 1 after power-on. It is a figure which shows a specific example in case there exists return abnormality in the movable production|presentation apparatus 2 after power-on. It is a figure which shows a specific example in case there exists return abnormality in a production|presentation button after power-on. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example when there is no restoration abnormality in various accessories after power restoration; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where the sub-display device has a return abnormality after power restoration; It is a figure which shows a specific example in case there exists recovery abnormality in the movable production|presentation apparatus 1 after power supply restoration. It is a figure which shows a specific example in case there exists return abnormality in the movable production|presentation apparatus 2 after a power supply restoration. It is a figure which shows a specific example when there exists return abnormality in a production|presentation button after power supply restoration. It is a diagram showing a specific example in the case that the state after power failure recovery is during variable display of special symbols and with reserved memory. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where a power restoration specifying command cannot be normally received when the power is turned on; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example of restarting power supply only to the main control board after stopping; It is a figure which shows the modification in the case of restarting after stopping only the power supply to a main-control board. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a modification in which the sub-display device has a return abnormality after power is turned on; It is a figure which shows the initial operation|movement aspect of the movable production|presentation apparatus 1, and a specific example of required time. It is a figure which shows the specific example of the production|presentation operation|movement aspect of the movable production|presentation apparatus 1, and required time. It is a figure which shows the specific example of the initial operation mode of the movable production|presentation apparatus 2, and the required time of the production|presentation operation mode. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example of the time required for the initial operation mode and effect operation mode of the sub-display device; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example in which various drive sources are initially operated while settings are being changed; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example of initial operation of various drive sources during preparation for RWM clear; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example of initial operation of various drive sources during setting confirmation; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example of initial operation of various driving sources after setting change; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example of initial operation of various drive sources after RWM clear; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example of initial operation of various drive sources after confirmation of settings; It is a figure which shows the specific example of the variable display of a special design with a special design indicator. It is a figure which shows the example of a display production|presentation for every production|presentation mode. It is a figure which shows the example of a display production|presentation for every production|presentation mode. It is a figure which shows the display production example of the number of reservations. It is a timing chart when the variable production starts from the customer waiting state. FIG. 74 is a diagram showing examples of effects at various timings in FIG. 73; FIG. 74 is a diagram showing examples of effects at various timings in FIG. 73; It is a timing chart in the case of starting winning during the variable production. FIG. 77 is a diagram showing examples of effects at various timings in FIG. 76; It is a timing chart in the case of continuously executing the variable effect. FIG. 79 is a diagram showing examples of effects at various timings in FIG. 78; FIG. 79 is a diagram showing examples of effects at various timings in FIG. 78; FIG. 79 is a diagram showing examples of effects at various timings in FIG. 78; It is a timing chart when a variable effect is started without being able to receive the command at the time of stop normally. 83 is a diagram showing an example of effects at various timings in FIG. 82; FIG. It is a timing chart when the normal fluctuation performance ends and the customer waits. 85 is a diagram showing examples of effects at various timings in FIG. 84. FIG. 85 is a diagram showing examples of effects at various timings in FIG. 84. FIG. It is a timing chart when the stop time command cannot be received normally and the end of the normal fluctuation effect is delayed. FIG. 88 is a diagram showing examples of effects at various timings in FIG. 87; It is a timing chart in the case of ending the losing normal reach fluctuation effect and entering a customer waiting state. FIG. 90 is a diagram showing examples of effects at various timings in FIG. 89; FIG. 90 is a diagram showing examples of effects at various timings in FIG. 89; It is a timing chart when a variable effect is executed after the loss SPSP ready-to-win effect ends. FIG. 93 is a diagram showing examples of effects at various timings in FIG. 92; FIG. 93 is a diagram showing examples of effects at various timings in FIG. 92; It is a figure which shows the example of the production|presentation of the said icon disappearance production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the example of the production|presentation of the said icon disappearance production|presentation. It is a figure which shows a timing chart when a big-hit game is performed after a big-hit SPSP reach fluctuation production is complete|finished. FIG. 98 is a diagram showing examples of effects at various timings in FIG. 97; FIG. 98 is a diagram showing examples of effects at various timings in FIG. 97; 99. It is a figure which shows the modification of FIG.97 and FIG.99. It is a figure which shows the example of the production|presentation of the said icon and a starting port lamp. It is a figure which shows the timing chart in the case of restoring from the power interruption which generate|occur|produced during fluctuation|variation production|presentation. 103 is a diagram showing examples of effects at various timings in FIG. 102. FIG. 103 is a diagram showing examples of effects at various timings in FIG. 102. FIG. 103 is a diagram showing examples of effects at various timings in FIG. 102. FIG. It is a diagram showing a timing chart when the command at the start could not be received normally during the look-ahead effect. FIG. 107 is a diagram showing examples of effects at various timings in FIG. 106; FIG. 107 is a diagram showing examples of effects at various timings in FIG. 106; FIG. 10 is a timing chart when a power-on designation command is received while a menu image is being displayed; FIG. 109 is a diagram showing examples of effects at various timings in FIG. 109; It is a figure which shows a timing chart when a big-hit game is performed after a big-hit SPSP reach fluctuation production is complete|finished. 112 is a diagram showing an example of effects at various timings in FIG. 111; FIG. It is a diagram showing a timing chart when a jackpot game is executed after the end of the variable production accompanying the pattern promotion production or revival production. 114 is a diagram showing an example of effects at various timings in FIG. 113. FIG. 114 is a diagram showing an example of effects at various timings in FIG. 113. FIG. It is a figure which shows a timing chart in case a fluctuation production|presentation is performed after loss SPSP ready-to-win fluctuation production|presentation is complete|finished. It is a figure which shows a timing chart when a big-hit game is performed after a big-hit SPSP reach fluctuation production is complete|finished. 118 is a diagram showing an example of effects at various timings in FIG. 117; FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an example of normal background image data (mode A); It is a figure which shows a timing chart when a big-hit game is performed after a big-hit SPSP reach fluctuation production is complete|finished. 121 is a diagram showing an example of effects at various timings in FIG. 120; FIG. 121 is a diagram showing an example of effects at various timings in FIG. 120; FIG. It is a figure which shows a timing chart when operation of an operation means is performed. It is a figure which shows a timing chart when operation of an operation means is performed. It is a figure which shows a timing chart when operation of an operation means is performed. It is a figure which shows a timing chart (1/2) when vibration production|presentation generate|occur|produces in each scene of variable production|presentation. It is a figure which shows a timing chart (2/2) when vibration production|presentation generate|occur|produces in each scene of variable production|presentation. It is a figure which shows a timing chart when operation of an operation means is performed. It is a figure which shows a timing chart when operation of an operation means is performed. It is a figure which shows a timing chart when operation of an operation means is performed. 131 is a diagram showing examples of effects at various timings in FIG. 130. FIG. It is a figure which shows the timing chart in a specific fluctuation|variation production|presentation pattern. It is a figure which shows a timing chart in case the advance notice of a dialogue occurs in variable production|presentation. It is a diagram showing a timing chart when a dialogue announcement and a fixed effect occur in the variable effect. It is a figure which shows a timing chart when operation of an operation means is performed. 136 is a diagram showing examples of effects at various timings in FIG. 135. FIG. It is a figure which shows the specific example in which the state after power interruption recovery is during the variable display of a special design. It is a figure which shows the specific example in which the state after power interruption recovery is during the variable display of a special design. It is a timing chart in the case where the variable production starts during the customer waiting demonstration production. FIG. 139 is a diagram showing examples of effects at various timings in FIG. 139; FIG. 139 is a diagram showing examples of effects at various timings in FIG. 139; FIG. 139 is a diagram showing examples of effects at various timings in FIG. 139; It is a timing chart in the case of recovering from the power cut that occurred during the fluctuation production. FIG. 144 is a diagram showing examples of effects at various timings in FIG. 143; It is a figure which shows the specific example which concerns on command exchange of normal fluctuation|variation production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the specific example which concerns on the command exchange of a loss SPSP reach fluctuation production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the specific example which concerns on the command transfer of a jackpot SPSP reach fluctuation production. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example of command exchange during the look-ahead zone effect; FIG. 10 is a timing chart when icons are redisplayed after being hidden; FIG. FIG. 149 is a diagram showing examples of effects at various timings in FIG. 149; FIG. 149 is a diagram showing examples of effects at various timings in FIG. 149; It is a figure which shows the specific example of the operation state of the pending|holding icon before and behind icon change production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the specific example of the operation state of the said icon before and behind icon change production|presentation. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a modification of the action states of the icons before and after the icon change effect;

(First embodiment)
A first embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described below with reference to the drawings.

(Configuration of gaming machine)
First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 3, the configuration of the gaming machine 1 according to the embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described. 1 is a front view of the gaming machine 1, FIG. 2 is a perspective view of a part of the front side of the gaming machine 1, and FIG.

The gaming machine 1 includes an outer frame 2, a game board mounting frame 3 rotatably supported with respect to the outer frame 2, a glass frame 4 rotatably supported with respect to the game board mounting frame 3, A game board 5 having a game area 5a in which game balls (game media) flow down is provided.

The outer frame 2 has a rectangular base frame 2a whose central portion is open in the front-rear direction, and a decorative plate 2b attached to the lower front surface of the base frame 2a. ).

The game board mounting frame 3 is detachably connected to the outer frame 2 via a first hinge mechanism 6 at one end side in the horizontal direction, and is rotatably supported with the first hinge mechanism 6 as a fulcrum. It is Therefore, when the game board mounting frame 3 is rotated with respect to the outer frame 2 like a door, the back side of the game board mounting frame 3 is exposed forward, and various devices provided on the back side of the game board mounting frame 3 are exposed. maintenance can be performed.

The glass frame 4 is detachably connected to the game board mounting frame 3 via a second hinge mechanism 7 at one end side in the horizontal direction, and is rotatably supported with the second hinge mechanism 7 as a fulcrum. there is Therefore, when the glass frame 4 is rotated with respect to the game board mounting frame 3 like a door, the game area 5a of the game board 5 and the front part of the game board mounting frame 3 can be opened and closed.

An opening 8 (window) opening in the front-rear direction is formed in a substantially central portion near the top of the glass frame 4, and a transparent member 8a (such as a glass plate or an acrylic plate) is formed so as to cover the opening 8 from the rear. is attached, and the game area 5a can be visually recognized through the opening 8 and the transparent member 8a.

Around the opening 8 of the glass frame 4, an audio output device 9 made up of a speaker, a frame lighting device 10 having a plurality of decorative LEDs, and a payout device 95 (to be described later) are dispensed based on the fulfillment of the granting conditions. an upper plate 11 for storing a plurality of game balls such as game balls, a lower plate 12 for receiving and storing game balls that have not entered the upper plate 11 and flowed into an overflow ball flow path described later; A shooting operation device 13 is provided which can be operated to shoot the ball.

The audio output devices 9 are provided at two locations above the glass frame 4 with a space therebetween, and produce sound (music, voice) effects by outputting BGM (background music), SE (sound effects), and the like. It's like A plurality of frame lighting devices 10 are provided around the opening 8, and perform illumination effects by changing the light irradiation direction and emission color of each lamp (LED). The frame illumination device 10 is also provided with a notification LED 10a which is controlled to light/blink when the glass frame 4 is opened or when a payout abnormality occurs such that game balls cannot be paid out from the payout device 95.

The upper plate 11 has a bottom surface of a game ball storage portion 11a which is inclined downward toward the direction side (right direction) of the shooting operation device 13, and a ball feed solenoid 11b is provided at the end of the downward inclination. . When the game balls stored in the storage portion 11a of the upper tray 11 flow down and reach the ball feed solenoid 11b, the game balls are sent one by one toward the game board mounting frame 3 by the operation of the ball feed solenoid 11b.

In addition, on the front side of the center of the upper plate 11, a production button device 16 and a selection button device 18 (Fig. 1 or 2) function as input devices for performing determination operations and selection operations related to various effects described later. ) are arranged side by side.

The production button device 16 includes a production button 17 capable of performing a decision operation (operation input), a production button detection switch 17a for detecting the operation of the production button 17, and a normal state and a normal state of the production button 17. A button driving device 17b equipped with a button driving motor for changing to a projecting state located above and a button vibration motor for changing the effect button 17 between a normal state and a vibration state in which it vibrates in a predetermined manner, and A production button light emission LED 17c is provided for changing the production button 17 between a light-off state and a lighting state in which light is emitted in a predetermined mode, so that the player can input predetermined information to the game machine 1.例文帳に追加

In this embodiment, the button driving device 17b is configured to vibrate the production button 17. However, for example, if another operation means (for example, production lever) is provided in addition to the production button 17, the production lever It may vibrate.
Also, the cross key 19 may vibrate.
Also, not only the operation means, but also a decorative member (for example, one imitating a character) provided at a position that can be touched by the player may vibrate.

The selection button device 18 includes a cross key 19 (up button 191A, left button 192A, down button 193A, right button 194A) that can perform operations such as selection, and a cross key for detecting the operation of the cross key 19. A key detection switch 19a (see FIG. 5) is provided so that the player can input predetermined information to the gaming machine 1. FIG.

In addition, a lending operation unit 20 is provided on the right side of the upper tray 11 for lending game balls and returning a storage medium such as a card storing the remaining money. When the lending button 20a of the lending operation unit 20 is operated, the ball lending machine (not shown) installed side by side with the game machine 1 subtracts the remaining money stored in the storage medium and lends the game balls. When the return button 20b of the rental operation unit 20 is operated, the storage medium is returned from the ball rental machine (not shown).

Between the upper tray 11 and the lower tray 12, an overflow ball flow path (not shown) is formed for receiving game balls that do not fit into the upper tray 11 and guiding them to the lower tray 12. - 特許庁In addition, a full detection switch 32a (see FIG. 5) for detecting the occurrence of a plate full error when the lower tray 12 is full of game balls is provided in the middle of the overflow ball flow path. While the full state is detected, the payout of game balls by the payout device 95, which will be described later, is stopped.

The shooting operation device 13 includes a base 14 fixed to the glass frame 4, a shooting handle 15 rotatably provided on the base 14, and a touch sensor for detecting that the player's hand touches the shooting handle 15. 15a (see FIG. 5) and a firing volume 15b (see FIG. 5) consisting of a variable resistor whose resistance value changes according to the rotation angle of the firing handle 15 are provided. When the touch sensor 15a detects that the player's hand is touching the shooting handle 15, the ball sending solenoid 11b is activated to send game balls one by one.

The game board mounting frame 3 includes a game board mounting portion (not shown) for mounting the game board 5, a shooting device 26 (see FIG. 5) for shooting game balls toward the game area 5a, and a game board. A lock mechanism 27 for locking the mounting frame 3 and the glass frame 4 in a closed state, and an open detection switch 31a (see FIG. 5) for detecting opening (opening/closing) of the glass frame 4 are provided.

The game board mounting portion is formed in a recessed chamber shape having an open front at substantially the center near the upper portion of the game board mounting frame 3 so that the game board 5 can be accommodated from the front. An opening that opens in the front-rear direction is provided at the back of the concave chamber of the game board mounting portion, and various devices provided on the back side of the game board 5 face the game machine 1 through this opening. .

The shooting device 26 includes a shooting member for shooting a game ball, a shooting solenoid 28b (see FIG. 5) for driving the shooting member, and a shooting device that tilts upward from the shooting member toward the lower left end of the game board. A rail and a stopper for stopping a game ball are provided at a launch position that is the inclined lower end of the launch rail. Then, the game ball sent to the shooting position by the ball sending solenoid 11b (see FIG. 5) is hit toward the game area 5a by the action of the hitting member.

The lock mechanism 27 is provided on the right side of the game board mounting portion 25 so that the front end portion of the cylinder in which the keyhole is formed is exposed to the front side of the glass frame 4 . When a special key is inserted into the keyhole of the cylinder and rotated in one direction, the lock of the game board mounting frame 3 is released and the game board mounting frame 3 can be opened and closed, and when rotated in the other direction, the glass frame is rotated. 4 is unlocked and the glass frame 4 can be opened and closed.

A curved inner rail 35 and an outer rail 36 are provided at a position near the outer edge of the game board 5, and a game area 5a in which a game ball can flow down is surrounded by the inner rail 35 and the outer rail 36. is formed. A shot ball guide path 38 is formed between the inner rail 35 and the outer rail 36 to guide the game ball shot by the shooting device 26 to the upstream portion of the game area 5a. In addition, an out port 39 is formed at the most downstream part of the game area 5a for guiding the game balls that have flowed down to outside the game area (recovery part of the game board mounting frame 3).

Approximately in the center of the game area 5a, a frame-shaped decoration frame 40, which is called a center case, is provided to restrict entry of the game ball into the inside. The left game area is divided into a left game area where the shot game balls flow down and a right game area where the game balls shot with a second projectile force stronger than the first projectile flow. communicate with each other below the decorative frame 40.

A warp device 41 is provided on the left side of the decorative frame 40 to introduce the game balls flowing down the left side game area into the decorative frame 40 , and the warp device 41 moves the interior of the decorative frame 40 below the decorative frame 40 . A stage portion 42 is provided for rolling the game balls introduced into the frame 40 and causing them to flow downward.

Below the left side of the decorative frame 40, three general winning holes 43 in which game balls can always win a prize (enter a ball) are provided at intervals, and below the right side of the decorative frame 40, a game One general winning hole 43 in which a ball can always win a prize (enter a ball) is provided. When the game balls that have won (entered) the general winning hole 43 are detected by the general winning hole detection switch 43a (see FIG. 5) (granting conditions are satisfied), a predetermined number (for example, 5) of game balls are released. A payout device 95 (see FIG. 3) pays out to the upper tray 11 as prize balls (given prize value).

Below the stage portion 42, there is provided a first starting port 45 (first special symbol starting winning region) in which the game ball can always win (entering the ball). When the played game ball is detected by the first start hole detection switch 45a (see FIG. 5) (granting condition is satisfied), a predetermined number of game balls (for example, three) are released from the payout device 95 (see FIG. 3). The ball is paid out to the upper tray 11 as a prize ball (given prize value). In addition, a right for performing a jackpot determination whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) is granted (special figure determination information, which will be described later, is stored).

Below the decorative frame 40 and obliquely below the first starting port 45, it is impossible or impossible to win a game ball (entering a ball) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (that a win is won in the hit determination described later). A variable starter 46 is provided which can be converted from a difficult closed state to an easy open state or a game ball winning state.

The variable starting part 46 has an upper surface inclined downward in the left-right direction (left side in FIG. 1) to serve as a flow path for game balls, and a second starting opening opening and closing member 48 that can move in the front-rear direction. A second starting opening 47 (starting winning area of the second special symbol) that opens upward directly below the starting opening opening/closing member 48, and a second opening that detects a game ball that has won (entered) the second starting opening 47 By moving the start opening detection switch 47a (see FIG. 5) and the second start opening opening/closing member 48 forward (the prize winning regulation position), the second start opening 47 is closed and the second start opening is closed. A second starting port opening/closing solenoid 48b (see FIG. 5) is provided for converting the second starting port 47 to the open state by moving the opening/closing member 48 toward the rear (winning position).

Then, when the game ball enters the second starting port 47 that is in the open state during the auxiliary game described later and is detected by the second starting port detection switch 47a (see FIG. 5) (granting conditions are established), A predetermined number of game balls (for example, two) are paid out to the upper tray 11 from a payout device 95 (see FIG. 3) as prize balls (given prize value). In addition, a right for performing a jackpot determination whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) is granted (special figure determination information, which will be described later, is stored).

In the right game area which is the right side of the decorative frame 40, a normal figure gate 44 (normal figure starting area) through which game balls can always pass is provided, and a game ball that has passed the normal figure gate 44 is detected by a gate detection switch 44a. When detected in , the prize ball is not granted, but the right to perform the auxiliary game determination (hit determination) of whether or not to execute the winning game is granted (general figure determination information described later is stored).

Under the general pattern gate 44, based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (determined as a big hit in the jackpot determination), a closed state where it is impossible or difficult to win a game ball (entering a ball) is possible or easy to open. A first variable winning section 49 (first variable winning device) that can be converted to a state is provided.

The first variable winning portion 49 (first variable winning device) has an upper surface inclined downward in the left-right direction (right side in the figure) to serve as a flow path for game balls (a part of the bottom surface of the central flow path 91b is ), a first big winning opening opening/closing member 51 that can move in the front-rear direction, and a first big winning opening 50 (winning area) that opens upward directly below the first big winning opening opening/closing member 51, By moving the first big winning hole detection switch 50a for detecting the game ball that has won (entered) the first big winning hole 50 and the first big winning hole opening/closing member 51 toward the front (winning regulation position) For converting the first big winning opening 50 to the closed state and moving the first big winning opening opening/closing member 51 toward the rear (winning position) to convert the first big winning opening 50 to the open state. A first big prize opening opening/closing solenoid 51b (see FIG. 5) is provided.

When the first big winning opening opening/closing member 51 moves backward during a jackpot game to be described later and the first big winning opening opening/closing member 50 is changed from the closed state to the open state, the upper surface of the first big winning opening opening/closing member 51 When the game ball flowing down or the game ball reaching the first big winning hole 50 enters the first big winning hole 50 and is detected by the first big winning hole detection switch 50a, a predetermined number of Game balls (for example, 10 game balls) are paid out to the upper tray 11 as prize balls from a payout device 95 (see FIG. 3).

Below the first variable prize winning section 49, it is possible or easy to win from a closed state where it is impossible or difficult to win a game ball (entering a ball) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (determined as a big hit in the jackpot determination). A second variable winning section 55 (second variable winning device) that can be converted to an open state is provided.

The second variable winning portion 55 (second variable winning device) has an upper surface inclined downward in the left-right direction (left side in the drawing), thereby forming a flow path for game balls (one part of the bottom surface of the first downstream flow path 91e). ), a second large prize winning opening opening/closing member 57 that can move in the front-rear direction, and a second large winning opening opening/closing member 56 that opens upward directly below the second large winning opening opening/closing member 57 (winning area). Then, the second big winning hole detection switch 56a for detecting a game ball that has won (entered) the second big winning hole 56 and the second big winning hole opening/closing member 57 are moved forward (winning regulation position). As a result, the second large winning opening 56 is converted to the closed state, and the second large winning opening opening/closing member 57 is moved toward the rear (winning position) to convert the second large winning opening 56 to the open state. A second big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b (see FIG. 5) is provided for this purpose.

Then, when the second big winning opening opening/closing member 57 moves backward during the jackpot game and the second big winning opening opening/closing member 56 is changed from the closed state to the open state, the upper surface of the second big winning opening opening/closing member 57 flows down. When the game ball that has been playing or the game ball that has reached the second big winning hole 56 enters the second big winning hole 56 and is detected by the second big winning hole detection switch 56a, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 ) are paid out to the upper tray 11 as prize balls from a payout device 95 (see FIG. 3).

The game ball launched into the left game area either flows down along the outer edge of the decorative frame 40, or flows into the warp device 41 and then flows down through the stage section 42, and is provided below the decorative frame 40. Winning any of the three general prize winning openings 43 and the first starting opening 45, or flowing into the out opening 39. Therefore, the normal figure gate 44 provided in the right game area, the general winning opening 43, the first variable winning part 49 (first big winning part 50) and the second variable winning part 55 (second big winning part 56) winning ( pass).

In addition, the game ball shot to the right game area passes through the upstream flow path 91a, the central flow path 91b (general map gate 44), the left flow path 91c, the right flow path 91d, the first downstream flow path 91e, the 2 downstream flow path 91f etc., one general winning opening 43 provided in the right game area, variable starting part 46 (second starting opening 47), first variable winning part 49 (first big winning opening 50), Either the second variable winning portion 55 (the second big winning port 56 ) is won, or the player enters the out port 39 . Therefore, there is no chance of winning the general prize winning opening 43 and the first start opening 45 provided in the left game area.

On the back side of the game board 5, the game balls that have won the general winning opening 43, the first starting opening 45, the second starting opening 47, the first big winning opening 50 and the second big winning opening 56, and the out opening 39 An out-ball flow path is provided for receiving and gathering out-balls made up of inflowing game balls to flow down, and an out-ball detection switch 39a (see FIG. 5) is provided at the most downstream portion of the out-ball flow path. The game ball detected by the out ball detection switch 39a is discharged to the outside of the game machine 1 (island facility) from the discharge port on the back side of the game machine 1. FIG.

Outside the game area 5a, there are a symbol display device consisting of a first special symbol display device 60, a second special symbol display device 61 and a normal symbol display device 62, a first special symbol reservation display device 63 and a second special symbol reservation device. A holding display device consisting of a display device 64 and a normal symbol holding display device 65, a main information display device 59 consisting of a round number display device 66, a right hitting display device 67 and a state confirmation display device 68 are provided. The main information display 59 is basically composed of LEDs, and is dynamically illuminated.

The first special symbol display device 60 is a variable display device for displaying (notifying) the result of the first special symbol jackpot determination performed based on the winning (entrance) of the game ball to the first starting port 45. , The second special symbol display device 61 is a variable display device for displaying (notifying) the result of the second special symbol jackpot determination performed based on the winning of the game ball into the second starting port 47 (entering the ball). The normal symbol display 62 is a variable display for displaying (notifying) the result of the normal symbol hit determination performed based on the passage (entrance) of the game ball to the normal symbol gate 44 .

The jackpot determination is the special figure determination information (random number for jackpot determination, random number for special symbol determination, random number for reach determination Numerical value, random number for special figure fluctuation pattern determination, etc.) is acquired, and it corresponds to determining whether or not to execute a jackpot game based on the acquired special figure determination information.

Then, when a big hit determination is made based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45, the first special symbol display device 60 performs a variable display of the first special symbol, and the determination result is reported after the lapse of a predetermined time. Stop display of the first special symbol is performed. In addition, when a big hit determination is made based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 47, the second special symbol display device 61 performs a variable display of the second special symbol, and the determination result is notified after the lapse of a predetermined time. Stop display of the second special symbol is performed.

The first special symbol display device 60 and the second special symbol display device 61 are respectively composed of eight LEDs, and the lighting mode of the LEDs changes (moving lighting) at a predetermined cycle (32 ms) in the variable display of each special symbol. do. When focusing on only one LED, it blinks at a cycle of 256 ms (32 ms on→224 ms off). Then, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the LED lights up in a mode (big hit mode, losing mode) for notifying the result of the big hit determination.

In addition, in this embodiment, "jackpot" means a state in which execution of a jackpot game (special game) is determined in the jackpot determination. The "jackpot game" is a round game in which the big winning holes (first big winning hole 50, second big winning hole 56) are changed from the closed state to the open state in a predetermined manner, and a predetermined number of times ( For example, 4 times, 10 times, etc.), it means a game state that is advantageous for a player who can easily win prize balls.

In addition, although the maximum number of opening times and the maximum opening time of the big winning mouth (first big winning mouth 50, second big winning mouth 56) in each round game are predetermined, Even so, when a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10) enter the big winning hole, one round game ends. In addition, in this embodiment, it is possible to execute any one of a plurality of types of jackpot games (special games) having different degrees of advantage for the player.

Auxiliary game determination is based on the passage of the game ball to the normal pattern gate 44 (entrance ball), normal pattern determination information (random number for hit determination, random value for normal pattern determination, random value for normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination, etc.) It corresponds to determining whether or not to execute the auxiliary game based on the obtained general pattern determination information. It should be noted that when the auxiliary game determination is performed, the normal symbol display device 62 performs normal symbol fluctuation display, and after a predetermined time elapses, the normal symbol stop display for notifying the determination result is performed.

The normal symbol display device 62 is composed of three LEDs, and the LEDs blink at predetermined intervals or in order in the normal symbol variation display. Then, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, the LED lights up in a mode (hitting mode or losing mode) for notifying the result of the auxiliary game determination.

It should be noted that the term "hit" in the present embodiment refers to a state in which it is determined that an auxiliary game (hitting game) is to be executed in the auxiliary game determination. "Auxiliary game" refers to a game state in which the second starting port 47 is opened in a predetermined manner.

In addition, although the maximum number of opening times and maximum opening time of the second starting port 47 in the auxiliary game (winning game) are predetermined, even before reaching the maximum opening number and maximum opening time, the second starting port 47 When a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10) win a prize (entering a ball), the auxiliary game (hitting game) ends. In other words, the "auxiliary game" is a game state in which the conditions for starting the variable display of the second special symbols are likely to be satisfied. In addition, in the present embodiment, a plurality of types of auxiliary games (hitting games) having different degrees of advantage for the player are provided.

The first special symbol reservation display device 63 is composed of two LEDs, and is the number of special symbol determination information (first reservation) stored when the game ball wins (enters) the first start port 45. It is for displaying a certain first pending number (U1), and lights up or flashes in a manner indicating the number of first pending. It should be noted that although up to four first reservations are stored, the number may be less or more than four.

The second special symbol reservation display device 64 is composed of two LEDs, and is the number of special symbol determination information (second reservation) stored when the game ball wins (enters) the second start port 47. It is for displaying a certain number of second reservations (U2), and lights up or blinks in a manner indicating the number of second reservations. It should be noted that although up to four second reservations are stored, the number may be less or more than four, and the second reservations may not be stored.

The normal pattern reservation display 65 is composed of two LEDs, and is the number of normal pattern determination information (normal pattern reservation) stored when the game ball wins (passes) in the normal pattern gate 44. It is for displaying the number, and it lights up or flashes in a manner that indicates the number of reserved figures. It should be noted that, although the maximum number of normal pattern reservations is stored up to 4, it may be less than or greater than 4, and the normal pattern reservations may not be stored.

Incidentally, the first special symbol display 60 and/or the second special symbol display 61 can be composed of 7-segment LEDs. For example, when it is judged as a big hit in the big hit judgment, numbers such as "3" and "7" are stopped and displayed, and when it is judged as a loss, "-" is stopped and displayed as a variable display. It is preferable to repeat turning off and "-" inside.

The round number indicator 66 is composed of six LEDs and is for displaying the number of rounds when a jackpot state (special game) occurs. is started, the lighting of the LED is continued during the jackpot game, and the LED is turned off when the jackpot game ends. For example, if the jackpot game has four rounds, only the leftmost LED lights up, and if the jackpot game has ten rounds, all the LEDs light up.

The right-handed display 67 is composed of one LED, and displays a right-handed display that prompts the user to shoot a game ball toward the right game area (so-called right-handed) during a jackpot state (special game) or a time-saving game state. It is for display, and the LED lights up during the jackpot state (special game) and during the time-saving game state.

The status confirmation display 68 is composed of one LED and is for indicating that a setting change mode or a setting confirmation mode, which will be described later, is set. Lighting of the LED is started, and the LED is turned off when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends. Since the state confirmation display 68 is provided on the front (surface) of the game machine in this way, it is possible to easily confirm whether or not the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is set. . The installation position of the status confirmation display 68 may be the front (surface) of the game machine 1, and may be installed in other places.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the same display mode (lighting display) is displayed regardless of whether the mode is set to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. can be displayed if possible. For example, the state confirmation display 68 may be illuminated in the setting change mode, and the state confirmation display 68 may be blinked in the setting confirmation mode, or vice versa.

Also, in this embodiment, the state confirmation display 68 is provided as a dedicated display to indicate that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is set, but it may also be used as another display. For example, in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, the first special symbol display device 60, the second special symbol display device 61, the first special symbol reservation display device 63, the second special symbol reservation display device 64, the round number display device 66, right-handed indicators 67, etc. are off, so one or more LEDs of these indicators may be illuminated.

Inside the game area 5a, there are a sub-first fluctuation display 81, a sub-second fluctuation display 82, a sub-first holding display 83, a sub-second holding display 84, a sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85, a sub-normal A sub information display 80 consisting of a drawing hold display 86 and a sub right hitting display 87 is provided. The sub-information display 80 is basically composed of an LED, and is dynamically lit. The sub-information display 80 is not provided with a display such as the status confirmation display 68 that indicates that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is set, which will be described later.

The first sub-variation display 81 is for displaying (notifying) whether or not the first special symbol is being variably displayed, and the second sub-variation display 82 is for variably displaying the second special symbol. It is for displaying (announcing) whether or not it is inside, and each is configured by one LED. Then, when the variable display of the corresponding special symbol is started, the LED flashes at a predetermined cycle (1 second) (0.5 seconds on → 0.5 seconds off), and when the corresponding special symbol is stopped and displayed, it lights up. do.

It should be noted that the first sub-variation display 81 and the second sub-variation display 82 may be used to notify the result of the special symbol jackpot determination. In this case, it is preferable that the LED is turned on in the case of a big win, and the LED is turned off in the case of a loss.

The sub-first pending display 83 is for displaying the number of first pending information (first pending number) described later, and the second sub-holding display 84 is for displaying the number of second pending information ( second pending number), each consisting of two LEDs. Then, when the number of reservations is "0", the left and right LEDs are turned off, when the number of reservations is "1", the left LED is turned on and the right LED is turned off, and when the number of reservations is "2" The left and right LEDs light up, the left LED blinks and the right LED blinks when the number of reservations is "3", and the left and right LEDs blink when the number of reservations is "4".

The sub normal figure fluctuation display 85 is for displaying (notifying) the result of the winning lottery, and is composed of one LED. Then, when the variable display of normal symbols is started, the LED blinks (variable display) at predetermined intervals. Then, when the normal symbols are stop-displayed, the mode indicating the result of the winning lottery (lighting up in the case of winning, light-out in the case of losing) is stop-displayed.

In addition, in the sub-normal pattern fluctuation display device 85, so that only whether or not the normal pattern is being displayed fluctuating can be grasped, it blinks during the normal pattern fluctuation display, and when it is stopped, it lights up or turns off. may

The sub-normal pattern reservation display 86 is for displaying the number of normal pattern reservation memories (normal pattern reservation number), and is composed of two LEDs. Then, the left and right LEDs are turned off when the number of normal figure reservations is "0", and when the number of normal figure reservations is "1", the LED on the left side lights up and the LED on the right side goes out, and the number of normal figure reservations is When the number is "2", the LED on the left side blinks and the LED on the right side lights up.

The sub-right-handed display 87 is for prompting the player to shoot a game ball toward the right side of the game area 5a (so-called right-handed), and is composed of one LED. Then, the LED lights during the jackpot state (special game) and the time-saving game state, and the LED turns off during the other game states.

A main display device 70 (first image display device) consisting of a liquid crystal display is provided in the inner part of the production space 40a defined inside the decorative frame 40, and is located in the lower part of the production space 40a and is the main display device. A sub-display device 71 (second image display device) consisting of a liquid crystal display formed smaller in size and display area than the main display device 70 is provided in front of 70, and an operation display device 71 is provided above the rendering space 40a. A first movable effect device 73 for executing effects is provided, and a second movable effect device 75 for executing action effects is provided on the left side of the effect space 40a.

The main display device 70 and the sub display device 71 display various effects in accordance with the progress of the game. As the effect display, a customer waiting demonstration effect performed while the variable display of the special symbols is not executed, and a variable display of the effect symbol 70a performed during the execution of the variable display of the special symbols (pre-variation operation, update variation). There are a variation performance, a special symbol TZ (so-called fourth symbol) variable display (update variation) performed during execution of the special symbol variation display, and a big win performance performed during the execution of the jackpot game.

Also, the sub-display device 71 can be moved by a liquid crystal moving device (not shown) composed of a solenoid, a motor, etc. during execution of a variable effect on the main display device 70 to perform a moving effect. .

Specifically, it moves vertically (raises) between a standby position (lower position) located near the end of the main display device 70 and a production position (upper position) located near the center of the main display device 70. , descending) to perform a moving effect. In addition, it may be vertically swung at the standby position (lower position) or the effect position (upper position), or may be vertically swung at an intermediate position between the standby position and the effect position. . Further, it may be positioned (stayed) at the effect position (upper position) for a predetermined time, or may perform a predetermined effect operation (for example, rotation) at the effect position (upper position). Further, the direction of movement of the sub-display device 71 (second image display device) may be the left-right direction or the front-rear direction, or may be configured such that the movement effect is performed by operating the effect button 17 . The sub-display device 71 does not necessarily have to be provided, and a movable effect device (movable accessory) that moves up and down may be provided at the position where the sub-display device 71 is provided.

The display unit (effective display area) of the main display device 70 (first image display device) includes a variable display area for displaying three production patterns 70a (left pattern, middle pattern, right pattern), and a variable production pattern. A mode display area and the like are formed to indicate an effect mode to be executed.

In addition, the effect pattern 70a is composed of, for example, patterns showing numbers from "1" to "9", and the variable display of special patterns executed by the first special pattern display device 60 and the second special pattern display device 61 is performed. The variable display is started in response to the start of the special symbols, and the stop display is performed in response to the stop of the variable display of the special symbols. As the effect pattern 70a, patterns representing alphabets such as "A" to "F" may be used.

The performance pattern 70a is stop-displayed for a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.5 seconds) in a mode (losing mode, jackpot mode) for notifying the result of the big hit determination. The jackpot mode is a combination of the same effect symbols 70a such as "777" and "555", and the losing mode is other modes.

The variable display mode of the effect pattern 70a is scrolling in the vertical direction, but it may be scrolled in the horizontal direction, or may be switched on the spot or rotated (rotated). good.

In addition, during the variable display (variable effect) of the effect pattern 70a, various effect images such as background images and characters, movies, etc. are displayed on the main display device 70 and the sub display device 71 according to the result of the big hit determination. By doing so, the player's expectation for the execution of the jackpot game (special game) is heightened.

The main display device 70 has a first reserved icon display area 70B for displaying the number of first reserved icons (first reserved information) corresponding to the first reserved number (U1) in the normal game state, which will be described later, and a Second pending icon display area 70D for displaying the number of second pending icons (second pending information) corresponding to the second pending number (U2) in the time saving game state, and that the variable effect is being executed The icon display area 70C for displaying the icon (execution information) shown, the first pending number display area SA for numerically displaying the first pending number (U1), and the second pending number (U2) A second reserved number display area SB and the like for displaying are formed.

The first pending icon display area 70B includes a first display section 70B1 (first area), a second display section 70B2 (second area), and a third display section 70B3 (third area) from the side closer to the icon display area 70C. , and the fourth display portion 70B4 (fourth area), and the number of first pending icons corresponding to the first pending number (U1) is displayed in the first display portion 70B1 to the fourth display portion 70B4. Is displayed.

Specifically, the first display portion 70B1 displays the first suspension icon indicating the first suspension information in which the variable display of the first special symbol is executed first, and the second display portion 70B2 displays the second A first pending icon indicating the first pending information in which the variable display of the first special symbol is executed is displayed in the third display portion 70B3, and the third display portion 70B3 is the first icon in which the variable display of the first special symbol is executed. A first pending icon indicating the pending information is displayed, and the fourth display portion 70B4 displays a first pending icon indicating the first pending information in which the variable display of the first special symbol is executed fourth.

The second pending icon display area 70D includes, from the left, a first display portion 70D1 (first area), a second display portion 70D2 (second area), a third display portion 70D3 (third area), a fourth display portion 70D4 ( 4th area), and the number of second pending icons corresponding to the second pending number (U2) is displayed in the first display portion 70D1 to the fourth display portion 70D4.

Specifically, the first display portion 70D1 displays the second pending icon indicating the second pending memory in which the variable display of the second special symbol is executed first, and the second display portion 70D2 displays the second In the third display portion 70D3, a second holding icon indicating the second holding memory in which the variable display of the second special symbol is executed is displayed, and in the third display portion 70D3, the second special symbol in which the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. A second pending icon indicating a pending memory is displayed, and the fourth display portion 70D4 displays a second pending icon indicating a second pending memory in which the variable display of the second special symbol is executed fourth.

The icon display area 70C is formed directly above the pedestal image for clearly distinguishing it from the first reserved icon display area 70B and the second reserved icon display area 70D. The icon is displayed as follows.

Specifically, with the start of the variable display of the first special symbol (effect symbol 70a), the first suspended icons displayed in the first suspended icon display area 70B move toward the icon display area 70C one by one. By moving (shifting), the first pending icon displayed in the first display portion 70B1 is moved (shifted) to the icon display area 70C to become the icon, and the variable display of the first special symbol (effect symbol 70a). The icon disappears (deletes) at the end of In other words, a disappearing effect (erasing effect) of the icon is performed.

Also, with the start of the variable display of the second special symbol (effect symbol 70a), the second suspended icon displayed in the second suspended icon display area 70D moves one by one (shift ), and the second pending icon displayed in the first display unit 70D1 moves (shifts) to the icon display area 70C to become the icon, and at the end of the variable display of the second special symbol (effect symbol 70a) The icon disappears (deletes). In addition, the icon may disappear during the variable display of the special symbol (effect symbol 70a).

In the embodiment of the present invention, the main display device 70 variably displays the effect pattern 70a. may be performed.

The first movable effect device 73 has an operable first movable member 73a and a second movable member 73b. By causing the second movable member 73b to perform a predetermined action, it is possible to execute an action effect. In addition, the first movable member 73a and the second movable member 73b are provided with a board lighting device 74 having a plurality of decorative LEDs, so that it is possible to emit light in a predetermined manner during execution of the action effect. .

Specifically, the first movable member 73a moves between a standby position (first position, "A" in FIG. A first effect position (second position, "B" in FIG. 59 and the like to be described later) located near the center (below), and a first effect position located further toward the center (below) of the main display device 70 than the first effect position. 2 effect position (the third position, "C" in FIG. 59, etc., which will be described later). The second movable member 73b moves between a waiting position (first position) covering a part of the front of the first movable member 73a and an effect position retreating from the front of the first movable member 73a. . The first movable member 73a may be vertically swung at the waiting position (first position), first effect position (second position), or second effect position (third position). Further, instead of rocking the first movable member 73a, the second movable member 73b is rocked left and right while the first movable member 73a is in the standby position or each performance position. may appear to oscillate. Further, it may be positioned (stayed) at the first effect position (second position) or the second effect position (third position) for a predetermined time, or the first effect position (second position) or the second effect A predetermined effect action (for example, rotation) may be performed at the position (third position).

The second movable effect device 75 can execute an action effect during execution of the variable display of the effect pattern 70a executed by the main display device 70. - 特許庁Also, the second movable effect device 75 is provided with a board illumination device 74 having a plurality of decoration LEDs, and is capable of emitting light in a predetermined manner during execution of the action effect.

Specifically, the second movable effect device 75 has a standby position (first position, "D" in FIG. 70 (second position, "E" in FIG. 61, etc., which will be described later). It should be noted that the second movable effect device 75 can be moved by a second movable effect device driving solenoid (not shown), and like the above-described sub display device 71 and first movable effect device 73, the effect operation is performed at the effect position. or stay in the production position for a certain period of time. ing.

On the back side of the game board mounting frame 3 and the game board 5, a payout device 95 for paying out game balls based on establishment of predetermined payout conditions (prize balls, ball lending), a game supplied from an island facility, etc. A main control device 110A containing a game ball storage part 96 for storing balls and supplying them to a payout device 95, a main control board 110, a payout control device 120A containing a payout control board 120, and a performance control board 130 are built in. A performance control device 130A, a power supply device 160A containing a power supply board 160, and a game information output terminal board 90 for outputting game information to the outside of the game machine (information collecting device such as a hall computer) are provided.

In addition, an opening and closing door type cover member 23 is provided that opens and closes the left and right sides in the left and right direction around a rotation axis set on one left and right side so as to cover the upper part of the main control device and the entire production control device from the rear. The production control device 130A includes the volume of the production sound output from the audio output device 9 so as to be covered by the cover member 23, the display device (main display device, sub display device), and various lighting devices (frame lighting device 10. A changeover switch 22 is provided for switching the adjustment mode related to the adjustment of the light amount of the board illumination device 74).

On the surface side of the main control board 110, there is a main control unit 110m consisting of a one-chip microcomputer for controlling the game, and a stage of clearing the stored contents of the main RAM 110c of the main control unit 110m or the degree of advantage of the game (jackpot and RWM clear switch 111a for inputting a signal for updating the set value (determined probability), setting key switch for inputting a signal for shifting to a setting change mode or a setting confirmation mode, which will be described later, by operating the setting key. 112a, an information display 113 for displaying performance information and setting values that enable the actual performance of the gaming machine to be grasped, and other electronic parts and the like are mounted.

The information display 113 is composed of four 7-segment displays (113a to 113d) arranged in the horizontal direction. The two 7-segment displays 113a and 113b from the left constitute an identification segment for displaying identification information indicating the type (data type) of the performance information, and the two 7-segment displays 113c and 113d from the right constitute setting. A numeric segment is configured to display numeric information indicating numeric values of values and performance information (see FIG. 63). Note that static lighting is performed when setting values are displayed, and dynamic lighting is performed when performance information is displayed.

(Structure of game board)
Next, referring to FIG. 4, the configuration of the game board 5 according to the embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the game board 5. FIG.

The game board 5 is composed of a board unit 500 forming the front side of the game board 5 and a rear unit 501 forming the rear side of the game board 5 .

The board unit 500 has a game board 500a made of transparent resin on which the game area 5a is formed on the surface by the inner rails 35 and the outer rails 36 described above, and a window is formed so that the rear can be viewed. .

And inside the game area 5a of the game board 500a, the above-described decorative frame 40, the general winning opening 43, the normal figure gate 44 (gate detection switch 44a), the first start opening 45 (first start opening detection switch 45a), the variable Starting portion 46 (second starting port 47, second starting port detection switch 47a, second starting port opening/closing solenoid 48b), first variable winning portion 49 (first big winning port 50, first big winning port detection switch 50a, First big winning opening opening/closing member 51, first big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b), and second variable winning part 55 (second big winning opening 56, second big winning opening detection switch 56a, second big winning opening opening/closing A member 57, a second big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b), a sub-information display 80 are provided, and a main information display 59 is provided outside the game area 5a.

A certificate stamp plate 502 to which a certificate stamp with identification information unique to the game machine 1 is attached is provided at the lower right portion of the game board 500a so as to be rotatable in the left-right direction about the left side. At the four corners of 500a, fixtures 503a for detachably attaching board unit 500 and back unit 501 are provided.

The fixture 503a located at the lower right of the game board 500a is normally covered with the certificate stamp plate 502, and is exposed by pinching the right side of the certificate stamp plate with the fingertips and rotating it leftward.

The fixture 503a includes an operation portion located on the front side of the game board 500a, a shaft portion extending from the operation portion to the back side of the game board 500a, and a shaft portion provided at the tip of the shaft portion and on the back side of the game board 500a. and an engaging piece positioned on the side thereof, and the engaging piece changes between a first state (non-engagement posture) and a second state (engagement posture) by operating the operating portion. there is

The back unit 501 is formed in the shape of a concave chamber with an open front surface, and has a unit base 501a in which a window portion is formed so that the rear side can be visually recognized. A first movable effect device 73 (first movable member 73a, second movable member 73b), a second movable effect device 75, etc. are provided, and a main display device 70 is provided behind the window. Also, an effect control device 130A is provided behind the main display device 70, and a main control device 110A is provided below the effect control device 130A.

At the four corners of the unit base 501a, fixing receiving portions 503b are provided for detachably attaching the board unit 500 and the back unit 501 by engaging with the engaging pieces of the fixtures 503a.

When the board unit 500 and the back unit 501 are attached, the certificate stamp plate 502 is opened and the engaging pieces of the four fixtures 503a are set to the first state (non-engaging posture). A male connector CN provided at the tip of a harness HN led out from various electronic components (various solenoids, various switches) provided in the panel unit 500 is passed through a through hole HA provided in the right side of the back unit 501 . After that, when the rear surface of the board unit 500 and the front surface of the rear surface unit 501 are brought into contact with each other, the engaging piece of the fixture 503a enters the fixing receiving portion 503b.

In this state, when the operation portions of the four fixtures 503a are rotated to set the engagement pieces to the second state (engagement posture), the engagement pieces are engaged with the fixed receiving portions 503b, and the board unit 500 and the back surface unit 501 are connected. is fixed. After that, when the male connector CN provided at the tip of the harness HN led out from various electronic components (various solenoids, various switches) is connected to the female connector of the main controller 110A, and the certificate stamp plate 502 is closed, the panel unit 500 Then, the installation work of the rear unit 501 is completed.

On the other hand, when removing the board unit 500 and the back unit 501, the male connector CN connected to the female connector of the main controller 110A is pulled out, and the certificate stamp plate 502 is opened. Thereafter, when the operation portions of the four fixtures 503a are rotated to bring the engaging pieces into the first state, the engagement between the engaging pieces and the fixing receiving portion 503b is released.

In this state, when the board surface unit 500 and the back surface unit 501 are separated from each other, the engagement pieces of the four fixtures 503a are withdrawn from the fixing receiving portions 503b. After that, when the male connector CN provided at the tip of the harness HN is pulled out from the through hole HA, the work of removing the board unit 500 and the back unit 501 is completed.

In this embodiment, in addition to replacing only the game board 5 (a set of the board unit 500 and the back unit 501), it is also possible to replace only the board unit 500 from the viewpoint of the game machine 1 like new. Therefore, here, the attachment and detachment of the board surface unit 500 and the back surface unit 501 in a state in which the game board 5 is not attached to the game board mounting frame 3 has been described. It is also possible to replace only the board unit 500 from the above.

Specifically, in a state where the game board 5 is attached to the game board mounting frame 3, only the back unit 501 is fixed to the game board mounting frame 3 via the lock mechanism, and is locked. By preventing the board unit 500 from being fixed by the mechanism, only the board unit 500 can be replaced (like new). Therefore, when only the board unit 500 is to be replaced, it is preferable to perform the above-described removal work after opening the glass frame 4 .

(Overall block diagram of game machine)
Next, the control means for controlling the progress of the game will be described with reference to the block diagram of the entire game machine 1 shown in FIG. FIG. 5 is an overall block diagram of the gaming machine 1. As shown in FIG.

The control configuration of this embodiment includes a main control board 110 that controls overall progress of the game (basic action), and a payout control that controls the payout of game balls based on receipt of a payout control command from the main control board 110. A board 120, an effect control board 130 for controlling a game-related effect based on the reception of the effect control command from the main control board 110, and a power supply board for supplying power to the main control board 110, the payout control board 120 and the effect control board 130. 160 is provided.

In addition, the communication between the main control board 110 and the payout control board 120 is configured to be able to transmit and receive commands in both directions, and the communication between the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130 is controlled by the main control board 110. It is configured to be able to transmit commands only in one direction to the board 130 .

The main control board 110 includes a main CPU 110a that performs arithmetic processing, a main ROM 110b that stores game control programs and the like, a main RAM 110c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, and a main control unit as a one-chip microcomputer equipped with input/output ports. It has 110m.

The input/output ports of the main control unit 110m include an out ball detection switch 39a, a general winning opening detection switch 43a, a gate detection switch 44a, a first start opening detection switch 45a, a second start opening detection switch 47a, and opening and closing of the second start opening. Solenoid 48b, 1st large winning opening detection switch 50a, 1st large winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, 2nd large winning opening detecting switch 56a, 2nd large winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b, magnetic detection sensor 57a, radio wave detection sensor 58a, main Information display device 59 (first special symbol display device 60, second special symbol display device 61, normal symbol display device 62, first special symbol reservation display device 63, second special symbol reservation display device 64, normal symbol reservation display device 65, round number display 66, right hitting display 67, state confirmation display 68), game information output terminal board 90, RWM clear switch 111a, setting key switch 112a, information display 113, payout control board 120 and effect control A substrate 130 is connected.

The main CPU 110a receives an operation clock from a crystal oscillator, reads out a game control program stored in the main ROM 110b, and uses the main RAM 110c as a work area to perform arithmetic processing related to games. As a result, control processing according to detection signals from various input devices (detection switches, detection sensors, etc.), control processing for controlling various output devices (solenoids, indicators, etc.), and transmission and reception of various control commands. It performs control processing and the like for transmitting game information to the outside of the gaming machine (such as a hall computer) via the game information output terminal board 90 .

In the "game information", the starting opening winning signal output each time a game ball wins in the first starting opening 45 or the second starting opening 47, and the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol are stopped. A pattern confirmation signal output every time, a jackpot signal output during a jackpot game, an opening signal output during a round game (opening of the big winning opening), output over a time-saving game state described later and a security signal output when a situation (RWM clear, error, etc.) that poses a problem (threat) in terms of security of the game machine 1 occurs.

The memory area of the main control unit 110m includes a memory area allocated to the main ROM 110b and a memory area allocated to the main RAM 110c.

The memory area of the main ROM 110b includes a game ROM area in which programs and data relating to the progress of the game are stored, and an information ROM area in which programs and data relating to the performance display of the gaming machine are stored. An unused area of 16 bytes or more in which "0" is stored together with the above, a ROM comment area in which data such as the program title and version are stored, and a vector table in which the start address of the timer interrupt process described later is set. An area and an HW parameter area in which parameters such as the start address and end address of the access prohibited area are set are arranged in this order.

The game ROM area includes a game program area in which a program relating to the progress of the game is stored, a first unused area in which access is prohibited and "0" is stored, and data relating to the progress of the game. A game data area to be stored and a second unused area to which access is prohibited and "0" is stored are arranged in this order.

The information ROM area includes an information program area in which a program related to the performance display of the game machine is stored, an unused area in which access is prohibited and "0" is stored, and data related to the performance display of the game machine. are arranged in order.

In the memory area of the main RAM 110c, a game RWM area used as a work (work area) when executing the game program and an information RWM area used as a work (work area) when the information program is executed are arranged in order. there is

The game RWM area consists of a game work area used as a work by the game program, a first unused area in which access is prohibited and "0" is stored, and data being processed by the game program is temporarily stored. A game stack area to be temporarily saved and a second unused area in which access is prohibited and "0" is stored are arranged in this order.

The game work area includes a set value area for storing set values, a judgment information area for storing judgment information (a checksum to be described later) for judging an abnormality in the RWM area, and a judgment information area that changes according to the progress of the game. Game data areas for storing game data are arranged in order.

The information RWM area consists of an information work area used by the information program as a work area, an unused area where access is prohibited and "0" is stored, and data being processed by the information program is temporarily saved. Information stack areas are arranged in order.

In the information work area, a performance information area for storing information relating to the performance of the gaming machine 1 and an error information area for storing information relating to various error determinations are arranged in this order.

Hereinafter, a game area (game ROM area, game RWM area) for performing processing based on a game program and an information area (information ROM area, information RWM area) for performing processing based on an information program will be described. Describe relationships.

When the main CPU 110a performs a process based on a game program, it basically refers to the game data area and, while using the game RWM area as a work, refers to and updates the contents of the game RWM area. ing. Also, when performing processing based on an information program, basically the data area for information is referenced, and the contents of the RWM area for information are referenced and updated while using the RWM area for information as a work. ing.

However, in the process based on the game program, the contents of the information RWM area cannot be updated, but can be referred to. Further, in the processing based on the information program, the contents of the game RWM area cannot be updated, but can be referred to.

When performing processing based on the information program, after the flag register is saved in the game RWM area in the processing based on the game program, the information program is called to execute the processing based on the information program. The flag register is returned from the game RWM area immediately after the process based on the program is completed and the game program is returned to.

Immediately after the information program is started, the stack pointer of the game stack area is saved in the information RWM area, and then the stack pointer of the information stack area is set. immediately before the information program ends, all registers used in the game program are returned from the information RWM area, and the stack pointer of the game stack area is returned.

By doing so, the data used by the game program can be protected when processing based on the information program is performed, and inconvenience will occur when returning from the information program to the game program. will disappear.

The payout control board 120 includes a payout control unit 121 that drives the payout device 95 to control the payout of game balls, and a launch control unit 122 that drives the launcher 26 to control the launch of game balls.

The payout control unit 121 includes a payout CPU 121a that performs arithmetic processing, a payout ROM 121b that stores payout programs and the like, a payout RAM 121c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, an input/output port, and the like.

The input/output ports of the payout control unit 121 include an open detection switch 31a, a full detection switch 32a, a payout ball detection switch 95a for detecting game balls paid out from the payout device 95, and a switch 95a for paying out game balls from the payout device 95. A ball presence detection switch 96a for detecting that a game ball is stored is connected to the payout motor 95b and the game ball storage portion 96 of the above.

The payout CPU 121a receives an operation clock from a crystal oscillator, reads out a payout control program stored in the payout ROM 121b, and uses the payout RAM 121c as a work area to perform arithmetic processing regarding the payout of game balls. Thereby, control processing for paying out game balls from the payout device 95 according to the payout control command from the main control board 110, control processing for transmitting the command based on the result of the arithmetic processing to the main control board 110, etc. conduct.

The launch control unit 122 includes a control circuit, an input/output port, and the like (not shown).
The input/output port of the firing control unit 122 is connected to the ball feeding solenoid 11b, the touch sensor 15a, the firing volume 15b, the firing solenoid 28b, and the like.

When the shooting control unit 122 detects that the player's hand is touching the shooting handle 15 by means of a touch signal input from the touch sensor 15a, it allows the energization of the ball feed solenoid 11b and the shooting solenoid 28b, and launches the ball. When the detection signal from the volume 15b detects that the rotation angle of the firing handle 15 has changed, the ball feeding solenoid 11b is driven and the firing solenoid is adjusted so that the firing intensity corresponds to the rotation angle of the firing handle 15. 28b is driven to shoot game balls (99.9 balls/minute).

The production control board 130 is based on the reception of the production control command from the production control unit 130m and the production control unit 130m. A display control unit 140 that performs control processing for audio output, and a lamp control unit 150 that performs control processing for various light emitting members (such as LEDs) and various drive sources (such as motors) based on the reception of the effect control command from the effect control unit 130m. It has

The performance control unit 130m includes a sub CPU 130a that performs arithmetic processing, a sub ROM 130b that stores a performance control program, a sub RAM 130c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, and an input/output port.

The effect button detection switch 17a and the cross key detection switch 19a are connected to the input/output ports of the effect control section 130m.

The sub CPU 130a receives the operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out the effect control program stored in the sub ROM 130b, and performs arithmetic processing regarding the effect while using the sub RAM 130c as a work area. Thereby, control processing for determining the effect mode of the variable effect, control processing for transmitting the effect control command based on the determination result to the display control unit 140, various input devices (detection switch etc.) according to the detection signal from control processing, and control processing for controlling various output devices (lighting devices, motors, etc.).

The display control unit 140 receives a command from the production control unit 130m, controls the display of a predetermined image on the main display device 70 and the sub display device 71, and outputs a predetermined voice or sound to the audio output device 9. control the

The display control unit 140 includes an overall control unit 141 that comprehensively controls image display and audio output based on the reception of an effect control command from the effect control unit 130m, and a display control command (display list) from the overall control unit 141. An image control unit 145 (VDP) that controls the main display device 70 and the sub display device 71 based on reception, a CGROM 146 that stores image data, etc., and an audio output device based on the reception of audio control commands from the general control unit 141 9 and an audio ROM 149 in which audio data and the like are stored.

The integrated control unit 141 includes an integrated CPU 141a that performs arithmetic processing, an integrated ROM 141b that stores an integrated control program, an integrated RAM 141c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, an image control unit 145 (VDP), and an audio control unit 148 (audio It has an input/output port to which a LSI) is connected.

The supervising CPU 141a receives an operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out the supervising control program stored in the supervising ROM 141b, and uses the supervising RAM 141c as a work area to perform arithmetic processing related to the effects. As a result, control processing for generating a display control command (display list) for instructing the effect image to be displayed on the main display device 70 and the sub display device 71 and transmitting it to the display control unit 140 and outputting it from the audio output device 9 It performs control processing and the like for generating an audio control command for instructing a sound effect and transmitting it to the audio control unit 148 (audio LSI).

The lamp control unit 150 includes a lamp CPU 150a that performs arithmetic processing, a lamp ROM 150b that stores a lamp control program, a lamp RAM 150c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, and an input/output port.

The input/output ports of the lamp control unit 150 include the frame illumination device 10, the button drive device 17b (the effect button drive motor, the effect button vibration motor), the effect button light emitting LED 17c, the first movable effect device 73, and the second movable effect device. 75, board lighting device 74, starting lamp 76, sub information display 80 (sub first change display 81, sub second change display 82, sub first hold display 83, sub second hold display 84 , sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85, sub-normal figure holding indicator 86, sub-right hitting indicator 87) are connected.

The lamp CPU 150a receives an operation clock from a crystal oscillator, reads a lamp control program stored in the lamp ROM 150b, and uses the lamp RAM 150c as a work area to perform arithmetic processing related to effects. As a result, the control processing of the frame illumination device 10, the button driving device 17b, the effect button light emission LED 17c, the starting port lamp 76, the first movable effect device 73, the second movable effect device 75, and the board lighting device 74 is performed.

The starting port lamp 76 can emit light according to the final icon display mode and change scenario determined by the final icon display mode determination table (FIG. 28) and the change scenario determination table (FIG. 29), which will be described later. For example, when "scenario 01" in FIG. 29 is determined, "white" light is emitted at the time of winning, "white" light is emitted before one variation, and "blue" light is emitted for the variation. That is, the starter lamp 76 can emit light in a color linked with the icon (for example, the icon, the pending icon), and can suggest the degree of expectation for a big win along with the icon.

In addition, the icon and the pending icon may not be displayed during execution of the variable effect (for example, during execution of SP reach effect or SPSP reach effect) (see FIGS. 96 and 100). As a result, for example, when the color of the icon is changed, the player may forget what color the icon has changed to, but the starting port lamp 76 is executing a variable effect (for example, SP During execution of ready-to-win effect or SPSP ready-to-win effect), the icon does not become invisible and becomes difficult to see, and emits light in a color corresponding to the hidden icon. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the user from forgetting the color of the hidden icon by looking at the starting port lamp 76 .

The power board 160 generates a main power supply (operating power supply) necessary for the operation of the gaming machine from power supplied from the outside of the gaming machine, and supplies the main power supply to the gaming machine 1 (main control board 110, payout control board 120, Effect control board 130 and various electronic components) (corresponding to power supply means). The power supply board 160 detects whether or not the supplied power supply voltage has dropped (occurrence of a power failure), and outputs a voltage drop signal to the main control board 110 based on the drop in the power supply voltage (occurrence of a power failure). It has a power failure detection circuit 162 and a backup power supply circuit 163 for supplying backup power to the main control board 110 in the event of a power failure (power failure).

In addition, the power supply board 160 is for switching between an ON state for supplying main power to the game machine 1 (main control board 110, payout control board 120, effect control board 130 and various electronic components) and an OFF state for stopping. A power switch is provided so as to be operable by a game store clerk, and when the power switch is turned on, the supply of main power is started and the operation of the game machine 1 is started. The supply of backup power to the main control board 110 is maintained even when the power switch is in the OFF state.

The power failure detection circuit 162 monitors the power supply voltage supplied to the gaming machine 1, and outputs a voltage drop detection signal to the main control board 110 when the power supply voltage drops below a predetermined value. Output of the voltage drop detection signal is stopped when the power supply voltage exceeds a predetermined value during output.

The backup power supply circuit 163 has a capacitor that stores electricity when power is supplied to the game machine. supply. As a result, the memory contents of the main RAM 110c are retained even at the time of power failure (power failure), and after recovery from the power failure (power failure), the control state of the game can be restored to the state before the power failure (power failure). can be done.

In addition, although the backup power supply is not supplied to the payout control board 120 and the effect control unit 130m, the payout control board 120 and A backup power supply may be supplied to the effect control section 130m. Also, the backup power may be supplied to only one of the payout control board 120 and the effect control section 130m.

(Description of game state)
Next, the game state when the game progresses will be described. In this embodiment, it has a "low probability state" and a "high probability state" as states related to special game determination (jackpot determination), and a state related to the second start opening opening and closing member 48 of the second start port 47 "non-time saving state” and “time saving state”.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, "low-probability non-short-time gaming state (normal game state)" which is a low-probability state and non-time-saving state, "low-probability short-time gaming state (short-time gaming state)" which is a low-probability state and short-time state , A high probability state and a time saving state “high probability time saving game state (probability variable game state)” are provided.

The initial game state of the gaming machine 1 is set to "normal game state". Also, during the jackpot game, the "normal game state" is set, but since the jackpot game is being executed, the game state is different from the normal game state.

Here, the "low probability state" is, for example, when the set value (jackpot probability), which is the stage of the degree of advantage of the game, is "1", the game is started at the first start port 45 or the second start port 47. A game state in which the probability of a big hit is set as low as about 1/300 in a special game determination (jackpot determination) performed on the condition that a ball has entered the ball.

On the other hand, the "high probability state" means that when the set value is "1", the jackpot probability is set as high as about 1/60, which is advantageous to the player compared to the low probability state. state. It should be noted that the transition from the low probability state to the high probability state is performed after the jackpot game ends.

In addition, "non-time saving state" means that in the auxiliary game determination performed on the condition that the game ball has passed through the normal pattern gate 44, the probability of hitting is set as low as 1/256, and the average of the variable display of the normal pattern It refers to a game state in which the time is set to about 30 seconds and the opening time of the second starting port 47 in the case of winning is set to 0.180 seconds.

On the other hand, the "time-saving state" means that the probability of winning is set as high as 255/256, the average time of variable display of normal symbols is set to about 3 seconds, and the second start port 47 in the case of winning The opening time is set to 6 seconds, which is advantageous to the player in that the consumption of game balls is suppressed compared to the non-time-saving state. It should be noted that the shift from the non-time-saving state to the time-saving state is performed after the end of the jackpot game.

In addition, the "time saving state" than the "non-working time saving state" is set so that the average fluctuation time of the normal pattern, the opening time of the second start port 47 and the winning probability are advantageous, but the average of the normal patterns Any one of the variation time, the opening time of the second starting port 47, and the winning probability may be set to be advantageous.

Although the hit probability in the non-time saving state is 1/256, the hit probability may be set to 0/256 so as not to be determined as hit. In this case, the auxiliary game is not executed in the non-time-saving state, and the game ball does not enter (win) the second starting port 47 .

Next, with reference to FIG. 6, the details of the "low-probability time-saving gaming state (time-saving gaming state)" described above will be described.

In the conventional game machine, it is mainstream to shift to the "low-probability short-time gaming state (short-time gaming state)" in (a) and (d) of FIG. 6 . In this embodiment, in addition to the conventional (a) and (d), a transition route to the "low-probability short-time gaming state (short-time gaming state)" is provided.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 6 (b), when the establishment of a predetermined condition occurs in the normal game state, without going through the jackpot game "low-probability time-saving game state (time-saving game state)" to shift to is possible.

An example of "establishment of a predetermined condition" is that a specific losing pattern has stopped. For example, as the special symbols for losing, as shown in FIG. 8B described later, "special symbol 00" and "special symbol 10" are provided, but special symbols other than these are provided for losing. In this way (for example, "special symbol 11" etc.), the "special symbol 11" is determined, and the "special symbol 11" is stopped and displayed from the normal game state to the "low-probability time-saving game state (time-saving game state )”.

As a result, it is possible to attract the player's attention (whether or not the above-mentioned "special symbol 11" is stopped and displayed) in the scene where the special symbol that is lost is stopped and displayed, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.
In addition, when playing the normal game state, it suddenly shifts to the "low-probability time-saving game state (time-saving game state)", so that it is possible to give the player unexpectedness and enhance the game interest. can be improved.

In addition, the rate at which a specific losing pattern is determined may be an arbitrary rate. For example, it may be a probability that is the same as or similar to the probability of being determined to be a big hit for each set value, a probability that is harder to determine than the probability of being determined to be a big hit for each set value, or a probability that is easy to determine. good.

Another example of "establishment of a predetermined condition" is that the number of times of variable display of special symbols executed from the starting point has reached N times. For example, the main RAM 110c is provided with an area for counting and storing the number of times of variable display of special symbols in the "low-probability non-time-saving game state (normal game state)", and when the number of times counted and stored in the area reaches N times, It is made to shift from "low-probability short-time gaming state (normal game state)" to "low-probability short-time gaming state (short-time gaming state)".

"N times" can be set to an arbitrary number of times according to the probability of being determined to be a big hit for each set value. For example, if the probability of being determined to be a big hit is "1/199", about "500" times can be set as N times, and if the probability of being determined to be a big hit is "1/319", N About "900" times can be set as the number of times.

The “starting point” is, for example, a state in which RWM clear is performed (for example, a state in which steps S19 and S24 in FIG. 13 described later are performed).
Also, for example, at the end of the "low-probability time-saving gaming state (time-saving gaming state)", that is, the state of (E) in FIG.
Further, for example, although not shown in FIG. 6, depending on the specifications of the gaming machine, the end of the "high-probability short-time gaming state (probability-variable gaming state)" may be set as the "starting point".

The upper limit number of "low-probability time-saving gaming state (time-saving gaming state)" is "50" times or "100" times in the present embodiment when shifting in (d) of FIG.
On the other hand, when the transition is made at (b) in FIG. 6, the number is "1000" in the present embodiment.
In other words, the upper limit number of times of "low-probability short-time gaming state (short-time gaming state)" is higher in the case of transitioning through establishment of a predetermined condition without going through a jackpot game than the upper limit number of times in the case of transitioning through a jackpot game. I have many relationships.

As a result, it is possible to provide the player with information for deciding whether or not to play the game, thereby reducing the number of players who blindly play the game. Also, for example, when the number of N times is about 900 times, it is possible to provide relief measures to a player who has not been able to obtain a big win for a long time, which leads to prevention of leaving the game. It should be noted that the number of N times may be easily comprehended by the player through magazines or the Internet.

In addition, when moving to the "low-probability short-time gaming state (short-time gaming state)" with the establishment of a predetermined condition, the "low-probability Since the upper limit of the time-saving gaming state (time-saving gaming state)” increases, it is possible to make the player actively try to play the “low-probability non-time-saving gaming state (normal gaming state)”, and the operation of the gaming machine increases. can be improved.

It should be noted that "establishment of predetermined conditions" may include only one of the conditions listed in FIG. May have conditions.

Further, the number of revolutions up to "N times" may be positively notified. For example, the main display device 70 or the sub-display device 71 may provide a notification (display) such as "After XX rotations, enter the △△ state!" On the other hand, the notification may be limited to suggestions without active notification. For example, when the number of revolutions is close to "N times", a special presentation mode (background, mode) may be used to suggest that "N times" is approaching.

In addition, when the "special symbol 11" in the above-described example is stopped and displayed while the "time saving game state 1" in FIG. may be controlled. That is, the “special symbol 11 ” may be determined based on the ball entering the first starting port 45 or may be determined based on the ball entering the second starting port 47 .

For example, if the "special symbol 11" is stop-displayed when the remaining number of possible games in the "time saving game state 1" is "2", "1000" is set as the possible number of games in the "time saving game state 2". After setting, in the next game, the remaining possible number of games in the "time saving game state 1" may be "1" and the possible number of games in the "time saving game state 2" may be "999". Further, in the next game, the remaining number of possible games in the "time saving game state 1" is "0", the possible number of games in the "time saving game state 2" is "998", and from there "time saving game state 2" ” may be controlled.

As a result, even if the "special symbol 11" is determined in the "time saving game state 1", the player does not lose (so-called drawing loss) and can continue playing in the time saving game state. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the amusement of the game.

On the other hand, when the "special symbol 11" in the above example is stop-displayed while the "time saving game state 1" is being controlled, the "time saving game state 2" may not be controlled. For example, when the "special symbol 11" is stopped and displayed when the remaining number of possible games in the "time saving game state 1" is "1", the number of possible games in the "time saving game state 2" is not set, The normal game state may be controlled by ending the time saving game state (“time saving game state 1”) in the next game.
As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming significantly advantageous.

In the above example, when the "special symbol 11" in the above example is stopped and displayed while the "time saving game state 1" is being controlled, the "time saving game state 2" is controlled. Even if the "special symbol 11" in the above example is stopped and displayed in the state of being held, the above example may be handled in the same manner.

Next, details of various tables stored in the main ROM 110b will be described with reference to FIGS. 7 to 10. FIG.

(jackpot determination table)
FIG. 7(a) is a big hit determination table for the first special symbol for determining (big hit determination) the special figure determination information acquired based on the winning (entrance) of the game ball to the first starting port 45. , FIG. 7B is a jackpot determination table for the second special symbol for determining (jackpot determination) the special figure determination information acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 47 (entering the ball). be.

As shown in FIGS. 7A and 7B, the jackpot determination table corresponds to the current set value, the current probability state, the random number for jackpot determination, and the jackpot determination result (jackpot, lose). As a reference, the approximate winning probability in the case of a "jackpot" is described in the rightmost column.

The main CPU 110a refers to the first special symbol jackpot determination table shown in FIG. 7A or the second special symbol jackpot determination table shown in FIG. Based on the random number value for judgment, it is judged whether it is a "big win" or a "loss".

For example, according to the jackpot determination table for the first special symbol shown in FIG. 7(a), when the set value is "1" and the normal game state, 200 jackpots of "100" to "299" The random number for judgment is judged to be a "jackpot". Then, a random value for judging a big win other than that judged to be a big win is judged to be "losing".

(Special pattern judgment table)
FIG. 8(a) is a special symbol determination table for big hits for determining the type of special symbols when it is determined as a big hit, and FIG. 8(b) is a special symbol determination table when it is determined as a loss. It is a special symbol determination table for losing for determining the type.

As shown in FIGS. 8(a) and 8(b), the special symbol determination table contains the types of special symbols to be stopped and displayed, the random number for special symbol determination, the determination result of the special symbol, and the determination result corresponding to the determination result. Stop special figure data and the special design designation command which corresponds to the decision result are matched.

The special symbols "00" and "10" are loss special symbols in which the jackpot game is not executed. The special pattern "01" is a special jackpot pattern for executing the first jackpot game, the special pattern "02" is a jackpot pattern for executing the second jackpot game, and the special pattern "11" is: It is a big winning pattern for executing the third big winning game.

In the "first jackpot game", a round game is executed up to 6 times in which the first big prize winning port 50 is opened for up to 29.5 seconds and then closed for 2 seconds. ing. In addition, in the round game, even before the opening time elapses, one round game ends when a specified number (for example, 10) of game balls wins the first big winning hole 50.例文帳に追加Further, after the end of the first jackpot game, the low-probability short-time gaming state (short-time gaming state) is set until the variable display of the special symbols is performed 100 times.

In the "second jackpot game", a round game is executed up to 10 times in which the first jackpot 50 is opened for up to 29.5 seconds and then the jackpot is closed for 2 seconds. Further, after the second jackpot game is finished, the high-probability short-time game state (probability-variable game state) is set until the variable display of the special symbols is performed 10000 times. Therefore, judging from the probability of winning the jackpot in the high-probability gaming state, the next jackpot is almost decided.

In the "third jackpot game", a round game is executed up to four times, in which the second big prize opening 56 is opened for up to 29.5 seconds and then the big prize opening is closed for 2 seconds. Further, after the end of the third jackpot game, the high-probability short-time game state (probability-variable game state) is set until the variable display of the special symbols is performed 10000 times. Therefore, judging from the probability of winning the jackpot in the high-probability gaming state, the next jackpot is almost decided.

Although each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is associated with one unsuccessful special symbol, at least one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is associated with a plurality of unsuccessful special symbols. good too.

The main CPU 110a refers to the special symbol determination table shown in any of FIGS. 8(a) and 8(b), and based on the type of special symbol to be stopped and displayed and the random number for special symbol determination, the type of special symbol, Stop special figure data and special design specification command are decided, special design specification command is transmitted to production control baseplate 130.

A first feature of the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 8 is that the types of the big hit special symbols and the types of the losing special symbols are the same without changing depending on the setting values. By doing so, it is possible for the player to play the game with peace of mind without making the game complicated.

A second feature of the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 8 is that the selection ratio of various jackpot special symbols and the selection ratio of various losing symbols are constant without changing depending on the set value. By doing so, the player's degree of advantage does not change drastically depending on the set value, and the player can play the game with peace of mind.

(Special figure variation pattern determination table)
Figure 9 (a) is a special figure variation pattern determination table for the non-time saving state for determining the special symbol variation pattern in the non-time saving state, Figure 9 (b) is a special symbol variation pattern in the time saving state It is a special figure variation pattern determination table for the time saving state for determining.

As shown in FIG. 9, in the special figure variation pattern determination table, the type of special symbol (starting port) that performs the variation display, the big hit determination result, the special symbol determination result (stop special figure data), and the reach determination A random number, a first reservation number (U1) or a second reservation number (U2), a random number for special figure fluctuation pattern determination, a special figure fluctuation pattern as a judgment result, a special symbol fluctuation time, and a special figure It is associated with a special figure variation pattern designation command that indicates a variation pattern.

Therefore, it can be said that the "special symbol variation pattern" can specify the type of special symbol, the jackpot determination result, the type of special symbol, and the variation time of the special symbol.

The main CPU 110a refers to the special figure variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 9, the jackpot determination result, the special symbol determination result (stopped special figure data), the reach determination random number, the first reservation number (U1), or the second reservation. Based on the number (U2), the random number for special figure variation pattern determination, the special figure variation pattern is determined, and the special figure variation pattern designation command corresponding to the special figure variation pattern is transmitted to the production control board 130. there is

In addition, as will be described later, the effect control board 130 determines the content (effect mode) of the variable effect accompanied by the variable display of the effect symbol 70a according to the variation pattern designation command (jackpot determination result, special symbol determination result, etc.). Since it is designed to do, the rightmost column of the special figure pattern determination table shown in FIG. 9 describes the production contents that can be executed in the variable production as a reference.

"Normal variation", "shortened variation", "ultra-shortened variation", and "long variation" are shown in the variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. , means to stop without reaching.

In addition, "ready-to-win" means that the player expects that a jackpot game will be executed in which some of the combinations of the performance symbols 70a that inform the big win are temporarily stopped and the other performance symbols 70a fluctuate. It means a variation mode (expected performance) that causes For example, when a combination of three performance symbols 70a of "777" is set as a combination of performance symbols 70a for notifying a big hit, the same performance symbols 70a are temporarily stopped at "7" in the left area and the right area. , refers to a mode in which the remaining production patterns 70a are changing in the central area.

It should be noted that "temporary stop" means that the production pattern 70a swings slightly or is slightly deformed to make it appear to the player that the production pattern 70a is stopped (completely stopped). not). On the other hand, the stop display of the production pattern 70a refers to a completely stopped mode. It should be noted that the stop display of the special symbol TZ is also completely stopped.

"Normal reach" means a reach performance in which the same performance pattern 70a is temporarily stopped in the left and right regions and the remaining one performance pattern 70a fluctuates in the central region, and the expectation of a big hit is the lowest. It is a reach (first expected production).

In addition, "SP reach" and "special SP reach" are super reach performances (second expectation performances) in which the expectation of a big hit is higher than that of normal reach, and are executed after normal reach. For example, the two production patterns 70a are reduced and moved to the corners of the main display device 70, and almost the entire display area of the main display device 70 is used to perform a special ready-to-win production.

Also, "SPSP reach" is a special reach performance (third expectation performance) in which the degree of expectation for a big hit is higher than that of super reach, and is executed after super reach. For example, the three production patterns 70a are reduced and moved to the corners of the main display device 70, and almost the entire display area of the main display device 70 is used to perform a special reach production than "SP reach". ing.

In addition, "all rotation ready-to-win" is a ready-to-win effect (fourth expectation effect) for determining a big hit, and is executed after normal ready-to-win. For example, the main display device 70 blacks out from the normal reach production, and then the three production patterns 70a are all the same and fluctuate at a low speed, and almost the entire display area of the main display device 70 is used to display "SPSP reach". It is designed to perform a special reach production than ”.

The first feature of the special figure variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 9 is that the type of the special figure variation pattern to be determined is the same without changing depending on the set value. By doing so, it becomes difficult to see through the set value from the special figure variation pattern, and it becomes possible to provide a fair game.

The second feature of the special figure variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 9 is that the selection ratio of each special figure variation pattern is the same without changing depending on the set value. By doing so, it becomes difficult to see through the set value from the special figure variation pattern, and it becomes possible to provide a fair game.

(Advance judgment table)
FIG. 10(a) is a pre-determination table for a non-time-saving state for pre-determining (prefetching) the special figure determination information acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 during the non-time-saving state. , FIG. 10(b) is a pre-determination table for the time saving state for pre-determining (prefetching) the special figure determination information acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the second start port 47 during the time saving state.

As shown in FIG. 10, in the preliminary determination table, the type of special symbol (starting port), the jackpot determination result, the special symbol determination result, the reach determination random value, and the special symbol variation pattern determination random value , Toku-zu scheduled variation pattern as a determination result, and the look-ahead designation command indicating the toku-zu scheduled variation pattern are associated.

Therefore, it can be said that the "special figure variation pattern" can specify the special symbol type, the judgment result of the jackpot determination, the special symbol type, and the special figure variation pattern to be executed.

The main CPU 110a refers to the preliminary determination table shown in FIG. 10, and based on the random number for jackpot determination, the random number for special symbol determination, the random number for reach determination, and the random number for determination of the special figure variation pattern, the special figure scheduled variation. A pattern is determined, and a look-ahead designation command corresponding to the special figure scheduled variation pattern is transmitted to the effect control board 130. - 特許庁

(Various storage areas of main RAM)
FIG. 11 is a diagram showing various storage areas set in the main RAM 110c. Specifically, FIG. 11(a) is a special figure in which the special figure determination information acquired when the game ball wins (enters) in the first start port 45 and/or the second start port 47 is stored. FIG. 11B is a diagram showing a determination information storage area, FIG. 11B is a diagram showing the configuration of each storage unit of the special figure determination information storage area, FIG. It is a general pattern determination information storage area in which normal pattern determination information acquired when passing is stored, and FIG.

As shown in FIG. 11(a), the special figure determination information storage area stores special figure determination information acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45. First special figure determination information holding storage A second special figure determination information holding storage area for storing special figure determination information acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the second start port 47, and a special figure determination information during execution of the variable display. It is divided into a special figure determination information storage area, and the first special figure determination information reservation storage area and the second special figure determination information reservation storage area are each divided from the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit.

The first storage unit, the second storage unit, the third storage unit, and the fourth storage unit of the first special figure determination information reservation storage area are the first display unit 70B1 and the second display of the first reservation icon display area 70B. They correspond to the portion 70B2, the third display portion 70B3, and the fourth display portion 70B4, respectively. Also, the first storage unit, the second storage unit, the third storage unit and the fourth storage unit of the second special symbol holding storage area are the first display unit 70D1, the second display unit 70D2 of the second holding icon display area 70D, They correspond to the third display section 70D3 and the fourth display section 70D4, respectively.

Then, the number of special figure determination information (first reservation information) stored in the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit of the first special figure determination information storage area is the first number of reservations (U1), these special figure determination The number of first pending icons corresponding to the information is displayed in the first display portion 70B1 to the fourth display portion 70B4 of the first pending icon display area 70B. In addition, the number of special figure determination information (second reservation information) stored in the first to fourth storage units of the second special figure determination information is the second number of reservations (U2), corresponding to these determination information A number of suspended icons are displayed in the first display portion 70D1 to the fourth display portion 70D4 of the second suspended icon display area 70D.

Moreover, the 0th memory|storage part which is a special figure determination information execution memory|storage area corresponds to the said icon display area 70C. Then, the icon corresponding to the special figure determination information stored in the 0th storage unit is displayed in the icon display area 70C.

As shown in FIG. 11(b), each storage unit includes a jackpot determination random number storage area for storing a jackpot determination random number value and a special symbol determination random number storage area for storing a special symbol determination random number value. It is divided into an area, a reach determination random number storage area for storing a reach determination random number value, and a special figure variation pattern determination random number storage area for storing a special figure variation pattern determination random number value.

Then, when the game ball wins (entrance) to the first start port 45 and the special figure determination information is acquired, the special figure determination information is not stored in the first special figure determination information holding storage area. The acquired special figure determination information is stored in a storage unit with a small number. Also, when the game ball enters the second start port 47 and the special figure determination information is acquired, the smallest number in which the special figure determination information is not stored in the second special figure determination information holding storage area The acquired special figure determination information is stored in the storage unit.

The 0th storage unit, which is a special figure determination information execution storage area, is a special figure stored in the first storage unit of the first special figure determination information reservation storage area when the condition for starting the variable display of the first special symbol is satisfied. The determination information is shifted and referred to for executing the variable display of the first special symbol. Further, when the condition for starting the variable display of the second special symbol is satisfied, the special symbol determination information stored in the first storage part of the second special symbol determination information holding storage area is shifted, and the variable display of the second special symbol is performed. will be referenced to execute the

As shown in FIG. 11(c), the normal pattern determination information storage area stores the normal pattern determination information acquired based on the passage of the game ball to the normal pattern gate 44. It is divided into a general pattern determination information storage area in which the general pattern determination information being displayed is stored, and the general pattern determination information holding storage area is divided from the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit, respectively. In addition, the number of general pattern determination information stored in the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit of the general pattern determination information reservation storage area is the number of general pattern determination information.

As shown in FIG. 11(d), each storage unit includes a hit determination random number storage area for storing a hit determination random number value, and a normal symbol determination random number storage area for storing a normal symbol determination random number value. It is divided into an area and a random number storage area for determining the normal pattern fluctuation pattern for storing the random number value for determining the normal pattern fluctuation pattern.

Then, when the game ball passes through the normal pattern gate 44 and the normal pattern determination information is acquired, the normal pattern determination information is not stored in the normal pattern determination information holding storage area. Normal figure determination information is stored.

The 0th storage unit, which is the normal pattern determination information execution storage area, shifts the normal pattern determination information stored in the first storage unit of the normal pattern determination information holding storage area when the start condition for the variable display of the normal pattern is satisfied. It will be referred to for executing the variable display of normal symbols.

(flowchart)
Next, the progress of a game in the gaming machine 1 will be explained using a flowchart.

(main processing of the main control board)
Main processing (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12 is a flow chart showing main processing in the main control board 110 . This main processing is performed when a system reset generated by the supply of the power supply voltage from the power supply board 160 is input to the main CPU 110a.

First, the main CPU 110a performs initial setting processing in step S10. Specifically, processing for preparing for starting control of the game, processing for initial operation of various driving sources of the board unit 500, and the like are performed. Details of the initial setting process will be described later.

In step S50, the main CPU 110a updates the random number value for special symbol determination and the random number value for reach determination. Update the initial random number value for normal symbol determination.

In step S52, the main CPU 110a detects a voltage drop in the power supply from the power interruption detection circuit 162 of the power supply board 160 (for example, the power supply that has been supplied at 24 volts drops below 18 volts). Determines whether or not a signal is input. If the voltage drop detection signal has not been input, the process proceeds to step S50, and if the voltage drop detection signal has been input, the process proceeds to step S53.

In step S53, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the voltage drop detection signal has been continuously input for a predetermined period (for example, 10 milliseconds). If the input continues for a predetermined period of time, it is determined that a complete power failure has occurred, and the process proceeds to step S54. Assuming that there is a possibility, the process proceeds to step S52.

In step S54, the main CPU 110a sets interrupt prohibition that prohibits timer interrupt, and in step S55, issues a power cut-off designation command for notifying the payout control board 120 that power cut-off processing has started. Send. As a result, the payout control board 120 that has received the power cut-off designation command transmits the remaining payout number designation command indicating the remaining number of game balls to be paid out stored in the payout RAM 121c.

In step S56, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the command for specifying the number of remaining payouts has been received. If the command for specifying the number of remaining payouts has not been received, the process proceeds to step S57, and if the command for specifying the number of remaining payouts has been received, the process proceeds to step S58.

In step S57, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the standby time for waiting for the reception of the remaining payout designation command has elapsed. If the standby time has not elapsed, the process proceeds to step S56, and if the standby time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S58 assuming that normal communication with the payout control board 120 cannot be performed.

In step S58, the main CPU 110a saves the number of payouts in a payout counter set in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c. Specifically, when the remaining payout designation command is received, the remaining payout specified by the remaining payout designation command is saved, and when the remaining payout designation command is not received, the remaining Save "0" as the number of payouts. The remaining number of payouts saved here is referred to in a payout control process of timer interruption, which will be described later, and a command specifying the number of payouts corresponding to the remaining number of payouts is transmitted to the payout control board 120 after the power is restored. become.

The main CPU 110a clears the output port in step S59. As a result, the output state of the output port is initialized, and the operation of various displays and various drive sources (motor, solenoid) is stopped.

In step S60, the main CPU 110a calculates a checksum (abnormality determination data) of the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c and saves it in a predetermined area of the game RWM area. By doing so, it becomes possible to determine data abnormality in the game RWM area by the checksum when the power is turned on next time.

In step S61, the main CPU 110a saves a backup flag indicating that the data of the main RAM 110c is backed up (restored power supply) in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S62 prohibits RWM access, After that, wait until the power supply is completely cut off.

In this way, when the supply of the operating power (18 volts or more) necessary for the operation of the game machine 1 is started, the initial setting process is performed. When the supply of the operating power is restarted after the initial setting process is not performed. In other words, even if the setting change operation, setting confirmation operation, and RWM clear operation are performed for some reason at the time of the momentary power failure, the setting change process, setting confirmation process, and RWM clear process are not executed. The game machine does not operate unintendedly, and the reliability of the game machine can be ensured.

(Initial setting processing of the main control board)
Initial setting processing (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 13 is a flow chart showing the initial setting process of the main control board 110. As shown in FIG.

First, the main CPU 110a prohibits all interrupts in step S11, performs initial setting of the CPU such as setting of built-in registers in step S12, and waits for activation of other control boards in step S13. Specifically, the activation of the payout control board 120 and the performance control board 130 is waited for one second so that no command is missed from the main control board 110 .

The main CPU 110a permits access to the RWM area of the main RAM 110c in step S14, and transmits a launch permission designation command to the payout control board 120 in step S15. As a result, the payout control unit 121 performs processing for permitting the shooting of game balls by the shooting device 26 .

In step S16, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a backup flag indicating power recovery is saved in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c. If the backup flag is saved, the process is moved to step S17 assuming that the power is restored, and if the backup flag is not saved, the step is regarded as the first power-on or irregular power restoration. The process is moved to S18.

In step S17, the main CPU 110a calculates a checksum (abnormality determination data) in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c, and clears the backup flag saved in the game RWM area.

In step S18, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a setting change operation has been performed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 112a and the RWM clear switch 111a are in the ON state. If there is a setting change operation, the process proceeds to step S19 assuming that the setting change mode is entered, and if there is no setting change operation, the process proceeds to step S20.

The main CPU 110a performs a setting change process (game program) in step S19. Specifically, based on the operation of the RWM clear switch 111a, a process for changing (updating) the setting value (probability of judging a big hit in judging a big hit), which is the stage of the degree of advantage of the game, is performed. Details of the setting change process will be described later. When this process ends, the process moves to step S25.

In step S20, the main CPU 110a determines whether the checksum is normal. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the checksum saved in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c matches the checksum calculated in step S17. If the checksum is normal (the data in the RWM area is normal), the process proceeds to step S21. If the checksum is not normal (the data in the RWM area is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S22. to move.

If the backup flag is not saved, it is determined that the checksum is abnormal because it is the first power-on or the above-described irregular power recovery, and the process proceeds to step S22. will be transferred.

In step S21, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the set value in the set value area is within the appropriate range (here, 1 to 4). If determined to be within the appropriate range, the process proceeds to step S23, and if determined to be out of the appropriate range, the process proceeds to step S22.

The main CPU 110a performs unrecoverable error processing (game program) in step S22. Specifically, after displaying error information "E" indicating an unrecoverable error on the information display 113 and transmitting an unrecoverable error designation command indicating that an unrecoverable error has occurred on the effect control board 130 , set interrupt prohibition for prohibiting timer interrupt, and after clearing the output port, output an unrecoverable error signal (security signal) indicating the occurrence of an unrecoverable error from the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90. and wait until the power supply is completely cut off. As a result, the effect control board 130 performs processing for executing non-recoverable error notification indicating that a non-recoverable error has occurred.

"Unrecoverable error" is an error state in which game control is not performed (game control is not performed), and is not canceled unless setting change processing is executed. Therefore, when an unrecoverable error occurs, even if the power switch provided on the power supply board 160 is turned off and then turned on without changing the settings, the error will not be canceled and the setting will not be canceled. The power switch has to be turned on with the change operation. Note that during an unrecoverable error, the presence or absence of signal input from various input devices (various switches, various sensors) is not monitored at all.

The "notification of unrecoverable error" means displaying an unrecoverable error screen ("This is an unrecoverable error. Please change the settings") to make the main display device 70 recognize that an unrecoverable error has occurred. Illuminating the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 in a predetermined emission color (for example, red) until the power is turned off, or displaying a non-recoverable error from the audio output device 9 indicating that a non-recoverable error has occurred. It is possible to output a possible error sound ("This is an unrecoverable error" + buzzer sound) until the power is turned off.

The main CPU 110a determines whether or not there is an RWM clear operation in step S23. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the RWM clear switch 111a is in the ON state. If there is an RWM clearing operation, the process proceeds to step S24 assuming that the RWM clearing operation is performed, and if there is no RWM clearing operation, the process proceeds to step S26.

The main CPU 110a performs RWM clear processing (game program) in step S24. Specifically, based on the operation of the RWM clear switch 111a, a process for initializing the game control state (initializing areas other than the set value area of the game RWM area) is performed. Details of the RWM clear processing will be described later.

In step S25, the main CPU 110a transmits a power-on designation command indicating that the game control state has been initialized and the current game state (here, a non-time-saving game state as a normal game state). It is transmitted to the board 130, and the process moves to step S31. As a result, in the effect control board 130, processing for executing power-on notification indicating that the control state of the game has been initialized is performed.

"Power-on notification" refers to displaying an initial screen (background image and initial effect pattern "135") at the time of power-on for making the main display device 70 recognize that the control state of the game has been initialized, The frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 are all lit in a predetermined emission color (for example, white) for a predetermined period (for example, 60 seconds), or the voice output device 9 notifies that the RWM area has been initialized. power-on notification sound ("RWM cleared" + buzzer sound) for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds).
In addition, when the power is turned on, instead of displaying the initial screen on the main display device 70 and the sub-display device 71, the main display device 70 and the sub-display device 71 are displayed to notify that the RWM area has been cleared. You may do so.

In step S26, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not there has been a setting confirmation operation. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 112a is in the ON state. If there is a setting confirmation operation, the process moves to step S28 assuming that the setting confirmation mode is entered, and if there is no setting confirmation operation, the control state of the game is returned to the state before the power was turned off. The process moves to step S30.

The main CPU 110a performs a setting confirmation process (game program) in step S27. Specifically, a process for displaying on the information display 113 the set values saved in the set value (during game) area of the game RWM area is performed. Details of the setting confirmation process will be described later.

In step S28, the main CPU 110a sets the RWM area at the time of power restoration, such as clearing (0 clearing) the checksum saved in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the state of progress (control state) of the game returns (restores) to the state before the power was cut off, so the game can be restarted from the state before the power was cut off.

In step S29, the main CPU 110a transmits to the effect control board 130 a power restoration designation command indicating that the game control state has been restored and the game state before the power failure occurred. As a result, the effect control board 130 performs processing for executing power supply recovery notification indicating that the setting confirmation notification or the like is terminated and the control state of the game has returned to the state before the power interruption.

"Power restoration notification" means that a power restoration screen is displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) or a frame The display lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 are all lit in a predetermined emission color (for example, white) for a predetermined period (for example, 60 seconds), and the voice output device 9 indicates that the power supply has been restored (from a power failure). power restoration notification sound (buzzer sound) is output for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds).

The main CPU 110a transmits other commands (a special symbol storage designation command, a normal symbol storage designation command, etc., which will be described later) to the effect control board 130 in step S30. As a result, the performance control board 130 can grasp the number of reserved special symbols, and processing for displaying the first reserved icon and the second reserved icon on the main display device 70 is performed.

The main CPU 110a transmits a setting value designation command to the effect control board 130 in step S31. As a result, the effect control board 130 can grasp the current set value. In addition, this set value designation command may be transmitted to the effect control board 130 before the power-on designation command and the power restoration designation command are transmitted. Also, the setting value designation command may be transmitted each time the variable display of the special symbol is started, or may be transmitted each time the big winning game is started.

The main CPU 110a activates a CTC (counter timer circuit) for generating a timer interrupt (4 milliseconds) in step S32, and permits all interrupts in step S33 to control the progress of the game (main control). A timer interrupt of the board 110 is started, and the current initialization process is finished.

In other words, from the time when the gaming machine 1 is turned on until the initial setting process is completed, the game progress control is in a pre-start state before the start of the game progress control. It will be in a state where it is possible to play.

In this way, since multiple conditions (operations) are set for the setting change operation, RWM clear operation, and setting confirmation operation, setting change, RWM clear, and setting confirmation cannot be easily performed. , cheating can be suppressed, and the security of the gaming machine can be improved.

In addition, since the number of conditions (operations) set for the setting change operation is larger than the number of conditions (operations) set for the RWM clear operation and setting confirmation operation, It is possible to increase the security of events in which acts are likely to be performed, and to effectively prevent fraudulent acts.

In addition, if the checksum is abnormal (including the case where the backup flag is not saved), unrecoverable error processing is executed and the progress of the game is stopped. This eliminates the inconvenience caused to the game parlor and the player, and improves the reliability of the game machine.

Also, if the value in the setting value area is not within the proper range, that is, if there is a possibility that the previous power failure occurred while the settings were being changed, unrecoverable error processing is executed even if the checksum is normal. By stopping the progress of the game by pressing the button, it is possible to improve the reliability of the game machine by preventing the game from progressing in a state where the setting value not intended by the game arcade is set. Become.

In addition, during setting change (setting change mode) or setting confirmation (setting confirmation mode), the state confirmation display 68, the main display device 70, the sub display device 71, the frame It is possible to recognize that the setting is being changed by checking the lighting device 10 for the disc or the lighting device 74 for the disc, and to recognize that the setting is being changed by checking the information display 113 on the back side (back side). It is possible. That is, it is possible to grasp whether or not the setting is being changed from either the front (surface) or the rear (back) of the gaming machine 1 .

Note that the setting change operation, the RWM clear operation, and the setting confirmation operation may include that the open detection switch 31a is in the ON state as a condition. By doing so, since the number of conditions increases, fraud can be suppressed, and the security of the gaming machine can be further improved.

The power-on designation command and the power restoration designation command are transmitted including information indicating the current game state. You may make it transmit the game state designation|designated command which shows.

In addition, when the power is turned off or when the power is turned on, the checksum of the game RWM area (excluding the setting value area) is calculated, but the checksum of the entire RWM area is calculated. Alternatively, the checksum of the game RWM area and the checksum of the information RWM area may be calculated separately, and if either checksum is abnormal, the process may be shifted to unrecoverable error processing. .

(Main control board setting change processing)
A setting change process (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing the setting change processing of the main control board 110. As shown in FIG.

First, in step S19-1, the main CPU 110a outputs a setting change signal (security signal). Specifically, the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90 starts outputting a setting changing signal (security signal) indicating that the setting is being changed. The setting changing signal (security signal) continues to be output during the setting change, and continues to be output for 200 ms even after the setting change is completed, and then ends the output.

In step S19-2, the state confirmation display 68 displays a state confirmation display indicating that the setting is being changed. Specifically, one LED of the status confirmation display 68 is lit. As a result, the game clerk can confirm that the setting is being changed by checking the state confirmation display 68 .

The main CPU 110a transmits a setting change designation command to the effect control board 130 in step S19-3. As a result, the effect control board 130 performs processing for executing setting change notification for notifying that the setting value is being changed.

"Setting change notification" means displaying a setting changing screen indicating that the setting value is being changed on the main display device 70 or the sub display device 71, or setting the frame lighting device 10 or the board lighting device 74. This is a notification that all lights are lit in a predetermined emission color (for example, white) during the change. Note that the voice output device 9 may output a setting change notification sound ("setting is being changed") indicating that the setting is being changed. As a result, the game clerk can recognize that the settings are being changed by checking the main display device 70, the sub display device 71, the frame lighting device 10, the board lighting device 74, and the audio output device 9. Become.

The main CPU 110a acquires the setting value from the setting value area in step S19-4, and determines whether or not the acquired setting value is within the appropriate range (1 to 4) in step S19-5. If determined to be within the proper range, the process proceeds to step S19-7, and if determined to be out of the proper range, the obtained set value is updated to "1" in step S19-6.

The main CPU 110a displays the set value on the information display 113 in step S19-7. Specifically, the obtained setting values (1 to 4) are displayed on one 7-segment LED of the information display 113. FIG. As a result, the game clerk can confirm the setting value before the change by checking the information display device 113 .

In step S19-8, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not there is a set value update operation. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the RWM clear switch 111a has changed from the OFF state to the ON state. If there is a set value update operation, the process moves to step S19-9, and if there is no set value update operation, the process moves to step S19-12.

The main CPU 110a updates the obtained set value by +1 in step S19-9, and performs set value correction processing in step S19-10. Specifically, when the acquired set value is "5", the acquired set value is corrected to "1".

The main CPU 110a displays the current set value on the information display 113 in step S19-11. Specifically, the acquired setting values (1 to 4) after updating are displayed on one 7-segment LED of the information display 113 . As a result, it becomes possible for the game clerk to check the information display 113 to grasp the set value before confirmation.

The main CPU 110a executes drive source initial operation processing (game program) in step S19-12. Specifically, various drive sources (the second start opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, the first big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, the first A process for initializing the second prize winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) until the setting change mode ends is performed. Details of initial operations of various drive sources in the setting change mode will be described later.

In step S19-13, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not there has been an operation to confirm the set value. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 112a has changed from the ON state to the OFF state. If there is a set value confirmation operation, the process is moved to step S19-14 assuming that the set value is confirmed (the setting change mode is terminated), and if there is no set value confirmation operation, the set value is updated. Assuming that there is a possibility that the

In step S19-14, the main CPU 110a saves the updated acquired setting value in the setting value area. In step S19-15, the display of the setting value on the information display 113 ends. The display of the status confirmation display 68 is terminated.

In step S19-17, the main CPU 110a initializes (0 clears) areas other than the set value area in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the state of progress of the game is initialized to the initial state (the state at the time of shipment of the gaming machine 1), and the data in the RWM area for game before the RWM is cleared is not inherited.

The main CPU 110a performs output processing of the RWM clear signal (security signal) in step S19-18. Specifically, processing for outputting an RWM clear signal (security signal) indicating that the RWM clear has been performed from the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90 is performed. If another security signal is output from the security signal terminal, output of the RWM clear signal (security signal) is started after the output period of the output security signal ends.

In step S19-19, the main CPU 110a performs processing for stopping the initial operations of various driving sources when the setting change mode is terminated by the setting value confirmation operation, and ends the current setting change processing.

In this way, even if the setting value is out of the proper range, the initial value is set as the setting value, so that an indeterminate value is set as the setting value and the gaming machine unexpectedly malfunctions. It is possible to prevent the game shop and the player from being troubled by the action, thereby improving the reliability of the game machine.

In addition, during the setting change (during the setting change mode), the game clerk, on the front (surface) of the game machine 1, displays the state confirmation display 68, the main display device 70, the sub display device 71, the lighting device 10 for the frame, and the board. It is possible to recognize that the setting is being changed by checking the lighting device 74 for the display, and it is possible to recognize that the setting is being changed by checking the information display 113 on the rear surface (back side). That is, it is possible to grasp whether or not the setting is being changed from either the front (surface) or the rear (back) of the game machine 1 .

Although the setting key switch 112a is turned off from the ON state, the set value confirmation operation may be performed by turning the RWM clear switch 111a from the OFF state to the ON state, or by turning the dedicated switch OFF. Alternatively, the signal from the touch sensor 15a may be input to the main control board 110 so that the touch sensor 15a may be changed from the OFF state to the ON state. , the detection switch (for example, the general winning opening detection switch 43a) provided in a specific winning opening (including the starting opening) may be changed from the OFF state to the ON state, or the open detection switch 31a may be changed from the OFF state to the ON state. It may be set to ON state.

Also, the setting change designation command is transmitted at the start of the setting change processing, and the power-on designation command is transmitted after the setting change processing is completed. However, instead of the setting change designation command, the setting change start designation command is transmitted. Alternatively, a setting change end designation command may be transmitted instead of the power-on designation command. In this case, the setting change end designation command may be transmitted at the end of the setting change process, or may be transmitted after the setting change process ends.

(RWM clear processing of main control board)
The RWM clearing process (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15 is a flow chart showing RWM clear processing of the main control board 110 .

First, in step S24-1, the main CPU 110a transmits an RWM clear preparation designation command to the effect control board 130, and shifts to the RWM clear preparation mode. As a result, the effect control board performs processing for performing RWM clear preparation notification.

"RWM clear preparation notification" means that the main display device 70 displays a clear preparation screen for recognizing that the RWM clear preparation is in progress, or the voice output device 9 notifies "Please press the RWM clear switch again". This is a notification such as outputting voice over a predetermined period.

The main CPU 110a executes drive source initial operation processing (game program) in step S24-2. Specifically, various drive sources (the second start opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, the first big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, the first Processing is performed to initially operate the second prize winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) until the RWM clear preparation mode ends. The details of the initial operation of various drive sources during the RWM clear preparation mode will be described later.

In step S24-3, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not there has been an RWM clear approval operation. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the RWM clear switch 111a is in the ON state. If there is an RWM clear approval operation, the RWM clear preparation mode is ended and the RWM clear is performed, and the process proceeds to step S24-4. If there is no RWM clear approval operation, the process proceeds to step S24-2. transfer processing.

In step S24-4, the main CPU 110a initializes (0 clears) areas other than the set value area in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the state of progress of the game is initialized to the initial state (the state at the time of shipment of the gaming machine 1), and the data in the RWM area for game before the RWM is cleared is not inherited.

In step S24-5, the main CPU 110a performs output processing of the RWM clear signal (security signal). Specifically, processing for outputting an RWM clear signal (security signal) indicating that the RWM clear has been performed from the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90 is performed.

In step S24-6, the main CPU 110a performs a process for stopping the initial operation of various drive sources when the RWM clear preparation mode is terminated by the RWM clear approval operation, and terminates the current RWM clear process.

Although the RWM clear preparation designation command is transmitted at the start of the RWM clear processing, and the power-on designation command is transmitted after the RWM clear processing ends, the RWM clear designation command is transmitted instead of the power-on designation command. You may make it In this case, the RWM clear specification command may be transmitted at the end of the RWM clear processing, or may be transmitted after the RWM clear processing is completed.

(Main control board setting confirmation processing)
A setting confirmation process (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing the setting confirmation processing of the main control board 110. As shown in FIG.

First, in step S27-1, the main CPU 110a performs output processing of a setting confirmation signal (security signal). Specifically, the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90 starts to output a setting confirmation signal (security signal) indicating that the setting is being confirmed. The setting confirmation signal (security signal) continues to be output during the setting confirmation, and continues to be output for 200 ms even after the setting confirmation is completed, and then ends the output.

In step S27-2, the main CPU 110a displays a status confirmation display indicating that the setting is being changed on the status confirmation display 68. FIG. Specifically, one LED of the status confirmation display 68 is lit. As a result, it becomes possible for the game clerk to confirm that the setting is being confirmed by checking the status confirmation display 68 .

The main CPU 110a transmits a setting confirmation designation command to the effect control board 130 in step S27-3. As a result, processing for executing setting confirmation notification for notifying that setting confirmation is being performed by the effect control board 130 is performed.

"Setting confirmation notification" means displaying a setting confirmation screen indicating that settings are being confirmed on the main display device 70 or the sub display device 71, or displaying a setting confirmation screen for the frame lighting device 10 or the board lighting device 74. This is a notification that all the LEDs are lit in a predetermined emission color (for example, white) over the entire period. Note that the voice output device 9 may output a setting confirmation notification sound ("Confirming the setting value") indicating that the setting is being confirmed. As a result, the game clerk can recognize that the settings are being confirmed by checking the main display device 70, the sub display device 71, the frame illumination device 10, the board illumination device 74, and the voice output device 9. Become.

The main CPU 110a displays the current set value on the information display 113 in step S27-4. Specifically, the set value in the set value (in-game) area is referenced, and a number (here, 1 to 4) indicating the set value is displayed on one 7-segment LED of the information display 113 . As a result, it becomes possible for the game clerk to grasp the current set value by checking the information display device 113 .

The main CPU 110a executes drive source initial operation processing (game program) in step S27-5. Specifically, various drive sources (the second start opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, the first big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, the first Processing is performed to initially operate the second prize winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) until the setting confirmation mode ends. The details of the initial operation of various driving sources during the setting confirmation mode will be described later.

In step S27-6, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not there has been a confirmation end operation. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 112a has changed from the ON state to the OFF state. If there is a confirmation end operation, the process proceeds to step S28-6, and if there is no confirmation end operation, the process of step S28-5 is repeated.

The main CPU 110a ends the display of the set values on the information display 113 in step S27-7, ends the display of the status confirmation display 68 in step S27-8, and ends the confirmation operation in step S27-9. When the setting confirmation mode is terminated by , a process for stopping the initial operation of various drive sources is performed, and the current setting confirmation process is terminated.

It should be noted that the setting confirmation designation command is transmitted at the start of the setting confirmation processing, and the power recovery designation command is transmitted after the setting confirmation processing is completed, but instead of the setting confirmation designation command, the setting confirmation start designation command is transmitted. Alternatively, a setting confirmation end designation command may be transmitted instead of the power restoration designation command. In this case, the setting confirmation end designation command may be transmitted at the end of the setting confirmation process, or may be transmitted after the setting confirmation process is completed.

As described above, in this embodiment, the setting changing signal, the RWM clear signal, the setting checking signal, and the unrecoverable error signal are output from the same security signal terminal. By doing so, many types of signals can be output even with a limited number of signal terminals, and convenience of the gaming machine can be improved.

In addition, from the start of power supply to the game ready state where the game progress control (timer interrupt of the main control board 110) is performed (in the state before the start), input other than the RWM clear switch 111a and the setting key switch 112a Device (out ball detection switch 39a, general winning opening detection switch 43a, gate detection switch 44a, first starting opening detection switch 45a, second starting opening detection switch 47a, first big winning opening detection switch 50a, second big winning opening The presence or absence of signal input from the detection switch 56a, the magnetic detection sensor 57a, and the radio wave detection sensor 58a) is not monitored.

In other words, in the pre-start state before the game progress control is started, even if game balls enter various prize winning openings (including the starting opening), the winning is invalidated and the game balls are not paid out. It's like Also, even if the game ball wins the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47, the winning becomes invalid and the fluctuation of the special symbols on the first special symbol display device 60 and the second special symbol display device 61. No display is performed, and the jackpot game is not executed. In addition, even if the game ball passes through the normal pattern gate 44, the passage is invalidated and the normal pattern display device 62 does not variably display the normal patterns, so that the auxiliary game is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load by avoiding wasteful processing in a situation where it is difficult to assume that the player will play the game before the progress control of the game is started.

In addition, in the pre-start state before the progress control of the game is started, error notification is not performed even if various errors occur. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load by avoiding unnecessary processing in a situation where it is difficult to assume that cheating is performed before the game progress control is started.

The setting change signal, RWM clear signal, setting confirmation signal, and unrecoverable error signal may be output from separate output terminals instead of being output from the common security signal terminal.

(Timer interrupt processing of the main control board)
The timer interrupt processing (game program and information program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing in the main control board 110. As shown in FIG.

In this timer interrupt process, after the initial setting process of the main process is completed, a clock pulse is input from a reset clock pulse generation circuit provided on the main control board 110 at predetermined intervals (4 milliseconds). , and controls the progress of the game.

First, in step S100, the main CPU 110a saves the information stored in the register to the stack area, and in step S110, performs time control processing (game program). Specifically, it performs a process of updating various timer counters such as the stop time of the special symbol and the opening time of the special electric accessory.

In step S120, the main CPU 110a performs specific random number update processing (game program). Specifically, the random number for judging the big hit, the random number for judging the special pattern, the random number for judging the special pattern variation pattern, the random number for judging the hit, the random number for judging the normal pattern, and the random number for judging the regular pattern fluctuation pattern are updated. Specifically, each random number value and random number counter are incremented by +1 and updated. When the added random number counter exceeds the maximum value of the random number range (when the random number counter completes one cycle), the random number counter is reset to 0, and when the random number counter returns to the initial value of the cycle, the countermeasure The initial random value to be used is set as a new cycle initial value, and the random value is newly updated.

In step S130, the main CPU 110a performs initial random number update processing (game program). Specifically, similar to step S30, the process of updating the initial random number value for judging a big hit, the initial random number value for judging a special symbol, the initial random number value for judging a hit, and the initial random number value for determining a normal symbol is performed.

The main CPU 110a performs an input control process (game program) in step S200. Specifically, the general winning opening detection switch 43a, the first big winning opening detection switch 50a, the second big winning opening detection switch 56a, the first start opening detection switch 45a, the second start opening detection switch 47a, and the gate detection switch 44a. It determines whether or not there is an input to various switches such as , and sets predetermined data if there is an input. Details of the input control process will be described later.

The main CPU 110a performs a special figure special electric control process (game program) in step S300. Specifically, determination of the special figure determination information acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the first start opening 45 or the second start opening 47, the fluctuation display of the first special design or the second special design, the big winning opening Processing such as opening/closing (the first big winning hole 50 and the second big winning hole 56) and setting of the game state is performed. In addition, the detail of special figure special electric control processing is mentioned later.

In step S400, the main CPU 110a performs a general/universal electric power control process (game program). Specifically, processing such as determination of acquired general pattern determination information based on the passage of the game ball to the general pattern gate 44, normal symbol fluctuation display, opening and closing of the second start port 47 (auxiliary game), and the like are performed.

It should be noted that the type of normal pattern per determined as the determination result of the normal pattern determination information performed in the normal pattern normal electric control process, the type of the normal pattern loss is the same without changing depending on the set value. By doing so, the game is not overly complicated, and the player can play the game with peace of mind.

In addition, the selection ratio of various normal patterns determined as the determination result of the normal pattern determination information performed in the normal pattern normal electric control process, and the selection ratio of various losing normal patterns are constant without changing depending on the set value. ing. By doing so, the player's degree of advantage does not change drastically depending on the set value, and the player can play the game with peace of mind.

The main CPU 110a performs payout control processing (game program) in step S500. Specifically, various winning ball counters stored in the main RAM 110c are referred to, and various winning openings (general winning opening 43, first starting opening 45, second starting opening 47, first big winning opening 50, second A process for transmitting a payout number designation command corresponding to the big winning opening 56) to the payout control board 120 is performed. As a result, the payout control board 120 executes a process for paying out prize balls from the payout device 95 .

The main CPU 110a performs abnormality determination processing (game program) in step S600. Specifically, various errors (illegal winning errors such as game balls winning in the second start port 47 when not in the auxiliary game, game balls winning in the big winning port when not in the special game, various winning Abnormal prize-winning error where the number of game balls that have won a prize does not match the number of game balls discharged from the prize-winning ball flow path, a magnetic error that detects abnormal magnetism for a predetermined period by the magnetic detection sensor 57a, A radio wave error in which an abnormal radio wave is detected by the radio wave detection sensor 58a for a predetermined period of time, a door open error in which the open detection switch 31a changes from an OFF state to an ON state, and an RWM clear switch 111a during game progress control. or an operation error in which the setting key switch 112a is operated) is generated, and a process for transmitting an error designation command corresponding to the generated error to the effect control board 130 is performed. As a result, the effect control board 130 executes processing for performing error notification.

The main CPU 110a performs data creation processing (game program) in step S700. Specifically, the external output data (game information) output from the game information output terminal plate 90, the starting opening opening/closing data output to the second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, the first big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, the second big winning Special symbol display data output to the first special symbol display device 60 and the second special symbol display device 61, normal symbol display data output to the normal symbol display device 62, third 1 special design reservation display 63, special design reservation display data to be output to second special design reservation display 64, normal design reservation display data to be output to normal design reservation display 65, and other data are created.

The main CPU 110a performs an output control process (game program) in step S750. Specifically, a port output process for outputting signals such as the external information data created in step S700, the start opening opening/closing data, and the big winning opening opening/closing data, special symbol display data, normal symbol display data, special symbol Display output processing for outputting signals such as pending display data and normal symbol pending display data, and sending a payout state confirmation designation command for checking the payout state of the payout control board 120 to the payout control board 120, or a prize described later Sphere counters (3 prize ball counter, 10 prize ball counter, 15 prize ball counter) are referred to, and processing for transmitting payout number designation commands corresponding to various winning ports to the payout control board 120 is performed. . As a result, the payout control board 120 executes control for paying out prize balls from the payout device 95 .

In step S800, the main CPU 110a performs an information program calling process. Specifically, after the interrupt is prohibited, the flag register is saved in the game RWM area, and the processing for calling the target information program by the CALL instruction is performed.

The main CPU 110a performs game ball counting processing (information program) in step S810. Specifically, the normal medium payout number, which is the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of game balls into various winning openings (general winning opening, large winning opening starting opening) during normal gaming state, out during normal gaming state For counting game performance information such as the number of normal outs, which is the number of game balls detected by the ball detection switch 39a, and the total number of outs, which is the number of game balls detected by the out ball detection switch 39a regardless of the game state. process.

Note that the total number of outs, the number of normal payouts, and the number of normal outs are game performance information that is not affected by changes in the set values (unrelated to the set values). By counting , it becomes possible to calculate performance information (a normal base value, which will be described later) that excludes the influence of the setting value, and it is possible to make use of this in grasping the performance of the game machine 1 .

The main CPU 110a performs normal base value calculation processing (information program) in step S830. Specifically, the normal base value ((normal medium payout number/normal medium out number) x 100) in the current game section divided by the total number of outs is calculated, and the base storage area set in the RWM area for information is calculated. Save the normal base value rounded to the first decimal place in the first area of .

Note that the game section is first updated when the total number of outs during the normal game state reaches 300, and thereafter updated each time the total number of outs during the normal game state reaches 60,000. , the base storage area includes a first area for storing the normal base value for the current game interval, a second area for storing the normal base value for the previous game interval, and a second area for storing the normal base value for the previous game interval. A third area for storing the normal base value and a fourth area for storing the normal base value in the game interval three times before are provided, and the normal base value for the four game intervals including the current one are provided. will be saved in each area.

The main CPU 110a performs performance display data setting processing (information program) in step S850. Specifically, the normal base values (performance information) for the four game sections calculated in the performance information calculation process and saved in the base storage area are displayed on the information display device 113 while being switched every five seconds. Performs processing for setting performance display data. Details of the performance display data setting process will be described later.

The main CPU 110a performs test data creation processing (information program) in step S870. Specifically, a process of creating test data (test information) to be output to a test facility used when testing the gaming machine 1 is performed.

The main CPU 110a performs an output control process (information program) in step S880. Specifically, display output processing for outputting signals such as performance display data (performance information) set in step S850 to various displays, and processing for outputting signals such as test data created in step S870 are performed. .

In step S890, the main CPU 110a performs a game program return processing. Specifically, the flag register is returned from the game RWM area, the interrupt is permitted, and the process for returning to the game program is performed.

In step S900, the main CPU 110a restores the information saved in step S100 to the register of the main CPU 110a, and terminates the current timer interrupt process.

In this way, in the pre-start state (during the setting change mode, during the RWM clear mode, and during the setting confirmation mode) before the progress control of the game is started, the timer interruption is not executed. Since the counting of the number and the number of outs, the calculation of the normal base value, and the display of the normal base value are not performed, it is possible to reduce the control load on the main control board.

(Input control processing of the main control board)
The input control processing (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 is a flow chart showing input control processing in the main control board 110 .

First, in step S210, the main CPU 110a performs general winning hole detection switch input processing. Specifically, it determines whether a detection signal is input from the general winning hole detection switch 43a, that is, whether or not the game ball has entered the general winning hole 43, and pays out the prize balls from the payout device 95. process.

In step S220, the main CPU 110a performs a big winning opening detection switch input process. Specifically, whether the detection signal is input from the first big winning hole detection switch 50a or the second big winning hole detection switch 56a, that is, the game ball wins the first big winning hole 50 or the second big winning hole 56 It is determined whether or not the game has been played, and processing for paying out prize balls from the payout device 95 is performed.

In step S230, the main CPU 110a performs a first starting port detection switch input process. Specifically, it is determined whether a detection signal is input from the first start opening detection switch 45a, that is, whether or not the game ball has entered the first start opening 45, and the prize ball is paid out from the payout device 95. Along with performing the processing for, the processing for acquiring and storing the special figure determination information is performed. The details of the first starting opening detection switch input process will be described later.

In step S240, the main CPU 110a performs a second start opening detection switch input process. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a detection signal is input from the second starting port detection switch 47a, that is, whether or not the game ball has entered the second starting port 47, and a prize ball is paid out from the payout device 95. Along with performing the processing for, the processing for acquiring and storing the special figure determination information is performed.

The main CPU 110a performs gate detection switch input processing in step S250. Specifically, the detection signal is input from the gate detection switch 44a, that is, the process for determining whether or not the game ball has passed through the general pattern gate 44, and acquiring and storing the general pattern determination information I do. When this process ends, the current input control process ends.

(Input processing of the first start opening detection switch of the main control board)
The first start opening detection switch input processing (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is a flow chart showing the first starting port detection switch input processing in the main control board 110. As shown in FIG.

First, in step S230-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the detection signal from the first starting port detection switch 45a has been input. When the detection signal from the first starting port detection switch 45a is input, the process proceeds to step S230-2, and when the detection signal from the first starting port detection switch 45a is not input, the current first 1 End the starting port detection switch input processing.

In step S230-2, the main CPU 110a performs a process of updating the 3-ball counter used for the 3-ball prize by adding the data indicating the 3 prize balls, and in step S230-3, determines the special figure. Acquire information (random number for jackpot determination, random number for special symbol determination, random number for reach determination, random number for special figure variation pattern determination).

The main CPU 110a determines whether or not the first pending number (U1) is less than four in step S230-4. If the first reservation number (U1) is less than 4, the process is moved to step S230-5, and if the first reservation number (U1) is not less than 4, this first start port detection switch input process exit.

In step S230-5, the main CPU 110a adds "1" to the first pending number (U1) and updates it (U1←U1+1). The corresponding first special symbol storage specification command is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the first special symbol memory designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the number of first pending icons corresponding to the first pending number (U1) is displayed on the main display device 70.

In step S230-7, the main CPU 110a sequentially searches for a free storage unit from the first storage unit in the first special figure determination information storage area, and stores the special feature acquired in step S230-3 in the free storage unit. The figure determination information is stored.

In step S230-8, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the game is currently in a non-time-saving state (normal game state). If it is in a non-time-saving state, the processing is moved to step S230-9 as a pre-reading process of the special figure determination information acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45, and it is not in a non-time-saving state In this case, the current first start opening detection switch input process is terminated as not performing the pre-reading process of the special figure determination information acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the first start opening 45 .

The main CPU 110a performs a first look-ahead process (pre-determination process) in step S230-9. In this first pre-reading process, the pre-determination table shown in FIG. 10 is referred to, and the special figure determination information acquired this time is pre-determined before the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is performed, and the result of the pre-determination (special figure Scheduled variation pattern) to generate a first look-ahead designation command for notifying the effect control board 130 is performed.

Since this "first look-ahead specified command" is information that can specify the special figure scheduled variation pattern, the effect control board 130 uses the first look-ahead specified command to determine the type of special symbol, the judgment result of the jackpot determination, and the special symbol. The type can also be specified.

At step S230-10, the main CPU 110a sets the first prefetch designation command generated at step S230-9 in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c.

As a result, the first look-ahead designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the jackpot game is played over one or a plurality of variation displays from before the start of the variable display of the first special symbol corresponding to the first look-ahead designation command. is executed.

As for the second starting hole detection switch input process, the same process as the first starting hole detection switch input process is performed. ), 1st special figure determination information reservation storage area, non-time saving state, 1st look-ahead processing, 1st look-ahead designation command part, 2nd start opening detection switch 47a, 2 ball counters, 2nd number of reservations (U2 ), second special figure determination information reservation storage area, time saving state, second look-ahead processing, second look-ahead designation command.

In this embodiment, the upper limit of the first pending number (U1) is "4", but it may be larger or smaller than this. Further, the upper limit value of the second reserved number may be smaller than the upper limit value of the second reserved number. Furthermore, the first reservation information may not be stored by storing the special figure determination information only in the 0th storage section of the first special figure determination information storage area.

Further, in the present embodiment, the upper limit of the second pending number (U2) is "4", but it may be larger or smaller than this. Also, the upper limit value of the second reserved number may be smaller than the upper limit value of the first reserved number. Furthermore, the second reserved storage may be eliminated by storing the special figure determination information only in the 0th storage section of the second special figure determination information storage area.

(Special special electric control processing of the main control board)
The special figure special electric control processing (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing the special figure special electric control processing in the main control board 110 .

First, in step S301, the main CPU 110a loads the value of the special special electric processing data, refers to the branch destination address from the special special electric processing data loaded in step S302, executes processing corresponding to the branch destination address, This special figure special electric control processing ends.

Specifically, if the special figure special electric processing data = 0, the variable display of the special symbol is started based on the judgment result of the reservation storage (special figure judgment information), the fluctuation time is set, and the command at the start (special Design storage designation command, game state designation command, special design designation command, special figure fluctuation pattern designation command) to the production control board 130 processing and processing to change the special figure special electric processing data to "1" etc. A special symbol storage determination process (step S310) for the purpose is executed. The details of the special symbol storage determination process will be described later.

If the special figure special electric processing data = 1, the variable display of the special symbol is stopped by the lapse of the variation time, the stop time (for example 0.5 seconds) is set, and the command at the time of stop (symbol confirmation command) is produced Control board 130, special symbol variation processing (step S320) for performing processing for changing the special symbol special electric processing data to "2", and the like.

If the special symbol special electric processing data = 2, by the lapse of the special symbol stop time (0.5 seconds), if it is a losing special symbol, the special symbol special electric processing data is changed to "0", and if it is a big hit special symbol, it is a big hit. A game opening time is set, a process for transmitting an opening designation command to the performance control board 130, and a special symbol stop process (step S330) for changing the special symbol special electric process data to "3" are executed.

If the special figure special electric processing data = 3, the process for starting the round game by the lapse of the opening time of the big hit game and transmitting the round designation command to the production control board 130 and the big hit game based on the end of the final round game (Step S340) for setting the ending time and transmitting the ending designation command to the effect control board 130, the processing for changing the special figure special electric processing data to "4", etc. (step S340) .

If the special figure special electric processing data = 4, the processing to end the jackpot game by the passage of the ending time and the game state after the jackpot (low probability time-saving game state, high probability time-saving game state, high probability number, time-saving number ), a process for changing the special figure special electric processing data to "0", and the like (step S350).

(Special symbol memory judgment processing of the main control board)
The special symbol memory determination processing (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing the special symbol storage determination process in the main control board 110. As shown in FIG.

First, in step S310-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the special symbols are being variably displayed. If the special symbols are being variably displayed, the current special symbol storage determination process is terminated, and if the special symbols are not being variably displayed, the process proceeds to step S310-2.

The main CPU 110a determines whether or not the second pending number (U2) is 1 or more in step S310-2. If the second pending number (U2) is 1 or more, the process moves to step S310-3, and if the second pending number (U2) is not 1 or more, the process moves to step S310-4.

The main CPU 110a updates the second reservation number (U2) by subtracting "1" in step S310-3, and designates special symbol storage corresponding to the second reservation number (U2) after subtraction in step S310-6. The command is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the special symbol storage designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and processing for updating the pending icon displayed on the main display device 70 and the display of the icon is performed.

In step S310-7, the main CPU 110a sets the game state designation command corresponding to the current game state in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S310-8, stores the command in the second special figure determination information storage area. Shift processing of the stored data is performed, and the special figure determination information stored in the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit is shifted to the previous storage unit.

For example, the special figure determination information stored in the fourth storage section of the second special figure determination information reservation storage area is shifted to the third storage section of the second special figure determination information reservation storage area. In addition, the special figure determination information stored in the first storage unit of the second special figure determination information holding storage area is shifted to the 0th storage unit which is the special figure determination information execution storage area, and stored in the 0th storage unit The special figure determination information used in the previous game that was held is erased.

On the other hand, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the first pending number (U1) is 1 or more in step S310-4. If the first reservation number (U1) is 1 or more, the process moves to step S310-5, and if the first reservation number (U1) is not 1 or more, the process moves to step S319-1.

The main CPU 110a updates the first reservation number (U1) by subtracting "1" in step S310-5, and in step S310-6, a special symbol storage designation command corresponding to the first reservation number (U1) after subtraction. is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the special symbol storage designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and processing for updating the pending icon displayed on the main display device 70 and the display of the icon is performed.

In step S310-7, the main CPU 110a sets a game state designation command corresponding to the current game state in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S310-8 stores it in the first special symbol reservation storage area. Perform shift processing of the data that has been, to shift the special figure determination information stored in the first storage unit ~ fourth storage unit to the previous storage unit.

For example, the special figure determination information stored in the fourth storage section of the first special symbol reservation storage area is shifted to the third storage section of the first special symbol reservation storage area. In addition, the special figure determination information stored in the first storage section of the first special symbol reservation storage area is shifted to the 0th storage section which is the special figure determination information execution storage area, and is stored in the 0th storage section. The special figure determination information used in the previous game is erased.

In addition, with the shift processing of the special figure determination information in step S310-8, the special symbol reservation display data indicating the first reservation number (U1) and the second reservation number (U2) after subtraction are stored in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c. set to As a result, the display contents of the first special symbol reservation display 63 and the second special symbol reservation display 64 are updated.

In addition, in this embodiment, in steps S310-2 to S310-8, the second special figure determination information holding storage area is prioritized over the first special figure determination information holding storage area (the second hold number is shifted to the first hold However, the first special figure judgment information holding storage area or the second special figure judgment information holding storage area is shifted (first The number of reservations and the second number of reservations may be subtracted in order of winning), or the first special figure determination information reservation storage area may be prioritized over the second special figure determination information reservation storage area (the first number of reservations may be It may be subtracted with priority over the second reservation number.

In step S311, the main CPU 110a performs a big hit determination process. Specifically, the special figure determination information (random number value for jackpot determination) stored in the 0th storage unit, which is the special figure determination information execution storage area, is collated with the jackpot determination table shown in FIG. Determine whether or not In addition, the special symbol determination information (random number for special symbol determination) stored in the 0th storage unit which is the special symbol determination information execution storage area is collated with the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 8, and the special symbol to be stopped Perform processing to determine the type of

In step S312, the main CPU 110a sets a special symbol designation command corresponding to the type of special symbol determined in the jackpot determination process in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the special symbol specifying command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the process for determining the effect symbol 70a to be stopped and displayed as a result of the variable effect is performed.

The main CPU 110a performs special figure variation pattern determination processing in step S313. Specifically, the special figure determination information stored in the 0th storage unit which is the special figure determination information execution storage area is collated with the special figure variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. Perform processing to determine the special figure variation pattern (variation time).

In step S314, the main CPU 110a sets a special figure variation pattern designation command corresponding to the special figure variation pattern type determined in the special figure variation pattern determination process in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, a special figure variation pattern specification command is transmitted to the performance control board 130, and processing for determining a variation performance pattern, which is a performance mode of the variation performance performed during the variable display of the special symbols, is performed.

In step S315, the main CPU 110a sets the special symbol variation time (counter value) corresponding to the type of special symbol variation pattern determined in the special symbol variation pattern determination process in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S316 , to start the variable display of special symbols. As a result, the lighting data of the LED for executing the variable display of the special symbol is created in the data creating process of the step S700, and the created lighting data is output in the output control process of the step S800. In the special symbol display device 60 or the second special symbol display device 61, the variable display of the special symbols is performed.

In step S317, the main CPU 110a clears the customer waiting state flag for ending the customer waiting state, and in step S318, sets "1" to the special symbol special electric processing data, and ends the current special symbol storage determination processing. do.

In step S319-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a customer waiting state flag indicating a customer waiting state is set in the main RAM 110c. When the customer waiting state flag is set, the special symbol storage determination processing of this time is ended, and when the customer waiting state flag is not set, the processing is moved to step S319-2. It should be noted that the customer waiting state refers to a state in which the variable display of special symbols and the special game (jackpot game) are not being executed, but the requirements include that the variable display of normal symbols and the auxiliary game are not being executed. may

In step S319-2, the main CPU 110a sets a customer waiting state flag in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c. It is set in the transmission data storage area, and the current special symbol storage determination process is terminated. As a result, the customer waiting state specifying command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and processing for executing the customer waiting demonstration effect for prompting the player to play is performed.

(Performance display data setting processing of the main control board)
The performance display data setting process (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing performance display data setting processing in the main control board 110 .

First, in step S850-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether the performance information (normal base value) displayed on the information display 113 should be switched. It is determined whether or not the switching time counter is the display switching value "0". If the display switching value is "0", the performance information (normal base value) displayed on the information display 113 is switched, and the process proceeds to step 850-2. , the process proceeds to step S850-6 assuming that the performance information displayed on the information display 113 is not changed. It should be noted that when this process is executed for the first time after the gaming machine 1 is powered on, the value of the display switching time counter is "0", which is the display switching value.

In step S850-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a lighting confirmation completion flag for determining whether or not lighting confirmation of the information display 113 has been completed is saved in the information RWM area. If the lighting confirmed flag has been saved, the normal base value is displayed on the information display 113, and the process proceeds to step S850-4.If the lighting confirmed flag has not been saved, the information is displayed. The process moves to step S850-3 to check whether the device 113 is lit. When this process is executed for the first time after the game machine 1 is powered on, the lighting confirmed flag is not saved.

In step 850-3, the main CPU 110a displays a lighting confirmation display for lighting all the segments (including the decimal point) of the four 7-segment displays (113a to 113d) constituting the information display 113. Determine data.

In step S850-4, the main CPU 110a acquires a normal base value (to be displayed on the information display 113) corresponding to the data selection counter value from the base storage area provided in the information RWM area of the main RAM 110c. Specifically, if the data selection counter value is "0", the normal base value saved in the first area of the base storage area is acquired, and if the data selection counter value is "1", the base storage Acquire the normal base value saved in the second area of the area, and if the data selection counter value is "2", obtain the normal base value saved in the third area of the base storage area, and select the data If the counter value is "3", the normal base value saved in the fourth area of the base storage area is obtained.

In step S850-5, the main CPU 110a refers to a display data determination table (not shown), and displays information based on the section counter value, the number of normal outs indicated by the normal out number counter, and the acquired normal base value. The display data of the normal base value to be displayed on the device 113 is determined.

The main CPU 110a sets the determined display data as the display information of the information display 113 in the output data area of the information RWM area in step S850-6. As a result, the display data set in the output data area of the information RWM area in the output control process of step S880 is referred to, and the normal base value (performance information) corresponding to the display data is displayed on the information display 113. will be The information displayed on the information display 113 in each game section will be described later.

The main CPU 110a adds 1 to the above display switching time counter in step S850-7, and determines whether or not the display switching time counter is greater than the upper limit value (eg, 5 seconds) in step S850-8. If it is not greater than the upper limit, it is assumed that the time for switching the display of the information display 113 has not elapsed, and the process proceeds to step S850-15. Assuming that the time for switching the displayed performance information has passed, the display switching time counter is cleared to 0 (initialized) in step S850-9.

In step S850-10, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not there is the lighting confirmed flag in the information RWM area of the main RAM 110c. If there is a lighting confirmed flag, the process proceeds to step S850-12, and if there is no lighting confirmed flag, in step S850-11, the lighting confirmed flag is saved in the information RWM area of the main RAM 110c. .

The main CPU 110a adds 1 to the above data selection counter in step S850-12, and determines whether or not the data selection counter is greater than the upper limit value (eg, 3) in step S85-13. If it is not larger than the upper limit, the process proceeds to step S850-15, and if it is larger than the upper limit, the data selection counter is cleared to 0 (initialized) in step S850-14.

In step S850-15, the main CPU 110a restores the register saved in the information RWM area of the main RAM 110c in the above-described game ball counting process. The game stack pointer saved in the RWM area is restored, and the current performance display data setting process is terminated.

In this way, all the segments of the four 7-segment displays of the information display 113 light up after the gaming machine 1 is powered on and before the performance information (normal base value) is displayed (lighting confirmation is performed). Therefore, it is possible to check whether the information display 113 is out of order and which segment is out of order.

In addition, every time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, the performance information (normal base value) of four game sections consisting of the current game section and the past three game sections is displayed in order. It is possible to compare the performance information (usual base value) in two game sections, and it is possible to confirm the actual performance of the game machine and grasp the possibility of fraud.

(Information displayed on the information display in each game section)
Next, the information displayed on the information display 113 in each game section will be described with reference to FIG. In the display information table of FIG. 23, the section counter value (type of game section), the number of normal outs, the data selection counter value, and the display contents of the information display 113 are associated with each other.

The identification information displayed in the identification segment of the information display 113 includes "bL." indicating the normal base value of the current game interval, and " "b1.", "b2." indicating the normal base value of the game interval two times before, and "b3." indicating the normal base value of the game interval three times before.

The numerical information displayed in the numerical segment of the information display 113 includes "--" indicating that there is no calculated normal base value, the normal base value is "0", or the number of normal outs is "0". "00" indicating that the normal out count is "1" or more and the normal base value is "1" to "99" respectively, "01" to "99", and the normal base value is There is "99." indicating that it is "100" or more. When the normal base value is less than "10", the tens digit of the numerical information is always "0" and displayed in two digits.

The numerical value information displayed in the numerical segment does not change in display mode (lights up) regardless of the game section or the number of outs during normal operation, but the identification information displayed in the identification segment does not change. The display mode changes (blinking display or lighting display) depending on the number of outs during normal operation (whether or not there is a calculated normal base value and whether or not the calculated normal base value is credible).

Specifically, in the first to fourth game intervals, when the identification information of the game interval for which there is no calculated normal base value is displayed, the identification information is blinked. In addition, in the game section after the second game section, when displaying the identification information ("bL.") of the current game section, the period when the credibility of the calculated normal base value is low (the number of outs during normal 0 to 5999), the identification information will blink. Otherwise, the identification information is illuminated.

Here, to give an example of the display of the information display 113, the section counter value is "1", the number of normal outs is within the range of 0 to 5999, and the data selection counter value is "0". When the normal base value stored in the first area of the base storage area is "35", the identification segment of the information display 113 flashes "bL." ” will be lit up.

In this way, when the normal base value is "99" or less, the performance information not using the decimal point DP of the 7-segment display of "00" to "99" is displayed in the numerical segment, while the normal base value If the value is "100" or more, the performance information using the decimal point DP of the 7-segment display "99." .

In addition, when the base value is usually less than "10", "0" is always displayed in the tens place of the numerical segment and displayed in two digits (for example, "01" etc.), so 2 as a numerical segment An easy-to-understand display can be achieved by effectively using two 7-segment displays.

In addition, when the normal base value of the current game section is displayed, and the number of outs during normal of the current game section is 0 to 5999, which is not sufficient to calculate the normal base value. , the identification information “bL.” displayed in the identification segment blinks, making it easy to understand that the currently displayed normal base value is information with low credibility.

Also, if there is no calculated normal base value, a non-numerical "--" is displayed in the numerical segment, so the normal base value is calculated in the game section corresponding to the identification information displayed in the identification segment. It becomes easier to understand that there is no

Instead of executing the game ball counting process, the performance information calculation process, and the performance display data setting process as information programs, one or two of them are executed as game programs (for example, game ball counting process). The processing may be executed within the input control processing which monitors the presence or absence of signal input from various switches), while the remainder may be executed as an information program.

Further, the process of outputting display data for displaying performance information on the information display device 113 may be executed by a performance program instead of being executed by the output control process, which is a game program.

Also, by the out ball detection switch 39a, the game ball that has won the general winning hole 43, the first starting hole 45, the second starting hole 47, the first big winning hole 50 and the second big winning hole 56, and the out hole 39 Instead of detecting out-balls made up of game balls that have flowed into the outlet, only game balls that have flowed into the out-port may be detected by the out-ball detection switch 39a. In that case, out ball detection switch 39a, general winning opening detection switch 43a, first starting opening detection switch 45a, second starting opening detection switch 47a, first big winning opening detection switch 50a, second big winning opening detection switch The number of outs (the number of total outs, the number of normal outs) should be incremented by one each time a game ball is detected at 56a.

(Main processing of production control section)
Main processing of the effect control section 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 24 is a flowchart of main processing in the effect control section 130m.

First, the sub CPU 130a inhibits all interrupts in step E1, performs CPU initialization such as setting of built-in registers in step E2, and permits access to the RWM area of the sub RAM 130c in step E3.

The sub CPU 130a initializes (clears to 0) all RWM areas (work area, stack area, unused area) of the sub RAM 130c in step E4, and generates a timer interrupt (4 milliseconds) in step E5. CTC (counter timer circuit) is activated, and all interrupts are permitted at step E6.

The sub CPU 130a performs a sub random number update process in step E7. Specifically, a process of updating various random numbers stored in the RWM area of the sub-RAM 130c is performed. Thereafter, the process of step E7 is repeated.

(Timer interrupt processing of production control unit)
The timer interrupt processing of the effect control section 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25 is a flow chart of timer interrupt processing in the effect control section 130m. This timer interrupt processing is executed by inputting a clock pulse every predetermined cycle (4 milliseconds) from a reset clock pulse generation circuit provided in the effect control section 130m.

First, in step E100, the sub CPU 130a saves the information stored in the register to the stack area of the RWM area of the sub RAM 130c, and in step E200, performs timer update processing. Specifically, it performs a process of updating various timer counters necessary for execution of the effect.

The sub CPU 130a performs command analysis processing in step E300. Specifically, the process of analyzing the command (transmitted from the main control board 110 or the payout control unit 121) stored in the reception buffer of the RWM area of the sub-RAM 130c is performed. Details of the command analysis process will be described later.

The sub CPU 130a performs a customer waiting control process in step E400. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a customer waiting time (for example, 60 seconds) has passed in a customer waiting state in which a special symbol variable display or a special game (jackpot game) is not executed, and the customer waiting time has passed. Processing for executing a customer waiting performance for stimulating the player's willingness to play is performed based on what has been done.

In step E500, the sub CPU 130a performs a jackpot announcement effect execution process. Specifically, based on the execution information of the jackpot prediction effect set in the sub-RAM 130c in the jackpot prediction effect determination process to be described later, the degree of expectation for the execution of the jackpot game is suggested (the ) Perform processing for executing a jackpot announcement effect.

In step E600, the sub CPU 130a performs a win-time lighting effect execution process. Specifically, it suggests the degree of expectation that a big win game will be executed based on the execution information of the light emission effect at the time of winning set in the sub RAM 130c in the light emission effect determination process at the time of winning, which will be described later. Expected) processing for executing the lighting effect at the time of winning.

In step E700, the sub CPU 130a performs effect mode update processing. Specifically, the update conditions (game state change, win of mode update lottery, execution of SP/SPSP reach performance where the result is lost, etc.) is established, and if the update condition is established, the production mode is set to any one of a plurality of production modes. Perform processing to update to .

"Production mode" is production mode A to C set in the normal game state (low probability non-time-saving game state), production mode D to E set in the probability variable game state (high probability short-time game state), and time saving There is provided an effect mode F that is set in the game state (low-probability short-time game state). It should be noted that when the power is turned on and the normal game state is controlled (for example, after changing the settings, after clearing the RWM, after confirming the settings, etc.), the effect mode that is set first is always the effect mode A, and the power is turned on. The performance mode that is set first when controlled to the variable probability game state at the time of ON is always the performance mode D, and the performance mode that is first set when controlled to the time-saving game state at the time of power ON. is always in production mode F.

The sub CPU 130a performs output control processing in step E800. Specifically, processing for transmitting various commands set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c to the general control unit 141 and the lamp control unit 150 is performed.

At step E900, the sub CPU 130a restores the register saved in the RWM area of the sub RAM 130c at step E100, and terminates the current timer interrupt process.

(Command analysis processing of production control unit)
Command analysis processing of the effect control unit 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 26 is a flow chart showing command analysis processing in the effect control section 130m.

First, in step E301, the sub CPU 130a refers to the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c to determine whether or not a command has been received. If the command has been received, the process proceeds to step E302, and if the command has not been received, the current command analysis process ends.

In step E302, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the received command is a setting change designation command. If it is a setting change designation command, the process moves to step E303, and if it is not a setting change designation command, the process moves to step E304.

The sub CPU 130a performs setting change notification processing in step E303. Specifically, a process of setting a notification instruction command for starting the setting change notification described above in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c is performed. As a result, the notification instruction command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the processing for executing the setting change notification is performed.

In step E304, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the received command is a setting confirmation designation command. If it is a setting confirmation designation command, the process moves to step E305, and if it is not a setting confirmation designation command, the process moves to step E306.

The sub CPU 130a performs setting confirmation notification processing in step E305. Specifically, a process of setting a notification instruction command for starting the above-described setting confirmation notification in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c is performed. As a result, the notification instruction command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for executing the setting confirmation notification is performed.

In step E306, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the received command is a power-on designation command or a power restoration designation command. If it is a power-on designation command or a power restoration designation command, the process moves to step E307, and if it is not a power-on designation command or a power restoration designation command, the process moves to step E308.

The sub CPU 130a performs power-on notification processing in step E307. Specifically, when the received command is a power-on designation command, the notification instruction command for executing the power-on notification is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c, and the received command is a power restoration designation command. In the case of , a process of setting a notification instruction command for executing the above-described power restoration notification to the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c is performed. As a result, a notification instruction command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, processing for executing power-on notification or power recovery notification, and the first movable effect device 73 (first movable member 73a, first 2 movable member 73b), the second movable effect device 75, and the sub-display device 71 are operated in a predetermined manner, and processing for executing initial light emission, etc., in which the board illumination device 74 is made to emit light in a predetermined manner is performed. will be taken.

In step E308, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the received command is an error system designation command. If it is an error system designation command, the process moves to step E309, and if it is not an error system designation command, the process moves to step E310.

"Error type designation command" includes unrecoverable error designation command, illegal winning error designation command, abnormal winning error designation command, magnetic error designation command, radio wave error designation command, door open error start designation command, door open error end designation command, operation error designation command, tray full error designation command, delivery abnormality designation command, etc. are included. The order of priority of each error is as follows: payout error = tray full error < operation error < door open error < radio wave error = magnetic error < abnormal winning error = fraudulent winning error < unrecoverable error.

The sub CPU 130a performs error notification processing in step E309. Specifically, error notification according to the type of error designation command received (non-recoverable error notification, illegal winning error notification, abnormal winning error notification, magnetic error notification, radio wave error notification, door opening error notification, operation error notification , plate full error notification, dispensation abnormality notification, etc.), a notification instruction command is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c. As a result, the notification instruction command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for executing various error notifications is performed. Note that various error notifications are performed using at least one of error sound output, lamp error light emission, and error image display. Specifically, in the full tray error notification, the lamp does not emit an error light, and in the dispensing abnormality notification, no error sound is output. All of the image display is performed.

In step E310, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the received command is a gaming state designation command. If it is the game state designation command, the process moves to step E311, and if it is not the game state designation command, the process moves to step E312.

The sub CPU 130a performs a game state setting process in step E311. Specifically, the game state stored in the sub-RAM 130c is updated to the game state corresponding to the game state designation command.

In step E312, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the received command is a special symbol storage designation command. If it is a special symbol storage specification command, the process moves to step E313, and if it is not a special symbol storage specification command, the process moves to step E314.

The sub CPU 130a performs a pending number update process in step E313. Specifically, the process of setting the effect instruction command for updating the number of reserved special figures stored in the sub RAM 130c and increasing or decreasing the reserved icon displayed on the main display device 70 to the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c I do. As a result, the effect instruction command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for increasing or decreasing the pending icons displayed on the main display device 70 is performed.

In step E314, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the received command is a prefetch designation command. If it is a prefetching designation command, the received prefetching designation command (special figure scheduled fluctuation pattern) is set in the later-described prefetching storage area of the sub RAM 130c, and then the process is moved to step E315, and if it is not a prefetching designation command, Processing is transferred to step E318.

The "prefetching storage area" is a first prefetching storage unit for sequentially storing prefetching information (such as a special figure scheduled fluctuation pattern) based on the first prefetching designation command, and a second prefetching designation command. and a second prefetch storage unit for storing prefetch information corresponding to the variable display (variation effect) being executed (0th storage unit). The two prefetch storage units are divided into first to fourth storage units, respectively.

The first to fourth storage units of the first prefetch storage unit correspond to the first to fourth storage units of the above-described first special figure determination information reservation storage area, and when the first prefetch designation command is received, the Prefetch information is stored in a storage unit corresponding to one pending number. The look-ahead information stored in each storage section is moved (shifted) to a storage section with a lower number by one each time the variable display (variation effect) of the first special symbol is executed.

The first to fourth storage units of the second prefetch storage unit correspond to the first to fourth storage units of the second special figure determination information reservation storage area described above, respectively, and when the second prefetch designation command is received, the 2 Prefetch information is stored in a storage unit corresponding to the number of reservations. The look-ahead information stored in each storage section is moved (shifted) to a storage section with a lower number by one each time the variable display (variation effect) of the second special symbol is executed.

The storage unit (0th storage unit) corresponds to the special figure determination information execution storage area described above, and when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the first storage unit of the first look-ahead storage unit The prefetch information that moves (shifts) from is stored, and when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the prefetch information that moves (shifts) from the first storage unit of the second prefetch unit is stored. be.

In step E315, the sub CPU 130a performs icon change effect determination processing. Specifically, the degree of expectation ( A process for determining whether or not to execute an icon change effect suggesting a possibility), the effect mode of the icon change effect to be executed, etc. is performed. The details of the icon change effect determination process will be described later.

In step E316-A, the sub CPU 130a performs a win-time lighting effect determination process. Specifically, a special game is played by causing the top lamp 10b in the upper center of the glass frame 4 of the frame lighting device 10 to emit light in a special light emission mode different from the normal light emission mode when the game ball enters the starting hole. A process for determining whether or not to execute a prize-winning light-emitting effect suggesting the degree of expectation that is executed, and the effect mode of the prize-winning light-emitting effect to be executed.

In step E316-B, the sub CPU 130a performs a winning vibration effect determination process. Specifically, by driving the button drive device 17b for a predetermined time (for example, about 1 second) when a game ball enters the starting hole, a win-time vibration effect is executed to suggest the degree of expectation for the execution of a special game. A process for determining whether or not is performed.

In step E317, the sub CPU 130a performs a look-ahead continuous effect determination process. Specifically, by executing a predetermined effect over the variable display (variable effect) of one or more special symbols, it is expected that the big win game will be executed (suggesting the possibility that the big win game will be executed). Whether or not to execute the read-ahead continuous effect, the type of the read-ahead continuous effect to be executed is determined, and the processing of setting the effect instruction command in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c for executing the read-ahead continuous effect is performed. As a result, the effect instruction command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for executing the look-ahead continuous effect is performed. The details of the look-ahead continuous effect determination process will be described later.

In step E318, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the received command is a special symbol designation command. If it is a special design designation command, the process moves to step E319, and if it is not a special design designation command, the process moves to step E320.

The sub CPU 130a performs symbol data determination processing in step E319. Specifically, a process for determining the effect symbols to be stopped and displayed on the main display device 70 as a result of the variable effect, that is, the arrangement (combination) of the effect symbols to be stopped on a predetermined effective line, etc. is performed.

The sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the received command is a special figure variation pattern designation command in step E320. If it is a special figure variation pattern specification command, the process is moved to step E321, and if it is not a special figure variation pattern specification command, the process is moved to step E325.

In step E321, the sub CPU 130a performs variation effect pattern determination processing. Specifically, based on the contents of the special figure variation pattern designation command received, the variable performance pattern, which is the performance mode of the variable performance executed by the performance device including the main display device 70, is determined and the variable performance pattern is indicated. A process of setting the effect instruction command in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c is performed. As a result, the effect instruction command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for executing the variable effect is performed.

In step E322, the sub CPU 130a performs a jackpot announcement effect determination process. Specifically, based on the variable performance pattern determined in step E321, it is determined whether or not to execute a jackpot announcement performance that suggests the degree of expectation that a special game will be executed (makes people expect that a jackpot game will be executed). Alternatively, the process of determining the effect mode (pattern) of the big win notice effect to be executed and setting the execution information of the big win notice effect in a predetermined area of the sub-RAM 130c is performed. The details of the jackpot announcement effect determination process will be described later.

The sub CPU 130a performs icon display mode update processing in step E323. Specifically, processing for starting the icon change effect determined in the icon change effect determination process of step E315, or changing the display mode of the pending icon already displayed or the icon is performed.

In step E324, the sub CPU 130a performs a look-ahead continuous effect execution process. Specifically, a process of setting an effect instruction command for starting the look-ahead continuous effect determined in the look-ahead continuous effect determination process of step E317 or changing the effect mode to the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c is performed. As a result, the effect instruction command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for executing the look-ahead continuous effect is performed.

In step E325, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the received command is a pattern confirmation command (stop command). If it is a pattern confirmation command (stop command), the process moves to step E326, and if it is not a pattern confirmation command (stop command), the process moves to step E327.

In step E326, the sub CPU 130a performs effect symbol stop processing. Specifically, a process of setting an effect instruction command for stopping and displaying the effect symbols in the temporarily stopped state to end the variable effect in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c is performed. As a result, the effect instruction command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for ending the variable effect is performed.

In step E327, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the received command is a special game system designation command. If it is a special game system designation command, the process proceeds to step E328, and if it is not a special game system designation command, this command analysis process is terminated.

The "special game system designation command" includes an opening designation command, a round designation command, a jackpot ending designation command, and the like.

The sub CPU 130a performs special game effect determination processing in step E328. Specifically, in the case of the opening designation command, the processing of setting the performance designation command for determining the opening performance of the jackpot game and executing the opening performance in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c is performed, and in the case of the round designation command, , a process of determining a round effect of the round game and setting an effect instruction command for executing the round effect in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c is performed, and in the case of the ending specifying command, the ending effect of the jackpot game is determined. Then, the command for executing the ending effect is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c, and the current command analysis process is finished. As a result, the effect instruction command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for executing the opening effect, the round effect, and the ending effect is performed.

(Icon change effect determination processing of the effect control unit)
The icon change effect determination processing of the effect control section 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing icon change effect determination processing in the effect control section 130m.

In step E315-1, the sub CPU 130a refers to the prefetch designation command received from the main control board 110, and in step E315-2, determines whether or not the current icon change rendering is executable. If it is during the period during which the icon change effect can be executed, the process proceeds to step E315-3, and if it is not during the period during which the icon change effect can be executed, it is assumed that the icon change effect based on the prefetch designation command received this time is not executed. The process moves to step E315-7.

"Icon change effect executable period" means that the jackpot game is not being executed, and when the first look-ahead designation command based on the winning to the first start port 45 is received, in a non-time-saving state (normal game state) There is a time saving state (probability variable game state or time saving game state) when receiving a second look-ahead designation command based on winning a prize to the second start port 47, and the like.

In step E315-3, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not there is a change scenario in the pre-reservation (reservation storage corresponding to the previously received pre-reading designation command), that is, whether or not the change scenario is set in the pre-read information storage area. determine whether If there is a change scenario, the process proceeds to step E315-7 assuming that the icon change effect based on the prefetch designation command received this time is not executed, and if there is no change scenario, the process moves to step E315-4.

In step E315-4, the sub CPU 130a obtains an icon display mode determination random value for determining the final display mode of the icon to be additionally displayed on the main display device 70 (first image display device), and step E315-5. , an icon final display mode determination table (see FIG. 28) for determining the final display mode of the icon is selected. Details of the icon final display mode determination table will be described later.

The sub CPU 130a determines the final display mode of the icon in step E315-6. Specifically, with reference to the final icon display mode determination table shown in FIG. One icon final display mode is determined from the final display modes. In this process, when the final icon display mode is determined, the light emission color (final light color) of the start port lamp 76 is determined according to the determined final icon display mode. For example, if the final display mode of the icon is "red", the emission color (final emission color) of the starting port lamp 76 is also "red".

In step E315-7, the sub CPU 130a determines the normal icon (white icon), which is the normal display mode, as the final icon display mode.

In step E315-8, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the determined final icon display mode is a special icon (one of blue icon, red icon, and rainbow icon) that executes an icon change effect. If the icon is a special icon that executes an icon change effect, the process moves to step E315-9, and if it is not a display mode that executes an icon change effect, the process moves to step E315-12.

In step E315-9, the sub CPU 130a selects the change scenario determination table (see FIG. 29) for determining the change scenario of the icon change effect. Details of the change scenario determination table will be described later. This change scenario indicates the transition of the display mode from the appearance of the pending icon to the final disappearance of the icon.

In step E315-10, the sub CPU 130a determines a change scenario and sets it in the prefetch information storage area corresponding to the pending storage number counter of the sub RAM 130c. Specifically, referring to the change scenario determination table shown in FIG. 29, based on the final display mode of the icon, the number of pending memories of special symbols corresponding to the prefetch designation command, and the selection rate (%) of each change scenario, One change scenario is determined from a plurality of change scenarios. It should be noted that when the change scenario is determined in this process, the change mode of the emission color of the starting port lamp 76 is determined according to the determined change scenario. For example, when "scenario 01" in FIG. 29 is determined, "white" light is emitted at the time of winning, "white" light is emitted before one variation, and "blue" light is emitted at the variation.

In step E315-11, the sub CPU 130a identifies the winning icon, which is the display mode of the icon first displayed on the main display device 70 (first image display device), from the determined change scenario, and determines the winning icon. icon display command (and starter lamp light emission command) are set in the transmission buffer, and the current icon change effect determination processing is terminated.

As a result, the icon display command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the pending icon in the display mode corresponding to the icon display command is displayed on the main display device 70 (first image display device), or The starting port lamp 76 emits light in a display mode (for example, blue, red) corresponding to the lamp light emission command, or a predetermined sound effect (if it is displayed as a normal icon, it is displayed as a first winning sound, a special icon In some cases, a second winning sound) is output.

In step E315-12, the sub CPU 130a determines a non-change scenario in which the icon change effect is not executed, and sets it in the look-ahead information storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number counter of the sub RAM 130c.

In step E315-13, the sub CPU 130a sets the icon display command for the normal icon in the transmission buffer, and terminates the current icon change effect determination process. As a result, the icon display command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the pending icon in the display mode corresponding to the icon display command is displayed on the main display device 70 (first image display device), or The starter lamp 76 emits light in a display mode (for example, white) corresponding to the lamp light emission command, or a predetermined sound effect (first winning sound) is output.

In the icon change effect determination process of the present embodiment, the icon change effect (suspended icon change effect, the icon change effect) is executed when there is no change scenario in the preceding hold. The icon change effect may be executed when the action is not to be performed, and the icon change effect may not be executed when the ready-to-win effect is to be performed. In this way, the change in the display mode of the pending icon does not occur during the variable effect corresponding to the preceding hold in which the ready-to-win effect is executed, and the hold icon during the variable effect corresponding to the preceding hold in which the ready-to-win effect is not executed. change of the display mode occurs, the ready-to-win effect is not hindered by the icon change effect, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

Also, even if the advance hold includes the reach effect, the icon change effect may be executed, but if the advance hold does not include the reach effect, the reach effect The icon change effect may be executed more easily (executed at a higher rate) than in the case of including the Also, if the precedence hold does not include a specific reach effect (SPSP reach effect, full rotation reach effect), the icon change is more likely than the case that includes a predetermined reach effect (normal reach effect, etc.) The effect may be easily executed (executed at a high rate), or vice versa.

(Icon final display mode determination table)
FIG. 28 is an icon final display mode determination table for determining the icon final display mode in the icon change effect determination process of step E315 described above.

The icon final display mode determination table contains the type of special symbol corresponding to the prefetch designation command, the type of prefetch designation command (scheduled variation pattern), the selection rate (%) of each icon final display mode, and the icon final display mode to be selected. Display modes are associated with each other, and as a reference, the effect contents of the planned variation pattern corresponding to the prefetch designation command are described.

The final icon display mode includes a normal icon (a white icon whose shape is set for each production mode) that does not suggest the degree of expectation for a big win, and a special icon that suggests the degree of expectation for a big win (common to multiple production modes). shape (blue icon, red icon, rainbow icon) is set. In addition, the degree of expectation for a big win related to the special icon is higher in the order of blue icon<red icon (SP reach or higher confirmed)<rainbow icon (big win confirmed).

(Change scenario determination table)
FIG. 29 is a change scenario determination table for determining an icon change scenario in the icon change effect determination process of step E315 described above.

In the change scenario determination table, the final display mode of the icon, the number of reserved special symbols corresponding to the prefetch designation command, the selection rate (%) of each change scenario, and the change scenario to be selected are associated. The advance change in each change scenario and the update mode of the icon in the change are described.

"Advance variation" is a variable display (variation effect) that is executed based on the special figure determination information stored earlier than the special figure determination information corresponding to the newly received look-ahead specified command. "The variation" is a variation display (variation effect) that is executed based on the special figure determination information corresponding to the newly received prefetch designation command.

In the change scenario, the display mode of the icon does not change during the execution of the preliminary change (the pending icon change effect is not executed), but changes during the change (the icon change effect is executed). Scenarios (for example, scenario 01, etc.) and icon display modes change during execution of prior variation (suspended icon change effect is executed) but do not change during execution of the change (the icon change effect is Scenarios (for example, scenario 02, etc.) that are not executed), and icon display modes change during execution of prior variation and during execution of the variation (suspended icon change effect and icon change effect are executed ) scenarios (for example, scenario 15, etc.) are set.

The change scenario is determined regardless of whether it is in the normal game state (first special symbol icon) or in the specific game state (second special symbol icon). In the case of the state (icon of the second special symbol), the rate at which the icon changes due to the change is higher than the rate at which the icon changes due to the prior change (for example, 20:80, 0:100, etc.). may In addition, the rate at which the icon changes due to the change is set to be higher in the specific game state (second special symbol icon) than in the normal game state (first special symbol icon). may

(Change pattern determination table)
FIG. 30 is a change pattern determination table for determining the change pattern of the pending/corresponding icon in the icon display mode update process of step E323 described above.

FIG. 30(a) is a diagram showing a change pattern determination table for a suspended icon that is referred to when determining a change pattern of a suspended icon, and FIGS. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a change pattern determination table for the icon referred to when determining .

The change pattern determination table corresponds to the mode of suspension/relevant icon change in the current variable effect, the variation effect pattern, the selection rate of each suspension/relevant icon change pattern, and the type of selected deferment/relevant icon change pattern. For reference, the change effect generation timing and change stage of the hold/relevant icon in each hold/relevant icon change pattern are described.

The hold/relevant icon change pattern includes a normal change pattern in which the display mode of the hold icon changes with the output of a sound effect, and a character A displayed on the main display device 70 that triggers the change of the hold/relevant icon. A character A action change pattern in which a trigger effect is performed to change the display mode of the hold/relevant icon, and a trigger effect to trigger the change in the hold/relevant icon by the character B displayed on the main display device 70 are performed. A character B action change pattern in which the display mode of the icon is changed and the character C displayed on the main display device 70 perform a trigger effect that triggers the change of the icon, thereby changing the display mode of the icon. A character C action change pattern and a character D action change pattern in which a character D displayed on a main display device 70 performs a trigger performance that triggers a change of the icon to change the display mode of the icon is set. .

The change timing of the hold icon is classified in relation to the progress state of the variable production, and is classified into the production period before the reach that is executed at the beginning of the fluctuation production. During normal reach and after normal reach, which are classified into reach production periods that may be executed after.

As a change mode of the pending icon, "1UP" means that the expected jackpot level changes to a display mode that is one step higher, such as changing a white icon to a blue icon or a blue icon to a red icon. means that “2UP” means that the expectation of a big win changes to a display mode that is two levels higher, for example, a white icon changes to a red icon or a blue icon changes to a rainbow icon. Further, "SP suggestive" means that a suggestive effect suggesting that the SP ready-to-win effect will be executed by the character that has performed the opportunity effect is executed.

The first feature of the effects using the tables shown in FIGS. 28 to 30 is that, in the normal reach variation effect, which has a lower expectation for big hits than the SP reach change effect, the icon change effect targeting this normal reach change effect is executed. The big hit expectation is higher when the icon change effect for the normal reach variation effect is executed than when it is not performed. By doing so, it is possible to raise the player's expectation of whether or not the look-ahead effect (here, the icon change effect) will be executed, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

As a second feature related to the production using the tables shown in FIGS. Also, the ratio of executing the normal reach fluctuation effect after the icon change effect is executed is higher than the ratio of executing the normal reach fluctuation effect after the icon change effect is executed. The ratio of execution of the SP reach performance is higher, and the ratio of execution of the SP reach performance after the icon change performance is executed is higher than the ratio of execution of the SP reach fluctuation performance after the icon change performance is executed. When the jackpot game is not executed, the ratio of executing the SP reach fluctuation performance after the icon change performance is executed is higher than the ratio of executing the normal reach fluctuation performance after the icon change performance is executed. is lower, and the ratio of executing the SP ready-to-win effect after the icon changing effect is executed is lower than the ratio of executing the SP ready-to-win effect after the icon changing effect is executed. be done. By doing so, it is possible to raise the player's expectation of whether or not the look-ahead effect (here, the icon change effect) will be executed, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

As a third feature related to the production using the tables shown in FIGS. In this case, the icon change effect is executed (easily) at a high rate. By doing so, the ready-to-win effect and the icon change effect are less likely to interfere with each other, making it possible to improve the amusement of the game. It should be noted that when the SP reach variation effect or SPSP reach effect is executed, the icon change effect is executed at a higher rate during normal reach than after normal reach (during SP reach effect, during SPSP reach effect) ( However, the icon change effect may not be executed after normal reach.

As a fourth feature relating to the production using the tables shown in FIGS. In this case, the pending icon change effect is executed (easier to occur) at a higher rate. By doing so, the ready-to-win effect and the pending icon change effect are less likely to interfere with each other, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game. It should be noted that when the SP reach variation effect or SPSP reach effect is executed, the icon change effect is executed at a higher rate during normal reach than after normal reach (during SP reach effect, during SPSP reach effect) ( However, the icon change effect may not be executed after normal reach.

As a fifth feature related to the effects using the tables shown in FIGS. There are different points depending on the content of the change (character A for white→blue, character B for blue→red). By doing so, it is possible to attract the player's interest in which suggestive effect is to be executed, and to improve the amusement of the game.

As a sixth feature related to the effects using the tables shown in FIGS. Different depending on the content of the change (character A for white→blue, character B for blue→red, character C for white→red, and character D for blue→rainbow). be done. By doing so, it is possible to attract the player's interest in which suggestive effect is to be executed, and to improve the amusement of the game.

A seventh feature relating to the effects using the tables shown in FIGS. 28 to 30 is that when the icon changes to a red icon, the SP ready-to-win effect with a higher expectation of big win than the normal ready-to-win effect is executed. However, if the icon is a red icon, the SP ready-to-win effect can be executed regardless of whether the suggestion effect (SP suggestion) is executed or not. points. By doing so, it is possible to arouse the player's delight at the execution of the SP ready-to-win effect, thereby making it possible to improve the amusement of the game.

(Look-ahead continuous effect determination processing of the effect control unit)
The look-ahead continuous effect determination process in the effect control unit 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 31 is a flow chart showing the look-ahead continuous effect determination process in the effect control section 130m.

The sub CPU 130a determines whether or not a prefetch designation command has been received from the main control board 110 in step E317-1. When the prefetching designation command is received, the processing is moved to step E317-2, and when the prefetching designation command is not received, the current prefetching continuous effect determination processing is terminated.

In step E317-2, the sub CPU 130a refers to the received prefetch designation command, and grasps whether or not it is a jackpot, the type of jackpot game, and the content of the effect (scheduled variation pattern).

At step E317-3, it is determined whether or not the present time is the period during which the look-ahead zone effect can be executed. If it is during the look-ahead zone effect executable period, the process proceeds to step E317-4, and if it is not the look-ahead zone effect executable period, it is assumed that the look-ahead zone effect based on the look-ahead designation command received this time is not executed. The process moves to step E317-6.

"Prefetching Zone Effect" refers to effecting during zone over one or more variable effects (display of prefetching zone background image, display of blue zone image or red heat zone image, output of zone BGM or heat zone BGM). This is an effect that continuously suggests the degree of expectation that a special game will be executed by a background image, character information, and color information (expected value information), and is a kind of look-ahead continuous effect.

The ``executable period of the look-ahead zone effect'' includes, for example, when there is no precedent reservation in which the look-ahead zone effect is executed, and when the jackpot game is not in progress. In addition, the look-ahead zone effect can be executed in the normal game state, and the look-ahead zone effect cannot be executed in a state other than the normal game state. A zone production may be made executable.

In step E317-4, the sub CPU 130a selects the look-ahead zone effect scenario determination table (see FIG. 31) for determining the scenario of the look-ahead zone effect. Details of the look-ahead zone effect scenario determination table will be described later.

The sub CPU 130a determines a look-ahead zone effect scenario in step E317-5. Specifically, referring to the look-ahead zone effect scenario determination table shown in FIG. 32, the number of special symbols held corresponding to the look-ahead designation command, the type of look-ahead designation command (scheduled variation pattern), and the selection rate of each advance notice scenario Based on (%), one look-ahead zone effect scenario is determined from a plurality of look-ahead zone effect scenarios.

In step E317-6, the sub CPU 130a determines a non-execution scenario of the look-ahead zone effect as the effect scenario in which the look-ahead zone effect is not executed.

In step E317-7, the sub CPU 130a sets the determined look-ahead zone effect scenario in the look-ahead information storage area corresponding to the pending number counter of the sub-RAM 130c. As a result, the look-ahead zone effect scenario is referred to in the look-ahead continuous effect execution process of step E324 described above, and the process for executing the look-ahead zone effect is performed.

In step E317-8, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the current period is during which the look-ahead effect presentation can be executed. If it is during the look-ahead effect rendering executable period, the process proceeds to step E317-9, and if it is not during the look-ahead effect rendering executable period, it is determined that the look-ahead effect rendering based on the look-ahead designation command received this time is not executed. The process moves to step E317-11.

"Look-ahead effect production" means effect production (display of light-emitting effect images and effect sound effects around the three production patterns 70a that start the variable display over one or more variable productions (including fluctuation production that becomes a big hit) output for a predetermined period (for example, 1 second)) to intermittently suggest the degree of expectation that a special game will be executed by light-emitting effect images and sound information (light-emitting display effect at the start of fluctuation). , It is a kind of look-ahead continuous production.

The "executable period of the look-ahead effect production" includes, for example, that there is no pre-reading effect production to be executed in the preceding reservation, that the jackpot game is not being executed, and the like. In addition, it is possible to make the look-ahead effect production executable in the normal game state and make the look-ahead effect production impossible in other than the normal game state, or make the look-ahead effect production impossible in the normal game state and make the look-ahead effect production in the normal game state non-executable. Effect production may be made executable.

In step E317-9, the sub CPU 130a selects a look-ahead effect rendering scenario determination table (see FIG. 32) for determining a look-ahead effect rendering scenario. Details of the look-ahead effect rendering scenario determination table will be described later.

The sub CPU 130a determines a look-ahead effect production scenario in step E317-10. Specifically, referring to the look-ahead effect production scenario determination table shown in FIG. 33, the number of reserved special symbols corresponding to the look-ahead designation command, the type of scheduled variation pattern indicated by the look-ahead designation command, and the selection rate of each production scenario Based on (%), one look-ahead effect presentation scenario is determined from a plurality of look-ahead effect presentation scenarios.

In step E317-11, the sub CPU 130a determines a non-execution scenario of the look-ahead effect rendering as the rendering scenario in which the look-ahead effect rendering is not executed.

In step E317-12, the sub CPU 130a sets the determined look-ahead effect presentation scenario in the look-ahead information storage area corresponding to the pending number counter of the sub RAM 130c. As a result, the look-ahead effect presentation scenario is referred to in the look-ahead continuous presentation execution process of step E324 described above, and the process for executing the look-ahead effect presentation is performed. When this process ends, the current look-ahead continuous effect determination process ends.

(Look-ahead Zone Production Scenario Decision Table)
FIG. 32 is a diagram showing a look-ahead zone effect scenario determination table for determining a look-ahead zone effect scenario in the look-ahead continuous effect determination process of step E317 described above.

In the look-ahead zone production scenario determination table, the number of reserved special symbols corresponding to the look-ahead designation command, the scheduled variation pattern indicated by the look-ahead designation command, the selection rate (%) of the production scenario for each look-ahead zone production, and the look-ahead to be selected Effect scenarios of zone effects are associated with each other, and for reference, advance variations in each effect scenario and effect modes of look-ahead zone effects in the changes are described.

"Advance variation" is a variable display (variation effect) that is executed based on the special figure determination information stored earlier than the special figure determination information corresponding to the newly received look-ahead specified command. "The variation" is a variation display (variation effect) that is executed based on the special figure determination information corresponding to the newly received prefetch designation command.

"Zone" is the execution of normal effects during the zone (display of the look-ahead zone background image, display of the blue zone image, output of the zone BGM). This means that a heat zone middle effect (display of a look-ahead zone background image, display of a red heat zone image, output of a heat zone BGM) with a higher degree of expectation for a big win than the effect is executed.

The look-ahead zone effect scenario includes a non-execution scenario (for example, scenario 00) in which the look-ahead zone effect is not executed, and a scenario in which the zone effect is executed during the change without executing the zone effect during the preliminary change ( For example, a scenario 01) and a scenario (for example, scenario 02) in which an in-zone effect is executed during the preliminary variation and during the variation are set.

The first feature of the look-ahead zone effect scenario determination table shown in FIG. The point is that an effect scenario is set in which the mode progresses (changes) to an effect mode with a high degree of expectation for execution of the special game. By doing so, it is possible to make the player anticipate whether or not the effect mode of the effect in the zone progresses (changes), and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

A second feature of the look-ahead zone effect scenario determination table shown in FIG. 32 is that the effect state of the look-ahead zone effect progresses (changes) more easily with the change than with the advance change. By doing so, it is possible to easily maintain the player's sense of expectation for a long period of time, and the player's sense of expectation can be brought to the climax in the fluctuation, thereby making it possible to improve the interest of the game. It should be noted that the advance variation may make it easier for the presentation mode of the look-ahead zone presentation to progress (develop) than the variation.

(Look-ahead effect production scenario determination table)
FIG. 33 is a diagram showing a look-ahead effect presentation scenario determination table for determining a look-ahead effect presentation scenario in the look-ahead continuous presentation determination process of step E317 described above.

In the look-ahead effect production scenario determination table, the number of reserved special symbols corresponding to the look-ahead designation command, the scheduled variation pattern indicated by the look-ahead designation command, the selection rate (%) of the production scenario for each look-ahead effect production, and the look-ahead to be selected Effect production scenarios are associated with each other, and for reference, advance variations in each production scenario and the production mode of the look-ahead effect production in the variations are described.

"Advance variation" is a variable display (variation effect) that is executed based on the special figure determination information stored earlier than the special figure determination information corresponding to the newly received look-ahead specified command. "The variation" is a variation display (variation effect) that is executed based on the special figure determination information corresponding to the newly received prefetch designation command.

The “blue effect” means that a blue light-emitting effect image is displayed around the production pattern 70a and a blue effect sound is output. To display a red light emission effect image with a higher expectation for a big win than the effect image and to output a red effect sound.

The look-ahead effect production scenario includes a non-execution scenario (for example, scenario 00) in which the look-ahead effect production is not executed, and a scenario in which the effect production is executed during the fluctuation without executing the effect production during the advance fluctuation (for example, Scenario 01) and a scenario (for example, scenario 02) in which an effect presentation is executed during the prior variation and during the variation are set.

The first feature of the look-ahead effect production scenario determination table shown in FIG. The point is that an effect scenario is set that progresses (changes) to an effect mode with a high degree of expectation for execution of the special game. By doing so, it is possible to make the player anticipate whether or not the presentation mode of the effect presentation will progress (change), and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

A second feature of the look-ahead effect presentation scenario determination table shown in FIG. 33 is that the presentation state of the look-ahead effect presentation progresses (changes) more easily with the variation than with the advance variation. By doing so, it is possible to easily maintain the player's sense of expectation for a long period of time, and the player's sense of expectation can be brought to the climax in the fluctuation, thereby making it possible to improve the interest of the game. It should be noted that the advance variation may make it easier for the presentation mode of the look-ahead effect presentation to progress (develop) than the variation.

In addition, as a production mode of the look-ahead effect production, an effect image of a type that confirms the execution of the jackpot game (for example, a rainbow effect) may be provided, or an effect image of a type that has a lower expectation of a big hit than the blue effect image (for example, , white effect) may be provided.

Also, in the normal game state, while making it possible to execute the look-ahead effect production, in the specific game state (at least one of the time-saving game state and the probability variable game state) in which the right-handed image is displayed, the look-ahead effect production is not executed. can be

Also, in the normal game state, the look-ahead effect production is not executed, while in the specific game state (at least one of the time-saving game state and the probability variable game state) in which the right-handed image is displayed, the look-ahead effect production is executed. good too.

In addition, in the look-ahead effect production, the light-emitting effect image is not displayed around the three production patterns 70a, but only around the production pattern 70a in one of the left, middle, and right columns (for example, the center row). may be displayed.

Further, when displaying the light-emitting effect image in the look-ahead effect rendering, the lighting device 10 for the frame is caused to emit light in the effect light-emitting mode (for example, the same color as the display color of the light-emitting effect image displayed around the performance pattern 70a). can be

(Jackpot announcement effect determination processing of the effect control unit)
Using FIG. 34, the jackpot announcement effect determination processing of the effect control unit 130m will be described. FIG. 34 is a flow chart showing the jackpot announcement effect determination processing in the effect control section 130m.

In step E322-1, the sub CPU 130a refers to the variable effect pattern executed in the current variable effect, and in step E322-2, the notice pattern of the dialogue notice effect to be executed during the pre-reach effect period (during normal fluctuation). A dialog announcement pattern is determined using a dialog announcement effect determination table (see FIG. 35) for determining . Specifically, with reference to the dialog announcement pattern determination table shown in FIG. 35, the dialog announcement pattern is determined based on the big hit determination result, the current variation performance pattern, and the selection rate (%) of each dialog announcement pattern.

``Dialogue announcement effect'' indicates the degree of expectation for a big win on the main display device 70 in response to the operation of the effect button 17 during the effective period (for example, 3 seconds) that occurs during the pre-reach performance period (normal fluctuation). This is a type of big hit announcement effect in which a dialogue image is displayed and a sound corresponding to the dialogue image is output from the audio output device 9. - 特許庁It should be noted that the dialogue announcement effect is a button operation effect in which a promotion effect to prompt the operation of the effect button 17 is executed during the effective period, and is executed when the effective period elapses even if the effect button 17 is not operated. It is designed to be

In step E322-3, the sub CPU 130a sets the execution information of the dialogue announcement effect corresponding to the dialogue announcement pattern in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 130c. The execution information of the dialogue advance notice effect is referred to in the jackpot advance notice effect execution processing of step E500, and the dialogue notice effect is executed at a predetermined timing. The details of the dialog announcement pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E322-4, the sub CPU 130a sets the character product announcement pattern determination table (see FIG. 36(a)) for determining the announcement pattern of the character product announcement effect to be executed during the pre-reach effect period (during normal fluctuation). is used to determine the character product announcement pattern. Specifically, with reference to the role announcement pattern determination table shown in FIG. determine the pattern.

The "role item announcement effect" means that the first movable member 73a performs a predetermined operation (a small descent or a large descent described later) at a predetermined timing during the pre-reach performance period (normal fluctuation) to increase the expectation of a big hit. It is one of the suggested jackpot foreshadowing productions.

In step E322-5, the sub CPU 130a sets execution information for the role product announcement effect corresponding to the role product announcement pattern in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 130c. The execution information of this character product announcement effect is referred to in the jackpot announcement effect execution process of step E500, and the role product announcement effect is executed at a predetermined timing. Details of the role product announcement pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E322-6, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the current variable effect pattern is a variable effect pattern capable of executing a blackout effect. Specifically, it is determined whether or not it is a variable effect pattern in which a reach effect equal to or greater than the normal reach is executed. If it is a variable effect pattern that can execute a blackout effect, the process proceeds to step E322-7, and if it is not a variable effect pattern that can execute a blackout effect, it is determined that the blackout effect is not executed, and step E322. -9 is processed.

In step E322-7, the sub CPU 130a uses the blackout effect pattern determination table (see FIG. 36(b)) for determining the effect pattern of the blackout effect to be executed during the ready-to-win effect period (normal reach). Determine an out production pattern. Specifically, referring to the blackout effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. determine the pattern.

"Blackout effect" means that the main display device 70 turns dark during the ready-to-win effect period (normal reach), and the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period (for example, 2 seconds) that occurs during the darkening period. , is a kind of jackpot announcement effect in which a development effect is executed to suggest whether or not it will develop into an SP ready-to-win effect. Note that the blackout effect is a button operation effect in which a promotion effect that prompts the operation of the effect button 17 is executed during the effective period, and is executed when the effective period elapses even if the effect button 17 is not operated. It is designed to be

In step E322-8, the sub CPU 130a sets execution information for the blackout effect corresponding to the blackout effect pattern in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 130c. The execution information of this blackout effect is referred to in the jackpot announcement effect execution process of step E500, and the blackout effect is executed at a predetermined timing. Details of the blackout effect pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E322-9, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the current variable effect pattern is a variable effect pattern capable of executing a cut-in effect. Specifically, it is determined whether or not it is a variable effect pattern in which the SP ready-to-win effect is executed. If it is a variable performance pattern that can execute a cut-in performance, the process is shifted to step E322-10, and if it is not a variable performance pattern that can execute a cut-in performance, the cut-in performance is not executed, and step E322. -12 is processed.

In step E322-10, the sub CPU 130a determines the cut-in effect pattern using the cut-in effect pattern determination table (see FIG. 36(c)) for determining the effect pattern of the cut-in effect to be executed during the SP ready-to-win effect. to decide. Specifically, referring to the cut-in effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. determine the pattern.

"Cut-in production" is a development suggestive production that suggests whether or not to develop into SPSP ready-to-win production in response to operation of production button 17 during an effective period (for example, 1 second) that occurs during SP ready-to-win production. is a kind of jackpot announcement production that is executed. It should be noted that the cut-in effect is a button operation effect in which a promotion effect to prompt the operation of the effect button 17 is executed during the effective period, and is executed when the effective period elapses even if the effect button 17 is not operated. It is designed to be

In step E322-11, the sub CPU 130a sets the cut-in effect execution information corresponding to the cut-in effect pattern in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 130c. The execution information of this cut-in effect is referred to in the jackpot announcement effect execution process of step E500, and the cut-in effect is executed. Details of the cut-in effect pattern determination table will be described later.

It should be noted that the "dialogue notice effect", the "blackout effect", and the "cut-in effect" are executed when the effective period elapses even if the effect button 17 is not operated. no problem.

In step E322-12, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the current variable effect pattern is a variable effect pattern capable of executing a fixed effect. Specifically, it is determined whether or not it is a variable effect pattern in which the SPSP ready-to-win effect is executed. If it is a variable effect pattern that can execute a fixed effect, the process is moved to step E322-13, and if it is not a variable effect pattern that can execute a fixed effect, the process proceeds to step E322-15 assuming that the fixed effect is not executed. transfer processing.

In step E322-13, the sub CPU 130a determines the final effect pattern using the final effect pattern determination table (see FIG. 36(d)) for determining the effect pattern of the final effect to be executed during the SPSP ready-to-win effect. . Specifically, referring to the determined effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 36(d), the determined effect pattern is determined based on the jackpot determination result, the current variable effect pattern, and the selection rate (%) of each determined effect pattern. do.

"Determined effect" is a result of suggesting (notifying) whether or not a jackpot game will be executed in response to the operation of the effect button 17 during the effective period (for example, 4 seconds) that occurs during the SPSP ready-to-win effect. It is a kind of jackpot announcement production in which a suggestive production is executed. Note that the decision effect is a button operation effect in which a promotion effect that prompts the operation of the effect button 17 is executed during the effective period, and is executed when the effective period elapses even if the effect button 17 is not operated. It has become so. In addition, the decision production is not performed only during the SPSP reach production, but may be carried out during the normal reach production, the SP reach production, etc. In that case, the normal reach production <SP reach production <SPSP reach production is performed in this order. It is preferable to increase the execution ratio of the determined effect.

In addition, for the final effect, the first movable member 73a and the second movable member 73b are lowered to the effect position (large descent described later), and the second movable member 73b moves in the left-right direction. When the board illumination device 74, the effect button light-emitting LED, etc. emit rainbow colors and a success image (an image including rainbow colors) is displayed on the main display device 70, the determination suggests that a jackpot game will be executed. A jackpot game is executed by displaying a success performance and a failure image (image not including rainbow color) on the main display device 70 without the first movable member 73a and the second movable member 73b descending to the performance position. There is a decided failure production that suggests that it will not be done.

In step E322-14, the sub CPU 130a sets execution information for a determined effect corresponding to the determined effect pattern in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 130c. The execution information of this determined effect is referred to in the jackpot announcement effect execution process of step E500, and the determined effect is executed. The details of the determined effect pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E322-15, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the current variable effect pattern is a variable effect pattern capable of executing a fixed effect. If it is a variable performance pattern that can execute a fixed performance, the process is shifted to step E322-16, and if it is not a variable performance pattern that can execute a fixed performance, the current jackpot announcement performance is performed assuming that the fixed performance is not executed. End decision processing.

In step E322-16, the sub CPU 130a determines a confirmed effect pattern using a confirmed effect pattern determination table (see FIG. 37) for determining the effect pattern of the confirmed effect to be executed at a predetermined timing during the variable effect. . Specifically, referring to the definite pattern determination table shown in FIG. 37, the definite effect pattern is determined based on the big hit determination result, the current variable effect pattern, and the selection rate (%) of each definite effect pattern.

"Fixed production" is a jackpot announcement production in which a fixed sound (cuin cuin) that definitely notifies that a big win will be made is output during the execution of a variable production that will result in a big win, and the firing handle 15 emits rainbow colors. is a kind of

In step E322-17, the sub CPU 130a sets the execution information of the confirmed effect corresponding to the confirmed effect pattern in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 130c. The execution information of this fixed effect is referred to in the jackpot announcement effect execution process of step E500, and the fixed effect is executed at various timings. Details of the fixed effect pattern determination table will be described later.

(Dialogue notice pattern decision table)
FIG. 35 is a dialog announcement pattern determination table for determining a dialog announcement pattern in the jackpot announcement effect determination process of step E322 described above.

The word notice pattern determination table is associated with the jackpot determination result, the variation effect pattern, the selection rate (%) of each word notice pattern, and the effect contents (effective period, word notice effect contents) of each word notice pattern. Note that the dialog announcement pattern 01 is a dialog announcement pattern in which the dialog announcement effect is not executed.

"Non-protruding (white)" in the button image column indicates that an operation prompting image imitating the effect button 17 in a non-protruding state (normal mode) that emits white light during the effective period is displayed.
"Non-protruding (white)" in the button state column indicates that the effect button 17 emits white light while remaining in the non-protruding state (normal mode) during the valid period.

"Normal lines (black)" in the line content column indicates that one of a plurality of normal lines for which it is unclear whether or not a jackpot game is likely to be executed is displayed in black letters. .
"Chance (black)" indicates that one of a plurality of chance lines suggesting the possibility of a jackpot game being executed is displayed in black letters.
“Reach (black)” indicates that one reach speech that confirms execution of the reach effect is displayed in black characters.
“Reach (red)” indicates that one ready-to-win line that confirms execution of the ready-to-win effect is displayed in red letters.
"Hot (red)" indicates that one hot line is displayed in red letters, suggesting that there is a high possibility that a jackpot game will be executed.
“Extreme heat (gold)” indicates that one intense heat line is displayed in gold letters, suggesting that there is a strong possibility that a jackpot game will be executed.
“Confirmation (rainbow)” indicates that one confirmation line confirming that a jackpot game will be executed is displayed in gold letters.

The expected degree of jackpot for each line is in the order of normal lines < chance lines < reach lines (black letters) < reach lines (red letters) < hot lines (red letters) < hot lines (gold letters) < confirmed lines (rainbow letters) is set to increase with

"None" in the button vibration column indicates that the effect button 17 does not vibrate when the lines are displayed by the operation of the effect button 17 or the expiration of the effective period.
"Weak vibration (1 second)" indicates that the production button 17 vibrates with intensity: weak for 1 second when a line is displayed by operating the production button 17 or by the elapse of the effective period.
"Medium vibration (1 second)" indicates that the production button 17 vibrates for 1 second at medium intensity when a line is displayed by operating the production button 17 or by the elapse of the effective period.
"Strong vibration (1 second)" indicates that the effect button 17 vibrates with intensity: strong for 1 second when a line is displayed by operating the effect button 17 or the valid period elapses.

The degree of expectation for the jackpot of each vibration is set to increase in the order of weak vibration<medium vibration<strong vibration.

(Accessory notice pattern decision table)
FIG. 36(a) is a character product announcement pattern determination table for determining a character product announcement pattern in the jackpot announcement effect determination process of step E322 described above.

The jackpot determination result, the variable performance pattern, the selection rate (%) of each character announcement pattern, and the contents of the character announcement (execution timing, operation mode) of each character announcement pattern are associated with the character announcement pattern determination table. ing. Note that the character product announcement pattern 01 is a character product announcement pattern in which the character product announcement effect is not executed.

"Slight descent" in the operation mode column indicates that the movable effect device 73 moves (lowers) from the standby position to an intermediate position slightly below the standby position, and then returns to the standby position.
"Large descent" means that the movable effect device 73 moves (falls) from the standby position to the effect position below the intermediate position, and then returns to the standby position.

The jackpot expectation degree of each operation mode is set so as to increase in the order of small fall<large fall. Although the execution timing of the character product announcement effect is only at the start of fluctuation, the character object announcement effect may be executed at other timings.

"None" in the button vibration column indicates that the effect button 17 does not vibrate when the effect image is displayed by the operation of the effect button 17 or the expiration of the effective period.
"Yes (1 second)" in the column of button vibration indicates that the effect button 17 vibrates for 1 second together with the operation of the movable effect device 73 at the start of fluctuation.

(Blackout production pattern determination table)
FIG. 36(b) is a blackout effect pattern determination table for determining a blackout effect pattern in the jackpot effect determination process of step E322 described above.

The blackout effect pattern determination table is associated with the jackpot determination result, the variable effect pattern, the selection rate (%) of each blackout effect pattern, and the effect contents of each blackout effect pattern (effective period, blackout effect contents). ing. Note that the blackout effect pattern 01 is a blackout effect pattern in which no blackout effect is executed.

"Non-protruding (white)" in the button image column indicates that an operation prompting image imitating the effect button 17 in a non-protruding state (normal mode) that emits white light during the effective period is displayed.
"Non-protruding (white)" in the button state column indicates that the effect button 17 emits white light while remaining in the non-protruding state (normal mode) during the valid period.

"Development failure" in the effect image column indicates that the development failure effect suggesting that the development to the SP ready-to-win effect fails and ends in the normal reach is to be executed.
The “weak development effect” indicates that the weak development effect, which suggests that the development to the SP ready-to-win effect is successful and that the SP ready-to-win effect is executed, is executed.
The “strong development effect” indicates that the weak development effect is executed, which suggests that the development to the SP reach effect is successful and the SP reach effect is executed.
"None" in the button vibration column indicates that the effect button 17 does not vibrate when the effect image is displayed by the operation of the effect button 17 or the expiration of the effective period.
"Yes (3 seconds)" in the button vibration column indicates that the effect button 17 vibrates for 3 seconds when the effect image is displayed by the operation of the effect button 17 or the expiration of the effective period.

The degree of expectation for a big hit of each effect image is set so as to increase in the order of failure of development<light development effect<strong development effect.

(Cut-in effect pattern determination table)
FIG. 36(c) is a cut-in effect pattern determination table for determining a cut-in effect pattern in the jackpot effect determination process of step E322 described above.

The cut-in effect pattern determination table is associated with the jackpot determination result, the variable effect pattern, the selection rate (%) of each cut-in effect pattern, and the effect contents of each cut-in effect pattern (effective period, cut-in effect contents). ing.

"None" in the button image column indicates that the operation prompting image imitating the effect button 17 is not displayed during the valid period.
"Non-protruding (dark)" in the button state column indicates that the production button 17 does not emit light while remaining in the non-protruding state (normal mode) during the effective period.

“Weak cut-in” in the effect image column indicates that a weak cut-in image suggesting that a jackpot game may be executed is displayed.
“Strong cut-in” indicates that a strong cut-in image is displayed that suggests that a jackpot game may be executed.
"None" in the button vibration column indicates that the effect button 17 does not vibrate when the effect image is displayed by the operation of the effect button 17 or the expiration of the effective period.

The degree of expectation for a big hit of each effect image is set so as to increase in the order of weak cut-in<strong cut-in.

(decision production pattern decision table)
FIG. 36(d) is a determined effect pattern determination table for determining a determined effect pattern in the big hit announcement effect determination process of step E322 described above.

The determined performance pattern determination table is associated with a jackpot determination result, a variable performance pattern, a selection rate (%) of each determined performance pattern, and performance contents (effective period, determined performance content) of each determined performance pattern. The fixed effect patterns 01-02 are fixed effect patterns in which a fixed failure effect is executed, and the fixed effect patterns 11-12 are fixed effect patterns in which a fixed success effect is executed.

"Non-protruding (white)" in the button image column indicates that an operation prompting image imitating the effect button 17 in a non-protruding state (normal mode) that emits white light during the effective period is displayed.
“Protruding (white)” indicates that an operation prompting image imitating the production button 17 in a protruding state (specific mode) that emits white light during the effective period is displayed.
“Protrusion (rainbow)” indicates that an operation prompting image imitating the effect button 17 in a protruding state (specific mode) that emits rainbow light during the effective period is displayed.

"Non-protruding (white)" in the button state column indicates that the effect button 17 emits white light while remaining in the non-protruding state (normal mode) during the valid period.
"Protrusion (white)" indicates that the production button 17 is in a protruded state (specific state) during the valid period, and operation prompting light emission that emits white light is performed.
“Protrusion (rainbow)” indicates that the production button 17 is in a protruding state (specific state) during the valid period, and operation prompting light emission that emits rainbow light is performed.

The expected degree of jackpot for each button image and button state is set to increase in the order of non-protruding (white)<protruding (white)<protruding (rainbow).

The “failure image” in the effect image column indicates that a determined failure image is displayed that suggests that the jackpot game will not be executed (≈loss).
The “success image” indicates that a determined success image is displayed to notify that a jackpot game will be executed.
"None" in the button vibration column indicates that the effect button 17 does not vibrate when the effect image is displayed by the operation of the effect button 17 or the expiration of the effective period.
"Yes (5 seconds)" indicates that the effect button 17 vibrates at a high intensity for 5 seconds when a success image is displayed by operating the effect button 17 or the expiration of the effective period.

In addition, even if the failure image is displayed, it may be notified that the resurrection effect is executed after that and the jackpot game is executed, so that the display of the failure image = losing It has become.

(Fixed production pattern decision table)
FIG. 37 is a confirmed effect pattern determination table for determining a confirmed effect pattern in the jackpot effect determination process of step E322 described above.

The determined effect pattern determination table is associated with a jackpot determination result, a variable effect pattern, a selection rate (%) of each determined effect pattern, and execution timing of the determined effect in each determined effect pattern. Note that the confirmed effect pattern 01 is a confirmed effect pattern in which no confirmed effect is executed. In addition, the hatched part in the column of the execution timing of the fixed effect (for example, the hatched part in the column of (ultra) shortened variation line during normal reach, during effect, effective 2, development effect, etc.) It is a production content that is not executed (does not exist) in the variable production pattern.

In addition, "effective 1" in the column of the execution timing of the fixed effect indicates the effective period of the dialogue announcement effect that may be executed during the normal fluctuation (pre-reach effect).
"Valid 2" indicates the effective period of the blackout effect that may be executed during the normal reach effect.
"Valid 3" indicates the effective period of the cut-in effect that may be executed during the SP ready-to-win effect.
"Valid 4" indicates the valid period in the determined effect executed during the SPSP ready-to-win effect.
“◯” indicates the timing at which the fixed effect is executed.

35 to 37, the first feature related to the production using the table shown in FIGS. 35 to 37 is that in the variable production, the determined success production based on the operation of the production button 17 is executed after the execution of the fixed production (after the output of the fixed sound). (the first movable member 73a and the second movable member 73b operate), and the determined success effect based on the operation of the effect button 17 is executed without executing the fixed effect (the first movable member 73a and the second The point is that the movable member 73b may operate. By doing so, it is possible to give the player a sense of security and a thrilling feeling, thereby making it possible to improve the amusement of the game.

As a second feature related to the production using the table shown in FIGS. 35 to 37, the SP reach fluctuation production in which the SP reach production is executed after the normal reach production, and the SP reach production is executed after the normal reach production, and then the SP SP reach. The execution mode (execution ratio, execution timing) of the fixed production is different from the SPSP reach variable production in which the production is executed, and the fixed production can be executed at a plurality of timings during the variable production, but the operation of the production button 17 is performed. One of the points is that the final effect is not executed during the valid period of the accompanying jackpot preview effect (line preview effect, blackout effect, cut-in effect, decision effect). By doing so, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the determination performance is executed when the performance button 17 is to be operated and the desire to operate the performance button 17 is reduced, and the amusement of the game is improved. becomes possible.

35 to 37, the third feature related to the effect using the table shown in FIGS. The execution mode of the jackpot announcement production (line announcement production, blackout production, cut-in production, decision production) and the execution ratio of the fixed production are different, and the fixed production can be executed at multiple timings during the variable production. One of the points is that the fixed effect is not executed during the effective period of the above-mentioned jackpot preview effect (line preview effect, blackout effect, cut-in effect, final effect). By doing so, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the determination performance is executed when the performance button 17 is to be operated and the desire to operate the performance button 17 is reduced, and the amusement of the game is improved. becomes possible.

In addition, among the above-mentioned jackpot announcement effects (line announcement effect, blackout effect, cut-in effect, final effect), during the effective period of the cut-in effect in which the operation promotion effect is not executed, the fixed effect is executed. good too.

As a fourth feature relating to the production using the tables shown in FIGS. is executed. By doing so, it is possible to easily raise the expectations of the player and improve the interest of the game.

Note that the character object announcement performance may be executed not only at the start of the variable performance, but also at the start of the ready-to-win performance, or at a timing between the start of the variable performance and the start of the ready-to-win performance. In this case, it is preferable to determine the timing at which the character product announcement effect is to be executed by a lottery (character product announcement pattern).

As a fifth feature related to the production using the tables shown in FIGS. The effect button 17 is more likely to be in the protruding state (second state) when the effective period (the effective period of the determined effect) is generated. By doing so, it becomes easier to raise the expectation of the player during the ready-to-win effect than before the ready-to-win effect, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, the effect button 17 is prevented from protruding during the effective period of the dialogue notice effect executed before the ready-to-win effect, but the effect button 17 protrudes at a lower rate than the effective period of the fixed effect. You may do so. In this case, the production button 17 may be projected at a predetermined rate only in the event of a big win, or the production button 17 may be projected at a lower rate than in the case of a loss. can be

As a sixth feature related to the effects using the tables shown in FIGS. In the second period (during the SPSP ready-to-win effect), the probability of the effect button 17 projecting during the valid period is higher. By doing so, it becomes easier to increase the player's expectation during the second period of the ready-to-win effect after the first period of the ready-to-win effect, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Note that the effect button 17 does not protrude during the effective period of the blackout effect executed in the first period of the ready-to-win effect, but the effect button 17 protrudes at a lower rate than the effective period of the fixed effect. state. In this case, the production button 17 may be projected only in the case of a big win, or the production button 17 may be in a protruding state at a lower rate than in the case of a loss. good.

As a seventh feature relating to the effects using the tables shown in FIGS. (dialogue notice effect, blackout effect, cut-in effect, final effect), and the specific effect includes a first effect ( cut-in effect) and a second effect (dialogue notice effect, blackout effect, final effect) which is executed without operation of the effect button 17, and specific reach variation effect (SP reach change effect) is being executed. The point is that the execution of the first effect is regulated at another timing (from the start of fluctuation to the start of the SP reach effect) before the execution timing of the specific effect. By doing so, it is possible to improve the production effect in the specific ready-to-win production, and to improve the amusement of the game.

As the above-mentioned specific effect, apart from the operation non-required effect such as the dialogue announcement effect and the final effect which are executed even without the operation of the effect button 17, the effect such as the cut-in effect requires the operation of the effect button 17. Further, an operation request effect that is not executed is provided, and another timing before the execution timing of the specific effect during the execution of the development effect such as the SP reach effect that develops from the normal reach effect and the SP SP reach effect before the execution of), it regulates that the operation request effect is executed, and if it is a variable effect that will be a big hit (a command specifying a variable effect pattern that is a big hit is received), the specific effect during the execution of the development effect At another timing before the execution timing, the specific effect as the operation request effect may be executable. Also, at another timing before the specific performance execution timing during execution of the development performance, execution of the operation request performance may be restricted by a predetermined lottery.

As the eighth feature related to the production using the table shown in FIGS. 35 to 37, there are a plurality of dialogue announcement productions with different production modes (line content, button vibration mode), and the second jackpot game that is most advantageous to the player. When the (full-rotation ready-to-win effect) is executed, there is a case where a special mode (extreme heat (gold) of the dialogue notice pattern 7) is executed, and the second jackpot game is more disadvantageous to the player than the second jackpot game. When one jackpot game (SPSP ready-to-win effect) is executed, the special mode speech announcement effect is not executed. By doing so, it is possible to improve the performance effect when the second jackpot game is executed, and to improve the amusement of the game.

(Main processing of the integrated control unit)
Main processing of the integrated control unit 141 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing main processing of the integrated control unit 141. As shown in FIG. This main processing is performed when a system reset generated by the supply of the power supply voltage from the power supply board 160 is input to the overall CPU 141a.

First, the supervising CPU 141a prohibits all interrupts in step T1, and performs initial setting processing in step T2. Specifically, CPU initialization such as setting of built-in registers, access permission to the general RAM 141c, initialization (0 clear) of all RWM areas of the general RAM 141c, CTC (counter timer circuit) for generating a timer interrupt ), etc., and permits all interrupts in step T3.

The overall CPU 141a performs adjustment mode switching processing in step T4. Specifically, the volume (value) of the effect sound output from the audio output device 9 and the display device (main display device 70, sub display device 71 ) backlight light intensity (value) adjustment, and adjustment mode related to volume and light intensity adjustment (whether volume adjustment is possible, whether light intensity adjustment is possible, initial volume value (any of 0 to 5) and light intensity value (any of 0 to 5), volume value adjustment range (0 to 5 or 1 to 5), and light amount value adjustment range (0 to 5 or 1 to 5)).

It should be noted that the setting (adjustment) of the volume value and the light amount value by the changeover switch 22 can always be performed when the game machine 1 is in the power ON state (after the integrated control unit 141 is activated).

The supervising CPU 141a performs volume adjustment processing in step T5. Specifically, based on the detection signal (left button detection signal, right button detection signal) from the cross key detection switch 19a that detects the operation of the cross key 19 operable by the player, the voice output device 9 outputs the perform processing for adjusting the volume (value) of the effect sound.

The supervising CPU 141a performs light amount adjustment processing in step T6. Specifically, the display device (main display device 70 , a process for adjusting the amount (value) of the backlight of the sub-display device 71).

In addition, regarding the setting (adjustment) of the volume value and the light amount value by the cross key 19, at the start of the variable production, at the end of the variable production (stop of the production pattern 70a), there is a restriction (regulation/restriction). It has become. In addition, during the period from when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on until the game progress control is started (specifically, during the setting change mode, during the RWM clear preparation mode, during the setting confirmation mode, various types of board unit 500 During the initial operation of the drive source, etc., until the timer interrupt is started by the main control board 110), an important (high security level) abnormality (power supply Restrictions occur (restricted/restricted) even during notification (output of notification sound) of power-on, power recovery, fraudulent winning, abnormal winning, magnetic error, radio wave error, and door opening error.

In addition, during the output of the abnormality notification sound, even if the current volume value is lower than the maximum volume value, various effects sounds output from the audio output device 9 (BGM, etc.) is lowered from the previous volume, and when the output of the abnormal notification sound ends, the volume of various effect sounds is returned to the volume before the decrease.

The supervising CPU 141a performs eco mode control processing in step T7. Specifically, it performs processing for controlling the start and end of the eco mode in which the light amount of the backlight of the display device (main display device 70 and sub display device 71) is reduced to reduce power consumption.

In step T8, the supervising CPU 141a determines whether or not it has received an effect instruction command or a notification instruction command transmitted from the effect control section 130m. If the performance instruction command or the notification instruction command has not been received, the process proceeds to step T11, and if the performance instruction command or the notification instruction command has been received, the process proceeds to step T9.

The supervising CPU 141a performs animation pattern setting processing in step T9. Specifically, an animation pattern is determined from the animation group of the type corresponding to the received effect instruction command or notification instruction command and set in a predetermined area of the overall RAM 141c.

The supervising CPU 141a performs a sound pattern setting process in step T10. Specifically, a process of determining a sound pattern from the type of sound group corresponding to the received effect instruction command or notification instruction command and setting it in a predetermined area of the general RAM 141c is performed.

In step T11, the supervising CPU 141a determines whether or not a frame switching flag indicating a frame update timing for updating the display image of the display device (main display device 70, sub-display device 71) is set in the supervising RAM 141c. do. If there is a frame switching flag, the process moves to step T12, and if there is no frame switching flag, the process moves to step T4.

Note that the frame switching flag is set by the V blank signal transmitted from the image control unit 145 (VDP) every 1/30 second (the time when the drawing/display of the effect image for one frame is scheduled to be completed). is set by the V blank interrupt processing which is executed each time the is received. Therefore, the processing of steps T12 to T15 described below is executed each time the V blank interrupt processing is executed (frame update timing).

The general CPU 141a clears the frame switching flag set in the general RAM 141c in step T12, and performs scene update processing in step T13. Specifically, referring to the scene switching counter, wait frame counter, and frame counter updated by the V-blank interrupt processing described above, the address of the animation scene is updated based on the animation pattern determined in step T9. , the sound scene address is updated based on the sound pattern determined in step T10.

The supervising CPU 141a performs drawing control processing in step T14. Specifically, it consists of a drawing control command group based on the display information (sprite identification number, display position, etc.) of one frame of the animation scene at the updated address according to the priority (drawing order) of the animation group to which the animation scene belongs. A display list is generated, this display list is output to the image control unit 145 (VDP), and processing for instructing drawing of a display image based on the display list is performed.

As a result, the image control unit 145 (VDP) draws the display image based on the display list in the drawing frame buffer, and displays the image (effect image, abnormality notification image) drawn in the display frame buffer on the display device ( Processing for displaying on the main display device 70 and the sub display device 71) is performed. In other words, the frame update timing becomes the start timing and end timing of various effects (image display and sound output such as pending display, variable effect, jackpot preview effect, and look-ahead effect) performed on the main display device 70 and the sub-display device 71. It's like Note that effects directly controlled by the effect control unit 130m and the lamp control unit 150 (suspended display by the first sub-suspend display 83 and the second sub-suspend display 84, effect operation of the movable effect device 73) are frame-updated. Sometimes it matches the timing, and sometimes it doesn't match the frame update timing.

The overall CPU 141a performs voice control processing in step T15. Specifically, a process of generating an audio control command from the sound information at the updated address and outputting this audio control command to the audio control unit 148 (audio LSI) is performed.

As a result, the audio control unit 148 (audio LSI) performs processing for outputting various effects and notification sounds from the audio output device 9 based on the audio control command. When this process ends, the process moves to step T4.

Thus, at the start of the variable production and at the end of the variable production (stop of the production pattern 70a), the volume adjustment and the light amount adjustment by the changeover switch 22 operable by the game clerk are possible, but the player can operate. Volume adjustment and light amount adjustment by the cross key 19 are restricted (restricted/restricted). Therefore, it becomes difficult for the player to miss important points such as the start of the variable performance and the end of the variable performance, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

In addition, important (high security level) abnormalities (power on, power recovery, unrecoverable error, illegal winning, abnormal winning, magnetic error, radio wave error, During the notification (output of notification sound) of the door open error), it is possible to adjust the volume and light intensity with the switch 22 operable by the game clerk, but the volume adjustment and light intensity adjustment are possible with the cross key 19 operable by the player. is restricted (regulated/restricted). Therefore, it is possible to improve the convenience of volume adjustment and light amount adjustment on the game parlor side while avoiding the inconvenience that a player who is trying to adjust the volume and light amount does not notice the occurrence of an abnormality.

In addition, during the output of the abnormality notification sound, even if the current volume value is lower than the maximum volume value, various effects sounds output from the audio output device 9 (BGM, etc.) is lowered from the previous volume, and when the output of the abnormality notification sound ends, the volume of various effect sounds is restored to the volume before the decrease. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of not noticing an abnormality notification sound due to various effects sounds, and it is possible to ensure the security of the gaming machine.

It should be noted that while the abnormality is being notified (output of the notification sound), setting (adjustment) of the volume value and the light intensity value by the cross key 19 that the player can operate may be disabled, or the adjustment range of the volume value and the light intensity value may be disabled. may be restricted between 0 and 2, for example.

(Accessory initial processing of lamp control section)
The accessory initial processing of the lamp control unit 150 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 39 is a flow chart showing the character object initial processing of the lamp control unit 150, and this processing is executed within the timer interrupt processing executed by the lamp control unit 150 at predetermined intervals (4 milliseconds).

In step R101, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not a power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) has been received from the main control board 110 or not. If the power-on command has been received, the process proceeds to step R102, and if the power-on command has not been received, the process proceeds to step R103.

In step R102, the lamp CPU 150a sets the initial processing number updated in each processing of the accessory initial processing to the initial processing number of the accessory (first movable effect device 73, second movable effect device 75, sub-display device 71, effect button 17). Set "1" to execute origin return processing.

The lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the initial processing number is "1" in step R103. If the initial processing number is not "1", the processing is shifted to step R105 assuming that the character object origin return processing is not executed, and if the initial processing number is "1", the origin return processing is executed in step R104. , and the present accessory initial processing is terminated. Specifically, based on the input signal from the position detection sensor, the accessories (the first movable effect device 73, the second movable effect device 75, the sub-display device 71, the effect button 17) are returned to the origin position. or set the initial processing number to "2". Details of the origin return processing will be described later.

The lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the initial processing number is "2" in step R105. If the initial processing number is not "2", the initial action processing for the accessory is not executed, and the initial action processing for this time is terminated. If the initial processing number is "2", the initial action processing is performed. , terminates the initial processing of the character product. Specifically, an initial operation and initial light emission are performed to confirm whether or not the accessory operates normally, and an initial processing number is set to "0". Details of the initial operation process will be described later.

As described above, according to the accessory initial processing shown in FIG. 39, the origin return processing for performing the operation of returning the various accessories to the origin position, and the initial operation for performing the initial operation and the initial light emission of the various accessories. It is designed not to execute the operation process at the same time. Therefore, the operation of returning various roles to the origin position and the initial operation and initial light emission of various roles are not mixed, and it is possible to separate and check the return operation and the initial operation and initial light emission. .

Further, according to the accessory initial process shown in FIG. 39, the origin return process is executed before the initial action process. Therefore, the various accessories are initially moved from the origin position, and it is possible to easily grasp whether or not there is an abnormality in the operation of the various accessories.

(Origin return processing of lamp control unit)
The return-to-origin process of the lamp control unit 150 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing origin return processing in lamp control unit 150 .

In step R105-1, the lamp CPU 150a sets the board accessory processing number "0", which indicates the transition of the return-to-origin state of the board accessories (the first movable effect device 73, the second movable effect device 75, and the sub-display device 71). It is determined whether or not. If the board accessory processing number is not "0", the process is moved to step R105-3, and if the board accessory processing number is "0", in step R105-2, the driven object to be returned to the origin is selected as the first. 1 movable effect device 73 is set, and the process proceeds to step R105-5.

The ramp CPU 150a determines whether or not the board accessory processing number is "1" in step R105-3. If the board accessory processing number is not "1", the process is shifted to step R105-12, and if the board accessory processing number is "1", in step R105-4, the driving target to be returned to the origin is selected. The sub-display device 71 is set, and the process proceeds to step R105-5.

The ramp CPU 150a determines whether or not the board accessory processing number is "2" in step R105-5. If the board accessory processing number is not "2", the process is moved to step R105-14, and if the board accessory processing number is "2", in step R105-6, the driving target to be returned to the origin is selected. The second movable effect device 75 is set, and the process proceeds to step R105-7.

In step R105-7, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the accessory to be driven is at the origin position (standby position). Specifically, an input signal from a position detection sensor that detects that each board accessory is at the origin position is determined. If the board accessory to be driven is not at the origin position, the process is shifted to step R105-8, and if the board accessory to be driven is at the origin position, the process is shifted to step R105-13.

In step R105-8, the ramp CPU 150a drives the drive motor for moving the board accessory to be driven so that the board accessory to be driven returns to the origin position, and in step R105-9, the board accessory is moved. A board accessory abnormality determination timer for determining the occurrence of a return abnormality that does not return to the origin position within a predetermined time is updated by +1.

In step R105-10, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the post-update board accessory abnormality determination timer is the upper limit value (for example, 5 seconds). If the board accessory abnormality determination timer is at the upper limit value, it is assumed that a return abnormality has occurred in the board accessory to be driven, and the process is moved to step R105-11. moves the process to step R105-14.

In step R105-11, the lamp CPU 150a outputs return abnormality information (first movable effect device return abnormality information, second movable effect device return abnormality information, sub display device return abnormality information) is set in the lamp RAM 150c, and in step R105-10, the board accessory abnormality judgment timer is cleared.

The ramp CPU 150a updates the board accessory processing number by +1 in step R105-13. Specifically, if the board accessory processing number is "0", the board accessory processing number is updated to "1" to drive the sub display device 71, and the board accessory processing number is changed to "1". 1", the board accessory processing number is updated to "2" so as to drive the second movable effect device 75, and if the board accessory processing number is "2", the board role is determined. The board accessory processing number is updated to "3" in order to end the process of returning the objects (first movable effect device 73, second movable effect device 75, sub-display device 71) to the origin.

In step R105-14, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the frame role object processing number indicating the transition of the state of returning to the origin of the frame role object (production button 17) is "0". If the frame role object processing number is "0", the process is shifted to step R105-15, and if the board role process number is not "0", the process is shifted to step R105-22.

At step R105-15, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the effect button 17 is at the origin position (standby position). Specifically, an input signal from a position detection sensor that detects that the production button 17 is at the origin position is determined. If the effect button 17 is not at the origin position, the process is shifted to step R105-16, and if the effect button 17 is at the origin position, the process is shifted to step R105-21.

At step R105-16, the lamp CPU 150a drives the effect button drive motor for moving the effect button 17 so that the effect button 17 returns to the origin position, and at step R105-17, the effect button 17 is pressed within a predetermined time. The frame accessory abnormality determination timer for determining the occurrence of return abnormality that does not return to the origin position is updated by +1.

In step R105-18, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the updated frame accessory abnormality determination timer is the upper limit value (for example, 5 seconds). If the frame accessory abnormality determination timer is at the upper limit value, it is assumed that a return abnormality has occurred in the production button 17, and the process is moved to step R105-19. end the return-to-origin process.

In step R105-19, the lamp CPU 150a sets return abnormality information indicating that the return abnormality has occurred in the effect button 17 in the lamp RAM 150c, and in step R105-20 clears the frame accessory abnormality determination timer.

The lamp CPU 150a updates the frame accessory processing number by +1 in step R105-21. Specifically, if the frame accessory processing number is "0", the board accessory processing number is updated to "1" to end the process of returning the frame accessory (production button 17) to the origin.

In step R105-22, the ramp CPU 150a determines whether or not the board accessory processing number and the frame accessory processing number satisfy the end condition. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the board auditors processing number is "3" and the frame auditors processing number is "1". If the termination condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step R105-23, and if the termination condition is not satisfied, the current origin return process is terminated.

In step R105-23, the ramp CPU 150a clears the board accessory processing number and the frame accessory processing number. "2" is set, and the current origin return processing is terminated.

As described above, according to the origin return processing shown in FIG. 40, the first movable effect device 73, the second movable effect device 75, and the sub-display device 71, which overlap the effect position (movement area) when the power is turned on, are the origin. If they are not at the position (standby position), they are not returned to the origin position (standby position) at the same time (at the same time), and the predetermined order (first movable effect device 73 → sub display device 71 → second movable effect device 75 order) to return to the origin position. Therefore, it is possible to easily confirm whether or not various board accessories have returned to the origin position. In addition, when the first movable effect device 73, the second movable effect device 75, and the sub-display device 71 are in contact with each other with difficulty in separation, it is possible to suppress the mutual loading of the both characters. It is possible to suppress the inconvenience that the accessories are damaged at the same time.

Further, according to the origin return processing shown in FIG. 40, the return operation of the board accessories (the first movable effect device 73, the second movable effect device 75, the sub-display device 71) to the origin position and the frame accessory ( At the same time (at the same time), the effect button 17) can be returned to the origin position. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the time required for the return motion of various roles, and it is possible to smoothly shift to the initial motions of various roles to be executed next.

Further, according to the origin return processing shown in FIG. 40, an upper limit is set for the time required for each accessory to return to the origin position. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the return operation of various accessories never ends. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the various accessories are performing the returning motions even during the variable performance and the performance motions are not performed, and it is possible to prevent the amusement of the game from being lowered.

Further, according to the origin return processing shown in FIG. 40, the return operation of the board accessories (the first movable effect device 73, the second movable effect device 75, the sub-display device 71) to the origin position and the frame accessory ( When both of the returning motions of the effect button 17) to the origin position are completed, the processing for shifting to the initial motion processing is performed. Therefore, the returning motion of various accessories to the origin position and the initial motion of various accessories are not executed at the same time, and it is possible to separate and confirm the returning motion and initial motion of various accessories. .

Note that the first movable effect device 73, the second movable effect device 75, and the sub display device 71 are positioned at the origin in a predetermined order (first movable effect device 73→sub display device 71→second movable effect device 75). However, the operation of returning to the origin position may be started at the same time. In this way, the time required for the return operation of the first movable effect device 73, the sub-display device 71, and the second movable effect device 75 can be shortened, and the initial motions of various characters to be executed next can be smoothly performed. It is possible to migrate.

(Initial operation processing of lamp control unit)
Initial operation processing of the lamp control unit 150 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 41 is a flow chart showing initial operation processing of lamp control unit 150 .

In step R107-1, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the board accessory processing number indicating the transition of the initial operation status of the board accessory is "0". When the board accessory processing number is "0", the process is shifted to step R107-2, and when the board accessory processing number is not "0", the process is shifted to step R107-7.

In step R107-2, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not return abnormality information of board accessories (first movable effect device 73, second movable effect device 75, sub-display device 71) is set in the lamp RAM 150c. . If the return abnormality information is not set, the processing is shifted to step R107-4 assuming that the initial operation and initial light emission of the board accessory are performed, and if the return abnormality information is set, step R107-3. In step R107-7, the board accessory processing number is set to "2" so that the initial action of the board accessory is not performed.

In step R107-4, the lamp CPU 150a selects a board role item initial motion pattern determination table (see FIG. 42) for determining the board role item initial motion pattern. The details of the board accessory initial motion pattern determination table will be described later.

In step R107-5, the lamp CPU 150a determines the initial operation pattern of the board accessories (movable effect device 73, sub-display device 71) and sets it in the lamp RAM 150c. Specifically, referring to the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. Determine the movement pattern.

The ramp CPU 150a updates the board accessory processing number by +1 in step R107-6. Specifically, if the board accessory processing number is "0", the board accessory processing number is updated to "1" to execute the initial operation of the board accessory.

The lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the board accessory processing number is "1" in step R107-7. If the board accessory processing number is not "1", the process is shifted to step R107-9, and if the board accessory processing number is "1", the lamp is set in the RAM 150c in step R107-8. The initial motion of the board accessory is executed according to the initial motion pattern of the existing board accessory.

In step R107-9, the ramp CPU 150a determines whether or not all steps of the initial action of the board accessory have been completed. If all steps of the initial motion of the board accessory have not been completed, the process is shifted to step R107-11, and if all steps of the initial motion of the board accessory have been completed, step R107-10 is performed on the board accessory. The processing number is updated by +1. Specifically, if the board accessory processing number is "1", the board accessory processing number is updated to "2" in order to end the process of initializing the board accessory.

In step R107-11, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the frame role object processing number indicating the transition of the initial operation state of the frame role object (effect button 17) is "0". If the frame role-playing process number is "0", the process moves to step R107-12, and if the frame role-playing process number is not "0", the process moves to step R107-17.

In step R107-12, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not return abnormality information of the effect button 17 is set in the lamp RAM 150c. If the return abnormality information is not set, the processing is shifted to step R107-14 assuming that the initial action of the frame accessory is performed, and if the return abnormality information is set, the frame "2" is set to the frame role product processing number assuming that the initial action of the role product is not performed, and the process is shifted to step R107-17.

In step R107-14, the lamp CPU 150a selects a frame role-playing object initial motion pattern determination table (see FIG. 43) for determining the initial motion pattern of the frame role-playing object. The details of the frame accessory initial motion pattern determination table will be described later.

At step R107-15, the lamp CPU 150a determines the initial operation pattern of the frame role item (effect button 17) and sets it in the lamp RAM 150c. Concretely, with reference to the frame object initial motion pattern determination table shown in FIG. 43, one initial motion pattern is determined from among a plurality of initial motion patterns based on the type of power-on command.

The lamp CPU 150a updates the frame accessory processing number by +1 in step R107-16. Specifically, if the frame role-playing process number is "0", the frame role-playing process number is updated to "1" to execute the initial operation of the frame role-playing product.

The lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the frame accessory processing number is "1" in step R107-17. If the frame accessory processing number is not "1", the process is moved to step R107-21, and if the frame accessory processing number is "1", in step R107-18, the lamp is set in the RAM 150c. The initial motion of the frame role object is executed according to the initial motion pattern of the frame role object.

At step R107-19, the ramp CPU 150a determines whether or not the initial motion of the frame role-thing has been completed. If the initial action of the frame role has not been completed in all steps, the process is shifted to step R107-21, and if the initial action of the frame role has been completed in all steps, in step R107-20, the frame role The processing number is updated by +1. Specifically, if the frame role-playing process number is "1", the frame role-playing process number is updated to "2" in order to end the process of initializing the frame role-playing.

In step R107-21, the ramp CPU 150a determines whether or not the board role processing number and the frame role processing number satisfy the end condition. Specifically, it is determined whether the board accessory processing number is "2" and the frame accessory processing number is "2". If the termination condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step R107-22, and if the termination condition is not satisfied, this initial operation process is terminated.

The ramp CPU 150a clears the board accessory processing number and the frame accessory processing number in step R107-22, clears the initial processing number described above in step R107-23, and ends this initial operation processing. .

Thus, according to the initial action process shown in FIG. 41, the initial action of the board accessories (first movable effect device 73, second movable effect device 75, sub-display device 71) and the frame accessory (effect button 17) can be executed simultaneously (at the same time). Therefore, it is possible to shorten the time required for the initial action of various accessories, and to prevent obstruction of the production actions of various accessories during the game.

Further, according to the initial operation process shown in FIG. 41, when the first movable effect device 73, the second movable effect device 75, and the sub-display device 71, which constitute the board accessory, have a return abnormality, the first movable effect device The initial operations of the effect device 73, the second movable effect device 75 and the sub-display device 71 are not executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the board accessory from being completely out of order or damaged by forcibly initializing the board accessory in which the return abnormality has occurred.

Further, according to the initial operation process shown in FIG. 41, the initial operation of the effect button 17 is not executed when the effect button 17 constituting the frame accessory has a return abnormality. Therefore, it is possible to prevent inconvenience such as complete breakdown or breakage of the performance button 17 by forcibly initializing the performance button 17 in which the return abnormality has occurred.

Further, according to the initial operation process shown in FIG. 41, even if the initial operation of the board role object in which the recovery error has occurred is not executed, the initial operation of the frame role object in which the recovery error has not occurred is executed. Even if the initial action of the frame accessory in which the error has occurred is not executed, the initial action of the board accessory in which the recovery abnormality has not occurred is executed. Therefore, it is possible to confirm whether or not there is an abnormality in the action of the accessory in which the return abnormality has not occurred.

Further, according to the initial operation process shown in FIG. 41, the initial operation of the board accessories (the first movable effect device 73, the second movable effect device 75, the sub-display device 71) and the frame accessory (the effect button 17) When both of the initial operations are completed, the initial operation process is completed. Therefore, even though one of the board accessory and the frame accessory performs the initial action, the other performs the production action, and it may occur that it is unclear whether it is the initial action or the production action. Gone.

(Board accessories initial operation pattern determination table)
FIG. 42 is a diagram showing a board accessory initial motion pattern determination table for determining the initial motion pattern of the board accessory (first movable effect device 73, second movable effect device 75, sub-display device 71). In addition, in FIG. 42, the first movable effect device 73 is described as the movable effect device 1, and the second movable effect device 75 is described as the movable effect device 2 for convenience.

Types of commands at power ON, presence/absence of recovery abnormality information, and initial operation patterns to be selected are associated with the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table. The number of steps is described.

The initial operation pattern includes patterns 01 to 04 which are determined when a power-on designation command is received, and patterns 01-04 which are determined when a first power restoration designation command indicating that the customer is waiting for a customer is received. patterns 05 to 08, and the pattern determined when receiving the second power restoration designation command indicating that the special symbol is being displayed in fluctuation or the third power restoration designation command indicating that the jackpot game is in progress 09 to 12 are set.

"Movement of movable effect device 2" is an action in which the second movable effect device 75 tilts from the standby position to the effect position. It is an operation to return to the position.

"Movable production device 1 small descent" is an operation in which the first movable production device 73 moves (lowers) from the standby position to a midway position slightly below the standby position, and "Movable production device 1 large descent ' is an operation in which the first movable effect device 73 moves (lowers) from the standby position to the effect position below the middle position, and 'movable effect device 1 returns to the origin' means the first movable effect device 73 is operated to return to the standby position.

"Movement of sub-display device" is an operation in which the sub-display device 71 rises from the standby position to the effect position, and "sub-display device origin return" is an operation in which the sub-display device 71 returns to the standby position. It's becoming

"Movable production device 1 LED" refers to a plurality of LEDs provided in the first movable production device 73, and "Movable production device 2 LED" refers to a plurality of LEDs provided in the second movable production device 75. The “sub-display device LED” is a plurality of LEDs provided around the screen of the sub-display device 71 .

In the initial operation pattern 02, the initial operation pattern 06, and the initial operation pattern 10, the lighting color of the first movable member LED is not described. This is because LED 1 blinks in red to notify an abnormality.

Also, in the initial operation pattern 03, the initial operation pattern 07, and the initial operation pattern 11, the lighting color of the sub-display device LED is not described. This is because the red blinking is performed for anomaly notification.

In the initial operation pattern 04, the initial operation pattern 08, and the initial operation pattern 12, the lighting color of the LED of the movable effect device 2 is not described. This is because the LED 2 blinks in red due to the anomaly notification.

A first feature of the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. The first movable effect device 73, the second movable effect device 75, and the sub-display device 71 have the same operation mode (the number of steps, the operation of each step) in the initial operation. Therefore, regardless of whether the power is turned on or the power is restored, it is possible to appropriately confirm whether or not there is an abnormality in the operation of the board accessory.

It should be noted that the operation mode of the initial operation is the same as long as the movement pattern of the board accessory is the same at least in each process, and the operation time in each process may be the same, or the operation time in each process may be the same. can be different.

In addition, when the power is turned on and when the power is restored, any of the first movable effect device 73, the second movable effect device 75, and the sub-display device 71 may have different initial operation modes (number of steps, actions of each step). Alternatively, the operation modes (the number of steps, the operation of each step) of all the initial actions of the first movable effect device 73, the second movable effect device 75, and the sub-display device 71 may be different. In this way, it is possible to easily grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by restoring the power (the control state of the game is restored). becomes.

In addition, when the power is turned on and when the power is restored, the operation mode (the number of steps, the operation of each step) of the initial operation of the first movable effect device 73 and/or the second movable effect device 75 and/or the sub display device 71 is changed. If you want them to be different, you can make an operation that is not in the initial operation when the power is turned on be executed in the initial operation when the power is restored, or an operation that is not in the initial operation when the power is restored can be made to be executed in the initial operation when the power is turned on. can be In this way, it is possible to more easily grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by the restoration of the power (the control state of the game is restored). .

The second feature of the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 42 is that the board accessory (first movable effect device 73, 2) The difference is that the light emission mode of the initial light emission during the initial operation of the movable effect device 75 and the sub display device 71) is different. Therefore, it is possible to grasp whether it is an initial operation by turning on the power (the game control state is initialized) or an initial operation by power restoration (the game control state is restored).

A third feature of the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. are the same, but the light emission modes of the initial light emission of the sub display device LEDs are different. Therefore, it is possible to grasp whether it is an initial operation by turning on the power (the game control state is initialized) or an initial operation by power restoration (the game control state is restored).

It should be noted that when the power is turned on and when the power is restored to restore the customer waiting state, the light emission modes of the initial light emission of the movable effect devices 1 and 2 are the same, but the light emission modes of the initial light emission of the sub-display device LEDs are different. However, on the contrary, when the power is turned on and when the power is restored when the customer waiting state is restored, the light emission mode of the initial light emission of the movable effect devices 1 and 2 LED is made different, while the sub display device LED The light emission mode of the initial light emission may be the same.

In addition, both the light emission mode of the initial light emission of the movable effect devices 1 and 2 LEDs and the light emission mode of the initial light emission of the sub display device LED are made different between when the power is turned on and when the power is restored when the state is restored to the customer waiting state. good too. In this way, it is possible to easily grasp whether it is an initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or an initial operation by restoring the power (the control state of the game is restored). becomes.

A fourth feature of the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. The point is that the light emission mode of the initial light emission during the initial operation of (the first movable effect device 73, the second movable effect device 75, the sub display device 71) is different. Therefore, it is possible to grasp whether it is an initial operation by turning on the power (the game control state is initialized) or an initial operation by power restoration (the game control state is restored).

The fifth feature of the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. , there is a difference in the light emission mode of the initial light emission during the initial operation of the board accessory (first movable effect device 73, second movable effect device 75, sub display device 71). Therefore, it is possible to grasp whether it is the initial operation due to the restoration of the power supply to restore the customer waiting state, the initial operation due to the restoration of the power supply during the variable display of the special symbols, or during the jackpot game.

It should be noted that both the movable effect devices 1 and 2 LEDs and the sub display device LED are turned off during the variable display of the special symbols or when the power is restored during the jackpot game, but the movable effect device LED and The sub-display device LED may be lit in the same light-emitting mode as when power is restored to restore the customer waiting state.

A sixth feature of the board accessory initial action pattern determination table shown in FIG. When there is no recovery abnormality in the second movable effect device 75 and the sub display device 71, the initial action of the second movable effect device 75 and the sub display device 71 is performed without performing the initial action of the first movable effect device 73, When there is a return abnormality in the second movable effect device 75 and there is no return abnormality in the first movable effect device 73 and the sub display device 71, the first movable effect is performed without performing the initial operation of the second movable effect device 75. Initial operations of the device 73 and the sub display device 71 are performed. The point is that the initial actions of the first movable effect device 73 and the second movable effect device 75 are performed without performing the initial motion of . By doing so, it becomes possible to perform a suitable initial operation according to the presence or absence of the recovery abnormality.

(Frame Accessory Initial Operation Pattern Decision Table)
FIG. 43 is a diagram showing a frame accessory initial motion pattern determination table referred to when determining the initial motion pattern of the frame accessory (effect button 17).

The type of power-on command and the selected initial operation pattern are associated with the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table, and the operation mode at the time of the initial operation and the number of steps of the initial operation are described as a reference. ing.

"Production button large rise" is an operation in which the production button 17 rises from the standby position (initial position) to the production position (upper position). It is an operation to return to

As a first feature of the frame role initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. (Production button 17) differs in the operation mode (the number of steps, the operation of each step) of the initial operation. Therefore, it is possible to easily grasp whether it is an initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or an initial operation by restoring the power (the control state of the game is restored).

As a second feature of the frame accessory initial action pattern determination table shown in FIG. 43, the initial action of the effect button 17 when the power is turned on performs an action that is not included in the initial action of the effect button 17 when the power is restored. The point is that it is designed to Therefore, it is possible to more easily grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by the restoration of the power (the control state of the game is restored). .

It should be noted that the operation mode (the number of steps, the operation of each step) of the initial operation of the effect button 17 may be the same between when the power is turned on and when the power is restored. By doing so, regardless of whether the power is turned on or the power is restored, it is possible to appropriately confirm whether or not there is an abnormality in the operation of the frame object.

A third feature of the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. is different in the light emission mode of the initial light emission. Therefore, it is possible to grasp whether it is an initial operation by turning on the power (the game control state is initialized) or an initial operation by power restoration (the game control state is restored).

As a fourth feature of the frame role initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. The point is that the light emission mode of the initial light emission during the initial operation of the (production button 17) is different. Therefore, it is possible to grasp whether it is an initial operation by turning on the power (the game control state is initialized) or an initial operation by power restoration (the game control state is restored).

In addition, during the variable display of special symbols, or at the time of power restoration during the jackpot game, the production button LED is turned off, but it is the same as at the time of power restoration in which the production button LED is restored to the customer waiting state. You may make it light up in a light emission mode.

The fifth feature of the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 43 is the number of luminous colors in the initial light emission of the effect button 17 when the power is turned on, and the luminous color in the initial light emission of the effect button 17 when the power is restored. One point is that the numbers are different. Therefore, it is possible to more easily grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by the restoration of the power (the control state of the game is restored). .

Although the number of emitted colors in the initial light emission of the effect button 17 when the power is turned on is greater than the number of emitted colors in the initial light emission of the effect button 17 when the power is restored, the opposite may be done.

As a sixth feature of the frame role initial action pattern determination table shown in FIG. The point is that it contains an emission color that is not found in Therefore, it is possible to more easily grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by the restoration of the power (the control state of the game is restored). .

It should be noted that the initial emission color of the presentation button 17 upon power restoration may include a emission color that is not included in the initial emission color of the presentation button 17 upon power-on.

As a seventh feature of the frame accessory initial action pattern determination table shown in FIG. 43, the time during which the production button 17 vibrates when the power is turned on or when the power is restored is the effective period that occurs during the execution of the variable production. This is different from the time during which the effect button 17 vibrates during the operation effect executed by operating the button 17. - 特許庁Therefore, it is possible to grasp that the vibration is the initial action of the effect button 17 .

The eighth feature of the frame accessory initial motion pattern determination table shown in FIG. The point is that it is executed over the initial action of the effect button 17 where the detection of is performed. Therefore, the confirmation of the operation of the performance button 17 and the confirmation of the operation of the button vibration motor can be performed at the same time, and the time required for confirmation of the operation can be shortened.

(Specific example when there is no recovery error in various accessories after power is turned on)
FIG. 44 shows a specific example in which there is no recovery error in various accessories (first movable effect device 73, second movable effect device 75, sub-display device 71, effect button 17) after power-on with initialization of the main RAM 110c. It is a figure which shows. 44 to 62, the first movable effect device 73 is referred to as the movable effect device 1, and the second movable effect device 75 is referred to as the movable effect device 2, for the sake of convenience.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on and power supply is started, an initial screen displaying the words "reading" is displayed as an initial operation of the main display device 70. FIG.

At the timing of T2, when the effect control board 130 receives a power-on designation command as a power-on command transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started, and the second movable effect device 75 and the effect button 17 is started to return to the origin position.

At this time, the movable effect device 1 LED, the movable effect device 2 LED, the sub display device LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off, and the main display device 70 displays the initial pattern "135" when the power is turned on. 70a and the first standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed) is displayed, and the voice output device 9 emits an initialization notification sound consisting of a warning and a voice saying "RAM is cleared". output.

Also, when receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first reservation number display area 70E of the main display device 70 and the second reservation "0" is displayed as a reserved number in each of the number display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal drawing holding display 86 are in a display mode indicating "0".

When the second movable effect device 75 returns to the origin position, the first movable effect device 73 starts to return to the origin position.

At timing T3, when the return actions of the first movable effect device 73 and the effect button 17 are completed, the return action of the sub-display device 71 is started. At this time, the movable effect device 1LED, the movable effect device 2LED, the sub-display device LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T4, when the returning operation of the sub-display device 71 is completed, the return-to-origin processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started, and the initial operation of the second movable effect device 75 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the movable effect device 1 LED, the movable effect device 2 LED, and the sub display device LED alternately light up in blue and white as initial light emission, and the effect button LED lights up in order of red → green → blue as initial light emission (light emission )do.

When the initial action of the second movable effect device 75 ends, the initial action of the first movable effect device 73 starts.

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the effect button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the effect button LED is completed and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is performed, and at the timing of T6, the initial operation of the first movable effect device 73 is performed. When finished, the initial operation of the sub-display device 71 is started.

At the timing of T7, when the initial operation of the sub-display device 71 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, and the initial light emission is completed in the movable production device 1LED, the movable production device 2LED, and the sub-display device LED, and the customer waiting lighting (white When the initialization notification sound output period (for example, 60 seconds) elapses at the timing of T8, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and becomes silent.

At the timing of T9, when receiving the first special symbol storage designation command (first number of reservations = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45, the reservation displayed in the first number of reservations display area 70E The number becomes "1", the first pending icon is displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B, the sub first pending display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the winning sound is output from the audio output device 9 "Pong♪" is output.

At the timing of T10, when a variation start command (effect pattern designation command, special figure variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, the variable effect (variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the variable display is started on the sub-first variable display 81, and the movable effect device 1LED, the movable effect device 2LED, the sub-display device LED, and the effect button LED are turned on during fluctuation, and the sub-first pending display is performed. The device 83 becomes a display mode showing "0".

(Concrete example when there is a recovery error in the sub-display device after the power is turned on)
FIG. 45 is a diagram showing a specific example in which the sub-display device 71 has a return abnormality after power-on accompanied by initialization of the main RAM 110c.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on and power supply is started, an initial screen displaying the words "reading" is displayed as an initial operation of the main display device 70. FIG.

At the timing of T2, when the effect control board 130 receives a power-on designation command as a power-on command transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started, and the second movable effect device 75 and the effect button 17 is started to return to the origin position.

At this time, the movable effect device 1 LED, the movable effect device 2 LED, the sub display device LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off, and the main display device 70 displays the effect pattern 70a of "135" which is the initial pattern when the power is turned on. , and the first standby screen with the special symbol TZ stopped (still displayed) is displayed, and the voice output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of a warning and a voice saying "RAM is cleared". be done.

Also, when receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first reservation number display area 70E of the main display device 70 and the second reservation "0" is displayed as a reserved number in each of the number display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Also, the first sub-suspension display 83 and the second sub-suspension display 84 display "0".

When the second movable effect device 75 returns to the origin position, the first movable effect device 73 starts to return to the origin position.

At timing T3, when the return actions of the first movable effect device 73 and the effect button 17 are completed, the return action of the sub-display device 71 is started. At this time, the movable effect device 1LED, the movable effect device 2LED, the sub-display device LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T4, when the return-to-origin process ends with the return abnormality occurring in the sub-display device 71, the sub-display device LED flashes red (abnormality notification mode) to notify the occurrence of the return abnormality, and the initial operation process is performed. is started and the initial actions of the second movable effect device 75 and the effect button 17 are started. At this time, the movable effect device 1LED and the movable effect device 2LED are alternately lit in blue and white as initial light emission, and the effect button LED is lighted (lighted) in order of red→green→blue as initial light emission.

When the initial action of the second movable effect device 75 ends, the initial action of the first movable effect device 73 starts.

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the effect button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the effect button LED is completed and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is performed, and at the timing of T6, the initial operation of the first movable effect device 73 is performed. When finished, the initial operation processing is completed without executing the initial operation of the sub-display device 71, the initial light emission of the movable production device 1LED and the movable production device 2LED is completed, and lighting during customer waiting (white lighting) is performed.

At the timing of T7, when the output period (for example, 60 seconds) of the initialization notification sound has elapsed, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and becomes silent, and at the timing of T8, the game ball enters the first start port 45. When receiving the first special symbol storage designation command (first reservation number = 1) based on the winning, the reservation number displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E becomes "1", and the first reservation icon display area 70B The first pending icon is displayed, the sub-first pending indicator 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the voice output device 9 outputs the prize winning sound "Pong♪".

At the timing of T9, when a variation start command (effect pattern designation command, special figure variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, the variable effect (variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the sub-display device LED ends, and the first sub-variable display device 81 starts variable display, and the movable effect device 1LED, the movable effect device 2LED, the sub-display device LED, and the effect button The LED is lit during variation, and the first sub-suspension indicator 83 becomes a display mode indicating "0".

(Concrete example of a case where the first movable effect device 73 has a return abnormality after the power is turned on)
FIG. 46 is a diagram showing a specific example in which the first movable effect device 73 has a return abnormality after power-on accompanied by initialization of the main RAM 110c.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on and power supply is started, an initial screen displaying the words "reading" is displayed as an initial operation of the main display device 70. FIG.

At the timing of T2, when the effect control board 130 receives a power-on designation command as a power-on command transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started, and the second movable effect device 75 and the effect button 17 is started to return to the origin position.

At this time, the movable effect device 1 LED, the movable effect device 2 LED, the sub display device LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off, and the main display device 70 displays the effect pattern 70a of "135" which is the initial pattern when the power is turned on. , and the first standby screen with the special symbol TZ stopped (still displayed) is displayed, and the voice output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of a warning and a voice saying "RAM is cleared". be done.

Also, when receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first reservation number display area 70E of the main display device 70 and the second reservation "0" is displayed as a reserved number in each of the number display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Also, the first sub-suspension display 83 and the second sub-suspension display 84 display "0".

When the second movable effect device 75 returns to the origin position, the first movable effect device 73 starts to return to the origin position.

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the first movable effect device 73 and the effect button 17 is completed in a state where the return abnormality has occurred in the first movable effect device 73, the movable effect device 1 LED notifies the occurrence of the return abnormality. Therefore, the light flashes in red (anomaly notification mode), and the recovery operation of the sub-display device 71 is started. At this time, the movable effect device 2 LED, the sub-display device LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T4, when the return operation of the sub-display device 71 is completed and the return-to-origin processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started, and the initial operations of the second movable effect device 75 and the effect button 17 are started. At this time, the movable effect device 2 LED and the sub-display device LED are alternately lit in blue and white as initial light emission, and the effect button LED is lighted (lighted) in order of red→green→blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the effect button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the effect button LED is completed and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is completed, and at the timing of T6, the initial operation of the sub-display device 71 is completed. , the initial operation process ends without executing the initial operation of the first movable effect device 73, the initial light emission of the movable effect device 2 LED and the sub display device LED ends, and lighting during customer waiting (white lighting) occurs.

At the timing of T7, when the output period (for example, 60 seconds) of the initialization notification sound has elapsed, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and becomes silent, and at the timing of T8, the game ball enters the first start port 45. When receiving the first special symbol storage designation command (first reservation number = 1) based on the winning, the reservation number displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E becomes "1", and the first reservation icon display area 70B The first pending icon is displayed, the sub-first pending indicator 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the voice output device 9 outputs the prize winning sound "Pong♪".

At the timing of T9, when a variation start command (effect pattern designation command, special figure variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, the variable effect (variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the movable effect device 1LED ends, the variable display is started on the first sub variable display device 81, and the movable effect device 1LED, the movable effect device 2LED, the sub display device LED, and the effect button The LED is lit during variation, and the first sub-suspension indicator 83 becomes a display mode indicating "0".

(Concrete example of a case where the second movable effect device 75 has a return abnormality after the power is turned on)
FIG. 47 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where the second movable effect device 75 has a return abnormality after power-on accompanied by initialization of the main RAM 110c.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on and power supply is started, an initial screen displaying the words "reading" is displayed as an initial operation of the main display device 70. FIG.

At the timing of T2, when the effect control board 130 receives a power-on designation command as a power-on command transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started, and the second movable effect device 75 and the effect button 17 is started to return to the origin position.

At this time, the movable effect device 1 LED, the movable effect device 2 LED, the sub display device LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off, and the main display device 70 displays the effect pattern 70a of "135" which is the initial pattern when the power is turned on. , and the first standby screen with the special symbol TZ stopped (still displayed) is displayed, and the voice output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of a warning and a voice saying "RAM is cleared". be done. In addition, since FIG. 47 assumes that the second movable effect device 75 has a return abnormality, the movable effect device 2 LED flashes red to notify the occurrence of the return abnormality after turning off (abnormality notification). aspect).

Also, when receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first reservation number display area 70E of the main display device 70 and the second reservation "0" is displayed as a reserved number in each of the number display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Also, the first sub-suspension display 83 and the second sub-suspension display 84 display "0".

Although the second movable effect device 75 has returned abnormally, the return operation of the first movable effect device 73 to the origin position is started.

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the first movable effect device 73 and the effect button 17 is completed in a state where the return abnormality occurs in the second movable effect device 75, the LED of the movable effect device 2 continues to blink red (abnormality notification mode) is maintained, and the return operation of the sub-display device 71 is started. At this time, the movable effect device 1 LED, the sub-display device LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T4, when the returning operation of the sub-display device 71 is completed and the return-to-origin processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started, and the initial operation of the first movable effect device 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the movable effect device 1 LED and the sub display device LED alternately light up in blue and white as initial light emission, and the effect button LED light up (lights up) in order of red→green→blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the effect button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the effect button LED is completed and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is completed, and at the timing of T6, the initial operation of the sub-display device 71 is completed. , the initial operation process ends without executing the initial operation of the second movable effect device 75, the initial light emission of the movable effect device 1 LED and the sub display device LED ends, and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) occurs.

At the timing of T7, when the output period (for example, 60 seconds) of the initialization notification sound has elapsed, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and becomes silent, and at the timing of T8, the game ball enters the first start port 45. When receiving the first special symbol storage designation command (first reservation number = 1) based on the winning, the reservation number displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E becomes "1", and the first reservation icon display area 70B The first pending icon is displayed, the sub-first pending indicator 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the voice output device 9 outputs the prize winning sound "Pong♪".

At the timing of T9, when a variation start command (effect pattern designation command, special figure variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, the variable effect (variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the movable effect device 2LED ends, and the variable display is started on the sub first variable display device 81, and the movable effect device 1LED, the movable effect device 2LED, the sub display device LED, and the effect button The LED is lit during variation, and the first sub-suspension indicator 83 becomes a display mode indicating "0".

(Specific example when there is a return error in the production button after turning on the power)
FIG. 48 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where the effect button 17 has a return abnormality after power-on accompanied by initialization of the main RAM 110c.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on and power supply is started, an initial screen displaying the words "reading" is displayed as an initial operation of the main display device 70. FIG.

At the timing of T2, when the effect control board 130 receives a power-on designation command as a power-on command transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started, and the second movable effect device 75 and the effect button 17 is started to return to the origin position.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off, and the main display device 70 displays the effect symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and , the first standby screen with the special symbol TZ stopped (still displayed) is displayed, and the voice output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of a warning and a voice saying "RAM is cleared". .

Also, when receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first reservation number display area 70E of the main display device 70 and the second reservation "0" is displayed as a reserved number in each of the number display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Also, the first sub-suspension display 83 and the second sub-suspension display 84 display "0".

When the second movable effect device 75 returns to the origin position, the first movable effect device 73 starts to return to the origin position.

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the first movable effect device 73 and the effect button 17 is completed in a state where the effect button 17 has a return abnormality, the effect button LED flashes red to notify the occurrence of the return abnormality. (abnormality notification mode), and the recovery operation of the sub-display device 71 is started. At this time, the movable effect device 1LED, the movable effect device 2LED, and the sub-display device LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T4, when the return operation of the sub-display device 71 is completed and the return-to-origin processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started and the initial operation of the second movable effect device 75 is started. Operation will not start. At this time, the movable effect device 1LED, the movable effect device 2LED, and the sub display device LED alternately light up in blue and white as initial light emission.

Not starting the initial action of the production button 17 corresponds to not executing the "large rise" in the initial action shown in FIG. )” and “intermittent vibration (2 seconds)” are not included. That is, even if the effect button 17 has a return abnormality, "continuous vibration (2 seconds)" and "intermittent vibration (2 seconds)" are executed. In other words, the above "continuous vibration (2 seconds)" and "intermittent vibration (2 seconds)" are determined in advance regardless of the position of the production button 17 (whether it is the origin position or the large rising position). It can be said that when the timing is reached, it will be executed for a predetermined period of time.
For example, if "continuous vibration (2 seconds)" or "intermittent vibration (2 seconds)" is executed in conjunction with the operating position of the production button 17 (large rise position, origin position returned from the large rise position) , Although the performance button 17 can be vibrated without any problem, the performance button 17 vibrates without any problem due to the inability of the performance button 17 to move to the large rise position and the origin position returned from the large rise position. There is a concern that it is not even possible to confirm that it is possible to do so.
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 48, only "continuous vibration (2 seconds)" and "intermittent vibration (2 seconds)" among the initial actions are predetermined even if the effect button 17 has a return abnormality. The above concern can be eliminated by executing for a predetermined time when the timing is reached.

When the initial operation of the first movable effect device 73 is completed at timing T5, the initial operation of the sub-display device 71 is started, and when the initial operation of the sub-display device 71 is completed at timing T6, the initial operation processing is completed. , the movable production device 1LED, the movable production device 2LED, and the sub display device LED complete initial light emission and turn on during customer waiting (white lighting). ), the output of the initialization notification sound stops and the state becomes silent.

At the timing of T8, when receiving the first special symbol storage designation command (first number of reservations = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45, the reservation displayed in the first number of reservations display area 70E The number becomes "1", the first pending icon is displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B, the sub first pending display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the winning sound is output from the audio output device 9 "Pong♪" is output.

At the timing of T9, when a variation start command (effect pattern designation command, special figure variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, the variable effect (variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the effect button LED ends, and the variable display is started on the sub first variable display device 81, and the movable effect device 1 LED, the movable effect device 2 LED, the sub display device LED, and the effect button LED is lit during fluctuation, and the sub-first holding display 83 is in a display mode showing "0".

(Specific example when there is no recovery error in various accessories after power restoration)
FIG. 49 shows a specific case where there is no return abnormality in various accessories (first movable effect device 73, second movable effect device 75, sub-display device 71, effect button 17) after power supply restoration without initialization of the main RAM 110c. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an example;

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on and power supply is started, an initial screen displaying the words "reading" is displayed as an initial operation of the main display device 70. FIG.

At the timing of T2, when the effect control board 130 receives the first power supply restoration designation command as the power ON command transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started, the second movable effect device 75, and Return operation to the original position of the production button 17 is started.

At this time, the 1 LED of the movable effect device, the 2 LED of the movable effect device, the LED of the sub display device, and the LED of the effect button are kept turned off, and the main display device 70 displays the effect pattern "753" which is the initial pattern at the time of power restoration. 70a and the second standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed) are displayed, and the voice output device 9 maintains silence.

Also, when receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first reservation number display area 70E of the main display device 70 and the second reservation "0" is displayed as a reserved number in each of the number display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Also, the first sub-suspension display 83 and the second sub-suspension display 84 display "0".

When the second movable effect device 75 returns to the origin position, the first movable effect device 73 starts to return to the origin position.

At timing T3, when the return actions of the first movable effect device 73 and the effect button 17 are completed, the return action of the sub-display device 71 is started. At this time, the movable effect device 1LED, the movable effect device 2LED, the sub-display device LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T4, when the returning operation of the sub-display device 71 is completed, the return-to-origin processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started, and the initial operation of the second movable effect device 75 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the movable effect device 1 LED and the movable effect device 2 LED are alternately lit in blue and white as initial light emission, the sub display device LED is lighted in blue as initial light emission, and the effect button LED is lighted in blue as initial light emission. Light.

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the effect button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the effect button LED is completed and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is performed, and at the timing of T6, the initial operation of the first movable effect device 73 is performed. When finished, the initial operation of the sub-display device 71 is started.

At the timing of T7, when the initial operation of the sub-display device 71 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, and the initial light emission is completed in the movable production device 1LED, the movable production device 2LED, and the sub-display device LED, and lighting during customer waiting ( lights up in white).

At the timing of T8, when receiving the first special symbol storage designation command (first number of reservations = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45, the reservation displayed in the first number of reservations display area 70E The number becomes "1", the first pending icon is displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B, the sub first pending display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the winning sound is output from the audio output device 9 "Pong♪" is output.

At the timing of T9, when a variation start command (effect pattern designation command, special figure variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, the variable effect (variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the variable display is started on the sub-first variable display 81, and the movable effect device 1LED, the movable effect device 2LED, the sub-display device LED, and the effect button LED are turned on during fluctuation, and the sub-first pending display is performed. The device 83 becomes a display mode showing "0".

(Concrete example of a case where the sub-display device has a return abnormality after the power is restored)
FIG. 50 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case in which the sub-display device 71 has a return abnormality after power is restored without initializing the main RAM 110c.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on and power supply is started, an initial screen displaying the words "reading" is displayed as an initial operation of the main display device 70. FIG.

At the timing of T2, when the effect control board 130 receives the first power supply restoration designation command as the power ON command transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started, the second movable effect device 75, and Return operation to the original position of the production button 17 is started.

At this time, the 1 LED of the movable effect device, the 2 LED of the movable effect device, the LED of the sub display device, and the LED of the effect button are kept turned off, and the main display device 70 displays the effect pattern "753" which is the initial pattern at the time of power restoration. 70a and the second standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed) are displayed, and the voice output device 9 maintains silence.

Also, when receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first reservation number display area 70E of the main display device 70 and the second reservation "0" is displayed as a reserved number in each of the number display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Also, the first sub-suspension display 83 and the second sub-suspension display 84 display "0".

When the second movable effect device 75 returns to the origin position, the first movable effect device 73 starts to return to the origin position.

At timing T3, when the return actions of the first movable effect device 73 and the effect button 17 are completed, the return action of the sub-display device 71 is started. At this time, the movable effect device 1LED, the movable effect device 2LED, the sub-display device LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T4, when the return-to-origin process ends with the return abnormality occurring in the sub-display device 71, the sub-display device LED flashes red (abnormality notification mode) to notify the occurrence of the return abnormality, and the initial operation process is performed. is started and the initial actions of the second movable effect device 75 and the effect button 17 are started. At this time, the movable effect device 1LED and the movable effect device 2LED are alternately lit in blue and white as initial light emission, and the effect button LED is lighted in blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the effect button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the effect button LED is completed and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is performed, and at the timing of T6, the initial operation of the first movable effect device 73 is performed. When finished, the initial operation processing is completed without executing the initial operation of the sub-display device 71, the initial light emission of the movable production device 1LED and the movable production device 2LED is completed, and lighting during customer waiting (white lighting) is performed.

At the timing of T7, when receiving the first special symbol storage designation command (first number of reservations = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45, the reservation displayed in the first number of reservations display area 70E The number becomes "1", the first pending icon is displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B, the sub-first pending display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the audio output device 9 emits the winning sound " Pong♪" is output.

At the timing of T8, when a variation start command (effect pattern designation command, special figure variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, the variable effect (variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the sub-display device LED ends, and the first sub-variable display device 81 starts variable display, and the movable effect device 1LED, the movable effect device 2LED, the sub-display device LED, and the effect button The LED is lit during variation, and the first sub-suspension indicator 83 becomes a display mode indicating "0".

(Specific example when there is a return abnormality in the first movable effect device after the power supply is restored)
FIG. 51 is a diagram showing a specific example in which the first movable effect device 73 has a return abnormality after power restoration without initializing the main RAM 110c.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on and power supply is started, an initial screen displaying the words "reading" is displayed as an initial operation of the main display device 70. FIG.

At the timing of T2, when the effect control board 130 receives the first power supply restoration designation command as the power ON command transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started, the second movable effect device 75, and Return operation to the original position of the production button 17 is started.

At this time, the 1 LED of the movable effect device, the 2 LED of the movable effect device, the LED of the sub display device, and the LED of the effect button are kept turned off, and the main display device 70 displays the effect pattern "753" which is the initial pattern at the time of power restoration. 70a and the second standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed) are displayed, and the voice output device 9 maintains silence.

Also, when receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first reservation number display area 70E of the main display device 70 and the second reservation "0" is displayed as a reserved number in each of the number display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Also, the first sub-suspension display 83 and the second sub-suspension display 84 display "0".

When the second movable effect device 75 returns to the origin position, the first movable effect device 73 starts to return to the origin position.

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the first movable effect device 73 and the effect button 17 is completed in a state where the return abnormality has occurred in the first movable effect device 73, the movable effect device 1 LED notifies the occurrence of the return abnormality. Therefore, the light flashes in red (anomaly notification mode), and the recovery operation of the sub-display device 71 is started. At this time, the movable effect device 2 LED, the sub-display device LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T4, when the return operation of the sub-display device 71 is completed and the return-to-origin processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started, and the initial operations of the second movable effect device 75 and the effect button 17 are started. At this time, the movable effect device 2 LED alternately lights up in blue and white as initial light emission, and the sub-display device LED and effect button LED light up in blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the effect button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the effect button LED is completed and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is completed, and at the timing of T6, the initial operation of the sub-display device 71 is completed. , the initial operation process ends without executing the initial operation of the first movable effect device 73, the initial light emission of the movable effect device 2 LED and the sub display device LED ends, and lighting during customer waiting (white lighting) occurs.

At the timing of T7, when receiving the first special symbol storage designation command (first number of reservations = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45, the reservation displayed in the first number of reservations display area 70E The number becomes "1", the first pending icon is displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B, the sub-first pending display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the audio output device 9 emits the winning sound " Pong♪" is output.

At the timing of T8, when a variation start command (effect pattern designation command, special figure variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, the variable effect (variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the movable effect device 1LED ends, the variable display is started on the first sub variable display device 81, and the movable effect device 1LED, the movable effect device 2LED, the sub display device LED, and the effect button The LED is lit during variation, and the first sub-suspension indicator 83 becomes a display mode indicating "0".

(Concrete example when there is a return abnormality in the second movable effect device after the power supply is restored)
FIG. 52 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where the second movable effect device 75 has a return abnormality after power restoration without initialization of the main RAM 110c.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on and power supply is started, an initial screen displaying the words "reading" is displayed as an initial operation of the main display device 70. FIG.

At the timing of T2, when the effect control board 130 receives the first power supply restoration designation command as the power ON command transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started, the second movable effect device 75, and Return operation to the original position of the production button 17 is started.

At this time, the 1 LED of the movable effect device, the 2 LED of the movable effect device, the LED of the sub display device, and the LED of the effect button are kept turned off, and the main display device 70 displays the effect pattern "753" which is the initial pattern at the time of power restoration. 70a and the second standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed) are displayed, and the voice output device 9 maintains silence. In addition, since FIG. 52 assumes that the second movable effect device 75 has a return abnormality, the movable effect device 2 LED flashes red to notify the occurrence of the return abnormality (abnormality notification) after turning off. aspect).

Also, when receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first reservation number display area 70E of the main display device 70 and the second reservation "0" is displayed as a reserved number in each of the number display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Also, the first sub-suspension display 83 and the second sub-suspension display 84 display "0".

Although the second movable effect device 75 has returned abnormally, the return operation of the first movable effect device 73 to the origin position is started.

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the first movable effect device 73 and the effect button 17 is completed in a state where the return abnormality occurs in the second movable effect device 75, the LED of the movable effect device 2 continues to blink red (abnormality notification mode) is maintained, and the return operation of the sub-display device 71 is started. At this time, the movable effect device 1 LED, the sub-display device LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T4, when the returning operation of the sub-display device 71 is completed and the return-to-origin processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started, and the initial operation of the first movable effect device 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the movable effect device 1 LED alternately lights up in blue and white as initial light emission, and the sub-display device LED and effect button LED light up (light up) in blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the effect button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the effect button LED is completed and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is completed, and at the timing of T6, the initial operation of the sub-display device 71 is completed. , the initial operation process ends without executing the initial operation of the second movable effect device 75, the initial light emission of the movable effect device 1 LED and the sub display device LED ends, and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) occurs.

At the timing of T7, when receiving the first special symbol storage designation command (first number of reservations = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45, the reservation displayed in the first number of reservations display area 70E The number becomes "1", the first pending icon is displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B, the sub-first pending display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the audio output device 9 emits the winning sound " Pong♪" is output.

At the timing of T9, when a variation start command (effect pattern designation command, special figure variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, the variable effect (variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the movable effect device 2LED ends, and the variable display is started on the sub first variable display device 81, and the movable effect device 1LED, the movable effect device 2LED, the sub display device LED, and the effect button The LED is lit during variation, and the first sub-suspension indicator 83 becomes a display mode indicating "0".

(Specific example when there is a recovery error in the production button after the power is restored)
FIG. 53 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where the effect button 17 has a return abnormality after power-on without initializing the main RAM 110c.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on and power supply is started, an initial screen displaying the words "reading" is displayed as an initial operation of the main display device 70. FIG.

At the timing of T2, when the effect control board 130 receives the first power supply restoration designation command as the power ON command transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started, the second movable effect device 75, and Return operation to the original position of the production button 17 is started.

At this time, the 1 LED of the movable effect device, the 2 LED of the movable effect device, the LED of the sub display device, and the LED of the effect button are kept turned off, and the main display device 70 displays the effect pattern "753" which is the initial pattern at the time of power restoration. 70a and the second standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed) are displayed, and the voice output device 9 maintains silence.

Also, when receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first reservation number display area 70E of the main display device 70 and the second reservation "0" is displayed as a reserved number in each of the number display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Also, the first sub-suspension display 83 and the second sub-suspension display 84 display "0".

When the second movable effect device 75 returns to the origin position, the first movable effect device 73 starts to return to the origin position.

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the first movable effect device 73 and the effect button 17 is completed in a state where the effect button 17 has a return abnormality, the effect button LED flashes red to notify the occurrence of the return abnormality. (abnormality notification mode), and the recovery operation of the sub-display device 71 is started. At this time, the movable effect device 1LED, the movable effect device 2LED, and the sub-display device LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T4, when the return operation of the sub-display device 71 is completed and the return-to-origin processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started and the initial operation of the second movable effect device 75 is started. Operation will not start. At this time, the movable effect device 1LED and the movable effect device 2LED are alternately lit in blue and white as initial light emission, and the sub display device LED is lighted in blue as initial light emission.
It should be noted that the fact that the initial action of the effect button 17 is not started is the same as the content described in the description of FIG. 48, so the description here will be omitted.

When the initial operation of the first movable effect device 73 is completed at timing T5, the initial operation of the sub-display device 71 is started, and when the initial operation of the sub-display device 71 is completed at timing T6, the initial operation processing is completed. , the movable effect device 1LED, the movable effect device 2LED, and the sub display device LED end the initial light emission and turn on during customer waiting (white light).

At the timing of T7, when receiving the first special symbol storage designation command (first number of reservations = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45, the reservation displayed in the first number of reservations display area 70E The number becomes "1", the first pending icon is displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B, the sub first pending display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the winning sound is output from the audio output device 9 "Pong♪" is output.

At the timing of T8, when a variation start command (effect pattern designation command, special figure variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, the variable effect (variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the effect button LED ends, and the variable display is started on the sub first variable display device 81, and the movable effect device 1 LED, the movable effect device 2 LED, the sub display device LED, and the effect button LED is lit during fluctuation, and the sub-first holding display 83 is in a display mode showing "0".

(Concrete example when the state after power restoration is during variable display of special symbols and with reserved memory)
FIG. 54 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where the state after power restoration without initialization of the main RAM 110c is during variable display of special symbols (loss variable display) and with reserved storage.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on and power supply is started, an initial screen displaying the words "reading" is displayed as an initial operation of the main display device 70. FIG.

At the timing of T2, when the effect control board 130 receives a second power supply restoration designation command as a power ON time command transmitted from the main control board 110, origin return processing is started, and the second movable effect device 75 and Return operation to the original position of the production button 17 is started.

At this time, the movable effect device 1 LED, the movable effect device 2 LED, the sub display device LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off, and the main display device 70 displays the characters "Please restart the game." A screen is displayed and the audio output device 9 maintains silence.

In addition, when receiving the special symbol storage designation command (the number of the first reservation = 3, the number of the second reservation = 0) as a command at the time of power ON, since the screen during recovery is displayed on the main display device 70, the first reservation A state in which no pending number is displayed in the number display area 70E or the second pending number display area 70F is maintained.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the first sub-suspension display 83 has a display mode indicating "3", and the second sub-suspension display 84 has a display mode indicating "0".

When the second movable effect device 75 returns to the origin position, the first movable effect device 73 starts to return to the origin position.

At timing T3, when the return actions of the first movable effect device 73 and the effect button 17 are completed, the return action of the sub-display device 71 is started. At this time, the movable effect device 1LED, the movable effect device 2LED, the sub-display device LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T4, when the returning operation of the sub-display device 71 is completed, the return-to-origin processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started, and the initial operation of the second movable effect device 75 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the movable effect device 1LED, the movable effect device 2LED, the sub-display device LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T5, the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, and at the timing of T6, when the initial operation of the first movable production device 73 is completed, the initial operation of the sub display device 71 is started, and at the timing of T7, the sub When the initial operation of the display device 71 ends, the initial operation process ends, and the movable effect device 1LED, the movable effect device 2LED, the sub-display device LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T8, when the special symbol determination command is received from the main control board 110, the main display device 70 stops displaying the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the special symbol TZ ( A still screen (same as the second standby screen) is displayed, and the audio output device 9 outputs a stop sound "Don♪".

At this time, three first suspended icons are displayed in the first suspended icon display area 70B, but the icon display area 70C is secured in a state where the display area can display an effect image such as a background image ( The pedestal image is displayed), but the icon is not displayed.

At the timing of T9, when a variation start command (effect pattern designation command, special figure variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E becomes "2". Then, the variable effect (variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the variable display is started on the sub-first variable display 81, and the movable effect device 1LED, the movable effect device 2LED, the sub-display device LED, and the effect button LED are turned on during fluctuation, and the sub-first pending display is performed. The device 83 becomes a display mode showing "2".

In addition, when the state after power restoration is during variable display of special symbols (loss variable display) and there is no pending memory, "0" is displayed on the first sub-holding display 83 at the timing of T2, and the timing of T9. The flow of the basic operation from the timing of T1 to the timing of T8 is the same, except that the variable effect is not started by receiving the customer waiting state designation command in .

(Concrete example when the power recovery designation command cannot be received normally when the power is turned on)
FIG. 55 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where a power restoration designation command cannot be normally received when the power is turned on.

When the power supply restoration designation command cannot be received normally, power is supplied to the production control board 130, but power is not supplied to the main control board 110, and from the main control board 110 to the production control board 130 , the command communication line is disconnected, and the connector of the command communication line is in a non-connected state (including a half-inserted state).

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on and power supply is started, an initial screen displaying the words "reading" is displayed as an initial operation of the main display device 70. FIG.

At the timing of T2, while the effect control board 130 does not receive the first power restoration designation command as the power ON command transmitted from the main control board 110, the special symbol storage designation command (the first pending number and the second When the pending number=0) is received, the main display device 70 maintains the state in which the initial screen is displayed, and the movable effect device 1 LED, the movable effect device 2 LED, the sub display device LED, and the effect button LED remain extinguished. .

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Also, the first sub-suspension display 83 and the second sub-suspension display 84 display "0".

At the timing of T3, when receiving the first special symbol memory designation command (first number of reservations = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45, the state in which the initial screen is displayed on the main display device 70 is maintained, the sub-first suspension display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the voice output device 9 outputs the winning sound "Pong♪".

At the timing of T4, when a variation start command (effect pattern designation command, special pattern variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the main display device 70 displays the effect pattern "753" which is the initial pattern at the time of power restoration. 70a and the second standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped (stationary display) is displayed for a moment, and then the variable effect (the effect symbol 70a and the variable display of the special symbol TZ, the movement of the pending icon or the change to icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the variable display is started on the sub-first variable display 81, and the movable effect device 1LED, the movable effect device 2LED, the sub-display device LED, and the effect button LED are turned on during fluctuation, and the sub-first pending display is performed. The device 83 becomes a display mode showing "0".

A specific example of a case where the power-on designation command cannot be normally received when the power is turned on is the same as the above-described specific example of a case where the power-on designation command cannot be normally received.

(Concrete example when power supply to the main control board is restarted after being stopped)
FIG. 56 shows that only the power supply to the main control board 110 in the customer waiting state (during the power supply to the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130) after the origin return process and the initial operation process are completed. is a diagram showing a specific example of restarting after stopping.

The case where only the power supply to the main control board is restarted after being stopped is the case where the power supply line (main power supply line, backup power supply line) from the power supply board 160 to the main control board 110 is disconnected and then contacted due to an external factor. , the connector of the power supply line (main power supply line, backup power supply line) from the power supply board 160 to the main control board 110 is in a disconnected state (including a half-inserted state), and then the connector is in a connected state. mentioned.

At the timing of T1, it is already in the customer waiting state after the return operation of various characters, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound are completed. A second standby screen or a customer waiting demo effect screen in which the effect symbol 70a of "753" and the special symbol TZ are stopped (still displayed) is displayed, and the movable effect device 1LED, the movable effect device 2 LED, the sub display device LED, and the effect button LED are lit while the customer is waiting.

Note that when the timing of T1 is the customer waiting state after the completion of the variable effect executed after the completion of the return operation of various roles, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound, the main display device 70 In , a standby screen in which the losing effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped (still displayed) or a customer waiting demonstration effect screen is displayed.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal drawing holding display 86 are in a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T2, when only the power supply (including the backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped, the main display device 70 maintains the state in which the second standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration effect screen is displayed, Sub information display 80 (sub first fluctuation display 81, sub second fluctuation display 82, sub first holding display 83, sub second holding display 84, sub normal figure fluctuation display 85, sub normal figure reservation The display 86) also maintains the displayed content.

Even if only the power supply (including the backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped, the standby screen is being displayed (regardless of whether it is after the end of the variable effect or not, the customer waiting state designation command is received). (or after the end of the previous customer-waiting demonstration effect), the customer-waiting demonstration effect is started.

At timing T3, when the power supply to the main control board 110 resumes, the main RAM 110c is initialized. At this time, the main display device 70 maintains the state in which the second standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display devices 80 (sub first variable display device 81, sub second The first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85, the sub-normal figure holding display 86) also maintain the display contents.

At the timing of T4, when the effect control board 130 receives a power-on designation command as a power-on time command transmitted from the main control board 110, origin return processing is started, and the second movable effect device 75 and the effect button 17 is started to return to the origin position.

At this time, the movable effect device 1 LED, the movable effect device 2 LED, the sub display device LED, and the effect button LED are turned off, and the main display device 70 displays the second standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration effect screen. Instead, the first standby screen in which the effect symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and the special symbol TZ are stopped (still displayed) is displayed, and the voice output device 9: An initialization notification sound consisting of an alarm and a voice saying "RAM is cleared" is output.

Also, when receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first reservation number display area 70E of the main display device 70 and the second reservation "0" is displayed as a reserved number in each of the number display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Also, the first sub-suspension display 83 and the second sub-suspension display 84 display "0".

When the second movable effect device 75 returns to the origin position, the first movable effect device 73 starts to return to the origin position.

At timing T5, when the return actions of the first movable effect device 73 and the effect button 17 are completed, the return action of the sub-display device 71 is started. At this time, the movable effect device 1LED, the movable effect device 2LED, the sub-display device LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T6, when the return operation of the sub-display device 71 is completed, the return-to-origin processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started, and the initial operations of the second movable effect device 75 and the effect button 17 are started. At this time, the movable effect device 1 LED, the movable effect device 2 LED, and the sub display device LED alternately light up in blue and white as initial light emission, and the effect button LED light up in order of red→green→blue as initial light emission. (lights up).

At the timing of T7, when the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the production button LED is completed and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is performed, and at the timing of T8, the initial operation of the first movable production device 73 is performed. When finished, the initial operation of the sub-display device 71 is started.

At the timing of T9, when the initial operation of the sub-display device 71 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, and the initial light emission is completed in the movable production device 1LED, the movable production device 2LED, and the sub-display device LED, and the customer waiting lighting ( When the initialization notification sound output period (for example, 60 seconds) elapses at the timing of T10, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and becomes silent.

In addition, during the execution of the variable performance (losing variation performance, jackpot variation performance) after the return operation of various roles, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound, and the jackpot game (opening, round game, ending ), even if only the power supply (including the backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted during the execution of ), the main display will not be displayed until the power-on designation command as the power-on command is received at the timing of T4. Except that the screen displayed on the device 70 is a variable effect screen (losing variable effect screen, jackpot variable effect screen) or a jackpot effect screen (opening effect screen, round game effect screen, ending effect screen), the customer waiting state This is similar to the case where only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted.

Also, in the case where there is a recovery abnormality in various role products, the initial motions of various role products are performed in the same manner as in the specific examples shown in FIGS.

Next, a description will be given of a case where the main power supply is restarted while the main power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and the backup power supply continues.

In the case of the customer waiting state after the return operation of various accessories, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound are already completed, the main display device 70 displays the initial symbol "753" at the time of power restoration. A second standby screen in which the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped (still displayed), or a customer waiting demo effect screen is displayed, and the movable effect device 1 LED, the movable effect device 2 LED, and the sub-display are displayed. The device LED and effect button LED are lit while waiting for customers.

In addition, in the case of the customer waiting state after the completion of the variable effect executed after the completion of the return operation of various roles, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound, the main display device 70 displays the lost and the standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed) or the customer waiting demonstration effect screen is displayed.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal drawing holding display 86 are in a display mode indicating "0".

After that, when only the power supply to the main control board 110 (excluding the backup power supply) is stopped, the main display device 70 maintains the state in which the standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display 80 (Sub first fluctuation display 81, sub second fluctuation display 82, sub first reservation display 83, sub second reservation display 84, sub normal figure fluctuation display 85, sub normal figure reservation display 86) Keep what you see.

Then, when the power supply to the main control board 110 is restarted, processing for restoring the control state of the game is performed. At this time, the main display device 70 maintains the state in which the standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display devices 80 (sub first variable display device 81, sub second The first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85, the sub-normal figure holding display 86) also maintain the display contents.

It should be noted that even if the main power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped, while the standby screen is displayed (after receiving the customer waiting state designation command regardless of whether it is after the end of the variable effect, or When the demonstration standby time elapses (after the end of the previous customer-waiting demonstration effect), the customer-waiting demonstration effect is started.

After that, when the effect control board 130 receives a power supply restoration designation command as a command at the time of power ON transmitted from the main control board 110, origin return processing is started and the second movable effect device 75 and the origin of the effect button 17 A return motion to the position is initiated.

At this time, the movable effect device 1 LED, the movable effect device 2 LED, the sub display device LED, and the effect button LED are turned off, and the main display device 70 displays the standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration effect screen instead of the , the second standby screen in which the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the special symbol TZ are stopped (still displayed) are displayed, and the voice output device 9 becomes silent.

Also, when receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first reservation number display area 70E of the main display device 70 and the second reservation "0" is displayed as a reserved number in each of the number display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Also, the first sub-suspension display 83 and the second sub-suspension display 84 display "0".

When the second movable effect device 75 returns to the origin position, the first movable effect device 73 starts to return to the origin position.

After that, when the return actions of the first movable effect device 73 and the effect button 17 are completed, the return action of the sub-display device 71 is started. At this time, the movable effect device 1LED, the movable effect device 2LED, the sub-display device LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

When the return operation of the sub-display device 71 is completed, the return-to-origin processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started, and the initial operations of the second movable effect device 75 and the effect button 17 are started. At this time, the movable effect device 1 LED, the movable effect device 2 LED, and the sub display device LED alternately light up in blue and white as initial light emission, and the effect button LED light up in order of red→green→blue as initial light emission. (lights up).

After that, when the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the production button LED is completed and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is completed. Initial operation is started.

Then, when the initial operation of the sub-display device 71 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, and the initial light emission is completed in the movable production device 1LED, the movable production device 2LED, and the sub-display device LED, and lighting during customer waiting (white lighting). becomes.

It should be noted that during execution of the variable effect (losing variable effect, jackpot variable effect) after the completion of the return action, the initial action, and the output of the initialization notification sound, that is, the main display device 70 shows the variable effect. If the power restoration specifying command is received while the screen is being displayed, the process is the same as the timing after T2 in the specific example shown in FIG.

In addition, during execution of the jackpot game (opening, round game, ending) after the completion of the output of the return operation, the initial operation, and the initialization notification sound of the various roles, that is, the opening effect screen displayed on the main display device 70 , the round effect screen, or the ending effect screen is displayed, when the power supply restoration designation command is received, the timing of T2 of the specific example shown in FIG. It is the same as below.

Specifically, on the main display device 70, a special jackpot effect screen is displayed in place of the normal jackpot effect screen, and the special jackpot effect screen is displayed until the next round designation command or ending designation command is received. to maintain The display of the special big win effect screen may be maintained until the big win game ends.

Also, in the case where there is a recovery abnormality in various role products, the initial motions of various role products are performed in the same manner as in the specific examples shown in FIGS.

Thus, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 44 to 56, when the game control state is initialized, the identification characters (numbers, alphabets, etc.) in the plurality of production patterns 70a are the first combination. When the first initial effect pattern ("135") is displayed and the game control state is restored, the second initial effect pattern (" 753”) is displayed. By doing so, it is possible to easily grasp whether the control state of the game has been initialized or whether the control state of the game has been restored.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 44 to 56, when the control state of the game is restored, a specific display suggesting resumption of power supply is performed before displaying the effect symbol 70a on the main display device 70. It is possible to display the specific display on the main display device 70 after returning to the customer waiting state (display of the initial screen only), and during the variable display of the special symbol and without / with hold memory. The display mode of the specific display displayed on the main display device 70 after recovery (display of initial screen + screen during recovery) is made different. By doing so, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game when the stopped power supply is restarted and the control state of the game is restored.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 44 to 56, the pending icon display area (first pending icon display area 70B, second pending icon display area 70D), and sub pending display (sub first pending display It is possible to perform a pending display indicating the number of pending memories on each of the device 83 and the second sub-holding display 84), and the power supply stopped in the state where there is a pending memory is resumed and the control state of the game is restored. In this case, while the main display device 70 is performing the specific display suggesting the restart of the power supply, the suspension display is not performed in the suspension icon display area, but the suspension display can be performed in the sub-suspension display. By doing so, when the stopped power supply is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the number of pending memories can be grasped before the end of the specific display, and the interest in the game is prevented from decreasing. can be suppressed.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 44 to 56, when the power supply stopped during the customer waiting demonstration effect is restarted and the game control state is restored, the customer waiting demonstration effect screen is displayed again. Instead, the second standby screen is displayed in a state in which the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, is stopped (still displayed). By doing so, it is not necessary to be conscious of whether or not the state before the power supply is stopped is during the customer waiting demonstration effect, and the display control when restoring the game control state after the power supply is restarted. It is possible to reduce the processing load involved.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 44 to 56, the sub-variation display device (first sub-variation display device 81, second sub-variation display device 82) has a special symbol after the game control state is restored. Even if the variable display is executed (the screen during recovery is displayed), the variable display (blinking display) is not performed during the variable display of the special symbol. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the processing load when restoring the control state of the game after restarting the power supply.

In addition, when the variable display of the special symbol is executed (displaying the screen during recovery) when the control state of the game is restored, the sub variable display (sub first variable display 81, sub second variable display 82), a variable display (blinking display) may be performed. In this way, when the control state of the game is restored, it becomes possible to easily grasp that the variable display of the special symbols is being executed.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 44 to 56, for the sub-suspension displays (the first sub-suspension display 83 and the second sub-suspension display 84), the returning screen is displayed on the main display device 70. When it is (before the variable display is performed on the sub-variable display and when the special symbol storage designation command is received), the display mode shows the number of reservations. By doing so, it is possible to allow the player to grasp the number of pending games immediately after the control state of the game is restored, and it is possible to suppress the decline in interest in the game.

It should be noted that when the returning screen is displayed on the main display device 70, the sub-variation display (first sub-variation display 81, second sub-variation display 82) may perform a variation display (flashing display). Alternatively, the sub-suspension display (sub first suspension display 83, sub second suspension display 84) may be set to display the number of suspensions in accordance with the start of this variable display. By doing so, it is possible to easily grasp that the variable display of the special symbols is being executed when the control state of the game is restored, and the number of holdings at that time.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 44 to 56, when power is turned on with initialization of the main RAM 110c, power is restored to the customer waiting state without initialization of the main RAM 110c. At the same timing as when the character is released, that is, at the timing when the effect pattern 70a is displayed on the main display device 70 (timing when the initial screen ends), the return operation of various roles is performed. By doing so, it is possible to avoid complicating the control of the return operation of various roles, and to reduce the processing load of the return operations of various roles.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 44 to 56, during the return operation of various accessories (first movable effect device 73, second movable effect device 75, sub-display device 71, effect button 17), , the light-emitting portions of various accessories (movable effect device 1 LED, movable effect device 2 LED, sub-display device LED, effect button LED) are turned off. By doing so, it is possible to distinguish from the initial motion of various accessories, and it is possible to grasp that the recovery motion is being performed.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 44 to 56, when there is a recovery abnormality in any of the various accessories, the light-emitting part of the accessory with the recovery abnormality flashes red (abnormality notification mode). By doing so, anomaly notification is performed. By doing so, it is possible to grasp the accessory having the return abnormality.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 44 to 56, when the abnormality is notified by flashing red the light-emitting part of the character having the recovery abnormality, the display is continued until the next variable effect is started. The anomaly notification continues. By doing so, it is possible to reliably notify the accessory having the return abnormality.

In addition, when there is a return abnormality in the role, a return operation may be performed for returning the role having the return abnormality to the origin position at the timing when the next variable effect is started. Further, in the case where the abnormality notification is performed by flashing red the light-emitting portion of the character having the recovery abnormality, the abnormality notification may be canceled when the effect button 17 is operated.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 44 to 56, when the power supply stopped during the customer waiting state is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the main display device 70 displays the production pattern 70a. Various accessories (first movable effect device 73, second movable effect device 75, sub display device 71 , the initial operation of the effect button 17) is performed, but when the power supply stopped during the variable display of the special symbols is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the effect symbol 70a is displayed on the main display device 70. From the previous timing (while the recovery screen is being displayed), the initial actions of various roles are performed. By doing so, it is possible to perform initial actions of various roles at appropriate timing according to the state when power supply occurs.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 44 to 56 , the main display device 70 When the return screen is displayed (during the variable display of the special symbol and before the display of the production symbol 70a), the sub-holding display (sub-first holding display 83, sub-second holding display 84) is the holding number The initial operation is performed after the display mode indicating . By doing so, it is possible to perform the initial action of the board role after the player has grasped the number of reservations (progress of the game in the future), and it is possible to suppress the decline in the interest of the game. Become.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 44 to 56, regarding the frame role (effect button 17), when the returning screen is displayed on the main display device 70 (while the special symbol is fluctuating display and effect The initial operation is performed after the sub-holding display (sub-first holding display 83, sub-second holding display 84) becomes a display mode indicating the number of holdings before the display of the pattern 70a). By doing so, it is possible to perform the initial action of the frame role after the player has grasped the number of reservations (progress of the game in the future), and it is possible to suppress the decline in the interest of the game. Become.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 44 to 56, when power is turned on with initialization of the main RAM 110c, power is restored to the customer waiting state without initialization of the main RAM 110c. Various accessories are started from the same timing as in the case of being released, that is, the timing after the performance design 70a is displayed on the main display device 70 (the timing at which the performance design 70a is displayed when the return operation is completed immediately). Initial operation is performed. By doing so, it is possible to avoid complicating the control of the initial motions of various roles and reduce the processing load of the initial motions of various roles.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 44 to 56, even when the stop screen is displayed after the return screen is displayed, the stop sound of the production pattern 70a is output. By doing so, it is possible to make it easier for the player to grasp that the variable effect being executed at the time when the power supply is stopped is finished, and it is possible to suppress the decline in the interest of the game. Become.

When the stop screen is displayed after the return screen is displayed, the stop sound of the effect symbol 70a may not be output.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 44 to 56, when the power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) cannot be received, the initial screen is simply displayed to restore various characters. Action, initial action, and initial light emission are not executed. By doing so, it is possible to grasp the occurrence of an abnormality in which the power-on command cannot be received.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 44 to 56, even when the initial screen is displayed because the power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) cannot be received, the main When receiving a special symbol memory specifying command based on the winning of the game ball to the starting port from the control board 110, a winning sound is output. By doing so, even when the initial screen is displayed, it is possible to accurately notify that the game ball has entered the starting hole.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 44 to 56, even when the initial screen is displayed because the power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) cannot be received, the main When a variation start command is received from the control board 110, the variation performance is executed without displaying the standby screen. By doing so, the start of the variable performance is executed without delay, and the variable performance can be executed from the beginning to the end within the range of the variable time of the special symbols.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 44 to 56, even when the initial screen is displayed because the power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) cannot be received, the main When a variable start command is received from the control board 110, the variable performance is executed without executing the return action or the initial action of various accessories. By doing so, it is possible to execute the production using various accessories without being hindered by the return operation and the initial operation during the execution of the variable production.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 44 to 56, even in the customer waiting state after the return operation of various accessories and the initial operation (including initial light emission) are completed, the main control board When a power-on designation command or a power restoration designation command is received again from the main control board 110 by restarting after stopping only the power supply to 110, the return operation of various characters and the initial operation are performed again. (including initial light emission). By doing so, the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, so even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated.

In addition, during the return action of various roles, and after the initial action (including initial light emission) is completed, during the fluctuation production (losing fluctuation production, jackpot fluctuation production) and jackpot game (opening production, round production, ending production) Even so, if the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted, and a power-on designation command or a power restoration designation command is received from the main control board 110 again, various accessories return operation and initial operation (including initial light emission). By doing so, the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, so even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 44 to 56, even during the customer waiting state after the output of the initialization notification sound has already ended, after only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped, When a power-on designation command is received from the main control board 110, such as by restarting, the initialization notification sound is output again. By doing so, the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, so even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated.

In addition, even during a variable performance (losing variable performance, jackpot variable performance) or a jackpot game (opening performance, round performance, ending performance) after the output of the initialization notification sound has already ended, the main control board 110 When the power supply is restarted from the main control board 110 after the power supply is stopped, the initialization notification sound is output again. By doing so, the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, so even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated.

When the power-on designation command is received again from the main control board 110, the reset operation of various characters and the initial operation (including initial light emission) are not executed, but the initialization notification sound is output from the voice output device 9. You can also just output the .

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 44 to 56, power supply to the main control board 110 is continued even after the return operation of various characters and the initial operation (including initial light emission) have already been completed. When the power-on designation command is received again from the main control board 110 by restarting after stopping, the first standby screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen, and the power is turned on again from the main control board 110. When a recovery designation command is received, the second standby screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen. By doing so, the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, so even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated.

In addition, even during a variable performance (losing variable performance, jackpot variable performance) or a jackpot game (opening performance, round performance, ending performance) after the output of the initialization notification sound has already ended, the main control board 110 When a power-on designation command is received again from the main control board 110 by restarting after stopping only the power supply of the main control board 110, the first standby screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen, and the main control board 110 When the power supply restoration designation command is received from again, the second standby screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen. By doing so, the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, so even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated.

(Modified example in which only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted)
FIG. 57 shows that only the power supply to the main control board 110 in the customer waiting state (during power supply to the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130) after the origin return process and the initial operation process are completed. is a diagram showing a modification in the case of restarting after stopping.

The case where only the power supply to the main control board is restarted after being stopped is the case where the power supply line (main power supply line, backup power supply line) from the power supply board 160 to the main control board 110 is disconnected and then contacted due to an external factor. , the connector of the power supply line (main power supply line, backup power supply line) from the power supply board 160 to the main control board 110 is in a disconnected state (including a half-inserted state), and then the connector is in a connected state. mentioned.

At the timing of T1, it is already in the customer waiting state after the return operation of various characters, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound are completed. A second standby screen or a customer waiting demo effect screen in which the effect symbol 70a of "753" and the special symbol TZ are stopped (still displayed) is displayed, and the movable effect device 1LED, the movable effect device 2 LED, the sub display device LED, and the production button LED are lit while waiting for customers.

Note that when the timing of T1 is the customer waiting state after the completion of the variable effect executed after the completion of the return operation of various roles, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound, the main display device 70 In , a standby screen in which the losing effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped (still displayed) or a customer waiting demonstration effect screen is displayed.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal drawing holding display 86 are in a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T2, when only the power supply (including the backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped, the main display device 70 maintains the state in which the second standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration effect screen is displayed, Sub information display 80 (sub first fluctuation display 81, sub second fluctuation display 82, sub first holding display 83, sub second holding display 84, sub normal figure fluctuation display 85, sub normal figure reservation The display 86) also maintains the displayed content.

Even if only the power supply (including the backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped, the standby screen is being displayed (regardless of whether it is after the end of the variable effect or not, the customer waiting state designation command is received). (or after the end of the previous customer-waiting demonstration effect), the customer-waiting demonstration effect is started.

At timing T3, when the power supply to the main control board 110 resumes, the main RAM 110c is initialized. At this time, instead of the second standby screen or the customer waiting demo effect screen, the main display device 70 displays an initial screen containing the characters "reading", and the movable effect device 1LED, the movable effect device 2LED, And, the sub-display device LED and effect button LED are extinguished.

At this time, sub information display 80 (sub first fluctuation display 81, sub second fluctuation display 82, sub first holding display 83, sub second holding display 84, sub normal figure fluctuation display 85, sub The general pattern holding display 86) is hidden.

At the timing of T4, when the effect control board 130 receives a power-on designation command as a power-on time command transmitted from the main control board 110, origin return processing is started, and the second movable effect device 75 and the effect button 17 is started to return to the origin position.

At this time, the movable effect device 1 LED, the movable effect device 2 LED, the sub display device LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off, and instead of the initial screen, the main display device 70 displays the initial pattern when the power is turned on. A first standby screen is displayed in which the effect symbol 70a of "135" and the special symbol TZ are stopped (still displayed), and from the voice output device 9, an alarm and a voice saying "RAM is cleared" are displayed. An initialization notification sound is output.

Also, when receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first reservation number display area 70E of the main display device 70 and the second reservation "0" is displayed as a reserved number in each of the number display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Also, the first sub-suspension display 83 and the second sub-suspension display 84 display "0".

When the second movable effect device 75 returns to the origin position, the first movable effect device 73 starts to return to the origin position.

At timing T5, when the return actions of the first movable effect device 73 and the effect button 17 are completed, the return action of the sub-display device 71 is started. At this time, the movable effect device 1LED, the movable effect device 2LED, the sub-display device LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T6, when the return operation of the sub-display device 71 is completed, the return-to-origin processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started, and the initial operations of the second movable effect device 75 and the effect button 17 are started. At this time, the movable effect device 1 LED, the movable effect device 2 LED, and the sub-display device LED alternately light up in blue and white as initial light emission, and the effect button LED light up in order of red→green→blue as initial light emission. (lights up).

At the timing of T7, when the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the production button LED is completed and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is performed, and at the timing of T8, the initial operation of the first movable production device 73 is performed. When finished, the initial operation of the sub-display device 71 is started.

At the timing of T9, when the initial operation of the sub-display device 71 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, and the initial light emission is completed in the movable production device 1LED, the movable production device 2LED, and the sub-display device LED, and the customer waiting lighting ( When the initialization notification sound output period (for example, 60 seconds) elapses at the timing of T10, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and becomes silent.

In addition, during the execution of the variable performance (losing variation performance, jackpot variation performance) after the return operation of various roles, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound, and the jackpot game (opening, round game, ending ), only the power supply (including the backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted, the main display device 70 is not displayed until the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped at the timing of T3. Except for the fact that the screen displayed on is a fluctuation production screen (losing fluctuation production screen, jackpot fluctuation production screen) and a jackpot production screen (opening production screen, round game production screen, ending production screen), the main This is the same as when only the power supply to the control board 110 is stopped and then restarted.

Next, a description will be given of a case where the main power supply is restarted while the main power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and the backup power supply continues.

In the case of the customer waiting state after the return operation of various accessories, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound are already completed, the main display device 70 displays the initial symbol "753" at the time of power restoration. A second standby screen in which the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped (still displayed), or a customer waiting demo effect screen is displayed, and the movable effect device 1 LED, the movable effect device 2 LED, and the sub-display are displayed. The device LED and effect button LED are lit while waiting for customers.

In addition, in the case of the customer waiting state after the completion of the variable effect executed after the completion of the return operation of various roles, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound, the main display device 70 displays the lost and the standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed) or the customer waiting demonstration effect screen is displayed.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal drawing holding display 86 are in a display mode indicating "0".

After that, when only the power supply to the main control board 110 (excluding the backup power supply) is stopped, the main display device 70 maintains the state in which the standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display 80 (Sub first fluctuation display 81, sub second fluctuation display 82, sub first reservation display 83, sub second reservation display 84, sub normal figure fluctuation display 85, sub normal figure reservation display 86) Keep what you see.

Then, when the power supply to the main control board 110 is restarted, processing for restoring the control state of the game is performed. At this time, the main display device 70 displays an initial screen including the characters "reading", and the movable effect device 1 LED, the movable effect device 2 LED, the sub display device LED, and the effect button LED are extinguished.

At this time, sub information display 80 (sub first fluctuation display 81, sub second fluctuation display 82, sub first holding display 83, sub second holding display 84, sub normal figure fluctuation display 85, sub The general pattern holding display 86) is hidden.

After that, when the effect control board 130 receives a power supply restoration designation command as a command at the time of power ON transmitted from the main control board 110, origin return processing is started and the second movable effect device 75 and the origin of the effect button 17 A return motion to the position is initiated.

At this time, the movable effect device 1 LED, the movable effect device 2 LED, the sub display device LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off, and instead of the initial screen, the main display device 70 displays the initial pattern at the time of power restoration. A second standby screen is displayed in which the effect symbol 70a of "753" and the special symbol TZ are stopped (still displayed).

Also, when receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first reservation number display area 70E of the main display device 70 and the second reservation "0" is displayed as a reserved number in each of the number display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Also, the first sub-suspension display 83 and the second sub-suspension display 84 display "0".

When the second movable effect device 75 returns to the origin position, the first movable effect device 73 starts to return to the origin position.

After that, when the return actions of the first movable effect device 73 and the effect button 17 are completed, the return action of the sub-display device 71 is started. At this time, the movable effect device 1LED, the movable effect device 2LED, the sub-display device LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

When the return operation of the sub-display device 71 is completed, the return-to-origin processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started, and the initial operations of the second movable effect device 75 and the effect button 17 are started. At this time, the movable effect device 1 LED, the movable effect device 2 LED, and the sub display device LED alternately light up in blue and white as initial light emission, and the effect button LED light up in order of red→green→blue as initial light emission. (lights up).

After that, when the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the production button LED is completed and it turns on during customer waiting (white lighting). The initial operation of the sub display device 71 is started.

Then, when the initial operation of the sub-display device 71 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, and the initial light emission is completed in the movable production device 1LED, the movable production device 2LED, and the sub-display device LED, and lighting during customer waiting (white lighting). becomes.

It should be noted that during execution of the variable effect (losing variable effect, jackpot variable effect) after the completion of the return action, the initial action, and the output of the initialization notification sound, that is, the main display device 70 shows the variable effect. Even if the power supply to the main control board 110 (excluding the backup power supply) is stopped while the screen is displayed, and then the power supply to the main control board 110 is resumed, the main display device 70 An initial screen containing the characters "reading" is displayed, and after that, when the production control board 130 receives a power restoration designation command as a command at power ON transmitted from the main control board 110, the return operation of various characters, And the initial operation is performed. At this time, on the main display device 70, instead of the initial screen, a returning screen including characters "Please restart the game" is displayed, and the returning screen is displayed until the next special symbol confirmation command is received. to maintain

In addition, during execution of the jackpot game (opening, round game, ending) after the completion of the output of the return operation, the initial operation, and the initialization notification sound of the various roles, that is, the opening effect screen displayed on the main display device 70 , the round effect screen, or the ending effect screen, only the power supply to the main control board 110 (excluding the backup power supply) is stopped, and then the power supply to the main control board 110 is resumed. In this case as well, the main display device 70 displays an initial screen including the characters "reading", and after that, the main control board 110 directs a power restoration designation command as a power-on command transmitted from the main control board 110. When received by 130, return actions and initial actions of various roles are executed. At this time, a special jackpot performance screen is displayed on the main display device 70 in place of the normal jackpot performance screen, and the display of the special jackpot performance screen is maintained until the next round designation command or ending designation command is received. do. The display of the special big win effect screen may be maintained until the big win game ends.

Thus, according to the modification shown in FIG. 57, when only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted, an initial screen different from the standby screen is displayed from the standby screen on which the effect symbol 70a is displayed. It is designed to switch. By doing so, it becomes possible to grasp that the power supply to the main control board 110 has stopped (there is an abnormality in the main control board 110).

Further, according to the modification shown in FIG. 57, when only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted, the movable effect device 1 LED, the movable effect device 2 LED, and the sub-display are displayed during the display of the initial screen. The device LED and effect button LED are turned off. By doing so, it becomes easy to grasp that the power supply to the main control board 110 has stopped (there is an abnormality in the main control board 110).

In addition, instead of starting the initial action of various characters from the timing when the initial screen switches to the standby screen, the various characters start at the timing when the initial screen switches to the initial screen, or between the timing when the initial screen switches to the standby screen. may be started.

Instead of switching from the standby screen to the initial screen when the power supply to the main control board 110 resumes, the standby screen may be switched to the initial screen at the stage of receiving the power-on designation command. In this case, the initial action of each character may be started at the timing when the standby screen is switched to the initial screen, or at the timing before the initial screen is switched to the standby screen, or when the initial screen is switched to the standby screen. At the switching timing, the initial actions of various roles may be started.

Also, instead of switching from the standby screen to the initial screen when the power supply to the main control board 110 is resumed (power-on designation command is received), the initial screen is displayed after switching from the standby screen to the non-display state. can be In this case, the initial actions of various characters may be started at the timing of switching from the non-display state to the initial screen, or at the timing from the timing of switching from the initial screen to the standby screen, or from the initial screen to the standby screen. At the timing of switching to , the initial actions of various roles may be started.

(Modified example when there is a recovery error in the sub-display device after the power is turned on)
FIG. 58 is a diagram showing a modification in which the sub-display device 71 has a return abnormality after power-on accompanied by initialization of the main RAM 110c.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on and power supply is started, an initial screen displaying the words "reading" is displayed as an initial operation of the main display device 70. FIG.

At the timing of T2, when the effect control board 130 receives a power-on designation command as a power-on command transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started, and the second movable effect device 75 and the effect button 17 is started to return to the origin position.

At this time, the movable effect device 1 LED, the movable effect device 2 LED, the sub display device LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off, and the main display device 70 displays the initial pattern "135" when the power is turned on. 70a and the first standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed) is displayed, and the voice output device 9 emits an initialization notification sound consisting of a warning and a voice saying "RAM is cleared". output.

Also, when receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first reservation number display area 70E of the main display device 70 and the second reservation "0" is displayed as a reserved number in each of the number display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Also, the first sub-suspension display 83 and the second sub-suspension display 84 display "0".

When the second movable effect device 75 returns to the origin position, the first movable effect device 73 starts to return to the origin position.

At timing T3, when the return actions of the first movable effect device 73 and the effect button 17 are completed, the return action of the sub-display device 71 is started. At this time, the movable effect device 1LED, the movable effect device 2LED, the sub-display device LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T4, when the return-to-origin process is completed in a state in which a return abnormality has occurred in the sub-display device 71, the movable effect device 1 LED, the movable effect device 2 LED, and the sub-display device LED notify the occurrence of the return abnormality. It becomes red flashing (abnormal notification mode), the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the production button 17 is started. At this time, the effect button LED lights up (lights up) in the order of red→green→blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the production button LED is completed and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is performed. The initial operation process ends without executing the initial operation of the display device 71 .

At the timing of T6, when the output period (for example, 60 seconds) of the initialization notification sound elapses, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and becomes silent, and at the timing of T7, the game ball enters the first start port 45 When receiving the first special symbol storage designation command (first reservation number = 1) based on the winning, the reservation number displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E becomes "1", and the first reservation icon display area 70B The first pending icon is displayed, the sub-first pending indicator 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the voice output device 9 outputs the prize winning sound "Pong♪".

At the timing of T8, when a variation start command (effect pattern designation command, special figure variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, the variable effect (variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the movable effect device 1LED, the movable effect device 2LED, and the sub-display device LED ends, and the sub-first variable display 81 starts the variable display, and the movable effect device 1LED and the movable effect The device 2 LED, the sub display device LED, and the effect button LED are lit during fluctuation, and the sub first suspension display 83 is in a display mode showing "0".

Even if there is a return abnormality in the first movable effect device 73, the second movable effect device 75, or the sub-display device 71 when the power is turned on, the movable effect device 1LED, the movable effect device 2LED, and the sub-display device LED are restored. Red blinking (abnormality notification mode) is performed to notify the occurrence of an abnormality, and the initial operation process ends without executing the initial operations of the first movable effect device 73, the second movable effect device 75, and the sub-display device 71. It's like

Also, even when the power supply is restored, if there is a return abnormality in the first movable effect device 73, the second movable effect device 75, or the sub display device 71, the movable effect device 1LED, the movable effect device 2LED, and the sub display device The LED flashes red (abnormality notification mode) to notify the occurrence of the return abnormality, and the initial operation processing is performed without executing the initial operations of the first movable effect device 73, the second movable effect device 75, and the sub-display device 71. is supposed to end.

Thus, according to the modification shown in FIG. 58, when any one of the first movable effect device 73, the second movable effect device 75, and the sub-display device 71 has a return abnormality, only the movable member with the return abnormality In addition, the initial operation is not executed even for movable members that do not have a return abnormality. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the movable member with no return abnormality collides with the movable member with return abnormality and breaks down. In addition, it is possible to prevent the movable member (particularly, the movable member in which the return abnormality does not occur) from becoming inoperable during the execution of the game (fluctuation effect, jackpot game), thereby reducing the enjoyment of the game. can be prevented.

Further, according to the modification shown in FIG. 58, when any one of the first movable effect device 73, the second movable effect device 75, and the sub-display device 71 has a return abnormality, the movable effect device 1LED and the movable effect device 2LED , and the sub-display device LED flashes red in order to notify the recovery abnormality. By doing so, it is possible to easily recognize that there is an abnormality in the movable member, as compared with the case where only the movable member LED provided for the movable member having the return abnormality is blinking in red.

Further, according to the modification shown in FIG. 58, even if any one of the first movable effect device 73, the second movable effect device 75, and the sub-display device 71 has a return abnormality, the first movable effect device 73 , the second movable effect device 75 , and the effect button 17 that has no risk of colliding with the sub-display device 71 are designed to perform an initial action. By doing so, the operation of the effect button 17 can be confirmed, and an abnormality of the effect button 17 can be grasped.

Further, according to the modification shown in FIG. 58, even if any one of the first movable effect device 73, the second movable effect device 75, and the sub display device 71 has a return abnormality, the effect button 17 is provided with The produced effect button LED does not flash red to notify the return abnormality, but performs initial light emission. Therefore, it is possible to easily grasp that the effect button 17 has not returned abnormally.

It should be noted that in the event that any one of the first movable effect device 73, the second movable effect device 75, and the sub-display device 71 has a return abnormality, the initial action process for the effect button 17 may be terminated without executing the initial action. can be In this case, the movable effect device 1 LED, the movable effect device 2 LED, the sub-display device LED, and the effect button LED may flash red in order to notify the occurrence of the return abnormality.

Also, when there is a return abnormality in the effect button 17, even if the initial action processing is ended without executing the initial action of the first movable effect device 73, the second movable effect device 75, and the sub-display device 71 as well. good. In this case, the movable effect device 1 LED, the movable effect device 2 LED, the sub-display device LED, and the effect button LED may flash red in order to notify the occurrence of the return abnormality.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 59 to 62, initial operations of the various accessories (first movable effect device 73, second movable effect device 75, sub-display device 71, effect button 17) described in FIGS. 42 to 58 , the mode of the performance operation, and the like will be described.

(Specific example of initial operation mode and required time of the first movable member)
FIG. 59 is a diagram showing a specific example of the mode of the initial operation of the first movable effect device 73 (movable effect device 1) and the required time.
First, "A" indicates the origin position (standby position) of the first movable effect device 73, "B" indicates the first initial operation position of the first movable effect device 73, and "C". indicates the second initial operation position of the first movable effect device 73 . The first initial action position of "B" is the same position as the first effect position in FIG. 78 described later, and the second initial action position of "C" is the same as the second effect position in FIG. 60 described later. position. In the following, they are simply referred to as "A", "B", and "C".
Note that FIG. 59 illustrates an example of the initial operation of the first movable effect device 73 (movable effect device 1) when the variable display is being performed at the time of power restoration.

(a) shows a mode of "movable effect device 1 small descent" (see FIG. 42). That is, in the "movable effect device 1 small descent", the first movable effect device 73 moves from "A" to "B" in about "0.25 S (seconds)" (=about 1 cycle change). In the movement, it is assumed that the movement is made from "A" to "B" at once without stopping on the way.
In addition, in (a) to (f), the movable effect device 1LED of the first movable effect device 73 is turned off (see FIG. 42).
It should be noted that the "cycle fluctuation" described in FIGS. 59 to 62 means that the first movable effect device 73 moves from "A" to "B" during "0.25S (seconds)", and the special symbol display is performed. 69, the details of which will be described with reference to FIG.

(b) shows a mode in which the first movable effect device 73 is stopped at "B" (the "stop" is omitted in FIG. 42). That is, when the first movable effect device 73 moves to "B", it stops (stays) at "B" for about "1 S" (=about 4 cycle fluctuations).

(c) shows a mode of "movable effect device 1 return to origin" (see FIG. 42). That is, in the “movable effect device 1 return to origin”, the first movable effect device 73 moves from “B” to “A” over approximately “0.5 S” (=approximately 2 cycle fluctuation). In the movement, it is assumed that the movement is made from "B" to "A" without stopping on the way.

In this way, when the first movable effect device 73 performs a small descent related to the initial operation and returns to the origin position, it takes longer to move from "B" to "A" than to move from "A" to "B". It is related that the time to do is longer. In addition, along with this, the number of cycle fluctuations performed while moving from "B" to "A" is greater than the number of cycle fluctuations performed while moving from "A" to "B". are in a relationship.
In particular, the first movable effect device 73 has a predetermined amount of weight and is a role object that moves downward (in the vertical direction) from "A". ” to “A” longer than the time required to move from “A” to “B”, the initial operation can be performed without applying a load to the drive source of the first movable effect device 73. can be executed.
In addition, when the time spent stopping at "B" is included in the comparison, the time spent stopping at "B" is the longest, followed by the time to move from "B" to "A", followed by "A". The relationship is such that the time it takes to move from 'B' to 'B'.
As a result, for example, by using the time during which the first movable effect device 73 is stopped at "B", the operator (factory worker, game clerk) is asked if there is any problem with the first movable effect device 73. can be confirmed.

(d) shows a mode of "movable effect device 1 is greatly lowered" (see FIG. 42). That is, in the "movable effect device 1 large descent", the first movable effect device 73 moves from "A" to "C" over about "0.8 S" (=about 3 cycle fluctuation).

(e) shows a mode in which the first movable effect device 73 is stopped at "C" (the "stop" is omitted in FIG. 42). That is, when the first movable effect device 73 moves to "C", it stops (stays) at "C" for about "2S" (=about 8 cycles of variation).

(f) shows a mode of "movable effect device 1 return to origin" (see FIG. 42). That is, in the “movable effect device 1 return to origin”, the first movable effect device 73 moves from “C” to “A” over approximately “1.6 S” (=approximately 6 cycle fluctuations).

In this way, when the first movable effect device 73 performs a large descent related to the initial operation and returns to the origin position, it takes longer to move from "C" to "A" than to move from "A" to "C". It is related that the time to do is longer. In addition, along with this, the number of cycle fluctuations performed while moving from "C" to "A" is greater than the number of cycle fluctuations performed while moving from "A" to "C". are in a relationship.
In particular, the first movable effect device 73 has a predetermined amount of weight and is a role object that moves downward (in the vertical direction) from "A". ” to “A” longer than the time to move from “A” to “C”, the initial operation can be performed without applying a load to the driving source of the first movable effect device 73. can be executed.
In addition, when the time spent stopping at "C" is included in the comparison, the time spent stopping at "C" is the longest, followed by the time to move from "C" to "A", followed by "A". The relationship is such that it is the time it takes to move from "C" to "C".
As a result, for example, by using the time during which the first movable effect device 73 is stopped at "C", the worker (factory worker, game store clerk) is asked if there is any problem with the first movable effect device 73. can be confirmed.

In addition, FIG. 59 describes the restoration of power supply as an example, but the same can be said for turning on the power supply. Further, when the above-described momentary power failure occurs during the variable display, the recovery operation and the initial operation are not executed. In this way, not all "blackouts" result in an event such as that of FIG. 59, but momentary blackouts are excluded.

(Concrete example of effect operation mode and required time of the first movable effect device)
FIG. 60 is a diagram showing a specific example of the form of the effect operation of the first movable effect device 73 and the required time.
First, "A" indicates the origin position (standby position) of the first movable effect device 73, "B" indicates the first effect position of the first movable effect device 73, and "C" indicates , shows the second effect position of the first movable effect device 73 . The first effect position for "B" is the same position as the first initial action position in FIG. 59 described above, and the second effect position for "C" is the same as the second initial action position in FIG. position. In the following, they are simply referred to as "A", "B", and "C". It is also assumed that the operation of the movement process is the same as that of the initial operation mode of FIG.

(a) shows the effect mode of the above-mentioned "character object announcement". In other words, it indicates that the "movable effect device 1 small descent" is performed while the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are being variably displayed.
In this "character object announcement", the first movable effect device 73 moves from "A" to "B" in approximately "0.5 S (seconds)" (=approximately 2 cycle variation).
In addition, in (a) to (c), the movable effect device 1LED of the first movable effect device 73 alternately lights up (lights up) in red and white.

(b) shows that the first movable effect device 73 has moved to "B". Then, when the first movable effect device 73 moves to "B", it is positioned (stayed) at "B" for about "3S" (= about 12 cycle fluctuations).
Such an effect operation mode is designed to improve the sense of expectation for the awarding of the jackpot game.

(c) shows a mode of "movable effect device 1 return to origin" in "property announcement". That is, when positioned at "B" for about "3S", the first movable effect device 73 moves from "B" to "A" over about "0.8S" (=about 3 cycle fluctuations).

In this way, when the first movable effect device 73 performs a small descent related to the effect action and returns to the origin position, it takes longer to move from "B" to "A" than to move from "A" to "B". It is related that the time to do is longer.
In particular, the first movable effect device 73 has a predetermined amount of weight and is a role object that moves downward (in the vertical direction) from "A". ” to “A” longer than the time required to move from “A” to “B”. can be executed.

In addition, when the time spent stopping at "B" is included in the comparison, the time spent stopping at "B" is the longest, followed by the time to move from "B" to "A", followed by "A". The relationship is such that the time it takes to move from 'B' to 'B'.
As a result, attention can be drawn to the first movable effect device 73 positioned at "B", and the player's expectation for the awarding of the jackpot game can be improved.

In addition, when compared with the initial operation in FIG. 59, all of the movement time from "A" to "B", the stop time at "B", and the movement time from "B" to "A" are longer than the initial operation. The performance operation takes a longer time.
The reason for such a time relationship is to consider the situation in each action scene.
For example, when the initial action is performed, the operator (factory, game clerk) only needs to focus on the initial action, so even if the operator (factory, game clerk) performs the action in a shorter required time than the production action, the worker (factory, game clerk) ) is unlikely to miss the initial action.
On the other hand, when the performance action is performed, for example, various jackpot prediction performances may be simultaneously performed in addition to the performance notice of the character, and the range of the player's attention on the game board 5 is wide. Therefore, if the operation is performed in the same time as the initial action or in a shorter time than the initial action, there is a concern that the player will be late in noticing that the big win announcement performance using the first movable performance device 73 is being executed.
Therefore, in the initial action, the first movable effect device is operated in a shorter time than the production action, thereby shortening the time related to the initial action, and in the production action, the first movable production device is operated in a longer time than the initial action. This eliminates the concern that players will be late in noticing that the big-hit foretelling effect using 73 is being executed.

Also, when compared with the initial operation of FIG. In both the number of cycle variations performed during the movement time from "A" to "A", there is a relationship that the number of cycle variations performed is greater in the performance motion than in the initial motion.
Therefore, for example, when the first movable effect device 73 performs the initial action during the variable display, the player may mistake this for the effect action. By visually observing the number of cycle fluctuations performed on the display, it becomes easy to distinguish whether the initial action has been performed or the performance action has been performed. As a result, the misunderstanding as described above can be eliminated.

It should be noted that, from the effect described above, the number of cycle variations to be executed is not limited to the number of cycle fluctuations to be executed in the production movement is greater than that in the initial movement. It may be said that the number of times is large. In this case, it is preferable to set the movement time and the stop time longer for the initial motion than for the performance motion.

(d) shows the effect mode of the big hit notification in the above-described "determined effect". In other words, it indicates that the "movable effect device 1 large descent" has been performed.
In the big hit notification in this "determined effect", the first movable effect device 73 moves from "A" to "C" in about "1 S (seconds)" (=about 4 cycle fluctuations).
Also, at the position (main display device 70) corresponding to the periphery of the first movable effect device 73 moved to "C", the effect image EF that was not displayed during the initial operation (FIG. 59) is displayed. and emphasized that it was a big hit.
In addition, as the first movable effect device 73 starts to move from "A" to "C", the movable effect device 1LED lights up (lights up) in a rainbow. That is, the lamp CPU 150a drives the drive motor of the movable effect device 1, which is a part of the board drive device 75, to move the first movable effect device 73 from "A" to "C", and the board lighting device 74 The movable production device 1LED (full color), which is a part of the , is lit (lighted) in a rainbow. The lighting (lighting) mode of the rainbow is a lighting (lighting) mode for deterministically informing that a big win has been achieved.

(e) shows a mode in which the first movable effect device 73 is stopped at "C". That is, when the first movable effect device 73 moves to "C", it stops (stays) at "C" for about "5S" (=about 20 cycles of fluctuation).
Note that even when the "stop" is being performed, the movable effect device 1LED of the first movable effect device 73 is lit (lighted) in a rainbow, and the position corresponding to the periphery of the first movable effect device 73 (main An effect image EF is displayed on the display device 70).

(f) shows the mode of "movable effect device 1 return to origin" in the "determined effect" jackpot notification. That is, after finishing the stop for "5S" at "C", the first movable effect device 73 moves from "C" to "A" over about "2S" (=about 8 cycle fluctuation).

In this way, when the first movable effect device 73 performs a large descent related to the effect action and returns to the origin position, it takes less time to move from "A" to "C" than to move from "C" to "A". It is related that the time to do is longer.
In particular, the first movable effect device 73 has a predetermined amount of weight and is a role object that moves downward (in the vertical direction) from "A". ” to “A” longer than the time required to move from “A” to “C”. can be executed.

In addition, when the time spent stopping at "C" is included in the comparison, the time spent stopping at "C" is the longest, followed by the time to move from "C" to "A", followed by "A". The relationship is such that it is the time it takes to move from "C" to "C".
Thus, for example, when the first movable effect device 73 is stopped at "C", it is possible to give the player a sense of satisfaction for having won a big win, and the player moves from "C" to "A". When the player is moving from "A" to "C", the player can be immersed in the afterglow of the big win by moving from "A" to "C" in a longer time than by moving the player from "A" to "C". can be done.

In addition, when compared with the initial operation in FIG. 59, all of the movement time from "A" to "C", the stop time at "C", and the movement time from "C" to "A" are longer than the initial operation. The performance operation takes a longer time.
The reason for such a time relationship is generally the same as the content described in (a) to (c) above, but (d) to (f) are jackpot notifications, so in particular, " By making the stop time at "C" and the moving time from "C" to "A" longer than the initial action, it is possible to give the player a sense of satisfaction for having won a big win, and to increase the player's satisfaction. There is also the point that you can immerse yourself in the afterglow of the big hit.
In addition, in FIGS. 60(d) to (f), the scene of the big win notification of the “determined effect” was explained as an example, but the scene is not limited to this, and may be applied to other scenes. For example, it may be applied to a scene informing that a high probability gaming state is provided, or may be applied to a scene informing that a time saving gaming state is provided.

Also, when compared with the initial operation of FIG. In both the number of cycle variations performed during the movement time from "A" to "A", there is a relationship that the number of cycle variations performed is greater in the performance motion than in the initial motion.
Therefore, for example, when the first movable effect device 73 performs the initial action during the variable display, the player may mistake this for the effect action. By visually observing the number of cycle fluctuations performed on the display, it becomes easy to distinguish whether the initial action has been performed or the performance action has been performed. As a result, the misunderstanding as described above can be eliminated.

It should be noted that, from the effect described above, the number of cycle variations to be executed is not limited to the number of cycle fluctuations to be executed in the production movement is greater than that in the initial movement. It may be said that the number of times is large. In this case, it is preferable to set the movement time and the stop time longer for the initial motion than for the performance motion.

Note that the required times shown in FIGS. 59 and 60 are merely examples, and may be changed as appropriate.
Also, the time relationships described in FIGS. 59 and 60 may be changed as appropriate. For example, the travel time from "A" to "B" and the travel time from "B" to "A" may be the same, or the travel time from "B" to "A" may be longer than the travel time from "A" to "A". The travel time of "B" may be longer.
Also, although the stop (stay) time is the longest at "B" and "C", it may be the shortest, and it is not necessary to stop (stay) at "B" or "C".

(Specific example of time required for initial operation mode and effect operation mode of the second movable effect device)
FIG. 61 is a diagram showing a specific example of the form of the initial action of the second movable effect device 75 and the time required for the form of the effect action.
First, "D" indicates the origin position (standby position) of the second movable effect device 75, "E" indicates the initial operation position (= effect position) of the second movable effect device 75, In the following, they are simply described as "D" and "E".
Note that (initial a), (initial b), and (initial c) in FIG. 61 are examples of the initial operation of the second movable effect device 75 (movable effect device 2) when the variable display is performed at the time of power restoration. to explain.

(First a) shows a mode of "moving the movable effect device 2" (see FIG. 42). That is, in the "move movable effect device 2 movement", the second movable effect device 75 moves from "D" to "E" in about "0.5 S (seconds)" (=about 2 cycle fluctuation). In the movement, it is assumed that the movement is made from "D" to "E" at once without stopping on the way.
In (first a) to (first c), the movable effect device 2LED of the second movable effect device 75 is extinguished (see FIG. 42).

(First b) shows a mode in which the second movable effect device 75 is positioned (stopped) at "E" (the "stop" is omitted in FIG. 42). That is, when the second movable effect device 75 moves to "E", it is positioned (stopped) at "E" for about "0.25 S" (= about 1 cycle change).

(First c) shows a mode of "movable effect device 2 returns to origin" (see FIG. 42). That is, in the "movable effect device 2 return to origin", the second movable effect device 75 moves from "E" to "D" over approximately "0.5 S" (=approximately 2 cycle fluctuation). In the movement, it is assumed that the movement is made from "E" to "D" at once without stopping on the way.

In this way, when the second movable effect device 75 performs the movement related to the initial action and returns to the origin position, the time to move from "D" to "E" and the time to move from "E" to "D" is the same time (both about 0.5 S). In addition, along with this, the number of cycle changes performed while moving from "D" to "E" and the number of cycle changes performed while moving from "E" to "D" are the same ( Both of them fluctuate by about 2 cycles).

(Performance a) shows the effect mode of the "weakly developed effect" of the above-described "blackout effect". In other words, it indicates that the "movable effect device 2 movement" is performed while the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are being variably displayed.
In this "weak development effect", the second movable effect device 75 moves from "D" to "E" in about "0.5 S (seconds)" (=about 2 cycle fluctuation).
In addition, in (performance a) to (performance c), the movable effect device 2LED of the second movable effect device 75 is lit (lighted) in green.

(Action b) shows that the second movable effect device 75 has moved to "E". Then, when the second movable effect device 75 moves to "E", it stays at the position (stays) at "E" for about "0.25 S" (= about 1 cycle change).

(Performance c) shows a mode of "movable effect device 2 return to origin" in "weakly developed effect". That is, when positioned at "E" for about "0.25 S", the second movable effect device 75 moves from "E" to "D" over about "0.5 S" (=about 2 cycle fluctuation).

In this way, when the second movable effect device 75 performs the movement related to the effect action and returns to the origin position, the time to move from "D" to "E" and the time to move from "E" to "D" is the same time (both about 0.5 S). In addition, along with this, the number of cycle changes performed while moving from "D" to "E" and the number of cycle changes performed while moving from "E" to "D" are the same ( Both of them fluctuate by about 2 cycles).

Also, when comparing (First a) to (First c) and (Performance a) to (Performance c), the movement time from "D" to "E" is the same for both the initial action and the performance action. The time at "E" (stop time) is the same, and the travel time from "E" to "D" is the same. Along with this, the number of cycle fluctuations performed during the movement time from "D" to "E" is the same between the initial action and the performance action (both about 2 cycle fluctuations), and the number of cycles is changed during the stop time at "E". The number of cycle fluctuations to be performed is the same for the initial action and the performance action (both about 1 cycle fluctuation), and the number of cycle fluctuations performed during the movement time from "E" to "D" is the initial action and the production action. The number of times is the same (both fluctuate by about 2 cycles).

In this way, unlike the first movable effect device 73, the second movable effect device 75 has a movement time and a stop time (and the number of cycle fluctuations executed between them) between the initial action and the effect action. be the same.
In particular, the second movable effect device 75 is smaller in size than the first movable effect device 73, has a narrower range of movement, and is capable of operating in a "fixed effect" like the first movable effect device 73. isn't it.
Therefore, compared to the first movable effect device 73, it can be said that the degree of attention of the player is low. Thus, it can be said that the first movable effect device 73 is less likely to have the effect of giving the player a misunderstanding (whether it is an initial motion or a effect motion). In such a movable effect device, the data for driving the second movable effect device 75 can be shared by sharing the initial motion and the effect motion.

Note that the initial operation in FIG. 61 is described by taking power recovery as an example, but the same can be said for turning on the power. Further, when the above-described momentary power failure occurs during the variable display, the recovery operation and the initial operation are not executed. In this way, not all "blackouts" result in an event like that in FIG. 61, but momentary blackouts are excluded.

(Concrete example of the time required for the initial operation mode and effect operation mode of the sub-display device)
FIG. 62 is a diagram showing a specific example of the initial operation mode of the sub-display device 71 and the time required for the presentation operation mode.
First, "F" indicates the origin position (standby position) of the sub-display device 71, and "G" indicates the initial operation position (=effect position) of the sub-display device 71. They are simply described as "F" and "G".
Note that (first a), (first b), and (first c) in FIG. 62 illustrate an example of the initial operation of the sub-display device 71 when the variable display is being performed at the time of power restoration.

(First a) shows a mode of "sub-display device movement" (see FIG. 42). That is, in the "sub-display device movement", the sub-display device 71 moves from "F" to "G" in approximately "0.6 S (seconds)" (=approximately 2.5 cycle fluctuation). In the movement, it is assumed that the movement is made from "F" to "G" at once without stopping on the way.
In (first a) to (first c), the sub-display device LED of the sub-display device 71 is turned off (see FIG. 42).

(First b) shows a mode in which the sub-display device 71 is positioned (stopped) at "G" (the "stop" is omitted in FIG. 42). That is, when the sub-display device 71 moves to "G", it is positioned (stopped) at "G" for about "3S" (=about 12 cycles of variation).

(First c) shows a mode of "return to origin of sub-display device" (see FIG. 42). That is, in the "return to origin of the sub-display device", the sub-display device 71 moves from "G" to "F" over approximately "0.3 S" (=approximately 1.25 cycle variation). In the movement, it is assumed that the movement is made from "G" to "F" at once without stopping on the way.

In this way, when the sub-display device 71 performs the movement related to the initial operation and returns to the origin position, the time required to move from "F" to "G" is longer than the time required to move from "G" to "F". The relationship is such that the longer the In addition, along with this, the number of cycle fluctuations performed while moving from "F" to "G" is greater than the number of cycle fluctuations performed while moving from "G" to "F". , and so on.
In particular, the sub-display device 71 has a predetermined amount of weight, and since it is a function that can move upward (in a direction against the vertical direction) from "F", it will move especially against the vertical direction. By setting the time required for the movement from "F" to "G" longer than the time required for the movement from "G" to "F", the initial operation is performed without applying a load to the drive source of the sub-display device 71. can be executed.
Also, when comparing the stay time at "G", the time spent stopping at "G" is the longest, followed by the time to move from "F" to "G", and then from "G" to " Time to move to "F".
As a result, for example, by using the time during which the sub-display device 71 is stopped at "G", it is possible to have the operator (factory worker, game store clerk) check whether or not the sub-display device 71 has a problem or the like. can.

(Performance a) shows the effect mode of the "strong development effect" of the above-described "blackout effect". In other words, it indicates that the "sub-display device movement" was performed while the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ were being variably displayed.
In this "strong development effect", the sub-display device 71 moves from "F" to "G" in about "0.8 S (seconds)" (=about 3 cycle fluctuations).
In (performance a) to (performance c), the sub-display device LED of the sub-display device 71 is lit (lighted) in green.

(Action b) shows that the sub-display device 71 has moved to "G". Then, when the sub-display device 71 moves to "G", it stays (stays) at the "G" for about "4S" (= about 16 cycle fluctuations).

(Act c) shows a mode of "return to origin of sub-display device" in "strong development effect". That is, when positioned at "G" for about "4S", the sub-display device 71 moves from "G" to "F" over about "0.5S" (=about 2 cycle variation).

In this way, when the sub-display device 71 performs the movement related to the performance action and returns to the origin position, the time required to move from "F" to "G" is longer than the time required to move from "G" to "F". The relationship is such that the longer the In addition, along with this, the number of cycle fluctuations performed while moving from "F" to "G" is greater than the number of cycle fluctuations performed while moving from "G" to "F". , and so on.

Also, when comparing (first a) to (first c) with (performance a) to (performance c), the time to move from "F" to "G", the time to stop at "G", and the time to stop at "G" In any of the moving times from "F" to "F", the performance motion is longer than the initial motion.
The reason for such a time relationship is to consider the situation in each action scene.
For example, when the initial action is performed, the operator (factory, game clerk) only needs to focus on the initial action, so even if the operator (factory, game clerk) performs the action in a shorter required time than the production action, the worker (factory, game clerk) ) is unlikely to miss the initial action.
On the other hand, when a performance action is performed, for example, various jackpot announcement performances may be simultaneously performed in addition to the blackout performance, and the player's attention on the game board 5 is wide. Therefore, if the operation is performed in the same time as the initial operation or in a shorter time than the initial operation, there is a concern that the player will be late in noticing that the big win announcement effect using the sub-display device 71 is being executed.
Therefore, the sub-display device 71 is operated in a longer time than the initial action, while shortening the time related to the initial action by operating the initial action in a shorter time than the effect action. This eliminates the concern that the player will be late in noticing that the used jackpot announcement effect is being executed.

Also, comparing (initial a) to (initial c) with (performance a) to (performance c), the number of cycle fluctuations performed during the transition time from "F" to "G" and "G" In both the number of cycle variations performed during the stop time at , and the number of cycle variations performed during the movement time from "G" to "F", the performance motion is executed more than the initial motion. The relationship is such that the number of cycle fluctuations is large.
Therefore, for example, when the sub-display device 71 performs an initial action during variable display, the player may mistake this for a performance action. By visually observing the number of cycle fluctuations performed in , it becomes easy to distinguish whether the initial motion is performed or the performance motion is performed. As a result, the misunderstanding as described above can be eliminated.

It should be noted that, from the effect described above, the number of cycle variations to be executed is not limited to the number of cycle fluctuations to be executed in the production movement is greater than that in the initial movement. It may be said that the number of times is large. In this case, it is preferable to set the movement time and the stop time longer for the initial motion than for the performance motion.

Note that the required times shown in FIGS. 61 and 62 are merely examples, and may be changed as appropriate.
Also, the relationship of time described in FIG. 62 may be changed as appropriate. For example, the travel time from "F" to "G" and the travel time from "G" to "F" may be the same, or the travel time from "F" to "G" is longer than the travel time from "G" to "G". The travel time of "F" may be longer.
In addition, although the stop (stay) time is the longest at "G", it may be the shortest, and it is not necessary to stop (stay) at "G".

Note that the initial operation in FIG. 62 is described by taking power recovery as an example, but the same can be said for turning on the power. Further, when the above-described momentary power failure occurs during the variable display, the recovery operation and the initial operation are not executed. In this way, not all "blackouts" result in an event such as that of FIG. 62, but momentary blackouts are excluded.

(Concrete example of initial operation of various drive sources during setting change)
With reference to FIG. 63, a specific example of initial operation of various drive sources during setting change will be described. FIG. 63 is a diagram showing a timing chart and an effect example in the case of initializing various drive sources during setting change.

First, at timing T0, the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off. At this time, the result of the game such as changing whether or not the game ball enters the predetermined area (the second starting hole 47, the first big winning hole 50, the second big winning hole 56) (ball entry difficulty) Various driving sources (second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, The first big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b and the second big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) are stopped.

In addition, during the round game, the big winning hole LED that causes the big winning holes (the first big winning hole 50 and the second big winning hole 56) to emit light in a predetermined manner is turned off, and the main information display 59 (the second big winning hole) is turned off. 1 special symbol display 60, second special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, first special symbol reservation display 63, second special symbol reservation display 64, normal symbol reservation display 65, round number display 66, right-handed display 67, status confirmation display 68), main display 70, and information display 113 are in non-display (non-operating, extinguished, erased) states.

At the timing of T1, when a setting change operation (the setting key switch 112a is turned on and the RWM clear switch 111a is turned on) is performed when the gaming machine 1 is powered on, the main control board 110 starts the setting change mode. It is in a pre-start state before the progress control of the game is started.

At this time, a state confirmation display indicating that the setting is being changed is displayed on the state confirmation display 68, and operation (driving source=ON) is started as an initial operation of various driving sources. In addition, a setting change notification is displayed to confirm that the setting is being changed and to confirm the operation of various drive sources (display of the screen during setting change, voice during setting change "Setting is being changed" and initial operation confirmation voice "Solenoid operation is also Alternate output of "Please confirm") is started. In addition, the current set value (here, "6") is displayed on the 7-segment display 113d at the right end of the information display 113. FIG.

At the timing of T2, when the operating time of various driving sources (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed, the operation of the various driving sources is stopped (driving source = OFF), and thereafter various driving is performed from the timing of T3 to the timing of T10. Activation and deactivation of the source are repeated.

At the timing of T10, if the setting value confirmation operation (the setting key switch 112a is turned off) is performed in a state in which the operation time of the various driving sources started from the timing of T9 has not elapsed, the setting change mode and the setting change notification are activated. As soon as it is finished, the operation of various driving sources is immediately stopped (driving source = OFF), the initial operation of various driving sources is completed, and the setting value is also displayed on the 7-segment display 113d at the right end of the information display 113. finish. Then, the main control board 110 shifts from the pre-start state to a playable state in which progress control of the game is performed.

At this time, various displays on the main information display 59 (display of special symbols, display of normal symbols, display of special symbols reserved, display of normal symbols reserved, etc.) are started, and the power-on notification mentioned above is started. be started. In addition, various accessories (first movable member 73a, second movable member 73b, second movable effect device 75, sub-display device 71, effect button 17) controlled by the effect control board 130 start returning and initializing. At the same time, all of the 7-segment displays 113a to 113d in the information display 113 are turned on, and lighting confirmation is started. It should be noted that the initial operation of various accessories ends after the lighting confirmation of the information display 113 is completed.

At the timing of T11, when the confirmation time (here, 5 seconds) has passed since the start of the lighting confirmation of the information display 113, all lighting of the 7-segment displays 113a to 113d is completed and the performance information (here, the current The display of the normal base value of the game section) is started. After that, every time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, the performance information (normal base value) of four game sections consisting of the current game section and three past game sections are displayed in order.

(Concrete example of initial operation of various drive sources during preparation for RWM clear)
With reference to FIG. 64, a specific example of initial operation of various drive sources during preparation for RWM clear will be described. FIG. 64 is a diagram showing a timing chart and an effect example when various drive sources are initially operated during RWM clear preparation.

First, at timing T0, the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off. At this time, the result of the game such as changing whether or not the game ball enters the predetermined area (the second starting hole 47, the first big winning hole 50, the second big winning hole 56) (ball entry difficulty) Various driving sources (second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, The first big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b and the second big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) are stopped.

In addition, during the round game, the big winning hole LED that causes the big winning holes (the first big winning hole 50 and the second big winning hole 56) to emit light in a predetermined manner is turned off, and the main information display 59 (the second big winning hole) is turned off. 1 special symbol display 60, second special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, first special symbol reservation display 63, second special symbol reservation display 64, normal symbol reservation display 65, round number display 66, right-handed display 67, status confirmation display 68), main display 70, and information display 113 are in non-display (non-operating, extinguished, erased) states.

At the timing of T1, when the gaming machine 1 is powered on and the RWM clearing operation (RWM clearing switch 111a is turned on) is performed, the main control board 110 starts the RWM clearing preparation mode to start the progress control of the game. It will be in the pre-start state before being done.

At this time, a state confirmation display indicating that the RWM clearing is being prepared is displayed on the state confirmation display 68, and operation (driving source=ON) is started as an initial operation of various driving sources. In addition, RWM clear preparation notification to prompt confirmation of RWM clear preparation and operation of various drive sources (display of clear preparation screen, notification sound of "Press the RWM clear switch again" and "Confirm the operation of the solenoid Please alternately output the initial operation confirmation voice).

At the timing of T2, when the operation time (here, 0.512 seconds) has passed since the start of operation of the various drive sources, the operation of the various drive sources is stopped (drive source = OFF), and thereafter the timing of T3 to the timing of T10. Activation and deactivation of various drive sources are repeated until .

At the timing of T10, when the RWM clear approval operation (RWM clear switch 111a is turned ON) is performed in a state in which the operation time of various driving sources started from the timing of T9 has not elapsed, the RWM clear preparation mode and the RWM clear preparation mode are performed. As soon as the notification ends, the operation of various drive sources is immediately stopped (drive source = OFF), the initial operation of the various drive sources is completed, and the main control board 110 controls the progress of the game from the state before the start of the game. Move to enabled state.

At this time, various displays on the main information display 59 (display of special symbols, display of normal symbols, display of special symbols reserved, display of normal symbols reserved, etc.) are started, and the power-on notification mentioned above is started. be started. In addition, various accessories (first movable member 73a, second movable member 73b, second movable effect device 75, sub-display device 71, effect button 17) controlled by the effect control board 130 start returning and initializing. At the same time, all of the 7-segment displays 113a to 113d in the information display 113 are turned on, and lighting confirmation is started. It should be noted that the initial operation of the first movable effect device 73 ends after the lighting confirmation of the information display 113 ends.

At the timing of T11, when the confirmation time (here, 5 seconds) has passed since the start of the lighting confirmation of the information display 113, all lighting of the 7-segment displays 113a to 113d is completed and the performance information (here, the current The display of the normal base value of the game section) is started. After that, every time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, the performance information (normal base value) of four game sections consisting of the current game section and three past game sections are displayed in order.

(Concrete example of initial operation of various drive sources during setting confirmation)
With reference to FIG. 65, a specific example of initial operation of various drive sources during setting confirmation will be described. FIG. 65 is a diagram showing a timing chart and an effect example in the case of initializing various drive sources during setting confirmation.

First, at timing T0, the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off. At this time, the result of the game such as changing whether or not the game ball enters the predetermined area (the second starting hole 47, the first big winning hole 50, the second big winning hole 56) (ball entry difficulty) Various driving sources (second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, The first big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b and the second big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) are stopped.

In addition, during the round game, the big winning hole LED that causes the big winning holes (the first big winning hole 50 and the second big winning hole 56) to emit light in a predetermined manner is turned off, and the main information display 59 (the second big winning hole) is turned off. 1 special symbol display 60, second special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, first special symbol reservation display 63, second special symbol reservation display 64, normal symbol reservation display 65, round number display 66, right-handed display 67, status confirmation display 68), main display 70, and information display 113 are in non-display (non-operating, extinguished, erased) states.

At the timing of T1, when the setting confirmation operation is performed (the setting key switch 112a is turned ON) when the power of the game machine 1 is turned on, the main control board 110 starts the setting confirmation mode to start the progress control of the game. It will be in the pre-start state before starting.

At this time, a state confirmation display indicating that the setting is being confirmed is displayed on the state confirmation display 68, and operation (driving source=ON) is started as an initial operation of various driving sources. In addition, setting confirmation notification to prompt confirmation of settings and operation confirmation of various drive sources (display of setting confirmation screen, setting confirmation voice "Setting confirmation in progress" and initial operation confirmation voice "Solenoid operation is also Alternate output of "Please confirm") is started. In addition, the current set value (here, "6") is displayed on the 7-segment display 113d at the right end of the information display 113. FIG.

At the timing of T2, when the operation time (here, 0.512 seconds) has passed since the start of operation of the various drive sources, the operation of the various drive sources is stopped (drive source = OFF), and thereafter the timing of T3 to the timing of T10. Activation and deactivation of various drive sources are repeated until .

At the timing of T10, if the confirmation end operation (the setting key switch 112a is turned off) is performed before the operating time of the various driving sources that started at the timing of T9 has elapsed, the setting confirmation mode and the setting confirmation notification are terminated. At the same time, the operation of various driving sources immediately stops (driving source = OFF), the initial operation of various driving sources ends, and the display of the set values on the 7-segment display 113d at the right end of the information display 113 also ends. do. Then, the main control board 110 shifts from the pre-start state to a playable state in which progress control of the game is performed.

At this time, various displays on the main information display device 59 (display of special symbols, display of normal symbols, display of special symbols pending number, display of normal symbols pending number, etc.) are started, and the above-mentioned power supply restoration notification is started. be started. In addition, various accessories (first movable member 73a, second movable member 73b, second movable effect device 75, sub-display device 71, effect button 17) controlled by the effect control board 130 start returning and initializing. At the same time, all of the 7-segment displays 113a to 113d in the information display 113 are turned on, and lighting confirmation is started. It should be noted that the initial operation of the first movable effect device 73 ends after the lighting confirmation of the information display 113 ends.

At the timing of T11, when the confirmation time (here, 5 seconds) has passed since the start of the lighting confirmation of the information display 113, all lighting of the 7-segment displays 113a to 113d is completed and the performance information (here, the current The display of the normal base value of the game section) is started. After that, every time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, the performance information (normal base value) of four game sections consisting of the current game section and three past game sections are displayed in order.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, in the pre-start state before the game progress control is started, the movable bodies (the second starting opening opening/closing member 48, the first big winning opening opening/closing member 48, and the Initial operation of various drive sources (second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, first large winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, second large winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) for operating member 51, second large winning opening opening/closing member 57) Therefore, when the game machine 1 (including only the game board 5 and only the board unit 500) is shipped from the factory or replaced at the game store (including the replacement of only the game board 5 and only the board unit 500) ), it is possible to easily check the operation of the drive source controlled by the main control means for controlling the progress of the game.

Further, according to the present embodiment, when the various drive sources for operating the movable bodies that affect the game results are initially operated (during the pre-start state), the main controller excluding the state confirmation display 68 is activated. Information display device 59 (first special symbol display device 60, second special symbol display device 61, normal symbol display device 62, first special symbol reservation display device 63, second special symbol reservation display device 64, normal symbol reservation display device 65, round number display 66, and right-handed display 67) are in a non-display (non-operating) state, so that the main control board 110 is not given an extra processing load, and various drive sources It is possible to concentrate on checking the operation of

Further, according to the present embodiment, when the various driving sources for operating the movable bodies that affect the game results are being initially operated, it prompts the user to confirm that the settings are being changed and to check the operation of the various driving sources. setting change notification for RWM clear preparation (RWM clear preparation notification to prompt confirmation of operation of various drive sources, setting confirmation notification to prompt confirmation of setting and confirmation of operation of various drive sources) Therefore, it is possible to notify the operator (worker, game clerk) who checks the operation of the game machine 1 that it is time to check the operation of various driving sources, and to appropriately check the operation. It is possible to do it.

Further, according to the present embodiment, in the setting change mode (RWM clear preparation mode, setting confirmation mode), various drive sources for operating movable bodies that affect the game results are initially operated. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the development cost of the game machine 1 (shorten the development period, etc.) without creating a plurality of states in the pre-start state before the game progress control is started.

Further, according to the present embodiment, when the pre-start state ends due to the set value confirmation operation (RWM clear approval operation, confirmation end operation), the operation is immediately completed even before the operation time of various drive sources has elapsed. Since the operation of the various drive sources is terminated, the initial operation of the various drive sources will not be performed in the state where the game can be played, and it will be confused with the operation of the various drive sources according to the progress of the game. It is possible to avoid inconvenience.

Further, according to the present embodiment, in the pre-start state before the progress control of the game is performed, the initial operation of various driving sources for operating the movable body that affects the result of the game is performed, and the progress control of the game is performed. Since the initial operation of the movable performance device 73 which does not affect the result of the game is performed in the playable state, the two types of initial operations can be confirmed in order, and the operation can be properly confirmed. becomes possible.

Further, according to the present embodiment, when various driving sources for operating the first big prize opening opening/closing member 51 and the second big winning opening opening/closing member 57 are initially operated, the big winning opening LED is extinguished. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that it is difficult to check the operation of the first big prize opening opening/closing member 51 and the second big prize opening/closing member 57 due to the light from the big prize opening LED, and it is possible to properly confirm the operation. It becomes possible to go to

Further, according to the present embodiment, when the various driving sources for operating the first big winning opening opening/closing member 51 and the second big winning opening opening/closing member 57 are initially operated, the first big winning opening opening/closing member 50 and the Since the open signal is not output even though the second big winning hole is open, it is possible to prevent the main control board 110 from being given an extra processing load, and the game machine 1 It is possible to avoid inconveniences such as an information collecting device such as a hall computer that collects information output from the game collecting information that does not correspond to the progress of the game.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the performance information (normal base value) of the gaming machine is not displayed on the information display device 113 until the game progress control is started after the power of the gaming machine is turned on. is regulated), it is possible to prevent the main control board 110 from being burdened with unnecessary processing.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the performance information (normal base value) of the gaming machine is displayed (display of the performance information is permitted) after the progress control of the game is started. It is possible to confirm whether or not the progress control of is started, and to inform that the performance information is related to the game.

Further, according to the present embodiment, performance information is not displayed on the 7-segment displays 113a to 113c other than the 7-segment display 113d displaying the current set values during the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. As a result, the current set value can be appropriately notified, and convenience on the amusement arcade side can be ensured.

In addition, in this embodiment, in the setting change notification, RWM clear preparation notification, and setting confirmation notification, "driving source initial operation" or "please check the operation of the solenoid" prompts visual confirmation of the initial operation of various driving sources. Although such characters are not displayed, such characters may be displayed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, all the 7-segment displays 113a to 113d of the information display 113 are turned on after the progress control of the game is started to confirm the lighting. The lighting confirmation may not be performed after the RWM clear preparation mode or the setting confirmation mode.

(Modified example for initial operation of various drive sources)
Modified examples of the initial operation of various drive sources will be specifically described below with reference to the drawings. It should be noted that this modification differs from the above-described embodiment in that the drive source processing operation process is performed after the setting change mode, the RWM clear preparation mode, or the setting confirmation mode.

(Concrete example of initial operation of various drive sources after setting change)
With reference to FIG. 66, a specific example of initial operation of various drive sources after setting change in the modified example will be described. FIG. 66 is a diagram showing a timing chart and an effect example in the case of initializing various drive sources after setting change in the modification.

First, at timing T0, the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off. At this time, the result of the game such as changing whether or not the game ball enters the predetermined area (the second starting hole 47, the first big winning hole 50, the second big winning hole 56) (ball entry difficulty) Various driving sources (second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, The first big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b and the second big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) are stopped.

In addition, during the round game, the big winning hole LED that causes the big winning holes (the first big winning hole 50 and the second big winning hole 56) to emit light in a predetermined manner is turned off, and the main information display 59 (the second big winning hole) is turned off. 1 special symbol display 60, second special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, first special symbol reservation display 63, second special symbol reservation display 64, normal symbol reservation display 65, round number display 66, right-handed display 67, status confirmation display 68), main display 70, and information display 113 are in non-display (non-operating, extinguished, erased) states.

At the timing of T1, when a setting change operation (the setting key switch 112a is turned on and the RWM clear switch 111a is turned on) is performed when the gaming machine 1 is powered on, the main control board 110 starts the setting change mode. It is in a pre-start state before the progress control of the game is started. At this time, a status confirmation display indicating that the setting is being changed is displayed on the status confirmation display 68, and the above-described setting change notification is started. In addition, the current set value (here, "6") is displayed on the 7-segment display 113d at the right end of the information display 113. FIG.

At the timing of T2, when the setting value confirmation operation (the setting key switch 112a is turned off) is performed, the setting change mode and the setting change notification are terminated, and the initial operation of various drive sources is started. The set values displayed on the 7-segment display 113d are erased and hidden. At this time, the status confirmation display on the status confirmation display 68 ends, and the initial operation notification (display of screen during initial operation, initial operation confirmation voice "Please confirm the operation of the solenoid please”) is started.

At the timing of T3, when the operation standby time (here, 7 seconds) has elapsed after the start of the initial operation notification, the first operation of the various driving sources (driving source = ON) is started, and at the timing of T4, various When the operating time of the drive source (here, 0.512 seconds) elapses, the operation of the various drive sources stops (drive source = OFF).

At the timing of T5, when the stop time (here, 0.512 seconds) has passed after the operation of the various driving sources has stopped, the various driving sources start to operate for the second time, and at the timing of T6, the various driving sources are turned off. When the operation time (here, 0.512 seconds) elapses, the operation of various drive sources stops (drive source = OFF).

At timing T7, when the stop time (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed since the operation of the various driving sources stopped, the various driving sources start operating for the third time, and at timing T8, the various driving sources start to operate. When the operation time (here, 0.512 seconds) elapses, the operation of various drive sources stops (drive source = OFF).

At the timing of T9, when the stop time (here, 0.512 seconds) has passed after the operation of the various drive sources has stopped, the initial operation of the various drive sources and the initial operation notification are completed, and the main control board 110 The state shifts to a playable state in which progress control of the game is performed.

At this time, various displays on the main information display 59 (display of special symbols, display of normal symbols, display of special symbols reserved, display of normal symbols reserved, etc.) are started, and the power-on notification mentioned above is started. be started. In addition, various accessories (first movable member 73a, second movable member 73b, sub-display device 71, production button 17) controlled by the production control board 130 are started to return and initialize, and the information display device At 113, all the 7-segment displays 113a to 113d are turned on, and lighting confirmation is started. It should be noted that the initial operation of various accessories ends after the lighting confirmation of the information display 113 is completed.

At the timing of T10, when the confirmation time (here, 5 seconds) elapses after the start of the lighting confirmation of the information display 113, the lighting of all the 7-segment displays 113a to 113d is completed and the performance information (here, the current The display of the normal base value of the game section) is started. After that, every time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, the performance information (normal base value) of four game sections consisting of the current game section and three past game sections are displayed in order.

(Concrete example of initial operation of various drive sources after RWM clear)
With reference to FIG. 67, a specific example of initial operation of various driving sources after RWM clearing in the modified example will be described. FIG. 67 is a diagram showing a timing chart and an effect example in the case of initializing various drive sources after RWM is cleared in the modified example.

First, at timing T0, the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off. At this time, the result of the game such as changing whether or not the game ball enters the predetermined area (the second starting hole 47, the first big winning hole 50, the second big winning hole 56) (ball entry difficulty) Various driving sources (second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, The first big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b and the second big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) are stopped.

In addition, during the round game, the big winning hole LED that causes the big winning holes (the first big winning hole 50 and the second big winning hole 56) to emit light in a predetermined manner is turned off, and the main information display 59 (the second big winning hole) is turned off. 1 special symbol display 60, second special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, first special symbol reservation display 63, second special symbol reservation display 64, normal symbol reservation display 65, round number display 66, right-handed display 67), main display 70, and information display 113 are in non-display (non-operating, extinguished, erased) states.

At the timing of T1, when the gaming machine 1 is powered on and the RWM clearing operation (RWM clearing switch 111a is turned on) is performed, the main control board 110 starts the RWM clearing preparation mode to start the progress control of the game. It will be in the pre-start state before being done. At this time, the above-described RWM clear preparation notification is started.

At the timing of T2, when the RWM clear approval operation (RWM clear switch 111a is turned on) is performed, the RWM clear preparation mode ends and the initial operations of various drive sources are started. At this time, an initial operation notification (display of screen during initial operation, output of initial operation confirmation voice "Please check operation of solenoid") for prompting operation confirmation of various drive sources is started.

At the timing of T3, when the operation standby time (here, 7 seconds) has elapsed after the start of the initial operation notification, the first operation of the various driving sources (driving source = ON) is started, and at the timing of T4, various When the operating time of the drive source (here, 0.512 seconds) elapses, the operation of the various drive sources stops (drive source = OFF).

At the timing of T5, when the stop time (here, 0.512 seconds) has passed after the operation of the various driving sources has stopped, the various driving sources start to operate for the second time, and at the timing of T6, the various driving sources are turned off. When the operation time (here, 0.512 seconds) elapses, the operation of various drive sources stops (drive source = OFF).

At timing T7, when the stop time (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed since the operation of the various driving sources stopped, the various driving sources start operating for the third time, and at timing T8, the various driving sources start to operate. When the operation time (here, 0.512 seconds) elapses, the operation of various drive sources stops (drive source = OFF).

At the timing of T9, when the stop time (here, 0.512 seconds) has passed after the operation of the various drive sources has stopped, the initial operation of the various drive sources and the initial operation notification are completed, and the main control board 110 The state shifts to a playable state in which progress control of the game is performed.

At this time, various displays on the main information display 59 (display of special symbols, display of normal symbols, display of special symbols reserved, display of normal symbols reserved, etc.) are started, and the power-on notification mentioned above is started. be started. In addition, various accessories (first movable member 73a, second movable member 73b, second movable effect device 75, sub-display device 71, effect button 17) controlled by the effect control board 130 start returning and initializing. At the same time, all of the 7-segment displays 113a to 113d in the information display 113 are turned on, and lighting confirmation is started. It should be noted that the initial operation of various accessories ends after the lighting confirmation of the information display 113 is completed.

At the timing of T10, when the confirmation time (here, 5 seconds) elapses after the start of the lighting confirmation of the information display 113, the lighting of all the 7-segment displays 113a to 113d is completed and the performance information (here, the current The display of the normal base value of the game section) is started. After that, every time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, the performance information (normal base value) of four game sections consisting of the current game section and three past game sections are displayed in order.

(Concrete example of initial operation of various drive sources after confirming settings)
With reference to FIG. 68, a specific example of initial operation of various drive sources after setting confirmation in the modified example will be described. FIG. 68 is a diagram showing a timing chart and an effect example in the case of initializing various drive sources after confirming the settings in the modified example.

First, at timing T0, the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off. At this time, the result of the game such as changing whether or not the game ball enters the predetermined area (the second starting hole 47, the first big winning hole 50, the second big winning hole 56) (ball entry difficulty) Various driving sources (second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, The first big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b and the second big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) are stopped.

In addition, during the round game, the big winning hole LED that causes the big winning holes (the first big winning hole 50 and the second big winning hole 56) to emit light in a predetermined manner is turned off, and the main information display 59 (the second big winning hole) is turned off. 1 special symbol display 60, second special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, first special symbol reservation display 63, second special symbol reservation display 64, normal symbol reservation display 65, round number display 66, right-handed display 67, status confirmation display 68), main display 70, and information display 113 are in non-display (non-operating, extinguished, erased) states.

At the timing of T1, when the setting confirmation operation is performed (the setting key switch 112a is turned ON) when the power of the game machine 1 is turned on, the main control board 110 starts the setting confirmation mode to start the progress control of the game. It will be in the pre-start state before starting. At this time, a status confirmation display indicating that the setting is being confirmed is displayed on the status confirmation display 68, and the above-described setting confirmation notification is started. In addition, the current set value (here, "6") is displayed on the 7-segment display 113d at the right end of the information display 113. FIG.

At the timing of T2, when the confirmation end operation (the setting key switch 112a is turned off) is performed, the setting confirmation mode and the setting confirmation notification are terminated, and the initial operation of various drive sources is started. The set value displayed on the segment display 113d is erased and hidden. At this time, the status confirmation display on the status confirmation display 68 ends, and the initial operation notification (display of screen during initial operation, initial operation confirmation voice "Please confirm the operation of the solenoid please”) is started.

At the timing of T3, when the operation standby time (here, 7 seconds) has elapsed after the start of the initial operation notification, the first operation of the various driving sources (driving source = ON) is started, and at the timing of T4, various When the operating time of the drive source (here, 0.512 seconds) elapses, the operation of the various drive sources stops (drive source = OFF).

At the timing of T5, when the stop time (here, 0.512 seconds) has passed after the operation of the various driving sources has stopped, the various driving sources start to operate for the second time, and at the timing of T6, the various driving sources are turned off. When the operation time (here, 0.512 seconds) elapses, the operation of various drive sources stops (drive source = OFF).

At timing T7, when the stop time (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed since the operation of the various driving sources stopped, the various driving sources start operating for the third time, and at timing T8, the various driving sources start to operate. When the operation time (here, 0.512 seconds) elapses, the operation of various drive sources stops (drive source = OFF).

At the timing of T9, when the stop time (here, 0.512 seconds) has passed after the operation of the various drive sources has stopped, the initial operation of the various drive sources and the initial operation notification are completed, and the main control board 110 The state shifts to a playable state in which progress control of the game is performed.

At this time, various displays on the main information display 59 (display of special symbols, display of normal symbols, display of special symbols reserved, display of normal symbols reserved, etc.) are started, and the power-on notification mentioned above is started. be started. In addition, various accessories (first movable member 73a, second movable member 73b, second movable effect device 75, sub-display device 71, effect button 17) controlled by the effect control board 130 start returning and initializing. At the same time, all of the 7-segment displays 113a to 113d in the information display 113 are turned on, and lighting confirmation is started. It should be noted that the initial operation of various accessories ends after the lighting confirmation of the information display 113 is completed.

At the timing of T10, when the confirmation time (here, 5 seconds) elapses after the start of the lighting confirmation of the information display 113, the lighting of all the 7-segment displays 113a to 113d is completed and the performance information (here, the current The display of the normal base value of the game section) is started. After that, every time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, the performance information (normal base value) of four game sections consisting of the current game section and three past game sections are displayed in order.

As described above, according to this modification, in the pre-start state before the game progress control is started, the movable bodies (the second starting opening opening/closing member 48, the first big winning opening opening/closing member 48, and the Initial operation of various drive sources (second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, first large winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, second large winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) for operating member 51, second large winning opening opening/closing member 57) Therefore, when the game machine 1 (including only the game board 5 and only the board unit 500) is shipped from the factory or replaced at the game store (including the replacement of only the game board 5 and only the board unit 500) ), it is possible to easily check the operation of the drive source controlled by the main control means for controlling the progress of the game.

Further, according to this modification, when the various drive sources for operating the movable bodies that affect the game results are initially operated (during the pre-start state), the main controller excluding the state confirmation display 68 is displayed. Information display device 59 (first special symbol display device 60, second special symbol display device 61, normal symbol display device 62, first special symbol reservation display device 63, second special symbol reservation display device 64, normal symbol reservation display device 65, round number display 66, and right-handed display 67) are in a non-display (non-operating) state, so that the main control board 110 is not given an extra processing load, and various drive sources It is possible to concentrate on checking the operation of

Further, according to this modified example, when the various drive sources for operating the movable bodies that affect the game results are being initially operated, the initial operation notification for prompting confirmation of the operation of the various drive sources is performed. Therefore, it is possible to notify the operator (worker, game clerk) who checks the operation of the game machine 1 that it is time to check the operation of various driving sources, and to appropriately check the operation. becomes possible.

Further, according to this modification, even in the pre-start state before the game progress control is started, the game result is not affected after the setting change mode (RWM clear preparation mode, setting confirmation mode) is finished. Since the various drive sources for operating the movable body to be given are initially operated, there is no need to perform complicated operations such as checking the operation of the various drive sources while changing settings (RWM clear, setting confirmation). , it is possible to appropriately check the operation.

Further, according to this modification, after the setting change mode (RWM clear preparation mode, setting confirmation mode) is completed, after the operation standby time has passed, various driving sources for operating the movable bodies that affect the game result are activated. Since the operation is to be started, it is possible to have time to check the operation of various drive sources after the setting change (setting confirmation) is completed, and the operation check can be performed appropriately. becomes possible.

Further, according to this modification, it is determined whether the initial operation of various drive sources for operating the movable bodies that affect the game results is after the setting change mode or after the RWM clear preparation mode. Since the same initial operation notification is performed regardless of whether the setting confirmation mode has ended, the control of the initial operation notification can be simplified, and the development cost of the game machine 1 can be reduced. It is possible to reduce costs (shorten the development period, etc.).

Further, according to this modification, when the various drive sources for operating the first big prize opening opening/closing member 51 and the second big winning opening opening/closing member 57 are being initially operated, the big winning opening LED is extinguished. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that it is difficult to check the operation of the first big prize opening opening/closing member 51 and the second big prize opening/closing member 57 due to the light from the big prize opening LED, and it is possible to properly confirm the operation. It becomes possible to go to

Further, according to this modification, in the pre-start state before the progress control of the game is performed, the initial operation of various drive sources for operating the movable bodies that affect the game result is performed, and the progress control of the game is performed. Since the initial operation of the first movable effect device 73 that does not affect the result of the game is performed in the playable state, the two types of initial operations can be confirmed in order, and the operation confirmation can be properly performed. It becomes possible to go to

Further, according to the present modification, when various drive sources for operating the first big winning opening opening/closing member 51 and the second big winning opening opening/closing member 57 are initially operated, the first big winning opening opening/closing member 50 and the Since the open signal is not output even though the second big winning hole is open, it is possible to prevent the main control board 110 from being given an extra processing load, and the game machine 1 It is possible to avoid inconveniences such as an information collecting device such as a hall computer that collects information output from the game collecting information that does not correspond to the progress of the game.

Further, according to this modification, the performance information (normal base value) of the gaming machine is not displayed on the information display device 113 until the progress control of the game is started after the power of the gaming machine is turned on. is regulated), it is possible to prevent the main control board 110 from being burdened with unnecessary processing.

Further, according to this modification, the performance information (normal base value) of the gaming machine is displayed (display of the performance information is permitted) after the progress control of the game is started. It is possible to confirm whether or not the progress control of is started, and to inform that the performance information is related to the game.

Further, according to this modification, during the setting change mode, the RWM clear preparation mode, or the setting confirmation mode, the 7-segment displays 113a to 113c other than the 7-segment display 113d displaying the current set values By not displaying the performance information, the current set value can be appropriately notified, and convenience on the amusement arcade side can be ensured.

Further, according to this modification, during the initial operation of various drive sources, the information display 113 does not display the set values and the performance information of the game machine. On the other hand, it is possible to concentrate the consciousness of the employees of the amusement arcade, and to accurately judge failures of various drive sources.

(Display example of special symbol indicator)
A display example of the special symbol display device (first special symbol display device 60, second special symbol display device 61) will be described with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 69(a), the special symbol display device displays a failing special symbol in which the LED on the right end lights up as the first display mode after the power is turned on.

After that, when the variable display of the special symbol is started, as shown in FIG. ), the display mode is such that the lighting position of the LED changes every 32 ms. Specifically, control is performed to turn on the corresponding LED every 4 ms, which is the cycle of the timer interrupt, and by continuing this over eight timer interrupts, the same LED remains lit for 32 ms.

69(b) to (i) are changed in one cycle (=256 ms), and the cycle variation is performed a plurality of times. ) (loss special symbol, first big win special symbol, second big win special symbol, third big win special symbol) is stop-displayed for a stop time (0.5 seconds).

Furthermore, when the next special symbol variation display is started after the stop time has elapsed, the cycle variation is performed multiple times from the display mode of FIG. 69(b), and any of FIGS. is stopped and displayed for a stop time (0.5 seconds=500 ms).

In cycle variation, two LEDs are turned on and their lighting positions are changed (moved). , and the lighting position may be changed.

In the cycle variation, one cycle is composed of eight types of display modes, but one cycle may be composed of two types of display modes (for example, all lighting and all lights off), and one cycle may be composed of three or more types of display modes. good too. Even in this case, the time for one cycle should be shorter than the special symbol stop time (0.5 seconds=500 ms).

Further, in the present embodiment, the small winning game is not executed to open the variable winning portion for 1.8 seconds. It is preferable to stop and display the small winning special symbol. In this case, the stop time of the small hit special symbol may be shorter than 0.5 seconds (500 ms) or the display time (32 ms) of one display mode in the cycle variation.

(Production example for each production mode)
Using FIG. 70, a display effect example (pre-variation operation, etc.) for each effect mode will be described.

In production mode A (normal game state), as shown in FIG. 70(a), the mode A background image is always displayed in a state of horizontal scrolling or scene change (production operation) while being displayed on the main display device 70. The production pattern 70a is displayed in the first form (rectangular base image BG, character image CG, number image SG surrounded by hexagonal images), and the special pattern TZ is displayed in a common form (number image) common to all production modes. Is displayed.

Then, the effect symbol 70a of the first mode performs downward scrolling display (update variation) in the variable effect, but as a pre-variation operation suggesting the start of this scrolling display, it floats upward from the symbol stop position. The display is performed for 0.75 seconds.

Further, in the icon display areas (the first reserved icon display area 70B and the icon display area 70C), the normal icons are displayed in the first form (hexagon). Then, the normal icon of the first mode is displayed on the main display device 70 as a swing motion (drawing motion) from the first posture (initial posture) tilting to the left, to the second posture tilting to the right, and then to the first posture again. During the display, it is always repeated with one period of 2 seconds.

In production mode B (normal game state), as shown in FIG. 70(b), the mode B background image is always displayed in a state of horizontal scrolling or scene change (production operation) while being displayed on the main display device 70. The production pattern 70a is displayed in a second mode (a lantern-shaped base image BG, a character image CG, and a number image SG surrounded by a hexagonal image), and the special pattern TZ is displayed in a common form (number image) common to all production modes. Is displayed.

Then, the effect pattern 70a of the second mode performs downward scrolling display (update fluctuation) in the variable effect, but the effect pattern 70a is displayed in a reduced size as a pre-variation operation before starting this scroll display (update operation). is performed for 0.5 seconds.

In addition, in the icon display area (the first reserved icon display area 70B, the icon display area 70C), the normal icon is displayed in the second mode (shuttle shape). Then, the normal icon of the second mode is displayed on the main display device 70 as a swinging motion (drawing motion) from the first posture (initial posture) leaning to the left, to the second posture leaning to the right, and then to the first posture again. During the display, it is always repeated with one period of 2 seconds.

In production mode C (normal game state), as shown in FIG. 70(c), the mode C background image is always displayed in a state of horizontal scrolling or scene change (production operation) while being displayed on the main display device 70. The production pattern 70a is displayed in the third mode (R-chamfered rectangular base image BG, character image CG, number image SG surrounded by R-chamfered hexagonal images), and the special pattern TZ is common to all production modes. are displayed in a common mode (numeric image).

Then, the effect pattern 70a of the third mode performs downward scrolling display (update fluctuation) in the variable effect, and the enlarged display of the effect pattern 70a is performed as a pre-variation operation before starting this scroll display (update fluctuation). is performed for 0.5 seconds.

Further, in the icon display areas (the first pending icon display area 70B and the icon display area 70C), normal icons are displayed in the third mode (star shape). Then, the normal icon of the third mode rotates from a first posture (initial posture) in which the specific top is positioned at the top, passes through a second posture in which the specific top is moved, and then reverts to the first posture. During the display on the main display device 70, the operation) is always repeated at a cycle of 3 seconds.

In production mode D (probability variable game state), as shown in FIG. 70(c), the mode D background image is always displayed in a state of horizontal scrolling or scene change (production operation) while being displayed on the main display device 70, The effect symbol 70a is displayed in the fourth mode (rectangular base image, number image), and the special symbol TZ is displayed in the common mode (number image) common to all effect modes.

The effect symbol 70a of the fourth mode performs downward scrolling display (update variation) in the variable effect, but as a pre-variation operation suggesting the start of this scrolling display, it floats upward from the symbol stop position. The display is performed for 0.4 seconds.

In addition, in the icon display area (the second reserved icon display area 70D, the icon display area 70C), the normal icon is displayed in the fourth mode (round shape). Then, the normal icon of the fourth mode rotates from the first posture (initial posture) in which the internal black point is positioned at the top, passes through the second posture in which the black dot moves, and then returns to the first posture (representation). During the display on the main display device 70, the operation) is always repeated at a cycle of 3 seconds.

In production mode E (probability variable game state), as shown in FIG. 70(e), the mode E background image is always displayed in a state of horizontal scrolling or scene change (production operation) while being displayed on the main display device 70. The effect symbol 70a is displayed in the fourth mode (rectangular base image, number image), and the special symbol TZ is displayed in the common mode (number image) common to all effect modes.

The effect symbol 70a of the fourth mode performs downward scrolling display (update variation) in the variable effect, but as a pre-variation operation suggesting the start of this scrolling display, it floats upward from the symbol stop position. The display is performed for 0.4 seconds.

In addition, in the icon display area (the second reserved icon display area 70D, the icon display area 70C), the normal icon is displayed in the fourth mode (round shape). Then, the normal icon of the fourth mode rotates from the first posture (initial posture) in which the internal black point is positioned at the top, passes through the second posture in which the black dot moves, and then returns to the first posture (representation). During the display on the main display device 70, the operation) is always repeated at a cycle of 3 seconds.

In production mode F (time-saving game state), as shown in FIG. 70(f), the mode F background image is always displayed in a state of horizontal scrolling or scene change (production operation) while being displayed on the main display device 70, The effect symbol 70a is displayed in the fourth mode (rectangular base image, numeric image), and the special symbol TZ is displayed in the common mode (numerical image) common to all the effect modes.

Then, the effect pattern 70a of the fourth mode performs downward scrolling display (update change) in the variable effect, and the reduced display of the effect pattern 70a is reduced to 0 as a pre-variation operation suggesting that the scroll display starts. .4 seconds.

Further, in the icon display area (the second reserved icon display area 70D, the icon display area 70C), the normal icon is displayed in the fifth mode (pentagon). Then, the normal icon of the fifth aspect rotates from a first posture (initial posture) in which the specific top is positioned at the top, passes through a second posture in which the specific top is moved, and then returns to the first posture (representation). During the display on the main display device 70, the operation) is always repeated at a cycle of 3 seconds.

In the production modes A to F, when a special icon is displayed in the icon display area (the second pending icon display area 70D, the icon display area 70C), the special icon is a common aspect common to all production modes ( circle). Then, the special icon of the common mode is a rotation action (drawing action ) is always repeated at a cycle of 2.5 seconds during display on the main display device 70 .

Also, in production modes A to F, the special symbol TZ displayed in a common mode (number image) is scrolled downward (update fluctuation) without performing the pre-variation operation in the fluctuation production. The updating operation for repeatedly updating the numeric images 1 to 9 is repeatedly performed in one cycle of 0.9 seconds. As for the special symbol TZ, the fact that the update variation is performed suggests that the variation effect is being executed.

In this way, the effect of changing between the first posture and the second posture in the performance operation (swaying motion, rotating motion) of the pending icon is the LED of the first special symbol display device 60 (second special symbol display device 61). It is repeatedly executed at a period (2 seconds or 3 seconds) different from the lighting state change period (32 ms) and the period (256 ms) of one cycle. Therefore, it is possible to appeal to the player that the pending icon is performing the performance action, and it is possible to improve the performance effect.

In addition, the effect of changing between the first posture and the second posture in the performance action (swaying action, rotating action) of the hold icon is set to It is repeatedly executed at a cycle (2 seconds or 3 seconds) different from (1 second). Therefore, it is possible to appeal to the player that the pending icon is performing the performance action, and it is possible to improve the performance effect.

Also, in the variable effect, the effect pattern 70a performs any one of a plurality of types of pre-variation actions (floating display, enlarged display, reduced display). Therefore, it is possible to improve the production effect of the variable production, and to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, the time until the production pattern 70a performs scroll display (update fluctuation) differs depending on which of the plurality of types of pre-variation operations (floating display, enlarged display, reduced display) the production pattern 70a performs in the variable production. There is a case. Therefore, it is possible to improve the production effect of the variable production, and to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, even if the production pattern 70a performs any of the plurality of types of pre-variation actions (floating display, enlarged display, reduced display) in the fluctuation production, the pre-variation actions and scroll display (update) of the three production patterns 70a variation) may be made to have the same starting order (left→middle→right).

Also, depending on which of the plurality of types of pre-variation operations (floating display, enlarged display, reduced display) the production pattern 70a has executed in the fluctuation production, the pre-variation operation and scroll display (update fluctuation) of the three production patterns 70a The starting order may be changed (floating display: left→middle→right, enlarged display: center→left→right, reduced display: right→middle→left, etc.).

Moreover, it is also possible to provide a plurality of types of pre-variation motions of the performance pattern 70a for each performance mode so that the degree of expectation for a big win is different. Even in this case, the operation mode of the pending icon may be set to one type for each performance mode so as not to give the expectation of a big win.

(Production example for each production mode)
A display effect example (pre-stop operation, etc.) for each effect mode will be described with reference to FIG. Note that the description of the parts that overlap with FIG. 70 will be omitted.

In the production mode A (normal game state), the production pattern 70a of the first mode performs downward scrolling display (update fluctuation) in the fluctuation production, but as a pre-stop operation suggesting that the scrolling display ends. , the character image CG of the production pattern 70a shakes its head at the pattern stop position (see FIG. 79) for 0.9 seconds.

In the production mode B (normal game state), the production pattern 70a of the second mode performs scroll display (update fluctuation) in the downward direction in the fluctuation production. As an operation, at the symbol stop position, the effect symbol 70a is reduced and displayed normally over 0.5 seconds.

In the production mode C (normal game state), the production pattern 70a of the third mode performs downward scroll display (update fluctuation) in the fluctuation production. As an operation, the effect symbol 70a is rotated and displayed at the symbol stop position for 0.7 seconds.

In the production mode D (probability variable gaming state), the production pattern 70a of the fourth mode performs downward scroll display (update fluctuation) in the variable production, but as a pre-stop operation suggesting that this scroll display ends. , and after floating upward from the symbol stop position, the bound display is performed for 0.4 seconds. Note that the bounce display is similar to the floating display described above in terms of the effect mode, but in the bounce display, the moving speed of the effect symbol 70a is faster and the height of the floating is lower.

In the production mode E (probability variable gaming state), the production pattern 70a of the fourth mode performs downward scroll display (update fluctuation) in the variable production, but as a pre-stop operation suggesting that this scroll display ends. , the rotating (small) display of the effect symbol 70a is performed at the symbol stop position for 0.4 seconds.

In production mode F (time-saving game state), the production pattern 70a of the fourth aspect performs downward scroll display (update fluctuation) in the variable production, but as a pre-stop operation suggesting that the scroll display ends. , the bound (small) display that floats upward from the symbol stop position is performed for 0.4 seconds.

In this way, in the variable production, the production pattern 70a performs any of a plurality of types of pre-stop actions (head shaking display, reduction → normal display, rotation display, bound display, rotation (small) display, bounce (small) display). It's supposed to run. Therefore, it is possible to improve the production effect of the variable production, and to improve the amusement of the game.

Also, in the variable production, which of a plurality of types of pre-stop actions (head shaking display, reduction → normal display, rotation display, bound display, rotation (small) display, bounce (small) display) has been executed by the production pattern 70a Depending on the situation, the time until the production pattern 70a is stopped may be different. Therefore, it is possible to improve the production effect of the variable production, and to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, when the production design 70a executes any of a plurality of types of pre-stop actions (head shaking display, reduction → normal display, rotation display, bound display, rotation (small) display, bounce (small) display) in the variable production. However, the order of pre-stop motions and temporary stops of the three production symbols 70a may be the same (left→right→middle).

Also, in the variable production, which of a plurality of types of pre-stop actions (head shaking display, reduction → normal display, rotation display, bound display, rotation (small) display, bounce (small) display) has been executed by the production pattern 70a , the order of pre-stop motion and temporary stop of the three production patterns 70a may be changed (head shaking display: left→right→middle, rotating display: left→middle→right, etc.).

Moreover, it is also possible to provide a plurality of types of modes of operations before stopping the performance pattern 70a for each performance mode so that the degree of expectation for a big hit is different. Even in this case, the operation mode of the pending icon may be set to one type for each performance mode so as not to give the expectation of a big win.

(Example of the display effect of the number of pending)
A display rendering example of the number of reservations on the main display device 70 will be described with reference to FIG. 72 .

First, when the number of reservations is "0" and the customer is waiting, as shown in FIG. "0" is displayed in each of the display area SA and the second pending number display area SB.

After that, when the game ball wins the first starting port 45 and the first reservation number becomes "1", as shown in FIG. The pending icon HI of the mode is additionally displayed (increased display) with one frame of non-animation, and the pending number in the first pending number display area SA is updated (increased display) to "1" with one frame of non-animation. At this time, the hold icon HI is displayed in the first posture (initial posture) tilted to the left, and the effect motion (shaking motion) is started from there.

Then, when the first pending number is reduced to "0" and the variable display of the first special symbol is started, as shown in FIG. A 20-frame animation is started to shift display (decrease display, change display) of the icon HI toward the icon display area 70C, and the pending number in the first pending number display area SA becomes "0" in one frame of non-animation. It is updated (decreased display). At this time, the pending icon HI is displayed translucently with the degree of transparency changing from opaque, but the performance action (shaking action) is continued.

After that, when the shift display of the pending icon HI is completed, the pending icon HI is displayed as the icon TI in a size larger than the pending icon HI and is opaque, as shown in FIG. 72(d). ) continues.

In this state, when the game ball wins the first starting port 45 and the first reserved number becomes "1", as shown in FIG. A 20-frame animation in which the hold icon HI in the normal display mode is additionally displayed (increased display) is started, and the hold number in the first hold number display area SA is updated to "1" in 1 frame of non-animation (increase display). be done. At this time, the additional display of the pending icon HI starts a production action (shaking action) so as to be synchronized with other icons in the normal display mode (here, the icon TI), and is accompanied by an effect image and is a semi-transparent minimal icon. The display is enlarged from size to normal size. That is, in a state where the special symbols are variably displayed, the display of the hold icon HI may not start from the first posture (initial posture).

Then, when the additional display (increase display) of the hold icon HI in the normal display mode is finished, as shown in FIG. , and the performance action (swaying action) is continuously performed.

After that, when it is determined that the game ball wins the first starting port 45 and the first reserved number becomes "2" and the icon change effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 72(g), A 20-frame animation in which the second special display mode (blue) pending icon HI in the first special display mode (blue) is additionally displayed (increased display) in the second display portion of the first pending icon display area 70B is started, and the first pending number display area SA The pending digit is updated (incremented) to "2" with one frame of non-animation. At this time, the additionally displayed hold icon HI has a performance action (rotating action) that is not synchronized with the icon in the normal display mode (here, the icon TI) from the first posture (initial posture) in which the specific part is positioned at the top. It starts and is enlarged and displayed from a semi-transparent extra-small size to a normal size with an effect image.

Then, when the additional display (increase display) of the first special mode (blue) hold icon HI is finished, as shown in FIG. 72(h), the additionally displayed first special mode (blue) hold icon HI is It has a normal size and is displayed opaquely, and the performance action (rotation action) is continuously performed.

In this state, when the variable display of the first special symbol is finished and the stop display is performed, as shown in FIG. Animation starts. At this time, the icon TI that is erased and displayed gradually increases in transparency with an effect image and is erased.

After that, when the first pending number is reduced to "1" and the variable display of the first special symbol is started, as shown in FIG. A 20-frame animation is started in which two pending icons HI are shifted and displayed (reduced display) toward the icon display area 70C, and the pending number in the first pending number display area SA is updated to "1" in one frame of non-animation. (decrease display). At this time, the two pending icons HI are displayed translucently with the degree of transparency changing from opaque, but the effect action (swaying action, rotating action) is continuously performed.

Then, when the shift display of the two pending icons HI is finished, as shown in FIG. The icon TI has a size larger than that of the pending icon HI and is displayed opaquely, and the performance action (shaking action) is continuously performed. In addition, the suspended icon HI in the first special display mode, which had been displayed in the second display portion of the first suspended icon display area 70B, is displayed in the normal size and opaquely in the first display portion, and accordingly the icon changes. Although the effect changes to the second special display mode (a kind of special icon), the effect operation (rotating operation) is continuously performed.

In this state, when the game ball wins the first starting port 45 and the first reserved number becomes "2", as shown in FIG. A 20-frame animation in which the hold icon HI in the normal display mode is additionally displayed (increase display) is started, and the hold number in the first hold number display area SA is updated to "2" in one frame of non-animation (increase display). be done. At this time, the additional display of the pending icon HI starts a production action (shaking action) so as to be synchronized with other icons in the normal display mode (here, the icon TI), and is accompanied by an effect image and is a semi-transparent minimal icon. The display is enlarged from size to normal size.

After that, when the additional display (increase display) of the hold icon HI in the normal display mode is completed, as shown in FIG. , and the performance action (swaying action) is continuously performed.

In this state, when the variable display of the first special symbol is finished and the stop display is performed, as shown in FIG. Animation starts. At this time, the icon TI that is erased and displayed gradually increases in transparency with an effect image and is erased.

After that, when the first pending number is reduced to "1" and the variable display of the first special symbol is started, the effect displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B as shown in FIG. A 20-frame animation is started in which the two active pending icons HI are shifted and displayed (reduced display) toward the icon display area 70C, and the pending number in the first pending number display area SA is displayed in a non-animated frame of " 1” (decreased display). At this time, the two pending icons HI are displayed translucently with the degree of transparency changing from opaque, but the effect action (swaying action, rotating action) is continuously performed.

At this time, if the condition for switching from effect mode A to effect mode B is satisfied, as shown in FIG. etc.) is displayed, and the icons in the first pending icon display area 70B and the icon display area 70C are visible while the pending numbers in the first pending number display area SA and the second pending number display area SB are visible. Regulated.

Then, in the layer behind the shielding image, as shown in FIG. 72(q), the hold icon HI is normally displayed corresponding to the effect mode B while the display mode and the effect operation (rotating operation) of the icon TI are maintained. The status is switched to the pending icon HI. At this time, the hold icon HI is displayed in the first posture (initial posture) tilted to the left, and the effect motion (shaking motion) is started from there.

Then, when the shielding image is erased, as shown in FIG. 72(r), the suspended icon HI in the normal display mode displayed in the first suspended icon display area 70B and the second suspended icon HI displayed in the icon display area 70C It becomes possible to visually recognize the icon TI in the special display mode.

In addition, even when a plurality of suspended icons in the normal display mode are displayed, the normal display is performed in the same way as the performance operation is performed so that the suspended icon in the normal display mode and the corresponding icon in the normal display mode are synchronized. Rendering operations are performed so that a plurality of pending icons in the mode are synchronized.

In addition, although the pending display example in the production mode A has been mainly described here, the display mode of the pending icon and the operation production mode are different in other production modes, but basically the same pending number display (production (including display at the time of mode switching) is performed.

70 to 72. As a first feature related to the production examples of FIGS. is executed in the shortest period of one frame. By doing so, it is possible to immediately perform a variable effect (decrease display of pending numbers and decrease display of pending icons) so as not to be slow, and to improve the interest of the game.

70 to 72, when the number of pending numbers decreases (changes from "1" to "0"), the non-animated display of the pending numbers (1 frame) decreases; Another point is that a change display (decrease display) is executed (started at the same frame update timing) by animation (20 frames) of the pending icon to the icon. By doing so, it is possible to make the player surely recognize that the number of reservations has decreased, and to improve the interest of the game. In addition, the timing (frame update timing) at which the display of the pending number starts to decrease is earlier than the timing (frame update timing) at which the change display of the pending icon to the corresponding icon (shift display from the pending icon to the pending icon) starts. You may make it ahead (for example, 1 frame before).

As a third characteristic of the production examples of FIGS. Also, the timing (frame update timing) at which the decreasing display of the pending number is completed is earlier. By doing so, it becomes possible for the player to easily grasp that the number of reservations has decreased by the number of reservations while directing the change of the number of reservations, thereby improving the interest of the game. In addition, the timing (frame update timing) when the pending number decrease display is completed is earlier than the timing (frame update timing) when the change display of the pending icon to the corresponding icon (shift display of the pending icon to the pending icon) is completed. (for example, one frame before).

As a fourth feature according to the production example of FIGS. 70 to 72, when the number of reservations increases during the variable display of special symbols, the increase display by non-animation (1 frame) of the reservation number, and the reservation icon (starting at the same frame update timing) by animation (20 frames). By doing so, the player can surely recognize that the number of reservations has increased, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. The timing (frame update timing) at which the increasing display of the pending number starts and the timing at which it ends (frame update timing) precedes the timing (frame update timing) at which the increasing display of the pending icon starts (for example, one frame before ).

A fifth characteristic of the production examples of FIGS. 70 to 72 is that the increase display of the pending number is completed before the timing (frame update timing) at which the additional display (increase display) of the pending icon is completed. (frame update timing) is faster. By doing so, it becomes possible for the player to easily grasp that the number of reservations has increased by the number of reservations while directing the change of the number of reservations, thereby improving the interest of the game.

As a sixth feature related to the production examples of FIGS. 70 to 72, when the number of reservations increases during the variable display of special symbols (variation production), compared to the case where the number of reservations increases during the customer waiting state Therefore, additional display (increase display) of the pending icon is performed over a long period (long number of frames). By doing so, the player can surely recognize that the number of reservations has increased, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

70 to 72, the seventh feature of the production example is the production operation mode (operation while expanding) at the start of the increasing display of the pending icon (start of display), and the completion of the increasing display of the pending icon (display The point is that it is different (partly different) from the production operation mode (operation while maintaining the size) after the start). By doing so, it is possible to let the player know that the number of pending games has increased, thereby making it possible to improve the amusement of the game. It should be noted that not only part of the operation may be changed at the start of the increased display of the pending icon and after the completion of the increased display, but all the operations may be changed.

The eighth characteristic of the production examples of FIGS. 70 to 72 is that the display mode (translucent) at the start of the increasing display of the pending icons and the display mode (opaque) after the completion of the increasing display of the pending icons. Different (partially different) points can be mentioned. By doing so, it is possible to let the player know that the number of pending games has increased, thereby making it possible to improve the amusement of the game. It should be noted that not only the transparency but also the shape and the like may be changed between when the increased display of the pending icon is started and after the increased display is completed.

As a ninth feature related to the production examples of FIGS. 70 to 72, during the variable display of special symbols (production patterns), the pending icon and the icon repeatedly change between the first posture and the second posture ( swing motion, rotation motion, etc.) can be executed. By doing so, it is possible to improve the presentation effect by the reserved icon and the icon, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A tenth feature of the production examples of FIGS. 70 to 72 is that, in production actions (swaying actions, rotating actions) in which the holding icon and the icon repeatedly change between the first posture and the second posture, The point that the time to change to the second posture is constant every time. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the suspended icon and the icon become difficult to visually recognize, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Note that if the control load of the drawing process is large when the pending icon and the corresponding icon change from the first posture to the second posture and the processing drops (one frame's worth of drawing could not be performed), the Only then is the time taken to change to the second posture not constant, but substantially constant.

As the eleventh feature related to the production examples of FIGS. 70 to 72, during the variable display (variable production) of the special symbols, a plurality of icons displayed in the normal display mode (holding icons, holding icon and the icon). are synchronized to execute the production operation. By doing so, it is possible to improve the presentation effect by improving the appearance of the presentation action of the icon, thereby making it possible to improve the amusement of the game. It should be noted that the timing of synchronizing the presentation action of the pending icon displayed in the normal display mode with the presentation action of the other pending icons based on the newly started winning may be at the start of display or after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of display. It may be the hour, the start of the shift display, or the completion of the shift display.

As a twelfth feature of the production examples of FIGS. 70 to 72, when the special pattern (production pattern) is stopped and displayed, the icon is erased and displayed, but after the special pattern (production pattern) is stopped and displayed, the next icon is displayed. Until the variable display (variable effect) is started, the pending icon repeats the effect operation. By doing so, it is possible for the player to grasp that the number of reservations is not "0" by means of the reservation icon, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

A thirteenth feature of the production examples of FIGS. 70 to 72 is that when a special symbol (a performance symbol) is stopped and displayed, the transparency of the performance symbol does not change, but the icon is erased after the transparency of the icon increases. points. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when erasing the icon and naturally erase the icon, thereby making it possible to enhance the interest of the game.

A fourteenth characteristic of the production examples of FIGS. Mode A and production mode B, between production modes C to F) are the same. By doing so, it is possible to make the performance action of the pending icon (the icon) easier to see, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

A fifteenth characteristic of the production examples of FIGS. 70 to 72 is that the period in which the suspended icon (the icon) changes from the first orientation to the second orientation and then to the first orientation again is the first presentation mode. It is the same as the second production mode (production mode A and production mode B, between production modes C to F). By doing so, it is possible to make the performance action of the pending icon (the icon) easier to see, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

As a sixteenth feature according to the production example of FIGS. 70 to 72, the size (area) of the area where the number of reservations is displayed does not change due to the increase or decrease in the number of reservations in the number display area, but in the reservation icon display area Depending on the number of holds, the size (area) of the area where the hold icon is displayed changes (when the number of holds is singular, the hold icon is displayed in the first area, and when the number of holds is multiple (the pending icon is displayed in a second area that is larger than the first area). By doing so, it is possible for the player to grasp the increase or decrease in the number of reservations while recognizing the number of reservations, thereby making it possible to improve the amusement of the game.

70 to 72, the pending icon displayed in the normal display mode (normal icon) is changed to the first posture and the second posture in the first period. (2 seconds or 3 seconds), and the hold icon displayed in a special display mode (special icon) with a higher chance of winning a jackpot than in the normal display mode changes between a first attitude and a second attitude. The point is that the effect action to be performed can be repeatedly executed in a second period (2.5 seconds) different from the first period. By doing so, it becomes easier to distinguish between the suspended icon in the normal display mode and the suspended icon in the special display mode, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

70 to 72, the 18th feature of the production examples is that the special symbols are updated and changed (scroll display, switching display) from 1 to 9 of the number image in the first cycle (0.9 seconds). It is possible, and the pending icon can perform the effect action that changes between the first posture and the second posture in a second cycle (2 seconds or 3 seconds) different from the first cycle. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience of making a player misunderstand that the update variation of the special symbols and the performance operation of the reserved icon are interlocked, and to improve the interest of the game.

As a nineteenth feature according to the production example of FIGS. 70 to 72, a decrease display of the number of reservations is performed with the start of the variable display of the special symbol. The number does not move, but the pending icon displayed in the pending icon display area moves (before the pending number decreased, the pending icon was displayed in the second area, which was larger than the first area, and the pending number decreased After that, the pending icon is displayed in the first area). By doing so, it is possible for the player to recognize the decrease in the number of reservations while recognizing the number of reservations, thereby making it possible to improve the amusement of the game.

The twentieth feature of the production examples in FIGS. 70 to 72 is the moving direction (downward) in the updating operation of the production pattern (special pattern), and the operation direction (horizontal direction) in the production operation (shaking operation) of the pending icon. etc.). By doing so, it is possible to distinguish and easily recognize the update fluctuation of the production pattern (special pattern) and the production operation (swaying operation) of the reserved icon, and the production effect in the fluctuation production can be enhanced, and the interest of the game can be enhanced. can be improved.

In addition, when the number of pending customers increases (changes from "0" to "1") while waiting for customers, the pending icon is incremented by 1 frame non-animation. You may increase and display by the animation of multiple frames (for example, 5 frames) so that it may continue longer than. By doing so, it becomes easier for the player to grasp the increase in the number of reservations, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

In addition, the holding icon is designed to perform the production operation even during the stop display of the special design (production design), but the holding icon stops the production operation during the stop display of the special design (production design), and the next After the shift display of the pending icon accompanying the start of the variable display of the special symbol (decrease in the number of pending), the production operation of the pending icon may be restarted. By doing so, the player can grasp whether or not the special symbols are being variably displayed depending on the presence or absence of the performance action of the pending icon, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, when resuming the performance action of the pending icon after the shift display of the pending icon, even if the pending icon resumes the performance action from the initial posture at the position after the shift display (suspended icon display area, the icon display area). good. By doing so, it is possible to impress the player that the variable display of the special symbols has newly started, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, even when the special design (production design) is stopped and the icon is erased and displayed, the icon continues to perform the production operation, but the special design (production design) is stopped and displayed. You may make it complete|finish operation|movement. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the load associated with display control.

In addition, a plurality of icons displayed in the normal display mode (holding icons, holding icon and the icon) are synchronized to perform the production operation, but the production operation is not performed in complete synchronization. , may be performed substantially in synchronism with each other. It should be noted that the timing of substantially synchronizing the rendering operation of the pending icon displayed in the normal display mode with the rendering operation of the other pending icons based on the newly started winning may be at the start of display or a predetermined time after the start of display. It may be at the time when the shift display is started, or at the time when the shift display is completed.

(Specific example of the case where the variable production starts from the customer waiting state)
A specific example in which the variable effect is started from the customer waiting state will be described with reference to FIGS. 73 to 75. FIG.

FIG. 73 is a timing chart when the variable effect starts from the customer waiting state, and FIGS. 74 and 75 are diagrams showing examples of effects at various timings in FIG. Here, the explanation will be given for the production mode A, but since the production modes B to F are basically the same, the explanation will be omitted.

First, at timing T0 in FIG. 73, the player is in a customer waiting state in which the variable display of special symbols has not been executed since the power was turned on, and production mode A and sound volume value "3" are set. At this time, the first special symbol display device 60 displays a failing special symbol (only the LED on the right end lights up), which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and the main display device 70 waits for execution of the variable effect. The variable standby screen is displayed. Specifically, the mode A background image is horizontally scrolled (effect operation), and the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are in a state in which "135", which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, is stopped ( See FIG. 74(a)). Note that the mode A background image is horizontally scrolled from the timing when the variable standby screen is first displayed after the power is turned on.

Next, at the timing of T1 in FIG. 73, when the up button or the down button of the cross key 19 is operated to adjust the volume, a part of the front side of the right production pattern 70a is superimposed on the main display device 70. In this way, the volume value image OG indicating the current volume value "3" is displayed, and the confirmation sound of the volume corresponding to the volume value "3" is output from the audio output device 9 (see FIG. 74(b)). ).

At timing T2 in FIG. 73, when the upper button of the cross key 19 is operated to increase the volume, the volume value changes from "3" to "4". At this time, the main display device 70 is updated with the volume value image OG indicating the volume value "4", and the audio output device 9 outputs a volume confirmation sound (for 0.5 seconds) corresponding to the volume value "4". It is output (see FIG. 74(c)).

After that, at the timing of T3 in FIG. 73, when the selector switch 22 is operated to lower the volume, the volume value changes from "4" to "3". At this time, the main display device 70 is updated to the volume value image OG indicating the volume value "3", but due to the volume adjustment by the changeover switch 22, the audio output device 9 does not display the volume value corresponding to the volume value "3". No confirmation sound is output (see FIG. 74(d)).

Next, at the timing of T4 in FIG. 73, when the game ball wins the first starting port 45, the first reservation number becomes "1" and the first special symbol reservation display 63 becomes "1" display, and the main Winning commands (first special symbol storage designation command, first look-ahead designation command) are transmitted from the control board 110 to the effect control board 130 (see FIG. 74(e)).

Then, at the timing of T5 in FIG. 73, when the first reservation number changes from "1" to "0" and a big hit is determined, the main control board 110 sends a start command (special symbol A memory specification command, a game state specification command, a special design specification command, a special figure variation pattern specification command) are transmitted. Also, the first special symbol reserve display 63 becomes "0" display, and the first special symbol display (first cycle variation) is started on the first special symbol display 60 (Fig. 74 (f) reference).

Furthermore, since the effect control board 130 receives the command at the time of winning, a predetermined period has passed, so the first reservation number display area SA and the sub-first reservation display 83 become "1" display, and the first reservation icon display area A non-animated hold icon HI (white icon) in the normal display mode is additionally displayed on the first display section 70B, and output of the first winning sound is started (see FIG. 74(f)).

After that, at the timing of T6 in FIG. 73 (the timing of the third display change in the first cycle variation), when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the effect control board 130 received the command at the start, the first pending number display area The SA and first sub-suspension display 83 are displayed as "0", and the first sub-variation display 81 starts changing display (blinking: represented by ⊚ in the figure) (see FIG. 75(g)).

Also, the pending icon HI displayed in the first display portion of the first pending icon display area 70B starts shift display (reduced display) to the icon display area 70C. Furthermore, the effect symbol 70a starts floating display as a pre-variation operation, and the special symbol TZ starts update variation (scroll display, switching display). Further, volume adjustment and light intensity adjustment by the cross key 19 are restricted for a predetermined period (one second), the volume value image OG is erased, and the audible output of the fluctuating BGM is started from the audio output device 9 (see FIG. 75 ( g)).

In addition to the start of the audible output of the variable BGM at the start of floating display as the pre-variation operation of the effect pattern 70a, a variable start sound (a start sound that is output every time, a start sound as a jackpot notice, etc.) is output. You may do so.

Next, at the timing of T7 in FIG. 73 (at the start of the third cycle variation), the winning sound output ends (see FIG. 75(h)), and at the timing of T8 in FIG. ), when the shift display of the pending icon HI is completed, it is displayed as the icon TI (white icon), and then the scroll display (update change) of the production pattern 70a is started (see FIG. 75(i)), and the At the timing of T9, high-speed fluctuation of all the effect symbols 70a starts (see FIG. 75(j)). When outputting the variable start sound, the output of the variable start sound should be finished at this timing (after the output of the winning sound is finished).

If the effect control board 130 cannot normally receive the command at the start while the volume value image OG is being displayed, the variable display of the special symbols is executed, but the variable effect is not executed. The display period is extended without erasing the OG, and the state in which volume adjustment and light intensity adjustment by the cross key 19 are possible is maintained.

Also, when the light amount image is displayed by operating the left button or right button of the cross key 19 instead of the volume value image OG, it is basically the same as when the volume value image OG is displayed. Become.

Thus, when the variable effect is started in the customer waiting state (the period in which volume adjustment and light intensity adjustment are possible with the cross key 19), volume adjustment and light intensity adjustment with the cross key 19 are performed for a predetermined period (1 second). Adjustments are regulated. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the player misses the important phase of the start of the variable performance by concentrating on the volume adjustment and the light amount adjustment, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, when the variable effect is started during the display of the volume value image OG, the volume value image OG is visually recognized even if the display period of the volume value image OG (10 seconds from the last adjustment operation) has not passed. is regulated (erased). Therefore, the volume value image OG does not impede the variable effect, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Even if the volume value is adjusted by operating the changeover switch 22 while the volume value image OG is not displayed, the volume value image OG is not displayed. The volume value image OG corresponding to the newly set volume value is displayed regardless of whether the volume is adjusted or the volume is adjusted by operating the selector switch 22 . Therefore, it is possible for the player to grasp the newly set volume value, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

In addition, in the variable effect, the effect pattern 70a performs the pre-variation operation (floating display, enlarged display, reduced display) and then starts the scroll display (update display), but the special symbol TZ is updated and changed without performing the pre-variation operation. (scrolling display, switching display) is started. Therefore, the performance effect of the variable performance can be enhanced by the action before the variation of the performance pattern 70a, and the player can grasp that the variable display of the special pattern is started by the special pattern TZ, so that the interest of the game can be enhanced. can be improved.

In addition, in the variable effect, the special symbol TZ starts the update variation (scroll display, switching display) before the effect symbol 70a starts the scroll display (update variation). Therefore, it is possible for the player to grasp that the variable display of the special symbols has been started by the special symbols TZ, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, in response to the start of the variable display of the special symbols, the pending display (holding icon and holding number on the main display device 70, LED holding display on the first sub holding display 83 and second sub holding display 84) is updated. It is designed to be Therefore, it becomes easier for the player to grasp the progress of the game, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the variable effect, shift display of the pending icon (change to the icon TI) is started before the effect symbol 70a starts scroll display (update change). Therefore, the player can quickly perceive that the reserved memory has decreased, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

Further, when the effect symbol 70a starts scroll display (update change) in the variable effect, the shift display of the pending icon (change to the icon TI) ends. Therefore, it becomes easier for the player to grasp the flow of the game that the variable performance (scroll display of the performance pattern 70a) is performed due to the reduction of the reserved memory, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, even before the production pattern 70a starts scrolling display (update fluctuation) (during stop display of the production pattern 70a, during pre-variation operation), the holding icon HI is made to perform the production operation (shaking operation, rotating operation). It's becoming Therefore, it is possible to improve the presentation effect while appealing to the player that there is a reserved memory, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, even at the start of the scroll display (update fluctuation) of the production pattern 70a, the icon TI performs the production operation (swaying operation, rotating operation). Therefore, it is possible to make the player look at the icon TI and appeal that the variable effect is started, thereby making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, even at the start of the pre-change operation (floating display, enlarged display, reduced display) of the effect pattern 70a, the background image (background image corresponding to each effect mode, zone background image described later) is changed to the effect operation (horizontal scroll, scene changes, actions of characters included in the background image, etc.). Therefore, the production effect of the variable production can be enhanced together with the production pattern 70a, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

Also, at the start of the scroll display (update fluctuation) of the production pattern 70a, the background image (background image corresponding to each production mode, zone background image described later) is included in the production operation (horizontal scroll, scene change, background image). character actions, etc.). Therefore, the production effect of the variable production can be enhanced together with the production pattern 70a, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, when the variable effect is started from the customer waiting state, the audible output of the variable BGM (BGM corresponding to each effect mode) starts at the start of the pre-variation operation (floating display, enlarged display, reduced display) of the effect pattern 70a. It is designed to be Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the variable effect has started, and to improve the interest of the game.

Also, at the start of the scroll display (update variation) of the effect pattern 70a, the variable BGM (BGM corresponding to each effect mode) is already audibly output. Therefore, the performance effect of the variable performance can be enhanced before the scroll display of the performance pattern 70a is started, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, the timing different from the start timing of the first cycle variation in the case of performing the variation display of the special symbols on the first special symbol display device 60 (second special symbol display device 61) (after the start timing of the first cycle variation , after the end timing of the first cycle fluctuation), the scroll display (update fluctuation) of the production pattern 70a in the fluctuation production is started, that is, both are intentionally started without synchronizing. Therefore, it is possible to add depth to the game presentation and improve the interest of the game. In addition, complicated processing such as strictly matching the start timing of the variable display of the special symbols and the start timing of the scroll display of the effect symbols 70a becomes unnecessary, and the control load and the development load can be reduced.

In addition, the timing different from the start timing of the second and subsequent cycle fluctuations in the case of performing the variable display of the special symbols on the first special symbol display device 60 (second special symbol display device 61) (2 to 3 cycle fluctuations After the start timing and before the start timing of the fourth cycle fluctuation), the scroll display (update fluctuation) of the production pattern 70a in the fluctuation production is started. Therefore, since the start timing of the cycle variation for the second and subsequent times coincides with the start timing of the scroll display of the production pattern 70a, the user misunderstands that the start timing of the variable display of the special pattern is the start of the scroll display of the production pattern 70a. It is possible to avoid such inconvenience.

Further, after the first cycle variation in the case of performing the variable display of the special symbols on the first special symbol display device 60 (the second special symbol display device 61), the scroll display (update variation) of the effect symbol 70a is started. It's like Therefore, by starting the variable display of the special symbols and the scrolling display of the performance symbols 70a in stages, the performance effect of the game performance can be enhanced, and the amusement of the game can be improved. In addition, it is possible to let the player know that the special symbol is the main symbol and the performance symbol 70a is the secondary symbol, and it is possible to make the player recognize the specifications of the gaming machine.

In addition, the timing different from the start timing of the first cycle variation in the case of performing the variation display of the special symbols on the first special symbol display device 60 (second special symbol display device 61) (after the start timing of the first cycle variation , before the end timing of the first cycle variation), the update variation (scroll display, switching display) of the special symbol TZ is started, that is, both are intentionally not synchronized. Therefore, it is possible to add depth to the game presentation and improve the interest of the game. In addition, complicated processing such as strictly matching the start timing of the special symbol variation display and the start timing of the update variation (scroll display, switching display) of the special symbol TZ becomes unnecessary, and the control load and development burden can be reduced. It becomes possible.

In addition, the timing different from the start timing of the second and subsequent cycle fluctuations in the case of performing the variable display of the special symbols on the first special symbol display device 60 (second special symbol display device 61) (the end timing of the first cycle fluctuation , before the start timing of the second cycle variation), the update variation (scroll display, switching display) of the special symbol TZ is started. Therefore, the start timing of the second and subsequent cycle fluctuations and the start timing of the update fluctuations (scroll display, switching display) of the special symbols TZ match, so that the start timing of the fluctuation display of the special symbols is the update fluctuations of the special symbols TZ ( It is possible to avoid inconvenience such as misunderstanding that it is the start of scrolling display, switching display).

Also, after the first display change in the cycle fluctuation when performing the variable display of the special symbols on the first special symbol display device 60 (second special symbol display device 61), the update variation of the special symbol TZ (scroll display , switching display) is started, that is, both are intentionally started without synchronizing them. Therefore, it is possible to add depth to the game presentation and improve the interest of the game. In addition, complicated processing such as strictly matching the timing of the first display change in the cycle fluctuation and the start timing of the update fluctuation (scroll display, switching display) of the special pattern TZ becomes unnecessary, thereby reducing the control load and the development burden. becomes possible. In addition, it is possible to let the player know that the special symbol is dominant and the special symbol TZ is subordinate, so that the player can recognize the specifications of the gaming machine.

In addition, the timing different from the start timing of the first cycle variation in the case of performing the variation display of the special symbols on the first special symbol display device 60 (second special symbol display device 61) (after the start timing of the first cycle variation , before the end timing of the first cycle fluctuation), pending display (holding icon or holding number on the main display device 70, LED holding display on the sub-first holding display 83 or the sub-second holding display 84) , that is, both are intentionally not synchronized. Therefore, it is possible to add depth to the game presentation and improve the interest of the game. In addition, complicated processing such as strictly matching the start timing of variable display of special symbols with the update start timing of reserved display is not required, and the control load and development load can be reduced.

In addition, the timing different from the start timing of the second and subsequent cycle fluctuations in the case of performing the variable display of the special symbols on the first special symbol display device 60 (second special symbol display device 61) (the end timing of the first cycle fluctuation before the start timing of the second cycle fluctuation), pending display (holding icon and holding number on the main display device 70, sub first holding display 83 and sub second holding display 84 LED pending display) is started to be updated. Therefore, since the start timing of the second cycle variation and the update start timing of the pending display coincide with each other, the inconvenience of misunderstanding that the start timing of the variable display of the special symbol is the time of starting the update of the pending display is avoided. becomes possible.

In addition, after the first display change in the cycle fluctuation when performing the variable display of the special symbols on the first special symbol display device 60 (second special symbol display device 61), the pending display (on the main display device 70 Hold icon, hold number, LED hold display on sub first hold display 83 and sub second hold display 84) start updating, that is, start without intentionally synchronizing both . Therefore, it is possible to add depth to the game presentation and improve the interest of the game. In addition, complicated processing such as strictly matching the start timing of variable display of special symbols with the update start timing of reserved display is not required, and the control load and development load can be reduced. In addition, it is possible to impress the player with the flow that the pending display is updated after the start of the variable display of the special symbols, and the player can grasp the flow of the game.

In addition, the timing different from the start timing of the first cycle variation in the case of performing the variation display of the special symbols on the first special symbol display device 60 (second special symbol display device 61) (after the start timing of the first cycle variation , before the end timing of the first cycle variation), the shift display of the hold icon HI is started, that is, both are intentionally not synchronized. Therefore, it is possible to add depth to the game presentation and improve the interest of the game. In addition, complicated processing such as strictly matching the start timing of the variable display of the special symbol and the start timing of the shift display of the pending icon HI is not required, and the control load and development load can be reduced.

In addition, the timing different from the start timing of the second and subsequent cycle fluctuations in the case of performing the variable display of the special symbols on the first special symbol display device 60 (the second special symbol display device 61) (the start timing of the second cycle fluctuation , before the end timing of the second cycle variation), shift display of the pending icon HI is started. Therefore, since the start timing of the cycle variation for the second and subsequent times coincides with the start timing of the shift display of the pending icon HI, the user misunderstands that the start timing of the variable display of the special symbol is the start of the shift display of the pending icon HI. It is possible to avoid such inconvenience.

Further, after the first cycle variation in the case of performing the variable display of the special symbols on the first special symbol display device 60 (the second special symbol display device 61), the shift display (decrease display) of the pending icon HI is ended. It has become. Therefore, it is possible to add depth to the game presentation and improve the interest of the game. In addition, it is possible to impress the player with the flow that the holding icon HI is shift-displayed after the variable display of the special symbols is started, and the player can grasp the flow of the game.

In addition, the timing different from the start timing of the first cycle variation in the case of performing the variation display of the special symbols on the first special symbol display device 60 (second special symbol display device 61) (after the start timing of the first cycle variation , before the end timing of the first cycle variation), shift display of the pending icon HI to the corresponding icon TI is started, that is, the two are intentionally not synchronized. Therefore, it is possible to add depth to the game presentation and improve the interest of the game. In addition, complicated processing such as strictly matching the start timing of the variable display of the special symbol and the start timing of the shift display of the pending icon HI to the icon TI becomes unnecessary, and it is possible to reduce the control load and the development load. Become.

In addition, the timing different from the start timing of the second and subsequent cycle fluctuations in the case of performing the variable display of the special symbols on the first special symbol display device 60 (the second special symbol display device 61) (the start timing of the second cycle fluctuation (before the end timing of the second cycle variation), shift display of the pending icon HI to the icon TI is started. Therefore, since the start timing of the cycle fluctuation from the second time onwards coincides with the start timing of the shift display of the pending icon HI to the icon TI, the start timing of the variable display of the special symbol is the same as the shift display of the pending icon HI to the icon TI. It is possible to avoid the inconvenience of mistakenly thinking that it is the time to start the shift display.

In addition, after the first display change in the cycle fluctuation when performing the variable display of the special symbols on the first special symbol display device 60 (the second special symbol display device 61), the holding icon HI is shifted to the icon TI. The display is terminated. Therefore, it is possible to add depth to the game presentation and improve the interest of the game. In addition, it is possible to impress the player with the flow that the holding icon HI is shift-displayed to the icon TI since the variable display of the special symbols is started, and the player can grasp the flow of the game.

In addition, the timing different from the start timing of the first cycle variation in the case of performing the variation display of the special symbols on the first special symbol display device 60 (second special symbol display device 61) (before the start timing of the first cycle variation) , later than the start timing of the first cycle variation), the audible output of a predetermined game sound (variation BGM, variation start sound, temporary stop sound, etc.) starts, that is, both start intentionally without synchronizing. It's like Therefore, it is possible to add depth to the game presentation and improve the interest of the game. In addition, complicated processing such as strictly matching the start timing of the variable display of the special symbol and the start timing of the audible output of the predetermined game sound becomes unnecessary, and the control load and development load can be reduced.

In addition, the timing different from the start timing of the second and subsequent cycle fluctuations in the case of performing the variable display of the special symbols on the first special symbol display device 60 (the second special symbol display device 61) (the start timing of the second cycle fluctuation , before the end timing of the second cycle variation), audible output of a predetermined game sound (variation BGM, variation start sound, temporary stop sound, etc.) is started. Therefore, when the start timing of the cycle fluctuation for the second and subsequent times coincides with the start timing of the audible output of the predetermined game sound, it is determined that the start timing of the fluctuation display of the special symbol is the start time of the audible output of the predetermined game sound. It is possible to avoid inconvenience such as misunderstanding.

In addition, the timing different from the start timing of the first cycle variation in the case of performing the variation display of the special symbols on the first special symbol display device 60 (second special symbol display device 61) (before the start timing of the first cycle variation) , the start timing of the first cycle variation is also later), the audible output of the production BGM (variation BGM for each production mode) is started, that is, both are intentionally started without synchronizing. Therefore, it is possible to add depth to the game presentation and improve the interest of the game. In addition, complicated processing such as strictly matching the start timing of the variable display of the special symbols and the start timing of the audible output of the production BGM is not required, and the control load and development load can be reduced.

In addition, the timing different from the start timing of the second and subsequent cycle fluctuations in the case of performing the variable display of the special symbols on the first special symbol display device 60 (the second special symbol display device 61) (the start timing of the second cycle fluctuation , before the end timing of the second cycle variation), the audible output of the production BGM (variation BGM for each production mode) is started. Therefore, since the start timing of the cycle fluctuation and the start timing of the audible output of the production BGM for the second and subsequent times coincide with each other, it is possible to misunderstand that the start timing of the fluctuation display of the special symbol is the start time of the audible output of the production BGM. It is possible to avoid inconvenience.

In addition, the timing different from the start timing of the first cycle fluctuation in the case of performing the variable display of the special symbols on the first special symbol display device 60 (second special symbol display device 61) (the display start of the variation standby screen after the power is turned on At the time, before the start timing of the first cycle change, at the end of the customer waiting demo production), the background image (background image for each production mode, zone background image) production operation (horizontal scrolling, scene change, etc.) starts , that is, they are intentionally started without synchronization. Therefore, it is possible to add depth to the game presentation and improve the interest of the game. In addition, complicated processing such as strictly matching the start timing of the variable display of the special symbols with the start timing of the effect operation of the background image becomes unnecessary, and the control load and the development load can be reduced.

In addition, timing different from the start timing of the second and subsequent cycle fluctuations in the case of performing the variable display of the special symbols on the first special symbol display device 60 (the second special symbol display device 61) (variation standby screen after power ON) At the start of the display, before the start timing of the second cycle change, at the end of the customer waiting demo effect), the background image (background image for each effect mode, zone background image) effect operation (horizontal scrolling, scene change, etc.) ) is to be started. Therefore, since the start timing of the cycle variation and the start timing of the effect operation of the background image match from the second time onward, the user may misunderstand that the start timing of the variable display of the special symbol is the start time of the effect operation of the background image. It is possible to avoid inconvenience.

Also, from before the start of the first cycle fluctuation (at the start of display of the fluctuation standby screen after the power is turned on) in the case of performing the variable display of the special symbols on the first special symbol display device 60 (second special symbol display device 61), Rendering operations (horizontal scrolling, scene changes, etc.) of background images (background images for each rendering mode, zone background images) are performed. Therefore, it is possible to add depth to the game presentation and improve the interest of the game. Further, for example, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling bored in the customer waiting state before the variable display of the special symbols is started, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Also, depending on the type of pre-variation operation in the variable effect (floating display, enlarged display, reduced display), the first special symbol display device 60 (second special symbol display It is intended that the number of cycle variations performed in the device 61) may differ. Therefore, it is possible to add depth to the game presentation according to the type of pre-variation action, and to improve the interest of the game.

Also, depending on the type of pre-variation operation in the variable effect (floating display, enlarged display, reduced display), the first special symbol display device 60 (second special symbol display It is provided that the number of display changes in the cycle variation performed by the device 61) may be different. Therefore, it is possible to add depth to the game presentation according to the type of pre-variation action, and to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the variable effect is started while the volume value image OG is being displayed, the volume value image OG is not hidden, but the effect pattern 70a is displayed (set) in the upper layer of the effect pattern 70a. Visual recognition of the volume value image OG may be restricted by changing to a state of being displayed (set) in a lower layer of , so as to overlap behind the effect pattern 70a.

(Specific example of starting winning during variable production)
A specific example of the case where the starting prize is won during the variable presentation will be described with reference to FIGS.

FIG. 76 is a timing chart in the case of starting winning during variable production, and FIG. 77 is a diagram showing examples of production at various timings in FIG. Here, the explanation will be given for the production mode A, but since the production modes B to F are basically the same, the explanation will be omitted.

First, at the timing of T0 in FIG. 76, the first special symbol fluctuation display (Y-th cycle fluctuation from the start of fluctuation) and the sub-th 1 The variable display (blinking: represented by ⊚ in the figure) is being executed on the variable display 81 . At this time, the first special symbol reservation display 63, the first reservation number display area SA and the first sub-reservation display 83 are displayed as "0". In addition, in front of the mode A background image during horizontal scrolling, the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are updated and fluctuated (scrolling display, switching display), and the icon TI in the normal display mode is displayed in the icon display area 70C. is displayed, and fluctuating BGM is audibly output (see FIG. 77(a)).

Next, at the timing of T1 in FIG. 76, when the game ball wins the first starting port 45, the first reservation number becomes "1" and the first special symbol reservation display 63 becomes "1" display, and the main Winning commands (first special symbol storage designation command, first look-ahead designation command) are transmitted from the control board 110 to the effect control board 130 (see FIG. 77(b)).

Then, at the timing of T2 in FIG. 76, when a predetermined period of time has passed since the effect control board 130 received the winning command, the first pending number display area SA and the sub-first pending display 83 are displayed as "1". Become. In addition, additional display of the animation of the pending icon HI (white icon) in the normal display mode on the first display portion of the first pending icon display area 70B and the output of the first winning sound are started (FIG. 77(c) reference).

After that, at timing T3 in FIG. 76, when a predetermined period of time has passed since the start of the additional display of the animation of the pending icon HI, the additional display of the pending icon HI animation ends, and the output of the first winning sound also ends. (See FIG. 77(d)).

In this way, when a game ball wins in the starting hole during execution of the variable display of the special symbol, additional display of the pending icon HI by animation is executed over a plurality of cycles of variable display. Therefore, it is possible for the player to accurately grasp that the game ball has entered the starting hole, thereby improving the interest of the game.

In this way, when the game ball enters the starting hole during execution of the variable display of the special symbols, the winning sounds (first winning sound, second winning sound) are output over a plurality of cycle fluctuations. there is Therefore, it is possible for the player to accurately grasp that the game ball has entered the starting hole, thereby improving the interest of the game.

Further, when a game ball enters the starting hole during execution of the variable display of the special symbols and the winning sounds (the first winning sound and the second winning sound) are output, the volume of the variable BGM is maintained without decreasing. It's like Therefore, it is possible to suppress the fluctuation effect from being hindered by the prize-winning sound, and to improve the amusement of the game.

(Concrete example of executing variable production continuously)
A specific example of the case where the variable performance is continuously executed will be described with reference to FIGS. 78 to 81. FIG.

FIG. 78 is a timing chart in the case of continuously executing variable effects, and FIGS. 79 to 81 are diagrams showing examples of effects at various timings in FIG. Here, the explanation will be given for the production mode A, but since the production modes B to F are basically the same, the explanation will be omitted.

First, at the timing of T0 in FIG. 78, the first special symbol fluctuation display (the Nth cycle fluctuation from the start of fluctuation) and the sub-th 1 The variable display (blinking: represented by ⊚ in the figure) is being executed on the variable display 81 . At this time, the first special symbol reservation display 63, the first reservation number display area SA and the first sub-reservation display 83 are displayed as "2". In addition, in front of the mode A background image during horizontal scrolling, the left and right production patterns 70a are temporarily stopped, and the central production pattern 70a is scrolled (updated) at a low speed, and the special pattern TZ is updated and fluctuated (scrolled). display, switching display). Two suspended icons HI in the normal display mode are displayed in the first suspended icon display area 70B, and the icon TI in the normal display mode is displayed in the icon display area 70C. It is audibly output (see FIG. 79(a)).

Next, at the timing of T1 in FIG. 78 (at the start of the N+1th cycle variation from the start of variation), the left production pattern 70a that has been scrolled (updated variation) starts to temporarily stop (FIG. 79(b) reference). Then, when the left effect symbol 70a temporarily stops, the voice output device 9 starts outputting a temporary stop sound, and the character of the left effect symbol 70a performs the effect motion (the motion before stopping by shaking the head) (Fig. 79 ( c) see).

It should be noted that the "pre-stop operation" may be applied to any effect as long as it is performed between temporary stop and stop display.
Moreover, not only after the temporary stop, but also an effect performed immediately before the temporary stop may be the pre-stop motion.

Next, at the timing of T1 to T2 in FIG. 78 (at the start of the cycle variation after the N+1th cycle variation from the start of the variation), the right effect pattern 70a that was scrolled (updated and varied) temporarily stopped. start (see FIGS. 79(b)-(c)). Then, when the right effect symbol 70a temporarily stops, the output of a temporary stop sound is started from the voice output device 9, and the character of the right effect symbol 70a performs the effect motion (the motion before stopping by shaking the head) (Fig. 79 ( b) to (c)).

Next, at the timing of T2 in FIG. 78 (at the start of the N+16th cycle variation from the start of variation), the effect symbol 70a in the scroll display (update variation) starts to temporarily stop (FIG. 79(c) reference). Then, when the middle production pattern 70a is temporarily stopped, the output of a temporary stop sound is started from the voice output device 9, and the character of the middle production pattern 70a performs the production action (movement before stopping by shaking the head) to complete all the production. The pattern 70a is temporarily stopped (see FIGS. 80(c) to (d)).

After that, at the timing of T3 in FIG. 78, when the special symbol fluctuation time has elapsed, a stop command (symbol determination command) is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130. FIG. Also, the losing special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 60 (see FIG. 80(d)).

Next, at the timing of T4 in FIG. 78, after a predetermined period of time has passed since the performance control board 130 received the stop command, the variable display on the first sub variable display 81 stops. Also, disappearance display of the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C by animation is started, and stop display of the effect symbol 70a ("523") and the special symbol TZ ("523") is started ( See FIG. 80(e)).

Then, at timing T5 in FIG. 78, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the disappearing display of the icon TI in animation, the disappearing display of the icon TI in animation ends (see FIG. 80(f)).

Next, at the timing of T6 in FIG. 78, when the stop time of the special symbols has elapsed, the first reserved number changes from "2" to "1" and a big hit determination is performed, and the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130 A start time command (special symbol storage designation command, game state designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command) is transmitted to. In addition, the first special symbol reservation display 63 becomes "1" display, and the first special symbol variation display (first cycle variation) on the first special symbol display 60 is started (Fig. 81 (g )reference).

Then, at the timing of T7 in FIG. 78 (during the first cycle variation), when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the effect control board 130 received the command at the start, the first pending number display area SA and the sub-first pending display The device 83 becomes "1" display, and the variable display (blinking: represented by ⊚ in the figure) on the first sub-variable display 81 is started (see FIG. 81(h)).

Also, the two pending icons HI displayed in the first display portion of the first pending icon display area 70B start shift display (decrease display) toward the icon display area 70C. Further, the variable effect is started and the effect symbol 70a starts floating display as a pre-variation operation, and the special symbol TZ starts update variation (scroll display, switching display) (see FIG. 81(h)).

After that, at the timing of T8 in FIG. 78 (during the second cycle fluctuation), when a predetermined period has passed since the start of the floating display of the production pattern 70a, the look-ahead effect production (light emission production at the start) is executed only with this fluctuation production ) is started, and a blue light emission effect image EF is displayed around the production pattern 70a (see FIG. 81(i)).

Next, at the timing of T9 in FIG. 78 (during the fourth cycle change), when the shift display of the two pending icons HI is completed, the earliest one pending icon HI is displayed as the icon TI (white icon). . At this time, an icon change effect at the time of start of variation is performed and the icon TI is displayed as a blue icon, after which scroll display (update variation) of the effect pattern 70a is started (see FIG. 81(i)).

In this way, the variable BGM that has been audibly output from before the start of the pre-change operation (floating display, enlarged display, reduced display) of the production design 70a (during the stop display of the production design 70a) can be performed even during the execution of the pre-variation operation. Continuous (uninterrupted) audible output. Therefore, it is possible to perform an effect as if a plurality of variable effects are spun, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, when the icon change effect is executed at the start of the variable effect (when the icon shift display is performed), the icon shift display is performed instead of changing the icon display mode from the start of the icon shift display. At the time of completion (after), the display mode of the icon is changed. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect of the icon change presentation by highlighting the change in the display mode of the icon, thereby making it possible to improve the amusement of the game.

After the pre-stop effect (movement of the character of the effect symbol 70a shaking its head, output of a temporary stop sound, etc.) in the variable effect is completed, the special symbol and the effect symbol 70a are stop-displayed. Therefore, the progress of the game presentation becomes clear, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, after the pre-stop effect (movement of the character of the effect symbol 70a shaking its head, output of a temporary stop sound, etc.) in the variable effect is completed, the effect symbol 70a is stop-displayed. Therefore, the progress of the game presentation becomes clear, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, depending on the type of the variable production pattern, when the production pattern 70a temporarily stopped first (for example, the left production pattern 70a) is performing the pre-stop production, the production pattern 70a to be temporarily stopped next (for example, the right production pattern 70a) ), there are times when the pre-stop effect is being performed and times when the update variation (scrolling display) is being performed. Therefore, the performance effect of the variable performance can be enhanced, and the interest in the game can be improved. Although the effect pattern 70a to be temporarily stopped first and the effect pattern 70a to be temporarily stopped next are the same in the effect mode of the pre-stop effect, they may be different effect modes. Also, in the case of shortened variation, the pre-stop effect may not be performed.

In addition, after the pre-stop production (movement of the character of the production pattern 70a shaking his head, output of temporary stop sound, etc.) in the fluctuation production is completed, the production pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the sub first fluctuation display 81 (sub first The change display (update change) of the 2-change display 82) ends. Therefore, the progress of the game presentation becomes clear, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, after the pre-stop effect (movement of the character of the effect symbol 70a shaking its head, output of a temporary stop sound, etc.) in the variable effect is completed, disappearance display of the icon is started. Therefore, the progress of the game presentation becomes clear, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, after the pre-stop effect (movement of the character of the effect symbol 70a shaking its head, output of a temporary stop sound, etc.) is completed in the variable effect, the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed, and then disappearance display of the icon ends. It's like Therefore, the progress of the game presentation becomes clear, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, after the pre-stop production (movement of the character of the production pattern 70a shaking his head, output of temporary stop sound, etc.) in the fluctuation production is completed, the production pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the sub first fluctuation display 81 (sub first The change display (update change) of the 2-change display 82) ends, and then disappearing display of the icon ends. Therefore, the progress of the game presentation becomes clear, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the variable production, the production pattern 70a is stop-displayed after executing the pre-stop production (movement of the character shaking his head), but the special pattern TZ is stop-displayed without executing the pre-stop production. Therefore, the effect of the variable performance is enhanced by the performance pattern 70a, and the special pattern TZ allows the player to grasp the end of the variable display of the special pattern, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

In addition, in the variable production, the production pattern 70a is stopped after performing the pre-stop action (movement of the character shaking its head), but the background image (each The background image corresponding to the production mode) continues the production operation. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling bored even during the pre-stop action of the effect pattern 70a or after the stop display, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Also, in the variable production, after the pre-stop production (movement of the character of the production pattern 70a shaking its head, output of temporary stop sound, etc.) is completed, the production pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ are stopped and displayed, but the production pattern 70a and the special Even during the stop display of the symbol TZ, the background image (background image corresponding to each production mode) continues to perform the production operation. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling bored even after the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the timing different from the end timing of the cycle variation in the case of performing the variation display of the special symbols on the first special symbol display device 60 (second special symbol display device 61) (before the start timing of the last cycle variation, the last before the end timing of the second cycle variation, after the start timing of the last cycle variation, and after the end timing of the last cycle variation), the production pattern 70a is displayed in a predetermined manner (temporary stop display, stop display). It is designed to be Therefore, it is possible to add depth to the game presentation and improve the interest of the game. In addition, complicated processing such as strictly matching the timings of both becomes unnecessary, and it becomes possible to reduce the control load and the development load.

In addition, before the final cycle variation in the case of performing the variable display of the special symbols on the first special symbol display device 60 (the second special symbol display device 61), the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped and displayed. ing. Therefore, the player can grasp the flow of the game that the variable display of the special symbol ends after the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, the timing different from the end timing of the cycle variation in the case of performing the variation display of the special symbols on the first special symbol display device 60 (second special symbol display device 61) (after the start timing of the last cycle variation, the last The special symbol TZ is stop-displayed later than the end timing of the cycle variation and after the stop-display timing of the special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to widen the range of effects related to the stop display of the special symbol TZ, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game. In addition, complicated processing such as strictly matching the timings of both becomes unnecessary, and it becomes possible to reduce the control load and the development load.

Also, during the execution of the variable performance, the pending icon HI is made to perform the performance operation (swaying operation, rotating operation), and the first special symbol display device 60 (second special symbol display device 61) is the last in the case of performing the variable display of the special symbol. Even after the end of the cycle variation of , the effect operation of the hold icon HI is continued. Therefore, the player can recognize that the number of reservations is not "0" by the reservation icon HI, and the player can be prevented from feeling bored even after the special symbols are stopped and displayed, thereby improving the interest of the game. It is possible to

In addition, the timing different from the end timing of the cycle variation in the case of performing the variation display of the special symbols on the first special symbol display device 60 (second special symbol display device 61) (after the start timing of the last cycle variation, the last After the end timing of the cycle variation and after the stop display timing of the special symbol, the disappearance display of the icon TI ends. Therefore, it is possible to expand the range of effects related to disappearing display of the icon TI, and to improve the interest of the game. In addition, complicated processing such as strictly matching the timings of both becomes unnecessary, and it becomes possible to reduce the control load and the development load.

Further, after the cycle variation in the case of performing the variable display of the special symbols on the first special symbol display device 60 (the second special symbol display device 61) is completed, disappearance display of the icon TI is completed. Therefore, it is possible for the player to grasp the flow of the game that the icon TI is erased because the special symbol is stopped and displayed, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, a predetermined game sound started before the last cycle variation (during the execution of the variation effect) in the case of performing the variable display of the special symbols on the first special symbol display device 60 (second special symbol display device 61) Audible output of (variation BGM, variation start sound, temporary stop sound, etc.) at a timing different from the end timing of the cycle variation (after the start timing of the last cycle variation, after the end timing of the last cycle variation) , After the stop display timing of the special symbol), it is possible to end. Therefore, it is possible to widen the range of effects when the predetermined game sound is audibly output, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game. In addition, complicated processing such as strictly matching the timings of both becomes unnecessary, and it becomes possible to reduce the control load and the development load.

In addition, a predetermined game sound started before the last cycle variation (during the execution of the variation effect) in the case of performing the variable display of the special symbols on the first special symbol display device 60 (second special symbol display device 61) It is possible to terminate the audible output (such as a temporary stop tone) before the end of the cycle variation. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the impression of the previous variable display from being carried over to the next variable display, thereby making it possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, a predetermined game sound (fluctuation BGM) that has been output before the final cycle fluctuation when performing the variable display of the special symbols on the first special symbol display device 60 (second special symbol display device 61), It is possible to continue audible output even after the end of the cycle variation (during stop display). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling bored even after the special symbols are stopped and displayed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the effect operation (horizontal scrolling, scene change, etc.) are continuously executed even after the end of the cycle variation (during stop display). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling bored even after the special symbols are stopped and displayed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the look-ahead effect (look-ahead zone effect, look-ahead effect effect) executed with the start of the variable effect is executed after the first cycle change in the case of performing the variable display of the special symbol. . Therefore, it is possible for the player to grasp the flow of the game that the look-ahead effect is executed after the variable display of the special symbols is started, and the interest in the game can be improved.

(Concrete example when the variable effect is started without being able to receive the stop command normally)
82 and 83, a specific example will be described in which the variable effect is started without being able to receive the stop command normally. Although (a) to (c) are omitted in FIG. 83, they are the same as in FIGS. 79(a) to (c).

FIG. 82 is a timing chart when the variable effect is started without being able to receive the stop command normally, and FIG. 83 is a diagram showing examples of effects at various timings in FIG. Here, the explanation will be given for the production mode A, but since the production modes B to F are basically the same, the explanation will be omitted.

Since the timings T0 to T2 in FIG. 82 are basically the same as the timings T0 to T2 in FIG. 78, a description thereof will be omitted, and the timing after T3 will be described.

At the timing of T3 in FIG. 82, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has passed, a stop command (symbol determination command) is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130. FIG. Also, the losing special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 60 (see FIG. 80(d)).

However, since the effect control board 130 could not normally receive the stop command, the stop display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ should have been started at the timing of T4 in FIG. And the stop display of special symbols TZ etc. will not be started, the variable display period in the sub first variable display 81, the display period of the icon TI, the temporary stop period of the effect symbol 70a and the variable display period of the special symbol TZ will be extended.

Next, at the timing of T5 in FIG. 82, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first reserved number changes from "1" to "0" and a big hit determination is performed, and the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130 A start time command (special symbol storage designation command, game state designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command) is transmitted to. In addition, the first special symbol reservation display 63 becomes "0" display, and the first special symbol variation display (first cycle variation) on the first special symbol display 60 is started (Fig. 83 (e )reference).

Then, at the timing of T6 in FIG. 82 (during the first cycle variation), when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the effect control board 130 received the command at the start, the first pending number display area SA and the sub-first pending display 83 becomes "0" display, and the variable display (blinking: represented by ⊚ in the figure) on the first sub-variable display 81 starts from the beginning (turns off) (see FIG. 83(f)).

Also, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased without animation, and the pending icon HI displayed in the first display unit starts shift display (decrease display) to the icon display area 70C. do. Furthermore, after the variable performance is started and the temporarily stopped performance pattern 70a is displayed at the symbol stop position for a moment, the floating display as the pre-variation operation is started, and the special symbols that were scrolled (updated and varied) are displayed. TZ continues scroll display without stopping display (see FIG. 83(f)).

After that, at timing T7 in FIG. 82 (during the fourth cycle change), when the shift display of the pending icon HI ends, the icon TI (white icon) is displayed. After that, the scroll display (update change) of the production pattern 70a is started (see FIG. 83(g)).

In this way, when the first command (command at start) is received, the variable performance is started, and when the second command (command at stop) is received, the variable performance is terminated. When a third command (next start time command) is received in a state in which it is not started, the current variable performance is forcibly terminated and the next variable performance is started. In other words, when the second command (command at the time of stop) is received, the variable effect ends, but even if the second command cannot be received normally and the third command (the next command at the start) is received, the variable effect ends. It's like In other words, both when the second command is received and when the second command is not received, the previous variable effect is terminated during execution of the next variable effect. Therefore, the previous variable performance can be appropriately terminated by the start of the next variable performance, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Also, when the start command is received during the temporary stop of the production pattern 70a, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a is displayed at the design stop position for a moment (same as when the stop command is normally received) mode) to start a variable effect (here, floating display). Therefore, it is possible to start the variable performance in the same manner as when the start command is received during the stop display of the performance pattern 70a, and the game when the variable performance is started from the state where the performance pattern 70a is temporarily stopped. It is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity of the player and improve the interest of the game.

Further, when the start time command is received while the icon TI is being displayed, the displayed icon TI is erased and displayed in a non-animation, that is, in a shorter time than the erased display in the animation. Therefore, the next time the hold icon HI is shift-displayed in the icon display area 70C, the shift-display will not be hindered, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the presentation effect.

It should be noted that if the command at the start is received by the production control board 130 in a garbled state due to wiring abnormality or noise, the contents of the variation pattern of the special symbol variation display executed by the first special symbol display device 60 (for example, 13.5 second variation of normal reach) and the content of the variable effect pattern of the variable effect executed on the main display device 70 (for example, 40 seconds of SP reach effect) may be different. In such a case, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60, the main display device 70 is in a state where the variable effect (specifically, the SP ready-to-win effect) is executed, and in this state the next start. When the hour command is received, the current variable performance is forcibly terminated and the next variable performance is started. Regarding this point, the operation is the same for a gaming machine that transmits/receives a start command but does not transmit/receive a stop command.

(Concrete example when the normal fluctuation effect ends and the customer waits)
A specific example of the case where the normal variation effect ends and the customer waits for customers will be described with reference to FIGS. 84-86.

FIG. 84 is a timing chart when the normal variable effect ends and the customer waits, and FIGS. 85 and 86 show examples of effects at various timings in FIG. Here, the explanation will be given for the production mode A, but since the production modes B to F are basically the same, the explanation will be omitted.

First, at the timing of T0 in FIG. 84, the first special symbol fluctuation display (the Nth cycle fluctuation from the start of fluctuation) and the sub-th 1 The variable display (blinking: represented by ⊚ in the figure) is being executed on the variable display 81 . At this time, the first special symbol reservation display 63, the first reservation number display area SA and the first sub-reservation display 83 are displayed as "0". In addition, in front of the mode A background image during horizontal scrolling, the left and right production patterns 70a are temporarily stopped, and the central production pattern 70a is scrolled (updated) at a low speed, and the special pattern TZ is updated and fluctuated (scrolled). display, switching display). Further, the icon TI in the normal display mode is displayed in the icon display area 70C, and the fluctuating BGM is audibly output. Further, a volume value image OG is displayed so as to partially overlap with the front side of the right performance pattern 70a (see FIG. 85(a)).

Next, at the timing of T1 in FIG. 84 (during the N-th cycle variation from the start of variation), when the center effect symbol 70a that has been scrolled (updated) is temporarily stopped, the audio output device 9 emits a temporary stop sound. The output is started, and the character of the central production pattern 70a performs the production action (pre-stop action of shaking the head), and all the production patterns 70a are temporarily stopped (see FIG. 85(b)).

Then, when the lower button of the cross key 19 is operated to adjust the volume at timing T2 in FIG. 84 (during the N+1th cycle variation from the start of variation), the volume value changes from "4" to "3". do. At this time, the main display device 70 is updated with the volume value image OG indicating the volume value "3", and the sound output device 9 starts outputting a confirmation sound of the volume corresponding to the volume value "3" ( See FIG. 85(c)).

After that, at the timing of T3 in FIG. 84 (during the N+1th cycle fluctuation from the start of fluctuation), when a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of output of the temporary stop sound, the output of the temporary stop sound ends (see FIG. 85(d)). .

Next, at the timing of T4 in FIG. 84 (in the middle of the N+16th cycle variation from the start of variation), when the variation time of the special symbol has passed, the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130 When stopping command (symbol confirmation command) is sent. Also, the losing special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 60 (see FIG. 85(e)).

Then, at the timing of T5 in FIG. 84, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the effect control board 130 received the stop command, the variable display on the sub-first variable display 81 stops. Also, disappearance display by animation of the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is started, and stop display by the effect symbol 70a ("523") and the special symbol TZ ("523") is started. . Further, volume adjustment and light amount adjustment by the cross key 10 are restricted for a predetermined period (1 second), and the volume value image OG is erased, but the confirmation sound continues to be output (see FIG. 85(f)).

After that, at the timing of T6 in FIG. 84, when the output period of the confirmation sound elapses, the output of the confirmation sound ends (see FIG. 86(g)), and at the timing of T7 in FIG. 84, the animation of the icon TI disappears. When a predetermined period of time has passed since the start of the display, the disappearing display of the icon TI by animation ends (see FIG. 86(h)).

Next, at the timing of T8 in FIG. 84, when the stop time of the special symbols has passed, it becomes a customer waiting state and becomes a waiting period in which the special symbols are stopped and displayed, and the main control board 110 sends the effect control board 130 to the customer waiting. A state specification command is sent.

Then, at the timing of T9 in FIG. 84, when a stop waiting period (for example, 30 seconds) has passed since the reception of the customer waiting state designation command, the output of the fluctuating BGM at an audible volume is stopped (muted) (FIG. 86 (i) See), when a demo waiting period (for example, 60 seconds) elapses from the reception of the customer waiting state designation command, a customer waiting demonstration effect for appealing to the player is started.

It should be noted that when the stop display of the production pattern 70a (special pattern TZ) is performed in response to the reception of the stop time command during the output of the confirmation sound, while the volume adjustment with the cross key 19 is regulated, the confirmation sound is designed to continue output until the output period (0.5 seconds) elapses, but this is also the same at the start of the variable effect. Even when the execution of the corresponding variable performance is started, while volume adjustment by the cross key 19 is restricted, the confirmation sound continues to be output until the output period elapses.

When a predetermined period of time elapses after receiving the customer waiting state designation command, the audible output of the fluctuating BGM is stopped (muted). The audible output is not stopped, and for example, the audible output of the variable BGM is stopped (muted) when a customer waiting state designation command, a jackpot game opening designation command, or the like is received next time.

In this way, when the production pattern 70a is stopped and displayed in the variable production (period in which volume adjustment and light amount adjustment by the cross key 19 are possible), volume adjustment by the cross key 19 and over a predetermined period (1 second) Light quantity adjustment is regulated. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the player misses the important phase of the stop display of the production pattern 70a by concentrating on the volume adjustment and the light amount adjustment, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Become.

When the production pattern 70a is stopped and displayed while the volume value image OG is being displayed, the production pattern is stopped and displayed even if the display period of the volume value image OG (10 seconds from the last adjustment operation) has not passed. In order to ensure the visibility of 70a, visibility of the volume value image OG is restricted (erased). Therefore, the player can confirm the stop-displayed effect pattern 70a without obstructing the visibility of the stop-displayed effect pattern 70a by the volume value image OG, thereby improving the amusement of the game. It becomes possible.

Further, when the variable effect is started or the effect pattern 70a is stopped and displayed during the output period of the volume confirmation sound, the volume adjustment by the cross key 19 is regulated, but the volume confirmation sound is output during the output period (0. 5 seconds) has passed, the output is continued. Therefore, the player can recognize that the volume has been adjusted, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, when the normal variable effect ends and the customer waits, the audible output of the variable BGM continues for a predetermined period. Therefore, compared with the case where the audible output of the variable BGM is stopped (muted) immediately after the normal variable performance is finished, the player is less likely to want to quit the game, and the operation of the game machine is improved. becomes possible.

In addition, in the variable production, the production pattern 70a performs the pre-stop operation and then is stopped and displayed, but the audible output of the production BGM (variation BGM for each production mode) continues even during the pre-stop operation or the stop display of the production pattern 70a. and is executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling bored even during the pre-stop action of the performance pattern 70a or during the stop display, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Also, in the variable production, after the pre-stop production (movement of the character of the production pattern 70a shaking its head, output of temporary stop sound, etc.) is completed, the production pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ are stopped and displayed, but the production pattern 70a and the special Even after the symbols TZ are stopped and displayed, the audible output of the production BGM (variable BGM for each production mode) is continuously executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling bored even after the special symbol TZ is stop-displayed, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, in the normal fluctuation production, the production pattern 70a is stopped after performing the pre-stop action (movement of the character shaking its head), but when a predetermined time elapses after the production pattern 70a is stopped and displayed, production BGM (for each production mode audible output of the fluctuation BGM) is stopped. Therefore, the continuous audible output of the effect BGM can be prevented from annoying the player, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in the variable production, the production pattern 70a performs the pre-stop action and then is stopped and displayed. is adjustable. Therefore, it is possible to improve convenience for the player to adjust the volume of the effect BGM, and to improve the interest of the game. In addition, when various error notification sounds are being output during the pre-stop operation of the effect pattern 70a, the output of the effect BGM is restricted (volume reduction or silence).

When the production pattern 70a is stopped and displayed while the volume value image OG is being displayed, instead of hiding the volume value image OG, the production pattern 70a is displayed (set) in the upper layer. You may change to the state displayed (set) in the lower layer of the pattern 70a. In this way, since the volume value image OG is displayed so as to overlap behind the production pattern 70a, the visual recognition of the volume value image OG is restricted, while the visibility of the production pattern 70a is ensured, and the stop display is performed. The player can confirm the effect pattern 70a to be displayed.

In addition, when the volume is adjusted by operating the cross key 19 during the customer waiting state, the volume confirmation sound is output, and when the volume is adjusted by operating the cross key 19 during the variable effect, the volume confirmation sound is not output. It is also possible to output no volume confirmation sound when adjusting the volume by operating the cross key 19 during the customer waiting state, and to output the volume confirmation sound when adjusting the volume by operating the cross key 19 during the variable presentation. .

In addition, the volume value image OG is displayed when the volume is adjusted by operating the cross key 19 even during the customer waiting state or during the variable effect. The volume value image OG may be displayed when the volume is adjusted by the arrow key 19, and the volume value image OG may not be displayed when the volume is adjusted by operating the cross key 19 during the variable effect.

In addition, when the stop display of the production pattern 70a is performed in response to the reception of the stop command during output of the confirmation sound, or when the execution of the variable performance is started in response to the reception of the start command during the output of the confirmation sound. However, the confirmation sound continues to be output until the output period (0.5 seconds) elapses. In this case, the output of the confirmation sound may be stopped even if the output period has not elapsed. By doing so, it is possible to make it difficult to confuse the confirmation sound with the fluctuation start sound and the fluctuation stop sound, so that the fluctuation start sound and the fluctuation stop sound can be easily heard, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

(Concrete example when the end of the normal fluctuation effect is delayed because the stop command cannot be received normally)
87 and 88, a specific example will be described in which the end of the normal variation effect is delayed due to the normal reception of the stop command.

FIG. 87 is a timing chart in the case where the end of the normal fluctuation effect is delayed due to a failure to receive the stop command normally, and FIG. 88 is a diagram showing examples of effects at various timings in FIG. Here, the explanation will be given for the production mode A, but since the production modes B to F are basically the same, the explanation will be omitted.

Note that the timings T0 to T3 in FIG. 87 are basically the same as the timings T0 to T3 in FIG. 84, so the description is omitted here, and the timing after T4 will be described.

At the timing of T4 in FIG. 87 (in the middle of the N+16th cycle variation from the start of variation), when the variation time of the special symbol has passed, the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130 is issued a stop time command (symbol confirmation command). sent. Also, the losing special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 60 (see FIG. 88(e)).

However, since the effect control board 130 could not normally receive the stop command, the stop display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ should be started at the timing of T5 in FIG. 87, but the effect symbol 70a , special symbols TZ, etc. will not be displayed. Then, the variable display period on the sub-first variable display 81, the display period of the icon TI, the temporary stop period of the effect symbol 70a, the variable display period of the special symbol TZ, the display period of the volume value image OG, and the cross key 19 This means that the period during which sound volume adjustment and light quantity adjustment are possible is extended (see FIG. 88(f)).

Next, at the timing of T6 in FIG. 87, when the output period of the confirmation sound elapses, the output of the confirmation sound ends (see FIG. 88(g)), and at the timing of T7 in FIG. 87, the special symbol stop time elapses. Then, it becomes a customer waiting state and a waiting period during which the special symbol is stopped and displayed, and a customer waiting state designation command is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130.例文帳に追加

After that, at timing T8 in FIG. 87, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the reception of the customer waiting state designation command, the variable display on the sub-first variable display 81 stops. Also, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C disappears in non-animation, and the effect symbol 70a ("523") and the special symbol TZ ("523") are displayed at the symbol stop position. (= stop display state). On the other hand, the state in which the volume can be adjusted by the cross key 10 is maintained, and the display of the volume value image OG is also maintained (see FIG. 88(h)).

Then, at the timing of T9 in FIG. 87, when the display period of the volume value image OG (10 seconds after the previous operation of the cross key 19 for volume adjustment) has passed, the volume value image OG disappears (see FIG. 88 ( i)), at the timing of T10 in FIG. 87, when a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) has passed since the reception of the customer waiting state designation command, the output of the fluctuating BGM at an audible volume is stopped (muted) (FIG. 88 ( j)), and after a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) has passed, a customer waiting demonstration effect is started to appeal to the players.

Note that even if the effect control board 130 cannot normally receive the start command transmitted from the main control board 110 while the volume value image OG is being displayed, basically the main control board As in the case where the effect control board 130 cannot normally receive the command at the time of stop transmitted from 110, the variable effect is not executed. The OG is no longer erased.

In addition, when the stop time command and the customer waiting state designation command cannot be received normally, the variable display on the sub first variable display 81 is stopped, the icon TI disappears in non-animation, the production pattern 70a and the special Since the symbol TZ is not stopped and displayed, the state in which the volume can be adjusted by the cross key 19 is maintained, and the volume value image OG is not erased.

In addition, when the stop time command and the customer waiting state designation command cannot be received normally, the stop display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ is not performed, so a predetermined period (30 seconds) is required after entering the customer waiting state. Even if it has passed, the audible output of the fluctuating BGM is maintained.

In this way, when the first command (command at start) is received, the variable performance is started, and when the second command (command at stop) is received, the variable performance is terminated. When the third command (customer waiting state designation command) is received in a state in which the player is not in the waiting state, the current variable effect is forcibly ended and the customer waiting state is entered. In other words, when the second command (stop command) is received, the variable effect ends, but even if the second command cannot be received normally and the third command (customer waiting state designation command) is received, the variable effect ends. It's like In other words, both when the second command is received and when the second command is not received, the variable effect is terminated when shifting to the customer waiting state. Therefore, it becomes possible to appropriately end the variable presentation by the start of the customer waiting state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In this way, if the production control board 130 cannot normally receive the command at the start or the command at the time of stop transmitted from the main control board 110 (disconnection of the command line connecting the main control board 110 and the production control board 130, disconnection of the connector, etc. ), the volume adjustment and the light amount adjustment by the cross key 19 are not restricted, and the state in which the volume adjustment and the light amount adjustment are possible is maintained. Therefore, it is possible to improve convenience for the player regarding sound volume adjustment and light amount adjustment, and to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the production control board 130 cannot normally receive the command at the start or the command at the time of stop transmitted from the main control board 110 (disconnection of the command line connecting the main control board 110 and the production control board 130, disconnection of the connector, etc.) , the display of the volume value image OG is maintained until the display period of the volume value image OG elapses. Therefore, it is possible to improve convenience for the player regarding sound volume adjustment and light amount adjustment, and to improve the interest of the game.

It should be noted that if the command at the start is received by the production control board 130 in a garbled state due to wiring abnormality or noise, the contents of the variation pattern of the special symbol variation display executed by the first special symbol display device 60 (for example, 13.5 second variation of normal reach) and the content of the variable effect pattern of the variable effect executed on the main display device 70 (for example, 40 seconds of SP reach effect) may be different. In such a case, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60, the main display device 70 is in a state where the variable effect (specifically, the SP ready-to-win effect) is executed, and in this state, the customer is waiting. When the specified command is received, the current variable effect is forcibly terminated and the player waits for customers. Regarding this point, the operation is the same for a gaming machine that transmits/receives a start command but does not transmit/receive a stop command.

(Concrete example when the loss normal reach fluctuation effect ends and the customer waits)
89 to 91, a specific example of the case where the lost normal reach fluctuation effect ends and the customer waits for customers will be described.

FIG. 89 is a timing chart when the lost normal reach variable effect ends and the customer waits, and FIGS. Here, the explanation will be given for the production mode A, but since the production modes B to F are basically the same, the explanation will be omitted.

First, at the timing of T0 in FIG. 89, the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 60 and the variable display on the sub-first variable display 81 ( Blinking: (represented by ◎ in the figure) is being executed. At this time, the first special symbol reservation display 63, the first reservation number display area SA and the first sub-reservation display 83 are displayed as "0". In addition, the three performance symbols 70a and the three special symbols TZ are updated and fluctuated (scrolling display, switching display) in front of the mode A background image during horizontal scrolling. Further, the icon TI in the normal display mode is displayed in the icon display area 70C, and the fluctuating BGM is audibly output (see FIG. 90(a)).

Next, at the timing of T1 in FIG. 89, when the normal ready-to-win effect is started in which the central effect pattern 70a is scrolled at a low speed while the left and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped at the same pattern, the audible output of the fluctuating BGM is started. is stopped (muted) and output of normal reach BGM is started (see FIG. 90(b)).

Then, at timing T2 in FIG. The effective period of promotion effect and effect button 17 for prompting the operation is started. Specifically, the main display device 70 displays an operation prompting image SSG imitating the effect button 17, the audible output of the normal reach BGM is stopped (muted), and the voice output device 9 prompts "press". is output (see FIG. 90(c)).

Thereafter, at the timing of T3 in FIG. 89, when the effect button 17 is operated or the effective period elapses, the development failure effect suggesting that the development to the SP ready-to-win effect fails and ends in the normal ready-to-win effect is executed. . Specifically, the development failure image SIG is displayed on the main display device 70, and a failure sound of "Hey!" is output from the audio output device 9 (see FIG. 90(d)).

Next, at the timing of T4 in FIG. 89, when the execution period of the blackout effect has passed, the horizontal scrolling of the mode A background image is resumed, and the effect pattern 70a returns to the position before the start of the blackout effect. The normal reach effect is resumed, and the audible output of the normal reach BGM is resumed (see FIG. 90(e)).

Then, at the timing of T5 in FIG. 89, when the center effect symbol 70a scrolled (updated and changed) at a low speed is temporarily stopped at "6", the output of a temporary stop sound is started from the voice output device 9, and the center The character of the production pattern 70a performs the production action (movement before stopping by shaking the head), and the three production patterns 70a are temporarily stopped with the reach-losing roll ("565"). Further, the output of normal reach BGM is stopped, but the audible output of fluctuating BGM is not restarted (see FIG. 90(f)).

After that, at timing T6 in FIG. 89, when a predetermined period has passed since the start of outputting the temporary stop sound, the output of the temporary stop sound ends (see FIG. 91(g)).

Next, at the timing of T7 in FIG. 89, when the special symbol fluctuation time elapses, a stop command (symbol determination command) is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130. FIG. Also, the lost special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 60 (see FIG. 91(h)).

Then, at the timing of T8 in FIG. 89, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the effect control board 130 received the stop command, the variable display on the sub-first variable display 81 stops. Also, disappearance display by animation of the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is started, and stop display by the effect symbol 70a ("565") and the special symbol TZ ("565") is started. (See FIG. 91(i)).

After that, at timing T9 in FIG. 89, when a predetermined period of time has passed since the disappearance display of the icon TI started, the disappearance display of the icon TI ends (see FIG. 91(j)).

Next, at the timing of T10 in FIG. 89, when the stop time of the special symbols has elapsed, it becomes a customer waiting state and becomes a waiting period during which the special symbols are stopped and displayed, and the main control board 110 sends the effect control board 130 to the customer waiting. A state specification command is sent. Thereafter, when a demonstration waiting period (for example, 60 seconds) elapses from the receipt of the customer waiting state designation command, a customer waiting demonstration effect for appealing the game to the player is started.

In this way, when the normal reach variation performance is executed, when the normal reach performance is started, the variation BGM is muted (silenced) and the normal reach BGM is output, so that the normal reach performance is effectively livened up. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the case of a customer waiting state after the losing normal reach fluctuation effect, the effect BGM (fluctuation BGM, normal reach BGM) is not output before the normal reach change effect ends, specifically, from the temporary stop of the three effect patterns 70a. Since it is in the state, it is possible to immediately grasp that the normal reach effect has ended or that it has been lost, and it is possible to improve the interest.

It should be noted that instead of stopping the output of the production BGM (fluctuation BGM, normal reach BGM) from the temporary stop of the three production patterns 70a, the temporary stop of the three production patterns 70a will audibly output the fluctuation BGM instead of the normal reach BGM. can be In this way, the player will not be extremely discouraged when the normal ready-to-win variation effect with the low expectation for the big win is lost.

(Concrete example of the case where the variable effect is executed after the loss SPSP ready-to-win effect ends)
92 to 94, a specific example in which the variable effect is executed after the losing SPSP ready-to-win effect is completed will be described.

FIG. 92 is a timing chart when the variable effect is executed after the loss SPSP ready-to-win effect ends, and FIGS. 93 and 94 are diagrams showing examples of effects at various timings in FIG. Here, the explanation will be given for the production mode A, but since the production modes B to F are basically the same, the explanation will be omitted.

First, at the timing of T0 in FIG. 92, the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 60 and the variable display on the sub-first variable display 81 ( Blinking: (represented by ◎ in the figure) is being executed. At this time, the first special symbol reservation display 63, the first reservation number display area SA and the first sub-reservation display 83 are displayed as "2". In addition, in front of the mode A background image during horizontal scrolling, three effect symbols 70a (display mode including character images) are scrolled (updated), and the special symbol TZ is updated (scrolled, switched). )are doing. Also, in the first pending icon display area 70B, the pending icon HI in the normal display mode (white) and the pending icon HI in the special display mode (blue) are displayed. Further, the icon TI in the normal display mode is displayed in the icon display area 70C, and the fluctuating BGM is audibly output.

Next, at the timing of T1 in FIG. 92, when the normal ready-to-win effect is started in which the central effect pattern 70a is scrolled at a low speed while the left and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped with the same pattern, an audible output of the fluctuating BGM is started. is stopped (muted) and output of normal reach BGM is started.

Then, at timing T2 in FIG. At this time, the promotion effect for prompting the operation of the effect button 17 and the effective period of the effect button 17 are started. Specifically, the main display device 70 displays an operation promotion image SSG imitating the effect button 17, the output of the normal reach BGM is stopped (no output), and the voice output device 9 produces a prompting sound “Press”. is output (see FIG. 93(a)).

After that, at the timing of T3 in FIG. 92, when the effect button 17 is operated or the effective period passes, the development to the SP ready-to-win effect is successful and the development success effect to suggest that the SP ready-to-win effect is executed is executed. be done. Specifically, the development success image HSG is displayed on the main display device 70, and the success sound "You did it" is output from the voice output device 9 (see FIG. 93(b)).

Next, at the timing of T4 in FIG. 92, when the execution period of the blackout effect has passed, the display of the SP ready-to-win background image and the output of the SP ready-to-win BGM are started, and the execution of the SP ready-to-win effect is started. At this time, the effect pattern 70a changes to a display mode of numbers only, and the left and right effect patterns are displayed in the left and right corners of the upper part of the screen in a state reduced from the normal size (see FIG. 93(c)).

Then, at the timing of T5 in FIG. 92, when the execution period of the SPSP reach effect has passed, the display of the SPSP reach background image and the output of the SPSP reach BGM are started, and the execution of the SPSP reach effect is started. At this time, the three production patterns 70a are displayed in the upper left corner of the screen in a state reduced from the normal size, and the first pending icon display area 70B is hidden together with the pending icon HI (see FIG. 93(d)). .

After that, at the timing of T6 in FIG. 92, when the output of the SPSP ready-to-win BGM is stopped in the final stage of the SPSP ready-to-win effect and the determined effect is started, the promotion image prompting the operation of the effect button 17 and the effective period of the effect button 17 is started. Specifically, the main display device 70 displays an operation prompting image SSG imitating the effect button 17, the output of the SPSP reach BGM is stopped (no output), and the voice output device 9 prompts "press". A sound is output (see FIG. 93(e)).

Next, at the timing of T7 in FIG. 92, when the effect button 17 is operated or the effective period elapses, a decision failure effect suggesting that the jackpot game will not be executed is executed. Specifically, the failure image HBG is displayed on the main display device 70 , and the failure sound of “Hey!” is output from the audio output device 9 . In addition, by temporarily stopping the center production pattern 70a at the upper left corner of the screen, the three production patterns 70a will be in a state of being temporarily stopped with the reach losing roll ("565") (Fig. 93 (f )reference).

Then, at the timing of T8 in FIG. 92, when the execution period of the SPSP ready-to-win effect has passed, the first stop suggestion effect (for example, 0.5 seconds) is executed to suggest that the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed. Specifically, a shielding image (for example, an eye-catching image (see FIG. 131) including a model name, a model-specific character, etc.) that shields the background image, the production pattern 70a, etc., is displayed. Then, when the first stop suggestion effect is completed, the horizontal scrolling of the mode A background image is resumed, and the effect pattern 70a is returned to the position before the start of the SP ready-to-win effect and the first mode, and is temporarily stopped and displayed. Become. Also, the first pending icon display area 70B is redisplayed together with the pending icon HI (see FIG. 94(g)).

After that, at the timing of T9 in FIG. 92, when the special symbol fluctuation time has elapsed, a stop command (symbol determination command) is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130. FIG. Also, the losing special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 60 (see FIG. 94(h)).

Next, at the timing of T10 in FIG. 92, after the performance control board 130 receives the command at the time of stop, when a predetermined period elapses, the variable display on the sub-first variable display 81 stops. Also, disappearance display by animation of the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is started, and stop display by the effect symbol 70a ("565") and the special symbol TZ ("565") is started. (See FIG. 94(i)).

Then, at timing T11 in FIG. 92, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the disappearing display of the icon TI in animation, the disappearing display of the icon TI in animation ends (see FIG. 94(j)).

After that, at the timing of T12 in FIG. 92, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the first reservation number changes from "2" to "1" and a big hit is determined, and the main control board 110 transfers to the effect control board 130. In response, a start command (special symbol storage designation command, game state designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command) is transmitted. In addition, the first special symbol reservation display 63 becomes "1" display, and the first special symbol variation display (first cycle variation) on the first special symbol display 60 is started (Fig. 94 (k )reference).

Next, at the timing of T13 in FIG. 92 (during the first cycle variation), when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the effect control board 130 received the command at the start, the first retention number display area SA and the sub-first retention The display 83 becomes "1", and the variable display (blinking: represented by ⊚ in the figure) on the first sub-variable display 81 starts from the beginning (turns off) (see FIG. 94(l)).

Also, the two pending icons HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B start shift display (decrease display) toward the icon display area 70C. Furthermore, the variable performance is started, the performance pattern 70a starts floating display as a pre-variation operation, the special pattern TZ starts the update variation (scroll display, switching display), and the audible output of the variable BGM is resumed. (See FIG. 94(l)).

Although the SP reach fluctuation effect has been explained here, the same applies to the SP reach change effect. Playback of the normal reach BGM is interrupted during the blackout effect, and the output of the normal reach BGM is resumed in the SP reach effect after the blackout effect. SP reach BGM is output without doing.

In addition, although the SPSP reach variation effect has been described here, the SP reach variation effect is the same as the case where the SPSP reach change effect is lost. Then, a first stop suggesting effect (for example, 0.5 seconds) suggesting that the effect symbol 70a is stopped is executed, and when the first stop suggesting effect is completed, the horizontal scrolling of the mode A background image is resumed. , the production pattern 70a returns to the normal size and the first mode, and the temporary stop display is performed.

Also, when the read-ahead zone effect is executed and the read-ahead zone background is displayed and the ready-to-reach state is reached, the SP reach effect or the SPSP reach effect is executed. It is the same as the case where the SP ready-to-win effect and the SPSP ready-to-win effect are executed in the state where the background image is displayed and the ready-to-win effect is executed, but the effect pattern 70a that is lost in the SP ready-to-win effect and the SPSP ready-to-win effect is temporarily stopped. Then, a first stop suggesting effect (for example, 0.5 seconds) suggesting that the effect symbol 70a is stopped is executed, and when the first stop suggesting effect is completed, the normal background image ( For example, the horizontal scrolling of mode A (background image) is resumed, and the production pattern 70a returns to the normal size and the first mode, and is temporarily stopped.

Thus, in the first variation effect (normal reach variation effect) in which the blackout effect (suggestion effect) that suggests whether or not the SP reach effect is executed is executed, the reproduction of the normal reach BGM is continued during the blackout effect. After the blackout effect, the muted normal reach BGM is returned to audible output, and a blackout effect (suggestive effect) is performed to suggest whether or not the SP reach effect will be executed. In the executed second variation performance (SP/SPSP reach variation performance), reproduction of normal reach BGM is interrupted during blackout performance, and SP reach BGM is output in SP reach performance after blackout performance. . Therefore, it is possible to reduce the load of voice control when executing the SP ready-to-win effect, and to improve the degree of freedom of voice control.

Also, when the SP reach effect is started during the display of the first background image (for example, the mode A background image which is the normal background image) or the second background image (look-ahead zone background image) corresponding to the normal gaming state, usually The background image is changed to a third background image (SP ready-to-win background image) showing that the degree of expectation for big win is higher than the background image, and the production pattern 70a forming the ready-to-win state and temporarily stopping is displayed in a size smaller than the normal size. do. When the three production patterns 70a are temporarily stopped due to failure, the background image is changed to the first background image (the normal background image is the mode A background image), and the three production patterns 70a are stopped and displayed in the normal size. It has become. Therefore, the performance effect of the SP ready-to-win performance can be enhanced, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, even during execution of the SP ready-to-win effect in which the display mode of the effect pattern 70a changes, the mode of the effect action (contents of action, period of action, etc.) of the hold icon HI and the icon TI does not change. ing. Therefore, it is possible to make the player concentrate on the SP ready-to-win effect, and to improve the interest of the game.

Further, during execution of the SPSP ready-to-win effect, the icon TI is displayed while the hold icon HI is hidden. Therefore, it is possible to make the player concentrate on the SPSP ready-to-win effect, and to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, after the SPSP ready-to-win effect ends, the display of the pending icon HI (normal display mode pending icon, special display mode pending icon) is resumed. Therefore, it is possible to appeal to the player that the variable performance will be executed again after the variable performance in which the SPSP ready-to-win performance has been executed, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, the display of the pending icon HI (suspended icon in the normal display mode, pending icon in the special display mode) is maintained when the SPSP ready-to-win effect is not executed after the execution of the SP ready-to-win effect, while the SPSP ready-to-win effect is executed. However, the display of the special symbol TZ is maintained regardless of whether or not the SPSP ready-to-win effect is executed after the SP ready-to-win effect is executed. Therefore, it is possible to let the player know that the variable display is being performed, thereby making it possible to enhance the amusement of the game.

Also, when the SPSP ready-to-win effect ends, a first stop suggesting effect (display of an eye-catching image) is executed. Therefore, it is possible for the player to understand that the SPSP ready-to-win effect will end and that the effect pattern 70a will be stop-displayed, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Also, the first stop suggesting effect (display of an eye-catching image) is executed to return the display mode of the effect symbol 70a to the first mode. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity caused by the change in the display mode of the production pattern 70a, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Also, the first stop suggestion effect (display of an eye-catching image) is executed to return from the SPSP reach background image to the mode A background image. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity caused by the change of the background image, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Although the pending icon HI and the relevant icon TI are displayed during the blackout effect, at least one of the pending icon HI and the relevant icon TI is hidden, and the display is resumed when the SP ready-to-win effect is started. may

In addition, when the effective period is generated during the blackout effect and the effect button 17 is operated or the effective period elapses, the development success effect or the development failure effect is executed, but the effect period should not be generated. may In this case, the development success production or development failure production may be executed, or the development success production or development failure production may be returned to the normal reach production or developed to the SP reach production. good.

In addition, the pending icon HI and the icon TI are kept displayed during execution of the SP ready-to-win performance, and the pending icon HI is hidden and the icon TI is kept displayed during execution of the SP ready-to-win performance. However, the pending icon HI may be hidden while the icon TI is displayed while the SP ready-to-win performance is being executed, and the pending icon HI and the icon TI may be hidden during the execution of the SP ready-to-win performance.

(Specific example of disappearing display of the icon TI in animation)
A specific example of disappearing display of the icon TI by animation will be described with reference to FIGS. 95 and 96. FIG.

As described with reference to FIGS. 28 and 29, there are "white icon", "blue icon", "red icon", and "rainbow icon" as final icon display modes of the icon TI. FIG. 95 shows a specific example of disappearance display by animation when displayed as an icon TI.

FIG. 95 shows, as an example, a specific example of disappearing display of the icon TI of the "white icon" and the "blue icon" by animation. The “white icon” is the same as in FIG. 94(i), so the description is omitted.
On the other hand, in the case of the "blue icon", as shown in (h-2) to (j-2), the same animation as the animation for disappearing and displaying the "white icon" is used for disappearing display. As a result, since the 'white icon' and the 'blue icon' are extinguished by the same animation, the player can easily recognize that the icon is extinguished and the variable presentation is completed.

The "blue icon" may be read as "red icon" or "rainbow icon". In addition, although the same animation is used for the disappearance display for the "white icon", the "blue icon", the "red icon", and the "rainbow icon", it is possible to perform the disappearance display using different animations for each. good. In addition, when an icon not illustrated in FIGS. 28 and 29 (for example, a character icon) is provided, such a character icon may also be extinguished using the same animation as the “white icon” or the like. Alternatively, the disappearance display may be performed using a different animation only for the character icon.

Further, in the example of FIG. 95, the “blue icon” has a circular shape, which is different from the hexagonal shape of the pending icon HI, but the “blue icon” has the same shape as the pending icon HI (see FIG. 95). may be represented by a hexagon).

FIG. 96 is a diagram for explaining that there are cases where animation is used and cases where animation is not used for disappearance display. Specifically, FIG. 96(b) shows FIG. 92(b), and when the development image SEG indicating that the SP ready-to-win effect has been developed is displayed, the icon TI and the hold icon HI are not displayed. becomes. In this case, the icon TI and the pending icon HI are extinguished (hidden) without using the animation shown in FIG. 95 and the like. As a result, the player can recognize that the variable effect is still continuing because the icon TI is hidden without animation.

Then, in FIG. 96(i), the animation shown in FIG. 95 and the like is used to perform disappearance display. As a result, the player can recognize that the variable effect has ended because the icon TI is hidden with animation.

Note that the case where the icon TI is hidden without animation is not limited to the time of development, and may be, for example, when the power supply is stopped as shown in FIG. 103 . The disappearance mode of FIG. 96(b) is the same as the disappearance mode of FIG. 103(b), but may be different. That is, only the extinction mode at the end of the variable performance may be different between the end of the variable performance, the development, and the stop of the power supply, and the extinction mode may be the same at the time of development and at the time of power supply stop. However, the mode of extinguishing may be different at the end of the variable presentation, at the time of development, and at the time of stopping the power supply.

It should be noted that, for example, the temporary stop period of the effect symbol 70a is different between the losing normal reach described in FIG. 89 and the losing SPSP reach described in FIG. Specifically, the temporary stop period of the effect symbol 70a in the losing SPSP reach is longer than the temporary stop period of the effect symbol 70a in the losing normal reach. Therefore, the period during which the icon TI performs the effect operation during the temporary stop period is also longer in the losing SPSP reach. In this way, even if the period during which the icon TI performs the performance action differs between the lost normal reach and the lost SPSP reach, the icon TI disappears with the same animation and disappears with the same disappearing time. I am trying to do As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand that the icon disappears and the variable effect ends, although the variable effect and the temporary stop period are different.

(Concrete example when the jackpot SPSP reach fluctuation effect is completed and the jackpot game is executed)
97 to 99, a specific example of the case where the jackpot SPSP reach variation effect is finished and the jackpot game is executed will be described.

FIG. 97 is a timing chart when the jackpot SPSP reach variation effect is completed and the jackpot game is executed, and FIGS. Here, the explanation will be given for the production mode A, but since the production modes B to F are basically the same, the explanation will be omitted.

Note that the timings T0 to T5 in FIG. 97 are basically the same as the timings T0 to T5 in FIG. 92, so the description is omitted here, and the timing after T6 will be described.

First, at the timing of T6 in FIG. 97, when the output of the SPSP ready-to-win BGM is stopped in the final stage of the SPSP ready-to-win effect and the determined effect is started, the promotion image prompting the operation of the effect button 17 and the effective period of the effect button 17 are displayed. is started. Specifically, the main display device 70 displays an operation prompting image SSG imitating the effect button 17, the output of the SPSP reach BGM is stopped (no output), and the voice output device 9 prompts "press". A sound is output (see FIG. 98(e)).

Next, at the timing of T7 in FIG. 97, when the effect button 17 is operated or the effective period elapses, a determined success effect suggesting that a jackpot game is executed is executed. Specifically, the first movable member 73a and the second movable member 73b descend (largely descend) to the performance position, and the second movable member 73b moves in the left-right direction. In addition, the success image SEF is displayed on the main display device 70, and the success sound "Quin kyuin" is output from the voice output device 9. FIG. In addition, by temporarily stopping the central production pattern 70a at the upper left corner of the screen, the three production patterns 70a are temporarily stopped at the big hit ("555") (Fig. 98 (f )reference).

Then, at the timing of T8 in FIG. 97, when the execution period of the SPSP ready-to-win effect has passed, the first stop suggestion effect (for example, 0.5 seconds) is executed to suggest that the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed. Specifically, a shielding image (an eye-catching image including the model name) that shields the background image, the production pattern 70a, and the like is displayed. Then, when the first stop suggestion effect is completed, the horizontal scrolling of the mode A background image is resumed, and the effect pattern 70a is returned to the position before the start of the SP ready-to-win effect and the first mode, and is temporarily stopped and displayed. Become. Also, the first pending icon display area 70B is redisplayed together with the pending icon HI (see FIG. 98(g)).

In addition, the second stop suggestion effect is started, which suggests that the effect symbol 70a is stop-displayed when the jackpot comes out. Specifically, the luminous display effect, in which the luminous effect image EF moves from one end to the other end of the effect pattern 70a and disappears, is repeated twice at a predetermined cycle (for example, 0.75 seconds). At this time, the sound is not output from the sound output device 9 for a predetermined period (for example, until the stop display of the effect symbol 70a) (see FIG. 98(g)).

After that, at the timing of T9 in FIG. 97, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has passed, a stop time command (symbol determination command) is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130. FIG. Also, the jackpot special symbol is stop-displayed on the first special symbol display 60 (see FIG. 99(h)).

Next, at the timing of T10 in FIG. 97, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the performance control board 130 received the command at the time of stop, the variable display on the sub-first variable display 81 stops. Further, along with the end of the second stop suggestion effect, disappearance display of the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C by animation is started. ”) is started (see FIG. 99(i)).

Then, at the timing of T11 in FIG. 97, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the disappearing display of the icon TI in animation, the disappearing display of the icon TI in animation ends (see FIG. 99(j)).

After that, at the timing of T12 in FIG. 97, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the main control board 110 transmits a jackpot game opening designation command to the effect control board 130 (see FIG. 99(k)).

Next, at the timing of T13 in FIG. 97, after the performance control board 130 receives the command for specifying the opening of the jackpot game, the opening performance of the jackpot game is started when a predetermined period elapses. Specifically, an opening effect screen including characters "big hit" is displayed, and the right corner of the screen suggests that a game ball should be shot aiming at the right side area (big prize winning opening) of the game area 5a. A right hitting image UG is displayed.

In this way, in the variation performance of the big win, the display of the pending icon HI (suspended icon in the normal display mode, pending icon in the special display mode) is maintained when the SP ready-to-win performance is not executed after the execution of the SP ready-to-win performance. On the other hand, it is hidden when the SPSP ready-to-win production is executed, but the display of the special symbol TZ is maintained regardless of whether or not the SPSP ready-to-win production is executed after the SP ready-to-win production is executed. there is Therefore, it is possible to let the player know that the variable display is being performed, thereby making it possible to enhance the amusement of the game. It should be noted that, in the variation effect that becomes a big hit, even if the SP reach effect does not develop after the normal reach effect, the display of the hold icon HI (normal display mode hold icon, special display mode hold icon) is maintained. there is

In addition, when the SPSP ready-to-win performance for a big hit ends, a second stop suggestion performance (light-emitting display performance in which the light-emitting effect image EF moves from one end to the other end of the performance pattern 70a and disappears) is executed. Therefore, it is possible for the player to understand that the SPSP ready-to-win effect will end and that the big win effect pattern 70a will be stop-displayed, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, the effect time (0.75 seconds) for one time of the light emitting display effect in the second stop suggestion effect and the cumulative effect time (1.5 seconds) are the period ( 2 seconds or 3 seconds). Therefore, it is possible to make the light-emitting display effect in the second stop suggestion effect stand out, and to emphasize that the big win effect symbol is stopped and displayed.

In addition, the effect mode of the light emitting display effect in the second stop suggesting effect is such that the light emitting effect image EF moves from one end to the other end of the effect pattern 70a and disappears. The luminous effect image EF may move from one end to the other end and disappear, or the luminous effect image EF may move from one end to the other end of the character image and disappear.

In addition, although the cumulative effect time of the light emitting display effect in the second stop suggestion effect is shorter than the period (2 seconds or 3 seconds) of the effect operation of the pending icon, the effect time of one light emitting display effect is, for example, By setting the duration to 2 seconds, the cumulative effect time may be longer than the period (2 seconds or 3 seconds) of the effect operation of the hold icon HI.

In addition, in the case of the normal variation performance in which various ready-to-win performances are not executed and three performance symbols are stop-displayed with a losing roll, the light-emitting display performance as the second stop-suggestion performance is not executed. However, every time the three left, middle, and right performance symbols are temporarily stopped in order, a light-emitting effect image different from the second stop suggesting performance is superimposed on the temporarily stopped performance design 70a (for example, a part of the performance design 70a A light-emitting image) may be displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 0.3 seconds), and the light-emitting display effect at the time of temporary stop may be sequentially executed. By doing so, it is possible to improve the performance effect at the time when the performance pattern is temporarily stopped, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, instead of sequentially executing the temporary stop lighting effect in the normal game state and the specific game state (time reduction game state, variable probability game state), it is possible to sequentially execute the temporary stop light emission effect in the normal game state. In the game state (at least one of the time-saving game state and the variable probability game state), the temporary stop lighting effect may not be executed sequentially.

In addition, in the case of a shortened variable performance in which various ready-to-win performances are not executed and three performance symbols are stop-displayed with a losing roll, the light-emitting display performance as the second stop suggestion performance is not executed. However, when the three left, middle, and right performance symbols are temporarily stopped at the same time, a light-emitting effect image (for example, the performance symbol 70a ) may be displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 0.3 seconds) to execute the simultaneous temporary stop light emission display effect. By doing so, it is possible to improve the performance effect at the time when the performance pattern is temporarily stopped, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, instead of executing the simultaneous temporary stop light-emitting effect in the normal game state and the specific game state (time-saving game state, variable probability game state), in the normal game state, the simultaneous temporary stop light-emitting effect can be executed and specified In the game state (at least one of the time-saving game state and the variable probability game state), the simultaneous temporary stop lighting effect may not be executed.

In addition, in the case of the ready-to-win variation performance in which various ready-to-win performances are executed and the three performance symbols 70a are stop-displayed when the ready-to-win is lost, the light-emitting display performance as the second stop suggestion performance is not executed. However, when the central production pattern 70a that is stopped and displayed last is temporarily stopped, a second stop suggestion production is superimposed on this production pattern 70a (excluding the left and right production patterns 70a that were temporarily stopped earlier). A light-emitting effect image (for example, an image in which a part of the effect pattern 70a emits white light) may be displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 0.3 seconds) to execute the light-emitting display effect at the time of reach failure. By doing so, it is possible to let the player know that the game is reach-losing, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, instead of executing the light-emitting display effect at the time of reach loss in the normal game state and the specific game state (time-saving game state, variable probability game state), it is possible to execute the light-emission display effect at the time of reach loss in the normal game state, and the specific game state. In (at least one of the time-saving gaming state and the variable probability gaming state), the light-emitting display effect at the time of reach loss may not be executed.

Also, when the left and right production patterns 70a are temporarily stopped and the normal ready-to-win production is executed, the left and right production patterns 70a (excluding the center production pattern 70a during fluctuation) are surrounded by a second stop suggestion production. A light emitting effect image (for example, an image that emits white light so as to block at least a part of the production pattern 70a and regulate visual recognition) is displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 1.2 seconds) to perform light emitting display when ready-to-win is established. You may make it perform production|presentation. In this way, it is possible to increase the number of executions of the light emission display effect in the variable effect pattern in which the ready-to-win effect is executed, compared to the variable effect pattern in which the ready-to-win effect is not executed, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game. .

In addition, instead of executing the light-emitting display effect when the reach is established in the normal game state and the specific game state (time-saving game state, variable probability game state), in the normal game state, it is possible to execute the light-emitting display effect when the reach is established. In the game state (at least one of the time-saving game state and the variable probability game state), the light-emitting display effect may not be executed when the ready-to-win state is established.

Also, when the left and right two production patterns 70a move to the upper part of the screen of the main display device 70 and develop into the SP reach production, the surroundings of the left and right production patterns 70a (excluding the central production pattern 70a during fluctuation) Then, a light-emitting effect image different from the second stop suggesting effect (for example, an image in which the inside of the number of the effect pattern 70a is lit up) is displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 0.4 seconds) to perform a light-emitting display effect at the time of development. may be executed. In this way, the number of executions of the light emitting display effect can be increased in the variable effect pattern in which the SP ready-to-win effect is executed, compared to the variable effect pattern in which the SP ready-to-win effect is not executed, and the amusement of the game can be improved. becomes.

In addition, instead of executing the light emission display effect during development in the normal game state and the specific game state (time reduction game state, variable probability game state), it is possible to execute the light emission display effect during development in the normal game state, and the specific game state In (at least one of the time-saving gaming state and the variable probability gaming state), the light-emitting display effect during development may not be executed.

Also, even when the light emission display effect during development is executed, the three effect patterns 70a on the left, middle and right are reduced and displayed in the upper left corner of the screen of the main display device 70, and the SPSP ready-to-win effect is executed. In this case, the light emission display effect may not be executed for these three effect symbols 70a. By doing so, it is possible to avoid unnecessary execution of the light emitting display effect for the effect pattern 70a which is reduced and displayed so as to be difficult for the player to visually recognize, and it is possible to reduce the control load related to the image display.

Also, at the timing of T7 in FIG. 97, after the three production symbols 70a are temporarily stopped in the upper left corner of the screen with a big hit (while the pending icon before the second stop suggestion production is executed is in a non-display state). Alternatively, it may be moved to the center of the screen and displayed in normal size. In this case, a luminous effect image different from the second stop-suggesting effect (for example, a yellow luminous effect image spreading outward from the central effect pattern corresponding to the three effect symbols 70a moved to the center of the screen) ) may be displayed for a predetermined period of time (for example, 1.2 seconds) to execute the pre-stop-suggestion light-emitting display effect. By doing so, it is possible to appeal to the player that the production pattern has resulted in a big win, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, when displaying the light-emitting effect image in the pre-stop-suggesting light-emitting display effect, the frame lighting device 10 may be caused to emit light in the light-emitting display mode before the stop-suggestion (for example, the same color as the display color of the light-emitting effect image). good.

In addition, when the normal variation effect or the shortened variation effect in which the second stop suggestion effect (luminescence display effect) is not executed is executed, the light emission display effect before the stop suggestion after the three effect symbols 70a temporarily stop due to the losing result. should not be executed. In this way, the number of executions of the light emitting display effect and the type of the light emitting display effect to be executed are changed according to the variable effect pattern, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, even when the reach variation effect (normal reach variation effect, SP reach change effect, SPSP reach change effect) is executed without the second stop suggestion effect (light emitting display effect), the three effect symbols 70a are the losing numbers. It is preferable not to execute the light-emitting display effect before the stop suggestion after temporarily stopping at . In this way, the number of executions of light emission display effects and the type of light emission display effects to be executed are changed depending on whether or not a big hit is achieved, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, even if it is a variable effect in which the second stop suggesting effect (luminous display effect) is executed, in the case of the SP reach variable effect, the light emitting display effect before the stop suggestion is not executed, and in the case of the SPSP reach variable effect. may execute a light-emitting display effect before suggesting a stop.

Also, depending on the game state, the luminous display effect before suggesting stop is not executed (for example, while the luminous display effect before suggesting stop is executed in the normal game state, the luminous display effect before suggesting stop is not executed in the specific game state). Good, the second stop suggesting effect (light emitting display effect) is not executed depending on the game state (while the second stop suggesting effect is executed in the normal game state, the second stop suggesting effect is not executed in the specific game state). good too.

Also, if the light emitting display effect before suggesting stop can be executed regardless of the game state, the light emitting display effect before suggesting stop in the normal game state and the stop in the specific game state (at least one of the time saving game state and the variable probability game state) The execution time of the pre-suggestion light emission effect may be varied (for example, the execution time of the light emission display effect before the suggestion of stop in the normal game state>the execution time of the light emission display effect before the stop suggestion in the specific game state, etc.). In this way, the time from the stop-suggestion-before light-emitting display effect to the start of the big win changes depending on the game state, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, when the second stop suggestion effect (luminous display effect) can be executed regardless of the game state, the second stop suggestion effect (luminous display effect) in the normal game state and the specific game state (time reduction game state, probability variable (at least one of the game states), the execution time of the second stop suggestion effect (luminescence display effect) may be varied (for example, the execution time of the second stop suggestion effect in the normal game state > the second stop suggestion effect in the specific game state) performance time, etc.). In this way, the time from the second stop suggestion effect (light emitting display effect) to the start of the big win changes depending on the game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, although the hold icon HI is redisplayed after the SPSP ready-to-win effect is completed, the hold icon HI may not be re-displayed depending on the type of SPSP ready-to-win effect. Specifically, when the first SPSP ready-to-win performance is executed or the second SPSP ready-to-win performance that results in a loss is executed, the holding icon HI is re-displayed after the first stop suggesting performance is executed, and a big win is achieved. When the second SPSP ready-to-win performance is executed, the opening performance of the jackpot game is executed as it is without executing the first stop suggestion performance (display of the eye-catching image) or the redisplay of the holding icon HI. may

In addition, the pending icon HI is redisplayed after the end of the SPSP ready-to-win effect. The hold icon HI may be hidden again. In this case, after execution of the resurrection effect, the effect pattern 70a of the big win is temporarily stopped, and the pending icon may be displayed again, or after the resurrection effect is executed, the effect pattern 70a of the big win is displayed or suspended. The opening effect of the jackpot game may be executed as it is without redisplaying the icon HI.

In addition, when the stop time command can be normally received during the temporary stop of the production pattern 70a, the temporary stop time of the production pattern 70a in the reach-losing fluctuation production is longer than the temporary stop time of the production pattern 70a in the big hit fluctuation production. However, when the command at the time of stop cannot be normally received in the big hit fluctuation production, the temporary stop time of the production pattern 70a in the big hit fluctuation production is longer than the temporary stop time of the production pattern 70a in the reach loss fluctuation production. It is designed to be longer. In addition, when the stop time command and the opening designation command cannot be normally received in the big hit fluctuation production, the temporary stop time of the production pattern 70a in the big hit fluctuation production is longer than the temporary stop time of the production pattern 70a in the reach loss fluctuation production. It's getting longer.

In addition, in FIGS. 97(g) to (h), the "symbol promotion effect" may be executed. The "symbol promotion effect" means that, for example, at timing T7 in FIG. 97, a effect symbol (for example, "444") indicating the first jackpot is displayed, and then the second jackpot is indicated. It is a production that changes to a production pattern (for example, "777") to be displayed.
Specifically, the production pattern (for example, "444") is scrolled vertically, and the production pattern (for example, "777") is displayed according to the operation of the production button 17.例文帳に追加Then, the effect is finished by the timing T9 in FIG. 97, and the effect symbol (for example, "777") is stopped and displayed at the timing T10 in FIG.

The "symbol promotion effect" is not limited to the above example, and the effect pattern (for example, "555") that suggests the third jackpot to the second jackpot (for example, "777") ), or a pattern that suggests the first jackpot (for example, "444") to a pattern that suggests the third jackpot (for example, "555"). There may be a pattern that changes to display.

In addition, it may be determined that a plurality of types of promotion patterns are provided, and that when the "symbol promotion effect" is executed in a specific promotion pattern, the change display to the effect symbol (for example, "777") is performed.
Further, the execution timing of the "symbol promotion effect" is not limited to FIGS. 97(g) to (h), and there may be another execution timing. For example, it may be executed during a jackpot game.

(Modified example when the jackpot SPSP reach fluctuation effect is completed and the jackpot game is executed)
FIG. 100 shows a modified example of FIGS. 97 and 99, and a particular difference is that after hiding the icon TI and the hold icon HI at the time of development, they are not displayed again after that, and the jackpot game is started. This is the point of transition.

Specifically, as described with reference to FIG. 96, the icon TI and the pending icon HI are hidden during development (see FIG. 100(b)). That is, at timing T2 in FIG. 97, the icon TI and the pending icon HI are hidden.

Then, the icon TI and the pending icon HI as shown in FIGS. 99(h) to (j) are not displayed again, and the icon TI disappears by animation, and the opening of the jackpot game is started. (See FIGS. 100(k) and 100(l)).

By configuring in this manner, control for redisplaying the icon TI and the pending icon HI and control for disappearing and displaying the icon TI by animation are not required, so a reduction in the control load can be expected.

In addition, the time for redisplaying the icon TI and the pending icon HI and the time for disappearing and displaying the icon TI by animation can be omitted, and the transition to the jackpot game can be made quickly. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

100 may be provided together with the aspect shown in FIG. 99, only FIG. 100 may be provided, or only FIG. 99 may be provided.

Further, when the mode shown in the modified example of FIG. 100 is provided together with the mode shown in FIG. 99, it may be used depending on the game state. For example, in the normal game state, the mode shown in FIG. 99 may be the mode shown in FIG. 100 in the variable probability game state, or vice versa.

(Specific example of light emission mode of starter lamp)
A specific example of the lighting mode of the starting port lamp 76 will be described with reference to FIG. 101 . Although FIG. 101 shows the light emission mode of the starter lamp 76 in the example of FIG. 100, the application example is not limited to this, and may be applied to the example of FIG. 89 or the example of FIG. may be applied to the example of FIG. 96, or may be applied to the example of FIG.

FIG. 101(a) shows the lighting mode of the starter lamp 76 in the scene of FIG. Red” indicates that it is emitting light.

FIG. 101(b) shows the lighting mode of the starter lamp 76 in the scene of FIG. 100(b). Lamp 76 continues to visibly glow "red".

FIG. 101(c) shows the lighting mode of the starter lamp 76 in the scene of FIG. 100(c). It shows that it still emits light in "red" so that it can be visually recognized.

FIG. 101(k) shows the lighting mode of the starting lamp 76 in the scene of FIG. showing.

With such a configuration, even if the icon TI or the like is not displayed, it is possible to confirm what color the icon TI or the like has changed by visually observing the lighting mode of the starter lamp 76. It is possible to prevent the user from forgetting what color the icon TI or the like has changed.

(Specific example of recovering from a power outage that occurred during a variable performance)
102 to 105, a specific example of recovering from a power failure that occurred during the variable presentation will be described.

FIG. 102 is a timing chart in the case of recovering from power failure that occurred during the variable effect, and FIGS. 103 to 105 are diagrams showing examples of effects at various timings in FIG. Here, the explanation will be given for the production mode A, but since the production modes B to F are basically the same, the explanation will be omitted.

First, at the timing of T0 in FIG. 102, the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 60 and the variable display on the sub-first variable display 81 ( Blinking: (represented by ◎ in the figure) is being executed. At this time, the first special symbol reservation display 63, the first reservation number display area SA and the first sub-reservation display 83 are displayed as "2". In addition, in front of the mode A background image during horizontal scrolling, three effect symbols 70a are scrolled (updated), and the special symbol TZ is updated (scrolled, switched). Also, in the first pending icon display area 70B, the pending icon HI in the normal display mode (white) and the pending icon HI in the special display mode (blue) are displayed. Further, the icon TI in the normal display mode is displayed in the icon display area 70C, and the fluctuating BGM is audibly output (see FIG. 103(a)).

Next, at the timing of T1 in FIG. 102, when the power supply to the game machine 1 is interrupted, the main control board 110 performs the process at the time of power interruption, and the first special symbol display 60 and the like are displayed. The main information display 59 including, the sub information display 80 including the first sub-variation display, etc., the main display device 70, the sub display device 71, etc. are in a non-display state, and the game sound output from the audio output device 9 ( variable BGM, etc.) are also in a non-output state (see FIG. 103(b)).

Then, at the timing of T2 in FIG. 102, when the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is resumed, a reading screen (initial screen) including characters "NOW LOADING" is displayed on the main display device 70 and the sub display device 71. From the main control board 110 in which the control state of the game has been restored to the state before the occurrence of the power interruption to the effect control board 130, a power ON command (here, the second power supply indicating that the special symbol is being displayed fluctuating) A recovery designation command, a first special symbol memory designation command, and a second special symbol memory designation command) are transmitted. In addition, the information display on the main information display 59 is resumed, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 60 is resumed from the state before the power was cut off, and the first special symbol reservation display is resumed. The first pending number "2" display at 63 is also resumed (see FIG. 103(c)).

After that, at the timing of T3 in FIG. 102, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the effect control board 130 received the power-on command, the above-described power restoration notification and various accessories (board accessories, frame accessories) are initialized. As the operation (including the return operation) is started, information display on the sub-information display 80 is started (see FIG. 103(d)).

At this time, in the main display device 70 during the power recovery notification, the power recovery image displayed on the entire screen is set as the highest layer, and various effect images (background image according to the effect mode at the time of power recovery, The effect pattern 70a and special pattern TZ, which are the initial results, the number of reservations at the time of power restoration and the reservation icon HI according to the production mode, the number of reservations according to the number of reservations at the time of power restoration, etc.) are lower than the power restoration image. Image data for power restoration notification set in the layer is generated and displayed. At this time, the visual recognition of various effect images is restricted by the power restoration image, but the background image and the pending icon are in a state of effect operation, and the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed at the symbol stop position. Become. In addition, even if the hold icon HI is in the special display mode before the power failure occurs, it is set to the normal display mode (white icon), and the icon TI is not displayed even if it was displayed before the power failure. (see FIG. 103(d)).

In addition, in the sub information display 80 during the power restoration notification, the sub first variable display 81 and the sub second variable display 82 are in a state of stopped display without variable display, and the sub first holding display 83 and the sub The second pending display 84 displays the pending number (see FIG. 103(d)).

Next, at the timing of T4 in FIG. 102 (during the power restoration notification), when the game ball wins the first starting port 45, the first reservation number becomes "3" and the first special symbol reservation display 63 is displayed as "3", and a winning command (first special symbol storage designation command, first look-ahead designation command) is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130 (see FIG. 104(e)).

Then, at the timing of T5 in FIG. 102, when a predetermined period of time has passed since the effect control board 130 received the command at the time of winning, the first reservation number display area SA and the sub-first reservation display 83 are displayed as "3". Become. In addition, additional display of the suspension icon HI (white icon) in the normal display mode on the third display portion of the first suspension icon display area 70B by animation is started, but it is visually recognized by the power restoration image set in the upper layer. is regulated (see FIG. 104(f)).

After that, at the timing of T6 in FIG. 102, after the additional display of the animation of the pending icon HI is completed, when the special symbol fluctuation time elapses, the main control board 110 sends a stop time command (symbol) to the effect control board 130. confirmation command) is sent. In addition, a losing special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 60 (see FIG. 104(g)).

Next, at the timing of T7 in FIG. 102, after a predetermined period of time has passed since the effect control board 130 received the stop command, the power restoration notification ends, and various effect images whose visual recognition has been restricted by the power restoration image. (Background image according to the production mode at the time of power restoration, production pattern 70a and special pattern TZ that are the initial results at the time of power restoration, pending icon HI according to the current number of reservations and production mode, depending on the current number of reservations reserved numbers, etc.) become visible (see FIG. 105(h)).

Then, at the timing of T8 in FIG. 102, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the first reserved number becomes "2" from "3" and a big hit determination is performed, and the main control board 110 transfers to the effect control board 130. In response, a start command (special symbol storage designation command, game state designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command) is transmitted. In addition, the first special symbol holding display 63 becomes "2" display, and the first special symbol variation display (first cycle variation) on the first special symbol display 60 is started (Fig. 105 (i )reference).

After that, at the timing of T9 in FIG. 102 (during the first cycle fluctuation), when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the effect control board 130 received the command at the start, the first pending number display area SA and the sub-first pending display The device 83 becomes "2" display, and the variable display (blinking: represented by ⊚ in the figure) on the first sub-variable display 81 is started (see FIG. 105(j)).

Also, the three pending icons HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B start shift display (decrease display) toward the icon display area 70C. Further, the variable effect is started, the effect pattern 70a starts floating display as a pre-variation operation, the special pattern TZ starts the update fluctuation (scroll display, switching display), and the audible output of the variable BGM is started. (See FIG. 105(j)).

Then, at timing T10 in FIG. 102 (during the fourth cycle change), when the shift display of the pending icons HI ends, the first one is displayed as the icon TI (white icon). Further, the scroll display (update change) of the production pattern 70a is started (see FIG. 105(k)).

It should be noted that, when the production mode D (probability variation gaming state) is controlled at the time of power restoration and when the production mode F is controlled, the display mode of the production pattern 70a will be displayed in the fourth mode, but the production The number image of the pattern 70a becomes the initial production pattern "753" common to the case where the production mode A (normal game state) is controlled at the time of power restoration. In addition, when it is controlled to production mode D (probability variable gaming state) at the time of power restoration, the initial production pattern is set to "246" etc. so that it can be distinguished from the case where it is controlled to production mode A (normal game state) at the time of power restoration. can be

In addition, when the power supply is restarted after the power supply is stopped during the customer waiting state and the control state of the game is restored, a customer waiting state designation command is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130. Therefore, the production control board 130 receives the customer waiting state designation command while the reading screen (initial screen) is being displayed, and is waiting for the execution of the variable production without notifying the power restoration (production pattern 70a) is displayed.

In addition, when the power supply is restarted after the power supply is stopped during the jackpot game and the control state of the game is restored, it takes time until the next round designation command or ending designation command is output from the main control board 110. Therefore, after the loading screen (initial screen) is displayed, the power restoration notification is performed, and then the effect screen corresponding to the command is displayed.

Thus, when the power supply stopped during the variable display of the special symbols is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the power restoration image displayed in the entire display area of the main display device 70 is set in the upper layer. By generating image data in which the suspended icon displayed in the icon display area of the main display device 70 is set as a lower layer and displayed on the main display device 70, the suspended icon in the lower layer is restricted from being viewed. ing. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused after the power is restored. In addition, since the same display control as when the power recovery image is not displayed can be performed, it is possible to reduce control data and control load related to display control.

In addition, even if the visual recognition of the pending icon is restricted by the power restoration image, when a special symbol storage designation command indicating that the number of pending has increased is received, according to the increase Image data including a pending icon is generated. Therefore, the same display control as when the power restoration image is not displayed can be performed, so it is possible to reduce control data and control load related to display control.

Further, even when the visual recognition of the pending icon is restricted by the power restoration image, the pending icon and the background image perform the effect operation. Therefore, the same display control as when the power restoration image is not displayed can be performed, so it is possible to reduce control data and control load related to display control.

Also, even if the visibility of the hold icon is restricted by the power restoration image, if the number of holds increases, the hold icon will be additionally displayed (increased display) by animation. there is Therefore, the same display control as when the power restoration image is not displayed can be performed, so it is possible to reduce control data and control load related to display control.

In addition, when the power supply is restored, the display mode of the production pattern 70a is different between the case of being controlled to the first production mode (production mode A) and the case of being controlled to the second production mode (production modes D, F). However, the numerical image of the effect pattern 70a is designed to be common numerical information ("753"). Therefore, even if the display mode of the performance pattern differs depending on the performance mode after the power supply is restored, it is possible to easily grasp that the power supply is restored.

Also, in the first reservation display area (first special symbol reservation display 63, second special design reservation display 64) and second reservation display area (sub first reservation display 83, sub second reservation display 84) , a third reserved display area (a reserved display area of the main display device 70) in which the reserved display is easier to visually recognize than the first reserved display area and the second reserved display area, although the display mode of the reserved display is not changed based on the result of prefetching. , it is possible to change the display mode of the pending display (holding icon HI) based on the result of prefetching. , than the restart timing of the suspension display (visible display of the suspension icon HI) in the third suspension display area (suspension display area of the main display device 70), the first suspension display area (first special symbol suspension display 63 , second special symbol reservation display 64) and the second reservation display area (sub first reservation display 83, sub second reservation display 84). Therefore, it is possible for the player to grasp the number of pending games at an early timing while notifying that the power supply is being restored. Note that the timing of resuming the suspended display in the first suspended display area may be earlier than the timing of resuming the suspended display in the second suspended display area.

Further, the hold icon HI, which was displayed in the special display mode before the power failure occurred, is displayed in the normal display mode after the power is restored. Therefore, there is no need to back up and store information indicating that the pending icon was in the special display mode in the effect control board 130, and it is possible to avoid the hardware configuration of the effect control board 130 from becoming complicated. .

In addition, after the power supply is restored, the holding icon is visibly displayed after the variable display (blinking due to movement lighting of the LED) is resumed on the first special symbol display device 60 (second special symbol display device 61). It's like Therefore, it becomes easier for the player to grasp the progress of the game, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Also, after the power restoration image is displayed, the initial actions (including the return actions) of various roles (movable effect device 73, sub-display device 71, effect button 17) perform effect actions at different timings for each role. It is designed to be executed in a manner similar to the case. Therefore, it is possible to let the player know that the initial action of various accessories has been executed due to the occurrence of the power restoration, thereby avoiding the inconvenience of misleading the player into thinking that it is a performance action.

Note that the first sub-variation display 81 and the second sub-variation display 82 do not perform variable display during the power restoration notification and are in a stopped display state, but during the power restoration notification ( After receiving the second power supply restoration designation command indicating that the special symbols are being variably displayed), the variable display may be performed, and the stop display may be performed when the stop command (symbol determination command) is received.

(Concrete example when the command at the start could not be received normally during the look-ahead effect)
106 to 108, a specific example of the case where the command at start cannot be normally received during the look-ahead effect will be described.

FIG. 106 is a timing chart when the command at the start cannot be normally received during the look-ahead effect, and FIGS. 107 and 108 are diagrams showing examples of effects at various timings in FIG. Here, the explanation will be given for the production mode A, but since the production modes B to F are basically the same, the explanation will be omitted.

First, at the timing of T0 in FIG. 106, the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 60 and the variable display on the sub-first variable display 81 ( Blinking: (represented by ◎ in the figure) is being executed. At this time, the first special symbol reservation display 63, the first reservation number display area SA and the first sub-reservation display 83 are displayed as "2". In addition, the three performance symbols 70a and the three special symbols TZ are updated and fluctuated (scrolling display, switching display) in front of the mode A background image during horizontal scrolling. Also, in the first pending icon display area 70B, the pending icon HI in the normal display mode (white) and the pending icon HI in the special display mode (blue) are displayed. Further, the icon TI in the normal display mode is displayed in the icon display area 70C, and the fluctuating BGM is audibly output (see FIG. 107(a)).

Next, at the timing of T1 in FIG. 106, when the look-ahead zone effect is started, the above-described in-zone effect is executed. Specifically, instead of the mode A background image, the look-ahead zone background image is displayed in a horizontally scrolled state, and the zone image ZG including the character image "ZONE" is displayed. Also, the volume of the fluctuating BGM is lowered and the output of the zone BGM is started (see FIG. 107(b)).

Then, at the timing of T2 in FIG. 106, when the center effect pattern 70a that has been scrolled (updated and changed) is temporarily stopped, the output of a temporary stop sound is started from the voice output device 9, and the character of the center effect pattern 70a performs the performance operation (pre-stop motion of shaking the head), and all the performance symbols 70a are temporarily stopped (see FIG. 107(c)).

After that, at the timing of T3 in FIG. 106, when a predetermined period elapses from the start of the output of the temporary stop sound, the output of the temporary stop sound stops, and when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130 A stop time command (symbol confirmation command) is transmitted to. Also, the losing special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 60 (see FIG. 107(d)).

Next, at the timing of T4 in FIG. 106, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the effect control board 130 received the stop command, the variable display on the sub-first variable display 81 stops. Also, disappearance display of the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C by animation is started, and stop display of the effect symbol 70a ("523") and the special symbol TZ ("523") is started ( See FIG. 107(e)).

Then, at timing T5 in FIG. 106, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the disappearing display of the icon TI in animation, the disappearing display of the icon TI in animation ends (see FIG. 107(f)).

After that, at the timing of T6 in FIG. 106, when the stop time of the special symbol has passed, the first reservation number changes from "2" to "1" and a big hit is determined, and the main control board 110 transfers to the effect control board 130. In response, a start command (special symbol storage designation command, game state designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command) is transmitted. In addition, the first special symbol reservation display 63 becomes "1" display, and the first special symbol variation display (first cycle variation) on the first special symbol display 60 is started (Fig. 108 (g )reference).

However, since the effect control board 130 could not normally receive the command at the start, the pending display should be updated at the timing of T7 in FIG. Update, shift display of hold icon HI) and variable effects should be executed, but they are not executed. Therefore, the stop display period of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ is extended, and the look-ahead effect performance that should be executed over two times of the variation performance from the current variation performance is not started. However, the horizontal scrolling of the look-ahead zone background image and the effect operation of the pending icon HI are continued even during the extended period of the stop display period of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ. (See FIG. 108(h)).

Then, at the timing of T8 in FIG. 106, when the special symbol fluctuation time elapses, a stop command (symbol confirmation command) is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130. FIG. Also, the losing special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 60 (see FIG. 108(i)).

However, when a predetermined period of time elapses after the effect control board 130 receives the stop command, the disappearance display of the icon TI and the stop display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ should be executed. will not be executed.

After that, at the timing of T9 in FIG. 106, when the stop time of the special symbol has passed, the first reservation number changes from "1" to "0" and a big hit determination is performed, and the main control board 110 transfers to the effect control board 130. In response, a start command (special symbol storage designation command, game state designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command) is transmitted. In addition, the first special symbol holding display 63 becomes "0" display, and the first special symbol variation display (first cycle variation) on the first special symbol display 60 is started (Fig. 108 (j )reference).

Next, at the timing of T10 in FIG. 106 (during the first cycle fluctuation), when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the effect control board 130 received the command at the start, the first pending number display area SA and the sub-first pending The display 83 becomes "0", and the first sub-variation display 81 starts to display the variation (blinking: represented by ⊚ in the figure) (see FIG. 108(k)).

Further, of the two pending icons HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B, the pending icon HI (white icon) corresponding to the previous variable display of the special symbol is erased without animation, and the second pending icon HI is erased. The pending icon HI (blue icon) corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol this time displayed on the display section is displayed in non-animation on the first display section. Then, the hold icon HI displayed on the first display portion starts shift display (decrease display) to the icon display area 70C. Further, the variable effect is started and the effect symbol 70a starts floating display as a pre-variation operation, and the special symbol TZ starts update variation (scroll display, switching display) (see FIG. 108(k)).

Then, at the timing of T11 in FIG. 106 (during the second cycle variation), when a predetermined period of time has passed since the start of the floating display of the performance pattern 70a, the look-ahead effect to be executed over the two-time variation performance from the previous variation performance The effect is started with a delay of one time, and a blue light emission effect image EF is displayed around the effect pattern 70a (see FIG. 108(l)).

After that, at the timing of T12 in FIG. 106 (during the fourth cycle change), when the shift display of the pending icon HI is completed, it is displayed as the icon TI (white icon). At this time, an icon change effect at the time of start of variation is performed, the icon TI is displayed as a blue icon, and then scroll display (update variation) of the effect symbol 70a is started.

In this way, when the effect control board 130 cannot normally receive the command at the start, the variable effect is not executed during the variable display of the special symbols to be executed in the predetermined look-ahead effect (icon change effect, look-ahead zone effect). Even so, a predetermined look-ahead effect (icon change effect, look-ahead zone effect) is executed during the variable display of the special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of misunderstanding the progress of the game due to non-execution of the predetermined look-ahead effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, when the performance control board 130 cannot normally receive the command at the time of start and the variable performance is not executed during the variable display of the special symbols to start the predetermined look-ahead performance (read-ahead effect performance), the special symbols are displayed. The start of a predetermined look-ahead performance is regulated during variable display, and when the variable performance is executed during the variable display of the special symbols to be executed next, the look-ahead regulated during the variable display of the special symbols. The performance is about to start. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of misunderstanding the progress of the game due to non-execution of the predetermined look-ahead effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the effect control board 130 cannot normally receive the command at the start, the variable display of the special symbol is executed, but when the variable effect is not executed, the first look-ahead effect (icon change effect, look-ahead zone effect) is executed. However, the second look-ahead effect (look-ahead effect effect) is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of misunderstanding the progress of the game due to non-execution of the predetermined look-ahead effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, a variable BGM (suggestive effect sound) is output during the execution of the variable effect (suggestive effect) for suggesting the result of the big hit determination, and the target variable effect that is the target of the expectation degree suggestion by the look-ahead zone effect is executed. A zone BGM (advance performance sound) suggesting the possibility of execution of a special game is output from before, and the zone BGM is output even after the target variation performance is started, and when the zone BGM is being output. , the suggestive effect is output at a volume lower than that of the zone BGM. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the production effect of the look-ahead zone production, and to improve the amusement of the game.

It should be noted that while the look-ahead zone effect is being executed (while the zone BGM is being output), the volume of the variable BGM is reduced, but the audible output of the variable BGM is stopped (muted) during the execution of the look-ahead zone effect. can be

Also, even if the icon change effect executed over a plurality of times of the variable effect and the variable effect in which the look-ahead zone effect is started are not executed because the effect control board 130 cannot normally receive the command at the start, the effect will be executed next. The icon change effect or the look-ahead zone effect may be started from the variation effect to be performed.

In addition, although the look-ahead effect production is executed as a look-ahead production that intermittently suggests the degree of expectation that the special game will be executed, instead of the look-ahead effect production, each variable production (including a variation production that results in a big win) is executed. You may execute a look-ahead countdown effect that performs a countdown effect (display of a countdown image, output of a countdown sound), or a so-called chance number (556, 667, etc.) (Losing results with a certain rule that do not form a ready-to-win state) are temporarily stopped, and display of light-emitting effect images around the three production patterns 70a and output of effect sound are performed for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds). A look-ahead chance effect (light-emitting display effect when the chance eye is stopped) may be executed after the game is played, or these three look-ahead effects may be executed.

In addition, in the look-ahead chance number effect (light-emitting display effect when the chance number stops), instead of making the numbers with a certain rule such as "556" or "667", the numbers of the odd number symbols among the effect symbols are changed. The numbers of the even-numbered patterns are set to be red, and the numbers of the three production patterns 70a such as "135" and "357" are all red. 468" or the like, in which the numbers of the three production patterns 70a are all blue, may be temporarily stopped (stopped display). The degree of expectation for a big win may be higher when red symbols of the same color are temporarily stopped.

In addition, in the look-ahead chance eye effect (light emitting display effect when the chance eye is stopped), a light emitting effect image is displayed around the three effect symbols 70a at the timing when the three (three rows) left, middle and right effect symbols 70a temporarily stop. Instead of performing an effect of outputting an effect sound by causing the effect sound to be output, the effect of temporarily stopping each time the three (three rows) of the left, middle and right effect patterns 70a temporarily stop in order (for example, each time they bounce) By displaying an effect image around the pattern 70a and outputting a lighting effect sound (for example, every 0.5 seconds), the timing at which the three (three rows) of the left, middle, and right performance patterns 70a emit light. may be different.

In addition, in the normal game state, the look-ahead chance effect can be executed, while in the specific game state (at least one of the time-saving game state and the variable probability game state) in which the right-handed image is displayed, the look-ahead chance game effect is executed. You can choose not to.

Also, in the normal game state, the look-ahead chance eye production is not executed, while in the specific game state (at least one of the time-saving game state and the probability variable game state) in which the right-handed image is displayed, the look-ahead chance eye production is executed. can be

In addition, in the look-ahead chance effect, instead of displaying the light-emitting effect image around the three production patterns 70a, the light-emitting effect is displayed only around the production pattern 70a in one of the left, middle, and right columns (for example, the center row). An image may be displayed.

Also, when displaying the light-emitting effect image in the look-ahead chance effect, the frame lighting device 10 is set to the chance-light emitting mode (for example, the same color as the display color of the light-emitting effect image displayed around the temporarily stopped effect pattern 70a). ) to emit light.

(Concrete example when a power-on designation command is received while a menu image is being displayed)
A specific example of receiving a power-on designation command while a menu image is being displayed will be described with reference to FIGS.

FIG. 109 is a timing chart when a power-on designation command is received while the menu image is being displayed, and FIG. 110 is a diagram showing examples of effects at various timings in FIG. Here, the explanation will be given for the production mode A, but since the production modes B to F are basically the same, the explanation will be omitted.

First, at the timing of T0 in FIG. 109, it is in a customer waiting state in which the variable display of special symbols is not executed. At this time, the first special symbol display device 60 displays a failing special symbol, and the main display device 70 is horizontally scrolling the mode A background image (effect operation), the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ. is stop-displayed with the losing roll ("537") which is the stop result of the previous variable effect. Also, the audible output of the fluctuating BGM is in a state of being stopped (muted) (see FIG. 110(a)).

Next, when the effect button 17 is operated at the timing of T1 in FIG. 109, the effective period of the menu operation starts, and the main display device 70 displays a plurality of selection items (game "Model description" item that displays the explanation about machine 1, "Production customization" item for customizing the production in the variable production, "Pachi log" item for log management linked with the mobile phone) is displayed (see FIG. 110(b)).

Then, at timing T2 in FIG. Processing at the time of power cut-off is performed, and the main information display device 59 including the first special symbol display device 60 is put into a non-display state. At this time, the display states of the sub-information display device 80, the main display device 70, and the sub-display device 71 continue (see FIG. 110(c)).

After that, at the timing of T3 in FIG. 109, when the power supply to the main control board 110 is resumed, a checksum determination is made to determine whether or not the data in the game RWM area is damaged. A process for initializing the control state of the game is performed. Then, a power-on command (here, power-on designation command, first special symbol storage designation command, second special symbol storage designation command) is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130 . In addition, information display on the main information display device 59 (display of a lost special symbol on the first special symbol display device 60, etc.) is started (see FIG. 110(d)).

Next, at the timing of T4 in FIG. 109, after a predetermined period of time has passed since the effect control board 130 received the power ON command, the main display device 70 and the sub display device 71 include the characters "NOW ROADING". A loading screen (initial screen) is displayed, the information display on the sub-information display 80 is momentarily hidden, and the game sound (variable BGM, etc.) is not output from the audio output device 9 (FIG. 110(e)). reference).

Then, at the timing of T5 in FIG. 109, after a predetermined period of time has passed since the reading screen (initial screen) was displayed, the above-described power-on notification and the initial operation (return) of various accessories (board accessories, frame accessories) (including operation) is started, and information display on the sub-information display 80 is started (see FIG. 110(f)).

At this time, on the main display device 70, the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed in front of the mode A background image where the horizontal scrolling (effect operation) is started with the initial result ("135") when the power is turned on. , and "0" is displayed in the first pending number display area SA and the second pending number display area SB. Also, a power-on notification sound is output from the audio output device 9, and muted output is started at the beginning of the fluctuating BGM (see FIG. 110(f)).

Note that even when the power supply restoration designation command is received while the menu image MG is being displayed, the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ displayed on the main display device 70 are the initial numbers ("753") at the time of power supply restoration. Except for the fact that the power-on notification sound is not output, the operation is basically the same as when the power-on designation command is received.

Also, when the power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) is received while the volume value image OG is being displayed, the power-on command is basically received while the menu image MG is being displayed. The same as in the case of

Thus, the command received by the effect control board 130 from the main control board 110 while the menu image MG is being displayed on the main display device 70 is the power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command). In this case, the menu image is rendered invisible on the main display device 70, and an image (reading screen, etc.) corresponding to the power-on command is displayed. Therefore, cooperation between the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130 can be smoothly performed.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is possible to shoot the game ball by transmitting the launch permission designation command to the payout control board 120 in the pre-start state before the progress control of the game is started. By transmitting a launch permission designation command to the payout control board 120 when the progress control of is started, the game ball may be launched after the game becomes ready for play.

Further, in the present embodiment, the payout control board 120 can perform payout control even in the pre-start state before the progress control of the game is started. It is possible to pay out game balls (ball lending) based on the payout request from the machine, but after the game progress control is started and the game becomes playable, the game ball is issued based on the payout request from the ball lending machine. It may be possible to pay out (ball lending).

Further, in the present embodiment, since the backup power supply is not supplied to the payout control board 120 (payout RAM 120c), when the power to the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the payout control board 120 (payout RAM 120c) has an unpaid amount. Although the number of payout balls data does not remain, a backup power supply may be supplied to the payout control board 120 (payout RAM 120c). If the unpaid ball number data remains in the payout control board 120 (payout RAM 120c), the unpaid ball number data can be used even in the pre-start state before the progress control of the game is started. It may be possible to pay out game balls based on

Further, in this embodiment, the main information display 59 is provided outside the game area 5a, but the main information display 59 may be provided inside the game area 5a.

In addition, in the present embodiment, a prize ball (award value) is given based on the satisfaction of the award conditions (winning of the game ball to the winning opening, the starting opening, and the big winning opening). Balls may be managed as data, and winning ball data may be given (added to the held ball data).

Also, in the present embodiment, there is only one type of look-ahead zone effect, but a plurality of look-ahead zone effects with different degrees of expectation for big wins may be provided. In this case, when two look-ahead zone effects overlap during the variable effect, the zone image of one of the look-ahead zone effects is displayed on the upper and/or lower side of the screen so as to traverse the screen, and the image of the other look-ahead zone effect is displayed. It is preferable to display the zone image on the left and/or right side of the screen so as to traverse the screen. In this way, the two look-ahead zone effects can be made compatible, and the effect of the effect can be improved.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the blackout effect is executed as the jackpot announcement effect, but instead of the blackout effect, the whiteout effect in which the main display device 70 turns white may be executed. In this case, the basic flow of presentation should be the same as the blackout presentation.

Also, in the present embodiment, the normal game state and the specific game state (probability variable game state, time-saving game state) were basically the same execution mode of the variable production, for example, the previous stage production in the normal game state Later stage production (case of pre-reach production and reach production, case of normal reach production and SP reach production, case of SP reach production and SP reach production, case of pre-reach production and temporary stop of production pattern, reach production and production pattern 70a during the temporary stop, etc.), the first information (information suggesting the degree of expectation for a big win, information on the execution of a special game, etc.) advantageous to the player is notified during the execution of the latter stage performance of the variable performance. Second information different from the first information (additional information of songs selectable by operating the cross key 19, mission achievement status, etc.) etc.) may be notified. In addition, as a variable performance consisting of the front stage performance and the rear stage performance in the normal game state, the case where the common rear stage performance is executed after the first front stage performance is executed, and the case where the second front stage performance different from the first front stage performance is executed. A common post-stage effect may be executed, and information relating to the execution of the special game may be reported in the common post-stage effect executed when the special symbol is stopped and displayed.

(Timing chart when the jackpot game is executed after the jackpot SPSP reach fluctuation effect is completed)
With reference to FIG. 111, a timing chart when a big winning game is executed after the big winning SPSP reach variation effect is completed will be described. Note that FIG. 111 is a timing chart for explaining FIG. 97 in more detail, and particularly regarding the aspects of the "frame illumination device", the "board illumination device", the "button drive device", and the "effect button emission LED". 97 will be explained, and explanations of overlapping parts with FIG. 97 will be omitted as appropriate. Also, in order to facilitate understanding of FIG. 111, a supplementary explanation will be given using FIG.

In addition, FIG. 111 will be described as an example in which the jackpot SPSP reach fluctuation effect is executed in the "normal game state", and the jackpot game is executed after the jackpot SPSP reach fluctuation effect is completed, but not limited to this, The same thing may be done in the "time saving gaming state" and "probability variation gaming state".

The timing T4 in FIG. 111 corresponds to the timing T4 in FIG. 97, and is the timing developed into the SP ready-to-win effect.
When the SP reach effect develops, the frame illumination device 10 and the board illumination device 74 perform SP reach light emission, the button driving device 17b is OFF, and the effect button emission LED 17c is extinguished. In addition, when executing the effect pattern 03 (see FIG. 36) of the blackout effect, the button driving device 17b is turned ON for 3 seconds (the effect button 17 vibrates).

Timing T5 in FIG. 111 is the timing developed to the SPSP ready-to-win effect.
When the SPSP reach effect develops, the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 perform SPSP reach light emission, the button driving device 17b is turned off, and the effect button emission LED 17c is extinguished. Note that the button driving device 17b may be turned on when the cut-in notice is executed.

At timing T6 in FIG. 111, a prompting sound (for example, "press") is output as a sound effect to prompt the player to operate the effect button 17, and the effect button emission LED 17c emits white light.

Then, when the player operates the effect button 17 at the timing of T7, a success sound of "kyun kyuin" is output, and the frame illumination device 10, the board illumination device 74, and the effect button emission LED 17c emit rainbow light for a predetermined period. , the button driving device 17b is turned ON for 5 seconds, and the production button 17 vibrates. As a result, the player is notified of the big win (see FIG. 112(f)).

Then, at the timing of T8, the output of the success sound "kyun kyuin" is stopped, and the rainbow light emission of the production button light emission LED 17c ends. On the other hand, the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 continue to emit rainbow light, and the button driving device 17b continues to be ON. In this way, the rainbow light emission of the effect button light emission LED 17c ends first, so that the player's viewpoint can be directed to the main display device 70 (see FIG. 112(g)).

Then, the special symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing of T9, and when a predetermined period elapses after the performance control board 130 receives the stop command at the timing of T10, the variable display on the sub-first variable display 81 is stopped. . Further, the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 finish emitting rainbow light, and the button drive device 17b is turned off (see FIG. 112(i)).

In this way, the fact that a big win has been achieved is also reported by the lighting devices and the vibration of the performance buttons, so that the player's satisfaction with the fact that the big win has been obtained can be enhanced.

The period during which the success sound is output, the period during which the rainbow light is emitted, and the period during which the effect button 17 is vibrated may be changed as appropriate. For example, both may be executed until timing T10. Also, the rainbow light emission of the production button light emission LED is finished first, then the rainbow light emission of the frame lighting device 10 is finished, and finally the rainbow light emission of the board lighting device 74 is finished at timing T10. good too. Usually, the player pays attention to the main display device 70, and the rainbow emission of the board lighting device 74 close to the main display device 70 (compared to the frame lighting device 10 and the production button light emitting LED) also easy to enter. Therefore, by finally ending the rainbow light emission of the board lighting device 74 (which is easily visible) at the timing T10, the player's mood can be lifted. In addition, when the board illumination device 74 has finished emitting rainbow light, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that a big win game is about to be executed.

Also, the success sound, the rainbow emission, and the vibration may be performed continuously or intermittently. For example, in the decided effect, output a success sound, emit light with rainbow light, vibrate, once turn off these effects, immediately before stopping display of the effect pattern (for example, FIG. 112 (g)) , may be turned ON again. With such a configuration, it is possible to clarify the scene that the player wants to pay attention to, and to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, the period during which the rainbow light is emitted may be different for the case of winning the jackpot in the normal game state, the case of winning the jackpot in the time-saving game state, and the case of winning the jackpot in the variable probability game state. For example, when a jackpot is won in the variable probability game state, the period during which the rainbow light emission is performed may be shorter than when the jackpot is won in the normal game state. In other words, when winning a jackpot in a normal game state in which it is difficult to win a big win, the period during which the rainbow light emission is performed is made longer than in the probability variable game state, so that the player who wins the jackpot in a situation where it is difficult to win is given a sense of superiority. can be submerged. On the other hand, when a big win is won in a probability variable game state in which it is easy to win a big win, the period for performing rainbow light emission is made shorter than in the normal game state, thereby preventing excessive big win notification. As a result, it is possible to make a suitable notification according to the situation (game state).

On the other hand, the period during which the success sound is output and the period during which the effect button 17 is vibrated may be common execution periods regardless of the game state. As a result, the output control of the success sound and the control for vibrating the effect button 17 can be shared in a plurality of game states, and the control and effect data can be simplified.
It should be noted that the period during which the success sound is output and the period during which the effect button 17 is vibrated may also be varied for each game state, similarly to the period during which the rainbow light emission is performed.

Although not shown, rainbow display may be performed by the main display device 70 and the sub-display device 71 in addition to the rainbow emission by each lighting device. This rainbow display starts at timing T7, and ends at timing T8 or from timing T8 to T9, for example. That is, the rainbow emission of the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 is completed earlier. As a result, the frame illumination device 10 and the board illumination device 74 are responsible for the rainbow color decoration, and a new image (for example, a reverberation image to be described later) is displayed on the main display device 70 and the sub display device 71. It is possible to enrich the display on the main display device 70 and the sub display device 71 without reducing the decorativeness.

(When the production control board 130 cannot receive the stop command at the timing of T10)
Here, the effect mode when the effect control board 130 cannot receive the stop command at the timing of T10 will be described.

If the effect control board 130 cannot receive the stop command at the timing of T10,
Rainbow light emission of the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74→The rainbow light emission continues even after the timing of T10 (the effect is extended and executed).
Rainbow light emission of the effect button light emitting LED 17c→Since the rainbow light emission is finished before reaching the timing of T10, there is no influence even if the stop command cannot be received (the effect is not extended).
Output of the success sound→Since the output ends before reaching the timing of T10, there is no influence even if the stop command cannot be received (the effect is not extended).
When the button driving device 17b is turned ON for 5 seconds, it is turned OFF, so even if the stop command cannot be received, it is not affected (the effect is not extended).
The corresponding icon TI→disappearance display is not performed, and the performance operation is continued.
Horizontal scrolling from background image to normal background is continuously performed (continuous background change is possible). For example, the image data changes as indicated by the normal background image data in FIG.

Thereby, even if the performance control board 130 cannot receive the stop time command, the rainbow light emission of the lighting device 10 for the frame and the lighting device 74 for the board is continuously executed, so that the jackpot game is executed later. can be ensured by the player.

Also, since the icon TI does not disappear and continues to perform the effect operation, the player can be entertained until the next command is received.
In addition, since the background image is normally scrolled horizontally continuously (continuous background change is possible), the player can be entertained until the next command is received.

(Regarding the success sound and rainbow emission at the timing of T7)
Further details (frames) of the success tone and rainbow emission at the timing of T7 will now be described.
Note that in the present embodiment, the effect image update period (frame update timing) controlled by the overall control unit 141 (image control unit 145) and each lighting device (frame lighting device 10, frame lighting device 10, The board illumination device 74 and the effect button light emission LED 17c) are synchronized (tuned) at a control period of 1/30 second.

For example, if the frame immediately before the timing of T7 in FIG. 111 is the “1500” frame (the fluctuation start time is the “1” frame), the effect button detection sw17a turns ON at the “1501” frame of the timing of T7 ( The effect button 17 is operated by the player).
When the effect button detection sw17a is turned on, an operation command is transmitted from the effect control unit 130m to the integrated control unit 141 and the lamp control unit 150.

In this case, the image control unit 145 stores a “successful image” (for example, FIG. 98 ( f) is drawn, and the "successful image" is developed in the "1503"th frame. As a result, the “success image” becomes visible through the main display device 70 .
Also, in the audio control unit 148, the audio output device 9 outputs a "success sound" in synchronization with the "1503"th frame. This makes it possible to listen to the success sound “kyuin kyuin”.

Further, the lamp control unit 150 outputs rainbow light emission data for causing each lighting device (frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 74, effect button light emitting LED 17c) to emit rainbow light in synchronization with the “1503” frame. be. As a result, it becomes possible to visually recognize how each lighting device emits rainbow light.

In this way, in the above example, the display of the "success image", the output of the "success sound", and the light emission of the "rainbow light" are performed in synchronization with the "1503"th frame, so the effect of notifying the big win is executed. (no deviation occurs in any one of the notification means), and the player can easily understand the big win notification.

Although not listed in the example of FIG. 111 , in the jackpot notification, the configuration for moving the movable effect device described later and the configuration for vibrating the vibrating means also synchronize with the “1503” frame in the above example. You should do it.

Then, for example, the “success sound” is turned off at the “1530th” frame, and the rainbow emission of the effect button emission LED 17c is turned off at the “1540th” frame.
Then, for example, when stop display is performed at timing T10 (for example, “1650th frame”), the rainbow light emission of frame lighting device 10 and board lighting device 74 (either or both) is turned off.

As a result, in the above example, the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 (either or both) stop emitting rainbow light in synchronization with the stop display of the "1650" frame. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable because the game is not continuously executed.
It should be noted that the above description regarding frame synchronization can be applied to the following diagrams for explaining the jackpot notification.

(Timing chart when the jackpot game is executed after the fluctuation effect accompanied by the pattern promotion effect or the revival effect is completed)
With reference to FIG. 113, an example in which the symbol promotion effect is executed, an example in which the resurrection effect is executed, and an effect example during the jackpot game will be described. In addition, FIG. 113 mainly explains different parts from FIG. 111 (mainly production design, production design mode). Also, in order to facilitate understanding of FIG. 113, a supplementary description will be made using FIGS. 114 and 115. FIG.

Incidentally, FIGS. 113 to 115 will be described as an example in which the jackpot game is executed after the fluctuation effect involving the symbol promotion effect or the resurrection effect is completed in the "normal game state". The same thing may be done in the time-saving gaming state and the probability variation gaming state.

(When "symbol promotion effect" is executed)
At the timing T7 in FIG. 113, the performance symbol finishes the update variation and temporarily stops. At this time, the effect pattern mode (temporarily stopped effect pattern) is set to "444" (first mode in the effect pattern) (see FIGS. 114(f) to (g)).
In addition, a success sound "kyun kyuin" is output as a sound effect, the lighting device 10 for the frame, the lighting device 74 for the board, and the effect button emission LED 17c emit rainbow light, the button driving device 17b is turned on, and the effect button 17 vibrates.
Incidentally, as shown in FIGS. 114(f) to (g), when the effect symbol is "444" and the game is temporarily stopped, the special symbol TZ continues to update and fluctuate.

Then, from timing T8 to T8-1, the "symbol promotion effect" is executed, and as shown in FIGS. 114(g) to (g)', each effect symbol 70a starts scrolling. At this time, the sound effect is OFF, the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 emit white light, the effect button light emission LED 17c is turned off, and the button driving device 17b is OFF.
Incidentally, when the "symbol promotion effect" is being executed, the special symbol TZ continues to update and fluctuate in the same manner as before execution of the "symbol promotion effect".

Then, if the "symbol promotion effect" is successful, as shown in FIG. 114(h), the effect pattern 70a of "777" (the second mode by the effect symbol) is temporarily stopped, and the "symbol promotion effect" fails. If so, for example, the effect symbol 70a of "444" is temporarily stopped again. At this time, the success sound "kyun kyuin" is output again as a sound effect, the lighting device 10 for the frame, the lighting device 74 for the board, and the effect button light emission LED 17c emit rainbow light, the button driving device 17b is turned on, and the effect button 17 is turned on. Vibrate.
In addition, the configuration for outputting the success sound again, the configuration for emitting rainbow light from each lighting device, and the configuration for vibrating the effect button 17 are executed only when the "symbol promotion effect" is successful, and the "symbol If the "promotion effect" fails, it may not be executed.
Also in FIG. 114(h), the special symbol TZ continues to update and fluctuate in the same manner as before execution of the "symbol promotion effect".

Then, as shown in FIG. 114(i), both the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed at "777". In other words, the special symbol TZ continues the update fluctuation even if the performance symbol 70a performs a temporary stop before executing the "symbol promotion performance", and the update variation even if the performance symbol 70a temporarily stops after the "symbol promotion performance" is executed. is continued, and along with the stop display of the performance pattern 70a, the update variation is terminated and the stop display is performed. As a result, for example, even if there is a player who does not understand whether or not the variable performance is continuing due to the execution of the "symbol promotion performance" of the performance symbol 70a, the continuous update fluctuation of the special symbol TZ allows the variable performance. It can be recognized that the

(When "resurrection effect" is executed)
Next, a case where the "resurrection effect" is executed will be described. For the sake of convenience, the case where the "symbol promotion effect" is executed and the case where the "resurrection effect" is executed are collectively described in FIG. may be performed.

At the timing T7 in FIG. 113, the performance symbol finishes the update variation and temporarily stops. At this time, the effect pattern mode (temporarily stopped effect pattern) is set to "454" (first mode by effect symbol) (see FIGS. 115(f) to (g)).
In addition, a failure sound is output as a sound effect (see FIG. 93(f)), the frame illumination device 10 and the board illumination device 74 emit white light, the production button emission LED 17c goes out, and the button driving device 17b is turned off. be.
Incidentally, as shown in FIGS. 115(f) to (g), when the performance symbol is "454" and the game is temporarily stopped, the special symbol TZ continues to update and fluctuate.

Then, from timing T8 to T8-1, the "resurrection effect" is executed, and as shown in FIGS. At this time, the sound effect is OFF, the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 emit white light, the effect button light emission LED 17c is turned off, and the button driving device 17b is OFF.
It should be noted that while the "resurrection effect" is being executed, the special symbol TZ continues to update and fluctuate in the same manner as before the execution of the "resurrection effect".

Then, as shown in FIG. 115(h), the effect symbol 70a of "777" (the second mode according to the effect symbol) is temporarily stopped. At this time, a success sound "kyun kyuin" is output as a sound effect, the lighting device 10 for the frame, the lighting device 74 for the board, and the effect button emission LED 17c emit rainbow light, the button driving device 17b is turned on, and the effect button 17 vibrates. .
Also in FIG. 115(h), the special symbol TZ continues to update and fluctuate in the same manner as before the execution of the "resurrection effect".

Then, as shown in FIG. 115(i), both the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed at "777". That is, the special symbol TZ continues the update variation even if the performance symbol 70a temporarily stops before executing the "resurrection performance", and continues the update variation even if the performance symbol 70a temporarily stops after the "revival performance" is executed. Then, along with the stop display of the production pattern 70a, the update variation is terminated and the stop display is performed. As a result, for example, even if there is a player who does not understand whether or not the variable performance is continuing due to the execution of the "resurrection performance" of the performance symbol 70a, the continuous update fluctuation of the special symbol TZ enables the variable performance. It can be made to recognize that it is continuing.

Then, when the "symbol promotion effect" is executed and when the "resurrection effect" is executed, the jackpot game starts from timing T14, and during the jackpot game, among the stop-displayed effect symbols 70a, Only the number portion of the effect pattern 70a of 1 is displayed.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 114(m) and 115(m), a round image RG showing the first round of the jackpot game, and a winning game ball number image GG showing game balls won in the jackpot game. , a right-handed image UG, a character image KG, and a character introduction image KSG showing details of the displayed character image KG are displayed. "7") is displayed at a position (for example, upper left) that does not overlap other display images.

The number part (for example, "7") of the production pattern 70a of 1 is a pattern corresponding to the production pattern 70a stopped and displayed in FIG. Also, it is displayed in the same size as the display size when it is stopped (see FIG. 114(i)).
The display data of the number portion (for example, "7") of the effect symbol 70a of 1 is display data different from the display data of the effect symbol 70a stopped and displayed in FIG. 114(i).

In this way, by swinging and displaying the number part (for example, "7") of one production pattern 70a, the production interest during the jackpot game can be improved.
In addition, by displaying the number part (for example, "7") of the production pattern 70a of 1 so as not to overlap other images (for example, the right-handed image UG), the other images can be reliably recognized. .
In addition, by displaying the number part (for example, "7") of the production pattern 70a of 1 in the same size as the display size (see FIG. 114 (i)) when the stop display is performed, other images (for example, right It is possible to prevent the display of the shot image (UG) from being obstructed, and to ensure that other images are visually recognized.
Also, for example, if a symbol (for example, "seven") not corresponding to the effect symbol 70a stopped and displayed in FIG. If so, by displaying a symbol (for example, "7") corresponding to the effect symbol 70a stopped and displayed in FIG. 114(i), it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

During the jackpot game, three performance symbols 70a may be displayed, or (one or three) performance symbols 70a with characters may be displayed, or the performance symbols 70a may be displayed without swinging. It may be stopped all the time, may be repeatedly rocked and stopped, or may be rotated. It should be noted that the character-attached production pattern 70a refers to a state in which a number pattern is attached to a character, for example, like the production pattern 70a in FIG. 114(i).

In addition, in the example of FIG. 114, the "symbol promotion effect" performed in (g) to (g)' constitutes the pre-stop operation, and in the example of FIG. "Resurrection effect" configures the pre-stop operation.

(Regarding the start timing of the variable display after the end of the jackpot game)
Here, the characteristic portion of the start timing of the variable display after the end of the jackpot game, which is not shown in FIG. 113, will be mentioned.
At the start timing of the variable display after the end of the jackpot game, as the display mode of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, the same kind of symbol as the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ stopped and displayed at the timing T10 may be displayed. Specifically, in the example of FIG. 113, at the start timing of the variable display after the end of the jackpot game, "777" is displayed as the effect symbol 70a, and "777" is displayed as the special symbol TZ. , start the variation display (first variation) after the end of the jackpot game.

This allows the player to reconfirm what the jackpot pattern was at the start timing of the variable display after the jackpot game ends.
The same type of symbol means, for example, when the effect symbol 70a with the character is stopped and displayed at "777", the effect symbol 70a with the character "777" is displayed again at the start timing of the variable display after the jackpot game ends. When displaying, for example, when the performance symbol 70a with a character is stopped and displayed at "777", when the variation display is started after the jackpot game is finished, when the performance symbol 70a with only numbers "777" is displayed, For example, when the production pattern 70a with only numbers is stopped and displayed at "777", it is assumed that the production pattern 70a with only numbers "777" is displayed at the start timing of the variable display after the end of the jackpot game. .

On the other hand, at the start timing of the variable display after the end of the jackpot game, as the display mode of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, a symbol different from the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ stopped and displayed at the timing T10 may be displayed. . Specifically, in the example of FIG. 113, in the stop display, "777" is stop-displayed as the effect symbol 70a and "777" is stop-displayed as the special symbol TZ. At the start timing, "135" (initial appearance after the end of the jackpot game state) is displayed as the performance symbol 70a, and "135" (initial appearance after the end of the jackpot game state) is displayed as the special symbol TZ. may
For example, when the customer waits at the end of the jackpot game (when the hold is 0 at the end of the jackpot game), the main display device 70 displays "777" as the effect symbol 70a (the game at the start port). (until the ball wins), and "777" as the special symbol TZ is stopped (until the game ball wins at the starting port). In such a case, since it may cause misunderstanding that it will shift to the jackpot game, such misunderstanding is given by displaying the initial outcome after the jackpot game state ends as described above. can be prevented.

It should be noted that the configuration of displaying different types of symbols is particularly effective in gaming machines that may display predetermined symbols as the jackpot effect symbols 70a. A special symbol is a symbol that is not displayed as a performance symbol 70a in the update variation in the normal game state, and is displayed only when a special symbol wins a jackpot, for example, a jackpot display mode of the performance symbol 70a is "5 (left)-predetermined pattern (middle)-5 (right)". Even in such a case, at the start timing of the variable display after the end of the jackpot game, "135" (initial appearance after the jackpot game state is finished) is displayed as the effect symbol 70a, and "135" (jackpot) is displayed as the special symbol TZ. By displaying the initial number after the end of the game state, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of discomfort caused by the display of the predetermined symbols at the start timing of the variable display after the end of the big win game.

It should be noted that the characteristic part at the start timing of the variable display after the end of the jackpot game is not limited to FIG. you can

(When the production control board 130 cannot receive the stop command at the timing of T10)
Here, the effect mode when the effect control board 130 cannot receive the stop command at the timing of T10 will be described.

If the effect control board 130 cannot receive the stop command at the timing of T10,
Rainbow light emission of the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74→The rainbow light emission continues even after the timing of T10 (the effect is extended and executed).
Rainbow light emission of the effect button light emitting LED 17c→Since the rainbow light emission is finished before reaching the timing of T10, there is no influence even if the stop command cannot be received (the effect is not extended).
Output of the success sound→Since the output ends before reaching the timing of T10, there is no influence even if the stop command cannot be received (the effect is not extended).
Since the vibration is finished before the timing of driving the button driving device 17b→T10, there is no influence even if the stop command cannot be received (the effect is not extended).
The temporary stop is continued at "777" even after the timing of the performance symbol 70a→T10. Then, for example, the temporary stop is continued until an opening specifying command is received at the timing of T13.
The update fluctuation is continued even after the timing of the special symbol TZ→T10. Then, for example, the update variation is continued until an opening designation command is received at timing T13.
The corresponding icon TI→disappearance display is not performed, and the performance operation is continued.
Horizontal scrolling from background image to normal background is continuously performed (continuous background change is possible).

Thereby, even if the performance control board 130 cannot receive the stop time command, the rainbow light emission of the lighting device 10 for the frame and the lighting device 74 for the board is continuously executed, so that the jackpot game is executed later. can be ensured by the player.

Further, even if the performance control board 130 cannot receive the stop time command, the temporary stop is continued without stop-displaying the performance pattern 70a, and the update fluctuation of the special pattern TZ is continued, so that the big win is recognized. In addition, it is possible to recognize that the jackpot game is not started because each symbol is still not stopped and displayed.

Further, the temporary stop of the effect symbol 70a and the update variation of the special symbol TZ are terminated when the opening designation command is received at the timing of T13, for example. As a result, even if the effect control board 130 cannot receive the command at the time of stop, it can be terminated by the next received command (here, the opening designation command), so that the effect symbol 70a can be temporarily stopped, and the special symbol can be terminated. It is possible to save the trouble of transmitting/receiving the dedicated command for ending the update fluctuation of TZ again.

Also, since the icon TI does not disappear and continues to perform the effect operation, the player can be entertained until the next command is received.
In addition, since the background image is normally scrolled horizontally continuously (continuous background change is possible), the player can be entertained until the next command is received.

(Timing chart when the variable effect is executed after the loss SPSP reach variable effect is completed)
FIG. 116 is a diagram explaining in detail the effect image and the effect symbol of FIG. 92. FIG. Therefore, the effect image and the effect pattern will be mainly described, and the overlapping part with FIG. 92 will be omitted.

It should be noted that FIG. 116, as an example, will be described as a case where the variation effect is executed after the losing SPSP reach variation effect is completed in the "normal game state", but not limited to this, the "time-saving game state" or the "probability variable game The same may be done in "state".

At the timing of T0 in FIG. 116, the production pattern is updated with a character. As described above, "with character" is a state in which a number pattern is attached to the character.
Then, at the timing of T1, the normal reach effect is executed, and the normal reach image is displayed as the effect image. Incidentally, the normal reach effect is performed using the effect pattern 70a with characters. In addition, in FIG. 116, this is described as "with character".

Then, at the timing of T2, when the normal ready-to-win effect ends, the character-attached effect pattern 70a changes to a number-only effect pattern 70a (see, for example, FIG. 93(a)). Then, the update variation is performed with the production pattern 70a only with numbers.

When the effect pattern 70a with characters changes to a number-only effect pattern 70a, for example, the character portion of the effect pattern 70a disappears from the state shown in FIG. It is adapted to move to the position shown in a). During the movement, the display size of the number portion is gradually reduced to move to the position shown in FIG. 93(a). That is, the display size of the number portion at the timing when the character portion disappears, the display size of the number portion at the timing during movement (intermediate position), and the timing at which the number portion is moved to the position shown in FIG. 93A, the timing at which the character portion disappears>timing during movement (intermediate position)>timing at moving to the position shown in FIG. 93(a).
As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling a sense of incompatibility because only the number portion is not suddenly moved to the position shown in FIG. 93(a). In addition, by displaying all movement modes so that they can be visually recognized by the player, the player can be entertained even in the details.

Then, at the timing of T4, the SP ready-to-win effect is executed, and the SP ready-to-win image is displayed as the effect image (see, for example, FIG. 93(c)).
Further, even during execution of the SP ready-to-win performance, the update variation is continuously performed with the performance pattern 70a of only numbers.

Then, at timing T5, when the SP ready-to-win effect is completed and the SPSP ready-to-win effect is executed, the SPSP ready-to-win effect image is displayed as the effect image (see, for example, FIG. 93(d)).
Further, even during execution of the SPSP ready-to-win performance, the update variation is continuously performed with the performance pattern 70a of only numbers.

Then, at the timing of T6, a decision image corresponding to the decision effect is displayed as the effect image (see, for example, FIG. 93(e)), and at the timing of T7, as the effect image, failure occurs in response to the operation of the effect button 17. Display the image (see, for example, FIG. 93(f)). At this time, the production pattern is temporarily stopped with the production pattern 70a having only numbers. In addition, in FIG. 116, this is described as "temporary stop number".

Then, at the timing of T8, the effect pattern 70a with only numbers is changed to the effect pattern 70a with characters, and the mode of the effect pattern 70a before the execution of the SP ready-to-win effect is restored. Then, a temporary stop is performed at the effect pattern 70a with the character. In addition, in FIG. 116, this is described as "temporary stop ca".

In addition, when changing from the production pattern 70a with only numbers to the production pattern 70a with characters, the movement mode can be visually recognized as in the case of changing the production pattern 70a with characters to the production pattern 70a with only numbers. Instead, for example, as shown in FIG. 131 to be described later, a switching image is displayed to change the effect pattern 70a with only numbers to the effect pattern 70a with characters. As a result, the mode of the pattern can be changed quickly, and the player can be prevented from feeling uncomfortable by being shown the moving mode of the pattern after being notified of the loss, for example.

Then, at the timing of T10, the effect pattern 70a is stopped and displayed with the character attached.
By constructing in this way, in the SP ready-to-win effect and the SPSP ready-to-win effect, by displaying in the display space of the effect pattern 70a with only numbers, it is possible to concentrate on the effect contents of the SP ready-to-win effect and SPSP ready-to-win effect. When the SPSP ready-to-win effect is completed, the character-attached effect pattern 70a is restored, so that the next variable effect can be smoothly started without a sense of incongruity.

In the example of FIG. 116, the effect pattern 70a is changed to a form of only numbers, but even if SP reach effect or SPSP reach effect is performed, even if the effect pattern 70a does not change with the character attached. good.

In addition, in the example of FIG. 116, the "temporary stop" of the effect symbol 70a during the display of the failure image of (f) to (g) constitutes the pre-stop action.

(When the production control board 130 cannot receive the stop command at the timing of T10)
Here, the effect mode when the effect control board 130 cannot receive the stop command at the timing of T10 will be described.

If the effect control board 130 cannot receive the stop command at the timing of T10,
The corresponding icon TI→disappearance display is not performed, and the performance operation is continued.
Horizontal scrolling from background image to normal background is continuously performed (continuous background change is possible).
After the timing of the performance pattern 70a→T10, the temporary stop is performed with the performance pattern 70a with the character. Then, for example, the temporary stop is continued until the start command is received at the timing of T13.
The update fluctuation is continued even after the timing of the special symbol TZ→T10. Then, for example, the update variation is continued until the start command is received at the timing of T13.

Thereby, even if the performance control board 130 cannot receive the stop time command, the temporary stop is continued without stop-displaying the performance pattern 70a, and the update fluctuation of the special pattern TZ is continued, so that each pattern is still stopped. It can be made to recognize that the next variable display will not start without displaying.

Further, the temporary stop of the effect symbol 70a and the update variation of the special symbol TZ are terminated when the start command is received at the timing of T13, for example. As a result, even if the effect control board 130 cannot receive the command at the time of stop, it can be terminated by the next received command (here, the command at the time of start), so that the effect pattern 70a can be temporarily stopped or the special pattern can be terminated. It is possible to save the trouble of transmitting/receiving the dedicated command for ending the update fluctuation of TZ again.

Also, since the icon TI does not disappear and continues to perform the effect operation, the player can be entertained until the next command is received.
In addition, since the background image is normally scrolled horizontally continuously (continuous background change is possible), the player can be entertained until the next command is received.

(Timing chart when the jackpot game is executed after the jackpot SPSP reach fluctuation effect is completed)
FIG. 117 is a diagram explaining in detail the effect image and the effect symbol of FIG. 97. FIG. Therefore, the effect image and the effect pattern will be mainly described, and the overlapping part with FIG. 97 will be omitted.

It should be noted that FIG. 117 will be described as an example of the case where the variation effect is executed after the jackpot SPSP reach variation effect ends in the "normal game state", but not limited to this, the "time-saving game state" or the "probability variable game The same may be done in "state".

At the timing of T0 in FIG. 117, the production pattern is updated with a character. As described above, "with character" is a state in which a number pattern is attached to the character.
Then, at the timing of T1, the normal reach effect is executed, and the normal reach image is displayed as the effect image. Incidentally, the normal reach effect is performed using the effect pattern 70a with characters. In addition, in FIG. 117, this is described as "with character".

Then, at the timing of T2, when the normal ready-to-win effect ends, the character-attached effect pattern 70a changes to the number-only effect pattern 70a. Then, the update variation is performed with the production pattern 70a only with numbers. Incidentally, the manner in which the character-attached production pattern 70a changes to the number-only production pattern 70a is the same as the content described with reference to FIG.

Then, at the timing of T4, the SP ready-to-win effect is executed, and the SP ready-to-win image is displayed as the effect image.
Further, even during execution of the SP ready-to-win performance, the update variation is continuously performed with the performance pattern 70a of only numbers.

Then, at the timing of T5, when the SP ready-to-win effect is completed and the SPSP ready-to-win effect is executed, the SPSP ready-to-win effect is displayed as the effect image.
Further, even during execution of the SPSP ready-to-win performance, the update variation is continuously performed with the performance pattern 70a of only numbers.

Then, at the timing of T6, a decision image corresponding to the decision effect is displayed as the effect image (see, for example, FIG. 98(e)), and at the timing of T7, the effect image is successfully operated in response to the operation of the effect button 17. Display the image (see, for example, FIG. 98(f)). At this time, the production pattern is temporarily stopped with the production pattern 70a having only numbers. In addition, in FIG. 117, this is described as "temporary stop number".

Then, at the timing of T8, the effect pattern 70a with only numbers is changed to the effect pattern 70a with characters, and the mode of the effect pattern 70a before the execution of the SP ready-to-win effect is restored. Then, a temporary stop is performed at the performance pattern 70a with the character (see, for example, FIG. 98(g)). In addition, in FIG. 117, this is described as "temporary stop ca". It should be noted that the mode of changing from the effect pattern 70a with only numbers to the effect pattern 70a with characters is the same as the mode described with reference to FIG.

Then, at the timing of T10, the effect pattern 70a is stopped and displayed with the character attached.
By constructing in this way, in the SP ready-to-win effect and the SPSP ready-to-win effect, by displaying in the display space of the effect pattern 70a with only numbers, it is possible to concentrate on the effect contents of the SP ready-to-win effect and SPSP ready-to-win effect.

Incidentally, in the example of FIG. 116, the "temporary stop" of the effect symbol 70a during the display of the success images of (f) to (g) constitutes the action before stopping.

In the example of FIG. 117, at the timing of T8, the production pattern 70a with only numbers is changed to the production pattern 70a with characters, and at the timing of T10, the production pattern 70a with the characters is stopped and displayed. However, it is not limited to this, and may have another pattern.

For example, it may have the pattern shown in FIG. In FIG. 118, at the timing of T8 in the example of FIG. 117, the production pattern 70a with only numbers is changed to the production pattern 70a with characters, but in FIG. The effect pattern 70a of only numbers is maintained without change, and is stopped and displayed as it is.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 118(h), the production pattern 70a "555" composed only of numbers is temporarily stopped, and then, from (i) to (l), it is composed of only numbers. The production pattern 70a "555" is stopped and displayed. Then, (l) shifts to a jackpot game.

With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the time required to change from the performance pattern 70a with only numbers to the performance pattern 70a with characters, so that the game can be quickly shifted to the jackpot game.

In addition, since it is the same as that of FIG. 111 fundamentally about the case where the production|presentation control board 130 cannot receive the command at the time of a stop at the timing of T10, description here is abbreviate|omitted.

(Regarding an example of normal background image data)
119 is an example of normal background image data in mode A. FIG. Mode A will be described as an example, but other modes (for example, mode B) are configured in the same way (only the contents of image data are different).

For example, the normal background image data in mode A is, as shown in FIG. 3” (for example, a single picture), and so on (stored in the CGROM 146, for example). An update value corresponding to each image data is defined. The update value is a value updated at predetermined intervals (for example, every 1/30th of a second) in the image control unit 145, and normal background image data is selected by referring to the update value. For example, "castle town 1" has an update value of "1", "castle town 2" has an update value of "2", and "castle town 3" has an update value of "3". If the current value updated in section 145 is "2", "castle town 2" is displayed.

Similarly, image data "jonai 1" (eg, one picture) → image data "jonai 2" (eg, one picture) → image data "jonai 3" (eg, one picture)... The update value is "N" for "jonai 1", the update value is "N+1" for "jonai 2", and the update value is "jonai 3". are defined as "N+2".

Similarly, the image data of "Garden 1" (eg, one picture) → the image data of "Garden 2" (eg, one picture) → the image data of "Garden 3" (eg, one picture)... The update value is "N+3" for "Garden 1", "N+4" for "Garden 2", and "N+4" for "Garden 3". are defined as "N+5".

Next, a method of displaying a background image using such image data will be described using a timing chart in the case where (a) the change effect is executed after the loss SPSP reach change effect ends. The content of the timing chart is the same as that described with reference to FIG.

From timings T0 to T2, a normal background horizontal scroll is displayed as a background image, and as an example, "castle town 2" is displayed on layer N+1. In other words, the normal background image of "castle town 2" is visible to the player. Also, since it is set to "castle town 2", the updated value is "2".

Then, at timing T2, the dark background is developed on layer N, and the normal background image data is not developed on layer N+1. As a result, the dark background becomes visible to the player, and the background image related to the "castle town" displayed until timing T2 becomes invisible (see FIGS. 93(a) and 93(b)). In addition, although it is described as "invisible", a part of the background image related to the "castle town" may be visible, or the entire background image related to the "castle town" may be slightly visible. In other words, it may be "difficult to see".

Note that the update value is updated at predetermined intervals even if the background image data is not developed normally. For example, the update value is updated to "3" from timing T2.

Then, at timing T8 (same as timing T8 in FIG. 92), when the horizontal scrolling of the normal background is restarted, the image control unit 145 refers to the value to be updated and selects the normal background image data. In the example of FIG. 119, the update value at timing T8 is "N+4", and the normal background image data of "garden 2" corresponding to the update value "N+4" is developed on layer N+1. As a result, when the SPSP ready-to-win effect ends and the horizontal scrolling of the normal background resumes, the normal background image of "Garden 2" becomes visible.

In other words, when the horizontal scrolling of the normal background is resumed at timing T8 (same as timing T8 in FIG. 92), the timing (timing T2 in FIG. 119) at which the normal background image becomes invisible continues (in the example in FIG. 119, If there is a "castle town"), it is assumed that the normal background image continues to change even during the invisible period, and the normal background image corresponding to the updated value at the time of restart is displayed (Fig. 119 example is "Garden").
For example, if it is displayed from the timing when it becomes invisible at the time of resuming, the amount of change in the normal background will be scarce and the player will feel bored. It is possible to increase the amount of change and allow the player to visually recognize various types of normal background images. This can prevent the player from feeling bored.

In the example of (a) in FIG. 119, the normal background image is redisplayed using the update value, but other methods can also be used. For example, in the modified example of (b) in FIG. 119, no particular update value is used.

Specifically, even if the normal background image becomes invisible at timing T2, development on the layer continues. For example, at timing T2, normal background image data of "castle town 3" following "castle town 2" that had been developed up to timing T2 is developed on layer N+1. However, since layer N+1 is a layer located on the rear side of layer N, when the layers are combined and displayed on the main display device 70, the dark background developed on layer N causes "Castle town 3" to appear. becomes invisible. In other words, it is in a state where it is developed on the layer but cannot be visually recognized by the player.

The normal background image data developed on the layer N+1 immediately before timing T8 continues to be developed on the layer thereafter, and is assumed to be "Garden 1". Then, it is assumed that the display time for one frame of "Garden 1" is the timing that reaches timing T8.

Then, at timing T8 (same as timing T8 in FIG. 92), when the horizontal scrolling of the normal background resumes, the image control unit 145 continues to develop the normal background image data on layer N+1. Here, "Garden 2", which is a continuation of "Garden 1", is developed. As a result, when the SPSP ready-to-win effect ends and the horizontal scrolling of the normal background resumes, the normal background image of "Garden 2" becomes visible.
Even with this configuration, the same effects as in the case of configuration by the method (a) described above can be obtained.

In addition, in FIG. 119, an example of normal background image data in mode A was explained, but it may be configured in the same way (not re-displayed from the timing of non-display) in the time-saving game state and the variable probability game state. . On the other hand, in the time-saving gaming state and the variable probability gaming state, it may be redisplayed from the timing when it was hidden, and when redisplaying, certain image data (for example, image data that displays a specific character ) to always redisplay. In particular, in the time-saving game state and the variable probability game state, the amount of change in the background image is not as large as in the normal game state, so it can be redisplayed from the timing when it was hidden, or certain image data (for example, a specific character display control can be simplified. In addition, in the variable probability game state, it is easier to win a big win than in the normal game state, so the time for the player to visually recognize the background image is reduced. Therefore, display control can be simplified in this way.

When redisplaying the effect motion (shaking motion) of the hold icon HI described in FIG. ) is continuously performed, the posture at the time of re-display is re-displayed. This allows the player to visually recognize various postures of the hold icon HI, thereby preventing the player from feeling bored.
The same configuration may be used when the icon TI is hidden together with the pending icon HI.

(Regarding other production examples in the jackpot SPSP reach fluctuation production)
FIGS. 120 to 122 show other examples of effects in the big hit SPSP reach variation effects. Other examples of effects include, for example, a plurality of types of jackpot SPSP reach variation effects, one example of which is shown in FIGS. 97 to 99, and another example is shown in FIGS. 120, timing T5 will be described, and timings T0 to T5 are the same as in FIG. 97, so description thereof will be omitted.

It should be noted that FIGS. 120 to 122 will be described as an example of a case where the variation effect is executed after the jackpot SPSP reach variation effect ends in the "normal game state", but not limited to this, the "time-saving game state" or The same thing may be done in the "probability variation gaming state".

At timing T5, the SPSP ready-to-win effect is executed. In this SPSP reach production, as shown in FIG. 121(d), a character image imitating a girl says a line (line image SER1) "I will stand on the stage again!" Then, as shown in FIGS. 121(d) to 121(e), a task image MG in the SPSP ready-to-win effect is displayed, saying, "Press the button and the girl character stands on the stage to win big."
120 to 122, the SPSP ready-to-win production shown in FIGS. 120 to 122 is a production in which the player operates the production button 17 (for example, single hit, repeated hit, long press, etc.), and if the girl character stands on the stage, a big hit can be obtained. be.

The dialogue image SER1 can be displayed with white characters in the normal mode and red characters in the special mode with a higher expectation for the execution of the jackpot game than in the normal mode. In other words, when the dialog image SER1 is displayed in the special mode, the expectations for the execution of the jackpot game are higher (=the girl character is more likely to stand on the stage).

Then, toward timing T6, the button introduction image BDG is displayed, suggesting that the effect button 17 will be operated at timing T6 soon.
Then, when timing T6 is reached, the decision image is displayed, and the prompting sound "press" is output from the audio output device 9 (see FIG. 121(e)).

Then, when the effect button 17 is operated, a success image is displayed and a success sound is output (see FIGS. 121(f) to (g)). Then, from timing T8 to timing T8-1, an "SPSP reach image (reverberation image)" is displayed as an effect image. In addition, SPSP reach BGM (reverberation BGM) is output from the audio output device 9 so as to correspond to this. At this time, all the production patterns 70a are hidden (see FIGS. 121(g) to (g)').

Then, afterglow images as shown in FIGS. 121(g) to (g)' are displayed. This lingering image is executed for a predetermined period as shown in FIGS. is continuing. If there is a pending icon, the pending icon is hidden.
121(f) to (g), but during the display of the afterglow image after that, the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are not reported to be a big win. It has become.

This allows the player to concentrate on displaying the afterglow image. In addition, by hiding the effect pattern 70a and the like, it is possible to make the afterglow image easier to see. In addition, even if the performance pattern 70a is not displayed, the special pattern TZ continues to be visually recognizably updated and fluctuated, so that the player can easily understand that the subsequent variation performance is being executed after the big win is announced.

122(g) to (g)', the lines (line image SER2) of "Thank you everyone~" are displayed in white characters in the normal mode, and the lines in the line image SER1 described above are displayed in normal mode. Display in a special mode such as is not performed. For example, even if the dialogue image SER1 is displayed in the special mode, the dialogue image SER2 is displayed in the normal mode.

122(g) to (g)' are after the big win has already been reported, the dialogue image SER2 is displayed in the normal mode to prevent excessive effects. can. Also, when the dialogue image SER2 is displayed in a special mode, there is a risk of misunderstanding that something will be announced after FIGS. can.
There is no problem even if the display mode of the dialog image SER2 is based on the display mode of the dialog image SER1. For example, when a special mode is determined as the display mode of the dialogue image SER1, the display mode of the dialogue image SER2 may also be the special mode. This makes it possible to make the performance consistent.

In addition, the afterglow image is related to, for example, the content of the task image MG shown in FIGS. As a result, it is possible to let the player know that there is a connection between the performances before and after the notification of the big win.
After that, when the display of the afterglow image is completed, the performance symbol 70a temporarily stops at "555" from timing T8-1 to timing T9. That is, the production pattern 70a is displayed from the timing T8-1.

It should be noted that the frame illumination device 10, the board illumination device 74, and the effect button emission LED 17c may emit rainbow light during the display of the afterglow image. As a result, it is possible to recognize that a big win has been obtained by the lighting mode of each lighting device, although the fact that the big win has been won by the effect symbol 70a or the special symbol TZ is not performed. In addition, since the afterglow image is displayed together with the rainbow light emission, the player can be more satisfied. In addition, when the display time of the afterglow image becomes long, some players may become uneasy about whether or not they have really won a big win. can also be resolved.

Also, during the display of the afterglow image, the effect button 17 may be vibrated by turning on the button driving device 17b. As a result, it is possible to recognize that the big win has been obtained by the vibration of the production button 17, although the fact that the big win has been achieved by the production pattern 70a or the special pattern TZ is not performed. In addition, since the afterglow image is displayed together with the vibration of the effect button 17, the player can be more satisfied.

On the other hand, while the afterglow image is being displayed, the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 may emit normal light (for example, white light), and the effect button light emitting LED 17c may be extinguished. This allows the user to focus more on the afterglow image without being distracted by the light emission mode of each lighting device.

Also, during the display of the afterglow image, the button driving device 17b may be turned off so that the effect button 17 is not vibrated. As a result, it is possible to make the player pay more attention to the afterglow image without being distracted by the vibration of the effect button 17.例文帳に追加

In addition, while the afterglow image is being displayed, all the effect symbols 70a are not displayed, but this is not the only option unless it is in a mode of notifying a big win. For example, the left and right effect symbols 70a may be displayed, and the middle effect symbol 70a may be variably displayed (for example, "5↓5"). As a result, it is possible to prevent forgetting what the production pattern 70a corresponding to the big hit was.

Also, when the SPSP ready-to-win production shown in FIGS. 120 to 122 is a failure, the movable production device shown in FIGS. To end a variable performance without displaying an image. In other words, if the game is lost, the afterglow image is not displayed, and the afterglow image can be made worthwhile to be displayed only when a big win is obtained. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to the long display of the afterglow image corresponding to the failure despite the failure.

In addition, since it is the same as that of FIG. 111 fundamentally about the case where the production|presentation control board 130 cannot receive the command at the time of a stop at the timing of T10, description here is abbreviate|omitted.

(Timing chart when operating means is operated)
FIG. 123 is a timing chart when operating means (for example, production button 17) is operated in the SPSP reach variation production. Incidentally, case 1 and case 2 show a comparison in the case where the operation timing of the operating means is different in the same SPSP reach variation effect (losing).
For the sake of convenience, the explanation is given from the timing when it develops into the SPSP ready-to-win effect, but the structure for starting the fluctuation may use the structure explained with reference to FIG. It is sufficient to use a configuration that

It should be noted that FIG. 123 will be described as an example when the loss SPSP reach fluctuation effect is executed in the "normal game state", but not limited to this, the same thing in the "time saving game state" and "probability variable game state" may be performed.

In both case 1 and case 2, the SPSP ready-to-win effect is executed from timing T0 to timing T2. Timing T2 is the timing at which the decision image is displayed, and is the timing at which the effect button 17 becomes operable (the effective period of operation starts). At this time, it is assumed that the "N+2th cycle" cycle variation of the special symbols has started.

Then, in the case of case 1, the effect button 17 is operated by the player at the timing T3 when the cycle variation of the special symbol starts the "N+6th cycle". That is, at the timing when the "N+5th cycle" ends from the timing T2 ("N+2nd cycle") when the effect button 17 becomes operable (that is, after about 1 second after the effect button 17 becomes operable), the game It is assumed that the effect button 17 has been operated by the person.

On the other hand, in case 2, it is assumed that the effect button 17 is operated by the player at the timing T3 when the cycle variation of the special symbol starts the "N+14th cycle". That is, at the timing when the "N+13th cycle" ends from the timing T2 ("N+2th cycle") when the effect button 17 becomes operable (that is, after about 3 seconds after the effect button 17 becomes operable), the game It is assumed that the effect button 17 has been operated by the person.

Since both cases are SPSP reach fluctuation effects (losing), display of a failure image, output of a failure sound, and provisional stop in a form of notifying a failure of the effect pattern 70a start from timing T3.

In either case, the display of the failure image and the temporary stop in the form of notifying the failure of the effect symbol 70a are continued until the cycle variation of the "N+57th cycle" is completed.
That is, in the case 1, the failure image is displayed from the "N+6th cycle" to the "N+57th cycle" (approximately 13 seconds), and the temporary stop is performed in the form of notifying that the effect pattern 70a is lost. , From "N+14th cycle" to "N+57th cycle" (about 11 seconds), a temporary stop will be performed in a mode in which a failure image is displayed and a failure of the production pattern 70a is notified, and case 1 is better than case 2. , the period of temporary stop in the form of displaying the failure image and notifying the failure of the effect symbol 70a is longer (about 2 seconds).

The failure sound is output for about 1 second (about 4 cycle fluctuations) in any case, and there is no difference in the output period (and the number of cycle fluctuations performed during the output period) depending on the operation timing of the effect button 17. It is designed not to occur.

In other words, in case 1, the number of cycle fluctuations between timing T3 and timing T4 is "approximately 52 cycle fluctuations", whereas in case 2, the number of cycles between timing T3 and timing T4 is The number of fluctuations is "approximately 44 cycle fluctuations", and a difference occurs in the number of cycle fluctuations performed between timing T3 and timing T4.

Then, in any case, at the timing T5 when the cycle variation of the "N+85th cycle" is completed, the cycle variation of the special symbols is terminated and the stop display is performed.
Also, in any case, the effect symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing T6. That is, in case 1 and case 2, the cycle variation executed until the performance symbol is stopped is "1st cycle" to "N+85th cycle". Then, the stop display of the performance symbols is performed until timing T8.

In other words, in any case, the number of cycle fluctuations between timing T4 and timing T6 (or T8) is "approximately 28 cycle fluctuations", and the number of cycles between timing T4 and timing T6 (or T8) is There will be no difference in the number of fluctuations.

Further, in the case 1, the number of cycle fluctuations performed between the timing T3 when the effect button 17 is operated by the player and the timing T6 until the stop display of the effect symbols starts or the timing T8 until the end is In contrast to "about 80 cycle variation", in case 2, timing T6 from the timing T3 when the player operates the production button 17 to the timing T6 until the stop display of the production pattern starts, or timing T8 until the end. The number of cycle variations performed during the period is "approximately 72 cycle variations", and a difference occurs in the number of cycle variations performed between timing T3 and timing T6 (or T8).

On the other hand, in either case, the number of cycle fluctuations performed between the timing T2 when the production button 17 becomes operable and the timing T6 until the stop display of the production pattern starts or the timing T8 until the end. is "approximately 84 cycle fluctuations", and there is no difference in the number of cycle fluctuations between timing T2 and timing T6 (or T8).

In this way, when the timing of operating the production button 17 is different even though the same SPSP reach fluctuation production is performed, for example, the display of the failure image performed between the timing T3 and the timing T4, and the mode of notifying the failure of the production pattern 70a. Since there is a difference (about 2 seconds) in the execution time of the temporary stop at , it is misunderstood that the performance content has changed at the timing of operating the performance button 17, or that a different SPSP reach fluctuation performance has been executed. There was a time when I gave
In contrast, for example, the number of cycle fluctuations between timing T2 and timing T6 or between timing T2 and timing T8 (strictly speaking, the number of cycle fluctuations between timing T2 and timing T5) is visually observed. If so, the same "approximately 84 cycle fluctuations" will be obtained in any case, so from the number of cycle fluctuations, it is possible to give a recognition that the contents of the production have changed at the timing of operating the production button 17, or to give a different SPSP. It is possible to prevent misunderstanding that the reach variation performance has been executed.

In addition, since the failure sound is output for about one second (varying about four cycles) in any case, even if the timing of operating the effect button 17 is different, the player is made to recognize that it is a failure. can be done.

Incidentally, both Case 1 and Case 2 describe the case where the operation means (effect button 17) is operated, but when the operation means (effect button 17) is not operated, timing T3 to timing T4 are described. is even shorter than in case 2. For example, when the operation means (the production button 17) is not operated, the period from timing T3 to timing T4 is approximately 8 seconds (the cycle variation executed during the period is "approximately 32 cycle variation").

(Timing chart when operating means is operated)
FIG. 124 is a timing chart when operating means (for example, production button 17) is operated in the SPSP reach variation production. Incidentally, case 1 and case 2 are comparisons in the case of the same SPSP reach variation effect (jackpot) with different operation timings of the operating means.
For the sake of convenience, the explanation is given from the timing when it develops into the SPSP ready-to-win effect, but the structure for starting the fluctuation may be the structure explained in FIG. It is sufficient to use a configuration that

In addition, FIG. 124 will be described as an example when the jackpot SPSP reach fluctuation effect is executed in the "normal game state", but not limited to this, the same thing in the "time-saving game state" and "probability variable game state" may be performed.

In both case 1 and case 2, the SPSP ready-to-win effect is executed from timing T0 to timing T2. Timing T2 is the timing at which the decision image is displayed, and is the timing at which the effect button 17 becomes operable (the effective period of operation starts). At this time, it is assumed that the "N+2th cycle" cycle variation of the special symbols has started.

Then, in the case of case 1, the effect button 17 is operated by the player at the timing T3 when the cycle variation of the special symbol starts the "N+6th cycle". That is, at the timing when the "N+5th cycle" ends from the timing T2 ("N+2nd cycle") when the effect button 17 becomes operable (that is, after about 1 second after the effect button 17 becomes operable), the game It is assumed that the effect button 17 has been operated by the person.

On the other hand, in case 2, it is assumed that the effect button 17 is operated by the player at the timing T3 when the cycle variation of the special symbol starts the "N+14th cycle". That is, at the timing when the "N+13th cycle" ends from the timing T2 ("N+2th cycle") when the effect button 17 becomes operable (that is, after about 3 seconds after the effect button 17 becomes operable), the game It is assumed that the effect button 17 has been operated by the person.

Since both cases are SPSP reach variation effects (big hits), the display of a success image, the output of a success sound, and the temporary stop in the form of announcing the big wins of the effect pattern 70a start from timing T3.

Also, at timing T3, the movable effect device starts operating. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 98(f), the first movable member 73a and the second movable member 73b descend (largely descend) to the performance position, and the second movable member 73b moves in the horizontal direction.
Then, the movable effect device operates until timing T3-1.

In either case, the display of the success image and the temporary stop in the form of announcing the big win of the production pattern 70a are continued until the cycle variation of the "N+57th cycle" is completed.
That is, in the case 1, the success image is displayed from the "N+6th cycle" to the "N+57th cycle" (about 13 seconds), and a temporary stop is performed in a manner to notify the big win of the effect symbol 70a. , From "N+14th cycle" to "N+57th cycle" (about 11 seconds), the above-mentioned success image is displayed, and a temporary stop is performed in the form of informing the jackpot of the production pattern 70a, and case 1 is the case. 2, the period of temporary stop in the form of displaying the success image and notifying the big win of the production pattern 70a is longer (about 2 seconds).

In any case, the success sound is output for about 1.5 seconds (about 6 cycle fluctuations). No difference is made.

In addition, the operation of the movable effect device (standby position → effect position, effect position → standby position) is performed for about 8 seconds (about 32 cycle fluctuations) in any case, and the operation period (and number of cycle variations during operation).

Then, in any case, at the timing T5 when the cycle variation of the "N+85th cycle" is completed, the cycle variation of the special symbols is terminated and the stop display is performed.
Also, in any case, the effect symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing T6. That is, in case 1 and case 2, the cycle variation executed until the performance symbol is stopped is "1st cycle" to "N+85th cycle". Then, the stop display of the performance symbols is performed until timing T8.

That is, in the case of case 1, after starting the display of the success image, the output of the success sound, the temporary stop in the form of informing the big hit of the production pattern 70a, and the operation of the movable production device at the timing T3, the timing T6 (or T8), the number of cycle fluctuations executed until the production pattern stops displaying is "approximately 80 cycle fluctuations". output, temporary stop in the mode of informing the big hit of the production pattern 70a, and after starting the operation of the movable production device, the production pattern is stopped and displayed at timing T6 (or T8) Cycle executed until The number of fluctuations is "approximately 72 cycle fluctuations", and there is a difference in the number of cycle fluctuations between timing T3 and timing T6 (or T8).

On the other hand, in either case, the number of cycle fluctuations performed between the timing T2 when the production button 17 becomes operable and the timing T6 until the stop display of the production pattern starts or the timing T8 until the end. is "approximately 84 cycle fluctuations", and there is no difference in the number of cycle fluctuations between timing T2 and timing T6 (or T8).

In this way, when the timing of operating the production button 17 is different even though the same SPSP reach fluctuation production is performed, for example, a mode of displaying a success image performed between timing T3 and timing T4 and informing a big hit of the production pattern 70a. Since there is a difference (about 2 seconds) in the execution time of the temporary stop at , it is misunderstood that the performance content has changed at the timing of operating the performance button 17, or that a different SPSP reach fluctuation performance has been executed. There was a time when I gave
In contrast, for example, the number of cycle fluctuations between timing T2 and timing T6 or between timing T2 and timing T8 (strictly speaking, the number of cycle fluctuations between timing T2 and timing T5) is visually observed. If so, the same "approximately 84 cycle fluctuations" will be obtained in any case, so from the number of cycle fluctuations, it is possible to give a recognition that the contents of the production have changed at the timing of operating the production button 17, or to give a different SPSP. It is possible to prevent misunderstanding that the reach variation performance has been executed.

In addition, since the success sound is output for about 1.5 seconds (varying about 6 cycles) in any case, even if the timing of operating the effect button 17 is different, the player will recognize the big win. can be made

In addition, since the operation of the movable effect device is performed for about 8 seconds (varying about 32 cycles) in any case, even if the timing of operating the effect button 17 is different, the player is made aware of the big win. be able to.

Incidentally, both Case 1 and Case 2 describe the case where the operation means (effect button 17) is operated, but when the operation means (effect button 17) is not operated, timing T3 to timing T6 is even shorter than in case 2. For example, when the operation means (effect button 17) is not operated, the period from timing T3 to timing T6 is approximately 15 seconds (the cycle variation executed during the period is "approximately 60 cycle variation").

(Timing chart when operating means is operated)
FIG. 125 is a timing chart when operating means (for example, production button 17) is operated in the SPSP reach variation production. Incidentally, case 1 and case 2 are comparisons in the case of the same SPSP reach variation effect (jackpot) with different operation timings of the operating means.
For the sake of convenience, the explanation is given from the timing when it develops into the SPSP ready-to-win effect, but the structure for starting the fluctuation may be the structure explained in FIG. It is sufficient to use a configuration that

In addition, FIG. 125 will be described as an example when the jackpot SPSP reach fluctuation effect is executed in the "normal game state", but not limited to this, the same thing in the "time-saving game state" and "variable probability game state" may be performed.

In both case 1 and case 2, the SPSP ready-to-win effect is executed from timing T0 to timing T2. Timing T2 is the timing at which the decision image is displayed, and is the timing at which the effect button 17 becomes operable (the effective period of operation starts). At this time, it is assumed that the "N+2th cycle" cycle variation of the special symbols has started.

Then, in the case of case 1, the effect button 17 is operated by the player at the timing T3 when the cycle variation of the special symbol starts the "N+6th cycle". That is, at the timing when the "N+5th cycle" ends from the timing T2 ("N+2nd cycle") when the effect button 17 becomes operable (that is, after about 1 second after the effect button 17 becomes operable), the game It is assumed that the effect button 17 has been operated by the person.

On the other hand, in case 2, it is assumed that the effect button 17 is operated by the player at the timing T3 when the cycle variation of the special symbol starts the "N+14th cycle". That is, at the timing when the "N+13th cycle" ends from the timing T2 ("N+2th cycle") when the effect button 17 becomes operable (that is, after about 3 seconds after the effect button 17 becomes operable), the game It is assumed that the effect button 17 has been operated by the person.

Since both cases are SPSP reach variation effects (big hits), the display of a success image, the output of a success sound, and the temporary stop in the form of announcing the big wins of the effect pattern 70a start from timing T3.

At timing T3, the vibrating means (button driving device 17b) starts to operate. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 112(f), the effect button 17 vibrates due to the operation of the button driving device 17b.
Then, the vibrating means operates until timing T3-1.

In either case, the display of the success image and the temporary stop in the form of announcing the big win of the production pattern 70a are continued until the cycle variation of the "N+57th cycle" is completed.
That is, in the case 1, the success image is displayed from the "N+6th cycle" to the "N+57th cycle" (about 13 seconds), and a temporary stop is performed in a manner to notify the big win of the effect symbol 70a. , From "N+14th cycle" to "N+57th cycle" (about 11 seconds), the above-mentioned success image is displayed, and a temporary stop is performed in the form of informing the jackpot of the production pattern 70a, and case 1 is the case. 2, the period of temporary stop in the form of displaying the success image and notifying the big win of the production pattern 70a is longer (about 2 seconds).

In any case, the success sound is output for about 1.5 seconds (about 6 cycle fluctuations). No difference is made.

In addition, the operation of the vibration means is performed for about 8 seconds (about 32 cycle fluctuations) in any case, and there is no difference in the operation period (and the number of cycle fluctuations performed during the operation period) depending on the operation timing of the effect button 17. It is designed not to occur.

Then, in any case, at the timing T5 when the cycle variation of the "N+85th cycle" is completed, the cycle variation of the special symbols is terminated and the stop display is performed.
Also, in any case, the effect symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing T6. That is, in case 1 and case 2, the cycle variation executed until the performance symbol is stopped is "1st cycle" to "N+85th cycle". Then, the stop display of the performance symbols is performed until timing T8.

That is, in the case of case 1, after starting the display of the success image, the output of the success sound, the temporary stop in the form of informing the big hit of the production pattern 70a, and the operation of the vibration means at the timing T3, the timing T6 ( Alternatively, in T8), the number of cycle fluctuations executed until the production pattern stops displaying is "about 80 cycle fluctuations", whereas in case 2, the success image is displayed at timing T3, and the success sound is played. Output, temporary stop in the form of informing the big hit of the production pattern 70a, and cycle fluctuation executed from the start of the operation of the vibration means to the stop display of the production pattern at timing T6 (or T8) The number of times is "approximately 72 cycle fluctuations", and a difference occurs in the number of cycle fluctuations performed between timing T3 and timing T6 (or T8).

On the other hand, in either case, the number of cycle fluctuations performed between the timing T2 when the production button 17 becomes operable and the timing T6 until the stop display of the production pattern starts or the timing T8 until the end. is "approximately 84 cycle fluctuations", and there is no difference in the number of cycle fluctuations between timing T2 and timing T6 (or T8).

In this way, when the timing of operating the production button 17 is different even though the same SPSP reach fluctuation production is performed, for example, a mode of displaying a success image performed between timing T3 and timing T4 and informing a big hit of the production pattern 70a. Since there is a difference (about 2 seconds) in the execution time of the temporary stop at , it is misunderstood that the performance content has changed at the timing of operating the performance button 17, or that a different SPSP reach fluctuation performance has been executed. There was a time when I gave
In contrast, for example, the number of cycle fluctuations between timing T2 and timing T6 or between timing T2 and timing T8 (strictly speaking, the number of cycle fluctuations between timing T2 and timing T5) is visually observed. If so, the same "approximately 84 cycle fluctuations" will be obtained in any case, so from the number of cycle fluctuations, it is possible to give a recognition that the contents of the production have changed at the timing of operating the production button 17, or to give a different SPSP. It is possible to prevent misunderstanding that the reach variation performance has been executed.

In addition, since the success sound is output for about 1.5 seconds (varying about 6 cycles) in any case, even if the timing of operating the effect button 17 is different, the player will recognize the big win. can be made

In addition, since the operation of the vibrating means is performed for about 8 seconds (about 32 cycle fluctuations) in any case, even if the timing of operating the performance button 17 is different, the player can be made aware of the big win. can be done.

Incidentally, both Case 1 and Case 2 describe the case where the operation means (effect button 17) is operated, but when the operation means (effect button 17) is not operated, timing T3 to timing T6 is even shorter than in case 2. For example, when the operation means (effect button 17) is not operated, the period from timing T3 to timing T6 is approximately 15 seconds (the cycle variation executed during the period is "approximately 60 cycle variation").

(Timing chart when vibration effect occurs in each scene of variable effect)
126 and 127 are timing charts showing a case where a vibration effect occurs in each scene in the variable effect.
Specifically, it shows a vibration effect at the start of fluctuation, a vibration effect at the time of development, and a vibration effect at the time of big hit notification.
In addition, the vibration effect at the start of fluctuation is partly extracted from FIG. 78, the vibration effect at the time of development is partly extracted from FIG. excerpted. Therefore, the description of the part that overlaps with the excerpt source is omitted.

The vibration presentation at “at the start of fluctuation” indicates, for example, the vibration (for one second) at the start of fluctuation in the announcement of the character shown in FIG. 36 .
The vibration effect is in the middle of the first cycle, and at timing T7 when the effect pattern starts floating display and the special pattern starts to update and fluctuate, the vibrating means (button driving device 17b) operates and the effect button 17 is pressed. It is a production that vibrates.

Then, the vibration effect is continued until timing T9-1, which is in the middle of the fifth cycle. That is, the effect button 17 vibrates over about 4 cycles (about 1 second) from the middle of the 1st cycle to the middle of the 5th cycle.

It should be noted that the vibration effect at the "at the time of start of fluctuation" is performed from timing T7 to timing T9-1 in any of the case of winning the starting gate in the customer waiting state and the case of continuous fluctuation effect.
In addition, the vibration effect at "at the time of start of fluctuation" is executed based on the character object notice pattern described in FIG. It can be like this.

The vibration effect at the time of development indicates, for example, the vibration (for 3 seconds) during execution of the development effect in the blackout effect described with reference to FIG.
The vibration effect is, for example, at the start of the N-th cycle, and at the timing T3 when the developing sound is output as the effect sound, the vibrating means (the button driving device 17b) is activated to vibrate the effect button 17. be.

Then, the vibration effect is continued until timing T4, which is the end of the N+11th cycle. That is, the effect button 17 vibrates over about 12 cycles (about 3 seconds) from the start of the Nth cycle to the end of the N+11th cycle.

The vibration effect at the time of "big win notification" indicates, for example, the vibration (5 seconds) at the time of the big win notification in the determined effect described in FIG.
The vibration effect is, for example, at the start of the N+40th cycle, and at the timing T7 when the display of the success image, the output of the success sound, and the temporary stop in the form of notifying the big win of the effect pattern 70a starts. This is an effect in which the means (button driving device 17b) operates and the effect button 17 vibrates.

Then, the vibration presentation continues until timing T8-1, which is the end of the N+60th cycle. That is, the presentation button 17 vibrates over about 20 cycles (about 5 seconds) from the start of the N+40th cycle to the end of the N+60th cycle.

Comparing the vibration effect at “at the start of fluctuation”, the vibration effect at “at the time of development”, and the vibration effect at “at the time of notification of the jackpot”, the execution time of the vibration effect at “at the time of start of fluctuation” is the shortest, The execution time of the vibration effect is the longest at "at the time of notification".
In addition, the number of cycle fluctuations executed when the vibration effect is performed at the time of "at the start of fluctuation" is the smallest, and the number of cycle fluctuations executed when the vibration effect is performed at "at the time of the big win notification" is the most common.

In this way, if the number of cycle fluctuations executed during the vibration production is visually observed in addition to the execution time of the vibration production, for example, if the number of cycle fluctuations is small, it can be grasped that it is time to start the fluctuation. If the number of cycle fluctuations is large, it can be grasped that it is time to announce the big win. In other words, it is possible to grasp which phase in the variable production is being executed from the number of cycle fluctuations executed during the vibration production, which leads to an improvement in the amusement of the game.

Although not shown, in the scene shown in FIG. 126, the effect button light emitting LED 17c does not emit rainbow light, and in the scene shown in FIG. 127, the effect button light emitting LED 17c emits rainbow light. As a result, it is possible to grasp which aspect of the variable production is being executed from the light emission mode of the production button light emitting LED 17c, which leads to an improvement in the game interest.

Note that FIGS. 126 and 127 are merely examples, and the above effects can be obtained in other forms. For example, lengthen the execution time of the vibration effect at the time of "variation start" (with this, the number of cycle fluctuations during the vibration effect is also the largest), and shorten the execution time of the vibration effect at the time of "jackpot notification" ( Along with this, the number of cycle fluctuations during the vibration production may be minimized.

(Timing chart when operating means is operated)
FIG. 128 is a timing chart when operating means (for example, production button 17) is operated in the SPSP reach variation production. Incidentally, case 1 and case 2 are comparisons in the case of the same SPSP reach variation effect (jackpot) with different operation timings of the operating means.
For the sake of convenience, the explanation is given from the timing when it develops into the SPSP ready-to-win effect, but the structure for starting the fluctuation may be the structure explained in FIG. It is sufficient to use a configuration that

In addition, FIG. 128 will be described as an example when the jackpot SPSP reach variation effect is executed in the "normal game state", but not limited to this, the same thing in the "time-saving game state" and "variable probability game state" may be performed.

In both case 1 and case 2, the SPSP ready-to-win effect is executed from timing T0 to timing T2. Timing T2 is the timing at which the decision image is displayed, and is the timing at which the effect button 17 becomes operable (the effective period of operation starts). At this time, it is assumed that the "N+2th cycle" cycle variation of the special symbols has started.

Then, in the case of case 1, the effect button 17 is operated by the player at the timing T3 when the cycle variation of the special symbol starts the "N+6th cycle". That is, at the timing when the "N+5th cycle" ends from the timing T2 ("N+2nd cycle") when the effect button 17 becomes operable (that is, after about 1 second after the effect button 17 becomes operable), the game It is assumed that the effect button 17 has been operated by the person.

On the other hand, in case 2, it is assumed that the effect button 17 is operated by the player at the timing T3 when the cycle variation of the special symbol starts the "N+14th cycle". That is, at the timing when the "N+13th cycle" ends from the timing T2 ("N+2th cycle") when the effect button 17 becomes operable (that is, after about 3 seconds after the effect button 17 becomes operable), the game It is assumed that the effect button 17 has been operated by the person.

Since both cases are SPSP reach variation effects (big hits), the display of a success image, the output of a success sound, and the temporary stop in the form of announcing the big wins of the effect pattern 70a start from timing T3.

Further, at timing T3, the light emitting means (the frame lighting device 10, the board lighting device 74, and the effect button light emission LED 17c) start rainbow light emission. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 112(f), the frame illumination device 10, the board illumination device 74, and the effect button emission LED 17c start to emit rainbow light.
Then, the rainbow light emission is performed until timing T3-1.

In either case, the display of the success image and the temporary stop in the form of announcing the big win of the production pattern 70a are continued until the cycle variation of the "N+57th cycle" is completed.
That is, in the case 1, the success image is displayed from the "N+6th cycle" to the "N+57th cycle" (about 13 seconds), and a temporary stop is performed in a manner to notify the big win of the effect symbol 70a. , From "N+14th cycle" to "N+57th cycle" (about 11 seconds), the above-mentioned success image is displayed, and a temporary stop is performed in the form of informing the jackpot of the production pattern 70a, and case 1 is the case. 2, the period of temporary stop in the form of displaying the success image and notifying the big win of the production pattern 70a is longer (about 2 seconds).

In any case, the success sound is output for about 1.5 seconds (about 6 cycle fluctuations). No difference is made.

In addition, the rainbow light emission of the light emitting means is performed for about 8 seconds (about 32 cycle fluctuations) in any case, and the operation period (and the number of cycle fluctuations performed during the operation period) varies depending on the operation timing of the effect button 17. is prevented from occurring.

Then, in any case, at the timing T5 when the cycle variation of the "N+85th cycle" is completed, the cycle variation of the special symbols is terminated and the stop display is performed.
Also, in any case, the effect symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing T6. That is, in case 1 and case 2, the cycle variation executed until the performance symbol is stopped is "1st cycle" to "N+85th cycle". Then, the stop display of the performance symbols is performed until timing T8.

On the other hand, in either case, the number of cycle fluctuations performed between the timing T2 when the production button 17 becomes operable and the timing T6 until the stop display of the production pattern starts or the timing T8 until the end. is "approximately 84 cycle fluctuations", and there is no difference in the number of cycle fluctuations between timing T2 and timing T6 (or T8).

In this way, when the timing of operating the production button 17 is different even though the same SPSP reach fluctuation production is performed, for example, a mode of displaying a success image performed between timing T3 and timing T4 and informing a big hit of the production pattern 70a. Since there is a difference (about 2 seconds) in the execution time of the temporary stop at , it is misunderstood that the performance content has changed at the timing of operating the performance button 17, or that a different SPSP reach fluctuation performance has been executed. There was a time when I gave
In contrast, for example, the number of cycle fluctuations between timing T2 and timing T6 or between timing T2 and timing T8 (strictly speaking, the number of cycle fluctuations between timing T2 and timing T5) is visually observed. If so, the same "approximately 84 cycle fluctuations" will be obtained in any case, so from the number of cycle fluctuations, it is possible to give a recognition that the contents of the production have changed at the timing of operating the production button 17, or to give a different SPSP. It is possible to prevent misunderstanding that the reach variation performance has been executed.

In addition, since the success sound is output for about 1.5 seconds (varying about 6 cycles) in any case, even if the timing of operating the effect button 17 is different, the player will recognize the big win. can be made

In addition, since the rainbow light emission of the light emitting means is performed for about 8 seconds (about 32 cycle fluctuations) in any case, even if the timing of operating the performance button 17 is different, the player is made aware of the big win. be able to.

Incidentally, both Case 1 and Case 2 describe the case where the operation means (effect button 17) is operated, but when the operation means (effect button 17) is not operated, timing T3 to timing T6 is even shorter than in case 2. For example, when the operation means (effect button 17) is not operated, the period from timing T3 to timing T6 is approximately 15 seconds (the cycle variation executed during the period is "approximately 60 cycle variation").

(Timing chart when operating means is operated)
FIG. 129 is a timing chart when operating means (for example, production button 17) is operated in the SPSP reach variation production. Incidentally, case 1 and case 2 are comparisons in the case of the same SPSP reach variation effect (jackpot) with different operation timings of the operating means.
For the sake of convenience, the explanation is given from the timing when it develops into the SPSP ready-to-win effect, but the structure for starting the fluctuation may be the structure explained in FIG. It is sufficient to use a configuration that

It should be noted that FIG. 129 will be described as an example when the jackpot SPSP reach variation effect is executed in the "normal game state", but not limited to this, the same thing in the "time-saving game state" and "probability variable game state" may be performed.

In both case 1 and case 2, the SPSP ready-to-win effect is executed from timing T0 to timing T2. Timing T2 is the timing at which the decision image is displayed, and is the timing at which the effect button 17 becomes operable (the effective period of operation starts). At this time, it is assumed that the "N+2th cycle" cycle variation of the special symbols has started.

Then, in the case of case 1, the effect button 17 is operated by the player at the timing T3 when the cycle variation of the special symbol starts the "N+6th cycle". That is, at the timing when the "N+5th cycle" ends from the timing T2 ("N+2nd cycle") when the effect button 17 becomes operable (that is, after about 1 second after the effect button 17 becomes operable), the game It is assumed that the effect button 17 has been operated by the person.

On the other hand, in case 2, it is assumed that the effect button 17 is operated by the player at the timing T3 when the cycle variation of the special symbol starts the "N+14th cycle". That is, at the timing when the "N+13th cycle" ends from the timing T2 ("N+2th cycle") when the effect button 17 becomes operable (that is, after about 3 seconds after the effect button 17 becomes operable), the game It is assumed that the effect button 17 has been operated by the person.

Since both cases are SPSP reach variation effects (big hits), the display of a success image, the output of a success sound, and the temporary stop in the form of announcing the big wins of the effect pattern 70a start from timing T3.

In either case, the display of the success image and the temporary stop in the form of announcing the big win of the production pattern 70a are continued until the cycle variation of the "N+57th cycle" is completed.
That is, in the case 1, the success image is displayed from the "N+6th cycle" to the "N+57th cycle" (about 13 seconds), and a temporary stop is performed in a manner to notify the big win of the effect symbol 70a. , From "N+14th cycle" to "N+57th cycle" (about 11 seconds), the above-mentioned success image is displayed, and a temporary stop is performed in the form of informing the jackpot of the production pattern 70a, and case 1 is the case. 2, the period of temporary stop in the form of displaying the success image and notifying the big win of the production pattern 70a is longer (about 2 seconds).

The success sound is output for about 1.5 seconds (varying about 6 cycles) from timing T3 to timing T3-1 in any case. (the number of cycle variations that occur).

Then, in any case, at the timing T5 when the cycle variation of the "N+85th cycle" is completed, the cycle variation of the special symbols is terminated and the stop display is performed.
Also, in any case, the effect symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing T6. That is, in case 1 and case 2, the cycle variation executed until the performance symbol is stopped is "1st cycle" to "N+85th cycle". Then, the stop display of the performance symbols is performed until timing T8.

On the other hand, in either case, the number of cycle fluctuations performed between the timing T2 when the production button 17 becomes operable and the timing T6 until the stop display of the production pattern starts or the timing T8 until the end. is "approximately 84 cycle fluctuations", and there is no difference in the number of cycle fluctuations between timing T2 and timing T6 (or T8).

In this way, when the timing of operating the production button 17 is different even though the same SPSP reach fluctuation production is performed, for example, a mode of displaying a success image performed between timing T3 and timing T4 and informing a big hit of the production pattern 70a. Since there is a difference (about 2 seconds) in the execution time of the temporary stop at , it is misunderstood that the performance content has changed at the timing of operating the performance button 17, or that a different SPSP reach fluctuation performance has been executed. There was a time when I gave
In contrast, for example, the number of cycle fluctuations between timing T2 and timing T6 or between timing T2 and timing T8 (strictly speaking, the number of cycle fluctuations between timing T2 and timing T5) is visually observed. If so, the same "approximately 84 cycle fluctuations" will be obtained in any case, so from the number of cycle fluctuations, it is possible to give a recognition that the contents of the production have changed at the timing of operating the production button 17, or to give a different SPSP. It is possible to prevent misunderstanding that the reach variation performance has been executed.

In addition, since the success sound is output for about 1.5 seconds (varying about 6 cycles) in any case, even if the timing of operating the effect button 17 is different, the player will recognize the big win. can be made

Incidentally, both Case 1 and Case 2 describe the case where the operation means (effect button 17) is operated, but when the operation means (effect button 17) is not operated, timing T3 to timing T6 is even shorter than in case 2. For example, when the operation means (effect button 17) is not operated, the period from timing T3 to timing T6 is approximately 15 seconds (the cycle variation executed during the period is "approximately 60 cycle variation").

(Timing chart when operating means is operated)
FIG. 130 is a timing chart when operating means (for example, production button 17) is operated in the SPSP reach variation production. Incidentally, case 1 and case 2 show a comparison in the case where the operation timing of the operating means is different in the same SPSP reach variation effect (losing).
FIG. 130 is a diagram for explaining further details of timing T8 to timing T9 in FIG. Also, for the sake of convenience, the explanation is given from the timing of development to the SPSP ready-to-win effect, but the constitution explained with reference to FIG.

It should be noted that FIG. 130 will be described as an example of a case where the loss SPSP reach fluctuation effect is executed in the "normal game state", but not limited to this, the same thing in the "time-saving game state" and "probability variable game state" may be performed.

In both case 1 and case 2, the SPSP ready-to-win effect is executed from timing T0 to timing T2. Timing T2 is the timing at which the decision image is displayed, and is the timing at which the effect button 17 becomes operable (the effective period of operation starts). At this time, it is assumed that the "N+2th cycle" cycle variation of the special symbols has started.

Then, in the case of case 1, the effect button 17 is operated by the player at the timing T3 when the cycle variation of the special symbol starts the "N+6th cycle". That is, at the timing when the "N+5th cycle" ends from the timing T2 ("N+2nd cycle") when the effect button 17 becomes operable (that is, after about 1 second after the effect button 17 becomes operable), the game It is assumed that the effect button 17 has been operated by the person.

On the other hand, in case 2, it is assumed that the effect button 17 is operated by the player at the timing T3 when the cycle variation of the special symbol starts the "N+14th cycle". That is, at the timing when the "N+13th cycle" ends from the timing T2 ("N+2th cycle") when the effect button 17 becomes operable (that is, after about 3 seconds after the effect button 17 becomes operable), the game It is assumed that the effect button 17 has been operated by the person.

Since both cases are SPSP reach fluctuation effects (losing), display of a failure image, output of a failure sound, and provisional stop in a form of notifying a failure of the effect pattern 70a start from timing T3.

In addition, the display of the failure image and the temporary stop in the form of notifying the failure of the performance symbol 70a continue until the timing T3-1 when the cycle variation of the special symbol ends the "N+41th cycle" in any case.

That is, in case 1, it is assumed that the display of the failure image and the failure of the effect pattern 70a are notified over the "about 36 cycle fluctuation" (about 9 seconds) from "N+6th cycle" to "N+41th cycle". In the case of case 2, the above-mentioned failure image is displayed over "about 28 cycle fluctuations" (about 7 seconds) from "N+14th cycle" to "N+41th cycle", and the failure of the production pattern 70a is notified. In case 1, the period of temporary stop is longer (about 2 seconds) than in case 2. .

Then, from timing T3-1, a "switching image (eye-catching image)" is displayed as an effect image, and background change (change of background image) is performed. A “switching image (eye-catching image)” is, for example, an image in which a model name is written on an image that resembles a shutter, as shown in FIGS. is displayed, the SPSP reach background that was visible in FIG. 131(d) becomes invisible.

Also, during the display of the "switching image (eye-catching image)", the effect pattern 70a composed only of numbers is not visible. On the other hand, even while the "switching image (eye-catching image)" is displayed, the icon TI, the update fluctuation of the special symbol TZ, the first pending number display area SA and the second pending number display area SB are visible It is possible.

The display of the "switching image (eye-catching image)" is continued until timing T4, and the special symbol is displayed from timing T3-1 to timing T4 during the display of the "switching image (eye-catching image)". The number of cycle fluctuations of is "approximately 16 cycle fluctuations" in any case.

In addition, the cycle variation of the special symbol performed from when the effect button 17 becomes operable (start of the operation effective period) at timing T2 to when the "switching image (eye-catching image)" is displayed at timing T3-1. is "about 40 cycle fluctuations" in any case.

In either case, at timing T4, the display of the "switching image (eye-catching image)" ends, the horizontal scrolling background image of the normal background becomes visible, and the effect pattern 70a with the character is lost. It becomes possible to visually recognize the temporary stop in the mode of notifying.

Then, in any case, at the timing T5 when the cycle variation of the "N+85th cycle" is completed, the cycle variation of the special symbols is terminated and the stop display is performed.
Also, in any case, the effect symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing T6. That is, in case 1 and case 2, the cycle variation executed until the performance symbol is stopped is "1st cycle" to "N+85th cycle". Then, the stop display of the performance symbols is performed until timing T8.

In either case, the timing T3-1 at which the "switching image (eye-catching image)" is displayed to the timing T6 until the stop display of the production pattern starts, or the timing T8 until the end. The number of cycle fluctuations is "approximately 44 cycle fluctuations", and there is no difference in the number of cycle fluctuations between timing T3-1 and timing T6 (or T8).

In this way, when the timing of operating the production button 17 is different with the same SPSP reach fluctuation production, for example, a failure image is displayed between the timing T3 and the timing T3-1, and the failure of the production pattern 70a is notified. Since there is a difference (approximately 2 seconds) in the execution time of the temporary stop in the mode of doing, the recognition that the content of the production has changed at the timing of operating the production button 17, or a different SPSP reach fluctuation production was executed. I sometimes gave the misunderstanding.
On the other hand, for example, after the effect button 17 becomes operable (the operation effective period starts) at timing T2, it is performed until the "switching image (eye-catching image)" is displayed at timing T3-1. If the number of cycle fluctuations is visually observed, it will be the same "about 40 cycle fluctuations" in any case. It is possible to prevent the misunderstanding that a different SPSP reach variation performance has been executed.

Also, for example, if the number of cycle fluctuations between timing T2 and timing T6 or between timing T2 and timing T8 is visually observed, the same "about 84 cycle fluctuations" is obtained in any case, so the cycle From the number of times of fluctuation, it is possible to prevent giving recognition that the contents of the performance have changed at the timing of operating the performance button 17 or misunderstanding that different SPSP reach variation performance is executed.

In addition, both cases 1 and 2 are described when the operation means (effect button 17) is operated, but when the operation means (effect button 17) is not operated, timing T3 to timing T3 The period of -1 is even shorter than in case 2. For example, when the operation means (effect button 17) is not operated, the period from timing T3 to timing T3-1 is approximately 5 seconds (the cycle variation executed during the period is "approximately 20 cycle variation").

The “switching image (eye-catching image)” is not limited to that shown in FIG. 131 . For example, a white-out image or a black-out image may be used. Moreover, not only the image but also the image may be temporarily shielded by operating a movable member (shielding member).

(Timing chart in a specific variable production pattern)
Figure 132 is a timing chart in a specific variation production pattern (variation production pattern a, variation production pattern b) when the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command is "special figure fluctuation pattern A (variation time = about 38 seconds)" showing.
In addition, when the special figure variation pattern designation command is "special figure variation pattern A", the process of step E321 in FIG. In other words, it is possible to execute either the variation performance pattern a or the variation performance pattern b for the "special figure variation pattern A".

In both the variable effect pattern a and the variable effect pattern b, the timing T0 is the start timing of the variable display, and is the timing at which the first cycle of the special symbol starts. Here, horizontal scrolling of the normal background is displayed as the background image, and "normal fluctuation effect" (for example, update fluctuation of all the effect symbols 70a) is executed as the content of the change effect.

Then, timing T3 is the timing at which the normal reach variation effect is started after finishing the normal variation effect. Then, timing T5 is the timing when the normal reach variation effect is finished and the SP reach is developed. At this time, it is assumed that the cycle variation of the special symbols has finished the "100th cycle" cycle variation. In other words, in any variable effect pattern, the number of cycles of the special symbol that is performed from the start of the variable display (timing T0) to the start of the SP reach (timing T5) is "approximately 100 cycle fluctuations". .

The timing T5 in the variable effect pattern a is the timing when the "typhoon reach" as the SP reach effect is started. That is, the variable effect pattern a is a variable effect pattern in which "typhoon reach" is defined as the content of the variable effect.

Timing T5 in the variable effect pattern b is the timing at which the "heavy snow reach" as the SP reach effect is started. That is, the variable effect pattern b is a variable effect pattern in which "heavy snow reach" is defined as the content of the variable effect.

That is, when the special figure variation pattern specification command is "special figure variation pattern A", either "typhoon reach" or "heavy snow reach" is executed, and for one special figure variation pattern Therefore, a plurality of variable productions can be executed. As a result, while keeping the special figure variation pattern in the main control board 110 to the minimum required, it is possible to enrich the variation performance to be executed.

Timing T6 is the timing when the SP reach is finished in both the variable effect pattern a and the variable effect pattern b. Then, the timing T7 is the timing at which the special symbol is stopped and displayed, and at this time, it is assumed that the cycle variation of the special symbol has finished the "152nd cycle".

In both the variable performance pattern a and the variable performance pattern b, the timing T8 is the timing at which the stop display of the performance symbols and the special symbols starts, and the timing T10 is the timing at which the stop display of the performance symbols and the special symbols ends. be.

That is, in both the variable effect pattern a and the variable effect pattern b, after the SP reach effect starts (timing T5), the effect symbol starts the stop display (timing T8) or ends the stop display (timing The number of cycles of the special symbols performed by T10) is "approximately 52 cycles".

In other words, in the case of "special figure variation pattern A", cycle variation (about 38 seconds) of special symbols from "1st cycle" to "152nd cycle" is performed from the start of the variation display to the execution of the stop display. will be taken.

In this way, in the fluctuation production pattern a and the fluctuation production pattern b, although the contents of the fluctuation production in the SP reach are different between the "typhoon reach" and the "heavy snow reach", the period from the start of the fluctuation display to the start of the SP reach is The number of cycle variations of the special symbols performed in 1 is both "about 100 cycle variations". In addition, the number of cycles of the special symbols performed from the start of the SP reach to the stop display of the effect symbols is both "approximately 52 cycle variations". In other words, the number of cycle fluctuations of the special symbols performed from the start of the variable display to the stop display of the performance symbols is "about 152 cycle fluctuations" for both of the variable performance patterns.

The player recognizes that the execution is based on different "special figure fluctuation patterns" due to the difference in the content of the fluctuation effects between when "Typhoon Reach" is executed and when "Heavy Snow Reach" is executed. Or, it may be recognized that the degree of expectation for the execution of the jackpot game is different.
On the other hand, for example, from the start of fluctuation to the start of SP reach as described above, from the start of SP reach to the stop display of the production pattern, from the start of fluctuation to the stop display of the production pattern Any variable production pattern Since the number of cycle fluctuations is the same, if the number of cycle fluctuations is visually observed, it can be recognized that it is executed based on the common "special figure fluctuation pattern", and the degree of expectation that the jackpot game will be executed can be recognized as common.

The game state in which the variable effect pattern a and the variable effect pattern b are executed may be any game state. For example, it may be executed in a normal game state, may be executed in a time-saving game state, or may be executed in a variable probability game state. Further, it may be executed in any one game state, may be executed in any two game states, or may be executed in all game states.

Further, the game state in which the variable performance pattern a and the variable performance pattern b are executed may be set as the normal game state, and the game may be executed in a plurality of modes in the normal game state.
For example, when the special figure variation pattern A is received in the mode A of the normal game state, the variation production pattern a is executed, and when the special figure variation pattern A is received in the mode B of the normal game state, the variation Effect pattern b may be executed. As a result, even if the mode is different and the variation production pattern for each mode is executed, if the number of cycle fluctuations is visually observed, it can be recognized that it is executed based on the common "special figure fluctuation pattern". It is possible to recognize that the degree of expectation for execution of the jackpot game is also common.

(Timing chart when dialogue notice occurs in variable production)
FIG. 133 is a timing chart when a speech announcement occurs in the variable effect. Case 1 and Case 1 are the same variable effect pattern, and indicate that the operation timing of the effect button 17 in the dialogue announcement is different.
Note that FIG. 133 will be described as an example of a dialogue notice, but it may be replaced with a cut-in notice.

It should be noted that FIG. 133, as an example, in the variable effect in the "normal game state", but will be described as a case where the dialogue notice occurs, but not limited to this, the same thing in the "time-saving game state" and "probability variable game state" may be performed.

In both case 1 and case 2, the timing T0 is the start timing of the variable display, and is the timing when the first cycle of the special symbol starts.
In either case, at the timing T2 when the sixth cycle of the special symbols starts to change, the dialog preview image is displayed as the effect image, and the operation valid period of the effect button 17 starts.
It should be noted that the "word preview image" is a display of an image simulating the effect button 17 (see FIG. 134).

In case 1, the effect button 17 is operated by the player at the timing T4 when the ninth cycle of the special symbols is completed.
On the other hand, in case 2, it is assumed that the effect button 17 is operated by the player at the timing T4 when the cycle variation of the 13th cycle of the special symbol is finished.

Then, when the effect button 17 is operated by the player, the display of the dialog preview image is ended, and the dialog pattern image (here, dialog pattern 2) is displayed as the effect image.
The display time of the dialog pattern image (here, dialog pattern 2) is common to both cases 1 and 2 (for example, 2 seconds), and is executed while the dialog pattern image (here, dialog pattern 2) is being displayed. The number of cycle fluctuations in case 1 and case 2 is common (for example, about 8 cycle fluctuations).

Then, in any case, at the timing T5 when the 58th cycle variation of the special symbol is completed, the effect symbol finishes the update variation and the pre-stop operation is started.
In either case, at the timing T6 during the 60th cycle of the special symbols, the pre-stop operation of the performance symbols is completed and a temporary stop is started.

In either case, the stop display of the special symbols is started at the timing T7 when the 60th cycle of the special symbols is completed. Then, at timing T8, the stop display of the effect symbols and the special symbols starts, and at the timing T10, the stop display of the effect symbols and the special symbols ends.

In the case of case 1, the effect button 17 is operated by the player, and the dialog pattern image (here, dialog pattern 2) is displayed (timing T4) until the stop display of the effect pattern starts (timing T8). Alternatively, the number of cycles of the special symbols performed until the stop display of the performance symbols ends (timing T10) is "approximately 51 cycle variations".

On the other hand, in the case of case 2, the effect button 17 is operated by the player, and the dialog pattern image (here, dialog pattern 2) is displayed (timing T4) until the stop display of the effect pattern starts (timing T8). ), or the number of cycles of the special symbols performed until the stop display of the performance symbols ends (timing T10) is "approximately 47 cycle variations".

Also, in any case, after the operation effective period of the production button 17 starts (timing T2), until the production pattern starts the stop display (timing T8), or until the production pattern ends the stop display (timing The number of cycle variations of the special symbols performed at T10) is "about 55 cycle variations".

In this way, when the timing of operating the effect button 17 is different with the same variable effect, for example, after the dialogue pattern image (here, dialogue pattern 2) is displayed (timing T4), the effect pattern is stopped and displayed. is started (timing T8) or until the stop display of the production pattern is finished. Sometimes I gave the misunderstanding that the production was executed.
In contrast, for example, the number of cycle fluctuations between timing T2 and timing T6 or between timing T2 and timing T8 (strictly speaking, the number of cycle fluctuations between timing T2 and timing T5) is visually observed. If so, the same "about 55 cycle fluctuations" will be obtained in any case, so from the number of cycle fluctuations, it may be recognized that the content of the production has changed at the timing when the production button 17 is operated, or different fluctuations. It is possible to prevent the misunderstanding that the production has been executed.

In addition, the display time of the dialogue pattern image (here, dialogue pattern 2) is common to case 1 and case 2 (for example, 2 seconds), and is executed while the dialogue pattern image (here, dialogue pattern 2) is being displayed. Since the number of cycle fluctuations in case 1 and case 2 is also common (for example, about 8 cycle fluctuations), even if the timing of operating the effect button 17 is different, the dialogue pattern image (here, dialogue pattern 2) is displayed. Players can be made aware of this.

In both case 1 and case 2, the operation means (the production button 17) is described, but if the operation means (the production button 17) is not operated, the dialogue announcement is not executed. . In other words, if the operation means (effect button 17) is operated, the event of cycle change during the execution of the advance notice of dialogue occurs, but if the operation means (effect button 17) is not operated, the cycle during the execution of the advance notice of the dialogue occurs. The event of change does not occur.

(Timing chart when dialogue notice and decision production occur in variable production)
FIG. 134 is a timing chart in the case where a dialogue announcement and a final effect are generated in the variable effect. 133 shows further details of the advance notice of dialogue between timing T1 and timing T2, and further details of the final effect between timing T5 and timing T6 of FIG. 92 are shown.
For the sake of convenience, in the variable effect pattern 1, the case where the dialogue notice and the final effect occur is shown. The same can be said for the case where the production is determined by
134 may be replaced with a cut-in notice (in this case, the cut-in notice is compared with the final effect), or the final effect may be replaced with a cut-in notice (in this case , It will be a comparison between the dialogue notice and the cut-in notice).

It should be noted that FIG. 134, as an example, in the variable effect in the "normal game state", but not limited to this, but not limited to this, in the "time-saving game state" and "variable game state" A similar thing may be done.

Timing T0 is the start timing of the variable display, and is the timing at which the first cycle of the special symbols is started.
Then, at the timing T1-1, a suggestive image (fade-in image) is displayed, suggesting that an image simulating the effect button 17 in the dialog announcement will be displayed. At this time, it is assumed that the cycle variation of the special symbol has started the cycle variation of the second cycle.

Then, the suggestive image (fade-in image) is displayed for about 4 cycle variations (about 1 second) from the start of the cycle variation of the 2nd cycle to the end of the cycle variation of the 5th cycle. As shown in FIG. 134, the suggestive image (fade-in image) is an image imitating the effect button 17 displayed in a light color. It changes to dark color.

Then, at timing T2, display of the suggestive image (fade-in image) ends, an image imitating the production button 17 (dialogue preview image) is displayed, and the effective period of operation of the production button 17 starts. At this time, it is assumed that the cycle variation of the special symbol starts the "sixth cycle" cycle variation.

At timing T4, the effect button 17 is operated by the player, and a dialogue pattern image (here, dialogue pattern 2) is displayed as the effect image.
In other words, it is assumed that the effect button 17 is operated by the player after about 1 second from the start of the operation effective period of the effect button 17 .

In this way, in the case of a dialog announcement, a suggestive image (fade-in image) suggesting that an image simulating the effect button 17 will be displayed is displayed for approximately four cycles (approximately one second).

Then, timing T6 is the timing at which the deciding image in the deciding effect is displayed, and a suggestive image (fade-in image) is displayed.

Specifically, from timing T5, display of a suggestion image (fade-in image) that suggests that an image simulating the effect button 17 in the final effect is displayed is started. At this time, it is assumed that the cycle variation of the special symbol starts the cycle variation of the "N+1th cycle".

Then, the suggestive image (fade-in image) is displayed over about 16 cycle variations (about 4 seconds) from the start of the N+1 cycle variation to the end of the N+16 cycle variation. Note that the suggestive image (fade-in image) is a spiral button introduction image BDG, as shown in FIG. 134 .

Then, at timing T6, display of the suggestive image (fade-in image) ends, an image imitating the production button 17 (dialogue preview image) is displayed, and the effective period of operation of the production button 17 starts. At this time, it is assumed that the cycle variation of the special symbol starts the "N+17th cycle" cycle variation.

In this way, in the case of the determined effect, a suggestive image (fade-in image) suggesting that an image simulating the effect button 17 is displayed is displayed for approximately 16 cycles (approximately 4 seconds).

The display time of the suggestive image (fade-in image) is longer and the number of cycle fluctuations performed during the display is longer in the final effect than the dialogue announcement and the final effect.
As a result, by visually observing the number of cycle changes performed during the display of the suggestive image (fade-in image), it becomes easy to predict whether the dialogue announcement or the final effect will be executed later.
In addition, it becomes easy to predict which stage in the variable rendering is due to the difference in the number of cycle variations performed during the display of the suggestive image (fade-in image).

In addition, in FIG. 134, it is assumed that the suggestive image (fade-in image) is displayed for a longer time and the number of cycle fluctuations during the display is greater in the final effect than in the dialogue announcement and the final effect. The presenting is not limited to this, and the suggestive image (fade-in image) may be displayed for a shorter period of time, and the number of cycle fluctuations performed during display may also be reduced.

(Timing chart when operating means is operated)
FIG. 135 is a timing chart when operating means (for example, production button 17) is operated in the SPSP reach variation production. In addition, FIG. 135 shows a case where meter pattern 1 is performed and a case where meter pattern 2 is performed in the meter effect which is one effect of the SPSP reach effect. ) shows a comparison when the operation timing of the operation means is different.
For the sake of convenience, the explanation is given from the timing when it develops into the SPSP ready-to-win effect, but the structure for starting the fluctuation may be the structure explained in FIG. It is sufficient to use a configuration that

In addition, FIG. 135 will be described as an example when the jackpot SPSP reach variation effect is executed in the "normal game state", but not limited to this, the same thing in the "time-saving game state" and "variable probability game state" may be performed.

In any pattern, the timing T0 is the timing at which the SPSP ready-to-win effect is executed. At this time, it is assumed that the cycle variation of the special symbol starts the "N-th cycle" cycle variation.

In both patterns, the timing T2 is the timing at which the meter effect is started as the SPSP ready-to-win effect. "Meter effect" is, as shown in FIG. 136(c), an effect in which a task (introductory image and introductory sound shown in FIG. 135) such as "If you hit the button repeatedly and the meter reaches MAX, you win!" Every time the player operates the effect button 17, the meter rises, and when the meter reaches MAX, it is definitely notified that the player has won a big win.

In addition, the meter pattern in the meter effect has a plurality of meter patterns. ), the meter becomes MAX (meter pattern 1 in FIGS. 135 and 136), and the meter becomes MAX when the production button 17 is operated 10 times (pressing the production button 17 10 times). Also, a pattern (meter pattern 2 in FIGS. 135 and 136) where the meter becomes MAX due to one operation input of the production button 17 (pressing the production button 17 once) have. In addition, there are also a plurality of meter patterns for cases of failure (not shown).

Then, in any pattern, when timing T3 is reached, the final image is displayed as the effect image, and the promotional sound is output as the sound effect (see FIG. 136(d)).
In both patterns, the effect button 17 is operated by the player from timing T4.

In the case of meter pattern 1, since the meter is maximized when the performance button 17 is operated five times, a success image is displayed at timing T5 when the performance button 17 is operated five times from timing T4. , a success sound is output, and a temporary stop is started in a mode informing that the effect symbol is a big hit (see FIG. 136(f)). At this time, it is assumed that the cycle variation of the special symbol starts the cycle variation of "N+30th cycle".
That is, the number of cycles of the special symbols executed from the start of the meter effect at the timing T2 to the announcement of the big win at the timing T5 is "approximately 28 cycle fluctuations".

On the other hand, in the case of the meter pattern 2, since it is a pattern in which the meter becomes MAX when the effect button 17 is operated once, at the timing T5 when the effect button 17 is operated once from the timing T4, the success image is displayed. It is displayed, a success sound is output, and a temporary stop is started in a manner informing that the effect symbol is a big hit (see FIG. 136(f)). At this time, it is assumed that the cycle variation of the special symbol starts the "N+14th cycle" cycle variation.
That is, the number of cycles of the special symbols executed from the start of the meter effect at the timing T2 to the announcement of the big win at the timing T5 is "approximately 12 cycle fluctuations".

Then, in any pattern, at the timing T7 when the cycle variation of the "N+85th cycle" is completed, the cycle variation of the special symbol is terminated and the stop display is performed.
Also, in any case, the effect symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing T8. In other words, both when meter pattern 1 is executed and when meter pattern 2 is executed, the cycle variation executed from the start of the meter effect to the stop display of the effect symbol is "approximately 84 cycle fluctuations. ”.

In this way, when the meter pattern is different even though the meter effect is the same, for example, there is a difference in time between the start of the meter effect (timing T2) and the notification of the big win (timing T5). The timing (skill) of the player operating the production button 17 may cause the player to recognize that the timing of the big win notification changes, and the player may be distrustful.
In contrast, for example, the number of cycle fluctuations between timing T2 and timing T8 or between timing T2 and timing T10 (strictly speaking, the number of cycle fluctuations between timing T2 and timing T7) is visually observed. If there is, the same "approximately 84 cycle fluctuations" will occur in any case, so the timing of the jackpot notification can change depending on the timing (skill) of the player's operation of the production button 17, etc., based on the number of cycle fluctuations. It can be made to recognize that it is not a thing, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrust.

In the example of FIG. 135, the operating means (effect button 17) is described as having been operated, but the case where the meter pattern 1 is not operated and the meter pattern 2 is not operated. , the display period of the successful image from the timing T5 to the timing T6 and the temporary stop period in the form of notifying the big hit of the effect symbol 70a are the same time. That is, the number of cycles of the special symbols performed between the timing T5 and the timing T6 is also the same number. As a result, regardless of which meter pattern is executed, it is possible to guarantee the display period of the success image and the temporary stop period in the form of informing the big win of the production pattern 70a, and to allow the player to judge the big win. The results can be reliably grasped.

Note that the meter pattern may be a meter pattern for "long press" in which the effect button 17 is continuously operated for a predetermined time or longer. For example, in meter pattern 1, the "long press" time until the big win is reported is "3 seconds", and in meter pattern 2, the "long press" until the big win is reported. The time may be "5 seconds".

(Concrete example in which the state after the power failure is restored is a variable display of special symbols)
FIG. 137 is a diagram showing a specific example in which the state after recovery from power failure is during variable display of special symbols. Incidentally, FIG. 137 follows the contents of FIG. 54, a power failure occurs when the fluctuation display of the special figure fluctuation pattern corresponding to the normal fluctuation as the special figure fluctuation pattern is executed, and then the power is restored indicates the case.
In addition, the variation time of the special figure variation pattern corresponding to the normal variation is set to "10 seconds".

Timing T0 is the timing when a power failure occurs and the power is turned off while the variation display of the special figure variation pattern corresponding to the normal variation is being performed.
In addition, since it is assumed that the cycle variation of the special symbol reaches the timing T0 when the cycle variation of the 12th cycle is executed, the power failure occurred about 3 seconds after the start of the variation display.

Timing T1 is the timing when the power is restored and turned on. At the timing T1, the initial screen is displayed on the main display device 70, and the cycle variation of the special symbols of the "13th cycle" is started. The "13th cycle" special symbol cycle variation is the continuation of the "12th cycle" cycle variation that was performed when the power failure occurred at timing T0.

Then, from timing T2 to timing T9, the return operation and initial operation of the movable effect device described with reference to FIG. 54 and the like are executed. Note that the return operation and the initial operation have already been described with reference to FIG. The time required for the return operation is about 3 seconds, and the time required for the initial operation is about 11 seconds (see FIGS. 59, 61, 62, etc.).

Timing T6 is the timing when the special symbol starts the cycle variation of the 40th cycle, and the timing when the sub-display device starts the initial operation.
Then, when timing T7 is reached, the special symbol ends the cycle variation of the 40th cycle and starts stop display.

When the special symbol determination command is received at timing T7-1, a stop screen (effect symbol 753) is displayed on the main display device 70, and a stop sound is output from the audio output device.
Then, at timing T9, the initial operation of the sub-display device ends.

That is, in the example of FIG. 137, the power failure occurred at timing T0 about 3 seconds after the start of the variable display, and when the power was turned on at timing T1, the remaining fluctuation time would be about 7 seconds. .
On the other hand, the time required for the return operation is about 3 seconds, and the time required for the initial operation is about 11 seconds. will do.
That is, when the initial operation is finished (timing T9), the variable display of the special symbols is finished, and the main display device 70 is in a state where the stop screen (effect symbol 753) is displayed.
It should be noted that if execution of the next variable display is pending, the next variable display will be started regardless of whether the initial operation is finished. Therefore, it is an event that the initial action may end during execution of the next variable display, and when the initial action ends, the next variable display stop screen (for example, the effect pattern 468) is displayed. This is a possible event.

In this way, when the initial action is executed during the variable display, if the number of times of cycle fluctuation of the special pattern performed during the operation of the movable effect device is visually observed, the special pattern is displayed during the initial action and during the effect action. 59, 61, 62, etc.), it is recognized that the action of the movable effect device executed from timing T4 is the initial action from the difference in the number of cycle changes. be able to. As a result, it is possible to prevent excessive expectations that the variable display being executed will result in a big win due to the operation of the movable effect device during the variable display.

In addition to the difference in the number of cycle fluctuations, during the initial operation, the LED of the movable effect device is extinguished and the initial operation is performed. It can be recognized that the motion of the movable effect device is the initial motion.

Also, in FIG. 137, especially in the case where the variable display is completed earlier than the initial operation, when the initial operation is completed (timing T9), the variable display of the special symbol is completed, and the main display device 70 is set to a state in which a stop screen (effect pattern 753) is displayed. This eliminates the need to control the display content of the main display device 70 in accordance with the end timing of the initial operation (for example, displaying a stop screen when the initial operation is completed), thereby preventing the display control from becoming complicated. .

In addition, by displaying a stop screen (effect pattern 753) on the main display device 70 without waiting for the end of the initial operation, the player is quickly informed of the result of the big hit determination, thereby distrusting the player. You can prevent it from being lost.

Note that FIG. 137 describes power recovery as an example, but the same can be said for power-on. Further, when the above-described momentary power failure occurs during the variable display, the recovery operation and the initial operation are not executed. In this way, not all "blackouts" result in an event such as that shown in Figure 137, but momentary blackouts are excluded.

(Concrete example in which the state after the power failure is restored is a variable display of special symbols)
FIG. 138 is a diagram showing a specific example in which the state after power failure recovery is during variable display of special symbols. Incidentally, FIG. 138 follows the contents of FIG. 54, a power failure occurs when the fluctuation display of the special figure fluctuation pattern corresponding to the SPSP reach fluctuation is executed as a special figure fluctuation pattern, and then the power supply It shows the case of recovery.
In addition, the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation pattern corresponding to the SPSP reach fluctuation is assumed to be "70 seconds".

Timing T0 is the timing when a power failure occurs and the power is turned off while the variation display of the special figure variation pattern corresponding to the SPSP reach variation is being performed.
In addition, since it is assumed that the cycle variation of the special symbol reaches the timing T0 when the cycle variation of the 12th cycle is executed, the power failure occurred about 3 seconds after the start of the variation display.

Timing T1 is the timing when the power is restored and turned on. At the timing T1, the initial screen is displayed on the main display device 70, and the cycle variation of the special symbols of the "13th cycle" is started. The "13th cycle" special symbol cycle variation is the continuation of the "12th cycle" cycle variation that was performed when the power failure occurred at timing T0.

Then, from timing T2 to timing T7, the return operation and the initial operation of the movable effect device described with reference to FIG. 54 and the like are executed. Note that the return operation and the initial operation have already been described with reference to FIG. The time required for the return operation is about 3 seconds, and the time required for the initial operation is about 11 seconds (see FIGS. 59, 61, 62, etc.).

Timing T7 is the timing at which the initial operation of the sub-display device is completed and all the initial operations are completed. At this time, the main display device 70 continues to display the "restoring" screen that had been displayed since timing T2.

That is, in the example of FIG. 138, the power failure occurred at timing T0 about 3 seconds after the start of the variable display, and when the power was turned on at timing T1, the remaining variation time was about 67 seconds. .
On the other hand, the time required for the return operation is about 3 seconds, and the time required for the initial operation is about 11 seconds. will do.
That is, when the initial operation is finished (timing T7), the variable display of the special symbol is continuously executed, and the main display device 70 is in a state where the screen during restoration is displayed.
In the example of FIG. 138, it is assumed that a power failure occurred 3 seconds after the start of fluctuation. , the next variable display is started regardless of whether the initial operation is finished. Therefore, it is an event that the initial action may end during the execution of the next variable display, and when the initial action ends, the next variable display stop screen (for example, the effect pattern 468) is displayed. This is a possible event.

In this way, when the initial action is executed during the variable display, if the number of times of cycle fluctuation of the special pattern performed during the operation of the movable effect device is visually observed, the special pattern is displayed during the initial action and during the effect action. 59, 61, 62, etc.), it is recognized that the action of the movable effect device executed from timing T4 is the initial action from the difference in the number of cycle changes. be able to. As a result, it is possible to prevent excessive expectations that the variable display being executed will result in a big win due to the operation of the movable effect device during the variable display.

In addition to the difference in the number of cycle fluctuations, during the initial operation, the LED of the movable effect device is extinguished and the initial operation is performed. It can be recognized that the motion of the movable effect device is the initial motion.

Also, in FIG. 138, especially in the case where the initial action ends before the variable display, when the initial action ends (timing T7), the variable display of the special symbol is continuously executed, The main display device 70 is set to a state in which the restoration screen is displayed. This eliminates the need to control the display content of the main display device 70 in accordance with the end timing of the initial operation (for example, end the recovery screen when the initial operation is completed), and prevents display control from becoming complicated. can.

Also, by ending the initial action without waiting for the end of the variable display, the initial action can be quickly ended, and the player can be prevented from misunderstanding that the performance action is being performed.

Note that FIG. 138 illustrates the power recovery as an example, but the same applies to power-on. Further, when the above-described momentary power failure occurs during the variable display, the recovery operation and the initial operation are not executed. Thus, rather than all "blackouts" resulting in an event such as that of FIG. 138, momentary blackouts are excluded.

(Specific example 1 in the case where the variable production starts during the customer waiting demonstration production)
139 to 141, a specific example 1 in which the variable effect is started during the customer waiting demonstration effect will be described.

FIG. 139 is a timing chart when the variable effect starts during the customer waiting demonstration effect, and FIGS. Here, the explanation will be given for the production mode A, but since the production modes B to F are basically the same, the explanation will be omitted.

First, before the timing of T0 in FIG. 139, it is in a customer waiting state in which the variable display of special symbols is not executed, and the first special symbol display 60 displays a lost special symbol (only the rightmost LED lighting) is displayed, and the main display device 70 displays a variable standby screen waiting for execution of the variable effect. Specifically, the mode A background image is horizontally scrolled (effect operation), the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed at "537", and the first pending number display area SA and the second pending number display area "0" is displayed in SB. In addition, the cross key 19 can be used to adjust the volume and the amount of light.

Then, at timing T0 in FIG. 139, when a demonstration waiting period (for example, 60 seconds) elapses from the reception of the customer waiting state designation command, a customer waiting demonstration effect is started for a predetermined period (for example, 80 seconds). Specifically, in front of the production pattern 70a and behind the special pattern TZ and the reserved display area (first reserved number display area SA, second reserved number display area SB), a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds) The customer waiting demonstration image begins to fade in (from a transparent state to an opaque state gradually), and the production pattern 70a gradually becomes invisible (see FIG. 140(a)).

In addition, since the special symbol TZ and the reservation display area (first reservation number display area SA, second reservation number display area SB) are displayed in front of the customer waiting demonstration image, they cannot be visually recognized by the customer waiting demonstration image (shielded However, the background image, the effect pattern 70a, the pending icon display area, and the icon display area are not visible (shielded) by the customer waiting demonstration image.

Next, at the timing of T1 in FIG. 139, when the fade-in of the customer waiting demonstration image is completed, the effect symbol 70a is hidden (invisible state), and the output of the demonstration effect sound is started. Specifically, the customer waiting demo background is scrolling (demonstration action), and the character image of "DEMO in progress" is displayed, and the model-specific production (display of model name, introduction of model-specific characters, demo movie of variable production) , display of an addiction prevention image for the player, etc.) are performed (see FIG. 140(b)).

After that, at the timing of T2 in FIG. 139, when the game ball wins the first start port 45 while the manufacturer name of the gaming machine is being displayed following the model-specific effect, the first reserved number becomes "1" and the first special The symbol holding display 63 becomes "1" display, and the winning command (first special symbol storage designation command, first look-ahead designation command) is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130 (FIG. 140 ( c) see).

Then, at the timing of T3 in FIG. 139, when the first reservation number changes from "1" to "0" and a jackpot determination is made, a start command (special symbol A memory specification command, a game state specification command, a special design specification command, a special figure variation pattern specification command) are transmitted. Also, the first special symbol holding display 63 becomes "0" display, and the first special symbol variation display (first cycle variation) is started on the first special symbol display 60 (Fig. 140(d) reference).

Furthermore, since the predetermined period has passed since the effect control board 130 received the command at the time of winning, the first reservation number display area SA and the sub-first reservation display 83 become "1" display, the back side of the customer waiting demonstration image A non-animated pending icon HI (white icon) in the normal display mode is additionally displayed in the first display portion of the first pending icon display area 70B on the side, and the production pattern 70a ( "537" indicating the result of the previous variable effect) is displayed without fading in, and the output of the first winning sound (or the second winning sound) is started. Also, the output of the customer waiting demonstration sound is stopped (see FIG. 140(d)).

When the pending icon is additionally displayed in a non-animated state during the customer waiting state, the pending icon may be operatively displayed from the first posture (initial posture), or may be operatively displayed from the second posture. can be In addition, when additionally displaying the pending icon without going through the customer waiting demonstration image, the operation is displayed from the first posture or the second posture, and when additionally displaying the pending icon through the customer waiting demonstration image, , the motion may be displayed from the first posture.

Further, the effect symbol 70a ("537" indicating the result of the previous variable effect) before the start of the customer waiting demo effect may be always displayed behind the customer waiting demo image. Even if there is, it will be in a state where visual recognition is restricted by the customer waiting demonstration image.

After that, at the timing of T4 in FIG. 139 (the timing of the third display change in the first cycle variation), when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the effect control board 130 received the command at the start, the first pending number display area The SA and the first sub-suspension display 83 are displayed as "0", and the first sub-variation display 81 starts to change display (flashing: represented by ⊚ in the figure) (see FIG. 140(e)).

In addition, the customer waiting demonstration image fades out (from an opaque state gradually to a transparent state and disappears) over a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds). 537”) can be visually recognized (confirmed/recognized), and the pending icon HI can be visually recognized. Also, the pending icon HI displayed in the first display portion of the first pending icon display area 70B starts shift display (reduced display) to the icon display area 70C. Further, the variable performance is started, the performance symbol 70a starts floating display as a pre-variation operation, and the special symbol TZ starts update variation (scrolling, switching display). In addition, the sound volume adjustment and light amount adjustment by the cross key 19 are restricted to a state (adjustment not possible), and the audible output of the variable BGM (here, normal BGM corresponding to the non-reach effect) is started from the voice output device 9 ( See FIG. 140(e)).

As for the special symbol TZ, regardless of the number that was stopped and displayed, when the update fluctuation is started, "123" → "234" → "345" → "456" → "567" → "678" → Nine patterns of image data are switched frame by frame in the order of "789"→"891"→"912"→"123" . Therefore, when the customer waiting demonstration image starts fading out, the update fluctuation of the special symbol TZ is immediately started, so the number of the special symbol TZ (the customer waiting effect starts The time during which it is possible to visually recognize (confirm/recognize) the previous stop result before being executed is shortened.

Further, when the volume value image or the light quantity value image is displayed by operating the cross key 19 before the fade-out of the customer waiting demonstration image starts, the volume adjustment using the cross key 19 is performed by the start of the variable effect. However, the volume value image and the light amount value image are deleted before the fade-out of the customer waiting image ends. In other words, when erasing the volume value image and the light intensity value image, they are erased in a shorter time (earlier timing) than the fade-out of the customer waiting image.

Further, regardless of whether the customer is waiting or not, when a variable effect (variable display of effect patterns) or a variable display of special symbols is started, the cross key 19 is executed at the same timing regardless of the type of the variable effect pattern. It is regulated in a state where volume adjustment and light intensity adjustment are not possible (adjustment not possible).

Then, at the timing of T5 in FIG. 139 (during the second cycle variation), when the customer waiting demo image fades out and the customer waiting demo image is completely hidden, a specific effect is executed at the start of the variable effect. At the start of the effect production (one type of jackpot announcement production) is started. Specifically, the notice effect image YE having a size that restricts the visual recognition of the central effect pattern 70a during floating display is displayed, and the background image and the effect pattern 70a are visually recognized by gradually expanding the notice effect image YE. An effect (including sound effect output) to be regulated (shielded) is performed (see FIG. 140(f)).

After that, at the timing of T6 in FIG. 139, when a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has passed since the start of the variable effect, the volume adjustment and the light amount adjustment by the cross key 19 become possible (adjustable), and the timing of T7. , when the shift display (decrease display) of the pending icon HI ends, it is displayed as the icon TI (white icon), the output of the winning sound ends, and the notice effect image YE regulates the visibility of the three production patterns 70a. size (see FIG. 141(g)).

Furthermore, at the timing of T8 in FIG. 139 (during the fourth cycle variation), the floating display as the pre-variation operation of the production design 70a ends, and the scrolling display (update variation) of the production design 70a is started. The effect image YE makes it difficult (impossible) to recognize the change start order of the production pattern 70a (see FIG. 141(h)), and at the timing of T9, the notice effect image YE is erased (see FIG. 141(i)). .

Note that the notice effect image YE is gradually enlarged to restrict the visual recognition of the production pattern 70a (the fluctuation start order becomes difficult to visually recognize). may be displayed in a size that In addition, although a part of the effect pattern 70a is displayed in a visible state to such an extent that the change start order becomes difficult to be visually recognized by the notice effect image YE, the entire effect pattern 70a is displayed in an invisible state. You may make it

Further, the notice effect image YE is displayed at the timing when the fade-out of the customer waiting demo image is completed, but it is displayed after a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed after the customer waiting demo image has completely faded out. may be made.

In addition, in the model-specific production, multiple characters are made to appear (display), but for the character with the highest appearance rate in the model-specific production, the effect that is highly expected to hit the jackpot is executed during the variable production. It is also easier to appear in In addition, in the model-specific effect, the display period of the immersion prevention image (for example, 5 seconds) is longer than the display period of the model name (for example, 3 seconds), and the immersion prevention image is displayed after the display of the model name. While the model name is displayed, it is also possible to display the immersion prevention image during the display of the model name (from the middle of the display of the model name).

Also, the demonstration standby period until the second and subsequent customer waiting demo effects (after the end of the customer waiting demo effect) is longer than the demo waiting period (for example, 60 seconds) until the first customer waiting demo effect after the end of the variable effect. may be shorter (eg, 50 seconds).

In addition, instead of fading in the customer waiting demo image from the state where the production pattern 70a etc. are displayed, the screen is blacked out for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds longer than the eye-catching production described later). The customer waiting demo image may be faded in after the effect image such as the effect pattern 70a is shielded.

(Concrete example 2 in the case where the variable effect starts during the customer waiting demonstration effect)
Concrete example 2 in which the variable effect is started during the customer waiting demonstration effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 139 and 142. FIG.

In FIG. 142, the basic flow is the same as the specific example 1 in the case where the variable production starts during the customer waiting demonstration production shown in FIGS. It is different in that a mode change effect for making it is executed. Therefore, only the part related to the difference will be explained here.

At the timing of T4 in FIG. 139 (the timing of the third display change in the first cycle variation), when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the production control board 130 received the command at the start, the first pending number display area SA and The sub-first holding display 83 becomes "0" display, and the variable display (blinking: represented by ⊚ in the figure) on the sub-first variable display 81 is started (see FIG. 142(e)).

In addition, the customer waiting demonstration image begins to fade out (becomes from an opaque state gradually to a transparent state and disappears), and it is visually confirmed that the production pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ have the same number ("537"). Recognition) becomes possible, and visual recognition of the pending icon HI becomes possible. Also, the pending icon HI displayed in the first display portion of the first pending icon display area 70B starts shift display (reduced display) to the icon display area 70C. Further, the variable performance is started, the performance symbol 70a starts floating display as a pre-variation operation, and the special symbol TZ starts update variation (scrolling, switching display). In addition, volume adjustment and light intensity adjustment by the cross key 19 are restricted to a state in which they cannot be adjusted (adjustment not possible), and audible output of fluctuating BGM (here, normal BGM) is started from the audio output device 9 (see FIG. 142(e)). ).

If the volume value image or the light amount image is displayed by operating the cross key 19 before the fade-out of the customer waiting demo image starts, the volume adjustment using the cross key 19 is performed by starting the variable effect. However, the volume value image and the light amount value image are deleted before the fade-out of the customer waiting image ends. In other words, when erasing the volume value image and the light intensity value image, they are erased in a shorter time (earlier timing) than the fade-out of the customer waiting image.

Further, regardless of whether the customer is waiting or not, when a variable effect (variable display of effect patterns) or a variable display of special symbols is started, the cross key 19 is executed at the same timing regardless of the type of the variable effect pattern. It is regulated in a state where volume adjustment and light intensity adjustment are not possible (adjustment not possible).

Then, at the timing of T5 in FIG. 139 (during the second cycle variation), when the customer waiting demo image fades out and the customer waiting demo image is completely hidden, a specific effect is executed at the start of the variable effect. A mode change effect (a kind of jackpot announcement effect) is started. Specifically, a mode change image MC (here, instead of a whiteout image with a high likelihood of winning a big win, a blackout with a low expectation of a big win 142(f)).

Also, at the timing of T6 in FIG. 139, when a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds) has passed since the start of the variable effect, the state where volume adjustment and light amount adjustment by the cross key 19 are possible (adjustable) is restored. .

After that, at the timing of T7 in FIG. 139, when the shift display (decrease display) of the hold icon HI ends, the icon TI (white icon) is displayed, the output of the winning sound ends, and the mode change image MC changes to three. It becomes the size which restricted visual recognition of the production|presentation design 70a (refer FIG.142(g)).

When the entire screen of the main display device 70 is blocked by the mode change image, the effect mode is switched from the effect mode A to the effect mode B, and the background image, effect pattern 70a, and , the icon (suspended icon) changes to one corresponding to the effect mode B.

Furthermore, at the timing of T8 in FIG. 139 (during the fourth cycle variation), the floating display as the pre-variation operation of the effect symbol 70a ends, and the scroll display (update variation) of the effect symbol 70a is started. The mode change image MC makes it difficult (impossible) to recognize the variation start order of the effect pattern 70a (see FIG. 142(h)), and at the timing of T9, the mode change image MC is framed out on the left side of the screen of the main display device 70. is erased (see FIG. 142(i)).

Regarding the mode change image MC, the visual recognition of the production patterns 70a is gradually restricted (the order in which the variation starts becomes difficult to be visually recognized), but the visual recognition of the three production patterns 70a is restricted from the beginning. may be displayed. In addition, although the mode change image MC makes it difficult to visually recognize the variation start order, a part of the effect pattern 70a is displayed in a visible state, but the entire effect pattern 70a is displayed in an invisible state. You may make it

In addition, the mode change image MC is displayed at the timing when the fade-out of the demo image waiting for customers is completed, but it is displayed after a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds) has passed since the fade-out of the demo image waiting for customers is completed. may be made.

Thus, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 139 to 142, when the variable display (cycle variation) of the special symbols is started from the customer waiting state, there are no restrictions on volume adjustment and light amount adjustment by the cross key 19. It does not occur or is not restricted (adjustability is maintained), but when the variable performance (variable display of performance symbols) is started in response to the start of the variable display of special symbols (cycle variation), the cross key 19 There are restrictions on volume adjustment and light amount adjustment due to or are subject to restrictions (cannot be adjusted). Therefore, the period during which the player can adjust the volume and the amount of light can be secured as long as possible, and the interest in the game can be improved. In addition, even if volume adjustment or light amount adjustment is being performed, it is possible to make the player recognize the start of the variable presentation.

Note that when the start of the variable effect causes or limits the volume adjustment and light amount adjustment by the cross key 19 (becomes unadjustable), even if any type of variable effect is executed, At the same timing, the volume adjustment and light amount adjustment by the cross key 19 are restricted or subject to restriction (cannot be adjusted). Therefore, the player is not forced to perform complicated work such as changing the timing of volume adjustment and light amount adjustment by the cross key 19 each time the variable performance is executed, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 139 to 142, when the variable display (cycle variation) of the special symbols is started from the customer waiting state, there are no restrictions on volume adjustment and light amount adjustment by the cross key 19. Or it is not restricted (adjustability is maintained), but in response to the start of the special symbol variable display (cycle variation), the special symbol variable display (variable display on the sub first variable display 81) is started. In some cases, the volume adjustment and light amount adjustment by the cross key 19 are restricted or subject to restriction (adjustment is disabled). Therefore, the period during which the player can adjust the volume and the amount of light can be secured as long as possible, and the interest in the game can be improved. In addition, even if volume adjustment or light amount adjustment is being performed, it is possible to make the player recognize the start of the variable presentation.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 139 to 142, when the variable display (cycle variation) of the special symbols is started from the customer waiting state, there are no restrictions on volume adjustment and light amount adjustment by the cross key 19. Alternatively, there is no restriction (adjustability is maintained), but when the decrease display (shift display) of the pending icon is performed according to the start of the variable display (cycle variation) of the special symbol, the volume adjustment by the cross key 19 and light intensity adjustment is restricted or subject to restriction (cannot be adjusted). Therefore, the period during which the player can adjust the volume and the amount of light can be secured as long as possible, and the interest in the game can be improved. In addition, even if the volume adjustment or the light amount adjustment is performed, it is possible to make the player recognize the decrease in the number of holdings.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 139 to 142, when the variable display (cycle variation) of the special symbols is started from the customer waiting state, there are no restrictions on volume adjustment and light amount adjustment by the cross key 19. Alternatively, there is no restriction (adjustability is maintained), but a variable BGM (may be a variable start sound, a notice sound, etc.) is audibly output according to the start of the variable display (cycle variation) of the special symbol. In some cases, the volume adjustment and light amount adjustment by the cross key 19 are restricted or subject to restriction (cannot be adjusted). Therefore, the period during which the player can adjust the volume and the amount of light can be secured as long as possible, and the interest in the game can be improved. Also, it is possible to reduce the control load at the start of the audible output of the fluctuating BGM.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 139 to 142, when the game ball wins the starting port during the customer waiting state and the pending icon (holding number display area, sub-holding indicator) is increased and displayed , the volume adjustment and the light amount adjustment by the cross key 19 are not restricted or are not restricted (adjustability is maintained). Therefore, the period during which the player can adjust the volume and the amount of light can be secured as long as possible, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 139 to 142, before the change display (update change) after the action before the change of the effect pattern is started, the restrictions on volume adjustment and light amount adjustment by the cross key 19 are lifted. (becomes adjustable). Therefore, the period during which the player can adjust the volume and the amount of light can be secured as long as possible, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, as a restriction on volume adjustment and light intensity adjustment that occurs after the start of the variable display (cycle variation) of the special symbol, it was assumed that the volume adjustment and light intensity adjustment using the cross key 19 were not possible, but the volume value image and the light intensity value image may not be displayed (deleted if displayed), or the volume value image and the light amount image displayed in the front layer of the production pattern 70a may be displayed in the rear layer of the production pattern 70a ( (superimposed in front of the background image and behind the effect pattern 70a), restrictions may be imposed on volume adjustment and light amount adjustment by the cross key 19. FIG.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 139 to 142, the variable effect is started with the same display result for the plurality of performance symbols and the plurality of special symbols, and the plurality of performance symbols and the plurality of special symbols. Ends with the same display result, and the production pattern is hidden (visual recognition is restricted). When it is started, a plurality of production patterns and a plurality of special patterns are displayed so as to be visible during the fade-out of the customer waiting demonstration image, but the time until the plurality of special patterns are displayed fluctuating (update fluctuation) Also, the time it takes for a plurality of production patterns to change and display (update change after the action before change) is longer. Therefore, it is possible to immediately recognize that the variable display of the special symbol is started by the special symbol while confirming the stop result of the previous variable performance. In addition, it is possible to improve the performance effect at the start of fluctuation by the performance pattern, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 139 to 142, during execution of the customer waiting demo effect in which the effect pattern is hidden (visual recognition is restricted), the pending memory increases and the variable effect is started. In this case, the special design will start changing display (update change) before the end of the fade-out of the demo image waiting for customers, and the change display (update change after the action before change) will start for the production design after the end of the fade-out of the demo image waiting for customers. It is supposed to start. Therefore, it is possible to immediately recognize that the variable display of the special symbol is started by the special symbol while confirming the stop result of the previous variable performance. In addition, it is possible to improve the performance effect at the start of fluctuation by the performance pattern, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 139 to 142, during execution of the customer waiting demo effect in which the effect pattern is hidden (visual recognition is restricted), the pending memory increases and the variable effect is started. , the special symbol will start changing display (update change) before the end of the fade-out of the demo image waiting for customers, and the pending icon will be visible during the fade-out of the demo image waiting for customers, and the end of the fade-out of the demo image waiting for customers Decrease display (shift display to the icon) ends later. Therefore, it is possible to accurately recognize that the reserved memory has decreased while immediately recognizing that the variable display of the special symbols has started, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 139 to 142, during execution of the customer waiting demo effect in which the effect pattern is hidden (visual recognition is restricted), the pending memory increases and the variable effect is started. In this case, the pending icon is visible while the customer waiting demo image fades out, and before the end of the customer waiting demo image fading out, the decreasing display (shift display to the icon) starts, and the production pattern is the customer waiting After the fade-out of the demo image ends, the change display (update change after the pre-change operation) is started. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the reserved memory has decreased before the performance pattern starts to be displayed in a variable manner, so that the player can easily understand the progress of the game and can improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 139 to 142, when the pending memory increases during the execution of the customer waiting demo effect and the variable effect is started, the pending icon is visually recognized while the customer waiting demo image fades out. In addition, after the customer waiting demo image fades out, the decrease display (shift display to the corresponding icon) will start, and the production pattern will start changing display after the decrease display of the pending icon ends. It has become. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the reserved memory has decreased before the performance pattern starts to be displayed in a variable manner, so that the player can easily understand the progress of the game and can improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 139 to 142, when the pending memory increases during execution of the customer waiting demonstration image and the variable effect is started, the corresponding icon is displayed after the customer waiting demonstration image fades out. The display is completed (the shift display from the pending icon is completed), and the variable display of the production pattern is started after the display of the icon is completed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the reserved memory has decreased before the performance pattern starts to be displayed in a variable manner, so that the player can easily understand the progress of the game and can improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 139 to 142, when the pending memory increases during the execution of the customer waiting demonstration image and the variable effect is started, the special symbol is displayed before the end of the fade-out of the customer waiting demonstration image. The change of the display mode in the cycle variation of is performed multiple times. Therefore, it is possible to end the customer waiting demonstration performance in a natural flow while recognizing that the variable display of the special symbols has been started, and to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 139 to 142, when the pending memory increases during execution of the customer waiting demonstration image and the variable effect is started, it becomes visible while the customer waiting demonstration image fades out. As shown, the production pattern is displayed without fading in (so as to be superimposed behind the customer waiting demo image). Therefore, the customer waiting demonstration effect can be ended in a natural flow, and the variable effect can be started without delay, thereby making it possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 139 to 142, along with expecting a big hit according to the start of the variable production, a specific notice production (starting effect production, mode change production) that regulates the visibility of the production pattern can be executed, and when the pending memory increases during the execution of the customer waiting demo effect and the variable effect is started, the effect pattern is not faded in so that it can be seen while the customer waiting demo image is fading out. It is displayed (so as to be superimposed on the back side of the customer waiting demonstration image), and after the production design becomes visible, a specific advance notice production is started. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that a specific advance notice performance has started due to the start of the variable performance while confirming the stop result of the previous variable performance, thereby improving the amusement of the game. It becomes possible.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 139 to 142, even during the display of the customer waiting demonstration image in which the production pattern is hidden (viewing is restricted), the special pattern is displayed by the customer waiting demonstration image. Visual recognition is not restricted (displayed so as to be superimposed in front of the customer waiting demo image). Therefore, in the case of displaying a demonstration movie of a production (for example, one scene of SP/SPSP ready-to-win production, one scene of winning success production, one scene of jackpot production, etc.) executed during variable production as customer waiting demonstration production. Also, it is possible to make the player recognize that it is in a customer waiting state in which the variable performance is not executed, and to avoid the inconvenience that the operation of the game machine is lowered due to the player's misunderstanding.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 139 to 142, even during the display of the customer waiting demo image in which the effect pattern is hidden (visual recognition is restricted), the number of pending display areas (first pending The pending number displayed in the number display area SA and the second pending number display area SB) is not restricted by the customer waiting demonstration image (displayed so as to be superimposed in front of the customer waiting demonstration image). . Therefore, in the case of displaying a demonstration movie of a production (for example, one scene of SP/SPSP ready-to-win production, one scene of winning success production, one scene of jackpot production, etc.) executed during variable production as customer waiting demonstration production. Even in , it is possible to assist the player to recognize that it is in a customer waiting state in which the variable effect is not executed, and it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the operation of the gaming machine is reduced due to the player's misunderstanding. Become.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 139 to 142, when the variable effect is started and the variable display of the special symbols (updated variation) is started, the start time (previous stop) Regardless, the predetermined combination of special symbols ("123") will be the first dot (starting point) after the update, and the numbers in each column will be updated one by one from that dot. . Therefore, the variable display of the special symbols can be controlled regardless of the previous stop result, and the control load can be reduced.

(Specific example of recovering from a power outage that occurred during a variable performance)
143 and 144, a specific example of recovering from a power failure that occurred during the variable presentation will be described.
FIG. 143 is a timing chart in the case of recovering from a power interruption that occurred during the variable effect, and FIG. 144 is a diagram showing examples of effects at various timings in FIG. In addition, here, in order to restore to the normal game state, the effect mode A is controlled.

First, at a timing before the timing of T0 in FIG. 143, a power interruption occurs during the variable display of the special symbol with the first reserved number of "2", and then the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is stopped. When restarted, the main display device 70 and the sub display device 71 display a read screen (initial screen) including the characters "NOW ROADING". At this time, volume adjustment and light amount adjustment by the cross key 19 are disabled.

Then, from the main control board 110 in which the control state of the game has been restored to the state before the occurrence of the power failure, to the effect control board 130, a power-on command (here, a command indicating that the special symbol is being displayed fluctuatingly 2 power supply restoration designation command, first special design memory designation command, second special design memory designation command) are transmitted. In addition, the information display on the main information display 59 is resumed, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 60 is resumed from the state before the power was cut off, and the first special symbol reservation display is resumed. The display of the first pending number of "2" at 63 is also resumed.

After that, when a predetermined period of time elapses after the effect control board 130 receives the power-on command, the above-described power restoration notification and the initial operation (including the return operation) of various accessories (board accessories, frame accessories) are performed. At the same time, information display on the sub information display 80 is started.

At this time, on the main display device 70 during the power restoration notification, the power restoration image displayed on the entire screen is set as the highest layer, and various effect images (mode A background image, effect that is the initial result at the time of power restoration) Design 70a and special design TZ, pending icon HI corresponding to the pending number and production mode at the time of power restoration, pending number according to the pending number at the time of power restoration, etc.) are set in a lower layer than the power restoration image. Image data for notification is displayed (see FIG. 144(a)).

Next, at the timing of T1 in FIG. 143, when the special symbol fluctuation time elapses, a stop command (symbol determination command) is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board . In addition, the first special symbol display 60 stops displaying the lost special symbol. At this time, if the effect control board 130 cannot normally receive the stop command, the main display device 70 continues to display the power restoration image (see FIG. 144(a)).

Then, at the timing of T2 in FIG. 143, when the first reservation number changes from "2" to "1" and a jackpot determination is made, a start command (special symbol A memory specification command, a game state specification command, a special design specification command, a special figure variation pattern specification command) are transmitted. Also, the first special symbol reserve display 63 becomes "1" and the first special symbol display 60 starts the first special symbol variation display (first cycle variation). At this time, the display of the power recovery image continues on the main display device 70 (see FIG. 144(b)).

Thereafter, at the timing of T3 in FIG. 143 (the timing of the third display change in the first cycle variation), when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the effect control board 130 received the command at the start, the first pending number display area SA and the first sub-suspension display 83 display "1", the first sub-variation display 81 starts to display a variable display (blinking: represented by ◎ in the figure), and the output of the power restoration notification sound stops. (See FIG. 144(c)).

In addition, when the power recovery image starts fading out (gradually becoming transparent from an opaque state and disappearing), it is visually confirmed that the production pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ have the same number (“753”).・Recognition) becomes possible, and visual recognition of the pending icon HI becomes possible. Also, the pending icon HI displayed in the first display portion of the first pending icon display area 70B starts shift display (reduced display) to the icon display area 70C. Further, the variable performance is started, the performance symbol 70a starts floating display as a pre-variation operation, and the special symbol TZ starts update variation (scrolling, switching display). Also, the audible output of the fluctuating BGM is started from the audio output device 9 (see FIG. 140(c)).

Next, at the timing of T4 in FIG. 143 (during the second cycle fluctuation), when the fade-out of the power restoration image is completed and the power restoration image is completely hidden, as a specific effect executed at the start of the fluctuation effect At the start of the effect production (one kind of jackpot announcement production) is started. Specifically, the notice effect image YE having a size that restricts the visual recognition of the central effect pattern 70a during floating display is displayed, and the background image and the effect pattern 70a are visually recognized by gradually expanding the notice effect image YE. An effect (including sound effect output) to be regulated (shielded) is performed (see FIG. 144(d)).

After that, at the timing of T5 in FIG. 143, when a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has passed since the start of the variable effect, the volume adjustment and the light amount adjustment by the cross key 19 become possible (adjustable), and the timing of T6. , when the shift display (decrease display) of the pending icon HI ends, it is displayed as the icon TI (white icon), the output of the winning sound ends, and the notice effect image YE regulates the visibility of the three production patterns 70a. size (see FIG. 144(e)).

Furthermore, at the timing of T7 in FIG. 143 (during the fourth cycle variation), the floating display as the pre-variation operation of the effect symbol 70a ends, and the scroll display (update variation) of the effect symbol 70a is started. Due to the notice effect image YE, it becomes difficult (impossible) to recognize the change start order of the production pattern 70a (see FIG. 144(f)), and at the timing of T8, the notice effect image YE is erased.

Thus, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 143 and 144, the fluctuation display (cycle fluctuation) of the special pattern is started while the power recovery image is being displayed, which causes restrictions on volume adjustment and light amount adjustment by the cross key 19. In this case, the state in which the volume adjustment and the light amount adjustment by the cross key 19 are restricted continues for a predetermined time. Therefore, after the player recognizes that the variable display (including variable performance) of the special symbols has started, the volume adjustment and the light amount adjustment can be performed, and the interest in the game can be improved. .

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 143 and 144, when the variable effect is started during the display of the power restoration image in which the effect pattern is not displayed (visual recognition is restricted), the power restoration image fades out. A plurality of production patterns and a plurality of special patterns are displayed so that they can be visually recognized inside, but a plurality of production patterns are variably displayed (before fluctuation The time until the update fluctuation after the operation is longer. Therefore, it is possible to immediately recognize that the variable display of the special symbol is started by the special symbol while confirming the stop result of the previous variable performance. In addition, it is possible to improve the performance effect at the start of fluctuation by the performance pattern, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 143 and 144, when the variable effect is started during the display of the power restoration image in which the effect pattern is hidden (visual recognition is restricted), the special pattern is the power supply recovery. The variable display (updated variation) is started before the fade-out of the image is finished, and the variable display (updated variation after the action before the fluctuation) is started after the fade-out of the power restoration image is finished. Therefore, it is possible to immediately recognize that the variable display of the special symbol is started by the special symbol while confirming the stop result of the previous variable performance. In addition, it is possible to improve the performance effect at the start of fluctuation by the performance pattern, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 143 and 144, when the variable effect is started during the display of the power restoration image in which the effect pattern is hidden (visual recognition is restricted), the special pattern is the power supply recovery. Fluctuation display (update variation) starts before the image fades out, the pending icon is visibly displayed during the power restoration image fade out, and the decrease display (shift display to the icon) appears after the power restoration image fades out. ) is terminated. Therefore, it is possible to accurately recognize that the reserved memory has decreased while immediately recognizing that the variable display of the special symbols has started, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 143 and 144, when the fluctuation effect is started while the power recovery image is being displayed, the hold icon is visibly displayed while the power recovery image is fading out, and the power Decrease display (shift display to the icon) is started after the fade-out of the restoration image is finished, and variable display of the production pattern is started after the decrease display of the pending icon is finished. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the reserved memory has decreased before the performance pattern starts to be displayed in a variable manner, so that the player can easily understand the progress of the game and can improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 143 and 144, when the fluctuation effect is started while the power restoration image is being displayed, the display of the relevant icon is completed after the power restoration image fades out (after the power restoration image fades out). The shift display is completed), and the variable display of the effect pattern is started after the display of the corresponding icon is completed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the reserved memory has decreased before the performance pattern starts to be displayed in a variable manner, so that the player can easily understand the progress of the game and can improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 143 and 144, when the fluctuation effect is started during the display of the power restoration image, the change in the display mode in the cycle fluctuation of the special symbol before the end of the fade-out of the power restoration image is performed multiple times. Therefore, it is possible to end the customer waiting demonstration performance in a natural flow while recognizing that the variable display of the special symbols has been started, and to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 143 and 144, when the variable effect is started while the power restoration image is being displayed, the effect pattern is faded in so as to be visible while the power restoration image is fading out. (so as to be superimposed on the back side of the customer waiting demonstration image). Therefore, the customer waiting demonstration effect can be ended in a natural flow, and the variable effect can be started without delay, thereby making it possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 143 to 144, along with expecting a big hit according to the start of the variable production, a specific notice production (starting effect production, mode change production) that regulates the visual recognition of the production pattern. can be executed, and if the variable effect is started while the power restoration image is displayed, the effect pattern will not fade in so that it can be seen while the power restoration image fades out (behind the customer waiting demo image ), and a specific advance notice effect is started after the effect pattern becomes visible. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that a specific advance notice performance has started due to the start of the variable performance while confirming the stop result of the previous variable performance, thereby improving the amusement of the game. It becomes possible.

In addition, regardless of whether it is a normal game state or a specific game state (time saving state), if the variation display of the special symbol is a shortened variation, the operation before the variation of the effect symbol is not performed (or If the fluctuation display of the special symbol that is first started after the power is restored is a shortened fluctuation, during the fade-out of the power restoration image (or the customer The variable display of the production pattern is started at an earlier timing than when the variable production is executed during the waiting production. In other words, rather than starting a variable effect during the execution of the customer waiting effect, if the variable effect is started during the display of the power restoration image, the time until the effect pattern is displayed fluctuating (update fluctuation) It becomes easy to become short. In this way, after the power is restored and the player understands that the variable display of the special symbols will be performed, the performance can be smoothly progressed, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

(Timing chart pertaining to command transfer for normal variation production)
Using FIG. 145, a specific example relating to command transfer of normal variation production will be described.

Figure 145 (1) is a timing chart when the production control board 130 can normally receive the command relating to the normal fluctuation production, and Figure 145 (2) is the case when the command relating to the normal fluctuation production cannot be normally received. It is a timing chart.
145(1) and 145(2), it is assumed that the game progresses on the same time axis, and the time lag of the presentation caused by command transfer is not considered here.

First, FIG. 145(1) will be described.
At the timing of T0, a customer waiting state in which variable display of special symbols is not executed, the background image is normally scrolled horizontally on the main display device 70, and the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed. . In addition, BGM is not output, and various lighting devices (the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74) emit light while waiting for customers.

Then, at the timing of T1, when the variable display of the special symbol is started, the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130 is sent a command at the start of the normal variable effect (special symbol storage designation command, game state designation command, Special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command) are transmitted. When the production control board 130 normally receives this command at the start, the normal fluctuation production is started, the production pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ start the fluctuation display (pre-variation operation, update fluctuation), and during the non-reach production Corresponding normal BGM (a type of variable BGM) is reproduced from the beginning of the song and output, and various lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 74) perform normal variable light emission.

After that, at the timing of T2, when the center production pattern 70a temporarily stops following the left and right production patterns 70a that were temporarily stopped earlier, a stop sound is output, and various lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 74 ) performs light emission at the time of failure, and the output of the stop sound ends at the timing of T3.

Also, at the timing of T4, when the special symbol fluctuation time elapses, a stop command (symbol determination command) is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130 . When the performance control board 130 normally receives this stop time command, the performance pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ are stopped and displayed, and various lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 74) emit light during stop. .

Then, at the timing of T5, when the stop time of the special symbols has passed and the customer waiting state is entered, a customer waiting state designation command is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130. - 特許庁When the effect control board 130 normally receives this customer waiting state designation command, various lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 74) and the effect button 17 emit light during customer waiting.

After that, at the timing of T6, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has passed since the customer waiting state started (receipt of the customer waiting state designation command), the output continued because it was after the end of the normal fluctuation effect. The output of normal BGM (one type of variable BGM) is stopped in the middle of the song (in the middle of the song data).

In addition, at the timing of T8 after the timing of T7, when the variable display of the special symbol is started, the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130 The command at the start of the normal variable effect (special symbol storage designation command, gaming state specification command, special design specification command, special figure variation pattern specification command) is transmitted. When the production control board 130 normally receives this command at the start, the normal fluctuation production is started, the production pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ start the fluctuation display (pre-variation operation, update fluctuation), and the normal BGM (variation BGM ) is reproduced from the beginning of the song and output, and various lighting devices (the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74) perform normal fluctuating light emission.

Next, FIG. 145(2) will be described.
Since the timing from T0 to T3 is the same as in FIG. 145(1), the timing after T4 will be described.

At the timing of T4, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has passed, a stop command (symbol confirmation command) is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130. When the production control board 130 cannot normally receive this stop command, the temporary stop period of the production pattern 70a, the variable display period of the special pattern TZ and the various lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 74) are lost. Extends the light emission period.

Then, at the timing of T5, when the stop time of the special symbols has passed and the customer waiting state is entered, a customer waiting state designation command is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130. - 特許庁When the production control board 130 cannot normally receive this customer waiting state designation command, the extinguishing period of the production button 17 is extended.

After that, at the timing of T6, when a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds, which is the remaining time of the BGM) has passed since the customer waiting state started, the normal BGM (a type of variable BGM) that should have been stopped normally stops. The output period is extended, and at the timing of T7 when the output period of the normal BGM is being extended, the normal BGM is output until the end of the song (the end of the song data), but the output stop condition (customer waiting state designation command is received) After a predetermined period of time has elapsed, other commands have been received, and a decision effect has not been started, the normal BGM is output again from the beginning of the song (the beginning of the song data).

While the output period of the normal BGM (one type of variable BGM) is extended, the normal BGM is output again from the beginning of the song each time the normal BGM is output to the end of the song (the end of the song data). (The normal BGM corresponding to the current effect mode is loop-reproduced, and the normal BGM of the effect mode different from the current effect mode is not output from the beginning of the song).

Then, at the timing of T8, when the variable display of the special symbol is started, the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130 is sent a command at the start of the normal variable effect (special symbol storage designation command, game state designation command, Special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command) are transmitted. When the production control board 130 normally receives this start time command, the normal fluctuation production is started.

At this time, when the temporary stop period of the production pattern 70a is over and the production pattern 70a temporarily stopped is deviated from the pattern stop position, the production pattern 70a is momentarily displayed at the pattern stop position and fluctuating display (fluctuation pre-action) is started. On the other hand, the variable display period of the special pattern TZ is not terminated and the variable display is continued as it is, the output of the normal BGM (a kind of variable BGM) is continued without interruption, and the turn-off period of the performance button 17 is also continued. In addition, when the light emission period at the time of failure ends in various lighting devices, the normal fluctuating light emission is started.

In addition, when the production control board 130 normally receives the customer waiting state designation command at the timing of T5, the temporary stop period of the production pattern 70a and the variable display period of the special pattern TZ are completed, and the temporary stop production The symbol 70a is stop-displayed at the symbol stop position, and the special symbol TZ which has been variably displayed is stopped-displayed. In addition, normal BGM (a type of variable BGM) continues to be output without interruption, but after a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed, the output of normal BGM stops.

Here, the case where the stop time command and the customer waiting state designation command cannot be received normally during the normal fluctuation production has been explained, but the case where the stop time command and the customer waiting state designation command cannot be received normally during the long fluctuation production , the basic flow is the same.

In addition, in FIG. 145 (1), at the timing of T6 after the production control board 130 normally receives the customer waiting state designation command at the timing of T5, the output of the normal BGM (one type of variable BGM) is stopped. However, instead of continuing to output inaudible sound and starting to output normal BGM from the beginning of the song at the timing of T8, the normal BGM output in inaudible sound is switched to audible sound. You may make it output.

In addition, in FIG. 145(2), normal BGM (one type of variable BGM) may be output from the beginning of the song instead of continuing the output without interruption at the timing of T8.

(Timing chart related to giving and receiving commands for losing SPSP reach fluctuation effect)
Using FIG. 146, a specific example relating to command transfer of the losing SPSP reach variation effect will be described.

FIG. 146(1) is a timing chart when a command related to a losing SPSP reach variation effect can be normally received, and FIG. 146(2) is a timing chart when a command related to a losing SPSP reach variation effect cannot be received normally. is a chart.
146(1) and 146(2), it is assumed that the game progresses on the same time axis, and the time lag of the presentation due to command exchange is not taken into consideration here.

First, FIG. 146(1) will be described.
At the timing of T0, the variable display of the special symbols relating to the SPSP ready-to-win variable performance is executed, and the SPSP ready-to-win performance is being executed. Specifically, the SPSP ready-to-win background image is displayed on the main display device 70, and the two right and left effect symbols 70a temporarily stop at the upper left corner of the screen to form a ready-to-win state, and the central effect symbol 70a fluctuates. It is displayed, and an effect related to SPSP reach is performed in a state where all three special symbols TZ are displayed in a variable manner. In addition, SPSP reach BGM is output and various lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 74) perform SPSP reach light emission.

Then, at the timing of T1, when the SPSP ready-to-win effect reaches the final stage, the decided effect is started. Specifically, the output of the SPSP ready-to-win BGM is stopped, the effective period of the effect button 17 is generated, and the operation promoting effect is started. Specifically, the main display device 70 displays an operation prompting image simulating the effect button 17, and the audio output device 9 outputs a prompting sound “Press!”. Also, the effect button 17 emits white light.

Thereafter, at the timing of T2, when the performance button 17 is operated or the effective period elapses, a decision failure performance suggesting that the jackpot game will not be executed is executed. Specifically, the failure image is displayed on the main display device 70 , and the failure sound of “chu-n” is output from the audio output device 9 . In addition, at the upper left corner of the screen, the performance pattern 70a is temporarily stopped by a reach-losing result, and various lighting (frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 74) emits light when losing.

Also, at the timing of T3, when a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has passed after the start of the decision failure effect, the output of the failure sound is stopped. Further, by executing an eye-catching effect (for example, 1 second) suggesting that the effect symbol 70a (special symbol TZ) is stopped and displayed, the SPSP ready-to-reach background image returns to the horizontal scrolling of the normal background image, and the effect symbol 70a returns to the normal size, and also returns from the display mode of numbers only to the display mode of numbers and characters to maintain the temporarily stopped state.

Then, at the timing of T4, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, a stop command (symbol determination command) is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130. When the effect control board 130 normally receives this stop time command, the effect pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ are stopped and displayed, and various lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 74) emit light during stop. .

After that, at the timing of T5, when the stop time of the special symbols has passed and the customer waiting state is entered, a customer waiting state specifying command is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130. - 特許庁When the effect control board 130 normally receives this customer waiting state designation command, various lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 74) and the effect button 17 emit light during customer waiting.

In addition, at the timing of T6, when the variable display of the special symbols is started, the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130 the command at the start of the normal variable effect (special symbol storage designation command, game state designation command, Special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command) are transmitted. When the production control board 130 normally receives this start time command, the normal fluctuation production is started, the production pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ start the fluctuation display (pre-variation operation, update fluctuation), and correspond to the non-reach production. Normal BGM (one type of variable BGM) is reproduced from the beginning of the song and output, and various lighting devices (the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74) perform normal variable light emission.

Next, FIG. 146(2) will be described.
Since the timing from T0 to T3 is the same as in FIG. 146(1), the timing after T4 will be described.

At the timing of T4, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has passed, a stop command (symbol confirmation command) is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130. If the effect control board 130 cannot normally receive this stop command, the temporary stop period of the effect pattern 70a, the variable display period of the special pattern TZ, the non-output period of BGM and various lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, board The light emission period at the time of failure of the illumination device 74) is extended.

Then, at the timing of T5, when the stop time of the special symbols has passed and the customer waiting state is entered, a customer waiting state designation command is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130. - 特許庁When the production control board 130 cannot normally receive this customer waiting state designation command, the extinguishing period of the production button 17 is extended.

In addition, at the timing of T6, when the variable display of the special symbols is started, the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130 the command at the start of the normal variable effect (special symbol storage designation command, game state designation command, Special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command) are transmitted. When the production control board 130 normally receives this start time command, the extension of various periods ends and the normal fluctuation production is started.

At this time, when the temporary stop period of the production pattern 70a is over and the production pattern 70a temporarily stopped is deviated from the pattern stop position, the production pattern 70a is momentarily displayed at the pattern stop position and fluctuating display (fluctuation pre-action) is started. On the other hand, the variable display period of the special symbol TZ is not terminated and the variable display is continued, and the turn-off period of the production button 17 is also continued. In addition, output of normal BGM (a type of variable BGM) is started, and normal variable light emission by various lighting devices is started.

In addition, when the production control board 130 normally receives the customer waiting state designation command at the timing of T5, the temporary stop period of the production pattern 70a and the variable display period of the special pattern TZ are completed, and the temporary stop production The symbol 70a is stop-displayed at the symbol stop position, and the special symbol TZ which has been variably displayed is stopped-displayed.

Also, here, the case where the stop command and the customer waiting state designation command cannot be received normally during the losing SPSP reach fluctuation production has been explained, but the stop command and customer waiting during the losing normal reach fluctuation production and the losing SP reach fluctuation production Even if the state designation command cannot be received normally, the basic flow is the same except that the output of BGM (Normal Reach BGM, SP Reach BGM) will be stopped when the Reach Lost roll is temporarily stopped without a decided effect. becomes.

Thus, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 145 and 146, in the non-reach variable effect in which the output of BGM continues until after the end of the variable effect, the effect sound (variable BGM, etc.) is output. When the stop condition is not satisfied when the production pattern is temporarily stopped (cannot receive the stop command normally, the customer waiting state designation command cannot be received normally, and the next start command cannot be received normally) , the temporary stop period of the production design and the output period of the production sound are extended, and if the production sound is output to the end (end of the song) during the extension of the temporary stop period of this production design, the special design fluctuation display Even if the performance is not executed, the effect sound is output from the beginning (beginning of the song) and the output period of the effect sound is extended. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the performance effect during the extension of the temporary stop period of the performance symbols, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 145 and 146, in the non-reach variable effect in which the output of BGM continues until after the end of the variable effect, the effect sound (variable BGM, etc.) is output. If the stop conditions are not met while the special symbols are displayed in a variable manner (the stop command cannot be received normally, the customer waiting state designation command cannot be received normally, and the next start command cannot be received normally) , The special symbol fluctuation period and the production sound output period are extended, and if the production sound is output to the end (end of the song) during the extension of the special symbol fluctuation period, the special symbol fluctuation display is not executed. Even in this state, the effect sound is output from the beginning (beginning of the song) and the output period of the effect sound is extended. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the performance effect during the extension of the period of fluctuation of the special symbols, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 145 and 146, in the reach variation effect in which the output of BGM does not continue until after the end of the variation effect (there is no remnant), the BGM is not output and the effect pattern (losing effect) When the symbol) is temporarily stopped, the stop condition is not met (the stop command cannot be received normally, the customer waiting state designation command cannot be received normally, and the next start command cannot be received normally). When the temporary stop period of the design is extended, the BGM is not newly output during the extension of the temporary stop period of the production design. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a player from misunderstanding that a so-called revival performance (a performance suggesting a big win after suggesting a loss) may be executed, thereby improving the amusement of the game. becomes possible.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 145 and 146, in the ready-to-win variation effect in which the output of BGM does not continue until after the end of the variation effect (it does not remain), the BGM is not output and the special symbols are variably displayed. When the stop condition is not satisfied (the stop command cannot be received normally, the customer waiting state designation command cannot be received normally, the next start command cannot be received normally), the special symbol fluctuation period In the case of extension, the BGM is not newly output during the extension of the special symbol variation period. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a player from misunderstanding that a so-called revival performance (a performance suggesting a big win after suggesting a loss) may be executed, thereby improving the amusement of a game. becomes possible.

(Timing chart related to command transfer of jackpot SPSP reach fluctuation production)
With reference to FIG. 147, a specific example relating to command transfer of the jackpot SPSP reach variation effect will be described.

Fig. 147 (1) is a timing chart when the command relating to the jackpot SPSP reach variation effect can be normally received, and Fig. 147 (2) is the timing when the command relating to the jackpot SPSP reach variation effect cannot be normally received. Chart.
147(1) and 147(2), it is assumed that the game progresses on the same time axis, and the time lag of the presentation caused by command exchange is not considered here.

First, FIG. 147(1) will be described.
At the timing of T0, the variable display of the special symbols relating to the SPSP ready-to-win effect is being executed, and the SP ready-to-win effect is being executed. Specifically, the SP ready-to-win background image is displayed on the main display device 70, and the two right and left effect symbols 70a temporarily stop at the upper part of the screen to form a ready-to-win state, and the center effect symbol 70a is variably displayed. , and an effect related to SP reach is performed in a state in which all three special symbols TZ are displayed in a variable manner. In addition, SP reach BGM is output and various lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 74) perform SP reach light emission.

After that, when the SP ready-to-win performance reaches the final phase and the ready-to-win losing roll is temporarily stopped, the SPSP developmental effect to suggest the development to the SPSP ready-to-win effect is executed, and at the timing of T1, the SPSP ready-to-win effect is started. Then, the SPSP reach background image is displayed on the main display device 70, and the effect image related to the SPSP reach is displayed. Also, instead of the SP reach BGM, the SPSP reach BGM is output, and various lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 74) perform SPSP reach light emission.

At this time, the execution timing of the fixed production is reached, so the fixed production is executed. Specifically, the voice output device 9 outputs a deterministic sound “Kuin kuin”, and a handle light emitting device (not shown) rotatably provided in the shooting handle 15 is activated. Specifically, it rotates while emitting light in rainbow colors indicating a big win.

After that, at the timing of T2, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the fixed performance, the output of the fixed sound in the fixed performance is stopped, and at the timing of T3, the SPSP ready-to-win performance is determined to be the final stage and the performance is started. . Specifically, the output of the SPSP ready-to-win BGM is stopped, the effective period of the effect button 17 is generated, and the operation promoting effect is started. At this time, an operation promoting image imitating the effect button 17 is displayed on the main display device 70, and a prompting sound "Press!" is output from the voice output device 9. Also, the effect button 17 emits white light.

Thereafter, at the timing of T4, when the effect button 17 is operated or the effective period elapses, a determined success effect (a kind of fixed effect) suggesting that a jackpot game is executed is executed. Specifically, the first movable member 73a and the second movable member 73b descend (largely descend) to the performance position, and the second movable member 73b moves in the left-right direction. In addition, the determination success image is displayed on the main display device 70, and the success sound of "queuing queuing" is output from the voice output device 9. FIG. In addition, at the upper left corner of the screen, the performance symbol 70a is temporarily stopped when the jackpot appears. Furthermore, various lighting devices (the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74) and the production button 17 emit light in rainbow colors indicating a big win, and the production button vibration motor operates to vibrate the production button 17.

At the timing of T5, when a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the decision success effect, the output of the success sound stops, the rainbow emission of the effect button 17 stops, and the effect button 17 vibrates. stops. Further, by executing the eye-catching effect, the SPSP ready-to-win background image returns to the horizontal scrolling of the normal background image, the effect pattern 70a returns to the normal size, and the display mode of numbers and characters is changed from the display mode of numbers only. to maintain the temporarily stopped state.

Next, at the timing of T6, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has passed, a stop command (symbol determination command) is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130. When the production control board 130 normally receives this stop command, the production pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ are stopped and displayed, and various lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 74) emit light in rainbow colors. is terminated to emit light while stopped. Also, the handle lighting device rotatably mounted within the firing handle 15 is deactivated.

After that, at the timing of T7, when the special symbol stop time elapses, an opening designation command is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130. - 特許庁When the effect control board 130 normally receives this opening designation command, the opening effect is started. Specifically, the middle jackpot background (here, the opening background) is displayed on the main display device 70, the effect pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ are hidden, and the middle jackpot BGM (here, the opening BGM) is output from the audio output device 9. ) is output, and various lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 74) emit light during the jackpot.

Also, at the timing of T8, when the opening time elapses, a round designation command is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130. When the production control board 130 normally receives this round designation command, the round production is started.

Next, FIG. 147(2) will be described.
Since the timing from T0 to T5 is the same as in FIG. 147(1), the timing after T6 will be described.

At the timing of T6, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has passed, a stop command (symbol confirmation command) is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130. When the production control board 130 cannot normally receive this stop command, the temporary stop period of the production pattern 70a, the fluctuation period of the special pattern TZ, and the rainbow color of various lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 74) The period of illumination at and the period of operation of the handle illumination device rotatably mounted within the firing handle 15 are extended.

Also, at the timing of T7, when the special symbol stop time elapses, an opening designation command is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130 . When the effect control board 130 cannot normally receive this opening designation command, the horizontal scroll period of the normal background image and the non-output period of the variable BGM are extended.

After that, at the timing of T8, when the opening time elapses, a round designation command is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130. When the production control board 130 normally receives this round designation command, the extension of various periods ends and the round production is started. Specifically, the background during the jackpot (here, the background during the round) is displayed on the main display device 70, the effect pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ are hidden, and the BGM during the jackpot (here, the background during the round) is displayed from the audio output device 9. Middle BGM) is output, and various lighting devices (the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74) perform light emission during the jackpot.

Incidentally, when the effect control board 130 normally receives the opening designation command at the timing of T7, the temporary stop period of the effect pattern 70a and the variable display period of the special pattern TZ are finished, and the effect pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ are displayed. The opening effect is started without stop display.

Also, instead of stopping the output of the success sound at the timing of T5, the output of the success sound may be stopped at a timing between the timing of T4 and the timing of T5, or at the timing of T5, The rainbow-colored light emission and vibration of the effect button 17 may not be stopped at the same time, but may be stopped with a time lag.

In addition, the confirmation effect can be executed at multiple timings (at the start of the variable effect, at the start of the normal reach effect, at the start of the SP reach effect, etc.) Among them, the confirmation sound and the rotation of the steering wheel light emitting device are output. The output stops after a predetermined period of time (for example, 2 seconds) from the start, but the rainbow light emission of the steering wheel light emitting device continues until the stop command is received. Also, when the effect control board 130 cannot normally receive the stop command, the rainbow light emitting period of the handle light emitting device is extended.

In addition, the fixed effect can be executed at a plurality of timings (at the start of the variable effect, at the start of the normal reach effect, at the start of the SP reach effect, etc.), but after the timing of receiving the stop command (provisional effect pattern 70a It is not started (executed) during the extension of the stop period and during the extension of the variable display period of the special symbol TZ).

Also, here, the case where the stop command and the customer waiting state designation command cannot be normally received during the jackpot SP SP reach fluctuation production was explained, but the stop command and customer waiting during the jackpot normal reach fluctuation production or the jackpot SP reach fluctuation production Even if the state designation command cannot be received normally, the basic flow except that the output of the variable BGM (normal reach BGM, SP reach BGM) is stopped when the big hit is temporarily stopped without the execution of the decision effect. are the same.

Thus, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 147, in the big hit variation production, the stop condition is not satisfied when the production pattern (losing production pattern) is temporarily stopped (normally receiving the stop command cannot receive the opening designation command normally) If the temporary stop period of the production pattern is extended, the fixed production will not be started during the extension of the temporary stop period of the production pattern, but the temporary stop of the production pattern The fixed performance started before the extension of the period can be continuously executed even during the extension of the temporary stop period of the performance symbols. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the performance effect during the extension of the temporary stop period of the performance symbols, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 147, the confirmation effect includes the first effect (output of the confirmation sound) and the second effect (operation of the handle light emitting device), and before the extension of the temporary stop period of the effect pattern Regarding the confirmed production that has started, the first production (output of the confirmation sound) ends before the temporary stop period of the production pattern is extended, and the second production (operation of the handle light emitting device) is continued even during the extension of the temporary stop period of the production pattern. ) can continue. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the fixed effect during the extension of the temporary stop period of the effect symbols, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 147, in the big hit variation effect, the stop condition is not satisfied when the special symbols are displayed in a variable manner (the stop command cannot be received normally, the opening designation command cannot be received normally, cannot be received) If the special pattern fluctuation period is extended, the fixed production will not start during the extension of the special pattern fluctuation period, but the fixed production that started before the extension of the special pattern fluctuation period , can be continuously executed even during the extension of the special symbol fluctuation period. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the performance effect during the extension of the period of fluctuation of the special symbols, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 147, the confirmation effect includes the first effect (output of the confirmation sound) and the second effect (operation of the handle light emitting device), and is started before the extension of the fluctuation period of the special symbol. Regarding the finalized effect, the first effect (output of the confirmation sound) ends before the extension of the special pattern fluctuation period, and the second effect (operation of the steering wheel light emitting device) continues even during the extension of the special pattern fluctuation period. It is possible to Therefore, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the fixed sound becomes offensive during the extension of the period of fluctuation of the special symbol, and to improve the interest of the game.

It should be noted that, when executing a fixed effect in the jackpot fluctuation effect, regardless of the start timing of the fixed effect, for the second effect (operation of the handle light emitting device), during the extension of the temporary stop period of the effect pattern or the fluctuation period of the special pattern It is designed to continue to be executed even during the extension.

(Timing chart related to command exchange during look-ahead zone production)
A specific example of command transfer during the look-ahead zone effect will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 148(1) is a timing chart when a command can be normally received during the look-ahead zone effect, and FIG. 148(2) is a timing chart when a command cannot be normally received during the look-ahead zone effect.
148(1) and 148(2), it is assumed that the game progresses on the same time axis, and the time lag of the presentation caused by command exchange is not considered here.

First, FIG. 148(1) will be described.
At the timing of T0, the variable display of the special symbols related to the normal variable effect is executed, and the normal variable effect is executed. Specifically, in the main display device 70, the normal background is horizontally scrolled, and three performance symbols 70a and three special symbols TZ are variably displayed. In addition, normal BGM (a type of variable BGM) is output, and various lighting devices (the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74) perform normal variable light emission. In addition, a zone suggestive effect is performed to suggest that the look-ahead zone effect may be executed.

After that, at the timing of T1, when a predetermined period has passed since the start of the zone suggestion effect, the look-ahead zone effect is started. Specifically, on the main display device 70, the look-ahead zone background image is displayed, the blue zone image (or the red heat zone image) is displayed, and the output of the zone BGM (or heat zone BGM) is started. be. At this time, the volume of normal BGM (one type of variable BGM) is lowered.

Then, at the timing of T2, when the center production pattern 70a temporarily stops following the left and right production patterns 70a that were temporarily stopped earlier, a stop sound is output, and various lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, board lighting The device 74) emits light at the time of failure, and the output of the stop sound ends at the timing of T3.

Also, at the timing of T4, when the special symbol fluctuation time elapses, a stop command (symbol determination command) is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130 . When the effect control board 130 normally receives this stop time command, the effect pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ are stopped and displayed, and various lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 74) emit light during stop. .

At this time, the normal BGM (a type of variable BGM) is output until the end of the song (the end of the song data), but the output stop condition (a predetermined period of time has elapsed after receiving the customer waiting state designation command, the start of a decided effect, etc.) is not satisfied, the BGM is normally output again from the beginning of the song (the beginning of the song data).

Then, at the timing of T5, when the variable display of the special symbol is started, the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130 is given a command at the start of the losing SP reach variable effect (special symbol storage designation command, game state designation). command, special design designation command, special design variation pattern designation command) is transmitted. When the production control board 130 normally receives this command at the start, the loss SP reach fluctuation production is started, the production pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ start the fluctuation display (previous operation, update fluctuation), and various lighting devices. (The frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74) perform normal fluctuating light emission.

Further, at the timing of T6, when the normal ready-to-win effect is started by forming the ready-to-win state and temporarily stopping the left and right effect symbols 70a, the normal ready-to-win BGM (variable BGM) is played instead of the normal BGM (one type of variable BGM). 1 type) is output, and various lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 74) perform SP reach light emission.

After that, when the normal ready-to-win effect reaches the final stage, the SP ready-to-win development effect is executed, and at the timing of T7, when the SP ready-to-win effect is started, the look-ahead zone effect ends, and the SP ready-to-win effect is displayed on the main display device 70. The effect image related to the SP reach is displayed, the effect pattern 70a forming the reach state is moved to the upper part of the screen and displayed in a reduced size, and the effect pattern 70a changes from the display mode of numbers and characters to the display mode of numbers only. do. In addition, SP reach BGM is output instead of normal reach BGM, and various lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 74) perform SP reach light emission.

Then, at the timing of T9 after the timing of T8, when the effect pattern 70a is temporarily stopped by the reach losing result in the final phase of the SP reach effect, a stop sound is output, and various lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, A board illumination device 74) emits light when a disc is lost.

In addition, at the timing of T10, when a predetermined time has elapsed after the ready-to-win losing roll is temporarily stopped, an eye-catching effect is executed to return to the horizontal scrolling of the normal background image from the SP ready-to-win background image, and the effect pattern 70a. returns to the normal size, and also returns from the display mode of numbers only to the display mode of numbers and characters to maintain the temporarily stopped state.

After that, at the timing of T11, when the special symbol fluctuation time elapses, a stop command (symbol determination command) is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130. When the effect control board 130 normally receives this stop time command, the effect pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ are stopped and displayed, and various lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 74) emit light during stop. .

Next, FIG. 148(2) will be described.
Since the timing from T0 to T3 is the same as in FIG. 148(1), the timing after T4 will be described.

At the timing of T4, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has passed, a stop command (symbol confirmation command) is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130. When the production control board 130 cannot normally receive this stop command, the temporary stop period of the production pattern 70a, the variable display period of the special pattern TZ and the various lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 74) are lost. Extends the light emission period.

At this time, the normal BGM (a type of variable BGM) is output until the end of the song (the end of the song data). Since the start of the determined effect, etc.) has not been established, the normal BGM is output again from the beginning of the song (the beginning of the song data).

Then, at the timing of T5, when the stop time of the special symbols has passed and the variable display of the special symbols is started, the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130 is given a start time command ( A special symbol storage specification command, a game state specification command, a special symbol specification command, a special figure variation pattern specification command) are transmitted. When the production control board 130 cannot normally receive this command at the start, the temporary stop period of the production pattern 70a, the variable display period of the special pattern TZ and the various lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 74) are lost. The light emission period is further extended.

Also, at the timing of T6, the output period of the normal BGM (a type of variable BGM) is extended, and at the timing of T7, the SP reach effect is not executed, so the display period of the look-ahead zone background image and the output of the look-ahead zone BGM The period will be extended.

After that, at the timing of T8, the zone BGM is output until the end of the song (the end of the song data), but since the output stop conditions (start of the SP ready-to-win effect, reception of other commands) are not satisfied, the zone BGM is output. It is output again from the beginning of the song (the beginning of the song data).

Then, at the timing of T11 after the timing of T9 and the timing of T10, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, a stop command (symbol confirmation command) is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130. be. When the effect control board 130 normally receives this stop time command, the effect pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ are stopped and displayed, and various lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 74) emit light during stop. . Further, horizontal scrolling of the normal background image is started instead of the pre-reading zone background image, the output of the zone BGM is stopped, and the volume of the normal BGM (a type of variable BGM) is restored.

In addition, at the timing of T11, even if the stop time command (symbol confirmation command) cannot be received normally, and then the start time command, customer waiting state designation command, opening designation command, etc. are normally received, the effect design 70a And the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed, the display of the look-ahead zone background image is finished, and the output of the zone BGM is stopped.

Also, when the zone BGM output stops due to the normal reception of the command at the start, instead of the zone BGM, the output of normal BGM (a type of variable BGM) starts (resumes), and the opening designation command is issued. When the output of the zone BGM is stopped due to the normal reception, the output of the jackpot BGM (opening BGM) is started instead of the zone BGM.

In addition, when the look-ahead zone effect is started at the timing of T1, instead of lowering the volume of the normal BGM (a type of variable BGM), output may be stopped, or output at an inaudible volume. can be In that case, the output of normal BGM at an audible volume may be resumed at the timing of T11.

Also, here, the case where the stop time command and the start time command cannot be received normally during the execution of the look-ahead zone effect that is scheduled to be performed over a plurality of times of variable display has been described, and the lost SP reach variable effect is not executed. The basic flow is the same even when the SP reach fluctuation effect is the jackpot SP reach change effect.

In addition, the case where the SP reach fluctuation effect, which was the notice target of the look-ahead zone effect, is not executed due to the inability to normally receive the command at the time of stop and the command at the start time has been explained, but the notice target of the look-ahead zone effect is the normal reach change effect and the SPSP. The basic flow is the same even when the normal reach variation performance and the SPSP reach variation performance are not executed due to the normal reach command and start command not being received normally in the reach variation performance.

As described above, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 148, when the production pattern is temporarily stopped in the non-reach fluctuation production in which the specific sound (zone BGM, etc.) that makes the execution of the big win game expected is output. If the stop condition is not met (the stop command cannot be received normally, the next start command cannot be received normally, the customer waiting state designation command cannot be received normally), the temporary stop period of the production pattern and a specific sound If the output period of is extended and the specific sound is output to the end (end of the song) during the extension of the temporary stop period of this production pattern, the specific sound will be played first ( The output period of the specific sound is extended by outputting from the beginning of the song. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the performance effect during the extension of the temporary stop period of the performance symbols, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 148, when the special symbol is variably displayed in the non-reach variable effect in which the specific sound (zone BGM etc.) expected to execute the jackpot game is output, the stop condition is not established (cannot receive the stop command normally, cannot receive the next start command normally, cannot receive the customer waiting state designation command normally), the special pattern fluctuation period and the specific sound output period is extended, and if the specific sound is output to the end (the end of the song) during the extension of the period of fluctuation of this special pattern, even if the special pattern fluctuation display is not executed, the specific sound will be The output period of the specific sound is extended. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the performance effect during the extension of the temporary stop period of the performance symbols, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 148, during the extension of the output period of the specific sound (zone BGM, etc.), a predetermined command (command at the time of stopping the variable effect to end the look-ahead zone effect, customer waiting state designation command, opening designation command, etc.), it is possible to end the variable effect and stop the output of the specific sound. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that a specific sound (zone BGM, etc.) is output even after the expectation of a big win has disappeared, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Concrete example when the icon is redisplayed after being hidden)
A specific example of redisplaying an icon after it has been hidden will be described with reference to FIGS. 149 to 151. FIG.

FIG. 149 is a timing chart when icons are redisplayed after being hidden, and FIGS. 150 and 151 are diagrams showing examples of effects at various timings in FIG. Here, the explanation will be given for the production mode A, but since the production modes B to F are basically the same, the explanation will be omitted.

First, at the timing of T0 in FIG. 149, the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 60 and the variable display on the sub-first variable display 81 ( Blinking: (represented by ◎ in the figure) is being executed. At this time, the first special symbol reservation display 63, the first reservation number display area SA and the sub-first reservation display 83 are displayed as "2", and the volume adjustment and light amount adjustment by the cross key 19 are possible. (adjustable) (see FIG. 150(a)).

In addition, on the main display device 70, two right and left effect symbols 70a are temporarily stopped at the upper part of the screen where the SP ready-to-win background image is displayed to form a ready-to-win state, and the center effect symbol 70a is variably displayed. , the SPSP ready-to-win production is executed in a state where all the special symbols TZ are variably displayed. Further, in the first suspended icon display area 70B, the suspended icon HI in the normal display mode (white) and the suspended icon HI in the special display mode (blue) are displayed in a state of effecting operation. In 70C, the icon TI in the normal display mode is displayed in a state of effecting, and the SP reach BGM is audibly output from the audio output device 9 (see FIG. 150(a)).

Then, at the timing of T1 in FIG. 149, when the SP ready-to-win effect reaches the final stage and the winning number for the ready-to-win is temporarily stopped, the SPSP development effect suggesting the development to the SPSP ready-to-win effect is executed. Specifically, the first movable member 73a and the second movable member 73b move (largely descend) to the performance position, and the second movable member 73b moves in the left-right direction. Further, on the main display device 70, an advanced image HA that shields (hides and restricts visibility) various effect images is displayed so as to correspond to the first movable member 73a, and is output from the audio output device 9. The output of the SP reach BGM that was being played is stopped, and the development sound is output (see FIG. 150(b)).

Note that the execution of the development effect (display of the development image HA) causes the icon TI and the pending icon HI to be hidden (hidden and restricted from being viewed), but the normal display mode when hidden is suspended. The icon HI and the icon TI are in the first posture (initial posture) tilted to the left, and the hold icon HI in the special display mode (blue) is rotated rightward by a predetermined angle (here, 90 degrees). It is in the second posture.

After that, at the timing of T2 in FIG. 149, when a predetermined period elapses from the start of the development effect, the SPSP ready-to-win effect is started. Specifically, three performance patterns 70a are displayed at the upper left corner of the screen in a state of being reduced in size from the normal size in a state where the SPSP reach background image is displayed, and the performance image related to the SPSP reach is displayed. In addition, non-display of the first pending icon display area 70B is maintained, and the SPSP reach BGM is output from the audio output device 9 (see FIG. 150(c)).

Note that the icon is hidden when the SPSP development effect starts, and is redisplayed when the SPSP development effect ends. Display from a predetermined action state (posture that would have continued the effect action even after it was hidden: here, the second posture facing right) without performing processing to display from (left facing first posture) (See FIG. 150(c)).

Also, at the timing of T3 in FIG. 149, when the SPSP ready-to-win effect reaches the final phase, the determined effect is started. Specifically, the output of the SPSP ready-to-win BGM is stopped, the effective period of the effect button 17 is generated, and the operation promoting effect is started. At this time, an operation promoting image imitating the effect button 17 is displayed on the main display device 70, and a prompting sound "Press!" is output from the voice output device 9. Also, the effect button 17 emits white light (see FIG. 150(d)).

Then, at the timing of T4 in FIG. 149, when the effect button 17 is operated or the effective period elapses, a decision failure effect suggesting that the jackpot game will not be executed is executed. Specifically, the failure image is displayed on the main display device 70 , and the failure sound of “chu-n” is output from the audio output device 9 . In addition, the performance symbol 70a is temporarily stopped at the upper left corner of the screen when the reach-losing result appears (see FIG. 150(e)).

After that, at the timing of T5 in FIG. 149, when a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has passed since the start of the decision failure effect, the output of the failure sound is stopped and the effect symbol 70a is shifted from the upper left corner of the screen to the center normal position. It moves to the position (above the symbol stop position) and is displayed in normal size (see FIG. 150(f)).

Also, at the timing of T6 in FIG. 149, an eye-catching effect suggesting that the effect symbol 70a (special symbol TZ) is stopped and displayed is executed. Specifically, the eye-catching image IC displayed in the center of the screen gradually expands to block the effect pattern 70a and the icon TI (see FIG. 151(g)). In addition, even if the eye-catching image IC is enlarged, the special pattern TZ and various reservation number display areas (first reservation number display area SA, second reservation number display area SB) are not shielded (visual recognition is restricted). .

Then, at timing T7 in FIG. 149, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the eye-catching effect, the eye-catching effect ends. Specifically, the eye-catching image IC expands to the entire screen and fades out, the SPSP reach background image returns to the horizontal scrolling of the normal background image (here, the mode A background image), and the production design 70a returns to the normal size. At the same time, the display mode returns from the display mode of numbers only to the display mode of numbers and characters to maintain the temporarily stopped state, and the icon TI and the pending icon HI are displayed again (see FIG. 151(h)).

The reserved icon in the normal display mode (white) is hidden when the SPSP development effect starts, and is redisplayed when the eye-catching effect ends. When it becomes, the processing to display from the action state (left facing first posture) is not performed, and the predetermined action state (the posture that would have continued the effect action even after it became hidden: vertical 151(h)).

The reserved icon in the special display mode (blue) is hidden when the SPSP development effect starts, and is redisplayed when the eye-catching effect ends. The processing to display from the action state (the second posture rotated 90 degrees to the right) is not performed when it becomes, and the predetermined action state (the effect action would have been continued even after it was hidden) Posture: displayed from the initial posture here (see FIG. 151(h)).

Even if the pending icon is in a special display mode other than blue, when it is redisplayed, it will not be displayed from the operating state when it was hidden, and will not be displayed in a predetermined operating state (after being hidden). The action is displayed from the posture that would have continued the performance action).

In addition, the icon in the normal display mode (white) is hidden when the eye-catching effect starts, and is redisplayed when the eye-catching effect ends. The processing to display from the action state (left facing first posture) is not performed, and a predetermined action mode (posture that would have continued the effect action even after it became hidden: Here, vertical 151(h)).

Note that even if the icon is in the special display mode (blue, red, rainbow colors), when the icon is redisplayed, the process of displaying it from the operating state when it was hidden is not performed, and the predetermined operating state (non-display) is not performed. The action is displayed from a posture that would have continued the effect action even after it was displayed.

After that, at the timing of T8 in FIG. 149, when the special symbol fluctuation time elapses, a stop command (symbol determination command) is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130. FIG. In addition, a losing special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 60 (see FIG. 151(i)).

Then, at the timing of T9 in FIG. 149, after the performance control board 130 receives the command at the time of stop, when a predetermined period elapses, the variable display on the first sub variable display 81 stops. Also, disappearance display of the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C by animation is started, and stop display of the effect symbol 70a ("565") and the special symbol TZ ("565") is started. In addition, the sound volume adjustment and the light amount adjustment by the cross key 19 are restricted to a state (adjustment disabled) (see FIG. 151(j)).

At the timing of T10 in FIG. 149, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the disappearance display of the icon TI, the animation disappearance display of the icon TI ends (see FIG. 151(k)).

If the volume value image or the light amount image is displayed by operating the cross key 19 before the stop display of the effect pattern 70a, the volume value using the cross key 19 is displayed by the stop display of the effect pattern 70a. The volume value image and the light amount value image are erased before the animation of the icon TI is erased, although the icon TI is erased when the adjustment or the light amount adjustment becomes impossible. That is, when erasing the volume value image or the light intensity value image, they are erased in a shorter time (earlier timing) than the erasing animation of the icon TI.

Next, at the timing of T11 in FIG. 149, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first reserved number changes from "2" to "1" and a big hit determination is performed, and the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130 A start time command (special symbol storage designation command, game state designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command) is transmitted to. In addition, the first special symbol reserve display 63 becomes "1" display, and the first special symbol variation display (first cycle variation) on the first special symbol display 60 is started.

Thereafter, when a predetermined period of time has passed since the effect control board 130 received the command at the start, the first reservation number display area SA and the sub-first reservation display 83 become "0" display, and the sub-first variation display. A variable display at 81 is initiated. Further, when a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses after the start of the variable effect, the state in which volume adjustment and light amount adjustment by the cross key 19 are possible (adjustable) is restored.

In addition, when the effect control board 130 receives the customer waiting state designation command after receiving the stop command, when a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses after receiving the customer waiting state designation command, the cross key 19 Returns to a state where volume adjustment and light intensity adjustment are possible (adjustable).

In this way, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 149 to 151, specific effects (SP development effect, SPSP development effect-SPSP reach effect-I When redisplaying the hold icon in the normal mode or the special mode in response to the end of the catch effect), the processing to display it from the action state (attitude) when it was hidden is not performed, and the predetermined action state (non-display) is not performed. The action is displayed from the posture that would have continued the production action even after it became. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control burden when re-displaying the pending icon, and it is difficult for the player to feel uncomfortable when re-displaying the pending icon, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Become.

It should be noted that the predetermined action state when redisplaying the pending icon is not the posture that would have continued the effect action even after it was hidden, but the first posture (the first posture), which is the initial posture. 1 operating state). In addition, in a short-time specific effect (SP development effect, etc.), it will be displayed again from the posture that would have continued the effect action even after it was hidden, and in a long-term specific effect (SPSP reach effect), The display may be redisplayed from the first posture (first motion state), which is the initial posture.

In addition, as a specific effect (short-term effect) in which the pending icon is hidden and then redisplayed, the effect mode (display mode of the pending icon) does not change, but the background image changes Stage change effects and predetermined A big-hit advance notice effect (both effects are performed before the ready-to-win effect), etc., in which a shielding image is displayed, may be provided.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 149 to 151, the specific effect (SP development effect, SPSP development effect, eye-catching effect, etc.) that hides the icon in the normal mode or the special mode in the variable effect ends. When the icon in the normal mode or the special mode is redisplayed according to the , the processing to display it from the operation state (posture) when it was hidden is not performed, and the predetermined operation state (even after it is hidden The action is displayed from the posture in which the performance action would have been continued (the first posture). Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control burden when re-displaying the icon, and it is difficult for the player to feel uncomfortable when re-displaying the icon, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Become.

Note that the predetermined action state when the icon is redisplayed is not the posture that would have continued the effect action even after the icon was hidden, but the first posture (the first posture) that is the initial posture. 1 operating state). In addition, in a short-time specific effect (SP development effect, etc.), it will be displayed again from the posture that would have continued the effect action even after it was hidden, and in a long-term specific effect (SPSP reach effect), The display may be redisplayed from the first posture (first motion state), which is the initial posture.

In addition, as a specific effect (short-time effect) in which the icon is hidden and then redisplayed, the effect mode (display mode of the pending icon) does not change, but the background image changes Stage change effects and predetermined effects A big-hit advance notice effect (both effects are performed before the ready-to-win effect), etc., in which a shielding image is displayed, may be provided.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 149 to 151, when the special symbols are stopped and displayed (end of cycle variation), there is no restriction or restriction on volume adjustment and light intensity adjustment by the cross key 19. There is no (adjustable is maintained), but when the production pattern or special pattern stops displaying (finishing the fluctuation production) according to the stop display of the special pattern (end of cycle fluctuation), the volume adjustment by the cross key 19 Restriction occurs or is subject to restriction (cannot be adjusted) regarding light amount adjustment. Therefore, the period during which the player can adjust the volume and the amount of light can be secured as long as possible, and the interest in the game can be improved. In addition, even if volume adjustment or light quantity adjustment is performed, it is possible for the player to recognize the stop display of the production pattern or the special pattern (the end of the variable production).

It should be noted that when the stop display of the effect pattern or the special pattern causes a restriction or is subject to a restriction (cannot be adjusted) regarding the volume adjustment or the light amount adjustment by the cross key 19, it does not matter which kind of variable effect is executed. Even if there is, at the same timing, the volume adjustment and light amount adjustment by the cross key 19 are restricted or subject to restriction (cannot be adjusted). Therefore, the player is not forced to perform complicated work such as changing the timing of volume adjustment and light amount adjustment by the cross key 19 each time the variable performance is executed, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 149 to 151, when the special symbols are stopped and displayed (end of cycle variation), there is no restriction or restriction on volume adjustment and light intensity adjustment by the cross key 19. No (adjustability is maintained), but when the icon is erased (change effect ends) in response to the stop display of the special symbol (end of cycle change), volume adjustment and light intensity adjustment by cross key 19 Restriction occurs or is subject to restriction (adjustment becomes impossible, volume value image and light amount value image are deleted). Therefore, the period during which the player can adjust the volume and the amount of light can be secured as long as possible, and the interest in the game can be improved. Further, even if the volume adjustment or the light intensity adjustment is performed, the player can be made to recognize that the corresponding icon is erased, that is, the variable effect is terminated.

In addition, as a restriction on volume adjustment and light intensity adjustment that occurs after the special symbol is stopped and displayed, it is assumed that volume adjustment and light intensity adjustment using the cross key 19 cannot be performed, but the volume value image and the light intensity value image are not displayed (not displayed). ), or the volume value image and the light amount image displayed in the front layer of the production design 70a may be displayed in the rear layer of the production design 70a (in front of the background image). are superimposed behind the effect pattern 70a), restrictions may be imposed on volume adjustment and light amount adjustment by the cross key 19. FIG.

Further, when a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds) has passed since the reception of the customer waiting state designation command, the customer waiting state designation command is received instead of returning to the state where the volume adjustment and light amount adjustment by the cross key 19 are possible. At this time, the volume adjustment and light amount adjustment by the cross key 19 may be restored, and the volume adjustment and light amount adjustment by the cross key 19 are possible when the stop time of the production pattern (special pattern) has passed. Alternatively, before the stop time of the performance pattern (special pattern) elapses, the sound volume adjustment and the light quantity adjustment by the cross key 19 may be restored.

Further, the volume value image and the light amount value image may be displayed even if the effect button 17 and the cross key 19 are not operated during the period from the customer waiting state to the start of the customer waiting demonstration effect. In this case, a predetermined period of time (for example, 15 seconds, which is the same time as the remaining time of BGM, or 10 seconds, which is shorter than the remaining time of BGM) has elapsed since the customer waited. It is preferable to display the volume value image and the light amount value image later.

(Concrete example of operation state of pending icon before and after icon change effect)
A specific example of the operating state of the pending icon before and after the icon change effect will be described with reference to FIG. 152 . Here, the explanation will be given for the production mode A, but since the production modes B to F are basically the same, the explanation will be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 152(a), the variable effect (variable display of the effect symbol 70a, variable display of the special symbol TZ) is executed in the state where the first pending number is "2", and the first pending number "2" is displayed in the display area SA, and "0" is displayed in the second pending number display area SB. In addition, two suspended icons in the normal display mode are displayed in the first suspended icon display area 70B, and the icon in the normal display mode is displayed in the icon display area 70C. Directing action (swaying action) is performed.

In this state, when the pending icon change effect (first change) by the character A action change pattern targeting the pending icon displayed in the second display portion of the first pending icon display area 70B is started, FIG. As shown in b), the character A is displayed in the lower right portion of the screen, and an opportunity effect of throwing the heart HE is performed, and the character A is in the rightward second posture on the second display portion of the first reserved icon display area 70B. A heart hits the hold icon HI in the normal mode.

Then, when the heart HE covering the pending icon HI is erased, the display mode of the pending icon HI changes as shown in FIG. 152(c). Specifically, the hold icon HI in the normal display mode (white hexagon), which was in the second posture facing right, is changed to the hold icon in the first special display mode (blue circle) with a different shape, and the hold icon HI before the change is changed. The rotation motion (effect motion) is started from the first posture (initial posture) without inheriting the action state of the hold icon HI (here, the right-facing second posture).

It should be noted that the hold icon of the first special display mode (round blue), the hold icon of the second special display mode (round red), and the hold icon of the third special display mode (round rainbow color), a plurality of However, regardless of the display mode, the effect operation (rotational operation) for returning from the first posture to the second posture and then returning to the first posture is 2.5 times per cycle. It is repeated every second (period different from the effect operation of the icons in the normal display mode).

Further, when a predetermined period of time has passed since the character A was erased, as shown in FIG. 152(d), the effect pattern 70a is stopped and displayed, the icon TI is erased, and the variable effect of this time ends. At this time, the hold icon HI in the first special display mode is in the second posture rotated rightward by 90 degrees.

After that, when the 1st reservation number decreases to "1" and the variable display of the 1st special symbol is started, as shown in FIG. Then, the variable effect (variable display of the effect symbol 70a, variable display of the special symbol TZ) is started, and the two pending icons displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted toward the icon display area 70C. (decrease display). After that, when a predetermined period of time has passed, the shift display of the pending icons is completed and one becomes the icon TI.

Then, when the pending icon change effect (second change) by the character A action change pattern targeting the pending icon HI displayed in the first display portion of the first pending icon display area 70B is started, FIG. ), the character A is displayed in the lower right portion of the screen, and an opportunity effect to throw the heart HE is performed, and the second posture is rotated 270 degrees to the right in the first display portion of the first reserved icon display area 70B. The heart hits the hold icon HI in the first special display mode that is .

Further, when the heart HE that shields the pending icon HI is erased, the display mode of the pending icon HI changes as shown in FIG. 152(g). Specifically, the hold icon HI in the first special display mode in the second posture rotated 270 degrees to the right is changed to the hold icon in the second special display mode (red round shape) having the same shape. It takes over the action state of the previous hold icon HI (the second posture rotated 270 degrees to the right) and continues the rotation action.

Further, when a predetermined period of time has passed since the character A was erased, as shown in FIG. 152(h), the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed, the icon TI is erased, and the variable effect of this time ends. At this time, the hold icon HI in the second special display mode is in the first posture (initial posture) in which it is rotated 360 degrees and returned to the position of 0 degrees.

In addition, when the suspension icon in the normal display mode (white hexagon) is changed to the suspension icon in the third special display mode (circular rainbow color) with a different shape, the operation state of the suspension icon before the change is changed. The rotation motion (drawing motion) is started from the first posture (initial posture) without taking over. On the other hand, when the hold icon in the first special display mode (round blue) is changed to the hold icon in the third special display mode (round rainbow color) having the same shape, the operation of the hold icon before the change Take over the state and start the rotation operation (drawing operation).

In addition, although the pending icon change effect in the character A action change pattern has been explained here, the hold icon change effect in the normal change pattern and the character B to D action change patterns is also held in the normal display mode (white hexagon). When changing from the icon to the hold icon of the first to third special display modes having different shapes, the action state of the hold icon before the change is not inherited, and the rotating action (drawing action) is performed from the first posture (initial posture). Start. On the other hand, when the holding icon in the first special display mode (round blue) changes to the second special display mode (round red) or the third special display mode (round rainbow) with the same shape, or when the second special When the display mode (red round) changes to the same third special display mode (rainbow round), the operating state of the pending icon before the change is taken over and the rotating action (effect action) is started.

(Concrete example of the operation state of the icon before and after the icon change effect)
A specific example of the operation state of the icon before and after the icon change effect will be described with reference to FIG. 153 . Here, the explanation will be given for the production mode A, but since the production modes B to F are basically the same, the explanation will be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 153(a), the variable effect (variable display of the effect symbol 70a, variable display of the special symbol TZ) is executed in the state where the first pending number is "1", and the first pending number "1" is displayed in the display area SA, and "0" is displayed in the second pending number display area SB. In addition, one suspended icon in the normal display mode is displayed in the first suspended icon display area 70B, and the icon in the normal display mode is displayed in the icon display area 70C. Directing action (swaying action) is performed.

In this state, when the icon change effect (first change) by the character A effect change pattern targeting the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is started, as shown in FIG. 153(b). , the character A is displayed in the lower right part of the screen, and an opportunity effect of throwing the heart HE is performed, and the heart hits the icon TI in the normal display mode in the second rightward posture in the icon display area 70C.

Then, when the heart HE shielding the icon TI is erased, the display mode of the icon TI changes as shown in FIG. 153(c). Specifically, the icon TI in the normal display mode (white hexagon), which was in the second posture facing right, is changed to the icon in the first special display mode (round blue) with a different shape, and the icon TI before the change is changed. The rotation motion (effect motion) is started from the first posture (initial posture) without inheriting the action state of the icon TI (here, the right-facing second posture).

In addition, for the icon in the first special display mode (blue round shape), the icon in the second special display mode (red round shape), and the icon in the third special display mode (rainbow round shape), a plurality of However, regardless of the display mode, the effect operation (rotational operation) for returning from the first posture to the second posture and then returning to the first posture is 2.5 times per cycle. It repeats in seconds.

Furthermore, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the character A was displayed, the character A is erased as shown in FIG. 153(d). At this time, the icon TI in the first special display mode is in the second posture rotated rightward by 90 degrees.

After that, when the icon change effect (second change) by the character A effect change pattern targeting the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is started, the screen is displayed as shown in FIG. 153(e). The character A is displayed in the lower right portion, and an opportunity effect of throwing the heart HE is performed, and the icon TI in the first special display mode in the second posture rotated 180 degrees to the right in the icon display area 70C is displayed. Hart hits.

Then, when the heart HE shielding the icon TI is erased, the display mode of the icon TI changes as shown in FIG. 153(f). Specifically, the icon TI in the first special display mode in the second posture rotated 180 degrees to the right is changed to the icon in the second special display mode (round red) having the same shape, and the icon TI changes. The previous action state of the icon TI (the second posture rotated 180 degrees to the right) is taken over and the rotation action is continued.

Furthermore, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the character A was displayed, the character A is erased as shown in FIG. 153(g). At this time, the icon TI in the second special display mode is in the second orientation in which it is rotated rightward by 270 degrees.

When the icon in the normal display mode (white hexagon) is changed to the icon in the third special display mode (circular rainbow color) with a different shape, the operation state of the pending icon before the change is changed to The rotation motion (drawing motion) is started from the first posture (initial posture) without taking over. On the other hand, if the icon in the first special display mode (round blue) changes to the icon in the third special display mode (round rainbow color) with the same shape, the action of the icon before the change Take over the state and start the rotation operation (drawing operation).

In addition, although the icon change effect in the character A action change pattern has been described here, the icon change effect in the normal change pattern and the character B to D action change patterns is also shown in the normal mode (white hexagon) reserved icon Alternatively, when the icon changes to the icon in the first to third special display modes with different shapes, the holding icon or the action state of the icon before the change is not inherited, and the rotation is performed from the first posture (initial posture). (Direction action) is started. On the other hand, when the hold icon of the first special display mode (round blue) or the icon changes to the second special display mode (round red) or the third special display mode (round rainbow color) of the same shape, When changing from the second special display mode (round red) to the third special display mode (round rainbow color) with the same shape, the holding icon or the operation state of the icon before the change is inherited and the rotation operation (effect operation).

As described above, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 152 and 153, when the hold icon in the normal display mode is in the second posture (changed posture, second action state), the first to second When changing to the hold icon of the 3 special display mode, it is possible to perform the performance operation (action display) of the hold icon after the change from the first posture (initial posture, first action state). Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control load when changing the display mode of the pending icon. In addition, when changing the display mode of the pending icon, the player is less likely to feel uncomfortable, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 152 and 153, when the hold icon in the first special display mode is in the second posture (changed posture, second action state), the second to second icons having the same shape are displayed. When changing to the hold icon of the 3 special display mode, it is possible to take over the posture of the hold icon before the change and perform the effect operation. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control load when changing the display mode of the pending icon. In addition, when changing the display mode of the pending icon, the player is less likely to feel uncomfortable, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 152 and 153, when the holding icon in the second special display mode is in the second posture (changed posture, second motion state), the third special display having the same shape is displayed. When changing to a pending icon of a mode, it is possible to take over the posture of the pending icon before the change and carry out an effect operation. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control load when changing the display mode of the pending icon. In addition, when changing the display mode of the pending icon, the player is less likely to feel uncomfortable, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 152 and 153, when the icon in the normal display mode is in the second posture (changed posture, second action state), first to third special icons having different shapes are displayed. When the display mode of the icon is changed, the icon after the change can be rendered in the first posture (initial posture, first motion state) to perform a performance motion (motion display). Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control load when changing the display mode of the icon. In addition, when the display mode of the icon is changed, it becomes difficult for the player to feel uncomfortable, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 152 and 153, when the icon in the first special display mode is in the second posture (changed posture, second motion state), second to second icons having the same shape are displayed. When changing to the corresponding icon in the 3 special display mode, it is possible to take over the posture of the corresponding icon before the change and perform the effect operation. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control load when changing the display mode of the icon. In addition, when the display mode of the icon is changed, it becomes difficult for the player to feel uncomfortable, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 152 and 153, when the icon in the second special display mode is in the second posture (changed posture, second motion state), the third special display having the same shape is displayed. When changing to the corresponding icon of the mode, it is possible to take over the posture of the pending icon before the change and perform the effect operation. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control load when changing the display mode of the icon. In addition, when the display mode of the icon is changed, it becomes difficult for the player to feel uncomfortable, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

If the reserved icon in the normal display mode changes to the reserved icon in the special display mode while the reserved icon in the special mode or the relevant icon has already been displayed, the suspended icon in the special display mode that has already been displayed Alternatively, the suspended icon that has changed from the same posture (operation state) as the icon to the special display mode may start the rotating motion (effect motion).

Further, when the hold icon in the first special display mode or the icon is in the second posture (changed posture, second action state) and is changed to the second to third special display modes having the same shape, the change The subsequent reserved icon or the icon concerned may be made to perform a performance action (action display) from the first posture (initial posture, first action state).

Further, when the hold icon in the second special display mode is in the second posture (changed posture, second action state) and is changed to the third special display mode with the same shape, the changed hold icon or the The icon may be made to perform an effect motion (motion display) from the first posture (initial posture, first motion state).

In addition, when the display mode of the suspended icon or the icon is completely blocked by the heart image and the display mode changes, instead of performing the effect operation from the posture of the icon before hiding, the posture of the icon before hiding (first If the posture is the second posture, if the second posture is the first posture or the second posture that is slightly different), the effect motion may be performed.

(Modified example of icon operation state before and after icon change effect)
With reference to FIG. 154, a modified example of the action states of the icons before and after the icon change effect will be described. Here, the explanation will be given for the production mode A, but since the production modes B to F are basically the same, the explanation will be omitted.

In this modification, as the icon display modes, there is a fourth special display mode (circular white blinking) that suggests that the icon display mode may change, and a special effect (SP/ A fifth special display mode (axe-shaped multicolor) is set to suggest that the SPSP reach effect) will be executed. It should be noted that the icons of the fourth special display mode and the fifth special display mode are different from the icons of the first to third special display modes that suggest the degree of expectation of the jackpot game, so that the information suggested by the icons is different from that of the icons of the first special display mode and the second special display mode. It may be rephrased as 2 special display modes.

The icon of the fourth special display mode (blinking white circle) can be displayed when the game ball enters the starting hole, or can change from the icon of the normal mode. The display mode and the icon of the fifth special display mode do not change, and can be changed to the first to third special display modes and the fifth special display mode. Further, the icon of the fifth special display mode (ax-shaped multicolor) can be changed from the icon of the fourth special display mode, but does not change from the icons of the normal display mode and the first to third special display modes. , the normal display mode and the first to fourth special display modes.

First, as shown in FIG. 154(a), the variable effect (variable display of the effect symbol 70a, variable display of the special symbol TZ) is executed in the state where the first pending number is "1", and the first pending number "1" is displayed in the display area SA, and "0" is displayed in the second pending number display area SB. In addition, one suspended icon in the normal display mode is displayed in the first suspended icon display area 70B, and the icon in the normal display mode is displayed in the icon display area 70C. Directing action (swaying action) is performed.

In this state, when the pending icon change effect (first change) by the character A action change pattern targeting the pending icon displayed in the first display portion of the first pending icon display area 70B is started, FIG. As shown in b), the character A is displayed in the lower right part of the screen, and an opportunity effect of throwing the heart HE is performed, and the first display part of the first reserved icon display area 70B is in the second posture facing right. A heart hits the hold icon HI in the normal display mode.

Then, when the heart HE covering the pending icon HI is erased, the display mode of the pending icon HI changes as shown in FIG. 154(c). Specifically, the hold icon HI in the normal display mode (white hexagon), which was in the second posture facing right, is changed to the hold icon in the fourth special display mode (blinking white circle) having a different shape. The operation state of the holding icon HI (here, the rightward second orientation) is not inherited, and the scaling operation (effect operation) is started from the first orientation (initial orientation).

Note that the icon of the fourth special display mode (white hexagon) and the icon of the fifth special display mode (multicolor axe) have a display mode common to a plurality of production modes. The effect operation (enlargement/reduction operation) in which the icon in the special display mode returns to the first posture from the first posture of the reduced size through the second posture of the enlarged size is 1 second per cycle (the effect operation of the icon in the normal display mode is 1.5 seconds (different cycles), and the effect motion (vertical motion) in which the icon in the fifth special display mode returns from the first upward posture to the second downward posture and then back to the first posture takes 1.5 seconds per cycle. This is repeated at a cycle different from the effect operation of the icons in the normal display mode.

Further, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the character A was erased, as shown in FIG. 154(d), the effect pattern 70a is stopped and displayed, the icon TI is erased, and the variable effect of this time ends. At this time, the hold icon HI in the fourth special display mode is in the second posture of the enlarged size.

After that, when the 1st reservation number decreases to "0" and the variable display of the 1st special design is started, as shown in FIG. Then, a variable effect (variable display of the effect symbol 70a, variable display of the special symbol TZ) is started, and one pending icon displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B is shifted toward the icon display area 70C. (decrease display). After that, when a predetermined period of time has passed, the shift display of the pending icon is completed, and the icon TI becomes the icon TI.

Then, when the icon change effect based on the character A action change pattern targeting the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is started, as shown in FIG. is displayed, an opportunity effect of throwing the heart HE is performed, and the heart hits the icon TI of the fourth special display mode in the medium size second posture in the icon display area 70C.

Thereafter, when the heart HE shielding the icon TI is erased, the display mode of the icon TI changes as shown in FIG. 154(g). Specifically, the icon TI in the fourth special display mode (round white flashing), which was in the medium-sized second posture, is changed to the icon in the fifth special display mode (axe-shaped multicolor) with a different shape. Then, without inheriting the action state of the icon TI before the change (in this case, the medium-sized second posture), the vertical motion (drawing motion) is started from the first posture (initial posture).

Further, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the character A was displayed, the character A is erased as shown in FIG. 154(h). At this time, the icon TI in the fifth special display mode (axe-shaped multicolor) is in the downward second posture.

When the hold icon in the fourth special display mode (blinking white circle) changes to the hold icon in the fifth special display mode (axe-shaped multicolor) with a different shape, the operating state of the hold icon before the change is changed. The up-and-down motion (performance motion) is started from the first posture (initial posture) without taking over. In addition, when the icon changes from the normal display mode (white hexagon) to the fourth special display mode (blinking white circle) with a different shape, the attitude (operation state) of the icon before the change is changed. The enlargement/reduction operation (drawing operation) is started from the first posture (initial posture) without taking over.

Thus, according to the modification shown in FIG. 154, the fourth special display mode (second 1 special display mode), the changed pending icon can be made to perform an effect action (action display) from the first posture (initial posture, first action state). Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control load when changing the display mode of the pending icon. In addition, when changing the display mode of the pending icon, the player is less likely to feel uncomfortable, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the modification shown in FIG. 154, when the icon in the normal display mode is in the second posture (changed posture, second action state), the fourth special display mode (first special display mode), the icon after the change can be rendered in a first orientation (initial orientation, first action state). Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control load when changing the display mode of the icon. In addition, when the display mode of the icon is changed, it becomes difficult for the player to feel uncomfortable, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the modification shown in FIG. 154, the shape of the holding icon in the fourth special display mode (first special display mode) is different when it is in the second posture (changing posture, second action state). When changing to the hold icon in the fifth special display mode (second special display mode), it is possible to make the hold icon after the change perform an effect action (action display) from the first posture (initial posture, first action state). It's becoming Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control load when changing the display mode of the pending icon. In addition, when changing the display mode of the pending icon, the player is less likely to feel uncomfortable, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the modification shown in FIG. 154, the shape of the icon in the fourth special display mode (first special display mode) is different when the icon is in the second posture (changing posture, second action state). When changing to the icon in the fifth special display mode (second special display mode), the icon after the change can be rendered in the first posture (initial posture, first motion state). It's becoming Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control load when changing the display mode of the icon. In addition, when the display mode of the icon is changed, it becomes difficult for the player to feel uncomfortable, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in a state where the hold icon or the icon in the fourth special display mode (first special display mode) is already displayed, the hold icon in the normal mode or the icon in the fourth special display mode (first special mode) In the case of changing to the suspended icon or the icon, the suspended icon in the already displayed fourth special display mode (first special display mode) or the same posture (operating state) as the icon is newly displayed in the fourth special display mode. The suspended icon changed to (first special display mode) or the icon may start the enlargement/reduction operation (drawing operation).

Further, in a state where the pending icon or the icon in the fifth special display mode (second special display mode) is already displayed, the pending icon in the fourth special display mode (first special display mode) or the icon is displayed in the fifth In the case of changing to the hold icon in the special display mode (second special display mode) or the icon, the hold icon in the fifth special display mode (second special display mode) that was already displayed or the same posture as the icon ( The suspended icon that has newly changed from the operating state) to the fifth special display mode (second special display mode) or the icon may start the vertical motion (drawing motion).

In addition, the icon of the fifth special display mode (second special display mode) does not change only from the icon of the fourth special display mode (first special display mode), but instead of the icon of the normal display mode or the first to second special display modes. The icon of the special display mode may be changed to the icon of the fifth special display mode (second special display mode), and the icon of the third special display mode (big win confirmed) may not be changed.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is possible to shoot the game ball by transmitting the launch permission designation command to the payout control board 120 in the pre-start state before the progress control of the game is started. By transmitting a launch permission designation command to the payout control board 120 when the progress control of is started, the game ball may be launched after the game becomes ready for play.

Further, in the present embodiment, the payout control board 120 can perform payout control even in the pre-start state before the progress control of the game is started. It is possible to pay out game balls (ball lending) based on the payout request from the machine, but after the game progress control is started and the game becomes playable, the game ball is issued based on the payout request from the ball lending machine. It may be possible to pay out (ball lending).

Further, in the present embodiment, since the backup power supply is not supplied to the payout control board 120 (payout RAM 120c), when the power to the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the payout control board 120 (payout RAM 120c) has an unpaid amount. Although the number of payout balls data does not remain, a backup power supply may be supplied to the payout control board 120 (payout RAM 120c). If the unpaid ball number data remains in the payout control board 120 (payout RAM 120c), the unpaid ball number data can be used even in the pre-start state before the progress control of the game is started. It may be possible to pay out game balls based on

Further, in this embodiment, the main information display 59 is provided outside the game area 5a, but the main information display 59 may be provided inside the game area 5a.

In addition, in the present embodiment, a prize ball (award value) is given based on the fulfillment of the award conditions (winning of the game ball to the winning opening, the starting opening, and the big winning opening). Balls may be managed as data, and winning ball data may be provided (added to the held ball data).

Also, in the present embodiment, there is only one type of look-ahead zone effect, but a plurality of look-ahead zone effects with different degrees of expectation for big wins may be provided. In this case, when two look-ahead zone effects overlap during the variable effect, the zone image of one of the look-ahead zone effects is displayed on the upper and/or lower side of the screen so as to traverse the screen, and the image of the other look-ahead zone effect is displayed. It is preferable to display the zone image on the left and/or right side of the screen so as to traverse the screen. In this way, the two look-ahead zone effects can be made compatible, and the effect of the effect can be improved.

Also, in the present embodiment, a blackout effect is executed as a jackpot announcement effect, but instead of the blackout effect, a whiteout effect in which the main display device 70 turns white may be executed. In this case, the basic flow of presentation should be the same as the blackout presentation.

Also, in the present embodiment, the normal game state and the specific game state (probability variable game state, time-saving game state) were basically the same execution mode of the variable production, for example, the previous stage production in the normal game state Later stage production (case of pre-reach production and reach production, case of normal reach production and SP reach production, case of SP reach production and SP reach production, case of pre-reach production and temporary stop of production pattern, reach production and production pattern 70a during the temporary stop, etc.), the first information (information suggesting the degree of expectation for a big win, information on the execution of a special game, etc.) advantageous to the player is notified during the execution of the latter stage performance of the variable performance. Second information different from the first information (additional information of songs selectable by operating the cross key 19, mission achievement status, etc.) etc.) may be notified. In addition, as a variable performance consisting of the front stage performance and the rear stage performance in the normal game state, the case where the common rear stage performance is executed after the first front stage performance is executed, and the case where the second front stage performance different from the first front stage performance is executed. A common post-stage effect may be executed, and information relating to the execution of the special game may be reported in the common post-stage effect executed when the special symbol is stopped and displayed.

(Content 1 of the invention described in this embodiment)
Here, a conventional game machine generally includes main control means for controlling the progress of a game, and effect control means for controlling effects according to commands from the main control means. Among such gaming machines, along with executing the variable display of the special symbols according to the determination result of the determination information, there was one that executed the variable performance by the performance symbols during the execution of the variable display of the special symbols ( For example, see JP-A-2018-118109). However, in such a gaming machine, there is room for improvement in the game presentation, and there is a problem that the game lacks interest.

◆ As a first configuration for solving the above problems, there are main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and effect control means ( Effect control board 130), and the main control means determines whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player (special figure determination information). means, and a variable display means for performing variable display of special symbols according to the result of the determination, wherein the variable display means performs cycle variation a plurality of times as the variable display of the special symbols, and then the special symbols. is stopped and displayed, and the effect control means can execute a variable effect by the effect symbol during execution of the variable display of the special symbol, and at a timing different from the start timing of the cycle variation, the effect in the variable effect Variable display of the pattern in a predetermined mode (scroll display after pre-variation operation (floating display, reduced display, enlarged display)) is started. By doing so, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game. It should be noted that the "different timing" here means the start timing of the timer interrupt of the main control board at which the cycle fluctuation is started, and the start of the frame update of the image control unit at which the variable display of the effect pattern in a predetermined mode is started. The difference is that the timer interrupt period (4ms) of the main control board in which the cycle fluctuation is started is the frame update period (33ms ) may not be included in

◆ As a second configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and effect control means ( Effect control board 130), and the main control means determines whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player (special figure determination information). means, and a variable display means for performing variable display of special symbols according to the result of the determination, wherein the variable display means performs cycle variation a plurality of times as the variable display of the special symbols, and then the special symbols. is stopped and displayed, and the effect control means can execute the variable effect by the effect symbol during the execution of the variable display of the special symbol, and after the first cycle variation in the variable display of the special symbol is completed, the variation A variable display (scroll display after pre-variation operation (floating display, reduced display, enlarged display)) of the production pattern in the production is started. By doing so, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

◆ As a third configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and effect control means ( Effect control board 130), and the main control means determines whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player (special figure determination information). means, and a variable display means for performing variable display of special symbols according to the result of the determination, wherein the variable display means performs cycle variation a plurality of times as the variable display of the special symbols, and then the special symbols. is stopped and displayed, and the effect control means is capable of executing a variable effect by the effect symbol and a variable display of the special symbol (fourth symbol) during the execution of the variable display of the special symbol, and the cycle variation The variable display (updated variation) of the special symbols is started at a timing different from the start timing. By doing so, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game. The "different timing" here means the start timing of the timer interrupt of the main control board at which the cycle fluctuation is started, and the start timing of the frame update of the image control section at which the fluctuation display of the special symbol is started. Although it is inconsistent, the timer interrupt period (4 ms) of the main control board in which the cycle fluctuation is started is not included in the frame update period (33 ms) of the image control unit in which the fluctuation display of the special symbols is started. It may be

◆ As a fourth configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and effect control means ( Effect control board 130), and the main control means determines whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player (special figure determination information). means, and a variable display means for performing variable display of special symbols according to the result of the determination, wherein the variable display means performs cycle variation a plurality of times as the variable display of the special symbols, and then the special symbols. is stopped and displayed, and the effect control means is capable of executing a variable effect by the effect symbol and a variable display of the special symbol (fourth symbol) during the execution of the variable display of the special symbol, and in the cycle variation After the first display change is started, the variable display (updated change) of the special symbols is started. By doing so, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

◆ As a fifth configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and effect control means ( Effect control board 130), and the main control means determines whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player (special figure determination information). means, storage means for storing the judgment information for which the judgment has not been executed as a pending memory, and variable display means for executing variable display of special symbols according to the result of the judgment, wherein the variable display means is The special symbols are stopped and displayed after the cycle variation is performed a plurality of times as the variable display of the special symbols, and the effect control means is capable of executing the variable effect by the effect symbols during the execution of the variable display of the special symbols. , Hold display according to the hold storage stored in the storage means (hold icon and hold number on main display device 70, LED hold display on sub first hold display 83 and sub second hold display 84) It is possible to reduce the reserved display according to the decrease of the reserved storage, and the reduced display of the reserved display is started at a timing different from the start timing of the cycle fluctuation. . By doing so, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game. The “different timing” here means the start timing of the timer interrupt of the main control board at which the cycle fluctuation is started and the start timing of the frame update of the image control section at which the decrease display of the hold display is started. What is inconsistent is that the timer interrupt (4ms) of the main control board at which the cycle fluctuation is started is not included in the frame update period (33ms) of the image controller at which the decrease display of the pending display is started. may be

◆ As a sixth configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and effect control means ( Effect control board 130), and the main control means determines whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player (special figure determination information). means, storage means for storing the judgment information for which the judgment has not been executed as a pending memory, and variable display means for executing variable display of special symbols according to the result of the judgment, wherein the variable display means is The special symbols are stopped and displayed after the cycle variation is performed a plurality of times as the variable display of the special symbols, and the effect control means is capable of executing the variable effect by the effect symbols during the execution of the variable display of the special symbols. , Hold display (display of hold icon HI and hold number on main display device 70, hold on sub-first hold display 83 and sub-second hold display 84) according to the hold storage stored in the storage means and displaying the reserved display decrementing in response to the decrementing of the reserved storage, such that the decrementing display of the reserved display begins after a first display change in the cycle variation is initiated. It has become. By doing so, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

◆ As a seventh configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and effect control means ( Effect control board 130), and the main control means determines whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player (special figure determination information). means, storage means for storing the judgment information for which the judgment has not been executed as a pending memory, and variable display means for executing variable display of special symbols according to the result of the judgment, wherein the variable display means is The special symbols are stopped and displayed after the cycle variation is performed a plurality of times as the variable display of the special symbols, and the effect control means is capable of executing the variable effect by the effect symbols during the execution of the variable display of the special symbols. , it is possible to additionally display a pending display (holding icon HI) according to an increase in the pending memory, and to shift display and decrease the pending display (change to the icon TI) according to a decrease in the pending memory. The shift display of the hold display is started at a timing different from the start timing of the cycle variation. By doing so, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game. The “different timing” here means the start timing of the timer interrupt of the main control board at which the cycle fluctuation is started and the start timing of the frame update of the image control section at which the shift display of the hold display is started. What is inconsistent is that the timer interrupt period (4 ms) of the main control board in which the cycle fluctuation is started is not included in the frame update period (33 ms) of the image control unit in which the shift display of the hold display is started. It may be

◆ As the eighth configuration for solving the above problems, there are main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and effect control means ( Effect control board 130), and the main control means determines whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player (special figure determination information). means, storage means for storing the judgment information for which the judgment has not been executed as a pending memory, and variable display means for executing variable display of special symbols according to the result of the judgment, wherein the variable display means is The special symbols are stopped and displayed after the cycle variation is performed a plurality of times as the variable display of the special symbols, and the effect control means is capable of executing the variable effect by the effect symbols during the execution of the variable display of the special symbols. , it is possible to additionally display a pending display (holding icon HI) according to an increase in the pending memory, and to shift display and decrease the pending display (change to the icon TI) according to a decrease in the pending memory. There is, and after the first cycle variation in the variable display of the special symbol ends, the shift display of the pending display ends. By doing so, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

◆ As a ninth configuration for solving the above problems, there are main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and effect control means ( Effect control board 130), and the main control means determines whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player (special figure determination information). means, storage means for storing the judgment information for which the judgment has not been executed as a pending memory, and variable display means for executing variable display of special symbols according to the result of the judgment, wherein the variable display means is The special symbols are stopped and displayed after the cycle variation is performed a plurality of times as the variable display of the special symbols, and the effect control means is capable of executing the variable effect by the effect symbols during the execution of the variable display of the special symbols. , additionally displaying a pending display (holding icon HI) according to an increase in the pending memory, and shifting the pending display according to a decrease in the pending memory and displaying it as a corresponding display (the icon TI). , and the shift display is started at a timing different from the start timing of the cycle variation. By doing so, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game. The “different timing” here means the start timing of the timer interrupt of the main control board at which the cycle fluctuation is started and the start timing of the frame update of the image control section at which the shift display of the hold display is started. What is inconsistent is that the timer interrupt period (4 ms) of the main control board in which the cycle fluctuation is started is not included in the frame update period (33 ms) of the image control unit in which the shift display of the hold display is started. may be

◆ As a tenth configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and effect control means ( Effect control board 130), and the main control means determines whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player (special figure determination information). means, storage means for storing the judgment information for which the judgment has not been executed as a pending memory, and variable display means for executing variable display of special symbols according to the result of the judgment, wherein the variable display means is , the special symbol is stopped and displayed after performing cycle variation a plurality of times as the variable display of the special symbol, and the effect control means is capable of executing the variable effect by the effect symbol during the execution of the variable display of the special symbol. and additionally displaying a pending display (holding icon HI) in accordance with an increase in the reserved memory, and shifting the holding display according to a decrease in the reserved memory and displaying it as a corresponding display (the icon TI). It is possible that the shift display ends after the first display change in the cycle variation has ended. By doing so, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

◆ As the eleventh configuration for solving the above problems, there are main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and effect control means ( Effect control board 130), and the main control means determines whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player (special figure determination information). means, and a variable display means for performing variable display of special symbols according to the result of the determination, wherein the variable display means performs cycle variation a plurality of times as the variable display of the special symbols, and then the special symbols. is stop-displayed, and the effect control means can execute a variable effect by the effect symbol during execution of the variable display of the special symbol, and a predetermined game sound (variable BGM, variable start sound , temporary stop sound, etc.) can be audibly output, and the audible output of the predetermined game sound is started at a timing different from the start timing of the cycle variation. By doing so, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game. The "different timing" here means the start timing of the timer interrupt of the main control board at which the cycle fluctuation is started, and the start timing of the frame update of the image control unit at which the audible output of the predetermined game sound is started. However, the timer interrupt period (4 ms) of the main control board, in which the cycle fluctuation is started, is within the frame update period (33 ms) of the image control unit, in which the audible output of a predetermined game sound is started. may not be included in

◆ As a twelfth configuration for solving the above problems, there are main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and effect control means ( Effect control board 130), and the main control means determines whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player (special figure determination information). means, and a variable display means for performing variable display of special symbols according to the result of the determination, wherein the variable display means performs cycle variation a plurality of times as the variable display of the special symbols, and then the special symbols. is stop-displayed, and the effect control means is capable of executing a variable effect by the effect symbol during execution of the variable display of the special symbol, and audibly outputs effect BGM (variation BGM) during the execution of the variable effect. , and the audible output of the effect BGM is started at a timing different from the start timing of the cycle variation. By doing so, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game. The "different timing" here means the start timing of the timer interrupt of the main control board at which the cycle fluctuation is started and the start timing of the frame update of the image control section at which the audible output of the effect BGM is started. What is inconsistent is that the timer interrupt period (4 ms) of the main control board in which the cycle fluctuation is started is not included in the frame update period (33 ms) of the image control unit in which the audible output of the effect BGM is started. It may be

◆ As a thirteenth configuration for solving the above problems, there are main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and effect control means ( Effect control board 130), and the main control means determines whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player (special figure determination information). means, and a variable display means for performing variable display of special symbols according to the result of the determination, wherein the variable display means performs cycle variation a plurality of times as the variable display of the special symbols, and then the special symbols. is stopped and displayed, and the effect control means can execute a variable effect by the effect symbol during the execution of the variable display of the special symbol, and the background image displayed in the background of the effect symbol is displayed (horizontal scroll, Scene change, etc.), and the effect operation of the background image is started at a timing different from the start timing of the cycle variation (at the start of display of the variation standby screen after the power is turned on). there is By doing so, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game. The “different timing” here means the start timing of the timer interrupt of the main control board at which the cycle fluctuation is started, and the start timing of the frame update of the image control section at which the effect operation of the background image is started. What is inconsistent is that the timer interrupt period (4 ms) of the main control board in which the cycle fluctuation is started is not included in the frame update period (33 ms) of the image control unit in which the background image rendering operation is started. It may be

◆ As a 14th configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and effect control means ( Effect control board 130), and the main control means determines whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player (special figure determination information). means, and a variable display means for performing variable display of special symbols according to the result of the determination, wherein the variable display means performs cycle variation a plurality of times as the variable display of the special symbols, and then the special symbols. is stopped and displayed, and the effect control means can execute a variable effect by the effect symbol during the execution of the variable display of the special symbol, and the background image displayed in the background of the effect symbol is displayed (horizontal scroll, scene change, etc.), and before the start of the first cycle variation in the variation display of the special symbols (at the start of display of the variation standby screen after the power is turned on), the effect operation of the background image is performed. ing. By doing so, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

◆ As a fifteenth configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and effect control means ( Effect control board 130), and the main control means determines whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player (special figure determination information). means, and a variable display means for performing variable display of special symbols according to the result of the determination, wherein the variable display means performs cycle variation a plurality of times as the variable display of the special symbols, and then the special symbols. is stopped and displayed, and the effect control means can execute a variable effect by the effect symbol during execution of the variable display of the special symbol, and the effect symbol is in a predetermined mode at a timing different from the end timing of the cycle variation. is displayed (stop display, temporary stop display). By doing so, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game. The "different timing" here means the start timing of the timer interrupt of the main control board that ends the cycle variation and the start timing of the frame update of the image control unit that displays the effect symbols in a predetermined manner. What is inconsistent is that the timer interrupt period (4 ms) of the main control board in which the cycle fluctuation is terminated is not included in the frame update period (33 ms) of the image control unit in which the effect symbols are displayed in a predetermined manner. It may be

◆ As a 16th configuration for solving the above problems, there are main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and effect control means ( Effect control board 130), and the main control means determines whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player (special figure determination information). means, and a variable display means for performing variable display of special symbols according to the result of the determination, wherein the variable display means performs cycle variation a plurality of times as the variable display of the special symbols, and then the special symbols. is stopped and displayed, and the effect control means can execute the variable effect by the effect symbol during the execution of the variable display of the special symbol, and before the last cycle variation in the variable display of the special symbol ends, The production pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed. By doing so, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

◆ As a 17th configuration for solving the above problems, there are main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and effect control means ( Effect control board 130), and the main control means determines whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player (special figure determination information). means, and a variable display means for performing variable display of special symbols according to the result of the determination, wherein the variable display means performs cycle variation a plurality of times as the variable display of the special symbols, and then the special symbols. is stopped and displayed, and the effect control means is capable of executing a variable effect by the effect symbol and a variable display of the special symbol (fourth symbol) during the execution of the variable display of the special symbol, and the cycle variation The special symbols are stop-displayed at a timing different from the end timing. By doing so, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game. Note that the "different timing" here means that the start timing of the timer interrupt of the main control board that ends the cycle variation and the start timing of the frame update of the image control unit that stops and displays the special symbols do not match. However, even if the timer interrupt period (4 ms) of the main control board in which the cycle fluctuation is terminated is not included in the frame update period (33 ms) of the image control unit in which the special symbols are stopped and displayed. good.

◆ As the eighteenth configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and effect control means ( Effect control board 130), and the main control means determines whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player (special figure determination information). means, storage means for storing the judgment information for which the judgment has not been executed as a pending memory, and variable display means for executing variable display of special symbols according to the result of the judgment, wherein the variable display means is The special symbols are stopped and displayed after the cycle variation is performed a plurality of times as the variable display of the special symbols, and the effect control means is capable of executing the variable effect by the effect symbols during the execution of the variable display of the special symbols. , a pending display (holding icon HI) corresponding to the pending memory stored in the storage means can be effected (shaking motion, rotating motion) during execution of the variable effect, and the special symbol is changed. Even after the end of the last cycle variation in the display, the effect operation of the pending display is continued. By doing so, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

◆ As a 19th configuration for solving the above problems, there are main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and effect control means ( Effect control board 130), and the main control means determines whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player (special figure determination information). means, storage means for storing the judgment information for which the judgment has not been executed as a pending memory, and variable display means for executing variable display of special symbols according to the result of the judgment, wherein the variable display means is The special symbols are stopped and displayed after the cycle variation is performed a plurality of times as the variable display of the special symbols, and the effect control means is capable of executing the variable effect by the effect symbols during the execution of the variable display of the special symbols. , it is possible to display a corresponding display (the icon TI) corresponding to the determination information for which the determination has been performed, and to disappear and display the corresponding display at a predetermined timing; The disappearance display of the correspondence display ends at a timing different from the end timing of the cycle fluctuation of . By doing so, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game. Note that the "different timing" here means the start timing of the timer interrupt of the main control board at which the cycle fluctuation ends, and the start timing of the frame update of the image control section at which the disappearance display of the corresponding display ends. What is inconsistent is that the timer interrupt period (4 ms) of the main control board in which the cycle fluctuation is terminated is not included in the frame update period (33 ms) of the image control unit in which the disappearance display of the corresponding display is terminated. It may be

◆ As a twentieth configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and effect control means ( Effect control board 130), and the main control means determines whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player (special figure determination information). means, storage means for storing the judgment information for which the judgment has not been executed as a pending memory, and variable display means for executing variable display of special symbols according to the result of the judgment, wherein the variable display means is The special symbols are stopped and displayed after the cycle variation is performed a plurality of times as the variable display of the special symbols, and the effect control means is capable of executing the variable effect by the effect symbols during the execution of the variable display of the special symbols. , it is possible to display a corresponding display (the icon TI) corresponding to the determination information for which the determination has been performed, and to disappear and display the corresponding display at a predetermined timing; After the cycle variation of is finished, disappearance display of the corresponding display is finished. By doing so, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

◆ As a 21st configuration for solving the above problems, there are main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and effect control means ( Effect control board 130), and the main control means determines whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player (special figure determination information). means, and a variable display means for performing variable display of special symbols according to the result of the determination, wherein the variable display means performs cycle variation a plurality of times as the variable display of the special symbols, and then the special symbols. is stop-displayed, and the effect control means can execute a variable effect by the effect symbol during execution of the variable display of the special symbol, and a predetermined game sound (variable BGM, variable start sound , temporary stop sound, etc.) can be audibly output, and the audible output of the predetermined game sound started before the last cycle variation in the variation display of the special symbol is output at the end of the cycle variation It is possible to end at a timing different from the timing. By doing so, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game. The "different timing" here means the start timing of the timer interrupt of the main control board at which the cycle fluctuation ends, and the start timing of the frame update of the image control unit at which the audible output of the predetermined game sound ends. However, the timer interrupt period (4 ms) of the main control board in which the cycle fluctuation ends is within the frame update period (33 ms) of the image control unit in which the audible output of the predetermined game sound ends. may not be included in

◆ As a 22nd configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and effect control means ( Effect control board 130), and the main control means determines whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player (special figure determination information). means, and a variable display means for performing variable display of special symbols according to the result of the determination, wherein the variable display means performs cycle variation a plurality of times as the variable display of the special symbols, and then the special symbols. is stopped and displayed, and the effect control means can execute a variable effect by the effect symbol during the execution of the variable display of the special symbol, and a predetermined game sound (such as a temporary stop sound) during the execution of the variable effect. It is possible to audibly output, and the audible output of the predetermined game sound started before the last cycle variation in the variation display of the special symbol can be terminated before the cycle variation ends. It is possible. By doing so, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

◆ As a 23rd configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and effect control means ( Effect control board 130), and the main control means determines whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player (special figure determination information). means, and a variable display means for performing variable display of special symbols according to the result of the determination, wherein the variable display means performs cycle variation a plurality of times as the variable display of the special symbols, and then the special symbols. is stop-displayed, and the effect control means can execute a variable effect by the effect symbol during execution of the variable display of the special symbol, and audibly outputs a predetermined game sound (variable BGM) during the execution of the variable effect. The predetermined game sound can be continuously audibly output even after the end of the last cycle variation (during stop display) in the variable display of the special symbols. By doing so, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

◆ As the 24th configuration for solving the above problems, there are main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and effect control means ( Effect control board 130), and the main control means determines whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player (special figure determination information). means, and a variable display means for performing variable display of special symbols according to the result of the determination, wherein the variable display means performs cycle variation a plurality of times as the variable display of the special symbols, and then the special symbols. is stopped and displayed, and the effect control means can execute a variable effect by the effect symbol during execution of the variable display of the special symbol, and the background image displayed in the background of the effect symbol is displayed during the execution of the variable effect It is possible to perform the effect operation (horizontal scrolling, scene change, etc.), and the effect operation of the background image continues even after the last cycle variation in the variable display of the special symbols is completed (during stop display). It is supposed to be done. By doing so, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

(Content 2 of the invention described in the present embodiment)
In the conventional game machine, along with executing the variable display of the special symbol according to the determination result of the determination information, there was one that executes the variable effect by the effect symbol during the execution of the variable display of the special symbol (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open 2018-118109). However, there is room for improvement in the game presentation, and there is a problem that the game lacks interest.

◆ As the first configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (for example, main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and effect control that controls the effect according to the command from the main control means means (for example, production control board 130), and the main control means, the determination information (for example, special (e.g., main CPU 110a) for determining figure determination information); The effect control means can execute a variable effect by means of a effect symbol (for example, effect symbol 70a) corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable effect operates the effect symbol in a predetermined mode. Pre-stop motion effect (e.g., character shaking head, reduction → normal display, rotating display, bounce display, rotating (small) display, bounce (small) display, etc.), and after the pre-stop motion effect, the above effect including a stop display (for example, a completely stopped mode) that stops the symbols, and a winning effect (for example, the frame lighting device 10 , lighting device 74 for the board, rainbow emission of the production button light emitting LED 17c, output of success sound, display of success image, vibration of production button 17, jackpot notification mode operation of movable production device, etc.). is terminated at a predetermined timing (for example, the timing when the production pattern 70a is stopped and displayed, for example, a predetermined timing in the period when the production pattern 70a is temporarily stopped).
As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

◆ As a second configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (for example, main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and effect control that controls the effect according to the command from the main control means means (for example, effect control board 130), and the main control means, the determination information (for example, special (e.g., main CPU 110a) for determining figure determination information); , The production control means can execute a variable production by production designs (for example, production design 70a, special design TZ) corresponding to the variable display of the special design, and the production design is the first production design (for example, , production pattern 70a) and a second production pattern (for example, special pattern TZ) different from the first production pattern, and a specific variation production based on the determination result of executing the special game (for example, a jackpot In the variable production pattern that can be executed at the time of determination), the first production pattern is a pre-stop action production that operates in a predetermined manner (for example, display in which the character shakes his head, reduction → normal display, rotation display, bounce display, rotation (Small) display, bound (small) display, etc.), then stop display (for example, a completely stopped mode) is performed, and the second production pattern is stopped without performing the pre-stop action production. Display (for example, a completely stopped mode) is executed, and in the special game executed after the end of the variable production, the pattern corresponding to the first production pattern is displayed without displaying the second production pattern ( For example, only the number part in the production pattern 70a) is displayed.
As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

◆ As a third configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (for example, main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and effect control that controls the effect according to the command from the main control means means (for example, production control board 130), and the main control means, the determination information (for example, special (e.g., main CPU 110a) for determining figure determination information); , The production control means can execute a variable production by production symbols (for example, production design 70a, special design TZ) corresponding to the variable display of the special design, and the production design is the first production design (for example, , Production pattern 70a) and a second production pattern (for example, special pattern TZ) different from the first production pattern, and a specific variation production based on the determination result of executing the special game (for example, a jackpot In the variable effect pattern that can be executed at the time of determination), the first effect pattern is changed to the first effect pattern by performing a pre-stop operation effect (for example, symbol promotion effect, resurrection effect) that operates in a predetermined manner. Mode (for example, the combination of the production design 70a is "444", for example, the combination of the production design 70a is "454") to the second mode (for example, the combination of the production design 70a is "777"), the second It is possible to execute a stop display (for example, a completely stopped mode) in the first production pattern of the mode, and the second production pattern is the second mode without performing the pre-stop action production. It is possible to execute a stop display (for example, a completely stopped mode) in the second effect symbol corresponding to the first effect symbol.
As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

◆ As a fourth configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (for example, main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and effect control that controls the effect according to the command from the main control means means (for example, production control board 130), and the main control means, the determination information (for example, special (e.g., main CPU 110a) for determining figure determination information); The effect control means can execute a variable effect by means of a effect symbol (for example, effect symbol 70a) corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable effect operates the effect symbol in a predetermined mode. Pre-stop motion effect (e.g., character shaking head, reduction → normal display, rotating display, bounce display, rotating (small) display, bounce (small) display, etc.), and after the pre-stop motion effect, the above effect and a stop display for stopping the pattern (for example, a completely stopped mode), and a changing icon (for example, the icon TI) corresponding to the changing effect being executed can be displayed, and the changing The medium icon is in the process of changing, suggesting the possibility that the special game will be executed by a first display mode (eg, white icon) and a second display mode (eg, blue icon) different from the first display mode. When an icon suggestion effect (for example, an icon change effect) can be executed and the display is performed in the first display mode, a predetermined disappearance effect (for example, the icon disappearance effect) is performed when the stop display is performed. is performed to hide the changing icon, and when the display is performed in the second display mode, the predetermined disappearing effect is performed when the stop display is performed to hide the changing icon. characterized in that
As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

◆ As a fifth configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (for example, main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and effect control that controls the effect according to the command from the main control means means (for example, production control board 130), and the main control means, the determination information (for example, special (e.g., main CPU 110a) for determining figure determination information); , The production control means can execute a variable production by production symbols (for example, production design 70a, special design TZ) corresponding to the variable display of the special design, and the production design is the first production design (for example, , production pattern 70a) and a second production pattern (for example, special pattern TZ) different from the first production pattern, and the first production pattern is a pre-stop operation production that operates in a predetermined manner (for example, , the character shakes its head, reduction → normal display, rotation display, bounce display, rotation (small) display, bounce (small) display, etc.), and then stop display (for example, a completely stopped state) Executed, the second production pattern executes a stop display (for example, a completely stopped mode) without performing the pre-stop action production, and an icon during fluctuation corresponding to the fluctuation production being executed (for example , the icon TI) can be displayed, and the changing icon is displayed in a predetermined disappearing effect ( For example, the icon is hidden without performing the icon disappearance effect), but the predetermined disappearance effect is performed when the first effect symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable effect based on the determination result that the special game is not executed. It is characterized in that it is hidden by performing
As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

◆ As a sixth configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (for example, main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and effect control that controls the effect according to the command from the main control means means (for example, production control board 130), and the main control means, the determination information (for example, special (e.g., main CPU 110a) for determining figure determination information); , The production control means can execute a variable production by production symbols (for example, production design 70a, special design TZ) corresponding to the variable display of the special design, and the production design is the first production design (for example, , production pattern 70a) and a second production pattern (for example, special pattern TZ) different from the first production pattern, and the first production pattern is a pre-stop operation production that operates in a predetermined manner (for example, , the character shakes its head, reduction → normal display, rotation display, bounce display, rotation (small) display, bounce (small) display, etc.), and then stop display (for example, a completely stopped state) Executed, the second production pattern executes a stop display (for example, a completely stopped mode) without performing the pre-stop action production, and an icon during fluctuation corresponding to the fluctuation production being executed (for example , the icon TI) can be displayed, and the changing icon is displayed in a predetermined disappearing effect ( For example, the icon is hidden without performing the icon disappearance effect), but the predetermined disappearance effect is performed when the stop display of the second effect symbol is performed in the variable effect based on the determination result that the special game is not executed. It is characterized in that it is hidden by performing
As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

◆ As a seventh configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (for example, main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and effect control that controls the effect according to the command from the main control means means (for example, production control board 130), and the main control means, the determination information (for example, special (e.g., main CPU 110a) for determining figure determination information); The effect control means can execute a variable effect by means of a effect symbol (for example, effect symbol 70a) corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable effect operates the effect symbol in a predetermined mode. A pre-stop action effect (for example, temporary stop of the effect pattern 70a in the decided effect), and a stop display (for example, a completely stopped mode) for stopping the effect pattern after the pre-stop action effect , The production pattern is a first mode (for example, a production pattern 70a with only a number part) and a second mode different from the first mode (for example, a production pattern 70a with a character). It is possible to execute the variable production. Yes, in a first variation effect (for example, a losing SPSP reach variation effect) based on the determination result that the special game is not executed, the pre-stop action effect is performed in the first mode, and the stop display is performed in the second mode. However, in a second variation effect (for example, a jackpot SPSP reach variation effect) based on a determination result that the special game is to be executed, the pre-stop action effect and the stop display are performed in the first mode. do.
As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

◆ As the eighth configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (for example, main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and effect control that controls the effect according to the command from the main control means means (for example, production control board 130), and the main control means, the determination information (for example, special (e.g., main CPU 110a) for determining figure determination information); The effect control means can execute a variable effect by means of a effect symbol (for example, effect symbol 70a) corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable effect operates the effect symbol in a predetermined mode. Including a pre-stop action effect (for example, temporary stop of the effect pattern 70a) and a stop display (for example, a completely stopped mode) for stopping the effect pattern after the pre-stop action effect. The pattern can execute the variable effect in a first mode (for example, a production pattern 70a with only a number part) and a second mode (for example, a production pattern 70a with a character) different from the first mode. In the first variable effect (for example, losing normal reach variable effect) based on the determination result that the special game is not to be executed, the pre-stop motion effect and the stop display are performed in the second mode, but the special game is not executed. In the second variation production (for example, losing SPSP reach fluctuation production) based on the determination result of the above, the pre-stop operation production (for example, (in the decision production) temporary stop of the production pattern 70a) is performed in the first mode. The stop display is performed in the following manner.
As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

◆ As a ninth configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (for example, main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and effect control that controls the effect according to the command from the main control means means (for example, production control board 130), and the main control means, the determination information (for example, special (e.g., main CPU 110a) for determining figure determination information); The effect control means can execute a variable effect by means of a effect symbol (for example, effect symbol 70a) corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable effect operates the effect symbol in a predetermined mode. Pre-stop motion effect (e.g., character shaking head, reduction → normal display, rotating display, bounce display, rotating (small) display, bounce (small) display, etc.), and after the pre-stop motion effect, the above effect A predetermined background image (for example, the normal background image in FIG. 119) that displays the operation during the execution of the variable effect can be displayed. In the case where it is possible to execute a specific effect (for example, SP reach, SPSP reach) that makes the predetermined background image difficult to see, and the predetermined background image is made visible again in response to the end of the specific effect, The predetermined background image (for example, the normal background image displayed at the timing of T2 in FIG. 119) at the time when the visibility becomes difficult is not visually recognized, and the predetermined background image at the end of the specific effect ( For example, the normal background image corresponding to the updated value at timing T8 in FIG. 119, the normal background image developed on layer N+1 at timing T8 in FIG.
As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

◆ As a tenth configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (for example, main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and effect control that controls the effect according to the command from the main control means means (for example, production control board 130), and the main control means, the determination information (for example, special (e.g., main CPU 110a) for determining figure determination information); The effect control means can execute a variable effect by means of a effect symbol (for example, effect symbol 70a) corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable effect operates the effect symbol in a predetermined mode. Pre-stop motion effect (for example, character shaking head, reduction → normal display, rotating display, bounce display, rotating (small) display, bounce (small) display, etc.), and after the pre-stop motion effect, the above effect A specific effect (for example, SP reach, SPSP reach) in a specific variable effect based on the determination result of executing the special game, including a stop display (for example, a completely stopped mode) for stopping the pattern. After notifying that the special game will be executed by the execution of and before the stop display is performed, a related effect related to the specific effect (for example, display of an afterglow image) is executed, and the related effect During the execution of, without displaying the production pattern in a manner notifying that the special game is executed (for example, the production pattern 70a is not displayed at all), after the execution of the related production, the production pattern is displayed as the It is characterized by displaying in a manner of notifying that the special game will be executed (for example, displaying the effect symbol 70a with "777").
As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

(Content 3 of the invention described in this embodiment)
A conventional gaming machine is provided with an effect control means for controlling an effect related to a game, and a special game is executed in response to the operation of the operation means during an effective period during which the promotion effect for prompting the operation of the operation means is performed. There is a game machine that executes a suggestive effect that suggests a possibility (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-158774). However, since the validity period is set over a predetermined period of time, the player's operation timing varies, and there is still room for improvement in terms of enhancing the entertainment and entertainment.

◆ As the first configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (for example, main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and effect control that controls the effect according to the command from the main control means In a gaming machine comprising means (for example, production control board 130) and operation means (for example, production buttons 17) that can be operated by a player, the main control means controls a special game (for example, , jackpot game) determination means (e.g., main CPU 110a) for determining whether or not to execute determination information (e.g., special figure determination information); Display means (for example, special symbol display devices 60 and 61), and the variation display means performs cycle variation multiple times as a variation display of the special symbol, and then stops and displays the special symbol (for example, completely mode), the effect control means can execute a variable effect by the effect symbol (for example, effect symbol 70a) corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol, and the start timing of the cycle variation for the first time At a different timing, the variable display of the production pattern in the variable production is started, and after the start, a stop display (for example, a completely stopped mode) for stopping the production pattern is executed, and a predetermined Operation effective period (for example, effective period of 4 seconds in the determined effect) in response to the operation of the operation means (for example, T3 ~ T4 in FIG. 123) it is possible to oscillate display, When the operation means is operated at a first timing (for example, T3 in case 1 in FIG. 123) in the predetermined operation valid period, the number of cycle fluctuations performed during execution of the swing display, and the operation When the means is operated at a second timing (for example, T3 in case 2 in FIG. 123) different from the first timing in the predetermined operation valid period, the cycle variation performed during the execution of the swing display Although different from the number of times, the number of cycle fluctuations from the start of the predetermined operation effective period (for example, T2 in FIG. 123) to the stop display of the effect symbol (for example, T6 in FIG. 123) is It is characterized in that the operation is the same regardless of the timing of the operation of the operation means.
This makes it possible to improve the performance interest.

◆ As a second configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (for example, main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and effect control that controls the effect according to the command from the main control means Means (for example, effect control board 130), operation means (for example, effect button 17) operable by the player, standby position (for example, "A" in FIG. 60) and effect position (for example, "B","C") and a movable body (for example, the first movable effect device 73), the main control means controls a special game that is advantageous to the player (for example, Judgment means (for example, main CPU 110a) for judging judgment information (for example, special figure judgment information) as to whether or not to execute a jackpot game), and fluctuation display for executing fluctuation display of special symbols according to the result of the judgment means (e.g., special symbol display devices 60, 61), and the variation display means performs cycle variation a plurality of times as the variation display of the special symbol, and then stops displaying the special symbol (e.g., completely stops mode), the effect control means can execute a variable effect by the effect symbol (for example, effect symbol 70a) corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol, and the start timing of the cycle variation for the first time At different timings, the variable display of the performance symbols in the variable performance is started, and after the start, a stop display (for example, a mode in which the performance symbols are completely stopped) is performed to stop the performance symbols, and a predetermined operation is performed. It is possible to operate the movable body in response to the operation of the operating means during the effective period (for example, the effective period of 4 seconds in the decision effect) (for example, the action of the decision effect in FIG. 60), and the operation When the means is operated at the first timing (for example, T3 of case 1 in FIG. 124) in the predetermined operation valid period, the production pattern from the start of operation of the movable body (for example, T3 of case 1 in FIG. 124) and a second timing (for example, T3 of case 2 in FIG. 124) from the start of the operation of the movable body (for example, T3 in case 2 of FIG. 124) until the stop display of the production pattern is performed (for example, case 2 of FIG. 124 Although different from the number of cycle fluctuations in T6), from the start of the predetermined operation valid period (for example, T2 in FIG. 124) until the stop display of the effect symbol is performed (for example, T6 in FIG. 124) is the same number of cycles regardless of the timing at which the operating means is operated.
This makes it possible to improve the performance interest.

◆ As a third configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (for example, main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and effect control that controls the effect according to the command from the main control means Means (for example, effect control board 130), operation means (for example, effect button 17) operable by the player, standby position (for example, "A" in FIG. 60) and effect position (for example, "B","C") and a movable body (for example, the first movable effect device 73), the main control means controls a special game that is advantageous to the player (for example, Judgment means (for example, main CPU 110a) for judging judgment information (for example, special figure judgment information) as to whether or not to execute a jackpot game), and fluctuation display for executing fluctuation display of special symbols according to the result of the judgment means (e.g., special symbol display devices 60, 61), and the variation display means performs cycle variation a plurality of times as the variation display of the special symbol, and then stops displaying the special symbol (e.g., completely stops mode), the effect control means can execute a variable effect by the effect symbol (for example, effect symbol 70a) corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol, and the start timing of the cycle variation for the first time At different timings, the variable display of the performance symbols in the variable performance is started, and after the start, a stop display (for example, a mode in which the performance symbols are completely stopped) is performed to stop the performance symbols, and a predetermined operation is performed. It is possible to operate the movable body in response to the operation of the operating means during the effective period (for example, the effective period of 4 seconds in the decision effect) (for example, the action of the decision effect in FIG. 60), and the operation When the means is operated at the first timing (for example, T3 of case 1 in FIG. 124) in the predetermined operation effective period, the movable body returns to the standby position (for example, T3- of case 1 in FIG. 124). 1) until the stop display of the effect symbol is performed (for example, T6 of case 1 in FIG. 124), the number of cycle fluctuations, and the operation means are different from the first timing in the predetermined operation effective period. When the movable body is operated at the second timing (for example, T3 in case 2 of FIG. 124), the stop display of the production pattern from the return to the standby position (for example, T3-1 in case 2 of FIG. 124) is performed (for example, T6 of case 2 in FIG. 124), but the stop display of the effect symbol from the start of the predetermined operation valid period (for example, T2 in FIG. 124) is performed (for example, T6 in FIG. 124) is the same regardless of the timing at which the operating means is operated.
This makes it possible to improve the performance interest.

◆ As a fourth configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (for example, main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and effect control that controls the effect according to the command from the main control means Means (for example, effect control board 130), operation means (for example, effect button 17) operable by the player, standby position (for example, "A" in FIG. 60) and effect position (for example, "B","C") and a movable body (for example, the first movable effect device 73), the main control means controls a special game that is advantageous to the player (for example, Judgment means (for example, main CPU 110a) for judging judgment information (for example, special figure judgment information) as to whether or not to execute a jackpot game), and fluctuation display for executing fluctuation display of special symbols according to the result of the judgment means (e.g., special symbol display devices 60, 61), and the variation display means performs cycle variation a plurality of times as the variation display of the special symbol, and then stops displaying the special symbol (e.g., completely stops mode), the effect control means can execute a variable effect by the effect symbol (for example, effect symbol 70a) corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol, and the start timing of the cycle variation for the first time At different timings, the variable display of the performance symbols in the variable performance is started, and after the start, a stop display (for example, a mode in which the performance symbols are completely stopped) is performed to stop the performance symbols, and a predetermined operation is performed. It is possible to operate the movable body in response to the operation of the operating means during the effective period (for example, the effective period of 4 seconds in the decision effect) (for example, the action of the decision effect in FIG. 60), and the operation When the means is operated at the first timing (for example, T3 of case 1 in FIG. 124) in the predetermined operation valid period, the production pattern from the start of operation of the movable body (for example, T3 of case 1 in FIG. 124) and a second timing (for example, T3 of case 2 in FIG. 124) from the start of the operation of the movable body (for example, T3 in case 2 of FIG. 124) until the stop display of the production pattern is performed (for example, case 2 of FIG. 124 Although different from the number of cycle fluctuations in T6), from the start of operation of the movable body (for example, T3 in FIG. 124) to the return to the standby position (for example, T3-1 in FIG. 124) The number of cycle fluctuations to be performed is the same regardless of the timing at which the operating means is operated.
This makes it possible to improve the performance interest.

◆ As a fifth configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (for example, main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and effect control that controls the effect according to the command from the main control means A game comprising means (for example, production control board 130), operation means (for example, production buttons 17) operable by the player, and vibration means (for example, button driving device 17b) capable of predetermined vibrations. In the machine, the main control means is a determination means (eg, main CPU 110a) that determines determination information (eg, special figure determination information) as to whether or not to execute a special game (eg, jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player. and variable display means (e.g., special symbol display units 60 and 61) for executing variable display of special symbols according to the result of the determination, wherein the variable display means cycles as the variable display of the special symbols. After the variation is performed a plurality of times, the special symbol is stopped and displayed (for example, a mode in which it is completely stopped), and the effect control means controls the effect symbol (for example, effect symbol 70a) corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol. ), the variable display of the performance symbols in the variable performance is started at a timing different from the start timing of the cycle variation for the first time, and after the start, the performance symbols are stopped. Display (for example, a completely stopped mode) is executed, and the vibrating means is vibrated in response to the operation of the operating means during a predetermined operation valid period (for example, valid period of 4 seconds in the final effect). (for example, T3 to T3-1 in FIG. 125), and when the operation means is operated at the first timing (for example, T3 in case 1 in FIG. 125) in the predetermined operation effective period, the The number of cycle fluctuations from the start of vibration of the vibration means (for example, T3 in case 1 of FIG. 125) to the stop display of the production pattern (for example, T6 in case 1 of FIG. 125), and the operation means When the operation is performed at a second timing (for example, T3 in case 2 of FIG. 125) different from the first timing in the predetermined operation valid period (for example, T3 in case 2 of FIG. 125), the vibration means starts vibrating (for example, T3 in case 2 of FIG. ) to the stop display of the production pattern (for example, T6 of case 2 in FIG. 125), the vibration means starts vibrating (for example, T3 in FIG. 125). and the end of vibration (for example, T3-1 in FIG. 125), the number of times of the cycle fluctuations performed is the same regardless of the timing at which the operation means is operated. .
This makes it possible to improve the performance interest.

◆ As a sixth configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (for example, main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and effect control that controls the effect according to the command from the main control means In a game machine comprising means (for example, effect control board 130) and vibration means (for example, button driving device 17b) capable of predetermined vibration, the main control means controls a special game ( Judgment means (e.g., main CPU 110a) for judging judgment information (e.g., special figure judgment information) as to whether or not to execute a jackpot game); and variable display means (for example, special symbol display devices 60 and 61), and the variable display means performs cycle variation a plurality of times as variable display of the special symbols, and then stops and displays the special symbols (for example, complete ), and the effect control means can execute a variable effect by a effect symbol (for example, a effect symbol 70a) in response to the variable display of the special symbol, and the cycle variation is started for the first time At a timing different from the timing, the variable display of the performance symbols in the variable performance is started, and after the start, a stop display (for example, a mode in which the performance symbols are completely stopped) is performed to stop the performance symbols, and the The vibration means vibrates at the first timing of the variable effect (for example, T7 in FIG. 126, for example, T3 in FIG. 126) and at the second timing of the variable effect after the first timing ( For example, there are cases where T7 in FIG. 126 vibrates at T3 in FIG. 126, for example, T7 in FIG. 126 at T7 in FIG. 126) to the end of vibration (eg, T9-1 in FIG. 126), and the vibration at the second timing. It is characterized in that the number of cycle fluctuations performed from the start (for example, T7 in FIG. 127) to the end of vibration (for example, T8-1 in FIG. 127) is different.
This makes it possible to improve the performance interest.

◆ As a seventh configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (for example, main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and effect control that controls the effect according to the command from the main control means Means (for example, effect control board 130), operation means (for example, effect button 17) that can be operated by the player, and light emitting means (for example, rainbow light emission) capable of emitting light in a predetermined light emission mode (for example, rainbow light emission) In the gaming machine provided with the frame illumination device 10, the board illumination device 74, and the effect button light emitting LED 17c), the main control means determines whether or not to execute a special game (for example, a jackpot game) advantageous to the player. Determination means (e.g., main CPU 110a) for determining whether determination information (e.g., special figure determination information), and variable display means (e.g., special symbol display device) for performing variable display of special symbols according to the determination result 60, 61), and the variable display means performs a cycle variation a plurality of times as the variable display of the special symbol, and then stops displaying the special symbol (for example, a mode in which it is completely stopped), The effect control means is capable of executing a variable effect by means of a effect symbol (for example, a effect symbol 70a) corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable effect is executed at a timing different from the start timing of the initial cycle variation. The variable display of the production pattern is started, and after the start, a stop display (for example, a mode in which the production pattern is completely stopped) is executed to stop the production pattern, and a predetermined operation valid period (for example, in the decided production valid period of 4 seconds), it is possible to cause the light-emitting means to emit light in a predetermined light-emitting mode in response to the operation of the operating means (for example, T3 in FIG. 128), and the operating means performs the predetermined operation. When operated at the first timing (for example, T3 of case 1 in FIG. 128) in the valid period, the stop display of the effect pattern starts from the start of light emission of the predetermined light emission mode (for example, T3 of case 1 in FIG. 128). 128) and a second timing different from the first timing in the predetermined operation valid period (for example, case 1 in FIG. 128). 2 T3) from the start of light emission of the predetermined light emission mode (for example, T3 in case 2 of FIG. 128) until the stop display of the production pattern is performed (for example, T6 of case 2 in FIG. 128 ), but different from the number of times of the cycle variation, the cycle performed between the start of light emission of the predetermined light emission mode (for example, T3 in FIG. 128) and the end of light emission (for example, T3-1 in FIG. 128) The number of fluctuations is the same regardless of the timing at which the operating means is operated.
This makes it possible to improve the performance interest.

◆ As the eighth configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (for example, main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and effect control that controls the effect according to the command from the main control means Means (for example, effect control board 130), operation means (for example, effect button 17) that can be operated by the player, and sound output means (for example, sound output device 9) capable of outputting a specific sound (for example, success sound) ), wherein the main control means determines determination information (e.g., special figure determination information) as to whether or not to execute a special game (e.g., jackpot game) advantageous to the player. Means (for example, main CPU 110a) and variable display means (for example, special symbol display devices 60 and 61) for executing variable display of special symbols according to the result of the determination, and said variable display means includes said Cycle fluctuations are performed a plurality of times as the variable display of the special symbols, and then the special symbols are stopped and displayed (for example, a mode in which they are completely stopped), and the performance control means produces a performance corresponding to the variable display of the special symbols. It is possible to execute a variable effect by a design (for example, a performance pattern 70a), and at a timing different from the start timing of the cycle variation for the first time, the variable display of the effect pattern in the variable effect is started, and after the start, A stop display (for example, a completely stopped mode) for stopping the production pattern is executed, and the operation means is operated during a predetermined operation valid period (for example, a valid period of 4 seconds in the determined production) 129), and the operation means can output the specific sound at the first timing (for example, T3 in case 1 in FIG. 129) in the predetermined operation valid period (for example, T3 in FIG. 129). ) is operated, the cycle fluctuation from the start of output of the specific sound (for example, T3 in case 1 of FIG. 129) to the stop display of the production symbol (for example, T6 in case 1 of FIG. 129) and the start of outputting the specific sound (for example, , T3 of case 2 in FIG. 129) until the stop display of the production pattern is performed (for example, T6 of case 2 in FIG. For example, the number of cycle fluctuations performed from T3 in FIG. 129) to the end of output (for example, T3-1 in FIG. 129) is the same regardless of the timing at which the operation means is operated. It is characterized by
This makes it possible to improve the performance interest.

◆ As a ninth configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (for example, main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and effect control that controls the effect according to the command from the main control means In a gaming machine comprising means (for example, production control board 130) and operation means (for example, production buttons 17) that can be operated by a player, the main control means controls a special game (for example, , jackpot game) determination means (e.g., main CPU 110a) for determining whether or not to execute determination information (e.g., special figure determination information); Display means (e.g., special symbol display devices 60 and 61) are provided, and the variation display means performs cycle variation a plurality of times as the variation display of the special symbols, then stops and displays the special symbols, and controls the effect. The means is capable of executing a variable performance by a performance symbol (for example, a performance symbol 70a) corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol, and at a timing different from the start timing of the cycle variation for the first time, the variable performance in the variable performance A variable display of the production pattern is started, and after the start, a stop display (for example, a mode in which the production pattern is completely stopped) is executed to stop the production pattern, and a predetermined operation effective period (for example, the effective period in the determined production 4 seconds), the result of the determination is notified in response to the operation of the operation means (for example, T3 in FIG. 130), and after the notification, a specific image (for example, switching displayed from T3-1 in FIG. 130 image), and the notification is started (for example, case 1 T3) until the specific image is displayed (for example, T3-1 in case 1 in FIG. 130), and the first timing in the predetermined operation effective period of the operation means. is operated at a different second timing (for example, T3 in case 2 in FIG. 130) from the start of the notification (for example, T3 in case 2 in FIG. 130) to the display of the specific image (for example, in FIG. 130 (T3-1) of Case 2), the number of times from the start of the predetermined operation effective period (eg, T2 in FIG. 130) to the display of the specific image (eg, T3-1 in FIG. 130) T3-1) of 130 is characterized in that the number of cycle fluctuations is the same regardless of the timing at which the operating means is operated.
This makes it possible to improve the performance interest.

◆ As a tenth configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (for example, main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and effect control that controls the effect according to the command from the main control means In a gaming machine comprising means (for example, production control board 130) and operation means (for example, production buttons 17) that can be operated by a player, the main control means controls a special game (for example, , jackpot game) determination means (e.g., main CPU 110a) for determining whether or not to execute determination information (e.g., special figure determination information); Display means (for example, special symbol display devices 60 and 61), and the variation display means performs cycle variation multiple times as a variation display of the special symbol, and then stops and displays the special symbol (for example, completely mode), the effect control means can execute a variable effect by the effect symbol (for example, effect symbol 70a) corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol, and the start timing of the cycle variation for the first time At a different timing, the variable display of the production pattern in the variable production is started, and after the start, a stop display (for example, a completely stopped mode) for stopping the production pattern is executed, and a predetermined The result of the determination is notified in response to the operation of the operation means during the operation effective period (for example, the effective period of 4 seconds in the determined effect) (for example, T3 in FIG. 130), and after the notification, a specific image (for example, 130), and the operation means is operated at the first timing (for example, T3 in case 1 of FIG. 130) in the predetermined operation valid period. The number of times of the cycle fluctuation from the start of the notification (for example, T3 in case 1 of FIG. 130) to the display of the specific image (for example, T3-1 in case 1 of FIG. 130), and the operation means From the start of the notification (for example, T3 in case 2 in FIG. 130) when the operation is performed at a second timing (for example, T3 in case 2 in FIG. 130) different from the first timing in a predetermined operation effective period, the Although different from the number of cycle fluctuations until the specific image is displayed (for example, T3-1 in case 2 in FIG. 130), from the start of display of the specific image (for example, T3-1 in FIG. 130) to the It is characterized in that the number of times of the cycle variation until the stop display of the effect symbols is performed (for example, T6 in FIG. 130) is the same regardless of the timing at which the operation means is operated.
This makes it possible to improve the performance interest.

◆ As the eleventh configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (for example, main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and effect control that controls the effect according to the command from the main control means means (for example, production control board 130), and the main control means, the determination information (for example, special determination means (e.g., main CPU 110a) for determining the figure determination information), variable display means (e.g., special symbol display devices 60, 61) for executing variable display of special symbols according to the result of the determination, and the determination A variation display pattern determining means (eg, main CPU 110a) for determining a variation display pattern (eg, a special figure variation pattern in FIG. 9) according to the result of the variation display, wherein the variation display means Cycle fluctuations are performed a plurality of times as the variable display of the special symbols, and then the special symbols are stopped and displayed (for example, a mode in which they are completely stopped), and the performance control means produces a performance corresponding to the variable display of the special symbols. It is possible to execute a variable effect by a design (for example, a performance pattern 70a), and at a timing different from the start timing of the cycle variation for the first time, the variable display of the effect pattern in the variable effect is started, and after the start, Stop display for stopping the production pattern (for example, a completely stopped mode) is executed, and a specific fluctuation display pattern among the fluctuation display patterns (for example, special figure fluctuation pattern 04 in FIG. 9, FIG. 9 A specific effect (for example, SP reach effect) can be executed in the special figure fluctuation pattern 09), and the specific effect is different from the first specific effect (for example, typhoon reach in FIG. 132) and the first specific effect Either of the second specific effect (for example, heavy snow reach in FIG. 132) can be executed, and the content of the effect is different between the first specific effect and the second specific effect (typhoon reach and heavy snow reach The contents are different), but the number of times of the cycle variation performed until the specific effect is started (for example, T0 to T5 in FIG. 132) is the same.
This makes it possible to improve the performance interest.

◆ As a twelfth configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (for example, main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and effect control that controls the effect according to the command from the main control means means (for example, production control board 130), and the main control means, the determination information (for example, special determination means (e.g., main CPU 110a) for determining the figure determination information), variable display means (e.g., special symbol display devices 60, 61) for executing variable display of special symbols according to the result of the determination, and the determination A variation display pattern determining means (eg, main CPU 110a) for determining a variation display pattern (eg, a special figure variation pattern in FIG. 9) according to the result of the variation display, wherein the variation display means Cycle fluctuations are performed a plurality of times as the variable display of the special symbols, and then the special symbols are stopped and displayed (for example, a mode in which they are completely stopped), and the performance control means produces a performance corresponding to the variable display of the special symbols. It is possible to execute a variable effect by a design (for example, a performance pattern 70a), and at a timing different from the start timing of the cycle variation for the first time, the variable display of the effect pattern in the variable effect is started, and after the start, Stop display for stopping the production pattern (for example, a completely stopped mode) is executed, and a specific fluctuation display pattern among the fluctuation display patterns (for example, special figure fluctuation pattern 04 in FIG. 9, FIG. 9 A specific effect (for example, SP reach effect) can be executed in the special figure fluctuation pattern 09), and the specific effect is different from the first specific effect (for example, typhoon reach in FIG. 132) and the first specific effect Either of the second specific effect (for example, heavy snow reach in FIG. 132) can be executed, and the content of the effect is different between the first specific effect and the second specific effect (typhoon reach and heavy snow reach The content is different), but the number of times of the cycle variation performed after the specific effect starts (for example, T5 to T8 in FIG. 132) is the same.
This makes it possible to improve the performance interest.

◆ As a thirteenth configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (for example, main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and effect control that controls the effect according to the command from the main control means In a gaming machine comprising means (for example, production control board 130) and operation means (for example, production buttons 17) that can be operated by a player, the main control means controls a special game (for example, , jackpot game) determination means (e.g., main CPU 110a) for determining whether or not to execute determination information (e.g., special figure determination information); Display means (for example, special symbol display devices 60 and 61), and the variation display means performs cycle variation multiple times as a variation display of the special symbol, and then stops and displays the special symbol (for example, completely mode), the effect control means can execute a variable effect by the effect symbol (for example, effect symbol 70a) corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol, and the start timing of the cycle variation for the first time At a different timing, the variable display of the production pattern in the variable production is started, and after the start, a stop display (for example, a completely stopped mode) for stopping the production pattern is executed, and a predetermined It is possible to execute a suggestive effect (e.g., dialogue advance notice effect) that suggests the possibility that the special game will be executed in response to the operation of the operation means during the operation valid period (e.g., effective period of 3 seconds in the dialogue advance notice). , and when the operation means is operated at the first timing (for example, T2 in case 1 in FIG. 133) in the predetermined operation effective period, the execution start of the suggestive effect (for example, T4 in case 1 in FIG. 133) ) to the stop display of the effect symbol (for example, T8 of case 1 in FIG. 133), and the operation means is different from the first timing in the predetermined operation effective period. 2 timing (for example, T2 in case 2 in FIG. 133) from the start of execution of the suggestive effect (for example, T4 in case 2 in FIG. 133) until the stop display of the effect symbol is performed (for example, Although different from the number of cycle fluctuations in case 2 of FIG. 133 (T8), from the start of the predetermined operation valid period (for example, T2 in FIG. 133) to the stop display of the effect symbol (for example, It is characterized in that the number of cycle fluctuations in T8) of FIG. 133 is the same regardless of the timing at which the operating means is operated.
This makes it possible to improve the performance interest.

◆ As a 14th configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (for example, main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and effect control that controls the effect according to the command from the main control means In a gaming machine comprising means (for example, production control board 130) and operation means (for example, production buttons 17) that can be operated by a player, the main control means controls a special game (for example, , jackpot game) determination means (e.g., main CPU 110a) for determining whether or not to execute determination information (e.g., special figure determination information); Display means (for example, special symbol display devices 60 and 61), and the variation display means performs cycle variation multiple times as a variation display of the special symbol, and then stops and displays the special symbol (for example, completely mode), the effect control means can execute a variable effect by the effect symbol (for example, effect symbol 70a) corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol, and the start timing of the cycle variation for the first time At a different timing, the variable display of the production pattern in the variable production is started, and after the start, a stop display (for example, a completely stopped mode) for stopping the production pattern is executed, and the operation A first operation effect for operating a means (for example, an operation effect in a dialogue announcement), and a second operation effect for operating the operation means (for example, an operation effect in a decision effect), which is an operation effect different from the first operation effect. and a first suggestive effect suggesting that the first operation effect will be executed when the first operation effect is executed (for example, a fade-in image for the dialogue notice in FIG. 134). display), and a second suggestive effect (for example, display of a fade-in image for a final effect in FIG. 134) that suggests that the second operation effect will be executed when the second operation effect is executed, can be executed, and the number of cycle variations performed during execution of the first suggestive effect (for example, T1-1 to T2 in FIG. 134), and during execution of the second suggestive effect (for example, in FIG. 134 It is characterized in that the number of cycle fluctuations performed during T5 to T6) is different.
This makes it possible to improve the performance interest.

◆ As a fifteenth configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (for example, main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and effect control that controls the effect according to the command from the main control means In a gaming machine comprising means (for example, production control board 130) and operation means (for example, production buttons 17) that can be operated by a player, the main control means controls a special game (for example, , jackpot game) determination means (e.g., main CPU 110a) for determining whether or not to execute determination information (e.g., special figure determination information); Display means (for example, special symbol display devices 60 and 61), and the variation display means performs cycle variation multiple times as a variation display of the special symbol, and then stops and displays the special symbol (for example, completely mode), the effect control means can execute a variable effect by the effect symbol (for example, effect symbol 70a) corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol, and the start timing of the cycle variation for the first time At a different timing, the variable display of the production pattern in the variable production is started, and after the start, a stop display (for example, a completely stopped mode) for stopping the production pattern is executed, and a predetermined It is possible to execute a suggestive effect (for example, a meter effect) that suggests the possibility that the special game will be executed in response to the operation of the operating means during the operation effective period (for example, the effective period of 4 seconds in the fixed effect). There is, and the suggestive effect is the first suggesting the possibility that the special game will be executed in response to the operation means being operated in a first operation mode (for example, operating the effect button 17 five times). When the operation means is operated in a suggestive effect (for example, meter pattern 1) and in a second operation mode (for example, operating the effect button 17 once) different from the first operation mode, the special and a second suggestive effect (for example, meter pattern 2) that suggests the possibility that the game will be executed, and the special game starts from the start of the first suggestive effect (for example, T2 of meter pattern 1 in FIG. 135). The number of cycle fluctuations performed until the possibility of execution is suggested (for example, T5 of meter pattern 1 in FIG. 135) and the start of the second suggestion effect (for example, T2 of meter pattern 2 in FIG. 135) to suggesting the possibility that the special game will be executed (for example, T5 of meter pattern 2 in FIG. 135). It is characterized in that the number of cycle fluctuations from the start of production (for example, T2 in FIG. 135) to the stop display of the production design (for example, T8 in FIG. 135) is the same.
This makes it possible to improve the performance interest.

(Content 4 of the invention described in this embodiment)
In a conventional game machine, various effects are provided on the game board, and the effects are used to enhance the interest in the game. And, as such an effect means, there is one that includes a movable effect means (so-called gimmick) and operates the movable effect means in a predetermined operation mode (so-called effect action). In addition, the movable effect means, for example, when the power is turned on, performs an operation confirmation (so-called initial operation) to operate in the same mode or substantially the same mode as the predetermined operation mode. Then, the operation confirmation is executed when the power is turned on even when the player is playing a game (for example, during the variable display) (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-236681 Gazette). By the way, when the action confirmation is executed during the variable display, some players misunderstand the action confirmation as a performance action, which causes a decrease in the interest in the game.

◆ As the first configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (for example, main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and effect control that controls the effect according to the command from the main control means Means (for example, production control board 130), power supply means for supplying power (for example, power supply board 160), standby position (for example, "A" in FIG. 60, for example, "F" in FIG. 62) and production A movable body (for example, the first movable effect device 73, for example, the sub display device 71) that can move to a position (for example, "B" and "C" in FIG. 60, for example, "G" in FIG. 62); , wherein the main control means determines determination information (e.g., special figure determination information) as to whether or not to execute a special game (e.g., jackpot game) advantageous to the player ( For example, the main CPU 110a) and variable display means (for example, special symbol display devices 60, 61) that execute variable display of special symbols according to the result of the determination, and the variable display means is the special symbol. Cycle variation is performed a plurality of times as a variation display of the special symbol is stopped and displayed (for example, a mode in which it is completely stopped), and the effect control means controls the effect symbol ( For example, it is possible to execute a variable effect by the effect pattern 70a), and during the execution of the variable display, the effect operation by the movable body (for example, FIG. 60, for example, (performance a) to (performance c) in FIG. 62) On the other hand, when the power supply is stopped during the execution of the variable display, and then the power is supplied, the initial operation by the movable body (for example, FIG. 59, for example, (initial a) to (initial c)) in FIG. and the number of said cycle variations performed during the period are different.
As a result, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game in a game machine provided with movable effect means.

◆ As a second configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (for example, main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and effect control that controls the effect according to the command from the main control means Means (for example, production control board 130), power supply means for supplying power (for example, power supply board 160), standby position (for example, "A" in FIG. 60, for example, "F" in FIG. 62) and production A movable body (for example, the first movable effect device 73, for example, the sub display device 71) that can move to a position (for example, "B" and "C" in FIG. 60, for example, "G" in FIG. 62); , wherein the main control means determines determination information (e.g., special figure determination information) as to whether or not to execute a special game (e.g., jackpot game) advantageous to the player ( For example, the main CPU 110a) and variable display means (for example, special symbol display devices 60, 61) that execute variable display of special symbols according to the result of the determination, and the variable display means is the special symbol. Cycle variation is performed a plurality of times as a variation display of the special symbol is stopped and displayed (for example, a mode in which it is completely stopped), and the effect control means controls the effect symbol ( For example, it is possible to execute a variable effect by the effect pattern 70a), and during the execution of the variable display, the effect operation by the movable body (for example, FIG. 60, for example, (performance a) to (performance c) in FIG. 62) On the other hand, when the power supply is stopped during the execution of the variable display, and then the power is supplied, the initial operation by the movable body (for example, FIG. 59, for example, (initial a) to (initial c)) in FIG. The number of cycle fluctuations is different from the number of cycle fluctuations performed until the movable body moves from the standby position to the performance position in the initial motion of the movable body.
As a result, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game in a game machine provided with movable effect means.

◆ As a third configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (for example, main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and effect control that controls the effect according to the command from the main control means Means (for example, production control board 130), power supply means for supplying power (for example, power supply board 160), standby position (for example, "A" in FIG. 60, for example, "F" in FIG. 62) and production A movable body (for example, the first movable effect device 73, for example, the sub display device 71) that can move to a position (for example, "B" and "C" in FIG. 60, for example, "G" in FIG. 62); , wherein the main control means determines determination information (e.g., special figure determination information) as to whether or not to execute a special game (e.g., jackpot game) advantageous to the player ( For example, the main CPU 110a) and variable display means (for example, special symbol display devices 60, 61) that execute variable display of special symbols according to the result of the determination, and the variable display means is the special symbol. Cycle variation is performed a plurality of times as a variation display of the special symbol is stopped and displayed (for example, a mode in which it is completely stopped), and the effect control means controls the effect symbol ( For example, it is possible to execute a variable effect by the effect pattern 70a), and during the execution of the variable display, the effect operation by the movable body (for example, FIG. 60, for example, (performance a) to (performance c) in FIG. 62) On the other hand, when the power supply is stopped during the execution of the variable display, and then the power is supplied, the initial operation by the movable body (for example, FIG. 59, for example, (initial a) to (initial c)) in FIG. and the initial motion of the movable body is different from the number of cycle fluctuations performed when the movable body is in the performance position.
As a result, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game in a game machine provided with movable effect means.

◆ As a fourth configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (for example, main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and effect control that controls the effect according to the command from the main control means Means (for example, effect control board 130), power supply means for supplying power (for example, power supply board 160), standby position (for example, "A" in FIG. 60, for example, "D" in FIG. 61, for example, 62) and a rendering position (e.g., "B" and "C" in FIG. 60, e.g., "E" in FIG. 61, e.g., "G" in FIG. 62) (e.g., first movable effect device 73, e.g., second movable effect device 75, e.g., sub display device 71). , jackpot game) determination means (e.g., main CPU 110a) for determining whether or not to execute determination information (e.g., special figure determination information); Display means (for example, special symbol display devices 60 and 61), and the variation display means performs cycle variation multiple times as a variation display of the special symbol, and then stops and displays the special symbol (for example, completely and the production control means can execute a variable production by a production design (for example, production design 70a) corresponding to the variable display of the special design, and during the execution of the variable display, 60, for example, (performance a) to (performance c) in FIG. 61, for example, (performance a) to (performance c) in FIG. 62) can be executed, When the power supply is stopped during execution of the variable display and then the power supply is resumed, the initial operation by the movable body (for example, FIG. 59, for example, FIG. (Initial a) to (initial c), for example, (initial a) to (initial c) in FIG. A second movable body different from the first movable body (e.g., first movable effect device 73, e.g., sub display device 71) is included, and said first movable body is said to be performed during execution of said effect action. The number of cycle variations and the number of cycle variations performed during the execution of the initial action are the same, but the second movable body has the same number of cycle variations as the number of cycle variations performed during the performance action. , and the number of times of the cycle variation performed during execution of the initial operation are different.
As a result, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game in a game machine provided with movable effect means.

◆ As a fifth configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (for example, main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and effect control that controls the effect according to the command from the main control means Means (for example, production control board 130), power supply means for supplying power (for example, power supply board 160), standby position (for example, "A" in FIG. 60, for example, "F" in FIG. 62) and production A movable body (for example, the first movable effect device 73, for example, the sub display device 71) that can move to a position (for example, "B" and "C" in FIG. 60, for example, "G" in FIG. 62); , wherein the main control means determines determination information (e.g., special figure determination information) as to whether or not to execute a special game (e.g., jackpot game) advantageous to the player ( For example, the main CPU 110a), variable display means (e.g., special symbol display devices 60, 61) for executing variable display of special symbols according to the result of the determination, and the variable display according to the result of the determination. A variation display pattern determination means (eg, main CPU 110a) for determining a variation display pattern (eg, a special figure variation pattern in FIG. 9), and the variation display means selects a plurality of cycle variations as the variation display of the special symbol. After rotating, the special symbol is stopped and displayed (for example, a completely stopped mode), and the effect control means changes by the effect symbol (for example, effect symbol 70a) corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol. production can be executed, and production operations by the movable body (for example, FIG. 60, for example, (performance a) to (performance c) in FIG. 62) can be executed during execution of the variable display; When the power supply is stopped during the execution of the variable display and then the power is supplied, the initial operation by the movable body (eg, FIG. 59, FIG. 62) is performed during the variable display performed after the power supply. (First a) to (first c)) can be executed, and when the power supply is performed, a predetermined image at the time of supply (for example, "Restoring") can be displayed on the display means (for example, the main display device 70). wherein, in the effect motion of the movable body, the number of cycle fluctuations performed when the movable body is at the effect position; The number of cycle fluctuations is different, and power is supplied at a predetermined timing (for example, T0 in FIG. 137) during the execution of the fluctuation display according to a predetermined fluctuation display pattern (for example, special figure fluctuation pattern 01) is stopped, and then the power is supplied (for example, T1 in FIG. 137) and the initial operation is executed. The feature is that the display of the image is finished.
As a result, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game in a game machine provided with movable effect means.

◆ As a sixth configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (for example, main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and effect control that controls the effect according to the command from the main control means Means (for example, production control board 130), power supply means for supplying power (for example, power supply board 160), standby position (for example, "A" in FIG. 60, for example, "F" in FIG. 62) and production A movable body (for example, the first movable effect device 73, for example, the sub display device 71) that can move to a position (for example, "B" and "C" in FIG. 60, for example, "G" in FIG. 62); , wherein the main control means determines determination information (e.g., special figure determination information) as to whether or not to execute a special game (e.g., jackpot game) advantageous to the player ( For example, the main CPU 110a), variable display means (e.g., special symbol display devices 60, 61) for executing variable display of special symbols according to the result of the determination, and the variable display according to the result of the determination. A variation display pattern determination means (eg, main CPU 110a) for determining a variation display pattern (eg, a special figure variation pattern in FIG. 9), and the variation display means selects a plurality of cycle variations as the variation display of the special symbol. After rotating, the special symbol is stopped and displayed (for example, a completely stopped mode), and the effect control means changes by the effect symbol (for example, effect symbol 70a) corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol. production can be executed, and production operations by the movable body (for example, FIG. 60, for example, (performance a) to (performance c) in FIG. 62) can be executed during execution of the variable display; When the power supply is stopped during the execution of the variable display and then the power is supplied, the initial operation by the movable body (eg, FIG. 59, FIG. 62) is performed during the variable display performed after the power supply. (First a) to (first c)) can be executed, and when the power supply is performed, a predetermined image at the time of supply (for example, "Restoring") can be displayed on the display means (for example, the main display device 70). wherein, in the effect motion of the movable body, the number of cycle fluctuations performed when the movable body is at the effect position; The number of cycle variations to be used is different, and a predetermined timing (for example, When the power supply is stopped at T0 in FIG. 138), and then the power is supplied (for example, T1 in FIG. 138) and the initial operation is executed, the initial operation is completed (for example, T7 in FIG. 138). , the display of the predetermined image at the time of supply is still continued.
As a result, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game in a game machine provided with movable effect means.

(Content 5 of the invention described in this embodiment)
Here, a conventional game machine generally includes main control means for controlling the progress of a game, and effect control means for controlling effects according to commands from the main control means. In such a game machine, along with executing the variable display of the special symbols in accordance with the determination result of the determination information, the sound output unit outputs an effect sound during the execution of the variable display of the special symbols. there is In addition, there is a system in which the volume value of the effect sound can be set to a predetermined set value based on the operation of an operation unit that can be operated by the player (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-043025). However, in such a gaming machine, there is room for improvement in game presentation, and there is a problem that the game lacks interest.

◆ As a first configuration for solving the above problems, there are main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and effect control means ( In a game machine provided with an effect control board 130) and a sound output unit (sound output device 9) for outputting a sound effect in accordance with the progress of the effect, the main control means controls the establishment of the acquisition condition ( Judgment means for judging whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player based on judgment information (special figure judgment information) acquired by winning a prize at the starting port, and depending on the result of the judgment and variable display means for performing variable display of special symbols, wherein the variable display means performs cycle variation a plurality of times as the variable display of the special symbols, and then stops and displays the special symbols, and the effect control means , the volume value of the effect sound can be set to a predetermined volume value based on the operation of the operation unit operable by the player, and the predetermined sound ( It is possible to audibly output variable BGM such as normal BGM, sound effects, etc.), and when the cycle variation is started from the customer waiting state in which the variable display of the special symbol is not executed, the volume value is set. but restrictions on the setting of the volume value (restrict setting of volume value, clear volume value image, volume value image is changed to the rear layer of the production pattern, etc.). Therefore, the period during which the player can adjust the volume can be secured as long as possible, and the interest in the game can be improved. Also, even if the volume is adjusted, the player can be made to recognize the start of the variable presentation.

◆ As a second configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and effect control means ( In a game machine provided with an effect control board 130) and a sound output unit (sound output device 9) for outputting a sound effect in accordance with the progress of the effect, the main control means controls the establishment of the acquisition condition ( Judgment means for judging whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player based on judgment information (special figure judgment information) acquired by winning a prize at the starting port, and depending on the result of the judgment and variable display means for performing variable display of special symbols, wherein the variable display means performs cycle variation a plurality of times as the variable display of the special symbols, and then stops and displays the special symbols, and the effect control means The volume value of the effect sound can be set to a predetermined volume value based on the operation of the operation unit operable by the player, and the variable display of the effect symbols and the special symbol are displayed corresponding to the execution of the cycle variation. When the cycle variation is started from the customer waiting state, the setting of the volume value is not restricted, but the special pattern is varied according to the start of the cycle variation. When the display is started, the setting of the volume value is restricted (regulating the setting of the volume value, erasing the volume value image, changing the volume value image to the rear layer of the effect pattern, etc.). Therefore, the period during which the player can adjust the volume can be secured as long as possible, and the interest in the game can be improved. Also, even if the volume is adjusted, the player can be made to recognize the start of the variable presentation.

◆ As a third configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and effect control means ( In a game machine provided with an effect control board 130) and a sound output unit (sound output device 9) for outputting a sound effect in accordance with the progress of the effect, the main control means controls the establishment of the acquisition condition ( Judgment means for judging whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player based on judgment information (special figure judgment information) acquired by winning a prize at the starting port, and depending on the result of the judgment A variable display means for performing variable display of special symbols, and a memory means for storing determination information for which the determination has not yet been performed as pending storage, wherein the variable display means performs cycle variation as the variable display of the special symbols. After a plurality of times, the special symbol is stopped and displayed, and the effect control means can set the volume value of the effect sound to a predetermined volume value based on the operation of the operation unit operable by the player, The hold information (hold icon, number hold, hold LED) is displayed increased (additional display, increased number, etc.) according to the increase of the hold memory, and the hold information is displayed decreased (shifted) according to the decrease of the hold memory. display, decrement, etc.), and when the cycle variation is started from the customer waiting state, there is no restriction on the setting of the volume value, but the display of the hold information decreases in response to the start of the cycle variation. is performed, the setting of the volume value is restricted (regulating the setting of the volume value, erasing the volume value image, changing the volume value image to the rear layer of the effect pattern, etc.). Therefore, the period during which the player can adjust the volume can be secured as long as possible, and the interest in the game can be improved. Also, even if the volume is adjusted, the player can be made aware of the decrease in the number of pending games.

◆ As a fourth configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and effect control means ( In a game machine provided with an effect control board 130) and a sound output unit (sound output device 9) for outputting a sound effect in accordance with the progress of the effect, the main control means controls the establishment of the acquisition condition ( Judgment means for judging whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player based on judgment information (special figure judgment information) acquired by winning a prize at the starting port, and depending on the result of the judgment and variable display means for performing variable display of special symbols, wherein the variable display means performs cycle variation a plurality of times as the variable display of the special symbols, and then stops and displays the special symbols, and the effect control means , the volume value of the effect sound can be set to a predetermined volume value based on the operation of the operation unit operable by the player, and the predetermined sound ( It is possible to audibly output variable BGM, sound effects, etc.), and when the cycle variation is started from the customer waiting state in which the variable display of the special symbol is not executed, the setting of the volume value is not restricted. , when the audible output of the predetermined sound is started in response to the start of the cycle fluctuation, the setting of the volume value is restricted (regulating the setting of the volume value, erasing the volume value image, and creating the volume value image changed to the rear layer, etc.). Therefore, the period during which the player can adjust the volume can be secured as long as possible, and the interest in the game can be improved. Also, it is possible to reduce the control load at the start of the audible output of the predetermined sound.

◆ As a fifth configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and effect control means ( In a game machine provided with an effect control board 130) and a sound output unit (sound output device 9) for outputting a sound effect in accordance with the progress of the effect, the main control means controls the establishment of the acquisition condition ( Judgment means for judging whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player based on judgment information (special figure judgment information) acquired by winning a prize at the starting port, and depending on the result of the judgment and variable display means for performing variable display of special symbols, wherein the variable display means performs cycle variation a plurality of times as the variable display of the special symbols, and then stops and displays the special symbols, and the effect control means The volume value of the effect sound can be set to a predetermined volume value based on the operation of the operation unit that can be operated by the player, and the variable display of the effect symbols is performed in response to the execution of the variable display of the special symbols. When the variable display of the performance symbol is stopped in response to the stop of the cycle variation, restrictions on the setting of the volume value (regulating the setting of the volume value, erasing the volume value image , the volume value image is changed to the rear layer of the effect pattern, etc.). Therefore, the period during which the player can adjust the volume can be secured as long as possible, and the interest in the game can be improved. Further, even if the sound volume is adjusted, it is possible for the player to recognize the stop display of the performance symbols and the special symbols (the end of the variable performance).

◆ As a sixth configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and effect control means ( In a game machine provided with an effect control board 130) and a sound output unit (sound output device 9) for outputting a sound effect in accordance with the progress of the effect, the main control means controls the establishment of the acquisition condition ( Judgment means for judging whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player based on judgment information (special figure judgment information) acquired by winning a prize at the starting port, and depending on the result of the judgment and variable display means for performing variable display of special symbols, wherein the variable display means performs cycle variation a plurality of times as the variable display of the special symbols, and then stops and displays the special symbols, and the effect control means , based on the operation of the operation unit that can be operated by the player, the volume value of the effect sound can be set to a predetermined volume value, and the execution display (the icon etc.) according to the start of the variable display of the special symbol can be displayed, and when the execution display is erased in response to the stop of the cycle fluctuation, restrictions on the setting of the volume value (regulating the setting of the volume value, erasing the volume value image, producing the volume value image It is designed to be changed to the rear layer of the pattern, etc.). Therefore, the period during which the player can adjust the volume can be secured as long as possible, and the interest in the game can be improved. Further, even if the volume is being adjusted, the execution display (the icon) disappears, that is, the player can be made to recognize that the variable effect is finished.

(Content 6 of the invention described in this embodiment)
Here, a conventional game machine generally includes main control means for controlling the progress of a game, and effect control means for controlling effects according to commands from the main control means. Among such gaming machines, there is one that executes variable display of special symbols according to the determination result of determination information, executes variable performance during execution of variable display of special symbols, and outputs performance sound. There was (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-043025). However, in such a gaming machine, there is a problem that the game may become less interesting because it does not take into consideration the case where the progress of the performance is stagnant.

◇ The first configuration for solving the above problems includes main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and production control means ( Effect control board 130), and the main control means, based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the acquisition condition (winning to the start opening) special Determination means for determining whether or not a game (jackpot game) is to be executed, and variable display means for performing variable display of special symbols according to the result of the determination, wherein the effect control means controls the special symbols. In response to the execution of the variable display, it is possible to execute a variable performance that performs a variable display of performance symbols, and it is possible to output a performance sound (variable BGM such as normal BGM, sound effects, etc.) during the execution of the variable performance. , When the stop condition is not satisfied at a predetermined timing when the performance pattern is temporarily stopped in the variable performance (the stop time command, the next start time command, or the customer waiting state designation command cannot be normally received), the performance design When the temporary stop period and the output period of the effect sound are extended, and the effect sound is output to the end of the sound data during the extension of the temporary stop period of the effect symbol, the variable display of the special symbol is executed. Even if there is no effect sound, the effect sound is output from the beginning of the sound data, and the output period of the effect sound is extended. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the performance effect during the extension of the temporary stop period of the performance symbols, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

◆ As a second configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and effect control means ( Effect control board 130), and the main control means, based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the acquisition condition (winning to the start opening) special Determination means for determining whether or not a game (jackpot game) is to be executed, and variable display means for performing variable display of special symbols according to the result of the determination, wherein the effect control means controls the special symbols. In response to the execution of the variable display, it is possible to execute the variable performance of performing the variable display of the performance symbols and the variable display of the special symbols, and it is possible to output the performance sound (variable BGM) during the execution of the variable display of the special symbols. When the stop condition is not established at a predetermined timing when the special symbols are displayed in a variable manner (the stop time command, the next start time command, or the customer waiting state designation command cannot be normally received), the special symbols fluctuate. When the period and the output period of the effect sound are extended, and the effect sound is output to the end of the special symbol variation period during the extension of the special symbol variation period, even in a state where the special symbol variation display is not executed, The effect sound is output from the beginning of the sound data, and the output period of the effect sound is extended. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the performance effect during the extension of the period of fluctuation of the special symbols, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

◆ As a third configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and effect control means ( Effect control board 130), and the main control means, based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the acquisition condition (winning to the start opening) special Determination means for determining whether or not a game (jackpot game) is to be executed, and variable display means for performing variable display of special symbols according to the result of the determination, wherein the effect control means controls the special symbols. During the execution of the variable display, it is possible to execute a variable performance of performing a variable display of performance symbols, and during the execution of the variable performance, a specific sound (zone BGM, jackpot announcement sound, etc.) that makes the execution of the special game expected. ) can be output, and the stop condition is not satisfied at a predetermined timing when the performance pattern is temporarily stopped in the variable performance (a stop command, a next start command, or a customer waiting state designation command cannot be received normally ), the temporary stop period of the production pattern and the output period of the specific sound are extended, and if the specific sound is output to the end of the sound data during the extension of the temporary stop period of the production pattern, the special pattern Even when the variable display is not executed, the specific sound is output from the beginning of the sound data to extend the output period of the specific sound. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the performance effect during the extension of the temporary stop period of the performance symbols, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

◆ As a fourth configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and effect control means ( Effect control board 130), and the main control means, based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the acquisition condition (winning to the start opening) special Determination means for determining whether or not a game (jackpot game) is to be executed, and variable display means for performing variable display of special symbols according to the result of the determination, wherein the effect control means controls the special symbols. It is possible to execute a variable performance of performing variable display of performance symbols and variable display of special symbols in response to the execution of the variable display of , and specification that expects execution of the special game during execution of the variable display of the special symbols. It is possible to output sounds (zone BGM, jackpot announcement sound, etc.), and the stop condition is not satisfied at a predetermined timing when the special symbols are displayed in a variable manner (stop command, next start command, customer waiting state designation command can not be received normally), the period of fluctuation of the special symbol and the period of output of the specific sound are extended, and if the specific sound is output to the end of the sound data during the extension of the period of fluctuation of the special symbol, Even when the variable display of the special symbols is not executed, the specific sound is output from the beginning of the sound data and the output period of the specific sound is extended. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the performance effect during the extension of the period of fluctuation of the special symbols, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

◆ As a fifth configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and effect control means ( Effect control board 130), and the main control means, based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the acquisition condition (winning to the start opening) special Determination means for determining whether or not a game (jackpot game) is to be executed, and variable display means for performing variable display of special symbols according to the result of the determination, wherein the effect control means controls the special symbols. It is possible to execute a variable effect of the effect pattern in response to the execution of the variable display, and it is possible to execute a predetermined notification effect (fixed effect etc.) based on the result of the determination during the execution of the variable effect, and the variable In the production, when the stop condition is not established at a predetermined timing when the production pattern is temporarily stopped (the stop time command, the next start time command, or the customer waiting state designation command cannot be normally received), the production pattern is temporarily stopped. The period is extended, and the predetermined notification performance is not started during the extension of the temporary stop period of the performance symbols, but the predetermined notification performance started before the extension of the temporary stop period of the performance symbols is performed. It can be continuously executed even during the extension of the temporary stop period of the performance symbols. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the performance effect during the extension of the temporary stop period of the performance symbols, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

◆ As a sixth configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and effect control means ( Effect control board 130), and the main control means, based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the acquisition condition (winning to the start opening) special Determination means for determining whether or not a game (jackpot game) is to be executed, and variable display means for performing variable display of special symbols according to the result of the determination, wherein the effect control means controls the special symbols. In response to the execution of the variable display, it is possible to execute a variable performance that performs a variable display of the performance symbols and a variable display of the special symbols, and a predetermined notification based on the result of the determination during the execution of the variable display of the special symbols. Effect (fixed effect, etc.) can be executed, and the stop condition is not satisfied at the predetermined timing when the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner (normally receiving the stop command, the next start command, and the customer waiting state designation command not possible), the special symbol variation period is extended, and the predetermined notification effect is not started during the extension of the special symbol variation period, but is started before the extension of the special symbol variation period. Further, the predetermined notification effect can be executed even during the extension of the variation period of the special symbols. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the performance effect during the extension of the period of fluctuation of the special symbols, and to improve the interest of the game.

(Content 7 of the invention described in this embodiment)
Here, a conventional game machine generally includes main control means for controlling the progress of a game, and effect control means for controlling effects according to commands from the main control means. In such a gaming machine, the variable display of the special symbol is executed according to the determination result of the determination information, and the variable effect is executed. In addition, it is designed to display a pending display corresponding to the determination information that the variable display of the special symbol is not executed, or display the execution display according to the start of the variable display of the special symbol (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open 2018-043025). However, such a game machine has a problem that the game lacks interest.

◆ As a first configuration for solving the above problems, there are main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and effect control means ( Effect control board 130), and the main control means, based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the acquisition condition (winning to the start opening) special Judgment means for judging whether or not to execute a game (jackpot game), variable display means for executing variable display of special symbols according to the result of the judgment, and judgment information for which the judgment has not yet been executed as a reserved memory. and a storage means for storing, the production control means can display a number of pending displays (holding icons, etc.) corresponding to the holding storage, and a production design corresponding to the execution of the variable display of the special design. It is possible to execute a variable performance that performs a variable display of the variable performance, and it is possible to execute the operation display (rotation, swing) of the pending display during the execution of the variable performance, and the pending display is disabled during the execution of the variable performance. A specific effect to be displayed (start effect effect, mode change effect SP reach effect, eye-catching effect, etc.) can be executed, and when the suspension display is displayed in response to the end of the specific effect, a predetermined operation state It is possible to display the action from (the initial posture, the posture where the action display would have continued even during the specific effect). Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control burden when redisplaying the pending display (holding icon), and it is difficult for the player to feel uncomfortable when redisplaying the pending display, thereby improving the amusement of the game. becomes possible.

◆ As a second configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and effect control means ( Effect control board 130), and the main control means, based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the acquisition condition (winning to the start opening) special Judgment means for judging whether or not to execute a game (jackpot game), variable display means for executing variable display of special symbols according to the result of the judgment, and judgment information for which the judgment has not yet been executed as a reserved memory. and a storage means for storing, the effect control means can display an execution display (such as the icon) in response to the start of the variable display of the special symbols, and corresponds to the execution of the variable display of the special symbols. It is possible to execute a variable performance for performing a variable display of performance symbols, and it is possible to execute the operation display (rotation, swing) of the execution display during the execution of the variable performance, and the execution during the execution of the variable performance. A specific effect (mode change effect, SPSP development effect, determined success effect, eye-catching effect, etc.) for hiding the display can be executed, and when the execution display is displayed in response to the end of the specific effect, a predetermined It is possible to display the action from the action state (initial posture, the posture where the action display would have continued even during the specific effect). Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control burden when re-displaying the execution display (the icon), and it is difficult for the player to feel uncomfortable when re-displaying the execution display, thereby improving the interest of the game. becomes possible.

◆ As a third configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and effect control means ( Effect control board 130), and the main control means, based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the acquisition condition (winning to the start opening) special Judgment means for judging whether or not to execute a game (jackpot game), variable display means for executing variable display of special symbols according to the result of the judgment, and judgment information for which the judgment has not yet been executed as a reserved memory. and a storage means for storing, the effect control means can display a number of pending displays (a pending icon, etc.) corresponding to the pending storage, and the pending display in which the variable display of the special symbol is started. can be displayed as an execution display (such as the icon), and it is possible to execute a variable effect that performs a variable display of the effect symbol corresponding to the execution of the variable display of the special symbol, and the suspension during the execution of the variable effect A specific effect (mode change effect, SPSP development effect, SPSP ready-to-reach effect, determined success effect, eye-catching effect, etc.) can be executed, and when the suspension display and the execution display are displayed in response to the end of the specific effect, a predetermined operation state (initial posture, during specific effect It is possible to display the movement from the posture in which the movement display would have continued). Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control burden when redisplaying the pending display (holding icon), and it is difficult for the player to feel uncomfortable when redisplaying the pending display, thereby improving the amusement of the game. becomes possible.

◆ As a fourth configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and effect control means ( Effect control board 130), and the main control means, based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the acquisition condition (winning to the start opening) special Judgment means for judging whether or not to execute a game (jackpot game), variable display means for executing variable display of special symbols according to the result of the judgment, and judgment information for which the judgment has not yet been executed as a reserved memory. Storage means for storing data, and preliminary determination means for determining the determination information prior to the determination means, and the effect control means displays a number of pending displays (a pending icon, etc.) according to the pending storage. It is possible, and it is possible to execute a change effect that changes the suspension display to a special mode (white blinking, blue, red, rainbow color, ax shape, etc.) different from the normal mode (white) based on the result of the prior determination. There is, and it is possible to execute a variable performance of performing variable display of performance symbols corresponding to the execution of variable display of the special symbols, and during execution of the variable performance, the holding display is in a first state (initial posture) and a second state. It is possible to execute an action display (rotation, swing) that repeatedly changes to a state (change posture), and when changing to the special mode when the suspension display of the normal mode is in the second state, It is possible to operate and display the holding display changed to the special mode from the first state. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control load when changing the display mode of the pending display (holding icon). In addition, when changing the display mode of the pending display, the player is less likely to feel uncomfortable, and the interest in the game can be improved.

◆ As a fifth configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and effect control means ( Effect control board 130), and the main control means, based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the acquisition condition (winning to the start opening) special Judgment means for judging whether or not to execute a game (jackpot game), variable display means for executing variable display of special symbols according to the result of the judgment, and judgment information for which the judgment has not yet been executed as a reserved memory. and a storage means for storing, the effect control means can display an execution display (such as the icon) in response to the start of the variable display of the special symbol, and the execution display is a normal mode (white) It is possible to execute a change effect that changes to different special modes (white blinking, blue, red, rainbow color, ax shape, etc.), and a change effect that performs a change display of the effect pattern corresponding to the execution of the change display of the special pattern. and an action display (rotation, rocking) that repeatedly changes the execution display between a first state (initial posture) and a second state (changed posture) during execution of the variable effect. and when the execution display of the normal mode is changed to the special mode while the execution display is in the second state, the execution display changed to the special mode is displayed in operation from the first state. . Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control load when changing the display mode of the execution display (the icon). In addition, when the display mode of the execution display is changed, the player is less likely to feel uncomfortable, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

◆ As a sixth configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and effect control means ( Effect control board 130), and the main control means, based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the acquisition condition (winning to the start opening) special Judgment means for judging whether or not to execute a game (jackpot game), variable display means for executing variable display of special symbols according to the result of the judgment, and judgment information for which the judgment has not yet been executed as a reserved memory. Storage means for storing data, and preliminary determination means for determining the determination information prior to the determination means, and the effect control means displays a number of pending displays (a pending icon, etc.) according to the pending storage. It is possible, and it is possible to execute a change effect that changes the suspension display to a special mode (white blinking, blue, red, rainbow color, ax shape, etc.) different from the normal mode (white) based on the result of the prior determination. There is, and it is possible to execute a variable performance of performing variable display of performance symbols corresponding to the execution of variable display of the special symbols, and during execution of the variable performance, the holding display is in a first state (initial posture) and a second state. It is possible to execute an action display (rotation, swing) that repeatedly changes between states (change posture), and the special modes include a first special mode (white blinking, etc.) and a second special mode (blue, red, rainbow color, ax shape, etc.), and when changing to the second special mode when the holding display of the first special mode is in the second state, the changed to the second special mode It is possible to display the pending display from the first state. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control load when changing the display mode of the pending display (holding icon). In addition, when changing the display mode of the pending display, the player is less likely to feel uncomfortable, and the interest in the game can be improved.

◆ As a seventh configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and effect control means ( Effect control board 130), and the main control means, based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the acquisition condition (winning to the start opening) special Judgment means for judging whether or not to execute a game (jackpot game), variable display means for executing variable display of special symbols according to the result of the judgment, and judgment information for which the judgment has not yet been executed as a reserved memory. and a storage means for storing, the effect control means can display an execution display (such as the icon) in response to the start of the variable display of the special symbol, and the execution display is a normal mode (white) It is possible to execute a change effect that changes to different special modes (white blinking, blue, red, rainbow color, ax shape, etc.), and a change effect that performs a change display of the effect pattern corresponding to the execution of the change display of the special pattern. and an action display (rotation, rocking) that repeatedly changes the execution display between a first state (initial posture) and a second state (changed posture) during execution of the variable effect. , the special mode includes a first special mode (white blinking, etc.) and a second special mode (blue, red, rainbow color, ax shape, etc.), and the execution indication of the first special mode is the first special mode. When changing to the second special mode from the second state, it is possible to display the execution display changed to the second special mode from the first state. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control load when changing the display mode of the execution display (the icon). In addition, when the display mode of the execution display is changed, the player is less likely to feel uncomfortable, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

(Content 8 of the invention described in this embodiment)
Here, a conventional game machine generally includes main control means for controlling the progress of a game, and effect control means for controlling effects according to commands from the main control means. In such a gaming machine, the variable display of the special symbol is executed according to the determination result of the determination information, and the variable effect is executed. In addition, after a predetermined period of time has passed since the customer waiting state in which the variable production is not executed, the customer waiting production is executed (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-043025). However, in such a game machine, there is room for improvement in the effect when the variable effect is started during execution of the customer waiting effect, and there is a problem that the game lacks interest.

◆ As a first configuration for solving the above problems, there are main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and effect control means ( Effect control board 130), and the main control means, based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the acquisition condition (winning to the start opening) special Determination means for determining whether or not a game (jackpot game) is to be executed, and variable display means for performing variable display of special symbols according to the result of the determination, wherein the effect control means controls the special symbols. In response to the execution of the variable display, it is possible to execute a variable performance that performs a variable display of a plurality of performance symbols and a variable display of a plurality of special symbols on the display means, and in the variable performance, the start operation (floating) is performed on the performance symbols. , scaling, etc.), the production design can be variably displayed, and a customer waiting production can be executed in which a specific image (customer waiting demo image) is displayed on the display means during the customer waiting state. , the variable effect is started with the same display dots for the plurality of performance symbols and the plurality of special symbols, and ends with the same display dots for the plurality of performance symbols and the plurality of special symbols; When the variable effect is started during execution of the customer waiting effect, the specific image is faded out, and the plurality of effect patterns and the plurality of special patterns are changed so as to be visible during the fade-out of the specific image. Although it is displayed, the time until the plurality of performance symbols are variably displayed is longer than the time until the plurality of special symbols are variably displayed. Therefore, it is possible to immediately recognize that the variable display of the special symbol is started by the special symbol while confirming the stop result of the previous variable performance. In addition, it is possible to improve the performance effect at the start of fluctuation by the performance pattern, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

◆ As a second configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and effect control means ( Effect control board 130), and the main control means, based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the acquisition condition (winning to the start opening) special Determination means for determining whether or not a game (jackpot game) is to be executed, and variable display means for performing variable display of special symbols according to the result of the determination, wherein the effect control means controls the special symbols. In response to the execution of the variable display, it is possible to execute a variable performance that performs variable display of performance symbols and variable display of special symbols on the display means, and in the variable performance, the start operation (floating, scaling, etc.) is performed on the performance symbols. can be variably displayed after the performance pattern is performed, and a customer waiting effect for displaying a specific image (customer waiting demonstration image) on the display means during the customer waiting state can be executed, and the customer waiting When the variable effect is started during execution of the effect, it is possible to fade out the specific image, the special pattern is started to be displayed in a variable manner before the end of the fade-out of the specific image, and the effect pattern is , the variable display (scrolling, updating of the pattern) is started after the end of the fade-out of the specific image. Therefore, it is possible to immediately recognize that the variable display of the special symbol is started by the special symbol while confirming the stop result of the previous variable performance. In addition, it is possible to improve the performance effect at the start of fluctuation by the performance pattern, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

◆ As a third configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and effect control means ( Effect control board 130), and the main control means, based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the acquisition condition (winning to the start opening) special Judgment means for judging whether or not to execute a game (jackpot game), variable display means for executing variable display of special symbols according to the result of the judgment, and judgment information for which the judgment has not yet been executed as a reserved memory. and a storage means for storing, wherein the effect control means additionally displays a pending display (a pending icon, etc.) according to an increase in the pending memory, and displays a reduced pending display according to a decrease in the pending memory. It is possible to execute the variable effect of performing the variable display of the effect symbols and the variable display of the special symbols on the display means corresponding to the execution of the variable display of the special symbols, and the above-mentioned during the customer waiting state. A customer waiting effect for displaying a specific image (customer waiting demo image) on the display means can be executed, and when the variable effect is started during execution of the customer waiting effect, the specific image can be faded out. The special pattern starts to be displayed in a variable manner before the end of fading out of the specific image, and the holding display ends in decreasing display after the end of fading out of the specific image. Therefore, it is possible to accurately recognize that the reserved memory has decreased while immediately recognizing that the variable display of the special symbols has started, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

◆ As a fourth configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and effect control means ( Effect control board 130), and the main control means, based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the acquisition condition (winning to the start opening) special Judgment means for judging whether or not to execute a game (jackpot game), variable display means for executing variable display of special symbols according to the result of the judgment, and judgment information for which the judgment has not yet been executed as a reserved memory. and a storage means for storing, wherein the effect control means additionally displays a pending display (a pending icon, etc.) according to an increase in the pending memory, and displays a reduced pending display according to a decrease in the pending memory. It is possible to execute the variable effect of performing the variable display of the effect symbols and the variable display of the special symbols on the display means corresponding to the execution of the variable display of the special symbols, and the above-mentioned during the customer waiting state. A customer waiting effect for displaying a specific image (customer waiting demo image) on the display means can be executed, and when the variable effect is started during execution of the customer waiting effect, the specific image can be faded out. There is, the special pattern is displayed in a variable manner before the end of the fade-out of the specific image, the suspended display is visibly displayed during the fade-out of the specific image, and the decreasing display is finished after the end of the fade-out. It has become so. Therefore, it is possible to accurately recognize that the reserved memory has decreased while immediately recognizing that the variable display of the special symbols has started, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

◆ As a fifth configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and effect control means ( Effect control board 130), and the main control means, based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the acquisition condition (winning to the start opening) special Judgment means for judging whether or not to execute a game (jackpot game), variable display means for executing variable display of special symbols according to the result of the judgment, and judgment information for which the judgment has not yet been executed as a reserved memory. and a storage means for storing, wherein the effect control means additionally displays a pending display (a pending icon, etc.) according to an increase in the pending memory, and displays a reduced pending display according to a decrease in the pending memory. It is possible to execute a variable effect of performing a variable display of the effect pattern on the display means in response to the execution of the variable display of the special symbol, and in the variable effect, the start operation (floating, scaling, etc.), the effect pattern can be variably displayed, and a customer waiting effect can be executed in which a specific image (customer waiting demo image) is displayed on the display means during the customer waiting state, When the variable effect is started during execution of the customer waiting effect, the specific image can be faded out, and the pending display starts decreasing display before the end of the fade-out of the specific image. The effect pattern is designed to start changing display (scrolling, updating of the pattern) after the end of the fade-out of the specific image. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the reserved memory has decreased before the performance pattern starts to be displayed in a variable manner, so that the player can easily understand the progress of the game and can improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a sixth configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and effect control means ( Effect control board 130), and the main control means, based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the acquisition condition (winning to the start opening) special Judgment means for judging whether or not to execute a game (jackpot game), variable display means for executing variable display of special symbols according to the result of the judgment, and judgment information for which the judgment has not yet been executed as a reserved memory. and a storage means for storing, wherein the effect control means additionally displays a pending display (a pending icon, etc.) according to an increase in the pending memory, and displays a reduced pending display according to a decrease in the pending memory. It is possible to execute a variable effect of performing a variable display of the effect pattern on the display means in response to the execution of the variable display of the special symbol, and in the variable effect, the start operation (floating, scaling, etc.), the effect pattern can be variably displayed, and a customer waiting effect can be executed in which a specific image (customer waiting demo image) is displayed on the display means during the customer waiting state, When the variable effect is started during execution of the customer waiting effect, the specific image can be faded out, and the pending display is terminated after the fade-out of the specific image is finished, and the effect is performed. As for the symbols, the variable display (scrolling, updating of the symbols) is started after the decrease display of the reserved display ends. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the reserved memory has decreased before the performance pattern starts to be displayed in a variable manner, so that the player can easily understand the progress of the game and can improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a seventh configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and effect control means ( Effect control board 130), and the main control means, based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the acquisition condition (winning to the start opening) special Determination means for determining whether or not a game (jackpot game) is to be executed, and variable display means for performing variable display of special symbols according to the result of the determination, wherein the effect control means controls the special symbols. In response to the start of the variable display, it is possible to display the execution display (such as the icon), and in response to the execution of the variable display of the special symbols, it is possible to execute the variable effect of performing the variable display of the effect symbols on the display means. , it is possible to variably display the production pattern after performing a start action (floating, scaling, etc.) on the production pattern in the variable production, and a specific image (customer waiting demonstration) is displayed on the display means during the customer waiting state image) can be executed, and when the variable effect is started during execution of the customer waiting effect, the specific image can be faded out, and the execution display is the specific image. The display is completed after the end of the fade-out of the image, and the variable display (scrolling, renewal of the design) of the performance symbols is started after the display of the execution display is completed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the reserved memory has decreased before the performance pattern starts to be displayed in a variable manner, so that the player can easily understand the progress of the game and can improve the interest of the game.

◆ As the eighth configuration for solving the above problems, there are main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and effect control means ( Effect control board 130), and the main control means, based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the acquisition condition (winning to the start opening) special Determination means for determining whether or not a game (jackpot game) is to be executed, and variation display means for performing variation display of special symbols according to the result of the determination, wherein the variation display means includes the special symbols. After performing the cycle variation a plurality of times as the variation display, the special symbol is stopped and displayed, and the performance control means performs the variation display of the performance symbol on the display means in response to the execution of the variable display of the special symbol. can be executed, and a customer waiting effect for displaying a specific image (customer waiting demo image) on the display means during the customer waiting state can be executed, and the variable effect is started during the execution of the customer waiting effect. In this case, the specific image can be faded out, and the display change in the cycle variation is performed a plurality of times before the specific image fades out. Therefore, it is possible to end the customer waiting demonstration performance in a natural flow while recognizing that the variable display of the special symbols has been started, and to improve the amusement of the game.

◆ As a ninth configuration for solving the above problems, there are main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and effect control means ( Effect control board 130), and the main control means, based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the acquisition condition (winning to the start opening) special Determination means for determining whether or not a game (jackpot game) is to be executed, and variable display means for performing variable display of special symbols according to the result of the determination, wherein the effect control means controls the special symbols. In response to the execution of the variable display of (1), the display means can perform the variable display of the performance pattern, and the customer waiting effect of displaying a specific image (customer waiting demo image) on the display means during the customer waiting state. can be executed, and when the variable effect is started during execution of the customer waiting effect, the specific image is faded out, and the effect pattern is displayed so as to be visible during the fade-out. ing. Therefore, the customer waiting demonstration effect can be ended in a natural flow, and the variable effect can be started without delay, thereby making it possible to improve the amusement of the game.

◆ As a tenth configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and effect control means ( Effect control board 130), and the main control means, based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the acquisition condition (winning to the start opening) special Determination means for determining whether or not a game (jackpot game) is to be executed, and variable display means for performing variable display of special symbols according to the result of the determination, wherein the effect control means controls the special symbols. In response to the execution of the variable display, it is possible to execute a variable performance of performing a variable display of performance symbols on the display means, and in response to the start of the variable performance, the notice performance (starting effect performance , mode change effect) can be executed, a customer waiting effect for displaying a specific image (customer waiting demo image) on the display means during the customer waiting state can be executed, and the change during the execution of the customer waiting effect When performance is started, the specific image is faded out, the performance pattern is displayed so as to be visible during the fade-out, and the performance pattern is restricted from being visually recognized after the performance pattern becomes visible. The advance notice effect is started. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that a specific advance notice performance has started due to the start of the variable performance while confirming the stop result of the previous variable performance, thereby improving the amusement of the game. It becomes possible.

In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are not executed at the same time (in parallel), and the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed. However, it may be a gaming machine in which the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are performed at the same time (in parallel), or the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be performed. The variable display of the special symbols may be executed in the winning order of the game balls to the first starting port 45 and the second starting port 47 .

In addition, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the small winning game is not executed because there is no small winning as a result of the big winning determination. Then, regardless of the set value, it is determined as a small hit with the same first probability (for example, 1/300). Even if it is a value, it may be determined as a small hit with the same second probability (for example, 1/7). In this case, a specific area is provided inside the first variable winning portion 49, and when the game ball that has won the first big winning opening 50 during the small winning game passes through the specific area, a big winning game is executed. +2 kinds of game machines may be used.

Also, in the case of a so-called 1 type + 2 type game machine, it is assumed to be shifted to the normal game state or the time saving game state after the jackpot game, and the jackpot game based on the winning to the first start port 45 (through the small winning game ) is executed, it shall be shifted to the normal game state and the time-saving game state at a ratio of 1: 1, and the jackpot game based on the winning to the second start port 47 (including the small winning game via) is executed, it is preferable to shift to the time-saving game state with a probability of 100%. In this case, when the transition to the time-saving game state is made after the jackpot game based on the winning to the first start port 45 is completed, the number of times of time-saving is set to one, and the jackpot game based on the winning to the second start port 47 is started. When the time-saving game state is entered after the end of the game, the number of times of time-saving may be set to 5 times and 10 times at a ratio of 1:1.

Also, in the case of a so-called 1 type + 2 type game machine, if it is determined to be a small hit in the look-ahead determination (preliminary determination) during the normal game state, the final display mode of the icon in the icon change effect is the big win game. The rainbow icon that confirms the execution is not determined, and if it is determined to be a small hit in the look-ahead determination (pre-determination) during the time-saving game state, the rainbow icon will be determined as the final display mode of the icon change effect. can be

Further, the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to a pachinko gaming machine, and when winning symbols are stopped and displayed on an active line by a game using medals (game media) (giving conditions are satisfied), a predetermined amount is reached. It can also be used for a reel-type game machine (so-called slot machine) capable of awarding a player with a prize medal (prize medal data). Furthermore, it can also be used for a Jankyu game machine and an arrange ball game machine.

In addition, the embodiments disclosed this time should be considered as examples in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the scope of the claims rather than the above description, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and range of equivalents of the scope of the claims.

1 Game machine 5 Game board 44 Normal figure gate 45 First starting port 47 Second starting port 50 First big winning port 56 Second big winning port 70 Main display device 71 Sub display device 110 Main control board 110a Main CPU
120 Payout control board 130 Effect control board 130a Sub CPU

Claims (1)

A gaming machine comprising main control means for controlling the progress of a game, and effect control means for controlling effects according to commands from the main control means,
The main control means is
determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player based on the determination information acquired when the acquisition condition is satisfied;
A variable display means for executing variable display of special symbols according to the result of the determination,
The variable display means is
Cycle variation is performed a plurality of times as a variable display of the special symbol, and then the special symbol is stopped and displayed,
The production control means is
It is possible to execute a variable performance of performing variable display of the performance symbols and variable display of the special symbols corresponding to the execution of the variable display of the special symbols ,
A production sound can be output during execution of the variable production,
When the stop condition is not satisfied at a predetermined timing when the performance symbol is temporarily stopped in the variable performance, the temporary stop period of the performance symbol, the fluctuation period of the special symbol, and the output period of the performance sound are extended,
When the effect sound is output to the end of the sound data during the extension of the temporary stop period of the effect symbol and the variation period of the special symbol , the effect sound is output even in a state where the variable display of the special symbol is not executed. the sound data is output from the beginning and the output period of the effect sound is extended;
When the cycle variation in the next special symbol variation display is started during the extension of the temporary stop period of the production symbol and the variation period of the special symbol,
The game machine is characterized in that the variable display of the special symbols is continued and the variable display of the next performance symbols is started from a predetermined position.

Images